23427130 tally-9-2-notes

TallyHelp

Tally Solutions FZ-LLCWeb site: www.tallysolutions.com

E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

©Tally Solutions FZ-LLC, 1988-2007. All rights reserved. Tally, POWER OF SIMPLICITY is registered trademark of Tally Solutions FZ-LLC. All other trademarks are

the property of their respective owners and are hereby recognised.

Using TallyHelp

TallyHelp file is structured in such a way that it provides easy navigation between topics and facilitates easysearch.

The comprehensive Online Help covers basic and advanced operations. It is context-sensitive and extracts helpon topics related to the current screen in Tally.

Use Alt + H from the keyboard or click the Help button to access the relevant topics in the Online Help.

Here are some details on how to use this help file effectively. It is suggested to go through this topic to utilize thehelp file effectively.

To handle the Left (navigation) pane

To handle tool bar buttons

To get to know some basics

UNREGISTERED VERSION OF CHM TO PDF CONVERTER PRO BY THETA-SOFTWARE


What's new in this release?

The following links contain information on new features or areas that have been updated in Tally.

New Features in Tally 9

New Features in Tally 8.1

New Features in Tally 9

Release 2.0

Release 1.31

Release 1.3

Release 1.21

Release 1.2

Release 1.11

Release 1.1

Release 1.0

Release 2.0

Tally 9 Release 2.0 unleashes the full power of the new engine built into it to give you superlative performance.The response time of the application can now be measured in seconds rather than minutes, even for high volumedata. This percolates down to a tenfold increase in performance in several operations. It will improve the userexperience with the application and will substantially increase productivity.

Enhancements in overall performance

Tally 9 Release 2.0 is incorporated with several advanced features which bring about an overall improvedperformance of the application. One of the most important advancements is the substantial increase in the speedof several operations like loading of company data, backup and restore, reports generation, etc., thus giving animproved and thrilling user experience.

Export to Excel

Export to Excel is a new feature that has been incorporated in this release of Tally 9. This feature enables the userto export any report generated by Tally into Excel. Consequently the user can generate graphical representationsof his data for better visual presentation. It will considerably speed up and ease the process of filing e-VAT in thefuture.

N o t e : Export to Excel is compatible with Microsoft Office’97 or higher.

LAN Support for Tally 9 Silver

A single company data can now be accessed simultaneously by more than one Tally 9 Silver (Single User)licenses.

Speed of Migration – reduction in memory usage, increase in speed

Another development is the improved performance in Data migration. The application architecture has beendesigned to reduce the memory usage during the migration process. This results in an increase in the speed of themigration process and subsequent reduction in time required for the migration.

Rewrite speed – improved function



The rewrite function for data correction has been further enhanced in this latest release of Tally.

POS Invoice

Modifications have been done to ensure the appropriate display of Multi Mode Payment details that appear at thebottom of the POS Invoice.

Printing Party Name and Address

Earlier, printing ledgers using the Multi Account Printing option in Tally with Normal Ledger selected as theStyle of Report, Format as Condensed, and with Start fresh page for each Account set to Yes in theReport Generation screen would print the Party’s Name only after the Party’s Address.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Multi Account Printing> Account Books> Ledger> Group pf Accounts> SelectSundry Debtors or Sundry Creditors

However, modifications have been made to print the Party’s name prior to the party’s Address.

F4: Change Items

Corrections have been made to enable selecting Cost Centres using the button F4: Change Items while at theCost Centre Vouchers screen.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Statements of Accounts> Cost Centres> Cost Centre Break-up>Select the Cost Centre and drill down to the Cost Centre Vouchers screen.

TDS

The option Allow Alteration of TDS Rates in F12: Configure when clicked at the voucher level has beenreplaced with Allow Alteration of TDS Rates for Lower Deduction.

Selecting Invoice in Excise Purchase Invoice

Earlier, on selection of an Excise Purchase Invoice from the List of Purchases that appears in the SupplierDetails sub screen during an excise sales transaction, Tally would not allow you to trace back to the sub screenand select an invoice from the list in case of a misjudgment on selection.

However, Tally 9 Release 2.0 is now made more flexible to accommodate such changes.

Excise Opening Stock

By default, the date that appears in the As on field in the Excise Opening Stock Creation screen is the Currentdate specified. Earlier this field could not be modified. However, you now can enter the date of your choice in theAs on field.

M: Manufacturer List

Tally now offers the flexibility to select the details of a Manufacturer or Importer by clicking the M: ManufacturerList button during an Excise Purchase transaction.

Toggling with the button allows you to select the Manufacturer or Importer from the List of Ledger Accountsor enter details manually while at the Manufacturer/ Importer Details section in the Party Details screen.

Printing Excise Sales Invoice

The title Name and Address of Supplier of Goods if he is a Manufacturer or Importer which appears in theexcise sales invoice when Print Trader Supplier Info is set to Yes in the Invoice Print Configuration screenhas been changed to Name and Address of the Manufacturer/Importer.

Printing State and PIN Code

With Printing State and PIN Code set to Yes in F12: Configure> Printing> General, you can now print theBuyer’s State and PIN Code in Sales invoice, Purchase invoice, Credit note and Printing through MultiAccount Printing, as entered at the time of Ledger creation.

Service Tax – Malaysia

Corrections have been made to ensure that the Service Tax gets calculated for during sales transactions.

Printing Excise Sales Invoice

Corrections have been made to ensure that Tally prints the titles for Excise Sales invoices as follows:

The original copy being marked as ORIGINAL FOR BUYER

The duplicate copy being marked as DUPLICATE FOR TRANSPORTER

The triplicate copy being marked as TRIPLICATE FOR ASSESSEE

The subsequent copies NOT FOR CENVAT PURPOSES

Modifications done now ensure that the excise duty amount gets printed in numbers in the Net Value ExciseAmt field on sales invoices printed while Follow Excise rules for Invoicing in F11: Features> Statutory &Taxation is set to Yes.

Nature of Purchase in Excise

Two new Nature of Purchase: Agent of Manufacturer and Purchase from Importer have been added inMaster creation.

Excise Invoice Printing

The option of Print Trader Import Declaration has been provided for in the Invoice Printing Configuration.

Under F12 - Voucher Configuration, the earlier label “Allow Alteration of TCS Rate” has been changed to"Allow Alteration of TCS Rate for Lower Collection".

The earlier label name has been changed from "PLA RG 23 Sl. No." to "Seller RG23D No." in Excise SalesInvoice (Manufacturing Section)

Additional Description for Ledgers

Additional description for ledgers has been provided for. This option can be activated in F-12 – InvoiceConfiguration screen.

TDS Report

Retrieval of TDS computation reports has been enhanced.

UDFs migration

Migrating data from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9 Release 1.3 would not capture values for Ledger Object UDFs taking 1and 2 as Index numbers for String Data type in TDL containing UDFs.



Appropriate measures have been taken to ensure that the values are captured accurately.

Printing Bill wise Details

Printing Bill wise details of ledgers using Multi Account Printing with Show Billwise Details also set to Yesand Start fresh page for each account set to No would not display bill wise details in the report.

The issue has been addressed.

[Go to Gateway of Tally> Multi Account Printing> Account Books> Ledger> Group pf Accounts> selecta Group]

Payroll

Exporting Pay Sheet

Earlier, exporting a Pay Sheet with a few empty columns in the ASCII format on to MS Excel and selectingComma as the Delimiter would not be considered.

The same has been addressed appropriately.

Date of Leaving for Employees

While entering the Date of Leaving for an employee in the Employee Alteration screen, Tally used to acceptdates prior to the Date of Joining, specified in the master.

This issue has been addressed.

Date for Despatch Document

Create a Delivery note skipping the Despatch Doc. No. field in the Party's Supplementary Details screen.Now pass a Sales invoice and track the Delivery note. A print out of the sales invoice would not display theDate against the Despatch Doc. No.

The issue has been addressed appropriately.

Tally Link Server Synchronization

Synchronization initiated with Tally Link Server through certain Internet Service Providers displays the messageOut of Memory and terminates the process immediately.

The issue has been resolved.

Memory Access Violation

Drilling down from the Statistic screen for a Group company to the vouchers gives MAV (Memory AccessViolation) error.

This issue has been resolved.

Stock Ageing Analysis

The Stock Ageing Analysis does not display the combined total for the Group company.

This problem has been appropriately addressed.

Physical Stock in FIFO method

Physical stock voucher entry is not affecting the value of the stock items, when using the FIFO valuation method

for stock item.

Necessary action has been taken to affect the stock value when passing a physical stock entry.

Bank reconciliation Statement Printing

The print option screen for printing the Bank Reconciliation Statement (BRS) displays Printing Ledger.

This issue has been resolved and the option will now be displayed as “Printing Bank Reconciliation”.

Rejection Outward note

Tally shows a Negative Stock warning when passing a Rejection Outward note, even when there is stock for thespecific item.

This has been rectified.

CST

CST Pending List screen does not show the break-up of the gross invoice value.

This problem has been rectified. Details of Gross amount are now being displayed in CST in the FormReceivables screen.

Multiple VAT Classification

When there is a Multiple VAT Classification like "Inter- State Sales" and "Inter - State Sales - Spl. Category Sales"used in an invoice, the amount of CST displayed is incorrect in the VAT Computation Report.

Appropriate steps have been taken and this issue has been resolved.

Cost Center budget report

When we set the budget for Cost Centers and try to view the Cost Center budget break up report, the values renot displayed correctly.

This issue has been resolved. The reports as per the Cost Center Budget are displayed correctly.

Location mismatch during re-write

If a Purchase Order/Sales Order is created with the option Any selected under Godown, and then a ReceiptNote/Delivery Note entry is passed linked to the PO, on re-writing the data, the PO passed with the abovegodown option, changes to Main Location.

This has been rectified.

Sales Order/Purchase Order status mismatch

On rewriting data, the Sales Order/Purchase Order outstanding report displays the Sales Order/Purchase Order aspending, even after they have been adjusted.

Appropriate steps have been taken to resolve this issue.

Purchase Order status mismatch

Already knocked off Purchase Order with the Receipt Note in Tally 7.2 is shown as “ Pending” after migrationto Tally 9.

This issue has been duly addressed and the problem has been resolved.



Retention of POS parameter

While creating a voucher type for POS invoicing, the option Print after saving Voucher does not retain theparameter No.

The parameter defined by the user is now retained.

POS entry in Edit mode

On opening a POS entry in the Alter mode, the credit Card number, Bank Name and Cheque Number were notdisplayed.

Necessary steps have been taken to resolve this issue.

Distorted Alignment

In the Alteration Mode of a POS Invoice, the alignment of the field name “Ledger” is distorted.

This issue has been resolved.

Negative stock warning

While using multiple batches of purchase for a single item, in a Sales Invoice, Tally displays a negativestock warning.

On passing a stock journal for an item with balance stock, Tally displays a message saying “NegativeStock”.

These issues have been addressed.

FBT Helper

When an expense amount is entered and then an FBT Payment is made using the FBT Helper, there is a differencebetween FBT Computation and the amount calculated by FBT Helper.

Necessary steps have been taken and this issue has been resolved.

TCS

TCS Party name does not change in the TCS details sub-screen when the party name is changed in the invoice.

This issue has been resolved. The party name will change in accordance with the name on the invoice.

Release 1.31

TDS

Earlier making an advance payment to a party through the single entry mode would not calculate the TDSamount. However, now the TDS amount appears appropriately.

Mismatch in Credit and Debit Balances

Receipt vouchers created in the double entry mode using foreign currency used to display a mismatch in Creditand Debit balances in the alteration mode. The mismatch in balances has been resolved.

Negative Stock Warning in Journal Voucher

Create a stock item with an opening balance of considerable units and pass a delivery note against it. Using aJournal Voucher to record a sales transaction tracking the delivery note would display a warning message ofnegative stock even though a considerable amount of stock was left over. The same has been addressedappropriately in Journal voucher.

Migrating € to Tally 9

Data migrated from Tally 7.2 used to display the Euro currency symbol €, as a box in Tally 9. However,

modifications done will successfully migrate € to Tally 9 now.

Booking FBT Expenses

Corrections have been made in the Ledgers of FBT Category report to display details of FBT expenses booked bymeans of a Memorandum voucher report.

Price lists and Stock Items with Negative or Zero Balance

Set Allow Invoicing and Use Multiple Price levels to Yes and Allow Sales Order Processing to No in F11:Features> Inventory Features. In such circumstances, the Price Rate in Sales invoices created using PriceLists for Stock items having a Negative or Zero Balance used to appear late or would not appear at all.

The error in displaying the Price Rate in such conditions has been resolved.

UDF Value left Blank

With Maintain Multiple Godowns in F11:Features> Inventory Features set to Yes, Sales transactions for astock item with UDF value at the Batch Allocation Level left Blank when viewed in the alteration mode,displayed the UDF value specified during the Purchase of the same item. The issue has been addressed.

Excise stock duty details after data rewrite

With Dealer Excise enabled in F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation, the Excise duty details of Excise StockItems available in hand, were getting deleted after a data rewrite. This issue has been fixed to retain the ExciseDuty values.

Migrating String UDF value specified under Voucher Object

Earlier, migrating data from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9 would not display the String UDF value specified underVoucher Object in Tally 9. However, modifications have been done to ensure successful migration of the same.

UDF Values specified under Company Object

Modifications have been done to ensure that the values of String and Date UDFs specified under CompanyObject appear in Tally 9 on migration from Tally 7.2.

Release 1.3

Performance in Networking Environment

In a networking environment, if the Server has Windows XP and Clients have Windows 98 as the operatingsystem, Tally performs efficiently with improved data stability.

The error Record Insertion Failure will not occur in Tally while working in a networking environment.

Day Book



Selecting Cost Centres in the option Alt+F12: Range from Day Book, lists the appropriate options.

Voucher Printing

Set the option Print after saving voucher to Yes in the Voucher Type Alteration screen, to print a Rejectionin/ Rejections Out voucher, after saving.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Type > Alter

Interest calculation in Forex

A Sales transaction created using Forex currency and Interest calculation, calculates the Outstanding ForexInterest accurately.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statement of Accounts > Interest Outstanding > Ledger >Customer

Ledger Account

Tally now prints the address of the Sundry Debtor / Creditor ledgers, while printing a ledger account.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Account Books > Ledger

Ratio Analysis

If the Nett Profit is lesser than the Return on Investment% or Return on Working Capital, Tally displaysthe values with a negative sign.

Maintain balances bill by bill

Altering a ledger created under Sundry Debtors or Sundry Creditors, by setting Maintain balances bill bybill to Yes affects only the selected ledger and not the Group.

Columnar Profit & Loss A/c

Go to Gateway of Tally> Profit & Loss A/c > C: New Column

Tally displays the Columnar Profit & Loss A/c report for any specified period and prints the report accurately.

Migration Tool

Licensed users may now migrate data to Tally 9, using the Tally Data Migration Tool on Tablet PCs and Desktopcomputers of higher processor speed.

Multi Account Printing

Go to Gateway of Tally> Multi Account Printing> Outstanding Statements> Ledger> Group ofAccounts> Select the Group

Set Start fresh page for each Account in the Printing Ledger Outstanding screen to No and print theoutstanding ledger accounts along with accurate On Account details.

Printing Invoice

Tally prints with proper line spacing on Pre-Printed stationery

Printing List of Accounts

While printing the List of Accounts, pressing Enter in the Report Generation screen will not take the cursor tothe Type of Masters field.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> List of Accounts> Alt+P

Actual – Billed Quantity

Tally captures correct Actual and Billed quantities in Delivery Notes with any reference number and withMaintain Multiple Godowns in F11: Features > F2: Inventory set to Yes.

Titling

While printing multiple vouchers using the Multi Voucher Printing option, use Alt+T: Titling and set Printpage numbers in the report to No, in order to stop the printing of page numbers on all pages.

Designation of Signing Authority

The Designation of Signing Authority appears in the print configuration screen and print preview, only ifConfirmation of A/cs is selected as the Style of Report.

Interest Parameters

Advanced Interest Parameters entered while creating a ledger appear accordingly at the time of vouchercreation.

Interest Calculation

Tally calculates interest rates appropriately for occasions where different rates have been specified for differentperiods.

Formal Receipt

While creating Receipt vouchers, Tally displays the name of the Branch/Division or Capital A/c Ledgers in thefield Name of Receipt, when Print Formal Receipt after saving is set to Yes in the voucher type

Cheque Printing

Tally captures the name of the Branch/Division or Capital Ledgers in the field Name on Cheque while creatingPayment vouchers.

Foreign Exchange

A Purchase entry made in foreign exchange with Use Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation in F12:Configure set to Yes, display appropriate values when viewed in the alteration mode.

Multi Column Cash/Bank

You can use the Multi Column Cash/Bank option in Multi Account Printing to print Multi ColumnCash/Bank with columns and get well-defined prints of the same.

Tracking Consignee

Tracking of Purchase or Sales Orders, created with different Buyer and Consignee names in Receipt andDelivery notes displays accurate Consignee Details.

Godowns

The address entered in the Godown creation screen appears legible.



Bank Reconciliation

The Bank Reconciliation statement displays appropriate entries as configured in F12: Configure.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Account Books> Cash/Bank Book> Cash Bank Summary> Drill downto the Ledger Vouchers screen and press F5: Reconcile.

Stock Journal

The value in the rate field of a Stock Journal (Transfer of Materials) appears appropriately.

Reference

You can now print the Reference number entered in the Stock Journal entry.

Purchase/ Sales Order

The list of Party or Customer ledgers is displayed appropriately, while creating a Purchase/ Sales orderrespectively.

Rejection In/ Out Vouchers

The Rejection Inward/ Outward vouchers display the customer details as entered in the Mailing Detailssection of the Customer ledger creation.

Inventory Report

The Godown – wise Inventory reports now displays accurate balance values whereas multiple Godowns aremaintained.

Price Level

Creating a Price Level, using Alt+C from the Price List screen will display the same in the Price Level fieldspontaneously.

Security Control

Tally provides access to the features/ options as specified in the Security Levels screen.

Cost Centre

Set the option Show Cost Centre Details also to Yes in the Multi Account Printing for Group of Accountsto print the Cost Centre details.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Multi Account Printing > Account Books > Ledger > Group of Accounts

Payroll

Configuring Payslip

Tally allows you to configure the Payslip to define the Height & Width.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statement of Payroll > Payslip>Alt+P and thenpress F12: Configure for the printing configuration

Authorised Signatory

You can now configure your Payslip to include the signature of an Authorised Signatory.

Pay Head

Once you select a Pay Head from the List of Pay Heads in the Salary Details Creation screen, the Pay Headand its alias will not be displayed in the selection list.

Excise for Dealer

Local Sales Tax Number

The Excise Sales Invoice prints the Local Sales Tax Number, entered in F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation, ifthe VAT feature is not enabled.

Secondary Education Cess on CVD

Tally now supports the calculation of Secondary Education Cess on CVD on Excise Stock Items.

The following new columns have been added to print the duty value in the sales section of Excise Sales Invoice

Rate of Sec Ed Cess on CVD

Sec Ed Cess on CVD Amount

The Sec Ed Cess Amount column in Purchase Section of Excise Sales Invoice will capture the duty value.

The Excise Purchase Bill Register and Excise Stock Register will capture the value in the Total CessColumn

Range and Division in Excise Sales Invoice

The Excise Sales Invoice captures the address of the Range and Division specified in F11: Features >Statutory & Taxation

Range and Division

The field Range/ Code and Division/ Code in Excise Sales Invoice has been renamed to Range andDivision respectively.


You can enter Narration while creating the Excise Opening Stock in Tally.

Excise Purchase Invoice

Tally allows you set different duty values for a single Excise Stock Item , which can be set to zero while creatingdifferent Types of Purchases.

Excise Sales Invoice

The Excise Sales invoice now prints the title as follows:

The original copy being marked as ORIGINAL FOR BUYER1.

The duplicate copy being marked as DUPLICATE FOR TRANSPORTER2.

3.



1.

2.

The triplicate copy being marked as TRIPLICATE FOR ASSESSEE3.

The subsequent copies NOT FOR CENVAT PURPOSES4.

While printing a single copy of Excise Sales Invoice, the title will not be printed.

Excise Stock Item

The Excise Stock Item alteration screen will now display the Tariff Classification below the field Excisedetails in the Tax information section, to identify the Excise Item.

Refreshing of Duty Value in alteration mode

While creating an Excise Purchase Invoice, if the Duty Value is changed, Tally retains and displays the samewhen viewed in the Alteration mode.

Duty names in Excise Invoice

The Excise Sales Invoice will capture the duty names of the Stock Item appropriately, as specified in theExcise Purchase creation (CVD name instead of BED).

TDS

Surcharge Value

Tally calculates accurate Surcharge Value on the total amount specified in the Party Payment Entry, if the fieldIgnore Surcharge Exemption Limit in the Party ledger is set to No.

TDS Ledgers

While creating a voucher without using TDS ledgers, in a TDS enabled company, Tally displays all the fieldsappropriately.

POS

POS Invoice

Set the option Use Additional Description(s) for Item Name to Yes in the POS Invoice Printingconfiguration to print Additional Item Description in a POS Invoice.

Cancelled POS Invoice

You can now preview a cancelled POS Invoice in the alteration mode.

Job Costing

Job Work Analysis

Use Alt+F1 to view the voucher details of the selected ledger in the Job/Project Monthly Summary report.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Statement of Accounts> Job Work Analysis> Job/Project MonthlySummary

Release 1.21

Minor Enhancements

Service Tax

Secondary Education Cess Effective Date

To comply with the Finance Act 2007, Tally provides the Additional Secondary and Higher Education Cess(SHEC) @ 1%, effective from May 11, 2007

N o t e : Secondary and Higher Education Cess @ 1% was effected in Stat version 53 from

April 1, 2007. You need to re-accept any voucher passed with SHEC (from 1.4.2007 to

10.5.2007) to update the SHEC calculation.

New Service Categories

The following new Service Categories have been provided:

1. Telecommunication service

2. Mining of mineral, oil or gas

3. Renting of immovable property service

4. Works contract Service

5. Development and supply of content

6. Asset management

7. Design Services

Tax Deducted at Source (TDS)

Calculation of TDS Surcharge

Surcharge is calculated appropriately in the alteration mode.

Form 16A

Form 16A in TDS has been revised.

Change in TDS Tax Rate

Effective April 1, 2007, the TDS Tax rate for Rent of land, building or furniture for deductee typeIndividual/HUF - Resident has changed to 15% and for all other deductee types the tax rate has beenrevised to 20%, effective from June 1, 2007.

1.

Effective June 1, 2007, the TDS Tax rates for deductee type Resident have changed with regard to thefollowing Nature of Payments.

2.

Commission or Brokerage to 10%



Fees for professional or technical services to 10%

New TDS Nature of payment

The following new TDS Nature of payments have been provided:

Rent of Plant, Machinery or Equipment at 10%, effective from June 1, 2007.

Any Other Interest on Securities as per sec.193 for all Resident deductee types at 20%, effective fromApril 1, 2004.

TDS Nature of Payment

Rent has been renamed to Rent of Land, Building or Furniture.

Tax Collected at Source (TCS)

Calculation of TCS Surcharge

Surcharge is calculated appropriately in the alteration mode.

Form 27D

Form 27D in TCS has been revised.

Display of State Name

Tally now displays Uttaranchal as Uttarakhand in accordance with its recent renaming. Tally also displaysChhattisgarh appropriately. To effect these changes in Tally, go to Gateway of Tally > Company Info. ( Alt +F3) > Alter. Select the appropriate state from the List of States and accept the Company Alteration screen tosave the changes.

Tracking Delivery and Receipt Notes in a Journal Voucher

Enable Use Tracking Numbers (Delivery/Receipt Notes) in F11: Features > Inventory Features tofacilitate easy track of Delivery and Receipt Notes in a Journal Voucher.

Release 1.2

New Features


Tally allows you to record the Opening Stock Balance of Excise Stock Items. Refer to Excise for Dealers formore details on Creating an Excise Opening Stock.

Calculation of Secondary Education Cess

With effect from 1st April, 2007, Secondary Education Cess displays accurate values when selected with otherTypes of Duties such as TDS, TCS, FBT and Service Tax.

Calculation of CVD (On Import)

Tally calculates CVD (On Import) on (Assessable Value + BED) appropriately in accordance with legalrequirements.

Start of new Financial Year

Tally displays a warning Change in Date may cause loss of Data if the financial year is altered in theCompany Alteration screen.

VAT Payment Vouchers – For India Only

You can record details such as Payment period, Challan No. and so on, for each transaction while creating theVAT Payment vouchers.

VAT Declaration in Excise Sales Invoice

Tally displays a VAT Declaration in the Print Preview of an Excise Sales Invoice that has utilized VAT ledgers.

Education Cess on CVD in Excise Sales Invoice

Tally now calculates Education Cess on CVD in an Excise Invoice.

Duty Heads for Customs and Excise

Select the appropriate Duty Head for Excise from the Type of Duty/Tax list while creating Ledgers under Duties &Taxes.

Major Enhancements

Speed of Data Transfer

Tally now facilitates faster report generation.

Pending Purchase Order

While entering a Purchase Voucher against a Purchase Order with different delivery schedules, the ItemAllocations sub screen displays only the Pending Purchase Order quantities.

List of Delivery Note Vouchers

Press F12: Value and enter the appropriate Range of Information in Report to view vouchers in the requiredformat at the List of Delivery Note Vouchers report which is available in Statistics in Statement ofAccounts.

Excise for Dealers

Self Importer details in Excise

Tally now displays the Self Importer details in the Excise Sales Invoice.

Printout of an Excise Sales Invoice

Tally allows you to print the Excise Sales Invoice with three stock items and three different tax ledgers on asingle page.



Name and Address of Self Importer

The print preview of the Excise Stock Register and Purchase Bill Register report includes the Name andAddress of the Self Importer.

POS

Editing a Cancelled POS Invoice

You can edit a cancelled Single Pymt/Multi Mode Pymt POS Invoice and re-enter the Invoice.

POS Invoice Printing

Set the option Print Batch Details to Yes in the POS Invoice Printing Configuration to print batch details inthe POS Invoice.

Service Tax

Sales Voucher Class

You can use Voucher classes to create Sales invoices for Service Tax.

Switching the Service Tax Invoice to Voucher Mode

You can now toggle from Invoice mode to Voucher mode using the Ctrl+V keys in the Service tax voucher.

Payroll

Exporting Pay Heads

Tally now offers you the flexibility to export Pay Heads from List of Accounts report. Select Alt+E (Export) tobring up the Exporting List of Ledgers screen. Select Pay Heads from the Type of Masters list.

Tax Deducted at Source

Amount in Formal Receipt

The printout of a Formal Receipt Voucher with TDS Receivable deducted displays the accurate total amount.

Minor Enhancements

VAT Registration Number in U.K. VAT Analysis Report

The U.K. VAT Analysis report displays the VAT Registration number for all the Purchase and Sales entries.

Cost Centre Allocation in Payment/Receipt Voucher

The Cost Centre allocation sub screen in Payment/Receipt vouchers appears appropriately.

Inventory Vouchers

Use Alt + A from the Stock Vouchers screen of the Stock Item Monthly Summary for faster access to theInventory/Accounting Voucher creation screen.

Stock Journal

Details of a Stock Journal Voucher display appropriately after Printing.

Forex Transactions in Job Costing

Set Show Forex Transactions only in F12: Configure to Yes to display the Forex transactions in the JobWorkVouchers report.

Interest Calculation using Multicurrency after Importing

The Forex Rates appear accurately at the Voucher entry level, after import of data that contain InterestCalculation.

Foreign Exchange values in Ledger Vouchers report

The ledger voucher report for Foreign Exchange transactions displays accurate Foreign Currency values forspecified periods.

Closing Balance in Stock Summary

The Stock Summary report displays the appropriate Stock Item Rate and Value for Items sold at a discount.

Payment Voucher

A single Payment voucher inclusive of a discount created for multiple ledgers in the double entry mode usingTo/By during entry and later altered to Cr/Dr, displays accurate values.

Display of Multiple Ledgers and Groups

The Name of Ledger and Name of Group are shown appropriately at the Multi Ledger and Multi Groupdisplay screen.

Multi Column Cash/Bank Book

Printing a Multi Column Cash/Bank Book from Accounts Book at Multi Account Printing shows accurateOpening Balances and Total values.

Forex Gain/Loss display after Splitting data

Forex Gain/Loss adjusted previously does not reflect in the Balance Sheet following the split of Company Data.

Balance Sheet display after Splitting data

The Balance Sheet displays accurately following the split of Company Data.

Multi Account Printing of Inventory Books

Select All Items at Multi Account Printing and set Start Fresh Page for each Account is to No to display theClosing Value in the Item register and the Quantity at Physical Stock Entry.

Cost Centre Allocation

Set Show Cost Centre Details in F12: Configure to No while selecting Cash or Bank Accounts during theentry of a Payment or Receipt voucher in the double entry mode to prevent the appearance of the Cost CentreAllocation screen.



Allocating Cost Centres

Set Pre-Allocate Bills for Payment/Receipt to Yes in F12: Configure during the entry of a Payment orReceipt voucher in the double entry mode to facilitate the allocation of Cost Centres to ledgers.

Multi Voucher Printing

You can use the Multi Voucher Printing option to print vouchers/invoices with details of Party Name, Item andvalues.

Columnar Register Alteration

Drill down to the Voucher Register from the Sales Register, click F5: Columnar and select All Items(automatic columns) at Type of Column to view complete details of all the items at the Voucher Register.

Purchase Voucher Class

Set Override Using Item Default to Yes during the creation of a Purchase Voucher Class and create a stockitem with the option Set/Modify Default Ledgers for Invoicing to Yes and enter appropriate values forQuantity and Rate. These values will display appropriately during Purchase Voucher entry as well as in thealteration mode.

Stock Summary report with Show Profit

Set Can Quantities of Items be Added to Yes when creating a Stock Item under Stock Groups to displayappropriate values for transactions using the above mentioned Stock items in the Stock Summary report.

Tax Collected at Source

Printing of TCS Invoice

Set Print in Simple Format and Print TCS Details to Yes in F12: Invoice Printing Configuration to displaythe break up details of Income Tax, Surcharge and Cess in the TCS Invoice.

TCS Challan

The breakup of TCS payment details is captured in the TCS Challan.

Gross Amount

When you enable TCS and VAT for a company, the TCS Details sub screen in Sales Accounting voucher displaysthe Gross Amount inclusive of VAT.

VAT – For India

Voucher Number in VAT Classification Vouchers Report

When you drill down from the VAT Computation report, the VAT Classification Voucher screen displaysVoucher Reference Numbers for all Purchase and Sales vouchers.

Voucher Date in VAT Classification Vouchers Report

The Voucher date in a VAT Classification Vouchers report appears in the numeric date format (e.g. 1-4-2007).

VAT – For Philippines

Invoice Printing Configuration for Philippines

Set the option Print VAT Analysis of Items at the F12: Print Configuration screen to Yes/ No while printinginvoices for Philippines.

Excise for Dealers

Excise Sales Invoice

The Excise Sales Invoice prints the appropriate declaration in the Declaration field.

VAT/Excise Details in Dealer Excise

The Supplementary Details sub form displays VAT/Excise Details appropriately at Excise Sales Invoice creation.

POS

POS Invoice

The POS Invoice displays the appropriate details both in Single and Multi Payment modes.

Service Tax

Printing Service Tax Enabled Sales and Purchase Voucher Types

Set Print after saving Voucher? to Yes to print a Service Tax enabled Sales and Purchase Voucher Type.

Fringe Benefit Tax

FBT Computation Report

The FBT Computation report displays accurate tax values.

Central Sales Tax

Display of Debit Note in Stock Vouchers Report

The Stock Vouchers Report at Stock Summary displays accurate Closing Stock values as well as correct Itemrates and CST Values in the Outward Column for a Debit Note passed in As Invoice/As Voucher mode.

Deactivation of Form D

With effect from 1st April, 2007, Form D will no longer be tracked for CST in Tally to conform to Governmentregulations.

CST with/without C form

The general rate of CST on all goods with the C form has now been set at 3%. The rate of CST on all goodswithout the C form has been modified to the Local VAT or Sales Tax rate.

Payroll



Payslip Title

A Payslip printed for a defined period using the Multi Payslip Printing feature at Multi Account Printingdisplays the title Payslip for period ----- to -----.

Release 1.11

Major Enhancements

Secondary Educational Cess in Excise for Dealers

The budget for 2007 – 2008 has introduced a Secondary Educational Cess at the rate of 1% of the aggregateduties of custom and excise from March 1, 2007. To accommodate the same in Tally Excise for Dealers, we haveincorporated a new type of duty Secondary Educational Cess.

Incase of excise duties, Secondary Education Cess on excisable goods will be chargeable on the aggregateduties of excise (Excluding Education cess) levied on such goods. The method of calculation of the SecondaryEducation Cess will be the same as that of Education Cess, which was introduced in the 2004 budget.

The Cess breakup will be displayed in the Dealer Excise Sales Invoice .

Rewrite of Existing Data

Tally 9 Release 1.11 prompts you to rewrite the existing Tally 9 data automatically.

Minor Enhancements

Multi-User Environment in Educational Mode

Tally 9 Release 1.11 works as a multi-user even in the Educational Mode.

Printing Declaration

While printing a Sales invoice, the option to set Print Declaration? to Yes or No appears in F12: InvoicePrinting Configuration for all companies regardless of their Statutory Compliance for settings.

Declaration in Sales Invoice for Accounts Only Company

Set Print Declaration? to Yes or No in F12: Invoice Printing Configuration. The Declaration entered in theSales Voucher Type Alteration of an Accounts Only Company will display in the Sales Invoice.

Release 1.1

Major Enhancements

New Attributes in Tally.ini

Tally introduces three new attributes to the Tally.ini file.

OptimizeNetwork

LoadBuffering

FlushFile

Download Stat.900 Version 51

Download the new Stat.900 Version 51 from www.tallysolutions.com to use West Bengal and ChattisgarhVAT Returns and TDS Enhancements in Tally 9 Release 1.1

FIFO Perpetual

Tally introduces a new method of inventory valuation FIFO Perpetual, which is similar to LIFO Perpetual. TheNormal FIFO treats the opening balance of the financial year as the terminating rate to apply for residual stock.FIFO Perpetual takes all existing past data. Both LIFO and FIFO Perpetual are capable of changing the valuationwhen the company is split unlike their ‘Annual’ versions, which are consistent.

Abatement in Service Tax

Tally now offers you the flexibility of entering the desired percentage of abatement in service tax.

Sales Invoice Printing

You can now print any number of sales invoices, with the appropriate print title.

Option to Print Invoices as Excise or VAT Invoice

Tally now offers you the option Print as Commercial Invoice at the Print Configuration screen. Set it to Yes/Noto print an Invoice either in the Commercial (VAT) or Excise invoice format.

Performance and Data Migration in Tally 9

Tally 9 comes with enhanced performance and improved stability over the previous versions. The data migrationtool has also been enhanced resulting in more accurate and speedier migration of data.

Minor Enhancements

Show Godown-wise Details

Use the option Show Godown-wise Details in Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Voucher Entry toobtain details of stocks in godowns during Voucher entry.

Display of Date and Buyer Name in Sales Sub-form

Set the option Allow separate Buyer and Consignee names to Yes in F12: Configure > Configure Invoice/ Orders Entry. On entering the order number manually in the supplementary sub form of the sales voucher, thedate and the name of the buyer appears automatically.

Budget

A Budget for an expenses ledger for which no transaction has been passed will display exact ledger wise valuesboth in the Profit and Loss account and the Trial Balance.

Calculation of Cess in an Excise Purchase entry

Tally now calculates excise duty on the Assessable Value (Total purchases less Discount) as entered. Calculation of



Cess is based on the excise duty payable.

For eg: Total Purchases = Rs.10000

Discount = Rs. 2000

Assessable Value= Rs. 8000

Excise duty = Rs. 1280

Cess = Rs. 26

Excise Duty:16% of Assessable Value = Rs. 1280

Cess: 2% of Excise duty = Rs. 26

Contact details in Outstanding Statement

The printout from Multi Account Printing of an Outstanding statement for a group (such as Sundry Debtors)will display the contact details for each debtor from whom bill amounts are pending.

Total Invoice Value in UK VAT

The Total Invoice amount of a sales voucher passed in the Invoice mode displays in the column Total InvoiceValue of the UK VAT Analysis Output Details Report.

Tax Invoice for Indonesia

Set Enable VAT in F11: Company Features > Statutory & Taxation to Yes to display the field Is TaxInvoice? in a Sales Voucher Type Creation screen.

Bill-wise Details for Outstandings in Multi-Currency Transaction

Tally displays accurate bill-wise details in the Ledger Outstandings Report for a ledger that has an openingbalance in a currency other than the Base Currency.

VAT Classification – Date Range

A VAT Classification that is applicable for a month, for example, from 1.4.07 to 30.4.07, does not appear forselection during master or voucher entry before 1.4.07 or after 30.4.07

Change in Name

The field Appears in Payslip ? in the Pay Head Creation screen of Payroll is now changed to Affect NetSalary ?

Display of Attendance Vouchers instead of Payroll Vouchers at the Gateway of Tally

The Gateway of Tally displays either Attendance Vouchers or Payroll Vouchers depending on the level ofsecurity assigned in favour of the user at Alt+F3: Company Info. > Types of Security .

Address Details in Cancelled Voucher

A cancelled sales voucher will still display the customer’s address details in the Buyer’s Details field of thesupplementary sub-form.

Payroll Reports in Different Languages

Payroll Reports display PayHead, Attendance Type and the Primary Cost Category information, in thelanguage of your preference.

The Paysheet report can also be configured to display in the chosen language with correct total values.

Using Alt+C in Sales Voucher for an Accounts Only company

If you create a Sales Voucher Class in an Accounts Only type of Company and if you select the voucher classwhile passing a Sales entry, you can navigate to the Ledger Creation (secondary) screen and create a Ledger bypressing Alt+C, from the Particulars field.

Display of Alternative Units

If you pass a Sales entry using a Stock item, which has an Alternative Unit specified, the appropriate value andunit gets displayed in the Rate field for the next sales voucher entered.

Unadjusted Forex Gain/Loss in Balance Sheet

Following a change in the Exchange Rate, the Balance Sheet displays the appropriate Unadjusted ForexGain/Loss amount.

Position Index

If you have created multiple voucher types under a Voucher Type and if you try to alter any of them, the VoucherType Alteration screen will display accurate Position Index value.

Quantity Utilized in Excise Sales Invoice

While creating an Excise Sales invoice after the Quantity Utilized in the Supplier Details For sub screen isspecified, the cursor moves to the Rate field in the main screen.

Computation of Payhead with On Production Calculation Type

A Payhead that uses the Calculation Type On Production shows exact values for an employee who joins work ona date later than the first of the month when:

Attendance is filled using the Auto-fill option

Payroll voucher is passed for a period or

Payroll voucher is passed for a month

TDS Challan Bifurcations

The bifurcations of a TDS payment entry in the TDS challan agrees with its total.

Printing Daily Breakup

When you drill down from the Daily Breakup of Ledger , the Printout of a ledger voucher for a particular day willshow correct opening and closing balances.

Opening Balances in the Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet

The Balance Sheet displays accurately the closing balance of the previous year as the current years openingbalance.



Display of Additional Description for Ledgers and Items After Migration

Additional descriptions configured for Ledger and Item names during Ledger entry display accurately along withtheir respective values after migration from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9.

Stock Valuation Calculation

Data migrated from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9 that contains entries passed for Stock transfer from one godown toanother utilizing FIFO or Average Cost as the Costing Method will show accurate quantities when you drilldown from the Stock Summary Report to the Stock Voucher.

Job Costing Option While Creating the Cost Centre

The option Use for Job Costing ? can be set to Yes/No in the Secondary Cost Centre creation screen.

Form 16 for a TDS Ledger

You can generate Form 16A for a TDS Ledger even when it has been reconciled without specifying the BankName.

Additional Cost on a Stock Item

Additional cost on a stock item is taken into consideration for Stock Item Inwards as well as for its Closing Value.

Migration of TCP Files

UDF values, values set at each line level of the bill allocations sub form and Receivables display accurately aftermigration of a .tcp file from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9.

Migration of Data

Migration of Data is successful on a computer having Internet Explorer 7.

Data is successfully migrated in the following cases

Data Migration into another machine

Statutory Master Files migration

Creating a new company

Synchronization

Synchronization of data takes place successfully without duplication in Windows – 98 and Windows- MEOperating Systems.

Stock Summary Details

View accurate and detailed Stock Summary particulars of two companies using the New Column button.

Display of Stock Journal Values After UDF Migration

Default UDF values used in a Stock Journal display accurately after migration from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9.

Movement Analysis of Inventory

An Item Movement Analysis Report accurately displays Values for a stock item for the period selected.

Items in Stock Ageing Analysis

In the Stock Ageing Analysis screen, if Primary is selected at the Items Under field, the Values in the TotalQuantity and bifurcated quantity columns are appropriate.

Quantity in Stock Ageing Analysis (<90 days)

In the Stock Ageing Analysis screen, the Quantity field in the (< 90 days) column displays the accuratevalues.

Column Titles in Columnar Sales Register

Tally displays column titles in the Columnar Sales Register screen in the language of your choice.

Multi Form 27D Printing

Form 27 D can be printed for a TCS ledger using Multi-Account Printing for a specified period.

Reorder Status

The Re-order level column in the Inventory Reorder Status screen displays details of actual consumption.

Column Detail in Monthly Summary Report

You can press Alt+N (Auto Column) and select any Column Detail from the list at any monthly summaryreport screen in Tally.

Tracking Delivery Notes

If you create a Delivery Note with Tracking Numbers enabled, and later enter a Rejection In, Tally will displayonly the delivery note raised against the particular customer in the List of Tracking Numbers.

Migrating Marks to Tally 9

If you have specified Marks as Exporter options in Sales or Purchase vouchers in Tally 7.2, you can migrate thesame to Tally 9.

Name on Receipt

If you alter the name of a Sundry Debtor for which you have created a Receipt in the single entry mode, then thename specified in the Name on Receipt at the time of the voucher creation will be retained in the Name onReceipt field and can be altered if required when the receipt is viewed in the alteration mode.

Printing Sales voucher

If you have passed a sales entry using a Sales Voucher class where set Print after saving Voucher to Yes andview the print preview of the same voucher in the alteration mode, the VAT% amount will appear in the invoice.

Decompiling TCP

You can decompile the TCP, migrated from Tally 7.2, using the Tally Developer 2.7.

Viewing Columnar Register in a Windows XP and 98 Environment

In a Client-Server environment, if the Server and one Client have Windows XP as the operating system and



another Client has Windows 98, the Columnar Register can be viewed at ease.

Group Summary

You can specify a Period and view the Group Summary details.

Invoice Numbering

If you have enabled the Print after saving Voucher option in the Purchase Voucher Types, the Invoicenumbering will appear appropriately on the Print preview for those Purchase entries.

Bill Wise Reference

If you pass a Purchase Voucher with Bill-wise Details, while Enter Purchases in Invoice Format is set to Yes inF11: Features, and later press the Page Up key, the appropriate Bill Reference and amounts are displayed.

Release 1.0

Tally 9 – The World’s Most Powerful Concurrent Multi-lingual Integrated Business Accounting Softwareis now enhanced with major new capabilities like Payroll, POS Invoicing, Service Tax for Malaysia, Sales Tax forMalaysia and VAT for Indonesia besides numerous minor functional improvements in the product.

New Features

Payroll

POS Invoicing

Multilingual Support

Statutory and Taxation

Payroll

It has been integrated with accounts, in order to simplify Payroll processing. Payroll can be configured to suit therequirements of various types of organization.

You can now configure, align and automate simple to complex payroll processes. You can print pay slips,maintain salary/wages and attendance/ leave/ overtime registers, and generate Gratuity and Expatreports. You can also configure Payroll Data with cost centre reports for business analysis.

The enhanced Payroll in Tally 9 is now simple and allows you to generate a Payslip four easy steps.

POS Invoicing

POS Invoicing in Tally is equipped with ease of use and advanced capability to simplify your retail operations. Itefficiently automates the ‘check-out’ process, and allows you to create invoices and collect payments fromcustomers, in a matter of moments.


Tally 9 now provides the language interface support in Bahasa Melayu and Bahasa Indonesia.

Statutory Compliance and Taxation

Tally 9 now provides you with compliance of VAT for different states in India. It also provides you Service Tax forMalaysia, Sales Tax for Malaysia and VAT for Indonesia.

Minor Enhancements in Tally 9

Display of TDS Bifurcations

The TDS bifurcations are displayed when you book expenses for amounts in crores.

Display of Bank Reconciliation Date in Form 16A

Form 16A displays the bank reconciliation date.

Gridlines in Printed Price List

Tally 9 prints the price list with grid lines. When printed, all the pages of the price list appear with grid lines.

Cost Centres with Scenario

Scenarios can be viewed in the Cost Centre Break-Up Report.

For example, pass a Reversing Journal for a Cost Centre. Create a scenario and include the Reversing Journal.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statement of Accounts > Cost Centres > Cost Centre Break-up

Select the cost centre from the list and press Alt + C (New Column) . Select the Type of Value (Scenario), andset Show variance to Yes, to view details of its variance.

Stock Item with Different Rates in Invoice

When a stock item is repeated in an order with different rates, values and additional descriptions, the invoicedisplays the stock item individually, in separate lines.

Negative Quantity Warning

During invoice entry, the negative quantity warning is provided, not just on the total closing quantity of an item,but also on the quantity of a selected batch/ godown/ location of that particular item.

Exclusion of Groups for Payment and Receipt Vouchers

While creating a Class for Payment/ Receipt Vouchers, you can exclude Groups under the section, ‘Exclude theseGroups,’ to prevent them from appearing during Voucher Entry.

Sundry Debtors and Sundry Creditors are not included in the ‘Exclude’ list.

Report Title in Multi Account Printing

To display the Group Name as a report title when using the Multi Account Printing option,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Multi Account printing > Account Books > Ledger > Group of Accounts

Select the required Group.

Display of Credit Days

While passing a Purchase entry in Voucher mode, the number of credit days specified in ‘Due Date’ displays in



the Voucher under Credit Days.

Altering Single Groups in Multi Group Alteration Mode

You can alter a Single Group in Multi Group alteration mode.

Altering a Forex Purchase Transaction

When altering a Purchase invoice of a Forex transaction with Use Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation setto Yes in F12: Configure, the Item Allocation sub-screen retains the currency selected.

Display of Surcharge in Credit Note

The surcharge paid on TCS is displayed in the Credit Note.

Period-wise VAT Forms

Enhanced memory makes it possible to open VAT Forms for any period, including the fourth quarter.

Order of Ledgers in Purchase Invoice

Set Use Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation and Accept Supplementary Details to Yes in F12: Configure, toretain the order of additional ledgers entered in a Purchase Invoice even when you are in the alteration mode.

Invoice against Sales Orders with Additional Ledgers

You can now enter an invoice, with Use Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation set to Yes in F12: Configure,against the sales order with additional ledgers.

Purchase Vouchers

All Purchase Vouchers with/ without VAT selected, or Purchase Voucher types, with Print after Saving Voucher setto Yes, are error-free after they are saved.

Staggered Delivery

In Tally 9, an order containing different due dates can be tracked, using a single delivery note.

Interest on Loans to Sundry Debtors/Creditors

Interest received on loans given to Sundry Debtors/ Creditors is accounted with a Debit Note/ Credit Note using aVoucher Class. The Interest Receivable Report displays only the pending interest receivable and not that for whicha Debit Note/ Credit Note has been raised.

Period in TR-6 Challan

Tally 9 gives you the option of specifying the period for Service Tax payable, which is captured in the TR-6Challan.

Setting Off Excise Duty Credit Against Service Tax Payable

Tally 9 allows you to set off Excise Duty Credit against Service Tax Payable. This excise duty credit can be availedfor inputs as well as capital goods.

Display of Date of Deposit/ Payment in Form 16A

After TDS Reconciliation in Tally 9, the date of Deposit/ Payment is appropriately displayed in the TDS Form 16A.

Inclusion of New ST3 Form

Tally 9 includes the new ST3 Form of Service Tax.

TCS Surcharge Rounding Off

The TCS Surcharge Rounding Off is accurately displayed in Tally 9.

Printing Cheques in Foreign Currency

This is a significant enhancement. Tally 9 allows you to print a cheque in a foreign currency, Go to F12:Configuration > Printing > Payment Voucher

Set Print Foreign Currency Symbol to Yes.

Performance Enhancements

Import of Statutory Masters

The speed at which Statutory Masters can be imported has been greatly enhanced.

Display of VAT Computation Report

The VAT Computation Report now displays at a greatly enhanced speed.

Display of VAT Return Report

The VAT Return Report now displays at a greatly enhanced speed.

Export of E-TDS Report

The E-TDS Report can be exported at a greatly enhanced speed.

Important tasks to be performed by existing customers

Statutory Compliance For

Users, who have upgraded from Tally 8.1 to Tally 9, have to select a country from the List of Countries at the Statutory compliance For field, to enable the statutory features of the required country in Tally 9.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Cmp Info (Alt + F3) > Alter

Using TCPs Migrated to Tally 8.1 in Tally 9

Tally 9 will rewrite the format of the TCPs migrated from Tally 7.2 to Tally 8.1 and creates a backup file with theextension .BAK

For example, if you migrate the Emp.tcp file to Tally 8.1, it will appear as Emp9.tcp. When the same .tcp file isloaded on Tally 9, the backup file created will appear as Emp9.BAK

N o t e : You need to rename the . B A K file to . t c p, if you wish to use the migrated . t c p

files in Tally 8.1.

Budgets in Tally 9



Budgets created for different periods in Tally 8.1 are combined in the First budget period itself, after migration ofTally 8.1 data to Tally 9. Hence, you are advised to manually recreate the budget in Tally 9 after migration, toavoid any possible loss of data.

New Features in Tally 8.1

Release 1.0

Release 1.1

Release 1.0

Tally 8.1 - A Multilingual Business Accounting & Inventory Management Software provides support forFringe Benefit Tax computation and VAT Composition returns generation in addition to its languagecapabilities.

New Features


Fringe Benefit Tax

VAT Composition Returns

Excise for Dealers


Tally 8.1 is so technologically advanced that it can operate in all Indian languages concurrently! That means, youmaintain accounts in any Indian language view it in another and print it in yet another language of your choice….at the same time! With Tally 8.1 capture multiple language-specific aliases for all Masters and print Reports,Vouchers and Invoices in the language of your choice. What’s more, Tally 8.1 supports transliteration of data forIndic family of languages.

Fringe Benefit Tax

FBT (Fringe Benefit Tax) is a one time, easy to enable configuration. Tally provides the complete tracking ofexpenses covered under FBT. It computes FBT based on the eligibility criterion and generates FBT Challan andreturns.

VAT Composition Returns

VAT Composition Returns provides fast and error-free voucher entry with complete tracking of each transaction.The Composition Rate of VAT is automatically recognised based on the turnover. It prints VAT CompositionReturns for VAT enabled states. The tax payable is calculated automatically and displays in the Return Form.

Excise for Dealers

Excise for Dealers provides complete tracking of duty credit availed and passed on. It supports printing of exciseinvoice and generates the required statutory reports.



Enhanced functionalities and features in Tally 8.1

Tally 8.1 is performance driven. Its enhanced features include:

Language directory

Ability to restore Tally 7.2 data within minutes

Easy import and export of data

User interface colours that are even more pleasing to the eye

Speed of operation with extensive reduction of the Stat.900 file size

Choice of multilingual options

Multi-language printing options

Ability to copy text from Tally to windows and vice versa

Miscellaneous features

Language Directory

Language files (.dct) reside in the Language Directory . Specify this path at the time of installation or in theTally.ini file.

To change the Language directory path in the Tally.ini

Open Tally.ini file from the Tally installed folder.

Enter the path where the language files are present.

Save and close the file.

Restore Process of 7.2 Data

Tally 8.1 does not recognise Tally 7.2 data backup files. You can restore Tally 7.2 data by clicking the

tally72migration icon in the Tally 8.1 folder. Specify the destination and source files in Select Companies toRestore. The Migrate Data option completes the process. The 4 digit number 7.2 number is prefixed by 0, makingit a 5 digit 8.1-compatible number.

Refer to Restore 7.2 backup in Tally Data Migration tool section for more details.

Import of Masters and Vouchers

Tally now supports only the XML format to import Masters and Vouchers.

Export

If you select Multilingual from the language list during export, then Tally allows you to Export in three formats -ASCII (Comma-delimited), HTML (Web-publishing) and XML (Data-interchange) .

If you select English from the language list, then Tally allows you to Export in two formats - ASCII (Comma-delimited) and XML (Data-interchange) .

N o t e : By default, Tally does not support SDF format. However, if you wish to use the

SDF format, you can download the S D F E x p o r t I m p o r t . T C P utility from the Tally website.

Stat.900

Tally 8.1 has now been enhanced with features that speed up your operations.

The Stat.900 file size has now reduced extensively. This improves the performing speed while creating orimporting a company.

Colours

The user interface has now changed to more appealing colours aimed at enhancing your use of Tally.

By default, Tally 8.1 screens display in a new colour as the colour quality is set to Highest (32 bit). However, toretain the usual display of Tally:

Go to Desktop > Display properties> Settings > Set the Color quality to Medium (16 bit) > RestartTally

Tally’s Phonetic Keyboards

Tally’s Phonetic keyboard is useful for those who speak the language but do not know how to type it using theoperating system keyboard. It is user friendly with the same layout as that of the English characters. You can spellthe term based on its sound and the data is transliterated in the language selected.

Print language

You can print documents and reports in the language of your choice in Tally. For instance, while printing thefollowing voucher, select Alt+ L to bring up the Print Language Configuration prompt.



Select the language of your choice. The printed document displays as shown.

Major Changes and Enhancements

There may be minor variation in reports during migration of data from Tally 7.2 to Tally 8.1 due to the changeslisted below:



LIFO and FIFO valuation method

Sales and Purchase vouchers passed on a single day now display in the Stock vouchers report in the order of theirentry thus ensuring effective functioning of LIFO and FIFO Stock valuation methods.

For example, In Tally 7.2, A purchase invoice followed by a sales invoice and then again a purchase invoice willdisplay in the stock vouchers report with all the sales entries listed first followed by all the purchase entries.

Tally 8.1, however, displays the vouchers in the order of their entry –Purchase – Sales – Purchase.

Std Cost and Std Price Valuation method

If you have not set Set Standard Rates? in Stock Item masters but have set Costing Method to Std Cost andMarket Valuation Method to Std. Price. In Tally 7.2, the First Purchase cost was taken into consideration forthe Std Cost Valuation and the First Sale price for Std Price valuation methods.

However, Tally 8.1 accurately considers the Last Purchase cost for Std Cost Valuation and the Last Sale Price forStd Price valuation

Average Cost

When Multiple Sales and Purchases are made against Receipt and Delivery Notes at a rate different from thatspecified in the Receipt and Delivery notes

For Example: Let us assume you have passed a Receipt Note for 100 nos. of an item @ Rs. 100 per item.Subsequently you pass a Purchase Invoice for 30 nos of the item @ Rs. 120 against the above Receipt Note. Thismeans that some items are still pending against the tracking number.

In Tally 7.2, the difference in the rates would be incorrectly included in the original value The balance sheetviewed with Avg. Cost valuation method displays closing stock values at Rs. 10,600.

This has been resolved in the new Tally 8.1, which accurately displays the Avg. Cost closing stock valuation in thebalance sheet as Rs. 10,000.

On Account values were being taken as 'overdue' in Ratio Analysis in 7.2

In Tally 7.2, On Account values were taken into consideration while calculating values for Due till today in RatioAnalysis.

Tally 8.1 has resolved this and displays only the outstanding values in Due till today. (for Sundry Debtors andCreditors)

Pending Tracking number values were approximate, even though quantities were accurate (causing fewPaise difference depending on context)

Tally 7.2 used to display pending Delivery/Receipt with approximate values, causing a small difference in thevalues.

Tally 8.1 has resolved this and displays the pending Delivery/Receipt Notes values accurately.

Miscellaneous Changes and Enhancements

Tallysav.dat file

The Tallysav.dat file in the tally folder is now Tallysav.tsf.

Tally_req.slk and Tally_resp.slk files

The tally_req.slk file, which is generated while activating the Tally license, is now tally_req.lic.

Similarly, the tally_resp.slk file, which is generated as a response from the Tally Internet Services server, isnow tally_resp.lic .

Tally Data files

The Tally 8.1 data file now consists of 5 digits. The numbering of a company created in Tally 8.1 starts with10000. Additional companies created will be suffixed with 10001, 10002, 10003 and so on.

However, when you migrate Tally 7.2 data to Tally 8.1, the 4 digit-data file in the 7.2 folder is converted to a 5digit-data file with 0 prefixed. Example: 00001, 00002 and so on…..

Loading Icon

The Tally Clock is now replaced with the Windows Wait icon

Close Button

To quit any Tally screen, you now have an option apart from the Esc key on the keyboard. The following button

displays on the right of every screen in Tally. Click the Close button to quit the current screen.

Copying Text From Tally to Windows

Copying text to and from Tally to Windows is now a simple process. Use Ctrl+Alt+C to copy text from Tally andCtrl+Alt+V to paste text into Tally.

Release 1.1

E-Mail Authentication

While mailing reports in Tally, the E-Mail Server now accepts the Authentication User Name and Password.

Multi-accounting Allocation

When you rewrite a company, the vouchers with multiple accounting allocations will be retained if UseCommon Ledger A/c for Item Allocation is set to No.

Synchronization of Altered Transactions

Synchronization is possible even when data migrated from Tally 7.2 consists of cancelled vouchers.

Cost Centre Class in Stock Journal

In Tally 8.1 you cannot select Cost centre class while creating Stock Journals as it is not applicable.

Migration

The process of Migrating Data to Tally 8.1 is now effectively enhanced.

Migrating Currencies

Multiple currencies can now be easily migrated to Tally 8.1.



Forex Gain Loss Calculations

Tally 8.1 displays accurate Debit and Credit amounts in the Ledger Forex Gain/Loss report unlike Tally 7.2 inwhich Debit amounts were displayed as Credit and vice versa.

Introduction

When you install Tally, a folder named Tally is created by default, where the program files will reside. You canspecify a different folder name, if you wish.

System Requirements

To install Tally, your system must meet the following minimum requirements.

System RequirementsConfiguration

ProcessorIntel Pentium IV and higher or equivalent

Memory256 MB RAM or more

Free Hard Disk Space40 MB Minimum (excluding the data)

Monitor ResolutionRecommended 1024 x 768 or higher

N o t e : For better performance Tally Multilingual needs more memory (about 40MB of

Free Hard Disk Space)

Operating System Requirements for Tally Multilingual

Operating System Support for Indian Scripts in Windowsversion

Windows 95Windows 98Windows ME

Does not support Unicode

Windows NT Supports Unicode but not Indic languages

Windows 2000 Supports Unicode and the following Indiclanguages:

Hindi



Marathi

Tamil

Windows XP Supports Unicode and the following Indiclanguages:

Hindi

Marathi

Tamil

Telugu

Kannada

Punjabi

Gujarati


Hindi

Marathi

Tamil

Telugu

Kannada

Punjabi

Gujarati

Windows XP SP2 Supports Unicode and the following Indiclanguages:

Hindi

Marathi

Tamil

Telugu

Kannada

Punjabi

Gujarati

Bengali

Malayalam



Pre-Installation

To install Tally in Windows NT/2000/XP/2003/XP SP2 Workstation,

You need to have administrator/all rights (to create, write, update, modify and delete) on the Application,Data, Configuration and Language directory.

1.

Ensure that the Operating System you use supports Tally for Multilingual support.2.

Installing Tally

You can install Tally using one of the given methods.

Method 1:

Double click install.exe from the CD.

Method 2:

Click START from Windows.

Select RUN.

TYPE <CD drive>:\INSTALL.

Press ENTER key.

Follow the instructions on your screen to install Tally.

The Tally Setup Wizard is displayed.1.

2.



1.

Click Next to continue2.

The Installation wizard displays the License Agreement. Read the license agreement before you proceed.Click I Agree to continue. Click I Decline to stop setup or click Back to go to the previous screen.

3.

3.

In the Installation screen, you may accept the suggested directories. Else click Change ApplicationDirectory or Change data Directory or Change Configuration Directory or Change Language Directory tochange the respective directory paths. Use Tab or the mouse to change the path in any of the directories.

4.



Application Directory

The Tally program files reside in this directory.

Data Directory

The Tally data resides in Data directory.

The default directory where data is stored is C:\Tally\Data. To change click on Change Data Directory buttonand enter the new directory.

When Tally is installed in a directory with an earlier version, it detects and retains the data configuration path ofthe previous installation.

Configuration Directory

Tally configuration files reside in this directory. Specify the path of the directory where configuration files shouldbe saved. It is usually the same path as that of the Application directory.

Language Directory

Tally Language files (.dct) reside in this directory.

Specify the path of the directory where the Language files will be maintained. It is usually the same path as thatof the Application Directory.

N o t e : If you are a Multi-License User, select the Run Tally License Server at

Windows Startup check box.

During installation, you are prompted to specify the path and the OS files to install the Indic languages.

Click Install Operating System Language Support to enable Language Support.5.

Select your Country name in Country Selection.6.

Select the Initial Startup Language from the list. When you start Tally for the first time, Tally will appearin the language selected as the Initial Startup Language (screen).

7.

Once you select the Initial Startup Language, Click Install to proceed with the installation.8.

The installation progress status is displayed as shown below. 9.



9.

Insert Windows CD to install language or Browse for the i386 folder in your system.10.

N o t e: You will be prompted to install the i386 language support folder only if it is not

available in your system

Click Finish to complete Setup.11.

After completing installation, double click Tally icon on the desktop to start working on Tally.



Tally.ini

The Installation program loads the Tally.ini file in the Tally programs or applications directory. This is aCONFIGURATION SETTINGS file, which Tally refers to, for some basic settings when starting. The file contentappears as shown:

The Data, Configuration and Language directories appear in the Tally.ini file as specified at the time ofinstallation. However, you can change the respective directory paths by specifying it in the Tally.ini .

1.

If you want to load a company automatically on starting Tally, enter the number in the line Load as per theinformation available in the data directory.

2.

3.



2.

You can specify the name or path of the TCP(s) (Tally Compliant Product), if any, after the User TDL field.3.

You can set Color to NO, if you do not want to view the screens with the default colours of Tally.4.

N o t e : The lines in the T a l l y . i n i file prefixed by two semi-colons indicate that those

features are not enabled. The only way to override these defaults is removing the semi-

colons in the T a l l y . i n i .

Tally introduces three attributes to the .ini file.

OptimizeNetwork

LoadBuffering

FlushFile

OptimizeNetwork in Tally.ini

Setting OptimizeNetwork to No in Tally.ini reduces memory requirements and prevents the system from goinginto a virtual memory mode although it slows down the generation of reports.

However, for users with a large volume of data, it is advised to use more than 500 MB of free memory and setOptimizeNetwork to Yes . This increases load speed dramatically and generates reports faster.

The settings can be changed in accordance with client memory available.

By default, Optimize Network in Tally.ini is set to No.

LoadBuffering in Tally.ini

Certain types of data (such as, a large number of Batches, Godowns and Tracking numbers) very quickly exhaustthe available memory, when information is cached during loading. Set LoadBuffering in the Tally.ini to No , toreduce this buffering, although it will result in a marked increase in network traffic.

For a lower volume of data (such as, a large number of masters and stock items, but a smaller number of batches,Godowns and Tracking numbers), it is advised to set LoadBuffering to Yes

By default, LoadBuffering in Tally.ini is set to Yes.

FlushFile in Tally.ini

For both Single and Multi users of Tally, it is practical to set FlushFile to No to facilitate Faster acceptance ofMasters and Vouchers as well as a marked improvement in accessing network data.

However, this could be risky in places with frequent power problems and without Power Backups. In which case, itis advised to continue with the Tally.ini default setting FlushFile to Yes

By default, FlushFile in Tally.ini is set to Yes .

Shortcut keys in Tally

The shortcut keys appear in button names in the button bar (right side of the Tally screen). You can either clickthe button from the button bar or press the relevant function key or character underlined/double-underlined.

The buttons have a function key before the button names ( Eg: F1: Select Cmp) which means you need to pressF1 key (Function Key) to select the 'Select Company' screen

The buttons have an underlined character ( Eg: F3: Cmp Info), which means you need to press ALT + F3 toselect the 'Company Info' screen.

Some buttons have a double-underlined character (Eg: V: As Voucher) which means you need to press CTRL + VSome buttons have a double-underlined character (Eg: V: As Voucher) which means you need to press CTRL + Vto select the 'Voucher' in voucher mode.

More:

Function Key Combination

Special Key Combination

Special Function Key Combination

Key Combination used for navigation



Function Key Combination

Windows Functionality Availability

F1 To select a company At all masters menu screen

F1

To select the Accounts Button At the Accounting Voucher creation andalteration screen

F1 (ALT+F1)

To select the Inventory Button At the Inventory/Payroll Voucher creation andalteration screen

F1 (CTRL +F1)

To select Payroll Vouchers to alter At the Accounting/Inventory voucher creationor alteration screen.

F2 To change the current date

To select company inventory features

At almost all screens in TALLY

At the F11: Features screen

F3 To select the company

To select Company Statutory & Taxationfeatures


At F11: Features screen

F4 To select the Contra voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F5 To select the Payment voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F6 To select the Receipt voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F7 To select the Journal voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F8 To select the Sales voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F8 (CTRL+F8)F8 (CTRL+F8) To select the Credit Note voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F9 To select the Purchase voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F9 (CTRL+F9)F9 (CTRL+F9) To select the Debit Note voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F10 To select the Reversing Journal voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F10 (Ctrl +F10)

To select the Memorandum voucher At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screen

F11 To select the Functions and Featuresscreen


F12 To select the Configure screen At almost all screens in TALLY



Special Key Combination


ALT + 2 To Duplicate a voucher At List of Vouchers – creates a voucher similar tothe one where you positioned the cursor andused this key combination

ALT + A To Add a voucher

To Alter the column in columnar report

At List of Vouchers – adds a voucher after theone where you positioned the cursor and usedthis key combination.

Alters the column in all the reports which can beviewed in columnar format

ALT + C To create a master at a voucher screen (ifit has not been already assigned adifferent function, as in reports likeBalance Sheet, where it adds a newcolumn to the report)

To access Auto Value Calculator in theamount field during voucher entry

At voucher entry and alteration screens, at a fieldwhere you have to select a master from a list. Ifthe necessary account has not been createdalready, use this key combination to create themaster without quitting from the voucher screen.

At all voucher entry screens in the Amount field

ALT + D To delete a voucher

To delete a master

To delete a column in any columnar report

(if it has not been already assigned adifferent function, as explained above)

At Voucher and Master (Single) alterationscreens. Masters can be deleted subject toconditions, as explained in the manual.

All the reports screen which can be viewed incolumnar format

ALT + E To export the report in ASCII, Excel, HTMLOR XML format

At all reports screens in TALLY

ALT + I To insert a voucher

To toggle between Item and Accountinginvoice

At List of Vouchers – inserts a voucher before theone where you positioned the cursor and usedthis key combination.

At creation of sales and purchase invoice

ALT + L To select the Language Configuration At almost all screens in TALLY.

ALT + K To select the Keyboard Configuration At almost all screens in TALLY.

ALT + O To upload the report at your website At all reports screens in TALLY

ALT + L To select language for Tally Interface At almost all screens of TALLY

ALT + M To Email the report At all reports screens in TALLY

ALT + N To view the report in automatic columns At all the reports where columns can be added

ALT + P To print the report At all reports screens in TALLY

ALT + R To remove a line in a report At all reports screens in TALLY

ALT + S To bring back a line you removed usingALT + R

At all reports screens in TALLY

ALT + U To retrieve the last line which is deletedusing Alt + R

At all reports screens in Tally

ALT+ V From Invoice screen to bring StockJournal screen

At Invoice screen à Quantity Field à Press Alt + V to

select the Stock Journal.

ALT + W To view the Tally Web browser. At all reports screens in TALLY

ALT + X To cancel a voucher in Day Book/List ofVouchers

At all voucher screens in TALLY

ALT + R To Register Tally At almost all screens in TALLY.

CTRL + A To accept a form – wherever you use thiskey combination, that screen or reportgets accepted as it is.

At almost all screens in TALLY, except where aspecific detail has to be given before accepting.

CTRL + B To select the Budget At Groups/Ledgers/Cost Centres/Budgets/Scenarios/Voucher Types/ Currencies(Accounts Info) creation and alteration screen

CTRL + ALT+ B

To check the Company Statutory details At all the menu screens

CTRL + C To select the Cost Centre

To select the Cost Category

At Groups/Ledgers/Cost Centres/Budgets/Scenarios/Voucher Types/ Currencies(Accounts Info) creation and alteration screen

At Stock Groups/ Stock Categories/ Stock Items/Reorder Levels/ Godowns/ Voucher Types / Unitsof Measure ( Inventory Info) creation/alterationscreen

CTRL+ E To select the Currencies At Groups/Ledgers/Cost Centres/Budgets/Scenarios/Voucher Types/ Currencies(Accounts Info) creation and alteration screen



CTRL + G To select the Group At Groups/Ledgers/Cost Centres/Budgets/Scenarios/Voucher Types/ Currencies(Accounts Info) creation and alteration screen

CTRL + I To select the Stock Items At Stock Group/ Stock Categories/ Stock Items/Reorder Levels/ Godowns/ Voucher Types / Unitsof Measure ( Inventory Info) creation/alterationscreen

Ctrl + Alt +I

To import statutory masters At all menu screens

CTRL + L To select the Ledger

To mark a Voucher as Optional


At the creation and alteration of Vouchers

CTRL + O To select the Godowns At Stock Group/ Stock Categories/ Stock Items/Reorder Levels/ Godowns/ Voucher Types / Unitsof Measure ( Inventory Info) creation/alterationscreen

CTRL + Q To abandon a form – wherever you usethis key combination, it quits that screenwithout making any changes to it.

At almost all screens in TALLY.

CTRL + R To repeat narration in the same vouchertype

At creation/alteration of voucher screen

CTRL + Alt+ R

Rewrite data for a Company From Gateway of Tally screen

CTRL + S Allows you to alter Stock Item master At Stock Voucher Report and Godown VoucherReport

CTRL + U To select the Units At Stock Groups/ Stock Categories/ Stock Items/Reorder Levels/ Godowns/ Voucher Types / Unitsof Measure ( Inventory Info) creation/alterationscreen

CTRL + V To select the Voucher Types

To toggle between Invoice and Voucher


At creation of Sales/Purchase Voucher screen

Special Function Key Combination


ALT + F1 To close a company

To view detailed report

To explode a line into its details

To select Inventory vouchers to alter

At all menu screens

At almost all report screens


At the Inventory/ Payroll voucher creation oralteration screen.

ALT + F2 To change the period At almost all screens in TALLY

ALT + F3 To select the company info menu

To create/alter/shut a Company

At Gateway of Tally screen

ALT + F4 To select the Purchase Order VoucherType

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screens

ALT + F5 To select the Sales Order Voucher Type

To view monthly and quarterly report


At almost all report screens in TALLY

ALT + F6 To select the Rejection Out Voucher Type

To change the Sales Order Voucher Type


ALT + F7 To select the Stock Journal Voucher Type

To accept all the Audit lists


At TallyAudit Listing screen

ALT + F8 To select the Delivery Note Voucher Type

To view the Columnar report


At Ledger Voucher screen

ALT + F9 To select the Receipt Note Voucher Type At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation andalteration screens

ALT + F10 To select the Physical Stock VoucherType


ALT + F12 To filter the information based onmonetary value

At almost all report screens



Ctrl + F1 To select payroll vouchers for alteration At the Accounting/Inventory Voucher creation oralteration screen

CTRL + ALT+ F12

Advanced Config At Gateway of Tally

Key Combination used for navigation


PgUp Display previous voucher during voucherentry/alter

At voucher entry and alteration screens

PgDn Display next voucher during voucherentry/alter


ENTER To accept anything you type into a field.

To accept a voucher or master

To get a report with further details of anitem in a report.

You have to use this key at most areas in TALLY

At the receivables report – press Enter at apending bill to get transactions relating to thisbill (e.g., original sale bill, receipts and paymentsagainst this bill, etc)

ESC To remove what you typed into a field

To come out of a screen

To indicate you do not want to accept avoucher or master.

At almost all screens in TALLY.

SHIFT +ENTER

Collapse next level details At Voucher Register screen and Trial Balancereport

SHIFT +ENTER

To explode a line into its details In almost all Reports:

At a Group/Stock Group/CostCategory/Godown/Stock Category – displays SubGroups and Ledgers/Stock Items/CostCentres/Secondary Godowns/Secondary StockCategories

At a Voucher – displays its entries and narration

At a Stock Item- displays its godowns and batchdetails

At Voucher Register screen – displays the nextlevel details

At Trial Balance report - displays the next leveldetails

CTRL +ENTER

To alter a master while making an entryor viewing a report


At all reports



Licensing

Introduction

Tally provides you with two types of licensing options:

Single-User Licensing

Multi-User Licensing

TallySilver for Single-User

Single-user Licensing allows the deployment of Tally on a SINGLE computer with an option of activating it Onlineor Offline. You can also choose to use the same Tally license on another computer, by surrendering the licenseactivated on a computer and reactivating it on the other. An Offline user takes the request file generated by Tally,to a computer, which has Internet connectivity, and activates the license.

TallyGold for Multi-User

Multi-user Licensing feature facilitates the use of Tally on ANY NUMBER of computers connected to a local areanetwork (LAN). The method of activation is similar to that of a Single-User License

Once a Multi-User license is successfully installed on computer designated as the License Server, you can start upTally when Windows starts and run as a service in the background. The other computers, designated as Licenseclients can install Tally, and set the parameter TallyLicenseServer (E.g Servername:Port Number) in theconfiguration file also known as the Tally.ini file.

N o t e :

1. If you work on Windows XP and have a firewall installed, ensure that the firewall

allows license clients access to the Server Port.

2. On the Client computer, there are few significant parameters set by default in

Tally.ini file viz., TallyLicense = Connect and T a l l y L i c e n s e S e r v e r = server:port



Activation Form

The Activation Form is displayed, when you run Tally after installation for both Single User and Multi User licensingsystems.

Enter the Serial, Key and E-mail, if you are connected to Internet. Else, press Esc or Ctrl+Q to quit this form.

More:

For Users Connected to the Internet

For Users not Connected to the Internet

Licensing Menu

To view the licensing menu, Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Licensing

Single-User

The License menu displays as shown

List Add-ons

To view additional features enabled in Tally.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Licensing > Add-ons

Online

This option allows you to activate Tally License Online. The term online indicates that your computer is connectedto the Internet.

Offline

This option allows you to activate Tally License Offline. The term Offline indicates that your computer is notconnected to the Internet.

Quit

This option enables you to quit the licensing menu.

Multi-User



In multi-user environment, the License menu on the License server displays all the options available to a single-user.

On the License client computers, the options Online and Offline do not exist, as shown:

To view the licensing menu

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Licensing

Activating Tally

This section explains how to activate Tally for Single-User and Multi-User systems:

Activating Tally for Single-User

Activating Tally for Multi-User



Activating Tally for Single-User

For Users Connected to the Internet

Activate your license by using the Online option available in F12: Configure > Licensing > Online> Activate

To activate your license:

Start Tally. Tally displays Online Activation Form with three fields.1.

Enter the correct Serial and Key, and Email - ID in the Activation form that displays and press Enter toproceed.

2.

Tally connects to the Tally Internet Services Server to validate your registration information.3.

On entering the correct Serial and Key, a message displays indicating that your license is activated.4.

Once the license is activated, go to F12: Configure > Licensing > Online to view the Online Menu

The Online menu has two options:

Update: This option helps you to update new features of Tally and validate your Tally License.

Surrender: This option helps you to surrender the Tally License.

For Users not Connected to the Internet

If your computer does not have an Internet connection, you can activate your Tally license using the Offlineoption. Go to F12: Configure > Licensing > Offline > Activate

To activate your license:

When you start Tally, an Activation Form dialog window will be displayed. As you do not have an Internetconnection, press Esc or Ctrl+Q to quit this form.

1.

Press F12: Configure > Licensing > Offline> Activate2.

Tally displays the Offline Activate Form with three fields. If the Serial, Key and Email Id are correct, amessage displays indicating that the tally_req.lic file has been successfully generated.

3.

Copy the tally_req.lic file in the Tally folder on a floppy/CD and take it to any computer with Internetconnectivity.

4.

Important: Tally must be installed in the computer with Internet Connectivity.

Paste the tally_req.lic file to the Tally folder on this computer, start Tally and go to F12: Configure >Licensing > Offline

5.

Click on the Send External Request option to send the request to Tally Internet Services server. Theresponse will be saved in a new file called tally_resp.lic, which will be generated in the Tally folder.

6.

Copy the tally_resp.lic file into a floppy or CD, from the Internet connected computer and paste the fileinto the Tally folder of your computer.

7.

Start Tally, Tally will display the below screen:8.



8.

You are now ready to use Tally.

Important: If you desire to make any changes to your Hardware, such as Hard Disk or Removable Storage Devices, it is

recommended that you surrender the License from your computer, before initiating these changes. Else, Tally will switch to

Educational mode.

Activating Tally for Multi-User

The method of activation is similar to that of a single user. The license is first installed and activated on thecomputer designated as the License Server and later on other computers on the network designated as LicenseClients.

Setting Tally License Server

During the installation of Tally, select the Run Tally License Server at Windows Startup (For TallyGoldUsers) check box. This will enable the user to have Tally start when Windows starts and run as a service in thebackground on the server computer.

If you fail to select the Run Tally License Server at Windows Startup (For TallyGold Users) check box, youcan use this alternative method to activate Tally:

Double-click TallyLicServer.exe found in Tally directory. A dialog box appears which comprises thefollowing elements:

Install

1.

To install the multi-user license on the server, press Install button

Uninstall

To uninstall the multi-user license previously installed, if any, press Uninstall button.

Click on Install button2.

After installation of Tally on the client computer, open Tally.ini file found in Tally directory and set thefollowing parameters:

3.

TallyLicenseServer = Name of the License Server Computer or IP Address of the Server .



Educational mode.



Converting Tally Hard Lock to Tally Soft Lock

This section provides information on how Hard Lock users of Tally can convert to the more secure environment ofTally Soft Lock. It is applicable for both Single-User and Multi-User licenses.

Pre-requisites for conversion:

In a multi-user environment, the Hard Lock should be present on the computer where you want to run TallyLicense. If Tally Hard Lock is not connected to the Computer on which you want a Soft Lock, the followingmessage displays:

Warning: The process of conversion of Hard Lock to Soft Lock is a one-time activity and cannot be reversed.

Single-User Hard Lock Conversion

Single-User with Internet Connection (online):

Conversion Form:

The Conversion Form is displayed when Tally starts. Tally looks for the Soft Lock in the system. If it is not foundand if TallyLicense = Connect is not present or commented out in tally.ini file, it runs lockconverter.exe ,which is present in Tally Installation folder.

Enter only the Email-ID and accept the screen. The Serial Number displayed on this screen is same as the HardLock Serial Number.

The response goes to the TSPL server and the Hard Lock gets converted to a new Soft Lock . A ConversionDetails screen is displayed showing the successful conversion with a new Serial Number and Activation Code .



N o t e : The Information regarding the Serial Number and the Activation Code of the

newly generated Soft Lock can also be found in Conversion.txt file in the Tally

Installation folder. If any error occurs during the process, it will be captured in a log

file named Converter.Log, which can be found in the Tally Installation folder.

Single User without Internet Connection (Offline):

The Conversion Form is displayed. Press Esc or CTRL + Q to quit this form and follow the steps given. Go toF12: Configure > Licensing > Offline > Convert

An Offline conversion form is displayed prompting you to enter the Email ID . The serial number displayedon the form is the serial number of Hard Lock, which is connected to your machine and cannot be edited.Enter the Email ID and accept the form.

1.

If your Serial and Email are found correct, a message displays indicating your tally_req.lic is successfullygenerated. This file available in the Tally folder.

2.

Copy the tally_req.lic file from the Tally Folder on to a floppy/CD and take it to any computer with Internetconnection and having Tally installed on it.

3.

Paste the tally_req.lic file in the Tally folder on this computer, start Tally and go to F12: Configure >Licensing > Offline .

4.

Click on the Send External Request option to send the request to Tally Internet Services server. Theresponse will be saved in a new file called tally_resp.lic .

5.

Copy the tally_resp.lic file into a floppy/CD and paste the file into the Tally folder of your computer.6.

When you start Tally, a Conversion Details screen displays indicating successful conversion of Hard Lockto new Soft Lock with Serial Number and the Activation code.

7.

Multi-User Hard Lock Conversion

The Conversion procedure for Multi-User environment is similar to Single-User Conversion.

The License Clients need to connect to the License Server to get the Soft Lock, once conversion is complete on theLicense Server.



Registering Tally

To get support, service and regular updates, users of Tally need to be registered. The procedure for registeringTally is the same for single and multi-user systems. Tally provides you an option to register later as well.

Go to F12 > Licensing and click Register Yourself button from the button bar.

The following screen is displayed on successful activation.

You can also set a reminder for registration for a later time. Set the optional field Remind me later to Yes andTally will remind you to register at periodic intervals. If you set this to No, reminders will not be generated.

More:

Registering Tally-if you have an Internet connection

Registering Tally-if you do not have an Internet connection

If you have an Internet Connection

To register Tally,

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Licensing > Click Register Yourself button

The Login screen displays

Enter the Serial number printed on the CD cover.1.

Enter the Key printed inside the CD cover.2.

Click Login to proceed.3.

The Registration screen is displayed. Enter your details in the form.4.

Click Save.5.

You will get a message confirming your registration.

You can also register your Tally by clicking on the Register Yourself link at www.tallysolutions.com.



If you do not have an Internet connection

If your computer does not have an Internet connection, register Tally from a computer connected to the Internetby clicking on the Register Tally link at www.tallysolutions.com.

Enter the Serial number and Key in the Login screen1.

Click the Login button2.

The Registration screen displays. Enter your details in the form and click on Save3.

A message displays confirming your registration4.

Validating Tally

The procedure for validating Tally is the same for single-user and multi-user systems. The license has to bevalidated within 45 days of activation. Tally will prompt you to validate the license, before the expiry period.

More:

Validating Tally-if you have an Internet connection

Validating Tally-if you do not have an Internet connection



If you have an Internet connection

If you are an Online user who connects to the Internet occasionally, Tally will display the message Your Licenseis about to expire! Please re-activate. Connect to the Internet and validate the license manually using

F12: Configure > Licensing > Online > Update

This is a one-time process.

If you do not validate within the time period, Tally will switch to Educational mode.


If you are not connected to the Internet, Tally will display Your License is about to expire! Please re-activatemessage. You can validate the license on any computer with an Internet connection. Follow the procedureexplained in the section on If you do not have an internet connection in Activating TallySilver for Single-User.

Once the procedure is complete validate the license manually on your computer using F12: Configure >Licensing > Offline > Update License .



N o t e : The Offline user needs to use a computer connected to the Internet to R e g i s t e r

T a l l y.


If you are not connected to the Internet, Tally will display Your License is about to expire! Please re-activatemessage. You can validate the license on any computer with an Internet connection. Follow the procedureexplained in the section on If you do not have an internet connection in Activating TallySilver for Single-User.

Once the procedure is complete validate the license manually on your computer using F12: Configure >Licensing > Offline > Update License .



N o t e : The Offline user needs to use a computer connected to the Internet to R e g i s t e r

T a l l y.



Surrendering Tally License

If you want to use Tally on another computer, surrender the license activated on your computer using the optionSurrender from F12 > Licensing > Online/Offline.



Educational mode.

The procedure followed for surrendering the license is the same for both single-user and multi-user systems.

For Online Users

Go to F12: Configure > Licensing > Online > Surrender1.

The surrender License request is sent to Tally Internet Services Server. If it gets a valid response, thelicense file in the Tally folder is deleted

2.

On surrendering the license, Tally will function in Educational mode3.

You can now activate the same license on a different computer4.

For Offline Users

Go to F12: Configure > Licensing > Offline > Surrender1.

Press Enter to proceed2.

A message displays Offline Surrender Request tally_req.lic file is successfully generated3.

Copy the tally_req.lic file that is available in the Tally folder to a floppy/CD and take it to any computerwith Internet connectivity, having Tally installed on it

4.

Paste the tally_req.lic file to the Tally folder on this computer, start Tally and go to F12: Configure >Licensing > Offline

5.

5.

Click on the Send External Request option to send the surrender request to Tally Internet Services server6.

Your Tally License is successfully surrendered and is ready for use on another computer.7.

Note: If you Surrender the license activated on Tally 9, both Tally 7.2 and Tally 9 will

switch to Educational mode. You need to activate the license on Tally 8.1 before

activating the license on Tally 7.2.



Upgrading from Tally 8.1 to 9

Single User Upgrade Process

Install Tally 9 in a new folder on your computer1.

Start Tally 92.

An Activation Form displays as shown3.

Enter your Serial, Key, Email and Accept4.

A Congratulations message displays as shown5.

6.

5.

You are now ready to use Tally 9 in the licensed mode6.

Multi User Upgrade process

On the Server Computer

Install Tally 9 in a new folder on the server computer1.

Execute Tally 92.

An Activation Form appears as shown below3.


A Congratulations message appears as shown5.



5.

You are now ready to use Tally 9 in the licensed mode.6.

On the Client Computer:

Install Tally 9 into a new folder on your computer1.

Open Tally.ini file found in Tally folder and set the following parameter2.

TallyLicenseServer = server : port

(Where server is the Name or IP of License Server Computer and port is the Port Number, default portbeing 9000)


Upgrading Hardlock users from Tally 6.3 / 7.2 to Tally 9

Hardlock users need to ensure that the TallyLock is connected to the computer, when upgrading to Tally 9 .



Edit TallyLicense parameter by placing two semicolons and specify the TallyLock path in Tally.ini file asshown

2.

Save the changes made in the Tally.ini file3.

Start Tally 9 and the conversion form appears as shown4.

If you wish to convert your license to SoftLock, enter your Email-ID and accept to display aCongratulations message.

5.



On the Server Computer to convert from Hardlock to Softlock

1.




Edit TallyLicense parameter by placing two semicolons and specify the TallyLock path in Tally.ini file asshown

2.

Save the changes made in the Tally.ini file and start Tally 9 .3.

A Conversion Form displays as shown4.

If you wish to convert your license to SoftLock, enter your Email-ID and accept.5.

A Congratulations message displays6.



Install Tally 9 in a new folder on your computer.1.

Open Tally.ini file from the Tally folder and edit the following parameters.2.


(Enter the Name or IP address of License Server Computer instead of server and the Port Number instead of port (default port being 9000))

Save the changes made in Tally.ini file.3.

4.

3.




Upgrading Softlock users from Tally 6.3 / 7.2 to Tally 9



Start Tally 92.


Enter your serial, Key, email-ID and accept4.


6.

5.





Execute Tally 92.






5.

You are now ready to use Tally 9 in the licensed mode.6.





(Where server is the Name or IP of License Server Computer and port is the Port Number, default portbeing 9000)


Co-existence of Tally 7.2 and Tally 8.1 along with Tally 9



Start Tally 92.


Enter the Serial , Key , Email and Accept4.


6.



5.

You can now use Tally 9 , Tally 8.1 and Tally 7.2 in the licensed mode.6.




Execute Tally 92.


Enter the Serial , Key , Email and Accept4.


5.

If you wish to run Tally 7.2 and Tally 8.1 services in the background as license servers along with Tally9 license server on the same computer:

Download tally72lic9xserver.exe and tally72licserver.exe from www.tallysolutions.com and paste it in thefolder of the server computer where Tally 7.2. exe resides.

Edit the Tally.ini in the Tally 7.2 folder, in order to run the license server for both versions. Server port =9090

Depending on the Operating System, double click the license server and Install the service.

This enables you to run Tally 7.2 and Tally 8.1 in the licensed mode to run as a service in the backgroundon the server computer along with Tally 9 license server on the same computer.

You can now use Tally 9, Tally 8.1 and Tally 7.2 in the licensed mode.





(Where server is the Name or IP of License Server Computer and port is the Port Number, default port being9000)

You can now use Tally 9 , Tally 8.1 and Tally 7.2 in the licensed mode.



Note :

If your Operating System is of a Windows 2000 or higher version, download tally72licserver.exe fromwww.tallysolutions.com to run as a service in the background on the server computer. This enables you torun Tally 7.2 in the licensed mode.

If your Operating System is of a version lower than Windows 2000, download tally72lic9xserver.exe fromwww.tallysolutions.com to run as a service in the background on the server computer. This enables you torun Tally 7.2 in the licensed mode.

It is advisable to remove the existing tallylicserver.exe from the folder where the Tally 7.2 exe resides,before downloading tally72lic9xserver.exe and tally72licserver.exe from www.tallysolutions.com.

Additional Information

In order to use Tally 7.2 and Tally 8.1 along with 9 on the same computer, it is mandatory that Tally 9 is activeon the computer

For users who wish to run Tally 8.1 and Tally 7.2 along with Tally 9

Both Tally 8.1 and Tally 7.2 users can Activate and Upgrade to Tally 9 . On successful upgrade oractivation, you can run all three versions on the same computer, in the licensed mode. Tally 8.1 and Tally7.2 will co-exist with Tally 9 for 90 days from the date of activation.

1.

If you try to Surrender the license from Tally 8.1 or 7.2, all three versions will switch to Educationalmode and Tally will display the message Surrender successful . All versions of Tally running on yoursystem will turn into educational.

2.

If you re-activate the license on Tally 8.1 or Tally 7.2, Tally 9 will be activated automatically.3.

But if you choose to activate the license on Tally 9 first, you need to re-activate Tally 8.1 and 7.24.



3.

individually for the co-existence of the three versions.4.

N o t e : You cannot activate the license on Tally 8.1 or Tally 7.2 , if you have

surrendered the license from Tally 9.

For users who Update from Tally 8.1 to Tally 9

Tally 8.1 users can Activate and Upgrade to Tally 9 . On successful upgrade or activation, you can run bothversions on the same computer, in the licensed mode. Tally 8.1 will co-exist with Tally 9 for 90 days from the dateof activation.

For Softlock users who migrate from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9

Tally 7.2 Softlock users can Activate and Upgrade to Tally 9 . On successful upgrade or activation, you can runboth versions on the same computer, in the licensed mode. Tally 7.2 will co-exist with Tally 9 for 90 days from thedate of activation.

For Hardlock users who migrate from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9

On migration to Tally 9 , the Hardlock becomes defunct. To run Tally 7.2 , you need to activate the license onTally 7.2 in the Softlock mode. For additional information on activating the license click here..

N o t e : In case you are connected to the internet and install Tally 9 in the same folder where

Tally 8.1 resides, Tally will update the license automatically.

Introduction

The Tally Data Migration Tool helps you upgrade from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9 , by migrating Data and TCP (TallyCompliant Product ) files. It also restores 7.2 backup files .

Using the Tally Data migration Tool, you can migrate Payroll data also

Tally 7.2 Data and TCP files cannot be used on Tally 9 unless you migrate them, for which you need to be alicensed user of Tally 9.

Tally 6.3 users can also use the migration tool, which will rewrite the version to Tally 7.2 and then migrate thedata to Tally 9.

Tally Data Migration Tool

The Tally Data Migration Tool works with the t ally 9. exe and helps you migrate Tally 7.2 company data. Italso helps you migrate Tally 7.2 TCP files.

A brief explanation on Tally Data Migration and Tally 9 screen follows, as both screens open simultaneously duringmigration.



Migrate Company Menu

The Migrate Company menu displays the following:

Migrate Data

Migrate TCP

Restore 7.2 Backup

Migration Messages Pane

The migration status displays in the Migration Messages Pane when the migration is in progress.

Calculator Pane

If errors occur during migration, then an error message displays in the Calculator Pane.

N o t e : The Data Migration Tool is resource intensive. It is recommended that you close

all other applications when you migrate Data or TCP files. If an interruption occurs

during the migration process, the migrated or partially migrated data will be deleted

and you have to repeat migration for the same.



Migrating Data

If you have enabled and used Payroll in Tally 7.2, before migrating data, ensure that the Payroll process for theprevious month is complete and processed because Payroll in Tally 9 will be effective from the date of migration.

Migrating Data from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9

Migrating Group company data from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9

Post Migration Steps for Payroll data in Tally 9

Advantages of Migrating Payroll data from Tally 7.2 to 9

Processing Payroll in Tally 9 has now become so easy that you can generate a Pay slip in four steps.1.

Pay Head and Salary details creation has become user-friendly and can be defined at the master level.2.

Though there is a hierarchy change in Pay Heads, after migration to Tally 9 the migration tool allows youmigrate the calculation type specified in Tally 7.2, thus allowing you to continue generating Payroll reports.

3.

A simple re-configuration of the Pay Heads after migration allows you to continue with the Payrollprocessing in Tally 9.

4.

Migrating Data from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9

For an existing 7.2 customer, the migration process takes place as explained below.

Click the tallymigration icon to start the migration.1.

Tally Data Migration and Tally 9 start simultaneously, in separate screens.2.

As soon as Tally 9 is loaded, the message ‘Ready for Migration ’ displays in the Migration Messages Pane .3.



3.

Click the Migrate Data option to select the company whose data is to be migrated from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9 .4.

Specify the data path in the Directory field.5.

5.

On selecting the company, the company is loaded.6.

N o t e : If you have placed the data to be migrated from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9 in the T a l l y

9 folder, you have to only specify the path and need not select the company.

If the company selected has Payroll data, the following screen appears.7.

To continue with the migration, press Enter .8.

Accept to migrate the selected company.9.



9.

In the Migration Information screen on the left hand side, you can view the Types of Masters and Vouchersto be migrated from Tally 7.2 .

10.

During the migration from Tally 7.2 to 9 , the status of the migration appears in the screen on the right handside, which displays the number of Masters and Vouchers that have migrated to Tally 9 .

11.

11.

Note: As certain voucher types and units have been removed from Tally 9 , there will

be a difference of 3 in the total number of Voucher Type Masters and 1 in the number

of Unit Masters.

1 2 .



When the migration is complete, an Information pop-up message appears as shown below.12.

On pressing any key, a Congratulations message appears as shown below.13.

13.

If errors occur during migration, they are displayed in red in the Migration Messages Pane as shown in thefollowing screen.

14.



14.

N o t e : If an error “The Cost Centre 'ABC' does not belong to the Category 'XYZ' appears

during migration, rewrite Tally 7.2 data with Tally Data Migration Tool using Ctrl + Alt +

R and then migrate the data to 9.

The migrated companies are saved in the Tally 7.2 data folder. The migrated data is prefixed with a ‘0’ andappears as a 5 digit number as shown.

15.

Now you can work on Tally 9 with the migrated data.16.

N o t e : The migrated data will reside in the folder where it was at the time of migration.

Caution:

If you try to migrate a company that has already been migrated from 7.2 to 9 , you will get a warning messageas shown below.

Changes that occur after successful migration process are:

The Payroll Deduction ledgers created under the group Duties and Taxes in Tally 7.2 , after migration

will become a Pay Head grouped under Current Liabilities in Tally 9 .

The Payroll Deduction ledgers created under the group Direct or Indirect Expenses in Tally 7.2 ,after migration will become a Pay Head grouped under Current Liabilities in Tally 9 .

The Payroll Deduction ledgers created under the group Loans & Advances (Assets) in Tally 7.2 ,after migration will become a Pay Head grouped under the Pay Head Type Loans and Advances inTally 9 .

Any Attendance Type created with unit Mth will appear prefixed with ATTD- followed by the name ofthe Attendance Type.

If you have migrated data containing attendance entries for the current month, whose Payroll is yet tobe processed, those entries will become Production Type Entries. So it is suggested that you re-enterthe attendance entries for the current month after migration and then process the Payroll.

After migration, by default the Attendance Types will change to Production Types and therefore the YTDdetails will not be retained. All migrated Attendance types will be pre-fixed by ATTD-

Follow the procedure to display the accurate YTD details in the Payslip :

To generate a Payslip with YTD Details for any of the earlier months:1.

Create/Alter the Attendance Voucher for the respective month

Select the Employee

To Nullify YTD details , select the ATTD- prefixed Attendance Type and enter the Cur Balvalue with a negative sign in the Value field.

Select the Employee and the Attendance type

Enter the Cur Bal amount as the Value and Accept the Voucher

To generate a Payslip with YTD Details from the Current month onwards:2.

Create/Alter the Attendance Voucher for the previous month

Select the Employee

To Nullify YTD details, select the ATTD- prefixed Attendance Type and enter the Cur Balvalue with a negative sign in the Value field.

Select the Employee and the Attendance type

Enter the Cur Bal amount as the Value and Accept the Voucher.



Migrating Group company data from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9

To migrate Group companies:

Migrate each member individually from Tally 7.2 to 91.

On successful migration of the companies, re-create the Group company in Tally 92.



Post Migration Steps for Payroll data in Tally 9

After migrating Payroll data from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9, you have to re-configure the Pay Heads and enter the Ratesagainst the respective Pay Heads in the salary details screen for the Employees/Employee Groups in Tally 9.By default after migration, the Calculation type for all the Pay Heads migrated to Tally 9 will change to As UserDefined Value .

Follow the steps given below:

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Salary Details> Alter> Select the Employee/EmployeeGroup from the List of Groups/Employees .

In the Salary Details Alteration screen, move the cursor to the Pay Head field and press Ctrl + Enter to re-configure the Pay Heads as in Tally 7.2

Consider an example where ABC Company migrates its Payroll data from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9. The Payroll iscompleted and processed for the previous month. To migrate data refer to Migrating Data from Tally 7.2 to 9

Before migration, Salary Details for Employee A in Tally 7.2 appears as shown below. (Go to Gateway ofTally> Payroll Info.> Employees> Alter> Employee A )

1.

1.

After migration the Salary Details screen in Tally 9 for Employee A will appear displaying As UserDefined Value as the Calculation Type for all the Pay Heads specified. (Go to Gateway of Tally>Payroll Info.> Salary Details> Alter> Select Employee A from the List of Groups/Employees)

2.



In the Salary Details Alteration screen, change the Effective From date if required3.

To alter the Pay head Basic Salary from the same screen, move the cursor to the Pay head and press Ctrl+ Enter

4.

In the Pay Head Alteration (Secondary) screen, select the Calculation Type from the list as provided inTally 7.2

5.

5.

A ccept to save the Pay Head6.

Enter the Rate in the Salary Details Alteration screen, if applicable7.

Similarly you can modify the remaining Pay Heads8.

Accept to save the changes made9.

The Salary Details Alteration screen for Employee A with the changes made in Tally 9 will appear asshown below

10.



10.

N o t e : As the number of Pay Heads will increase after migration, if the Calculation Type

is retained as provided in Tally 7.2, the Pay Heads are migrated to Tally 9 with

Calculation Type As User Defined Value

Migrating TCP

Migrating TCP from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9

Click the Migrate TCP option to migrate the TCP files from Tally 7.2 to Tally 91.



1.

A window displays as shown. Accept to Migrate TCP2.

2.

In the Migration Messages Pane, messages display, indicating that the TCP files are in the process ofmigration

3.

Once the process of migration ends, a message appears as shown below4.



4.

The migrated TCP files are saved in the folder where Tally 7.2 TCP files reside. The migrated TCP files aresuffixed with 9 as shown and appear with the 9 suffixed in the Tally.ini.file also

5.

5.

Now, you can work on Tally 9 with the migrated TCP files6.

N o t e : During migration, only those TCP files mentioned in the Tally.ini file will be

migrated from Tally 7.2 to 9. The migrated TCP will reside in the folder where it was at

the time of migration.



Restoring 7.2 Backup

Follow the below steps to Restore 7.2 backup data to 9 .

Click Restore 7.2 Backup option to migrate 7.2 Backup data1.

1.

In Select Companies to Restore screen specify the Destination and Source path. Select the company fromthe List of Companies as shown

2.



2.

N o t e : If you have placed the data to be migrated from Tally 7.2 to Tally 9 in the Tally 9

folder, you have to only specify the path and need not select the company.

Click Migrate Data to migrate the 7.2 data to 9. Refer to Migrate Data3.

Select the company to be migrated from the list of companies provided 4.

Click Yes to continue the migration process5.

Click Quit to close the Tally Data Migration Tool6.

The migrated companies are saved in the Tally 7.2 data folder. The migrated data is prefixed with a ‘0 ’ andappears as a 5 digit number

You can now work on Tally 9 with the restored and migrated 7.2 backup data


Once the migration of Data or TCP files from Tally 7.2 to 9 is complete, two important log files display in thefolder containing the tally migration exe .

migration.err

The migration.err file displays the errors if any occur during migration

migration.log

The migration.log file provides the following details:

Migrating Data

Date of Migration1.

The Name of the company opened for migration2.

Migration Start time3.

Time taken and the Migrate data information, i.e., Masters, Vouchers and Reports from Tally 7.2 to 94.

5.

3.

4.

Lists the number of errors, if any5.

Migration End time6.

The Migration tool closing 7.2 company ABC Company and Closed information of the migrated company7.

Migrating TCP files

Date and Start Time to migrate the TCP files from Tally 7.2 to 91.

Migrate TCP information2.

Migrating TCP files End details3.

Error Occurrence during Migration

Error Occurrence during Migration of Masters

If an error occurs during the migration of Masters, the migration process stops immediately and animporterror.log file is created in the folder where the tally72migration. exe resides.

The XML tags of those masters, which did not migrate, appear in the importerror.log file.

Error Occurrence during Migration of Transactions

If an error occurs during the migration of transactions, the migration continues and the XML tags of thosetransactions, which did not migrate, appear in an importerror.log file.

Rectify the transactions and copy the XML tags into a file with an .XML extension . Now, import the .XML file toTally 9 .

N o t e : As manually importing transactions create new Alter ID s, you have to create or

alter these transactions again after Synchronization .



Introduction

Tally comes with the World’s First Concurrent Multilingual Business Accounting & Inventory Management Softwarefor small and medium businesses. The user interface for the software is available in Hindi, Marathi, Gujarati,Bengali, Kannada, Tamil, Telugu, Malayalam, Hinglish (colloquial English) and Punjabi, and in BahasaMelayu and Bahasa Indonesia allowing you to interact with Tally, in a language of your choice.

Thus, Tally gives you tremendous freedom to maintain accounts, as well as view and print in any of the abovementioned Indian languages.

Tally enables you to enter data in one language and have it transliterated into different languages. You cangenerate invoices, purchase orders or delivery notes in different languages after entering data for the same in adifferent language.

Features of Tally Multilingual

Tally is a concurrent Multilingual software that

Can display Tally in any language that the user chooses from any screen in Tally.

Supports Translation of Pre-Defined Masters

Supports Transliteration for the allowed languages

Can capture data entered using the phonetic language or system language.

Can capture language specific Names and Aliases.

Can print and display Reports, Vouchers and Invoices in any language.

Can copy text from Tally to Windows and vice versa. Use Ctrl +Alt +C to copy and Ctrl +Alt +V to paste.



Operating System Requirements for Tally Multilingual

Operating System Support for Indian Scripts in Windowsversion

Windows 95Windows 98Windows ME

Does not support Unicode

Windows NT Supports Unicode but not Indic languages


Hindi

Marathi

Tamil

Windows XP Supports Unicode and the following Indiclanguages:

Hindi

Marathi

Tamil

Telugu

Kannada

Punjabi

Gujarati


Hindi

Marathi

Tamil

Telugu

Kannada

Punjabi

Gujarati

Windows XP SP2 Supports Unicode and the following Indiclanguages:

Hindi

Marathi

Tamil

Telugu

Kannada

Punjabi



Gujarati

Bengali

Malayalam

User Interface in Tally

The Tally interface displays in the language selected as Initial Startup Language , at the time of installation. Forexample, if you have selected Hindi as Initial Startup Language , the Tally interface displays as shown.



Configuring F12: Configure for Multilingual

Configuring F12 for Multilingual

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12:Configure > General

Show tables with Masters only in Current Language

If this option is set to Yes , Tally displays the Pre-defined and User defined Masters in the Language selected.

If this option is set to No , Tally displays the Pre-defined and User defined Masters in English and in theselected Language , along with Aliases created in other languages, if any.

C reating a Company in any language

Create your company in any language. The Company Creation screen, if Hindi is selected as your language,displays as shown.

N o t e : The Name of the Company , Unit of Measure and C u r r e n c y cannot be translated

or transliterated but will appear in the Language created.



Language Configuration in Tally

Configure your language as given.

Click L: Language from the horizontal toolbar or press ALT + L1.

In Language Configuration screen, select the language from the List of Languages.2.

The interface displays in the language selected.3.

Keyboard Configuration in Tally

Tally provides the exceptional option of choosing between multiple keyboards.

Tally’s Phonetic Keyboard1.

Operating System Keyboard2.



Tally's Phonetic Keyboard

Tally’s Phonetic keyboard is useful for those who speak the language but do not know how to type the same usingthe keyboard.

This keyboard will allow you to spell the term phonetically based on how it sounds and Tally will display the datain the language selected after transliteration. The keyboard layout is the same as that of the English characters,which makes it user friendly and comfortable.

With a phonetically enabled keyboard, you can enter the information or data in any Indian language to generatebills, invoices and other reports.

A few examples using Tally’s Phonetic Keyboard are given below:

Word in English Keys for PhoneticRepresentation of Indic

Languages

Purchase parachej

Sales sels

Item AiiTam

Inventory inventrii

Conveyance Kanveyns

Salary selarii

Postage & Telegram posTej end Teligram

Commission kmiishiin

Discount DiskaunT

Debtors DeTaras

Creditors kreDiiTars

Capital kaipiTal

Ledger lejar

Ramjilal rAmajiilAl

Cash kaish

Shyamlal shyAmalAl

Godown goDAun

Branch braAnch

Loan lon

Customer kasTamar

Supplier saplAyar

Company kampanii

Accounts EkAunTas

Key Combinations for Hindi



Vowel Signs

Symbols

Special / Accent Keys



Key Combinations for Bengali

Vowel Signs

Symbols



Key Combinations for Punjabi



Vowel Signs

Symbols

Key Combinations for Gujarati



Vowel Signs

Symbols

Key Combinations for Tamil

Vowel Signs

Symbols



Key Combinations for Telugu

Vowel Signs

Symbols



Key Combinations for Kannada



Vowel Signs

Symbols

Key Combinations for Malayalam

Vowel Signs

Symbols



The Character is presently not supported in Tally.

Key Combinations for Marathi



Vowel Signs

Symbols

Special / Accent Keys



Configuring Masters in F12

Go to Gateway of Tally> F12: Configure> Accts/Inv Info.

Allow Language ALIASES along with Names

This option has a significant value when creating masters like Ledgers and Stock Items , as it enables you toenter aliases in Indic languages along with the Name , as well as the User Interface Language .

For example, create a Stock Item (Cement) in Hindi and Name it in different languages with Aliases . Thescreen displays as shown.

Masters created with more than one Indic language as Name

Masters created in more than one Indic language, when viewed in a Report or Master will display based on the Language Precedence order allotted in Tally.

The default Language Precedence order is English , Hindi , Bengali, Punjabi , Gujarati , Tamil , Telugu,Kannada , Malayalam and Marathi .

For example say you have created the Master in Hindi , Kannada and Gujarati . You can view it in any ofthe three languages, but if you choose to view it in a Report or Master in any other language, then thetransliteration of the Name will appear in Hindi. This is on account of the fact that Hindi appears beforeKannada and Gujarati in the Language Precedence .



Creating, Displaying and Printing in Multi Language

Consider a scenario where a firm based in Maharashtra creates a Sales Invoice in Hindi on 16-6-2006 andissues the same Sales Invoice in Kannada to his customer (e.g. Royal Group ) , which is based inKarnataka .

The Sales Voucher entered in Hindi appears as shown.

To print the Sales Invoice in Hindi .

Press Alt+P to print the voucher.1.

Press Alt+L to get the List of Languages in the Print Language Configuration screen.2.

Select Hindi from the List of Languages .3.

4.

2.

3.

Accept to print the voucher.4.

Preview of Sales Invoice in Hindi will be as shown.



N o t e : You can view the data in any of the Indic languages in Tally, provided the

Masters are made in any one of the Indic languages. Similarly, to view a Master in

English, it must be created in English also apart from the Indic languages.

To preview the Sales Invoice in Kannada:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Daybook > Select the Sales invoice dated 16-6-2006 from the list.

Press Alt+P to print the voucher.1.

Press Alt+L to get the List of Languages in the Print Language Configuration screen.2.

Select Kannada from the List of Languages .3.

3.

Accept to print the voucher.4.

The Sales invoice Print Preview in Kannada displays as shown.



View the Stock Summary of the Stock Items sold to Royal Group in Karnataka , in Kannada. The StockSummary screen displays as shown.

To Manually Setup Language Support

Windows needs to be manually configured for the language that you want to use. All versions of Windows 2000,Windows XP and Windows 2003 operating systems have built-in support for Indic languages.

However, if you have not selected Language Support at the time of installation, you will not be able to use themultilingual feature in Tally.

Click Control Panel from the Start menu or click on My Computer.1.

Double-click the icon Regional and Language Options.2.

In the Regional and Language Options window, select Languages tab.3.

Select Install files for complex script and right-to-left languages (including Thai) underSupplemental language support.

4.

Click Details to display Text Services and Input Languages window.5.

5.

Click Add from Settings to display Add Input language dialog box.6.

Select the language from the Input language drop-down list. Select Hindi as an example.7.

Select Hindi Traditional from the Keyboard layout/IME drop-down list and click OK.8.

Click Apply and OK in Text Services and Input Languages window.9.

10.



8.

9.

Click Apply and OK in Regional and Language Options window.10.

Change Regional Options dialog box is displayed with a prompt to Restart the computer for the changesto take effect.

11.

Click Yes to restart.12.

Windows has now been configured to enter text in Hindi.

Operating System Keyboard

The Operating System Keyboard is used by those who know to read and write in the language of their choice.Entering data in Tally using the Operating System Keyboard is different from using the phonetic keyboard as thekeyboard layout differs.

To configure the Keyboard for an Operating System Keyboard.

Click K : Keyboard from the horizontal toolbar or press ALT +K1.

In Keyboard Configuration screen, select Hindi Traditional (System) from the List of Languages .2.

N o t e : The Languages displayed in the List of Languages for Keyboard Configuration

depends upon Operating System.

Using On-Screen Keyboard in Tally

The On-Screen keyboard is a virtual keyboard which displays on the computer screen. Using the On-Screenkeyboard will familiarise you with the Operating System keyboard’s layout.

Configuring On-Screen Keyboard

Go to Start > Programs > Accessories > Accessibility1.

Select Onscreen Keyboard2.



2.

The On-Screen Keyboard will appear as shown below.3.

Use Alt + Shift to configure the language of choice. For example, if you wish to enter data in Hindi, selectHindi using Alt + Shift or select the same from the Language bar as shown.

4.

The On-Screen Keyboard will appear in Hindi as shown, as you place the cursor on it.5.

5.



Tally Value Pack

Tally Value Pack (TVP) is an annual Product Upgrade Assurance offer for licensed Tally customers. The TVP isavailable only for the current version of Tally being sold in the market. Tally Value Pack has a validity period of 12months.

When you buy a Tally Value Pack, you will get:

Free Upgrade to the next version of Tally1.

Free Major Release Update to new release of Tally2.

Up to 50% discount on Add-On purchases3.

All the above are subject to availability during the validity period of your TVP.

N o t e: Tally Value Pack benefits are subject to change: please visit

w w w . t a l l y s o l u t i o n s . c o m for latest benefits.

For a TVP customer purchasing Add-ons

View Price List

View Price List screen displays the Add-Ons , TVP Customer Price and Your price details of a specific serialnumber It is a display screen and cannot be modified.

Buy

You can make the purchase as per the instructions given for online users and Accept the purchase.

For a TVP customer, Tally displays a text in green as Since you are a TVP customer, you have saved: alongwith an amount. As you are a TVP customer , your purchase is billed at Your Price . The difference betweenMRP and Your Price is the amount displayed in Since you are a TVP customer, you have saved: field.

The MRP is the actual price and the Your Price is the discounted price for purchasing the Add-on.

For a TVP customer, the Shop screen displays as shown:



Shop

The Shop option in Tally is an interface between Tally and its customer. It allows you to select and purchase Tally Add-Ons using the Online/Offline options.

You can purchase the currencies to buy the Add-Ons from Tally Resellers, distribution partners or TallyAuthorised Service Centres. The Add-Ons include paid modules of Tally, Tally Value Pack, Upgrades andUpdates.

To locate your nearest Tally vendor, visit www.tallysolutions.com

The procedure for using Shop is different for Online and Offline users.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Shop

The Shop menu appears as shown.

Online

Offline



Online

If you are an Online user, Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Shop > Online

The Online menu displays the following options:

1. View Price List

2. Buy

View Price List

View Price List screen displays the Add-Ons and price details for a specific serial number that you haveselected. It is a display screen and cannot be modified.

Buy

When you select the Buy option, the serial number that you are shopping for displays at the top of the screen asYou are shopping for Serial Number: Your Serial Number.

To shop for Add-Ons:

1. Select the currency in the Select Currency field.

2. Select the name of the Category from the list in the Category field.

N o t e : If you are not sure of the Category of Add-ons, select A n y. When you select A n y

from the List of Category, all the A d d - O n s will be displayed at once instead of being

displayed Category-wise.

3. Select the Add-On that you wish to purchase from the list, Name of Add-on. The Add-ons for the selectedcategory are displayed in the list.

N o t e :

1. If you are shopping for Tally Value Pack along with other A d d - O n s ,, select T a l l y

Value Pack first from the list of Add-Ons. Then you will know the exact currency value

needed for shopping.

2. When you select the Name of Add-On from the list, the Qty, TVP Customer Price

and Your Price of the A d d - O n s will be displayed automatically against the respective

fields. These fields cannot be modified.

4. Select End of List once you finish selecting Add-Ons

5. For a non TVP customer, Tally displays a text in red as If you were a TVP customer, you could havesaved along with the amount. As you are a non TVP customer, your purchase is billed at Your Price. Thedifference between Your Price and TVP Customer Price is the amount displayed in If you were a TVPcustomer, you could have saved field.

6. The TVP Customer Price is the discounted price for the Add-on applicable for a TVP Customer. Your Price isthe price that you need to pay for the Add-on.

7. After selecting all the Add-Ons, enter the TallyCurrency key No. (that is displayed on the currency card) inthe TallyCurrency key No. field and press Enter.

8. Select Yes to accept the transaction. To cancel, select No.

9.A Congratulations message is displayed to confirm your purchase.

N o t e : The TallyCurrency Key No. used and the remaining amount (if any) is displayed

along with the C o n g r a t u l a t i o n s note. If there is an inadequate balance, you will get

TallyCurrency Key No. has been fully consumed message.

10. Press any key to proceed.

11. The license gets automatically updated (for an Online User) in the background and a License UpdatedSuccessfully message is displayed.



Offline

If you are an offline user, you need to first generate a request file.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Shop > Offline

Buy

Selecting the Buy option displays a message tally_req.lic is generated successfully. This generates atally_req.lic and stores it in the Tally folder.

1.

Copy the tally_req.lic into a floppy or a CD. Paste tally_req.lic file into the Tally folder of a computerconnected to the Internet.

2.

Run Tally. Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Shop > Offline3.

The Offline menu is displayed.

4. Once tally_req.lic is copied in the Tally folder in a computer connected to the Internet, two additional menus,View Price List and Send External Shopping Request are displayed in the Offline menu.

View Price List

View Price List screen displays the Add-On and price details (i.e., TVP Customer Price and Your Price) for yourselection. It is a display screen and cannot be modified.

Send External Shopping Request

To shop for the Add-ons, select Send External Shopping Request

The Shop screen is displayed, showing the Serial Number of the Tally license for which the tally_req.lic isgenerated at the top of the screen. Make the purchase as per the instructions given for Online users and Acceptit.

N o t e :

1. You can Shop Offline even if T a l l y runs on Educational Mode.

2. If you are shopping for Tally Value Pack along with other A d d - O n s, select T a l l y

Value Pack first from the list of A d d - O n s. Then you will know the exact currency value

needed for shopping.

To update the license

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Licensing > Offline > Send External Request

You get a message indicating Offline Response file tally_resp.lic is generated successfully. This generates atally_resp.lic in the Tally folder.

1.

Copy the tally_resp.lic file to the computer, which has generated the request file (tally_req.lic).2.

Run Tally. Tally will read the response file (tally_resp.lic) from the Tally folder and a message LicenseUpdated Successfully is displayed.

3.



List Add-Ons

To view the Add-Ons purchased:

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure> Licensing > List Add-Ons

By default, Tally will list the Add-Ons enabled for the Serial Number and also displays the Add-Ons purchasedusing the Shop feature. The Name column displays the names of the Add-Ons and the Add-On Expiry columndisplays the expiry date of the Add-Ons.



Operations Configuration

Configuring has to be done before creating and starting work on the company. Click F12: Configure button orpress F12, which will bring up the operations configuration menu:

General


The Configuration settings of Country Details, Style of Names, Style of Dates and Configuration of Numbers areself-explanatory. Other configuration options are explained.

Show Monthly reports with Graphs

This option is set to Yes by default. The reports are configured to display the Graphs in accordance with thenumeric information. The graphs in reports will not be displayed if this option is set to No.

Use separate Menu for Final A/c Statements

By default, this option is set to No. If you set this to No, Tally displays the final statements of Balance Sheet andProfit & Loss A/c directly on the Gateway of Tally menu. However, if you set this option to Yes, the finalstatements of Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss A/c can be accessed from Gateway of Tally > Final Accountsinstead of directly from the Gateway of Tally menu

Ignore errors & continue during data import



By default, this option is set to No. Set this option to Yes, to import even if an error is reported.

Export Base Currency Symbol along with Amount

This facilitates the user to export the currency symbol along with the amount while exporting in XML format.

Show tables with Masters only in Current Language

If this option is set to Yes, Tally displays all the Masters ( Default Masters and User Defined) in the languageselected in the L: Language configuration.

Setting this option to No, Tally displays the default list of Masters in English and in any of the Indian languagesselected in the L: Language configuration.

N o t e :

* For further details on Multilingual Feature, refer to Using Multilingual Feature in Tally.

* International users can enable Indian VAT by selecting I n d i a / S A A R C from the List of

C o u n t r i e s in the Use Accounting terminology field.

Numeric Symbols

This enables you to set the number styles. The default styles and symbols are specified. However, you have theoption of overwriting them in the respective fields according to your preference.

For example, change negative sign from (-) to (+).



Accts/ Inventory Info.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Accts/Inventory Info.

This allows you to configure the details you want in the masters over and above those provided. You can accessthe F12: Configure screen from Accounts Masters and Inventory Masters when required.

Master Configuration

This section allows you to set the multilingual features in the Masters Creation screen.

Allow Aliases along with Names

Set this option to Yes to enter the Alias names in the Master Creation screen.

Allow Language Aliases along with Names

Set this option to Yes to enter the Alias Names in any of the Indic Languages.

Accounts Masters

This section allows you to set the accounting features in the Masters Creation screen.

Allow Advanced Entries in Masters

Set this option to Yes, to enter some of the advanced information in the Ledger Master creation and the GroupCreation screens. This information will reflect in the reports.

Add Notes to Ledger Accounts

Set this option to Yes and a new field to enter Notes appears in the Ledger creation screen. This field allows youto enter any additional information about the ledger you are creating.

Use Addresses for Ledger Accounts

Set this option to Yes to enter the Mailing Details in the ledger Creation Screen. It is useful if you are creating aCustomer ledger, a Party ledgers or Bank Accounts. Mailing Details like Name, Address, State, PIN Codeand PAN / IT No. is entered in this section.

These details will appear in the reports, when they are printed.

Use Contact Details for Ledger Accounts

Set this option to Yes to specify the details of Contact person (if any) in the ledger creation screen.

You can specify the details like the Name of the Contact Person, Telephone Number, Fax Number and the E-Mail Id.

N o t e: The Contact Details for the ledgers appear only if Use Addresses for Ledger

A c c o u n t s is set to Y e s

Inventory Masters

This section allows you to specify the required Inventory features in the Masters Creation screen.

Allow Advanced entries in Masters

Set this option to Yes to specify the Behaviour of the Stock Item, in the Stock Item Creation screen. Forfurther details, please refer the section Stock Items.

Use Part Numbers for Stock Items

Set this option to Yes, to enter the Part Numbers of the Stock Item.

Use Description for Stock Items

Set this option to Yes to enter any Description about the Stock Item in the Stock Item Creation screen.

Use Remarks for Stock Items

Set this option to Yes to enter your remarks or comments about the stock Item.

Specify Default Ledger Allocation for Invoicing

Set this option to Yes, to Set or Modify Default Ledgers for Invoicing for the Stock Item.



This allows you to allocate default Sales/Purchase Ledgers account which will be credited when a Stock Item isinvoiced.

Use Alternate Units for Stock Items

Set this option to Yes to define an Alternate Unit for the Stock Item.

Allow Std. Rates for Stock Items

Set this option to Yes, to specify the Standard Purchase Cost and Standard Sales Price of the Stock Item.

Allow Component list details (Bill of Materials)

Set this option to Yes, to define the Components (BOM) for the Stock Item. For further details, refer to thesection Bill of Material.

Use addresses for Godowns

Set this option to Yes, to enter the godown address in the Godown Creation Screen.

Voucher Entry

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Voucher Entry

Configure different features of your voucher entry screen.

Other features of convenience, e.g., Use Payment/Receipt as Contra are enabled to effect transactions for fundstransfer. Tally allows such transactions only through Contra Vouchers.

Take another instance where, you are not permitted to use Journal Vouchers for Cash or Bank transactions.However, recognising exceptional needs, you can override that restriction by enabling the facility here.

Refer Allow Alteration of TDS Rates and Values for more information.



Invoice/Orders Entry

Configure details for Invoices, Sales and Purchase Order entry.

The options are country specific to International. The options are in the form of questions to which you need tostate Yes or No. They have also been explained in detail at the relevant invoice entry sections.

For India/SAARC, the options would automatically change to Use Excise Format instead of Use IntrastatDetails provided you have set your General Configuration accordingly.

The option to Use Excise Duty or British Style VAT depends on the General configuration.

Go to F12: Configure > General

Set Use Accounting Terminology of to International to British Style VAT handling apart from Asiancountries.

F11: Features > F2: Inventory will now display the option Prepare and Follow British Style VAT Returns .

Select India/SAARC in F12: Configure > General for Excise Duty handling.

F11: Features> F3: Statutory & Taxation displays an option Follow Excise Rules for Invoicing .

For additional information on setting up Excise Duty/British Style VAT refer to Activate Company Features(F11)



Printing

The printing option allows you to configure the printing of Voucher, Invoice and Statement layouts before printing.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Printing

General

This configuration is applicable for all print reports.

Print Date & Time of Report

This option enables printing of system date and time on each report. These are printed on the top right corner ofthe report as a control mechanism. It should not be confused with the date range of the report.

Note: Vouchers and Invoices are not reports.

Print State and PIN Code with Address

By default, this option is set to No. Set this option to Yes, to print the reports with State and PIN Code detailsentered in the company Creation screen.

N o t e : If you already have a company created with State and PIN Code in the address field,

then you need to set this option to N o.

Stop printing Vertical Lines/Borders: Set this to Yes to avoid printing of vertical lines and borders in dot-matrix printer. This helps in faster printing.

Standard Space on Top of pages (Inches): This field is set to 0.5 inch by default. However, you can change itas per your requirement.

Settings for ‘Quick Format’

Tally prints in two formats – Neat and Quick. Neat printing takes advantage of fonts of the printer and is thedefault. It also compresses long data like long names and amounts and auto-fits them according to space.

Quick printing is suitable for Dot Matrix printers where speed is an issue. Hence, quick printing does not printfancy fonts. The auto-fit facility is, thus, not possible in quick printing.

Therefore, it will truncate data longer than the allotted space. To prevent this, set the two fields under Settingsfor ‘Quick Format’ to Yes.



Purchase Voucher/Invoice and Purchase Order

Purchase voucher/Invoice, Receipt Note and Purchase Order are printed to maintain continuity in vouchernumbers and to provide a document to record a transaction. To configure, select Purchase Transactions underPrinting.

Purchase Voucher/Invoice

Purchase Orders

Purchase Orders are required to be printed and sent to suppliers.



Receipt Notes

Receipt Notes are entered in the same format as Delivery Notes, and if Purchase Orders are enabled, the details ofthe order would automatically get filled-up. Further, Purchase Invoices would also auto-fill with the Receipt Noteor Purchase Order details as relevant.

Payment /Receipt/Journal Vouchers, Credit Note/Debit Note

Configure the dimensions and details as per your requirements to print

The above options pertain to Payment Vouchers. The options for Receipt vouchers, Journal/Contra,Debit/Credit Note are similar.

Amount in words

To print the amount in words on the Payment, Receipt, Journal, Credit Note/ Debit Note voucher in anylanguage apart from the language selected as User Interface:

Select the Output Language at the Report Generation screen from the voucher

Click F12: Configure and set Print Amount in Words to Yes and Print Amount in Words in English toNo for the amount to appear in the selected Output Language

N o t e: If you set Print Amount in Words and Print Amount in Words in English to

Y e s, the amount will appear in E n g l i s h only.

Sales Invoice, POS Invoice, Delivery Note and Sale Order/Quotation

Printing configuration for all Sales vouchers like Sales Invoices, POS Invoice, Delivery notes and SalesOrders/Quotations are accessible through Sales Transactions under Printing menu. Each transaction type canseparately configured and selected from the sub-menu.

The different configuration screens are as given:

Sales Invoice

This is the configuration for the Sales invoice. You can change the setting as per your requirement.



Details of the above configuration options have been discussed in Invoice Entry section.

POS Invoice

The Print Configuration for a POS Invoice displays as shown. You can configure the options as per yourrequirement.

Delivery Note

Delivery Note appears similar to Invoices. Fields like Rate and Amount may be required by some companies to beprinted out on Delivery Notes. Select the options as relevant to your company.

Sales Order/Quotation

Sales Orders, if marked Optional, during voucher entry, are printed as Quotations.



Reminder Letters

The Reminder Letters feature in Tally can be used to remind any customer or supplier of their overdue bills.

Space to leave on top (default 0.5 inch) and Space to leave on left (default 0.5 inch) : These fields areset to 0.5 inch by default. However, you can change it as per your requirement.

Information in First Paragraph and Information in Second Paragraph: The information provided in thesetwo fields can be used as such, modified or extended.



Confirmation Statements

Confirmation Statements are not the same as Reminder Letters. They serve to confirm the account balanceswith customers, suppliers, lenders and borrowers. This is used mostly at the end of a period but can be producedat anytime.

Space to leave on top (default 0.5 inch): This field is set to 0.5 inch by default. However, you can change it asper your requirement.

Titling for ‘Subject’ in Letter: The default text is Confirmation of Accounts. You have the option of changingit as per your requirement.

Information in First Paragraph and Information in Second Paragraph: The information provided in thesetwo fields can be used as such or modified or extended.

Sign-off used for the Letter: The default text can be changed in this field also.

Introduction

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Connectivity

The Connectivity menu consists of three options.

Sync Configuration

Proxy Configuration

Auto-dial Configuration



Sync Configuration

This configuration is usually done when data from different locations needs to be synchronized. For detailedinformation, refer to Synchronization section.

N o t e : Sync Configuration option in F 1 2 : C o n f i g u r e screen will appear only if you enter

clientserver=client or clientserver=server in Tally.ini file.

Proxy Configuration

This configuration is usually done when data from different locations needs to be synchronized and whileactivating the License. Proxy configuration is required for those users who are behind a proxy server and useSynchronization feature of Tally as a Client. If TallyClient accesses a TallyServer through a proxy server, thenproxy server details must be provided.

If your computer is on a network and connected to the Internet.

Use HTTP Proxy Server: Select Yes if your computer is connected to a proxy server

URL: Enter the IP address and port number of the proxy server used. Ensure that the IP address and Port isseparated by a colon. For eg. 198.162.2.1:8080

Authentication Required: Set this to Yes if you want authentication. Specify a user name and password in therespective fields.



Auto-Dial Configuration

Auto Dial configuration feature can be enabled, when you are in need of any of the Internet Services whileworking on Tally, like Licensing or Synchronization.

Gateway of Tally> F12: Configure> Connectivity > Auto-Dial Configuration

Set Use Specific Dial-Up Connection to Yes.

In the field Dial-Up Connection, select the appropriate Dial-Up Connection from the List of Dial-UpConnections.

Once when this configuration is enabled, you get connected to the internet spontaneously.

N o t e : The Auto Dial Configuration is only for those users who have Dial-Up Connections.

Licensing

This option allows you to activate your Tally License Online or Offline

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Licensing

The screen appears as shown:

List Add-ons allows you to view the additional features enabled in Tally.

Online option allows you to activate Tally License Online. The term online indicates that your computer isconnected to the Internet.

Offline option allows you to activate Tally License Offline. The term Offline indicates that your computer is notconnected to the Internet.



Shop

This option allows you to Shop for Tally Add Ons Online or Offline

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Shop


Company Information

The first step to get started in Tally, is to Create a Company . The initial screen appears as shown:



The Gateway of Tally screen is separated into six sections, namely Title Area , Horizontal Button Bar , MainArea (Ctrl+M) , Calculator Area (Ctrl+N) , Button Bar and the Bottom Pane .

The elements of the Gateway of Tally screen are explained below:

Title Area

Title Area contains the Tally Copyright and Tally website link . You can access the Tally website directly fromthe Tally screen. You must have access to the Internet and Internet Explorer Web browser installed on yourcomputer.

Click on the http://www.tallysolutions.com link on the top frame of the screen to enter our website. The linkappears in all screens of Tally.

Tally logo is displayed at the centre of the Title Area.

The Product type (Tally Gold, Tally Silver, Tally Bronze or Educational) and Tally Serial Number appears on theupper-right corner. The software serial number is usually a unique number.

Horizontal Button Bar

The Buttons, Print (Alt+P), Export (Alt+E), E-mail (Alt+M), Upload (Alt+O), Language (Ctrl+L), Keyboard(Ctrl+K) and Help (Alt+H) can be seen in the Horizontal Button Bar .

Bottom Pane

The Bottom Pane contains the Version number, Release details (every time a new release of Tally is made, it isidentified with a different release name like Release 3.14) and the Current Date (the date configured in thecomputer). The name of the day, date, month and year is displayed in DD , MM and YYYY format on the right-hand side.

System time (the time configured in the computer) appears on the lower-right corner in Hour: Seconds: Minutes(HH/MM/SS) format.

The Path appears in the lower left corner in the Bottom pane.

Close Button

The Close Button in the upper right corner functions similar to the use of ‘Esc’ in Tally. It brings you to back to theGateway of Tally from any screen.

Minimise Button

The Minimise button performs the standard Windows Operating System’s function (Windows 95 onwards),

http://www.tallysolutions.com

allowing you to minimize Tally and work on other applications. To restore Tally, click on the Tally icon on thetaskbar.

Main Area (Gateway of Tally)

The Main Area is separated into two:

Left-hand side area1.

Right-hand side area2.

The left-hand side provides information on Current Period , Current Date and List of Selected Companies(Name of the company and the date when last entry has been made).

The right-hand side displays the Company Information menu such as Select a Company, Create a Company,Backup a Company or Restore a Company and so on.

Hot Keys

Hot keys are capitalized and are red in colour on all the menu screens. Using the Hot Keys in the Company InfoScreen will take you to that particular screen or display the sub - menus within that Option.

Calculator Area

Press [Ctrl + N ] to activate the calculator. Calculator Area is used for calculator functions. Any type ofindependent calculation can also be done using the calculator.

Button Bar

The buttons are designed to make the work easier and faster and vary from one screen to another based on thescreen functionality. They appear on the right hand side of the Tally screen and the inactive buttons are greyedout. You can either click these buttons or press the shortcut keys to access the relevant screen.

The following are some of the buttons and their functions:

Help (Alt+H) – To access Tally's online context-sensitive help

F1: Select Cmp – To select the company from the List of Companies and access data from other data directorieson the local system or through the network. You can also access the Directory field by pressing [Backspace].

F12: Configure – To access the configuration settings to manage the information entered in Tally. For example,you can access the General Configuration to set country specific defaults, before creating a company.

Buttons where a character or function key is underlined indicates that you have to press underlined character orthe function key along with [ALT ] key.

Buttons where a character or function key is double underlined indicates, you have to press the character or thefunction key along with [CTRL ] key.

F1: Press the shortcut function key [F1] to select a company

F1 : Press [ALT+F1] to shut a company

F8 : Press [CTRL+F8] to select the Credit Note voucherF8 : Press [CTRL+F8] to select the Credit Note voucher



Ctrl+M: Press Ctrl+M to access the Gateway of Tally.

Ctrl+N: Press Ctrl+N to access the Calculator/ODBC Server frame

Country Specific Configuration

The options available are Country Details, Style of Names, Style of Dates, Configuration of Numbers andOther Options.


The Configuration settings of Country Details, Style of Names, Style of Dates and Configuration of Numbers areself-explanatory. The prime differences are in the use of terms like VAT in Europe and Sales Tax in Asia andAmerica that have to be configured before creating a company. Refer the section Operations Configuration fordetails on the other fields.



Creating a Company

C reating a Company involves providing basic information about the company whose books of accounts are to bemaintained in Tally.

Go to Gateway of Tally > (Alt+F3) Company Info. > Create Company

Above is displayed an International Company Creation Screen. Note that the State and PIN Code fields are notavailable.

The screen for India/SAARC would be:

A detailed explanation on each field is given:

Directory

T he data path where you want the company to be created is specified in the Directory field.

This field is skipped by default when you create the company in the data path given in the Tally.INI file. If youwant to change it, use the backspace key and modify it to the path required.

This is referred to as the TallyAnywhere concept – which is the ability to create/load companies in separatedirectories. The Directory field is displayed while selecting Select , Create , Backup , Restore and Rewriteoptions for a company. By default, the cursor will skip the field, presuming that you wish to use the default datadirectory for your work. You may press Backspace to give a new path and work from there.

For example, the default Tally data directory could be C:\TALLY\DATA . You may now wish to create a newcompany on C:\TALLY\PERSONAL , and some other companies on C:\TALLY\BRANCHES . The next time, thedefault directory displays C:\TALLY\DATA , and if you wish to work on the data of your branches, pressBackspace and enter C:\TALLY\BRANCHES for the directory name. This displays the companies whose data isstored in that location in the List of Companies . You can even give the path of a network server or any otherstorage device.

Name



Enter the name of the company whose books are being opened. If you are a professional accountant and aremaintaining the books of your clients, give the Client Company's name.

Mailing Name and Address

In addition to the Company Name, Tally provides the facility to enter the Mailing Name field. It displays theCompany Name by default. You may change it as required, if the mailing name is different from the CompanyName. The mailing name and address details are picked up for inclusion in any report that needs the companyname and address as heading. For example:Balance Sheets, Statement of Accounts, and so on.

Tally's reports print the mailing name and address as given:

T ally does NOT restrict the number of lines for the address details. Tally accommodates all the enteredinformation and vertically compresses the same.

N o t e :

1. In the space provided for the A d d r e s s details, observe the vertical compression as

compared to the Mailing Name field where there is horizontal compression.

2. You can specify any length for the mailing name and you are permitted to give any number

of lines for the address. The information is completely visible.

3. Tally handles compressed information correctly while printing. It adjusts the reports

a c c o r d i n g l y .

Statutory compliance for

Select the Country from the List of Countries . The Statutory Features and Base Currency Symbol areenabled in accordance with the country selected. For example, if the accounts belong to a company in India, thebase currency would be Indian Rupees. The Base Currency will appear with respect to the Country selected.

Selecting India from the List of Countrie s brings up a State , Pin Code and Telephone No . field.

State

You can select the appropriate state from the predefined list.

PIN Code

Specify the PIN Code (Postal Index Number) of the specified address.

Telephone

Enter the Telephon e number.

E-mail Address

Enter the E-mail address that will be used to e-mail documents, reports and data from Tally.

Currency

Currency symbol is the symbol of the base currency, that is, the currency that will be used to maintain the booksof account.

The symbol Rs. appears by default for India/SAARC Companies and the field is left blank for InternationalCompanies.

Maintain

Tally displays a drop down for the Type of Company with two options Accounts only and Accounts withInventory

Select Accounts only if you do not have any inventory transactions (suitable for professionals and corporateoffices).

However, at a later date (if required) you can choose to alter the information as Accounts-with-Inventory .Select Accounts-with-Inventory , to maintain both financial accounts and inventory.

Financial Year From

In most countries, the books of accounts of a company are maintained for a stipulated period like, 12 months, 15months, and so on. This stipulated period is referred to as the Financial Year .

The stipulated period of the financial year is 12 months in most countries. Tally automatically considers 12 monthsfrom the date you give here as the Financial Year.

For example, if you enter April 1, 2005 as the date, the Financial Year will be from April to March ending withMarch 31, 2006. If you enter October 1, 2005 as the Financial Year From then the financial year will be fromOctober 2005 to September 2006 ending with 30th of September every year.

Tally allows you to maintain data for multiple years by changing the period ( Alt+F2 ) at the Gateway of Tally .In addition, you can also specify the date of actual establishment of the company (date of incorporation)

Books Beginning From

Tally presumes that you wish to maintain books from the beginning of the financial year. Hence, Tally displays thedate given in Financial Year From field automatically.

The date for Books beginning from can be changed, in case of companies, which are incorporated in the middleof the year. If your company is new, you can opt to start the books of accounts from the date of actualestablishment of the company (date of incorporation) but close books according to the Financial Year as specifiedby you. Tally provides the required flexibility in such a case by allowing you to give the date when the books ofaccounts actually began. Tally will open books from this date and close as on the last day of the Financial Year.

For example, if your company is established on August 19, 2005, the opening balances for all the accounts can begiven as on August 19, 2005 even though the Financial Year given is April 1, 2005 (April to March financial year).The company's books will begin on August 19, 2005 and close on March 31, 2006, which ensures smoothtransition to the next year.

This concept can be applied even when you are migrating to Tally from any other system or from a manualaccounting system on any day during the Financial Year. Close books in that other system on the previous dayand start books on Tally from this day. You are allowed to give opening balances of all Ledger accounts includingRevenue accounts.

TallyVault Password

TallyVault is an enhanced security system, which allows for encryption of the company data. Encryption involvesconverting normally accessible Tally information into unrecognisable information, which can only be reconvertedby authorised persons.

Give a password here and repeat the same in the Repeat field. This basically results in the creation of anencrypted company whose information is not accessible to users other than the password holder.



Use Security Control?

Set this to Yes , if you want to initiate a password-protected system to control access to Tally data. Else, set thisto No .

If you opt for security control, Tally offers a comprehensive password based access control to different features ofTally based on authority lists created by the Administrator. (The section on Security Control under Administer Tallycontains details on authority lists)

Name of Administrator, Password, Repeat

Assuming the Tally Vault Password and Use Security Control is set to Yes enter the Name of Administrator, Password and Repeat in the respective fields.

Use TallyAudit Features

Tally Audit allows the administrator or an auditor profile user to track changes in accounting information. If youwish to use this facility, select Yes . Tally Audit will be available only to the administrator/auditor, throughDisplay of Statements of Accounts . It will be discussed in greater detail under the Security Control section inAdminister Tally.

On accepting the company creation screen, if you have specified Tally Vault password, Tally prompts you to enterthe TallyVault password as appears:

Then Tally prompts you to enter the Name of User and Password (if any) .

After verification Tally imports the latest statutory masters. Wait till the screen shows that 100% of import iscomplete.



This completes the Company Creation process in Tally.

An explanation on the fields on the bottom of the Company creation screen follows:

Base Currency Information

The Base Currency Information is found in the bottom frame of the Company creation Screen. Base Currency isthe currency in which your accounts would be maintained. Financial statements are prepared in the base currencyby default and these are normally required to be submitted to local statutory authorities. The Base Currencyinformation in Tally varies with the country selected for Statutory Compliance.

You can record transactions and raise invoices in foreign currency; and also maintain bank accounts or ledgers inforeign exchange, when required.

Base Currency Symbol

The currency symbol given earlier in the Company Creation screen is displayed here automatically.

Tally uses this currency symbol in reports, wherever necessary.

Formal Name

Formal Name is the full name of the currency specified.

The Formal Name for the base currency is set to Indian Rupees for Indian Companies .

Number of decimal places

The number of decimal places for the base currency is set to 2 by default. However, you have the option ofspecifying up to 4 decimal places. Indian currency has 2 decimal places whereas certain other countries require3 decimal places and so on.

Show Amounts in Millions

This is useful for companies, which require reporting the financial statements in millions. This is possible only ifAllow Multi-Currency is enabled in F11: Features .

Is Symbol Suffixed to Amounts

For countries, which specify the symbol after the amount (value) – this facility is provided. For example, Yen isspecified after the amount (5000 Yen) unlike in India where the symbol is specified before the amount (Rs.5000)

Put a space between Amounts and Symbol

This facility is provided to users who require a space between the amount and the symbol. However, putting aspace between the amount and symbol could give an opportunity for misuse incase of cheque printing. Hence, theflexibility to turn this option on and off as required is provided.

Symbol for Decimal Portion

Enter the symbol for decimal portion.

Decimal Places for Printing Amounts in Words

You can specify the number of decimal places for printing the amount in words. This number should be equal to orlesser than the number specified in Number of Decimal places field in company creation or currency masterscreen which will appear in Invoice and Cheque printing screen.

For example, if the currency is expressed upto 3 decimal places, the numeric to be printed in words can berestricted to 2 decimal places

N o t e : The Name of the Company , cannot be translated or transliterated but will appear in



the Language created.

Loading a company

A newly created company loads automatically. However, for subsequent working, you must load or select thecompany you want to work with from the List of Companies. (Select and Load are synonymous). A company canbe loaded in two ways:

Automatically by Tally.1.

Using the Select Company option2.



Tally Loading the Company Automatically

When creating a company, Tally creates a sub-directory under its \DATA directory for the company. The directoryis allotted a number in serial order starting with 0001 (example – 10001, 10002…10009...10020, etc these aresystem generated codes for the company).

In order to automatically load a company, Tally has to be configured appropriately by setting the Tally.ini file(available in the Tally directory).

Ensure that Default Companies is set to Yes and specify the company number which has to be loadedautomatically, for example, Load = 10000

N o t e : You can specify any number here as per the information available in the data directory

( 1 0 0 0 0 or 1 0 0 0 2 or 1 0 0 0 3, e t c )

Example of sub-directories created by Tally for different companies:

Loading a Company using the Select Company option

In order to load a company using the Select Company option, disable the default loading of a company inTally.ini file. Set Default Companies to No OR place a semi-colon before Load = 0001 (company number -placing a semicolon means that the words following it in that line would not be executed. Each line is a separatecommand).

On double-clicking the Tally icon, the screen appears as:

You can use the Select Company option in two ways, from the Company Info. Menu OR by using the buttonF1: Select Cmp (available on the Gateway of Tally screen).



Select Company

Press Enter on Select Company or use the button F1: Select Cmp. Tally displays this screen

Tally displays

Company Name (All the companies created are displayed)1.

System-generated code for each company displayed2.

The Financial Year information relating to the number of years data present in the company3.

N o t e : The system-generated code for each company is displayed to assist you in

identifying which company you wish to work on in case you have multiple companies with

the same name (as displayed in the above screen).

Select the required company to go to the Gateway of Tally for that company.



Gateway of Tally

Gateway of Tally is the screen that appears on selecting a company. The Gateway of Tally menu differs basedon the type of company selected. An Accounts Only Company has a different Gateway of Tally menu from that ofan Accounts-with-Inventory Company.

Gateway of Tally of an Accounts Only Company

The Gateway of Tally menu of an Accounts Only company appears as shown below:

The Gateway of Tally screen is separated into four sections – Title Area , Main Area (Ctrl+M) , CalculatorArea (Ctrl+N) and the Button Bar .

Main Area

The left side of the Main Area gives information on:

Current Period – which is the currently loaded company's accounting period.1.

Current Date – This is the date of the last Voucher Entry for the selected company.2.

3.



1.

2.

List of Selected Companies – This displays the name of the loaded company.3.

The Main Area gives information on:

Creation of Accounting Masters and Importing Master information1.

Creation of Accounting Vouchers and Importing transaction information2.

Viewing and printing financial reports using the information given in Masters and Transactions.3.

Button Bar

The Button Bar displays the following buttons (keys):

Help (Alt + H) – To access Tally's online context-sensitive help1.

F1: Select Cmp – To select a company2.

F1 : Shut Cmp – To shut or close the company3.

F2: Date – To change the current date4.

F2 : Period – To change the period5.

F3: Company – To select a different company.6.

F3 : Cmp Info – To access the Company Info. Menu7.

F11: Features – To access the Company features for a company8.

F12: Configure – To access the configuration settings9.

Note: You cannot load companies with the same name at the same time. The loaded or

selected company will have to be shut first in order to load the other company.

Gateway of Tally of an Accounts-with-Inventory Company

The Gateway of Tally menu of an Accounts-with-Inventory company appears as shown below:

The Gateway of Tally screen is separated into four sections - Title Area , Main Area (Ctrl+M) , CalculatorArea (Ctrl+N) and the Button Bar .

Main Area

The left-hand side of the Main Area gives information of

Current Period – The currently loaded or selected company's accounting period.1.

Current Date – The date of the last Voucher Entry of the selected company (this is NOT the calendar date).2.

3.



1.

2.

List of Selected Companies – This displays the name of the loaded or selected company.3.

Masters – This is for creation of Accounting Masters and Inventory Masters and Importing Masterinformation.

4.

Transactions/Vouchers - This is for creation of Accounting Vouchers and Inventory Vouchers andImporting transaction information.

5.

Reports – This is for viewing and printing financial and inventory reports using the information given inMasters and Transactions.

6.

Button Bar

The Buttons on this screen and their function:

Help (Alt + H) – To access Tally's online context-sensitive help1.

F1: Select Cmp – To select a company2.

F1 : Shut Cmp – To shut or close the company3.

F2: Date – To change the current date4.

F2 : Period – To change the period5.

F3: Company – To select a different company6.

F3 : Cmp Info – To access the Company Information Menu7.

F11: Features – To access the Company features for a company8.

F12: Configure – To access the configuration settings to manage the information in Tally.9.

N o t e : You cannot load more than one company at one time. The loaded or selected

company will be shut first and then the other company is loaded.

Company Info. Menu

The Company Info.(Information) menu appears as shown below::

The menu options in the Company Info. are as follows

Select Company

Allows you to Select or load a company.

Shut Company

Allows you to shut a company.



Create Company

Allows you to create a Company.

Alter

Allows you to alter a company.

Change TallyVault

Allows you to secure the data by providing a TallyVault password.

Backup

Allows you to take a backup of the company data.

Restore

Allows you to restore a data backup.

Shut a Company

Shut a Company is to unload it. It does not mean that you have deleted it. Simply select it again to load andwork on it again.

You can shut a company in two ways – either using the button F1 : Shut Cmp (Alt + F1) or pressing Enter onShut Company menu option on the Company Info. Menu.

The screen appears as shown below:

Select the company to be shut from the List of Primary Companies .



Alter a Company

You can modify any information at any time that is set while creating a company.

Go to Gateway of Tally1.

Select F3 : Cmp Info. (ALT+F3) from the button bar2.

Select Alter and press Enter and the screen appears as shown below:3.

Make the necessary changes in the required fields. To change the password if Use Security Control is set to Yes:

Enter the Name of Administrator.4.

Enter the new password.5.

Re-enter the password in the Repeat field to confirm.6.

Enter the Old Password and Accept the screen to alter the company.7.

Delete a Company

To delete a company, you have to load the company first.

Select F3: Cmp Info. (ALT+F3) from the Gateway of Tally to proceed to the Company Informationmenu.

1.

Select Alter and press Enter.2.

Select the company to be deleted. The Company Alteration screen is displayed.3.

Use Alt + D to delete. Tally will prompt for a confirmation on deleting the company.4.

Press enter to delete the company.5.

N o t e : Deletion of a company is irreversible. The company is permanently deleted from

the system.



Group Company

The books of Account of different companies belonging to the same management or owners are required to beconsolidated to present the financial position of the group of companies as a whole. This is mandatory in manydeveloped countries and currently shareholders would rather know the performance of the group as a whole andnot the performance of individual constituent companies.

Tally makes consolidation of accounts a simple task. You can consolidate the accounts of any number ofcompanies as well as keep them separate. You also have the option of bringing the companies into the group andseparating them at will.

The first step is to create a Group Company, which is simply a name and identity given to the merged accountsof constituent (member) companies of the group. A group company may also include other group companies.

N o t e : Do not confuse the word Group to refer to a member of the group! It simply

contains the consolidated accounts of member companies.

Assume that yours is a global, trans-national organisation (or a 'group') headquartered in the UK havingsubsidiary companies in countries around the world. The group has different lines of business. Let's say thebusinesses are Thread, Fashion Retail, Home Fabrics and Accessories. You would prefer to present your groupaccounts in groups according to their line of businesses, which in turn are grouped accounts of the individualcompanies around the world.

The accounts structure would look something like this:

Creating a Group Company

A group company can be created only for companies that have already been loaded. The first step is to load thecompanies whose accounts are to be grouped. The companies can be loaded automatically if specified in theTally.ini file. Alternatively, select the companies using F1: Select Cmp button, as shown:

Press <ALT>+F3 or click the button [F3 : Create Cmp ] and select Create Group Company

Enter the name of the Group Company (which is mandatory), address and tax details and select the members ofthe group company from List of Companies.

Say, you have selected the two members as shown. Select End of List to complete the selection process



The Group company Thread will be created and loaded. It also becomes the active company. Notice that theconstituent companies are given below the group company and are slightly indented to distinguish the Groupcompany.

You can now display and print Group accounts through the Thread Company.

Altering a Group Company

Use Alter to change/modify the details of a Group Company.

A Group Company is marked with an asterisk.

You can select or reject members using the Alter Mode. Any change will come in to effect only on shutting thegroup company and then reloading it.

The Group Company must contain at least two members.

It is possible to combine accounts of different companies.

Create as many Group companies as you need.

A constituent company can be a member of more than one group.

A group company can also be a constituent of another group company.

N o t e :

* It is advisable not to delete the member company, which belongs to Group Company

* If the member company has a password then without entering the password the Group

Company cannot be opened.

For example, by selecting the two group companies Thread and Fashion Retail, the new group company TheWorld-wide Textiles Inc. becomes the overall holding company, as shown.



Security Control

In an ideal company scenario, there will be more than one person working on Tally. In such a case, not everyperson needs to be given the full access. The head of the department/ Administrator should be able to createdifferent users and assign their rights to them.

Tally has a very customisable security system. You can set up Security Levels and users who are placed at theselevels. The authority levels or Types of Security decides the rights of the users while using Tally.

To create Security Levels

Go to Gateway of Tally, select F3: Cmp Info. > Create/Alter Company 1.

In the Company Creation screen set Use Security Control to Yes.2.

Enter the Name of the Administrator.3.

Enter your Password and reenter the password for verification. The password is not displayed for securityreasons.

4.

Accept Yes to save the changes made.5.

More:

Types of Security (security or authority levels)



Types of Security (security or authority levels)

Tally has two default Security Levels. One is Owner and the other Data Entry. Owner has full access and rightsto all features of Tally, except Tally Audit & Company Alteration screen, which are reserved for theAdministrator alone. Data Entry has restricted rights. You are allowed to create other security levels based onthese pre-defined types and allow or restrict rights as required.

Create a New Security Level

You can create New Security Levels and define task wise access rights. To create New Security Level:

Go to Gateway of Tally, select F3: Cmp Info. > Security Control> Types of Security

The Security Levels screen is displayed as shown below:

Type the New Security Level, e.g. Manager1.

Press [Enter] to display the Level Definition screen2.

More:

The level definition screen



The Level Definition Screen

A brief description on all the fields in the Level Definition screen follows:

Name of security level

This defaults to the name you have created.

Use Basic Facilities of

The default is Owner . You can select the other option Data Entry from the Security List . If the company hasother user defined Security Levels, these are also displayed in the Security List . The new level created will beavailable in the Security List the next time you create a Security Level.

Days allowed for Backdated vouchers

This is the number of days the users of this Level are allowed to create backdated vouchers. Specifying 0 willindicate that back-dated vouchers are not allowed, and 7 will allow the user at this level to insert vouchers goingback 7 days.

Cut-off date for Backdated vouchers.

Specify the date before which users of this Security Level may not create or alter vouchers. This is additionalcontrol over and above the previous Days allowed for Backdated vouchers . This is useful in cases where youhave completed your Tax Assessment for a period and no changes are desired in the data for that period.

Disallow the following facilities/Allow the following facilities

The screen is now divided into two broad columns each having two sub-columns. The left side of the screen is todisallow access to the various options of Tally. The right side allows the Security Level access for the differentoptions.

When the cursor is on an access rights filed, the Type of Access list is displayed. Select an option from the list.The options sought to be controlled like Accounts Masters, Balance Sheet etc. are on the right (the second columnfrom the left)

To disallow access to different options, first select the type of access from the Type of Access list. Then selectthe reports for which the access rights are restricted from the List of Reports . Repeat the procedure till youhave set access rights for different reports. When you select a type of access, this type of access would berestricted for the corresponding report selected. For E.g if you select Full Access for Balance Sheet , the userwill not have any access to Balance Sheet by this security level.

Conversely, under Allow the following facilities , if you select Full Access for Balance Sheet , the user willhave full access.

Select [End of List] at the Type of Access field to complete the process.

You are taken back to the screen Security Levels for Company at a blank field following the one you justcreated. To create the next level, type the name and follow the same procedure. Otherwise press Enter key at theblank field and Accept , Yes to save.



Users and Passwords

To create different users who belong to one or more different Security Levels or Types of Security

Go to Gateway of Tally, select F3: Cmp Info > Security Control > Users and Passwords

The List of Users for Company screen is displayed.

A brief description of all the fields in the List of Users for Company screen follows:

Name: The selected company name is displayed here automatically.

Name of User: Enter the name of the user.

Password (if any): Enter the password if required.

Security Level: Select the security level from the Security List.

N o t e : You need to create Security Levels before creating users or the default security

levels available viz. Owner and Data Entry.

Altering/Displaying Users and Passwords and Types of Security

There is no separate menu option to alter or display Users and Passwords and Types of Security options. Use thesame menu to display or alter user or security level set-up. To delete a User, delete the Name of User andPassword and Accept, Yes to save. Do the same for deleting a security level. If you have defined a user under asecurity level, then the security level cannot be deleted before deleting the users under it.

Tally Audit

Tally Audit provides the capability to the administrator/auditor to track changes in the accounts following hisprevious review. Changes of two areas are very important – changes in Transactions or Vouchers and changesin Ledger Masters. Only changes that affect the integrity of a transaction are considered. For e.g. a change inthe narration does not affect the integrity of a transaction and will not be considered as a change. Any materialchange in a voucher is logged. The name of a ledger account if changed is material and hence it would be tracked.

Tally Audit feature should be enabled while creating the Company and creating Security levels. Only a userdesignated as an auditor or the administrator can view the audit list and act upon it.

To enable Tally Audit:


Select F3: Cmp Info. from the button bar2.

In the Company Creation/Alteration screen set Use Tally Audit Features to Yes.3.

You are not required to make any additional input of data. The authorised user needs to just display Tally Auditlists and may print out the lists. If he is satisfied with the authenticity of the changes, he accepts the changeseither selectively or all of them (by clicking on the relevant button). Once the changes are accepted, they areremoved from the audit list and will not be displayed again.

More:

Viewing TallyAudit Lists



Viewing Tally Audit Lists

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts >Tally Audit

You can view changes made to Vouchers and Ledgers.

More:

Displaying Audit List for Vouchers

Displaying Audit List for Ledgers

Displaying Audit List for Vouchers

T his option tracks changes in vouchers, which are more than 30 days old.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > TallyAudit > Vouchers

The Tally Audit Listing screen is displayed as shown below

The three buttons relevant to the audit list.

F7: Accept one1.

F7 : Accept All2.

F12: Configure3.

F 12: Configure

Select F12: Configure or press [F12] from the Tally Audit Listing screen



Set Show Entered/Altered By to Yes . The listing now incorporates the user's name.

Print the list if necessary. Assess each of the entries for authenticity and accept. To accept the entries one by one,place the cursor bar on the relevant voucher and press F7: Accept One button. This accepts the voucher as validand removes from Tally Audit List. To accept all the vouchers at a time, press F7 : Accept All .

N o t e : Do a disciplined verification of the list so that it is periodically cleared and only

vouchers that are of concern remains. Once you accept an entry it is not available for

listing. Hence it is recommended that you take a print before acceptance.

Displaying Audit List for Ledgers

To display the changes made to Ledger Masters :

Go to Gateway of Tally> display> Statements of Accounts> Tally Audit> Ledgers

The Audit Ledgers screen is displayed. The listing here differs from the vouchers by two ways:

It allows you to display all Ledger Accounts and toggle between the ones that have been changed – (bypressing the toggle button F6:All Accts/Audit List )

1.

The F12: Configure button is not available; but the list displays user names if available. (If you activateTally Audit sometime after you are well through the accounts, the user names will not be displayed. Insuch cases, accept the list after verification. Any changes henceforth, would give the user names).

2.

The modification could be in the Name or in the Opening Balance of the Ledger. The name is considered importantas a creditor's name could be changed to some other name with malafide intentions.

Please note that you need to identify a change even in cases where two names are interchanged. This wouldenable identification of fraudulent transfer of account balances. You can identify the Ledger Account by the IDassigned to each of them. You must first take a print of all the Ledger Accounts with their original ID with whichyou can match subsequent audit lists.



Introduction

The security of data, financial or otherwise, has always been a matter of concern. Most business depend on theconfidentiality of information. Tally Vault is an enhanced security system, which allows for encryption of thecompany data with the most secure method of encryption being used.

Tally Vault ensures that under no circumstances, the original information is available in any form to anyone otherthan the administrator. The technique could be likened to "encryption-decryption-on-the-fly", and the decryptedform of data is never stored in the system. Apart from this, it uses the "non-stored password" mechanism andhighly advanced mechanisms to validate a new user without any prior knowledge of the original password. Thecombination of these facilities ensures that Tally Vault becomes one of the most secure means of informationstorage.



Enabling Tally Vault Password for Existing Companies

Tally Vault password can be given in the Company Creation screen at the time of creating a company. For existingcompanies, which do not have a Tally Vault password, the procedure is:

Load the desired company1.

From Gateway of Tally , select F3 : Cmp Info > Change Tally Vault .2.

The Change TallyVault screen is displayed prompting you to select the company from the List of SimpleCompanies in the Name field. Select the company from the list.

3.

Enter the new Tally Vault password in the New Password field.4.

Re-enter the password in the Repeat New Password field.5.

Once you encrypt the data, the company name no longer becomes visible to anyone and appears as shownbelow:

6.

7.

Now if you select the company, Tally will prompt you for the Tally Vault password.7.

By following the above procedure, one can ensure that data is kept confidential and is available only toadministrator (initiator of the Tally Vault! ).

8.

Changing Tally Vault Password

To change the Tally Vault Password of a company:

Go to Gateway of Tally , select F3 : Cmp Info > Change Tally Vault

The procedure is the same as described in Enabling Tally Vault Password for Existing Companies . Anadditional field Current Password is displayed. Enter the existing password in this field. Enter the new password inthe Repeat Password and Repeat New Password fields and save the changes.



Backup

Tally has a flexible backup mechanism where in you can take a backup of the data from virtually any storagemedium into any other medium.

The more commonly used media are floppy drive, hard disk drive, zip drive, tape drive, etc - installed eitherlocally or on a network. In the backup screen, the source of the backup and the destination of where it has to bestored have to be given and Tally will do as required.

More:

Taking a Backup

Backup Precautions

Taking a Backup

T he procedure for taking a backup is as follows

Go to Gateway of Tally , select F3 : Cmp Info > Backup1.

The Backup Companies on Disk screen is displayed.2.

To change either the Source or the Destination paths, use the [Backspace ] key and change the path asrequired. Specify the paths of the Source and Destination drives. Incase we want to take a backup ontoanother system on the network the Destination path will be \\machinename\drivename\directoryname. Theprocess of backing up data begins when at least one company is selected for the same from the List ofCompanies . To stop selecting companies, select the option End of List , which appears at the top of theselection list.

3.

The backup file is stored as TBK900.001 . If the backup is taken in a medium likely to extend more thanone – for example, floppy, then the extension digits (10001, 10002 and so on) will be stored accordingly.

4.

The Backup screen appears as:

N o t e : If TallyVault password is enabled for a company, Tally will allow you to select

only one company at a time from the list for a backup.



Backup Precautions

Data on a computer is vulnerable to all types of difficulties. Considering the same, it is important that we do notoverlook the importance of regular backing-up of data regardless of the stability of the database. With a littleplanning and forethought, we can ensure that maintenance of the important data is continuous and hassle-free.

Depending on the volume of data entry, an appropriate backup mechanism will have to be devised. One methodof achieving it will be by maintaining a backup directory in the local hard disk or the server (external storagemedia such as the floppy disk, zip diskette can also be used). We can have sub-directories for every day of theweek under the main backup directory and regularly take data backups in the following manner depending on theday of the week.

Monday – C:\TallyBackup\Monday

Tuesday - C:\TallyBackup\Tuesday and so on till Saturday.

N o t e : Tally backup facility is not limited to the Hard Disk drive alone. You can backup

data onto other storage devices also

The above procedure ensures that there exists a reliable data backup at any given time. In order to use thatreliable data backup or bring back the data from that existing data backup you have to use the Restore option.

Important: It is preferable NOT to restore a backup onto the original data directory primarily to ensure that No data is overwritten

unintentionally.

Restore

Restore literally means to bring back. Similar to backing up of data, Tally allows restoring of data from anymedium into any other storage medium. The Restore Companies on Disk screen is displayed as shown below:

More:

Restoring Data:

Restore Precautions



Restoring Data

The procedure for restoring data is as follows

Go to Gateway of Tally, select F3: Cmp Info > Restore1.

The Restore Companies on Disk screen appears. 2.

The Source and Destination paths displayed in the screen are those that were used last.3.

The Source field has to have the appropriate path. It is the path from which you intend to bring back theprevious data. Accepting the path will read the contents of the particular file and will then display the list ofcompanies available.

4.

Select as required and restore the data accordingly.5.

Restore Precautions

It is preferable NOT to restore a backup onto the original data directory primarily to ensure that No data isoverwritten unintentionally.



Split Financial Years

Tally's flexible period less accounting permits entry of data for any number of years. This in itself has tremendousbenefits. However, presence of old data in cases where they are voluminous causes greater overhead on thesystem. Splitting financial years enables you to retain most benefits while overcoming this overhead.

When you split the data, two things happen:

New companies are created for the respective split periods.1.

Full data is retained in the original company.2.

Important pre-split activity

N o t e : Not carrying out these will result in mismatched information.

Before you split data, ensure that:

All unadjusted Forex gains/losses have been fully adjusted by journal entries. Verify that the item does notappear in the Balance Sheet.

1.

There are no Purchase Bills/Sales Bills due. Check the Profit & Loss Account and InventoryStatements – Purchase/Sales Bills Pending. You may account them to the respective party accounts orto respective 'Bills Pending' Account.

2.

Ensure that a backup of the data exists.3.

N o t e : For users of Sales/Purchase Order Processing features: Since open orders are

not carried forward, you should not split data if you do, be aware that you have to enter

the outstanding orders afresh

More:

Splitting Financial Years

Splitting Financial Years

The procedure for splitting financial years is as follows:

Go to Gateway of Tally, select F3: Cmp Info1.

Select Split Company Data.2.

Select the Company whose data is to be split from the List of Simple companies.3.

Tally recommends the split-off date based on the data existing. It is recommended that the Split from dateis set as the beginning of the latest financial year though Tally permits any date.

4.

Splits occur in sets of two periods. Hence, start with the latest. For example to split three year’s data of acompany from 1-1-2003 to 31-12-2005 into three separate 'companies' each with a financial year select thebeginning of the latest financial year (this is what Tally prompts you to do).

5.

On confirming the activity, two new companies will be created – one with data from 1-1-2003 to 31-12-2004, i.e., two years, and the other for 1-1-2005 to 31-12-2005.

6.

Typically, this is all you need to do. Your historical data, whether of 1 or more financial years, will be preserved asone company, and your current financial year, as the other. There is normally no reason or benefit to split theprior years again into separate years. However, should you wish to do so, repeat the above steps for the priorperiod.

All the companies are full companies in their own right. Data can be entered, displayed and altered. Please displayor print the key financial reports (Trial Balance, Balance Sheet, Profit & Loss, Stock Summary etc.) from each ofthe companies for the relevant periods and compare them for accuracy.

Once you are satisfied that you have a successful split, it is advisable to backup the original company ontodiskettes and permanently delete its data from your hard-disk. This will ensure that you do not accidentally use itto enter fresh data.

To delete a company, press Alt+F3 at the Gateway of Tally, select to Alter it, and at the point where you canmodify the Company Information, press Alt+D.

You will also need to alter the names of the two freshly created companies to suit you.



Activate Company Features (F11: Features)

The different features of a company can be selected or modified by F11: Features button. This button is availablein almost all screens of Tally as you might wish to modify it as your requirements change. Unlike F12: Configure, F11: Company Features is specific to the current company only. Therefore, each company may have differentfeatures active. For example, a company in your group may need multi-currency whereas another company maynot. Configuration options, on the other hand, affect all companies maintained in the same Tally directory andsetting configuration for one company will affect other companies in that data directory.

N o t e : Certain features like multi-currency and multi-locations, once set to Y e s , cannot

be modified if the feature has been used. However, other features like Cost Centres

and Bill-wise details can be modified even if they are used. If you reset the option after

having used the feature in transactions, it is advisable to rewrite the company by using

CTRL + ALT + R .

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features

The F11: Features menu displays as shown

The menu consists of the following options.

Accounting Features

Inventory Features

Statutory & Taxation

There are various settings available under Accounting Features , Inventory Features and Statutory &Taxation Features in Company Operations Alteration screen, which determine the information to be keyed induring transaction entries. A discussion on each of the options follows.

Accounting Features

This feature enables you to set the various Accounting Features required for the transaction entries.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features > F1: Accounts

General

Integrate Accounts and Inventory

This option has a significant effect on the Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Account. If set to Yes , it brings thestock/inventory balance figures from the inventory records and provides a drill down to the Stock registers fromthe Balance Sheet.

If set to No , it ignores the inventory books figures and picks up manually entered closing stock balances from theledger account created. This provides the facility to maintain accounts separately and inventory separately.

Stock records often contain compensating errors caused by wrong allocation to items and the like. This featureenables finalisation of financial books without waiting for reconciliation of stocks that may take time.



Income/Expense Stmt Instead of P & L

Enable this option if you need an Income & Expenditure Statement for Non-Trading accounts. Profit & Lossstatements are generally used for trading accounts.

Allow Multi-Currency

Set this option to Yes , if you want to create multiple currencies. The option Currencies is displayed in Gatewayof Tally > Accounts Info. menu only if you set this option to Yes .

Outstandings Management

Maintain Bill wise Details

The Bill-wise facility is turned on by setting this option to Yes . By activating the Billwise feature in F11: Features, the ledger masters under Sundry Debtors and Sundry Creditors automatically displays an additional option calledMaintain balances bill-by-bil l. On setting this option to Yes , you get an additional option Default CreditPeriod .

When you enter details of sales and purchases with Bill-wise turned on, Tally prompts you to identify the invoicewith an appropriate reference number. The reference can then be used to allocate payments to the correct invoiceto maintain an accurate account of outstanding.

(For Non-Trading A/cs also)

If you want to maintain bill wise details for Non-Trading Accounts also, set this option to Yes . Bill wiseDetails for Non-Trading Accounts is useful in those cases where one needs to track either an installment tobe paid or a loan amount to be received over a certain period of time.

Activate Interest calculation

Set this option to Yes to enable Tally to calculate interest automatically based on the interest rate and style ofcalculation specified. Enabling this option allows interest calculation on outstanding balances for any ledgeraccount or on each invoice for the period it is outstanding completely or partly.

Use advanced parameters

The advanced parameters are particularly useful where interest rates change from time to time. Set thisoption to Yes to enable this.

Cost/Profit Centres Management

Maintain Cost Centres

A Cost Center can be defined as a unit of an organization to which transactions can be allocated. When only costsor expenses are allocated to these units, they are referred to as Cost Centres . The Cost Centre feature isactivated by setting this option to Yes .

Use Cost Center for Job Costing

To track all income and expenses for a project, set this option to Yes.

More than ONE Cost category

To create more than one Payroll or Cost Category, set this option to Yes.

Use Pre-defined Cost Centre Allocations during Entry

Set this option to Yes to define Cost Centre Allocations. Refer Set up Cost Centre Classes for more details

Invoicing

Allow Invoicing

Set this option to Yes , to create Sales and Purchase vouchers in invoice format. The advantage of using theinvoice format for sales invoice entry is that it enables automatic calculations of Duties and Taxes accounts.

Enter Purchases in Invoice Format

Set this option to Yes , to make the invoice mode as the default voucher mode for purchase vouchers.

Use Debit/Credit Notes

The Debit Note and Credit Note voucher types are made available only if this feature is set to Yes.

Use Invoice Mode for Credit Notes

Set this option to Yes to create Credit Notes in Invoice Mode.

Use Invoice Mode for Debit Notes

Set this option to Yes to create Debit Notes in Invoice Mode.

Budgets & Scenario Management

Maintain Budgets and Controls

Set this option to Yes, to create multiple budgets. The Budgets menu option is displayed in Gateway of Tally >Masters Info. > Accounts Info. menu only if this option is set to Yes .

Use Reversing Journals & Optional Vouchers

Setting this option to Yes displays the Scenario option in Accounts Info menu. You will now be able to createand alter Scenarios. You can enter the Reversing Journal and make it to Optional for entries not to affect thebooks.



Other Features

Enable Cheque Printing

Set this option to Yes , to enable Cheque Printing. Refer Cheque Printing for details.

Set/Alter Cheque Printing Configuration

Setting this option to Yes , Tally will allow you to Alter the Cheque Printing Configuration

Allow Zero Valued Entries in Vouchers

Set this option to Yes , to allow Zero valued entries in vouchers.

N o t e : You can toggle between the Accounts, Inventory and the Statutory features screen

using F1, F2 and F3 keys or using the options on the Button Bar respectively.

Inventory Features

This feature enables you to set the Inventory Features required for the transactions.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features > F2: Inventory

General

I ntegrate Accounts and Inventory

This field performs the same function as explained in Accounting Features .

Allow Zero Valued Entries in Vouchers

Set this option to Yes , to allow zero valued entries in vouchers.

Storage & Classification

Maintain Multiple Godowns

Set this option to Yes , if you have more than one stock point/storage Locations/ Godowns, and you want to trackstock movement in these Locations. You can create any number of Stock Locations/Godowns. TheGodowns/Locations option is displayed in Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. menu only if you set this optionto Yes. You will be able to know your stocks at each location as well as assign stock movement to one or more



locations during voucher entry.

Maintain Stock Categories

Set this option to Yes , if you wish to create and maintain Stock Categories. This creates a new field Category inthe Stock Item Creation screen.

Maintain Batch-Wise Details

Set this option to Yes , to maintain batch information pertaining to Stock Items. A new field Maintain in Batchesis displayed in the Stock Item Creation screen.

N o t e : Batches should be used where they are small in number and remain constant. Do not

use the batch option for tracking of lots through manufacturing processes. If that is done,

you will soon have a large number of batches that are not deleted. You will not be able to

assign costs to particular lots, as may be the intention.

Set Expiry Dates for Batches

Set this option to Yes , if you want to set expiry dates for the batches. This displays an additional field UseExpiry Dates in the Stock Item Creation screen.

This is useful for businesses that deal in goods that have expiry dates like medicines, food and otherperishables. During voucher entry, date of manufacture of the product by default takes the date of thevoucher. This date can be changed, but not to a date later than the voucher date. Expiry date cannot be adate prior to the voucher date.

Use different Actual & Billed Quantity

Set this option to Yes , if you want to specify quantities, that are different from that delivered/ received, wheninvoicing.

For example, you have delivered goods but some of them are in disagreement. So, your customer wants to beinvoiced only for the undisputed quantity. He/She might consider the rest later and would then like to be invoiced.On the other hand, the rest might be so bad that it is useless even for you to take it back. Hence, you can recordthe fact while raising the invoice without altering the delivery note or passing a rejection entry.

Order Processing

Allow Purchase Order Processing

Set this option to Yes , to create Purchase Orders.

Allow Sales Order Processing

Set this option to Yes , to create Sales Orders.

Invoicing

Allow Invoicing


Enter Purchases in Invoice Format


Use Debit/Credit Notes


Use Invoice Mode for Credit Notes


Use Invoice Mode for Debit Notes


Separate Discount Column on Invoices

This option is active only if Allow invoicing is set to Yes . Set this option to Yes , if you want a separate columnfor discount in invoices.

Purchase Management

Track Additional Costs of Purchase

Set this option to Yes , to obtain a break-up of purchase costs, without the need to separately debit ledgeraccounts for expenses. Typically, on purchases, one is interested in total costs and the breakup is of interest whiledoing analysis (except for expenses like VAT or Modvat, which can be claimed). In such cases, passing ofaccounting entries for expenses will have no consequences other than lengthening your ledgers.

Example :

Purchases from ABC & Co: 10 Pcs of [email protected] = Rs.200. Expenses incurred= Tax-Rs.20, Packing charges –Rs.15.40, Total purchase cost – Rs.235.

If you activate Track additional costs , you can pass the entry in any of the following methods:



From an accounting perspective, both entries are identical. The ledger accounts Purchase Tax and Packing chargesare not debited with the amounts. Hence these figures are reflected only as breakup or analysis figures ofPurchases account. The Actuals figure reveals the total cost incurred on the Purchase and will also affect thestock value.

You may also allocate additional costs on Purchases through subsequent entries or vouchers.

The rules for including subsequent vouchers in purchase costs that Tally follows are:

Basic Cost + Additional costs allocated (if any) + All costs in subsequent vouchers that have zero quantity, up tothe first voucher that has a non-zero quantity.

Sales Management

Use Multiple Price Levels

Set this option to Yes to create Multiple Price Levels. Refer Enable and Create Price Lists for more details.

Additional Inventory Vouchers

Use Tracking Numbers (Delivery/Receipt Notes)

Set this option to Yes , if you want to use tracking numbers to maintain the relation between delivery notes andinvoices/bills. This is available for both purchases as well as sales. Hence, if your business is affected by thissituation either for goods received or goods sold, set this option to Yes . If you set it to No , you will not need thefacility of separate delivery notes recording, as your Purchase and Sales Vouchers would double up as deliverynotes.

Use Rejection Inward/Outward Notes

Set this option to Yes , if you wish to record rejection of goods separately and not through a common Debit Noteor Credit Note.

Prepare and Follow British Style VAT Returns

If the Country Specific Configuration is set to International in the F12 Configure , then an additional fieldPrepare and Follow British Style VAT Returns is displayed.

Set this option to Yes , to follow British Style VAT Returns. Unlike Excise Duty, this option simply controls the VATReturn preparation. More ledger level set up may be required, which is discussed under UK VAT Analysis .

The Company VAT Returns screen is displayed.

If you deal with EEC countries, select a group for the fields Group Name under which ‘EEC Debtors’ are Classifiedand Group Name under which ‘EEC Creditors’ are classified from the list.

It is advisable to group your EEC Customers separately under a sub-group under Sundry Debtors. Likewise, groupEEC Suppliers under a separate sub-group of Sundry Creditors. Take care to group only VAT registered companiesin these groups as they would affect Box 8 and 9 as well as the EC Sales List. Unregistered companies orindividuals (Distance Sales) should be grouped separately and treated like UK companies.)

If you do not deal with EEC countries, Select Not Applicable .

Statutory & Taxation

This feature enables you to set the Statutory Features required for the Company Operations. This option isenabled only if a country is selected from the list of countries under the field Statutory Compliance for in theCompany Creation screen ..

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features > F3: Statutory & Taxation



Note: The different features are available depending on the country you have selected

in the Company Creation screen.

The following features are available on selecting India in the Company Creation screen.

Enable Dealer – Excise (Set/Alter Dealer – Excise Details)

Set these options to Yes , to enable/alter the Excise for Dealers feature. Refer Excise for Dealers for furtherinformation.

Follow Excise rules for Invoicing

Set this option to Yes , to follow Excise rules for invoicing. The Company Excise Details screen is displayed asshown:

Provide the above Excise information, for it to be printed on invoices and Accept , Yes to save.

Enable Value Added Tax (VAT)

Set/Alter VAT Details

Set these option to Yes , to enable the VAT features for the company. Refer Value Added Tax for more details.

Enable Service Tax

Set/Alter Service Tax Details

Set these option to Yes to enable the Service Tax features for the company. Refer Service Tax for furtherdetails.

Enable Tax Deducted at Source (TDS)

Set/ Alter TDS Details

Set these option to Yes to enable the TDS features for the company. Refer TDS for further details.

Enable Tax Collected at Source (TCS)

Set/Alter TCS Details

Set these option to Yes to enable the TCS features for the company. Refer TCS for further details.

Enable Fringe Benefit Tax (FBT)

Set/Alter FBT Details

Set these option to Yes to enable the FBT features for the company. Refer FBT for further details.

Tax Information

Set this option to Yes to enter the Tax details of the Company.

Local Sales Tax Number

The Local Sales Tax Number entered during the Company Creation is automatically displayed in this field.

Inter-State Sales Tax Number

The details given here comprises of a number and date of registration (in India). This information, if given, can beprinted on invoices.

It is not compulsory to give this information and you may leave it blank.



PAN/ Income – Tax Number

The PAN/ Income Tax Number is the number allotted by the Income Tax Authorities. This number comprises of10 digits and may be alphanumerical.

The information entered here will appear in Account Confirmation Statements. It is NOT compulsory to providethis information – this field can also be left blank.

Introduction

Accounts Info menu lists the masters through which you can provide Tally the details of your company’s accounts.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info.

More:

Main functions in Masters menu



Configuring F12: Configure and Setting F11: Features

F12: Configure and F11: Features > Accounting Features help you to organize the information and the levelof details as per requirement. You can modify/alter the settings in F12: Configure and F11: Features at anypoint of time.

F12: Configure

To set F12: Configure for Accounts and Inventory Masters

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Accts/Inv Info.

By default, Accounts/Inventory Masters settings are set to No. You can set the features that you may require toYes. Typically, they are additional fields that appear during Masters creation which enable you to obtain moreinformation and detailed analysis.

Refer Accts/Inv Info Configuration for more details.

F11: Features

There are various settings available under Accounting/Inventory/Statutory Features, which determine theinformation that needs to be entered in transaction entries. Refer Activate Company Features for more details



Main Functions in Masters Menu

Accounts Information contains the masters. Each master has create, alter and display functions.

Single Group option is useful when you wish to work on one Group at a time. Multiple Group option is very usefulwhen you are working on many sub-groups at a time and saves a lot of time. Once a sub-group is created, itbehaves exactly like a Group.

Create

The Create option is used to create new masters. Any modification to the masters can be done only through Altermode.

Display

The Display option is used to view the Master information. Master information cannot be modified in Displaymode.

Alter

The Alter option allows you to view and make the necessary changes to the master information. This does notallow creation of masters.

Introduction

Tally follows the modern way of managing accounts called 'Single Ledger' concept of accounting. This is in directcontrast to Subsidiary Ledger Accounting. All financial entries are made using ledgers or account heads. Ledgeraccounts are created to identify transactions.

The single ledger concept avoids the need for sub-ledgers and corresponding control accounts in General Ledger.Tally allows you to group ledger information to generate meaningful reports that are compliant with laws. Groupsin Tally classify and identify account heads according to their nature. This helps in presenting summarizedinformation.

Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Groups

Classification of Account Heads

Usually, grouping of accounts is done only when reports are needed. This may result in delay in preparing thereports. Tally allows you set up chart of accounts.

You can group the ledger accounts while creating them. This will enable your reports and statements to reflect thedesired classification at any point. In Tally, you can also re-group the ledgers (with some minimal restrictions) ifre-classification is necessary. Re-grouping becomes necessary whenever there is a change in the nature ofinformation. However, re-grouping can be done only by users who have authorised rights.

At the highest level of grouping, accounts are classified into capital or revenue — specifically into assets, liabilities,income and expenditure. Based on mercantile accounting principles, Tally provides a set of reserved groups andallows you to modify their names or create sub-groups.

Sub-Groups

A Sub-Group behaves exactly like a group and is created under a group.



Concept of Sub-Groups

Groups have a hierarchical structure. The main group of accounts that determine the entire accounting and theirpresentation are the asset, liability, income or the expenditure. These main groups ascertain whether a ledgeraffects Profit & Loss Account as a revenue item or if it affects the Balance Sheet.

The Reserved Primary Groups and subgroups are:

Primary Groups of Capital Nature

1. Capital Account

a) Reserves and Surplus [Retained Earnings]

2. Current Assets

a) Bank Accounts

b) Cash-in hand

c) Deposits (Asset)

d) Loans & Advances (Asset)

e) Stock-in-hand

f) Sundry Debtors

3. Current Liabilities

a) Duties and Taxes

b) Provisions

c) Sundry Creditors

d) Fixed Assets

4. Investments

5. Loans (Liability)

Bank OD Accounts [Bank OCC Accounts]

a) Secured Loans

b) Unsecured Loans

6. Suspense Account

7. Miscellaneous Expenses (Asset)

8. Branch/Divisions

9. Sales Account

10. Purchase Account

11. Direct Income [Income Direct]

12. Indirect Income [Income Indirect]

13. Direct Expenses [Expenses Direct]

14. Indirect Expenses [Expenses Indirect]

N o t e : Aliases for the groups are given in square brackets [ ].

More:

A discussion on each of the reserved groups:

Common and possible errors in Grouping and account classification



Common and Possible Errors in Grouping and Account Classification

Debtor/Creditor classification

Placing individual party accounts under Sales or Purchase Accounts groups

Accounts of parties with whom your company is trading should be opened under any of the following groups (orsub-groups under them):

Sundry Debtors

Sundry Creditors

Branch/Divisions

Sales and Purchase account groups are meant for revenue accounts and are reflected in the Profit & Loss Account.If you open party accounts under these groups, it becomes difficult to pass sales or purchase vouchertransactions.

For example, in a sales voucher transaction entry, you must debit an account, which can be sundry debtor,branch/division or even a sundry creditor. Moreover, other facilities like bill-wise allocation and tracking will not beavailable unless the accounts belong to one of these groups.

Opening two accounts of the same party

Tally classifies debtors, creditors and branch/divisions for convenience. This helps in the purpose of keeping theaccounts of a particular group together during displays and analysis. Thus you can pass both sales and purchaseentries for a party account placed under Sundry Debtors. Use the classification depending on the most naturalgroup for the party.

For example, parties from whom you buy more frequently then you sell them can be placed under SundryCreditors, as that is the natural place to look for their account. Tally does not restrict the accounts from havingobverse balances. Thus, a Sundry Debtor can have a credit balance depending on the state of his account.

Therefore, you need not open two accounts for the same party - one under Sundry Debtors and another underSundry Creditors. Tally restricts opening of two identical ledger accounts. In such cases, you may decide tocircumvent by marking one account as "A & Co - S/Dr" and another "A & Co - S/Cr". This will allow you to havetwo accounts of the same party under two groups, but you will lose the advantage of analysing net position at oneplace. It is always better to maintain a single account to obtain best benefits.

Expenditure items are entered under Liabilities group. For example, the expenditure item Rates & Taxes under thegroup Duties and Taxes.

The group Duties and Taxes is specifically meant to handle taxation liabilities of your company. Rates & Taxes andother statutory expenses should be placed under Indirect Expenses.

Simply adhering to the reserved groups may be sufficient for many organisations. For greater diversity, Tallyallows you to create your own groups, either as sub-groups or primary groups. Groups can be sub-classified topractically an unlimited level, to give a virtual accounting tree. At the lowest level, of course, would be the ledgeraccount.

An example of sub-groups would help illustrate the power of this facility, the group Indirect Expenses can be sub-classified under ledgers (given in italics) as shown below.

During voucher entry, only the ledger accounts are used and the group structure remains transparent, irrespectiveof the use of sub-classification.

The same principle can be applied to Sundry Debtors, Sales Accounts, Purchase Accounts and so on.

You can classify Debtors and Creditors according to geographical areas as shown below.

You can classify creditors according to their tax status as shown below.

You can create unlimited levels of sub-groups (like branches) or ledgers only if they are two or more in number.You can simply create ledgers directly under Marketing Expenses as shown below.

Note: While it is necessary to assign every ledger to a group/sub-group, it is not

essential to have your own sub-classification of accounts; you may simply use the

reserved groups for grouping your ledger accounts.



A Discussion on Each of the Reserved Groups

1. Capital Account

This records the Capital and Reserves of the company. The ledgers that belong to Capital Accounts are ShareCapital, Partners' Capital A/c, Proprietor's Capital Account and so on.

Reserves and Surplus [Retained Earnings]

This contains ledgers like Capital Reserve, General Reserve, Reserve for Depreciation and so on.

2. Current Assets

Current Assets record the assets that do not belong to either Bank Accounts or Cash-in-Hand sub-groups.

Bank Accounts

Current account, savings account, short term deposit accounts and so on.

Cash-in hand

Tally automatically creates Cash A/c in this group. You can open more than one cash account, if necessary.

N o t e : An account under Cash-in-hand group or Bank Accounts/Bank OCC A/c group is

printed as separate Cash Book in the traditional Cash Book format and does not form

part of the Ledger.

Deposits (Asset)

Deposits contain Fixed Deposits, Security Deposits or any deposit made by the company (not received by thecompany, which is a liability).

Loans & Advances (Asset)

This records all loans given by the company and advances of a non-trading nature (example: advance againstsalaries) or even for purchase of Fixed Assets. We do not recommend you to open Advances to Suppliers’ accountunder this Group. For further details, please refer to the section on Common Errors.

Stock-in-hand

This group contains accounts like Raw Materials, Work-in-Progress and Finished Goods. The balance controldepends on whether you have selected Integrated Account-cum-Inventory option while creating the company.(refer to Company creation section for more details) Let's consider the options:

Integrated Accounts-cum-Inventory

This option has a significant effect on the Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Account. If set to Yes, it brings thestock/inventory balance figures from the inventory records and provides a drill down to the Stock registers fromthe Balance Sheet.

You are not allowed to directly change the closing balance of an account under this group. You are allowed to pass

transactions in Inventory records and the account balances are automatically reflected in the Balance Sheet asClosing Stock.

Non-integrated Accounts-cum-Inventory

If Integrated Account-cum-Inventory option is set to No, it ignores the inventory books figures and picks upmanually entered closing stock balances from the ledger account created. This provides the facility to maintainaccounts separately and inventory separately.

You are not allowed to pass transactions if your accounts that come under this Group. It allows you to holdopening and closing balances only. Since no vouchers can be passed for these accounts, they are the onlyaccounts for which the closing balances can be directly altered (by an authorised user only).

Sundry Debtors

For customer accounts refer to common and possible errors in grouping of accounts section.

3. Current Liabilities

Accounts like Outstanding Liabilities, Statutory Liabilities and other minor liabilities can be created directly underthis group. Sub-groups under Current Liabilities are Duties and Taxes, Provisions and Sundry Creditors

Duties and Taxes

Duties and Taxes contain all tax accounts like VAT, MODVAT, Excise, Sales and other trade taxes and the totalliability (or asset in case of advances paid) and the break-up of individual items.

Provisions

Accounts like Provision for Taxation, Provision for Depreciation and so on are recorded under Provisions.

Sundry Creditors

For trade creditors, refer to common and possible errors in grouping of accounts section.

4. Investments

Group your investment accounts like Investment in Shares, Bonds, Govt. securities, long term Bank depositaccounts and so on. This allows you to view the total investments made by the company.

5. Loans (Liability)

Loans that a company has borrowed, typically long-terms loans.

Bank OD Accounts [Bank OCC Accounts]

Tally provides you with distinct types of Bank Accounts,

Bank OCC A/c

To record the company's overdraft accounts with banks. For example, Bill Discounted A/cs and Hypothecation A/csetc.

N o t e : An account under Bank OCC A/c group is printed as separate Cash Book in the



traditional Cash Book format and does not form part of the Ledger.

Secured Loans

Term loans or other long/medium term loans, which are obtained against security of some asset. Tally does notverify the existence of the security. Typical accounts are Debentures, Term Loans, and so on.

Unsecured Loans

Loans obtained without any security. Example: Loans from Directors/partners or outside parties.

6. Suspense Account

In modern accounting, many large corporations use Suspense Ledger to track the money paid or recovered, thenature of which is not yet known. The most common example is money paid for Traveling Advance whose detailswill be known only upon submission of the TA bill. Some companies may prefer to open such accounts underSuspense Account.

Loans and Advances (Asset) group.

The Suspense Account is a Balance Sheet item. Any expense account even if it has 'suspense' in its name, itshould be opened under Revenue group like Indirect Expenses and not under Suspense Account group.

7. Miscellaneous Expenses (Asset)

This group is typically used for legal disclosure requirements such as Schedule VI of the Indian Companies Act. Itshould hold incorporation and pre-operative expenses. Companies would write off a permissible portion of theaccount every year. A balance remains to an extent that cannot be written off in Profit & Loss Account. Tally doesnot show loss, carried forward in the Profit & Loss Account, under this group. The Profit & Loss Account balance isdisplayed separately in the Balance Sheet.

8. Branch/Divisions

This maintains ledger accounts of all your company's branches, divisions, affiliates, sister concerns, subsidiariesand so on. Tally permits Sales and Purchase transactions to take place with accounts opened here. Remember,these are their accounts in your books and not their books of accounts. Just treat them as any other partyaccount. If you wish to maintain the books of a branch/division on your computer, you must open a separatecompany. (Tally allows maintenance of multiple company accounts).

Revenue — Primary Groups

9. Sales Account

You can classify your sales accounts based on Tax slabs or type of sales. This also becomes a simple mechanismfor preparation of Tax returns.

Examples:

Domestic Sales

Export Sales

Now under Domestic Sales open the following ledgers:

Sales (10%)

Sales (5%)

Sales (exempt)

You can even open an account as Sales Returns under the group Domestic Sales to view your net sales afterreturns (or the returns may be directly passed through Journal against the specific Sales account).

N o t e : Do not open customer accounts under this group. For more details, refer to

common and possible errors in grouping of accounts section.

10. Purchase Account

This is similar to sales accounts, except for the type of transactions.

11. Direct Income [Income Direct]

These are Non-trade income accounts that affect Gross Profit. All trade income accounts fall under Sales Accounts.You may also use this group for accounts like Servicing, Contract Charges that follow sales of equipment.

For a professional services company, you may not use Sales Account group at all. Instead, open accounts likeProfessional Fees under this group.

12. Indirect Income [Income Indirect]

These are miscellaneous non-sale income accounts. Example: Rent Received and Interest Received.

13. Direct Expenses [Expenses Direct]

These are Manufacturing or direct trading expenses. These accounts determine the Gross Profit of the company.

14. Indirect Expenses [Expenses Indirect]

All administrative, selling or non-direct expenses.

Profit & Loss Account is a reserved primary account in Tally. You can use this account to pass adjustment entriesthrough journal vouchers. For example, transfer of profit or loss account to Capital or Reserve account.



Creating a Group

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Groups > Create (under Single Group)

The Group Creation screen displays

Name of Group

Enter the name of the Group to be created. For example, Administrative Expenses.

Alias

Enter an alias name to allow access to the group using the Alias in addition to its name or leave it blank. Forexample, for Administrative expenses, you can enter Office Expense or even an alphanumeric code, say E001,as an alias

Under

Specify under which existing (Parent) group the sub-classification is required. If it is a new primary group, selectPrimary (requirement of a new primary group is very rare, but the option exists). You can also create a newParent Group by using Alt+C.

N o t e : Creation of new P r i m a r y Group is not allowed if Allow Advanced entries in

M a s t e r s is set to N o in F12: Configure.


If a group (e.g Printing) is created under Primary, you must select the appropriate option from the list whether itis an asset, liability, income or expenses. If you select an income or expenses you should specify whether it willaffect the gross profits or not by suitably setting the option Does it affect Gross Profits? to Yes/No.

You can use this concept when you wish to segregate your profits into Operative Profit and Net Profit. This helpsyou when you want to consider other revenue accounts in addition to Direct instead of Gross and Net Profit).

Normally, Tally calculates Gross Profit using Opening Stock, Purchase Accounts, Direct Expenses, Sales Accounts,Direct Incomes and Closing Stock only. To make other accounts contribute to this, without classifying under thesereserved heads, set this option to Yes.

Group behaves like sub-ledger?

This option is applicable to Sundry Debtors group, you can set this to Yes to display Sundry Debtors withoutLedger break-up in statements. Normally, Sundry Debtors will have a large number of ledger accounts under itand it can be expanded during display to show ledger balances. To disable this detailed display set this option toNo.

Nett Debit/Credit Balances for Reporting?

Setting this option to Yes will display either the net debit or credit balance in the report (whichever is higher). Ifthis is set to No, both debit and credit balances will displayed in the report.

Used for Calculation (e.g. taxes, discounts)?

Set this option to Yes if ledgers under this group would have percentages for discounts/taxes to be used forinvoice entry. This gets reflected while passing voucher entry in Invoice mode, it uses the automatic calculationcapability.

Method to allocate when used in purchase invoice

Select the appropriate allocation method from the list. This is used to allocate the expense of the Item in the ratioof the quantity or value.

Buttons in single group screens

F3: Company



This button helps you to open a different company. In the creation mode, you can create groups in the othercompany. In alter mode, you can copy the information by accepting the screen (enter or Ctrl+A). The oldcompany's information remains. This feature is not available in Display mode.

Groups, Ledgers, Cost Categories, Cost Centres, Voucher Types, Currency, Budgets

This button enables you to switch to the appropriate area without quitting from the current screen.

F11: Features

This allows you to set or modify the company features.

F12: Configure

This enables you to set or modify configuration of the master screen.

Note: Configuration changes affect all companies and changes made in Features affect

only the current company.

Creating Multiple Groups

In multiple group creation, the sub-groups will automatically inherit the characteristics of their parent groups.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Groups > Create (under Multiple Groups)

Select the parent group under which you want the new groups to be created from the List of Groups . The groupselected is displayed in the Under Group field.

Name of Group

Enter the name of the Group.

Under

If you select any group other than All Items in the Under Group field, then this column is filled in automaticallywith the selected Group name and the cursor skips this column. This speeds up data entry.

If you select All Items in the Under Group field, the cursor does not skip this field and allows you to enter theparent group of each of them.

N o t e : To change individual group behaviour created using multiple groups, use 'single

group/alter' option.

Buttons in Multiple mode Group creation

F3: Company

This button helps you to open a different company. In the creation mode, you can create groups in the othercompany. In alter mode, you can copy the information by accepting the screen (enter or Ctrl+A ). The oldcompany's information remains. This feature is not available in Display mode.

Groups, Ledgers, Cost Categories, Cost Centres, Voucher Types, Currency, Budgets:

This button enables you to switch to the appropriate area without quitting from the current screen.

F4: Change Parent

To change parent of the selected group, select the group from Names of Groups list.

For example, you are currently altering groups classified under Loans Liability and wish them all to be re-classified



under 'Bank OCC A/c'. Instead of altering individual name, you can achieve this using F4:Chg Parent.

F4: ParentF4: Parent

This allows you to quit from the current screen and modify a different group (relevant in Alteration/Display modeonly). For example, you are currently altering groups classified under Loans Liability and now wish to ABANDONthe current activity and alter groups under Bank OCC instead

F6: Skip Names/Edit Names

It is used for faster data entry when you need to alter only the Group and the Parent Group, but not the names.When you skip names, you might change the Group or the Parent Group to one, which belongs to another Group.Since this violates categorization rules, Tally displays an error message after you accept the screen.

F7: Skip Parent/Edit Parent

This button is used for faster data entry when there is no need to alter the parent of sub-groups.

F10: Edit Sort/Skip Sort

You can use this button to toggle for altering the Sort Position

F11: Features

This enables you to change any company features.

Creating a Group - Advanced Usage

This section assumes that you have configured all advanced features of the Accounts Master in F12: Configureand enabled advanced F11: Features . It deals with the additional fields that you would require while creating aGroup.

N o t e : Use F12: Configure and F11: Feature to add/remove fields and configure the

entire setup according to your preferences.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Group > Alter (under Single Group)

Position index in reports

Position index is the primary key for sorting groups and ledgers for reports; the group name being the secondarykey. It determines the position of the group in relation to other groups in a report. It is the default sorting methodin most reports.

At the time of its creation, a group is automatically assigned the position of its parent (or 500 if it is a new primarygroup) and hence there is no need to give the index field while creating a group.

All reports are sorted according to the position index in increasing order. This may not be in alphabetic order. Thepositions have been ascribed for the Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Account, which is based roughly on theliquidity concept and company law. These indices may be changed to effect a shift in the location of an account, asillustrated in the following example. IF a same index number can be assigned to more than one group, they willappear one after another in alphabetic order (sorted on the secondary key).

Create a Group My Own Group under Primary as an Asset. By default, index will be 500.

Using single alteration of the group My Own Group the index can be verified.



Create a ledger account My Own Ledger under this group with opening balance of 10,000. The group's positionin the Balance Sheet would be thus:

Now, alter the Position Index (sort position) of the group "My Own Group" to 45. (You may do this quickly bypositioning the cursor on 'My Own Group' and pressing Ctrl+Enter).

The Balance Sheet gets rearranged and you can decide the position of an item in your reports.



Though position indices can be altered, it is not advisable to do this without being absolutely sure of its effect.Please remember that the change affects all reports. If you do not want the changed index, you may revert to thedefault settings through group alteration.

N o t e : Press F12: Configure and select the appropriate sorting method from the list to

change the sorting method while viewing the report.

Displaying and Altering Group

You can display and alter the Groups in Single mode or Multiple mode.

Displaying a Single Group

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Group > Display (under Single Group)

Select the name of the Group from the List of Items. You cannot make any changes in Display mode.

Altering a Single Group

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Group > Alter (under Single Group)

Select the Group that you wish to alter from the List of Groups. Make the necessary changes and click Yes tosave the changes.

Displaying Multiple Groups

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Group > Display (under Multiple Group)

Select the Group from the List of Groups to display all the Groups under the selected Group or select All Itemsto display all Groups. The Multi Group Display screen lists Groups and the corresponding details of the Groups.

Altering Multiple Group

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Group > Alter (under Multi Group)

Select the Group for which you want to alter from the List of Groups. In Multi Group Alteration screen, makethe necessary changes and click Yes to save changes.

Deleting a Group

Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Groups > Single/Alter

The Delete function is performed through the single alteration mode. You cannot delete groups from the MultipleAlteration mode.

Select the group to be deleted.1.

Press Alt+D to delete.2.

N o t e : You cannot delete a group if it is a reserved group or a group has sub-groups or

ledgers in it.

Note: A new group created under primary will not reflect in reports until you pass

masters/transactions for that group



Managing Groups in multiple companies

Copy masters from one company to another

Master information is the same for most group companies and it is certainly beneficial to maintain same groupstructure and ledgers. This becomes necessary if you have a parent company with subsidiaries or branches. Thisensures uniformity of reports in all companies and proper consolidation of accounts. To avoid the tedious task ofre-creating masters in other companies, Tally enables you to copy the groups created in one company to another.

The companies must be selected to allow switching of companies.

Gateway of Tally > Select Company A

Gateway of Tally > Select Company B

Copy a single group from one company to another

First select the source company F1.

Gateway of Tally > Select Company A

Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Groups > Single Group > Alter

Select a particular group, for example select Southern Debtors created under Sundry Debtors

F3: Change to destination company (Company B) > Accept the screen, after making alterations, if any.

If the parent of the group does not exist, you will not be able to accept the screen without selecting a parent inthe destination company.

Once you accept the screen, you are returned to the source company list of groups. The same group now existsin the destination company also.

Copy multiple groups from one company to another

Click on F1: Select Company to select the source company (Company A)1.

Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Groups > Multiple Groups > Alter > Select a particular Groupor All Items from the list

2.

Click on F3: Company button or press F3 key to change to the current company i.e switch over to thedestination company > Accept the screen, after making additions/alterations, if any.

3.

Once you accept the screen, you are returned to the source company List of Groups. The same group nowexists in the destination company. The above method of copying masters is possible only if the books ofaccounts are maintained on the same computer.

4.

The above methods can be used for copying other masters like ledgers, cost categories and cost centres.

N o t e : The alternate mechanism to transfer information between companies is to use

the Export of Data and Import of Data. Export/import is more flexible where



export/import allows incoming information from companies, which do not exist on your

system. For example, you can export your Masters and send the resultant files to your

branches for their initial master creation.

Introduction

A Ledger is the actual account head to which you identify a transaction. In Tally, you pass all accounting vouchersusing Ledgers. However, all Ledgers have to be classified into Groups. Hence a thorough understanding of accountclassification is important for working with Ledgers. The creation and usage of Groups in Tally has been explainedearlier. Now you will learn how Tally works with Ledgers.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Ledgers



Creating a Ledger

Ledgers can be created in single and multiple modes. In multiple mode you can create multiple ledgers at a time.

Creating a Single Ledger

The creation of Ledger depends on the features you opt for in the F11: Features of your company and F12:Configure. It is advisable to set F11: Features and configure the F12: Configure screen before creating anyLedgers. You may configure or set your Ledgers to enable or disable advanced mode.

Click here for details on Creating Ledgers in Advanced Mode.

Tally automatically creates two Ledger accounts namely, Cash (Under Cash-in- Hand) and Profit and LossAccount (direct Primary Account). You need to create all other accounts heads. There are no restrictions inLedger creation except that you cannot create another Profit & Loss A/c . Any number of Cash Accounts may becreated in any other name like Petty Cash.

Creating a Ledger Account with minimal information:

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info. > Ledgers> Create (under Single Ledger)

Name

Enter the Name of the account. You can provide the full name of the account. Tally fits it all in. Press Enter tomove to the next field. Tally does not allow entry of duplicate names. The uniqueness check is made here itself.

Note that punctuation and other non-relevant information are ignored by Tally in its recognition of a name. Thus,CST, C.S.T. and C. S. T. are all considered as same.

Tally converts the first letter of all relevant words to upper case, which helps you; speed up data entry. You neednot bother about changing the case every time it is a different word.

Alias

Enter an alias name if required. You can access the Ledgers using the original name or the alias name.

Under

All accounts must be classified under their appropriate Groups. Select the Group under which the Ledger iscreated from the List of Groups. To create a new Group from this field press [ATL + C]



A Group is not important by itself, but because it controls the usage of Ledger accounts. A wrong classificationwould affect the treatment of the Ledger account in final statements and during voucher entry.

You can, alter a Ledger account to change its group classification at any time. Refer Common and possible errorsin Grouping and account classification for more details in Grouping.

Opening Balance

If yours is an existing company whose books you are entering onto Tally, Opening Balance would be applicable incircumstances such as when the Ledger is an asset or a liability and if it has a balance in the account as on thedate of beginning of books in Tally.

Tally recognises normal accounting principles of debit balances for Assets and credit balances for Liabilities. Itaccepts the reverse for obverse balances. Revenue accounts normally do not have balances. Tally, however,permits you to give balances even for such accounts - You may be transferring your books on to Tally in themiddle of the year and may not have closed them in your earlier system. Hence, you may specify whether thebalance is Debit or Credit. Simply D or C also would suffice.

N o t e: Use Ctrl +A at the field following which the information in other fields do not need to

be changed.

More:

Common and possible errors in Grouping and account classification

Groups - a revisit

Creating Multiple Ledgers

You can create multiple Ledgers at a time in this mode. You can first create a Ledger under each group in singleLedger mode and then the rest of the Ledgers in multiple mode. Tally will set the settings of the Ledger created asdefault for other Ledger to be created in multiple mode.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info > Ledgers > Create (under Multiple Ledgers)

The Multiple Ledger Creation screen is displayed. A brief description on each of the fields in the Multiple LedgerCreation screen follows:

Under Group

Select the name of the group under which you want to create the Ledgers from the List of Groups .

Below this field, the other fields are arranged in a table. The cursor rests at the field Name of Ledger .

The other fields in the column are:

S.No

This is auto generated.

Name of Ledger

Enter the name of the Ledger.

Under

This field defaults to the parent group selected in Under Group . The selected group in Under Group getsdisplayed here automatically and the cursor skips this column. However, if you select All Items in Under Groupfield, the cursor does not skip this column and you have the option to select the group. You can even create a newgroup from this field by pressing Alt +C .

Opening Balance

This is the balance remaining when you first enter your books on Tally, i.e., the date of beginning of books. If youhave opted to maintain balances bill-by-bill, you must give the bill details. (Refer Creating a Ledger- Advanced



Usage for more details on this)

Dr

Specify whether the Opening Balance is Debit or Credit . Tally follows the normal accounting principals ofaccounting. (Refer Creating a Ledger - Advanced Usage for more details on this).

N o t e : While creating Ledgers in multiple mode, the field Cost Centres are applicable,

is set to Y e s for Revenue accounts and N o for Non-Revenue accounts by default. The

field Inventory values are affected is set to Y e s for Sales and Purchase Accounts and

N o for the o t h e r s by default.

Creating a Ledger - Advanced Usage

The information required for creating Ledgers depends on the features opted by you in the F11: Features andF12: Configure . The Ledger Creation screen will have additional fields depending on your feature settings foryour company. If you set the field Allow ADVANCED entries in Masters in F12: Configure as Yes , you canwork in Advanced Mode.

Set the company features in F11: Features> F1: Accounts as shown in the screen below to enable advancedfeatures.

After configuring F12: Configure and enabling F11: Features as described in the above sections, the LedgerCreation screen will appear with the following additional fields.



An explanation on each of the additional field follows. For explanation on the default fields refer Creating a SingleLedger

Currency of Ledger

Tally allows you to maintain Ledgers in any currency and the amount will reflect in the selected currency. But it isstrongly advisable that you maintain the currency of the Ledger as the Base currency.

Only foreign currency bank accounts are maintained in foreign currency and other ledgers are maintained in BaseCurrency. Nevertheless you can enter transactions in any other currency.

To create/maintain ledgers in multiple currency, set Allow Multi Currencies to Yes in F11: Features.

You can always create a new currency from this field by pressing Alt+C

For more information on Currencies, refer Currency

N o t e : The Advanced Information is applicable ONLY if the ledger is maintained in base

currency. The relevant options should be enabled in the company features.

Maintain Balances Bill-by-Bill

Set this option to Yes , if you wish to give a Bill-by-Bill break-up of the Ledger balance for Sundry Debtors andSundry Creditors group including the opening balance. You may allot any number of bills. The option here wouldalso determine the ability to track transactions according to Bill references. The Bill-by-Bill concept in transactionswould be discussed in detail in the Vouchers chapter.

If you set this option to Yes , while entering the opening balance in the Opening Balance field at the end ofLedger Creation screen and pressing Enter , the Bill-wise Breakup screen of the Ledger created is displayed.

A brief explanation on each of the fields in the Bill-wise breakup screen follows:

The following information for all pending bills of the previous accounting period would be required.

Date

Since you are giving the break-up of the Opening Balance, the date of the bill would naturally be prior to theaccounting period. Tally defaults to the last date of your previous accounting period, e.g., 31 March 2006. Changeit, if necessary, to the actual date. To end your list of entries, leave the Date or Name blank.

Name

Enter a Name to which you can later refer when adjusting the bill. Typically, you can enter the Bill number orDocument number. The purpose of the break-up is to enable you to adjust it later when the relevant transaction issquared off.

Due date (or credit days)

For the Ledgers under Sundry Debtors and Creditors, give the credit period or the date when the bill is due. Tallyautomatically calculates the other.



N o t e : During transaction entry, there would be another concept-that of effective date. If you

opt for "using effective dates" instead of "bill dates" the due date would be calculated

a c c o r d i n g l y .

Amount

For the amount of the bill due, you will give particulars of all the pending bills one by one. Tally fills in thedifference between your Opening Balance, and the sum of the Bills, and reflects it as On Account at the bottom ofthe screen.

If all your bills cover the Opening Balance , the On Account becomes NIL. You may have Bills totaling beyondthe Opening Balance , in which case the On Account will accumulate adversely. In the screen given below, wehave shown two bills 50,000, 25,000. Now, if the balance brought forward is 1,00,000/- , the On Accountamount will reflect 25,000/-. If you obtain the bill particulars at a later date, you can always alter the ledger to putin the details, which will nullify the On Account .

Inventory values affected

This is applicable only if your accounts are integrated with inventory. Accounts like sales and purchases wouldnormally affect inventory values in which case set Inventory values affected to Yes . For other accounts, set itto No . Tally does not restrict you to particular accounts as you may have the need to affect inventory withaccounts like Customs Duty, and perhaps, direct expenses related to purchases such as Freight Inwards.

Cost Centres are applicable

Tally's concept of Cost Centres allows an additional dimension to a transaction.

This field is displayed in the Ledger Creation screen only if you have enabled Cost-Centres in F11 > AccountingFeatures . Set this field to Yes in Ledger creation screen to enable Cost centres. Tally will presume that you wantCost Centers for Revenue Accounts and not for non-revenue accounts like Assets and Liabilities.

Activate Interest calculation

Set this option to Yes to enable Tally to calculate interest automatically based on the interest rate and style ofcalculation specified.

Use advanced parameters

The advanced parameters are particularly useful where interest rates change from time to time. Set this option toYes to enable this.

Statutory Information

This option is available only if you have enabled at least one the options in F11: Features> F3: Statutory &Taxation . Based on the options enabled in F3: Statutory & Taxation , the respective fields will appear in theStatutory Information section.

Mailing Details

Mailing Details is applicable only for party accounts like Sundry Debtors , Creditors and Branch Divisions .This is also available for loan accounts. Enter the party's particulars here. These are used in mailing outputs likestatement of accounts.

Tax Information

The Tax Information consists of the default fields PAN/IT No. and the TIN/SALES Tax No. Based on thefeatures you enable in F11: Features> F3: Statutory & Taxation , additional fields will appear under Taxation.

Percentage of Calculation

This field is applicable only for Ledgers created under the Group Duties and Taxes , or for Ledgers created underany Group for which Used for Calculation is enabled in Group Creation screen.

The Group Duties and Taxes is used for automatic tax calculation. . You need to specify the rate of tax e.g. 5,10, 12.5 etc. as a percentage. Do not give the percent symbol. You may use an automatic Discount calculationfacility by specifying a negative percentage in this field. On entering a percentage, a new field Method ofCalculation is displayed.



Method of Calculation

There are four methods of calculating a duty.

Duty Based on Items – Tax based on Item Rate1.

Additional Duty2.

On Total Sales3.

Surcharge on Tax4.

Tax or Duty Based on Items Rate (or Excise Duty)

This type of account is suitable in cases where there are differential rates of duty/tax on items. In India, exciseduty accounts would normally adopt this method. In the UK, VAT accounts would do likewise. When creating yourInventory item masters, you might specify Rate of Duty for each item. In your account books, you would open aledger for the duty, possibly by the name VAT 17.5% or Excise Duty 12.5%. You will select this method to instructTally to pick up the Rate of Duty specified in your Inventory item master during invoice entry. If one or moreitems exist with the same rate of duty, then the amount is calculated using the total. Otherwise, it is calculated ontotal sales. For example,

Your invoice lists:

Item A (Rate 10%) for 10000/-

Item B (Rate 12%) for 15000/-

Item C (Rate 10%) for 18000/-

Duty (VAT or Excise) will be calculated as follows:

10% on 28000/- 2800/- (Item A & C)

12% on 15000/- 1800/- (Item B)

Total Duty 4600/-

Additional Duty

When excise duty is not enabled for invoicing purposes in Company Features [F11] (as applicable for manyproducts in India), Additional Duty and Surcharge function alike. In case it is enabled, then Additional Duty isadded to the 'Duty Based on Items' in the invoice to reflect the 'Total Duty payable'. Its method of calculation isexplained under 'Surcharge'.

On Total Sales

As the type suggests, duty will be calculated on the total of individual values of the items. It does not consider theRate of Duty specified for each item in your inventory masters.

It does not calculate duty on the current sub-total unless you have specifically opted for it in the companyfeatures. Hence, the two scenarios could be as follows:

When you have not opted for calculation on current sub-total:

Assuming that there are two items in the invoice:

Item A 10000/-

Item B 15000/-

Tax 2% will be calculated at 2% on total sales of 25000/- = 500/- tax amount following which you obtain acurrent sub-total of 25500/-.

If you now add another line, Tax 4%, it will calculate 4% also on 25000/- (on total sales) giving another 1000/- astax.

If you opt for calculating on current sub-total:

The above Tax 4% will be calculated on 25500/- (25000+500) giving 1020/- .

Surcharge on Tax

Surcharge and Additional Duty are charged on the immediately preceding entry. A surcharge is treated as apercentage of the duty levied. Tally expects the preceding line in the invoice to be the duty on which surcharge isto be calculated.

Hence, in the above example if you have added a line Surcharge 10% it will appear as:

Item A 10000/-

Item B 15000/-

25000/-

Tax 2% 500/-

Surcharge 10% 50/- (10% of 500)

If your invoice is as below:

Item A 10000/-

Item B 15000/-

25000/-

Tax 2% 500/-

Surcharge 10% 50/- (10% of 500)

Addl.Surcharge8% 4/- (8% of 50)

During invoice creation, this figure is used to calculate tax amount based on the method of calculation as well asspecified in invoicing configuration.

( [F12] configure > Invoice Entry > Calculate tax on current sub-total?).

Though invoicing has been discussed separately in greater detail, we shall touch upon relevant aspects here.

Calculate tax on current sub-total: (Yes/No)

Tax here refers to VAT or sales tax. During voucher entry in Invoicing mode, you may enter additional ledgeraccounts after giving the list of items in the invoice. Typically, the ledgers would pertain to duties, taxes, deliverycharges, other charges and discounts. Sales Tax may be calculated on the total of item values, viz., Inventorysub-total, or you may specify it to calculate on the immediately preceding sub-total. In the latter case, theimmediately preceding sub-total could include any entry that you may have passed, e.g. Delivery Charges. Tally



does not make any presumptions and would not verify its appropriateness or otherwise.

Normally, you would not answer Yes to this option. The facility of Surcharge being available, the need to calculateon current sub-total is fulfilled by it. Hence, use it sparingly, maybe only when you have both Excise Duty andSales Tax (on Excise Duty) applicable on an item.

Display or Alter a Ledger Account

Information in display and alter is the same, hence only alter is discussed. Display option does not permit anymodification. Alter option is accessible only to authorised users.

Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Ledgers > Single Alter > select ledger

You are allowed to alter any information of the ledger master with the exception of the Closing Balance of a ledgeraccount, if any, other than closing balance of accounts under the group 'Stock-in-hand'.

Please refer to Advanced Usage for specifying closing stock values.

Deleting a ledger account

You can delete a ledger from the alteration mode by pressing <Alt>+<D>. Tally does not allow deletion of



accounts that have transactions. Therefore, should you wish to delete an account, which has transactions, youmust first delete all its voucher entries.

Interest Calculations

Tally allows you to obtain reports on interest calculated by Tally based on the instructions you furnish. Interestfigures are typically desired in the following situations:

On outstanding balance amounts1.

On outstanding bills/invoices/transactions (Receivable and payable)2.

Tally gives you an exhaustive capability to obtain interest implications on both.

Activate Interest Calculations

Interest is a legitimate return on money invested and chargeable in the business world on loans and also ondelayed payments. Interest can be calculated on the basis of Simple or Compound Interest.

Tally allows you to obtain reports on interest calculated based on the instructions you furnish. Interest figures aretypically desired in the following situations:

On Outstanding Balance amounts.

Outstanding Bills /Invoices/Transactions (Receivables and Payables)

The Activate Interest Calculation field is displayed in the Ledger Creation screen only if Activate InterestCalculations is set to Yes in F11: Features.

Set this field to Yes for each specific ledger account for which interest is to be calculated.

More:

Simple Mode - where advanced parameters are not applicable

Advanced Mode

Interest Calculation Reports

Interest calculation on Ledger Balances (e.g. Loans)

Statement of Interest due on invoices

Group Interest Calculation



Simple Mode (Where advanced parameters are not applicable)

To calculate Interest in the Simple Mode:

Go to Gateway of Tally> F11: Features > Set Activate Interest Calculation to Yes. > Set UseAdvanced Parameters to No.

1.

In the Ledger Creation screen set Activate Interest Calculation to Yes.2.

The Interest Parameters sub screen is displayed. Enter the Rate and select the interest style from the list.3.

Interest calculations on outstanding balances

Enter Interest details in Vouchers (only in case of transaction by transaction/Bill-by-bill). View Interest reports.

You will have to alter existing ledger accounts to permit interest calculations on them. The same operation willapply when creating a new ledger account.

Interest calculation on outstanding balances is allowed for any ledger account. You simply specify the interest rateand style of calculation. Nothing is required to be done for interest during voucher entry.

Let's take an example: Interest calculated on Outstanding Balances.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Ledgers> Alter (Single)> Bank Ltd (bank account)1.

Set Activate interest Calculation to Yes.2.

On activation, the Interest Parameters must be set. It is the basis on which interest will be calculated forthis Ledger account.

3.

Rate: This is the rate at which the interest has to be calculated. In this case, specify 15%.4.

Interest Style: It is the basis on which the rate is applied. Of the four options, select 365-Day Year.5.

Accept the screen.6.

You can now view the amount of interest that could be charged by the Bank.

Report on Interest Calculated on outstanding balances

The Interest Calculations Report can be displayed and printed.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Statements of Accounts> Interest Calculations> Ledger> BankAccount

Interest calculation transaction by transaction

Activate and specify interest calculations in ledger masters.

Transaction by transaction or Bill-by-Bill interest calculation is permitted for 'Party' accounts like accounts fallingunder the groups Sundry Debtors and Sundry Creditors. For example:

Alter a Customer account (under the group Sundry Debtors or one of its sub-groups).1.

Set Activate Interest Calculation to Yes. In the Interest Parameters now you have three lines toanswer.

2.

Set Calculate Interest Transaction-by-transaction to Yes.3.

Set Over-ride Parameters for each transaction to No.4.

If set to No, you are not allowed to change interest parameters in voucher/invoice entry. If set to Yes, you canchange the interest parameters during entry.

Report on Interest Calculated on outstanding transactions/bills

To view the Interest calculated

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Statements of Accounts> Interest Calculations> Ledger> CP Ltd

The report is similar to the Bill-wise Outstanding Statement. The last column gives the interest amount on thetransaction. Select the line to be viewed in detail for its calculations.



Advanced Mode

The advanced parameters are particularly useful where interest rates change from time to time.

Go to Gateway of Tally> F11: Features > Accounting Features > Set Activate Interest Calculationto Yes. > Set Use Advanced Parameters to Yes.

1.

The Interest Parameters sub-screen is displayed

For Ledgers created under the Group Sundry Debtors/Sundry Creditors, the Interest Parameters sub-screen is displayed as shown below:

2.

Set Calculate Interest Transaction-by-Transaction to Yes , if you want to calculate interest for eachtransaction.

3.

Set Override Parameters for each Transaction to Yes , if you want to override the interest rates andparameters set here during voucher entry.

4.

Enter the interest rate in the Rate field.5.

Select the interest rate calculation period from the Interest Style list in the Per field.6.

Select the choice of balances for which the interest has to be calculated from the Interest Balances list inthe On field. The balances are All Balances, Credit Balances only and Debit balances only. Interest can becalculated on all outstanding balances, whether debit or credit. You would like to select only credit balancesin case of accounts like Bank accounts, if you want to know the interest that the bank might charge onoverdrawn balances.

7.

8.

Select the rounding method applicable from the Rounding Methods list. The amount can be rounded offnormally or upward or downward. If you do not want any rounding method, select Not Applicable .

8.

For Ledgers created under the Group Bank Accounts , or if the option Calculate Interest Transactionby Transaction is set to No , then the Interest Parameters sub-screen is displayed as shown below.

Enter the interest rate in the Rate field.1.

Select the interest rate calculation period from the Interest Style list in the Per field.2.

Select the choice of balances for which the interest has to be calculated from the Interest Balances list inthe On field. The balances are All Balances, Credit Balances only and Debit balances only. Interest can becalculated on all outstanding balances, whether debit or credit. You would like to select only credit balancesin case of accounts like Bank accounts, if you want to know the interest that the bank might charge onoverdrawn balances.

3.

Specify the interest rate applicable period from the Applicable From: and To: fields.4.

Select the rounding method applicable from the Rounding Methods list. The amount can be rounded offnormally or upward or downward. If you do not want any rounding method, select Not Applicable .

5.

Display Report – Interest on Outstanding Balances

To view the report on Outstanding balances:

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Statements of Accounts.> Interest Calculations> Ledgers> Bank Ltd.



Advanced Parameters - Interest calculation transaction by transaction

A ctivate and specify interest calculations in ledger masters.

The following extra options now become available:

You can now have Multiple Rates of Interest .1.

You can Override Advanced Parameters during voucher entry. Hence, each entry could have differentparameters.

2.

Choice of Balances – All Balances , Credit Balances only, Debit Balances only.3.

Applicability - This actually applies to the viewing of the statement and not the levy of interest.4.

Calculate from - You can decide whether interest is to be levied from the Due Date or from the EffectiveDate of the transaction (or the voucher date if effective date is not activated) or even Date ranges specifiedduring Voucher Entry.

5.

6.

5.

Choice of methods for Rounding off of interest amounts .6.

N o t e :

* To obtain the option 'Calculate from Date Specified during Entry', you must have

Override advanced parameters set to Yes. The option is required if you want to specify

interest to be calculated at different rates for different periods.

* If you choose to override parameters then information would be asked during

voucher/invoice entry. The interest information is required after the bill-wise details

have been entered.

Report on Interest Calculated on outstanding transactions/bills

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Statements of Accounts> Interest Calculations> Ledger> CP Ltd

Press the button F1: Detailed on the Button bar to see the calculation and the period. Previous transactions arecalculated from Effective date of Transaction as default. Date Specified during Entry has not been used.

N o t e : Part monies received have been accounted for and interest calculated on the

b a l a n c e .



A look at Calculate From Dates Specified during Voucher Entry

You have set up the Interest Parameters for CP Ltd to calculate on Dates specified during Voucher Entry.

We will take one invoice and put in the interest information.

Display> Statements of Accounts> Interest Calculations> Ledger> CP Ltd

Book Entries and adjustment of interest

We have seen the reports on interest amounts calculated in different ways but these have not been brought intobooks! They simply give you the interest implications. You must book them now.

How to enter the calculated interest amounts?

Use Debit Notes and Credit Notes with Voucher Classes

Use Debit notes for Interest receivable and Credit Notes for Interest Payable . Interest is calculated onSimple or Compound basis and separate classes should be used for them.

Set-up Debit/Credit Note Classes for interest entries

Set up Debit Notes . Credit Notes will behave the same way.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Voucher Types> Create/Alter

1.

2.



Alter the Voucher Type Debit Note.1.

Tab down to the field Class .2.

Type the name of the Class .3.

Type Simple Interest .4.

Likewise, create a Class – Compound Interest and set Yes to Amounts to be treated as Compound Interest.

Accept the Voucher Type and return to the Gateway of Tally . Create a ledger account Interest Received underGroup Indirect Income.

Voucher Entry for booking Interest

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounting Voucher> Voucher Entry1.

Select F7:Journal > Debit Note2.

A Cost Centre Class is also selected if required. Marketing Expenses Class has been selected here.3.

There are two situations for interest adjustment:-4.

Billwise interest

Simple Interest – Interest amounts are not debited onto the same bills. Create a fresh reference for it.

Compound Interest – Amounts are auto-debited to the selected bills. Bill-wise details will not appear inthis case.

Interest on balances only5.

Bill-wise interest entry

Debit CP Ltd

Credit Interest Received

When you debit the party account, a list of bills for which interest is applicable pops up. Select the bills to adjust.Note that even cleared bills appear.

Select the respective interest bills from the list . The debit amount is filled up with the total. Select New Ref in thebill-wise allocation. In the interest sub-screen, ensure that the rate of interest is 0. Now Credit Interest Received.The amount is already filled in.

Your voucher will resemble the one below:

Entries for compound interest are exactly the same as for Simple Interest where all you do is select the VoucherClass Compound Interest. Also the Bill-wise details popup sub-screen does not come up as the amounts are addedonto the bills.

Select Demo from the list and complete a Debit Note.



Now display Outstandings for CP Ltd

Note the contents:

The Bill references Demo/28/01 and Demo/31/01 are invoices onto which interest has been compounded.

A new Reference no 2 has been created for Simple Interest due from CP Ltd.

Entries for Interest on Balances only

Again, the issues are Simple and Compound Interest

Compound Interest

Make the following entries in a Debit note with Compound Interest Voucher Class

Debit Bank Ltd

the amount is automatically filled up with the calculated interest

Credit Interest Received

And nothing needs to be done! The Bank Account has been increased by the amount of interest due and theIncome account of Interest Received also credited.

Simple Interest

Make the same entry as above.

However, since it has the effect of increasing the Bank Ltd account with the amount due (compound effect), youmust make a journal entry to reverse it. The reversal entry would be something like this:

Debit Interest Receivable (a current asset account)

Credit Bank Ltd

Use a normal Journal voucher for this entry.

We have to necessary go this route to take advantage of the auto filling of the interest amount which can appearonly when we use the Bank Ltd account in Debit Note in the first place.



Interest Calculation Reports

Interest Calculation reports are automatically produced if the feature is activated In F11: Features and theparameters are set for individual ledger accounts.

There are two types of reports, one pertaining to interest on balances of accounts like loans, and the otherinterest on overdue invoices.

Interest reports are available for individual ledger accounts as well as for Groups

Interest Calculation on Ledger Balances (e.g. Loans)

You can get a report on the Ledger balances for the interest calculated.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Statements of Accounts> Interest Calculations> Ledger

Select Account E.g. Bank Loan Account.

Interest is re-calculated with every change in balance outstanding. The Cr in the interest amount should not beconfused to resemble an Income. It only means that it is payable and is a Liability.

To ease interest recording, Tally has an interest template, a special voucher class in Debit Note and Credit Notes.

The interest screen will appear similar to the one below:

Interest calculation on Bank Loan account



Statement of Interest Due on Invoices

You can calculate interest on each invoice for the period it is outstanding, wholly or partly. Transaction bytransaction or bill-by-bill interest calculation is permitted for 'Party' accounts like accounts falling under the groupsSundry Debtors and Sundry Creditors. Bill-wise details should be active for the company and the party.

The report is similar to the Bill-wise Outstandings Statement. The last column gives the interest amount on thetransaction. Press F1: Detailed to see the calculation.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Interest Calculations > Ledger

Select the ledger Account Peutronics Bangalore

Interest is re-calculated with every change in balance outstanding. The Cr in the interest amount should not beconfused to mean an Income. It only means that it is payable and is a liability. The figure is illustrative only andyou will need to account for the interest expense and liability through a journal entry.

Group Interest Calculation

The Group Interest Calculation statement is a list of all accounts and sub-groups belonging to the selected groupthat displays the current balance in each account or sub-group and the total interest.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display > Statements of Accounts > Interest Calculations > Group

Select a Group, Eg. Loans (Liability)

The Cr in the interest amount should not be confused to mean an Income. It only means that it is payable and is aliability.


Drill down to the Ledger level Interest report.

Specifying Closing Stock Values

Closing stock values have to be specified when accounts and inventory are not integrated. Tally allows you tospecify closing stock values even if your books are integrated. It would simply ignore the specified figure so longas you maintain the integration. If and when you select to separate the books, the specified values wouldautomatically be considered.

To enter the closing stock as on a specific date, you must alter the ledger account. Simply follow the ledgeralteration procedure or go from the Balance Sheet via Current Assets.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Balance Sheet> Current Assets> Group Summary

(or)

Go to Gateway of Tally>Account Info.> Ledgers> Alter (Single)

Assuming that you had a ledger account 'Stock ' under the group Stock-in-hand the information would be asfollows

You are allowed to alter the opening balance as well as specify/alter closing balances on different dates. You wouldtypically specify Balance Sheet dates so that the Balance Sheet reflects the amount of that date.



Effective Date for Reconciliation (Bank Accounts only)

The Effective Date for Reconciliation is given for accounts falling under the Bank Accounts Group (or BankOCC a/c). By default it is the books beginning date.

This is the date from which you can reconcile your bank account in your books with the bank statements.Normally, it would be the books beginning date.

However, you can import data from a previous version of Tally or from any other system (where the reconciliationprocess was not available or was different). In that case, you may not need to reconcile the bank account withyour bank statements from the very beginning. Give the date from which you want the reconciliation facility to beactivated. Then, previous entries will not appear for reconciliation.

Position Index in Reports

This is viewed when you press F10: Chg Sort when the ledger is in the alteration mode.

If this is done, it remains so till you deactivate it by pressing F10: Skip Sort. The topic has been discussed underthe chapter "Groups" under Advanced Usage. The default setting is 1000 for all ledgers.

Please note that the index is relative to other ledgers and groups within a parent group. Hence, the position of aledger may be changed within the Group, to which it belongs, by changing the number 1000.

Any change would not position the ledger outside the parent group. If a group comprises of many groups (sub-groups) and ledgers, the position index would determine their position within the parent group.

For example: Prior to any change in their indices, the ledgers and the sole group 'Communication Expenses' underthe group 'Indirect Expenses' are displayed as below. (Ledgers are directly under the group Indirect Expenses andnot under Communication Expenses sub-group):

Gateway of Tally > Display> Account Books> Group Summary> Indirect Expenses

The position index of Communication Expenses (it is a group as indicated by its bold font) is 290 and all ledgers1000. You would notice that because of this, Communication Expenses is at the top, and the others sortedalphabetically as they have the same index of 1000.

We now change the index of General Maintenance to 280 and of Staff Welfare to 900. We now see GeneralMaintenance at the top, followed by Communication Expenses and Staff Welfare. Then the rest with 1000 wouldbe in alphabetic order.

You can change the index from the display screen itself by positioning the cursor on the particular account andpressing Ctrl+Enter to bring up its master to alter.

Indirect Expenses



Displaying and Altering Ledgers

Displaying and Altering Ledgers can be done in Single mode and Multiple mode. The Multiple mode allows you todisplay and alter multiple Ledgers at a time.

Displaying and Altering a Single Ledger

You can view the details of the Ledger Masters in Display mode. Display does not permit any modification.However you can make changes to Ledger Masters in Alter mode.

Displaying a Single Ledger

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Ledgers > Display (under Single Ledger).

Select the Ledger from the List of Ledgers. The Ledger Display screen is displayed. You will be able to view thedetails of the selected Ledger Master.

Altering a Single Ledger

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Ledgers > Alter (under Single Ledger)

Select the Ledger from the List of Ledgers. The Ledger Alteration screen is displayed.

You are allowed to alter any information. Make the necessary changes and Accept Yes to save.

Specifying Closing Stock Values of a Ledger account under the group Stock in Hand

This is possible only in Ledger alteration mode. Closing stock values have to be specified when accounts andinventory are not integrated. Tally allows you to specify closing stock values even if your books are integrated. Itwould simply ignore the specified figure so long as you maintain the integration. If and when you select toseparate the books, the specified values would automatically be considered.

To enter the closing stock as on a specific date, you must alter the ledger account. Simply follow the ledgeralteration procedure or go from the Balance Sheet via Current Assets.

Go to Gateway of Tally>Account Info.> Ledgers> Alter (under Single Ledger)

(Or)

Go to Gateway of Tally> Balance Sheet> Current Assets> Group Summary

Assuming that you had a ledger account Stock under the group Stock-in-hand the information would be asfollows:

You are allowed to alter the opening balance as well as specify closing balances on different dates. You wouldtypically specify Balance Sheet dates so that the Balance Sheet reflects the amount of that date.

Deleting a Single Ledger

You can delete a Ledger account from the Ledger Alteration screen by pressing ATL + D. Tally does not allowdeletion of accounts that have transactions. Therefore, should you wish to delete an account, which hastransactions, you must first delete all its voucher entries.



Displaying and Altering Multiple Ledgers

Displaying Multiple Ledgers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Ledgers > Display (under Multiple Ledgers)

Select All Items from the List of Groups to view the details of all the Ledgers in Tally. If you want to view thedetails of all the Ledgers created under a Group select the Group from the List of Groups. The Multiple LedgerDisplay screen is displayed.

Altering Ledgers in Multiple Mode

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Ledgers > Alter (under Multiple Ledgers)

Select any Group or All Items from the List of Groups. The Multi Ledger Alteration screen is displayed. Makethe necessary changes and Accept Yes to save.

N o t e : You are not allowed to delete a ledger from this mode. Select single alter mode

to delete.

Explanation on Buttons

F3:Company: To work with a different company. In the creation mode, you can create cost categories in theother company. In alter mode, you can copy the information by accepting the screen (<enter> or <Ctrl>+<A>).The old company's information remains. Not available in Display mode.

F3: New Cmp: To work on the same report of another company. Available only in display mode.

F4: Parent: To move the cursor to the field 'Under Group'

F4: New Parent: To bring up the list of Groups to select a new parent Group.

Zero Op Bal: To nullify (change to zero) all opening balances in this group.

F6: Skip names: For faster data entry when you do not need to the names of ledgers. The cursor will not go tothat column. Toggle to 'Edit names'.

F7:Skip Parent: For faster data entry when you do not need to alter the parent Group. The cursor will not go tothe column 'Under'. Toggle to 'Edit Parent'.

F8:Skip Details: The cursor will not go to the columns Opening Balance and Dr/Cr. Toggle to 'Edit Details'.

F9:Show Closing: Closing Balances replace Opening Balances. This is available only in alter mode. Closingbalance is not alterable and the cursor skips the field.

F10:Chg Sort: To display a column of sorting position indices. Toggle to 'Skip Sort'. You may change displaypositions of ledger accounts under the group. (refer to the discussion on the subject in Advanced Usage).

Groups, Ledgers, Cost Categories, Cost Centres: To enable you to switch to these areas without having toquit from the current screen.

Credit Limits

Credit Limits can be specified for any account falling under the groups Sundry Debtors and Sundry Creditors.Accounts under Sundry Creditors are permitted because there can be a two-way trade with a party even if it isclassified as a creditor or debtor. Classification is done on the basis of the major role.

More:

Setting Credit Limits

Effect of setting credit limits

Exceeding Credit Limits

Setting Credit Limits

If you do not set credit limits, you can still make invoices and give credit periods at the time of invoicing.However, that may not be desirable, especially in a decentralized environment. Therefore, to minimise errorsduring invoicing, you might prefer to set these important terms beforehand.

To set credit limits:

Go to F11 Features > Accounting Features > Set Maintain Budgets and Controls to Yes

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info> Ledgers> Credit Limits (under Multiple Ledgers)

Select the group of ledgers from the List of Groups for which to set credit terms. The Multi Ledger LimitAlteration screen is displayed. The list of ledger accounts is displayed. You can set credit limits for both amountsand periods here.

Credit Limit

Specify the amount of credit limit against the ledger account in this field. You can set the amount limits in foreigncurrency if you wish, for customers who are usually invoiced in foreign currency.

Credit Period

Credit Periods are in days only and are calculated from the effective date. If a separate effective date field appearsin your voucher, the credit period is from the effective date, which might differ from the voucher date. If thevoucher date is the only date field in the voucher, then it is also the effective date and the credit period is fromthis date.



Effect of Setting Credit Limits

The effect of setting credit limits is that during voucher entry (also invoice entry), the credit terms are filled up bythe pre-set figures. If the voucher configuration (through F12: Configure) is set to disallow modifications of allfields during voucher entry, the cursor skips these fields and modification is not permitted. However, theconfiguration is set to permit modifications to all fields - alteration of the pre-filled fields is allowed.

The current balance and the credit limit of the party are displayed in the order and invoice entry forms, which ishelpful to assess the amount acceptable.

Exceeding Credit Limits

During invoice or order entry, if the credit amount limit is exceeded, the voucher entry does not proceed further.You have two choices at this stage:

Enter a lower value so that the entry can be completed.1.

Abandon the current entry and obtain authorization to increase the credit amount limit in the Multi LedgerLimit Alteration screen.

2.

This is a controlled activity and will depend on the security permissions for altering credit limits.



Cost Centres

A Cost Centre is any unit of an organisation to which transactions (generally, revenue) can be allocated. Whenonly costs or expenses are allocated to these units, they are referred to as Cost Centres. When profits are alsoallocated to these units, they become Profit Centres. You can now obtain a Profit and Loss account of each suchProfit Centre.

Cost Centre in Tally allows an additional dimension to a transaction where a Ledger account indicates the nature ofthe transaction. It does not readily disclose, except in the narration field, which part of the organisation wasinvolved in the transaction.

By providing Cost Centres, a transaction can be allocated to it, which would then enable extraction of alltransactions for a Cost Centre. Tally gives you the Cost Centre break-up of each transaction as well as details oftransactions for each Cost Centre.

Some examples of Cost Centres are

Departments of an organisation - Finance, Manufacturing, Marketing, and so on.

Products of a company.

Individuals such as Salesman A, Salesman B.

Use of Cost Centres

You can classify Cost Centres just as how you classified Group/Ledger accounts. You can have Primary CostCentres and several levels of Cost Centres under each Primary Cost Centre.

Consider the following example.

Primary Cost Centres - Finance, Manufacturing, Marketing.

Under Marketing, classify the company's sales executives as Cost Centres. This will help you track a salesexecutive's performance, in terms of cost and revenue generated.

You will then have the following Cost Centre structure (shown here only for the Marketing Department):

Primary Cost Centre - Marketing

Under Marketing:

Salesman A

Salesman B

Salesman C

Allocate expenditure incurred on sales by the salesmen, as well as the sales generated by them, directly to theirCost Centres. The allocation is done online at the time of transaction entry. This prevents allocation problems atthe end of the period, when you find a large number of transactions not allocated.

By allocating expenses and sales transactions to the salesmen, you are setting up a valuable information systemthat tracks the performance of your salesmen.

More:

Creating a Single Cost Centres

Altering a Cost Centre



Creating a Single Cost Centre

To create a Cost Centre, set Maintain Cost Centres to Yes in F11: Features. It is advisable not to set Morethan ONE Payroll/Cost Category to Yes, unless required.

By default, Tally activates the Cost Centre feature for Ledger accounts under Sales Accounts, Purchase Accounts,Expense and Income groups.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Cost Centres> Create (Single Cost Centre)

The Cost Centre Creation screen displays.

A brief explanation on each of the fields in the Cost Centre Creation screen follows.

Name

Enter the name of the Cost Centre in this field. For example, Bangalore.

alias

Enter an alternative name, if required. For example, the Cost Centre Bangalore can be referred to as Head Officeor by a code number.

Under

Select the parent Cost Centre under which the Cost Centre needs to be created from the List of Cost Centres. Ifyou want the Cost Centre to be a Primary Cost Centre, select Primary from the list.

Refer Creating Cost Centres for Job Costing for details on using Cost Centres for Job Costing.

N o t e : Unlike Groups, you can allocate transactions to Primary Cost Centres. However,

you should do so when you do not have Sub Cost Centres under the Primary Cost

Centre. It is suggested that you allocate transactions to the lowest levels (similar to

l e d g e r s ) .

Displaying a Single Cost Centre

To display the details of Cost Centre masters

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Cost Centres > Display (under Single Cost Centre)

The Cost Centre Display screen appears. It is not possible to make any modifications to the Cost Centre masterin the Display mode. You can only view the details in this mode.



Altering a Cost Centre

To alter an existing Cost Centre

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Cost Centres> Alter (under Single Cost Centre)

The Cost Centre Alteration screen appears. Make the necessary changes and Accept to save.

Deleting a Cost Centre

You can delete a Cost Centre from the Cost Centre Alteration screen by pressing ALT+D.

You can delete a Cost Centre only if

It does not have any Cost Centres created under it.

It is not used in any transactions.

Explanation on Buttons for Cost Centres in Single Mode

Groups, Ledgers, Voucher Types

It enables you to switch to these areas without having to quit from the current screen.

F11: Features

To change company features. Refer Activate Company Features [F11] for more details.

F12: Configure

To change the configuration of master information.

N o t e : Configuration changes affect all companies in the data directory, whereas

Features changes affect the current company only.

Creating Multiple Cost Centres

You can create multiple Cost Centres in this mode.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Cost Centres> Create (under Multiple Ledgers)

The Multi Cost Centre Creation screen displays.

A brief explanation on each of the fields in the Multi Cost Centre Creation screen follows.

Under Cost Centre

Select a particular Cost Centre as the parent Cost Centre if you wish to create a number of cost centres under it.

If you do not want to be limited/ restricted to one parent Cost Centre while creating Cost Centres, choose AllItems .

Name of Cost Centre

Enter the name of the Cost Centre to be created. The alias option is not available in this mode.

Select single alter to give aliases to Cost Centres created in multiple mode.

Under

The Parent Cost Centre selected from Under Cost Category field displays automatically. If All Items is selectedfrom Under Cost Category , you have the option of selecting the Cost Centre from the List of Cost Centres .Refer Cost Category for further details

Displaying Cost Centres in Multiple Mode

You can display the details of multiple Cost Centres at a time in this mode.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Cost Centres> Display (under Multiple Cost Centres)

Select a Cost Centre or All Items to display the details of all the Cost Centres under it. It is not possible to makechanges to any of the fields in the Display mode.



More:

Altering Cost Centres in multiple mode

Altering Cost Centres in Multiple Mode

You can alter multiple Cost Centres at a time in this mode.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info.> Cost Centres > Alter (under Multiple Cost Centres)

Use <backspace> to move back to the field Under Cost Centre or use the button F4: Parent to change parent.Make the necessary changes in the respective fields and Accept to save.

N o t e : You cannot delete a Cost Centre in multiple mode

Explanation on Buttons in Multiple Mode

F4: Parent

It is used to move the cursor to the field Under Cost Centre .

F4: New Parent

It is used to bring up the list of Cost Centres to select a new parent Cost Centre.

F6: Skip Name/Edit Name

It is used for faster data entry when you need to alter only the Category and the Parent Cost Centre, but not thenames. When you skip names, you might change the Category or the parent Cost Centre to one, which belongs toanother Category. Since this violates categorization rules, Tally displays an error message after you accept thescreen.

F7: Skip Parent/Edit Parent

It is used for quicker data entry, when you do not need to alter the parent Cost Centres but only the name of theCost Centre. The error, that also occurs with F6: Skip Names , should be avoided here.

Groups, Ledgers, Cst Cat:




F11: Features:

To change Company features, refer Activate Company Features [F11] for more details.

Cost Category

Cost Categories are useful for organisations that require allocation of resources to parallel sets of Cost Centres.Such organisations would usually be project oriented.

Most organisations would not need Cost Categories. The proper use of Cost Centres itself would offer the samebenefits. Cost Categories could increase data entry work and make it more complicated. Hence, before opting forCost Categories, evaluate whether you actually need this option. Always attempt to first use Cost Centres.

Use of Cost Categories

By using Cost Categories you may allocate, in parallel, a transaction to more than one set of Cost Centres. Thefollowing example illustrates the use of Cost Categories.

The Primary Cost Centres such as Marketing, Finance and Manufacturing can now belong to a category -Departments.

The Salesmen A, B and C can be Cost Centres under a Category - Executives.

Similarly, you can create a new Cost Category 'Projects' under which Cost Centres such as Airport construction,Road construction and Buildings may be created. The classification appears as in the following matrix.

Specify a Cost Category to allow allocation of only revenue items or items of both revenue and capital nature. Inthis example, allow both for Departments and Projects Categories and only revenue for Executives.

Salesman A incurs conveyance expenses of Rs. 1000. If he has incurred it for marketing, allocate this amount tothe Cost Centre - Marketing and his own Cost Centre - Salesman A. (Allocate this while entering a paymentvoucher debiting Conveyance and crediting Cash.) If the salesman now incurs expense for the project Buildings,allocate to the Cost Centres - Salesman A and Buildings.

Allocate an expense to one or more Cost Centres. It is not essential to always allocate expenses to all CostCentres. If you did not create Cost Categories, you would have been able to allocate the expense to either theProject Buildings cost centre or Salesman A, not to both.

You can obtain details of conveyance expenses incurred by Salesman A on Marketing as well as on the Buildingsproject when you have Cost Categories.

You cannot, however, extract a single report giving details of marketing expenses incurred by Salesman A on theProject Buildings. These are different Cost Categories and cannot be merged. If such reports are required, youmust create ledgers such as Conveyance - Marketing which will help you generate the desired report.

By allocating expenses to parallel Cost Centres under different categories, you are simply assigning the amountsto them; the amount does not increase. In the above example, the conveyance of Rs. 1000 remains an expense ofRs. 1000 only. Tally performs an automatic reconciliation on real-time basis, saving you the effort of reconcilingLedgers and Cost Centres.

N o t e : Transactions are not allocated to Cost Categories but to Cost Centres only.



Creating a Single Cost Category

To create a Cost Category, set Maintain Cost Centres to Yes in F11: Features and then set More than ONEPayroll/Cost Category to Yes.

By default, it is set to No. Tally creates a single Cost Category called Primary Cost Category and allocates allCost Centres created, prior to enabling this feature, to this category. You can create new cost categories, and alterthe existing Cost Centres to allocate them under required Cost Categories.

To create a Cost Category

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Cost Categories > Create (under Single Cost Category)

The Cost Category Creation screen displays.

A brief description on each of the fields in the Cost Category Creation screen follows.

Name

Enter the name of the Cost Category. For example, Products.

N o t e: There is no sub-classification of Cost Categories and hence you do not find an

U n d e r option. Though there is a Primary Cost Category, it is not a parent of other

categories.

(alias)

Enter an alias if you wish to call the Category by another name or even by a code number. This field displays onlyif you set Allow ADVANCED entries in Masters in Gateway of Tally >F12: Configure> Accts/Inv Info. toYes.

Allocate Revenue Items

Set this option to Yes, to allocate all sales, purchase, expenses and income related transactions to Cost Centres



that you create under the Cost Category. Normally, you would enable this option. However, should you need toallocate only capital/non-revenue items only to Cost Centres in that cost category, set this to No.

Allocate Non-Revenue Items

You would, usually, disable this option by setting it to No as most Cost Centres need only revenue allocation.However, should you wish to allocate items of non-revenue (capital) or Balance Sheet items, you may set it toYes. Organisations increasingly require allocation of capital items to Cost Centres. They wish to monitor thecapital expenditure incurred on Cost Centres and measure them against revenue earned. Recognising this trend,Tally has provided this option.

N o t e : Enable either revenue or non-revenue items, or both. Do not disable both. Tally

sets Yes, by default, for revenue items and No for Non-revenue items.

Displaying a Single Cost Category

To view the details of the selected Cost Category masters from this mode

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Cost Categories> Display (under Single Cost Category)

Select a Cost Category from the List of Categories. The Cost Category Display screen displays.

You cannot make any changes to the fields in the Display mode.

Altering a Single Cost Category

To alter an existing Cost Category

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Cost Categories> Alter (under Single Cost Category)

Select the Cost Category from the List of Categories. The Cost Category Alteration screen displays. Make thechanges in the required fields and Accept to save.

Deleting a Cost Category

You may delete a Cost Category that does not have any cost centre under it from the Cost Category Alterationscreen. Use ALT+D to delete it. Tally does not allow deletion of a Cost Category that has Cost Centres.

Buttons in Single Cost Category screens

Groups, Ledgers, Vch Types


F11: Features

To change company features. A detailed explanation on features has been given in the earlier section underGateway of Tally.

N o t e : Configuration changes affect all companies, whereas Features changes affect




Creating Multiple Cost Categories

You can create multiple Cost Categories at a time using the multiple mode.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Cost Categories > Create (under Multiple Cost categories)

The Multi Cost Category Creation screen displays.

An explanation on each of the fields in Multi Cost Category Creation screen follows.

S. No.

This is an auto-generated serial number.

Name of Category

Enter the name of the Cost Category.

Allocations for

Revenue Items

This is set to Yes , by default. However, you have the option of altering it. This denotes whether you want toallocate revenue items to Cost Centres under it.

Non-revenue Items

This is set to No , by default. You can alter it if you want to allocate non-revenue items to Cost Centres under it.

N o t e : There is no Under field as you cannot sub-classify Cost Categories. Cost

Categories have Cost Centres as their sub-classification.

Displaying Cost Categories in multiple mode

You can display multiple Cost Categories at a time in this mode. To display Cost Categories in the multiple mode

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Cost Categories > Display (under Multiple Cost Categories)

The Multi Cost Category Display screen appears. View the details of all the Cost Categories created. It is notpossible to make any changes in this mode.

Altering Cost Categories in multiple mode

You can alter multiple Cost Categories at a time in this mode. To alter Cost Categories in the multiple mode

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Cost Categories > Alter (under Multiple Cost Categories)

The Multi Cost Category Alteration screen displays. Make the necessary changes and Accept to save.

N o t e : You cannot delete a Cost Category in multiple mode.

Buttons in Single Multiple Cost Category screens

F6: Skip names

It is used for quicker data entry when you need to alter only the Allocation details and not the names of the CostCategories.

F8: Skip Details

It is used for faster data entry when you do not need to alter the Allocation (Revenue and Non- revenue) details.You need to give only the names and the default allocations of Yes for Revenue and No for Non-revenue displayautomatically when you are creating Cost Categories. If you are in alter mode, the allocations that you opted forwhen creating the Categories are retained.

Groups, Ledgers

It enables you to switch to these areas, without having to quit from the current screen.

F11: Features

It is used to change company features. A detailed explanation on features has been given in the earlier sectionunder Gateway of Tally .

N o t e : Configuration changes affect all companies, whereas Features changes affect


Creating Cost Centres under Cost Categories

To create a Cost Centre under a Cost Category, set More than ONE Payroll/Cost Category to Yes

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Cost Centre > Create (under Single Cost Centres)

Category

This field appears only when you have opted for More than ONE Payroll/Cost Category in F11: Features.Else, Tally automatically creates a Primary Cost Category to which all cost centres are assigned. You will usuallynot need more than one cost category and should not use it until you are absolutely sure that the sameinformation is not available in Cost Centres.

Create a primary cost centre, Bangalore.

All the other fields are described in detail in the section Creating Cost Centres in Single mode

Displaying and Altering Cost Centres under Cost Categories in Single mode is similar to Displaying and AlteringCost Centres in Single mode explained previously. The only additional field is Category.

Creating Multiple Cost Centres under Cost Categories

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Cost Centres> Create (under Multiple Cost Centres)

This is a quick way to create a number of Cost Centres at a time.

Under Cost Centre

Select a particular Cost Centre as the parent cost centre if you wish to create a number of Cost Centres under it.In the above screen, Finance has been selected and the cost centres Taxation, Management Accounts andTreasury are created under it. If you do not want to be restricted to one parent cost centre while creating costcentres, choose All Items . The table Under Cost Centre has the columns Category, Name of Cost Centre andUnder. If the parent Cost Centre (the field 'Under Cost Centre') is not 'All Items', the cursor skips the Under field.

Category

Select the Category under which the Cost Centre will be created from the List of Categories or create a newcategory by pressing [Alt+C]

Name of Cost Centre

Enter the name of the new cost centre. The alias facility is not available in this mode. Select single alter to givealiases to Cost Centres created in multiple mode.

Under

Select the parent Cost Centre from the List of Cost Centres . The list displays only the Cost Centres that belongto the selected Category.



Displaying and Altering Cost Centres under Cost Categories in Multiple mode is similar to Displaying and AlteringCost Centres in Multiple mode explained in the respective chapters. The only additional field is Category.

Error in Categorisation of Cost Centres:

PARENT BELONGS TO ANOTHER CATEGORY!

This error occurs when you try to assign a cost centre to a parent cost centre belonging to a different category. Inmost places, Tally prevents you from making this error, by not displaying a cost centre belonging to a differentcategory.

However, this action is not possible when you are altering a cost centre in multiple mode, selecting 'All Items'from Under Cost Centre (You may have chosen to skip either or both).

You would have changed the Category without changing the name and the parent. However, Tally is able toascertain this error only when you accept the screen.

Budgets

A budget is a plan prepared for the flow of funds in an organisation. It contains financial guidelines for the futureplan of action for a selected period of time.

A budget helps to refine goals and use funds efficiently. It provides accurate information for evaluation of financialactivities, aids in decision making and provides a reference for future planning.

Multiple budgets can be created for specific purposes in Tally. Budgets for Banks, Head offices, Optimisticbudgets, Realistic budgets, Pessimistic budgets, and so on can be created. Departmental budgets likeMarketing Budgets, Finance Budgets, and so on, can also be created. Budget figures can be used in Tally tocompare actuals and variances.

In Tally, you can create, alter and delete a budget.

Activating Budgets Feature

To activate the Budgets feature in Tally:

Select F11: Features > Accounting Features

Set Maintain Budgets and Controls? to Yes.

Accept to save.

More:

Creating a Budget

Alter a Budget



Creating a Budget

To create a Budget in Tally

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Budgets > Create

In the Budget Creation screen enter a Name for your budget.

Select from the List of Budgets for Under field. You can have a hierarchical setup for budgets. In the Listof Budgets, Primary is at the top of the hierarchy and you can create more primary budgets. Sub-budgetscan be created under Primary budgets.

Enter the period of the budget in the From and To fields. The period entered can be a month, a year or anyother period.

In Set/Alter Budgets of, select

Groups - To create a budget for a Group of ledger accounts.

Ledgers - To create a budget for Ledgers.

Cost Centres - To create a budget for Cost Centres.

Accept to save.

More:

Budget for Groups

Budget for Ledger accounts

Budgets for Cost Centres



Budget for Groups

Set Yes in the Groups field in the Budget Creation/Alteration screen to set budgets for a group or group ofledgers.

In the Group Budget screen, select a Group from the List of Groups and enter Account Name .

Enter the cost centre for a group in Cost Centre . Select Not Applicable , if the budget is not for a particularcost centre, but for the company.

In Type of Budget , select from the following two types.

On Nett Transactions 1.

Select this option to monitor the transaction amounts, not the balances. Nett is net of debits and credits forthe specified period. For example, Nett transactions for Indirect Expenses are the debit amount for thespecified period after reducing the credits for the same period. Opening and closing balances are notconsidered.

On Closing Balance 2.

Select this option to monitor the balance of the accounts, not the transactions. For example, balances ofbank accounts, balances of debtors.

Enter the budget amount in the Amount field.

Budget for Ledger Accounts

Set Yes in the Ledgers field in the Budget Creation/Alteration screen to set budgets for ledgers.

In the Ledger Budget screen, select a Ledger from the List of Ledgers and enter Account Name .

Enter the cost centre for a group in Cost Centre . Budgets can be created for ledger accounts pertaining to a costcentre. For example, Accountancy Fees for Finance Group. Accountancy Fees can be repeated for another costcentre such as a Branch. Select Not Applicable if the budget is not for a particular cost centre, but for thecompany.

In Type of Budget , select from the following two types.

On Nett Transactions 1.

Select this option to monitor the transaction amounts, not the balances. Nett is net of debits and credits forthe specified period. You do not expect to have a negative figure in Revenue items which reflect thetransacted amounts. If there are negative figures, they are adjustments. For example, an expense accountlike travel always has debit entries unless there is a reversal due to error or charge to a customer.

Caution: When using Nett Transactions, the Budget Closing Balances actually get adjusted even if you have not selected

this type. The figures in the Profit & Loss Account reflect the Closing Balance figures.

N o t e : To compare transactions against budgets, especially revenue income and

expenses, select On Nett Transactions.

On Closing Balance2.

Select this option to monitor the balance of the accounts, not the transactions. For example, balances ofbank accounts, balances of debtors. This is useful for Balance Sheet items.

N o t e : To compare closing balance figures in final statements, especially Balance Sheet

items like assets and liabilities, select Closing Balances.

Enter the budget amount in the Amount field.

Apportionment of budget specified for periods more than a month

Ledger Budgets are apportioned for each month on the basis of number of days.



Group Budgets do not get apportioned. Hence, Budget for Current Assets does not automatically flow tosub-groups.

Closing Balances Budget: Each month will have the same budget value except that the actual OpeningBalance is taken into account.

Nett transactions Budgets specified for a period get equally apportioned over the period.

Enter the budget amount for the specific ledger.

You can set the Budget for as many ledger accounts as required and accept to save.

Use Columns and Variance options to compare budget figures with actuals in most statements.

Budgets for Cost Centres

The purpose of a budget is to control expenditure. You can create multiple budgets in Tally, each for a specificpurpose such as for the Bank, for the Head Office, Marketing budgets, Finance budgets, and so on.

Set Yes in the Cost Centres field in the Budget Creation/Alteration screen to set budgets for costcentres.

In the Cost Centre Budget screen, select a Cost Centre from the List of Cost Centres and enter CostCentre .

Enter a budget figure in Expenses for the cost centre.

Enter a budget figure in Income for the cost centre.

Enter Closing Balance.

Enter more cost centres, if required, and accept to save.



Alter a Budget

You can modify a budget, using the alter option.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Budgets > Alter

In the Budget Alteration screen, modify the fields as required. Change the period or change budgets ofGroups, Ledgers and Cost Centres.

N o t e : Set/Alter Budgets is set to N o by default. Set this option to Y e s to alter.

Deleting a Budget

To delete a budget

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Budgets > Alter

Press Alt+D.

Budget Variance

Trial Balance and Group Summary have a feature called Budget Variance. The Budget Variance button (Alt+B)is active if Budgets feature is enabled and at least one budget created. Budget Variance displays Budgets, Actualswith percentage and Variance from the budget with percentage.

Budget Variance can be accessed from: 1.

Gateway of Tally > Display > Trial Balance to display the Trial Balance screen.

Gateway of Tally > Display > Account Books > Group Summary and select a group from List ofGroups to display the Group Summary screen.

Click on Budget Variance (Alt+B) from the toolbar to display the Budget Analysis screen.2.

Select from the List of Budgets for Budgets/Scenario.3.

Three columns display Budget, Actuals and Budget Variance, respectively.4.



Introduction

A voucher is the primary online document for recording transactions. Transaction recording and analysis aregreatly facilitated by having specific formats for different types of transactions. Tally provides 16 differentpredefined voucher formats or what it calls predefined types of vouchers. These are used for recording varioustransactions. A payment voucher is used for all types of payments, a receipt voucher for all types of moneyreceipts, a sales voucher for recording sales transactions, and so on.

These predefined vouchers fulfil your normal transaction needs. They pertain to both accounting and inventory.Some of these vouchers can also be used differently according to the situation, e.g., sales vouchers can be usedas invoices, vouchers can be post-dated, etc. Such use can be decided at the time of voucher entry by selectingthe appropriate button.

The predefined voucher types can be displayed as follows:

Gateway of Tally > Display > List of Accounts > <Ctrl>+<V> [Voucher Types]

Tally acknowledges the special requirements of some users for more voucher types. These arise in cases like whenyou need the same voucher but in different names or separate series of numbers.

Examples include Cash Payment Vouchers and Bank Payment vouchers where the relevant predefined voucher isPayment Voucher. You may have two or more sets of Sales Vouchers for different kinds of sales transactions e.g.Credit Sales, Cash Sales, etc.

You would need to alter a voucher type to change default settings for different information appearing in vouchers.Using F12: Configure, you can further configure a voucher.

Alter a predefined voucher type

Even if you do not need extra voucher types, you would normally alter the predefined voucher types to customisethem according to your needs, e.g., to control their numbers.

Display or alter each voucher type (by pressing enter or double clicking) after Gateway of Tally > Display >List of Accounts > Ctrl+V Voucher Types

We shall create a new voucher type to explain the different features. It would also be applicable to alteration ofvoucher types including predefined types.

More:

Create a Voucher Type



Creating a Voucher Type

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Voucher Type > Create

N ote : A new voucher type must assume the functions of a predefined voucher type

The Voucher Type creation screen is divided into three sections depending on the various settings.

Name

Give the name of the new voucher type, e.g., Sales Invoice.

General

Type of Voucher

The type of voucher should be any one of the predefined voucher types (already listed in introduction). The newvoucher type would inherit the properties of this predefined voucher type. It would function exactly like thepredefined voucher.

Abbreviation

A n abbreviation is required particularly for unformatted reports, which do not use compressing techniques. (Tallyallows printing of both formatted and unformatted reports). Even if the Abbreviation is not specified, Tallyautomatically sets a default name to the Voucher. In this example, give ‘Purch’ as the abbreviation. Though thereis no restriction on the length of the abbreviation, it should preferably be five characters or less.

Method of Voucher Numbering

This is, perhaps, one reason for your opting for a new voucher type. There are three methods available:

None

This will disable numbering of such vouchers. If you select this method, no further information is required.

Manual

This method will allow you to number vouchers of this type yourself. It does not check for sequence of thenumbers and permits you to specify anything you wish in the voucher number field. However, you may choose toprevent entry of duplicate numbers. If you do, enable the next field 'Prevent Duplicates'.

1. Prevention of Duplicates is possible if you enable the option at the time of creation. You may enable it later (byalteration) only if there are no transactions of this voucher type.

2. If you face difficulty because transactions now exist, simply create another voucher type for preventingduplicates of subsequent voucher numbers.

No further information is required for manual numbering method.

Automatic

This method is both flexible and exhaustive. Use it carefully to give you your desired numbering system. Selectthis option to let Tally number the vouchers automatically for you.

Use Advance Configuration

If the Method of Voucher Numbering is set to Automatic, then an additional field to set the advanced configurationfor the Voucher type appears. Setting this field to Yes , Voucher Type Creation (Secondary) screen appears. Referto Use Advance Configuration for more details.

A further discussion on these options is necessary.

Use EFFECTIVE dates for vouchers?

Select Yes if you want to enter effective dates for vouchers. You would opt for this if you have instances where atransaction under consideration for overdue/ageing analysis is recorded currently but will take effect from anotherdate. If effective date is entered, the overdue/ageing will be considered from the effective date and not fromvoucher date.

Make Optional as Default

Setting this option to Yes , will set your Voucher to Optional Voucher by default. Refer to Optional Vouchers forfurther details.

Use common narration?

Select Yes to give a common narration for the entire voucher. Tally vouchers can have multiple entries. Hence,



you may wish to give a common narration for all the entries of the voucher or a separate narration for each entryor both. Select Yes even when you want both. Select No if you do not want a common narration.

Example of common narration in a voucher:

Narrations for each entry

Select Yes if you want to give a separate narration for each entry of a voucher. This would be applicable for amultiple entry voucher where you want separate details for each entry. Select No if you do not want separatenarration for each entry.

N o t e : The option to create an Excise Voucher type appears in the General section if, the

Excise feature is enabled in F11 features.

Printing

Print after saving voucher?

If you want to print every voucher after entering it, select Yes , else select No . This is suitable for an onlineenvironment where you use the Tally printed voucher as the formal voucher. Remember, however, that thetransaction is already recorded and posted and should you wish to make corrections to the printed voucher, youmust alter the Tally voucher online and print it out again.

N o t e : Depending on the Type of Voucher you have selected to create or alter, different

printing features appear in this field.

Name of Class

You can create classes by entering the class name in this section. A detailed discussion on Voucher class creation



is covered in Voucher Classes .

Use Advance Configuration

I f the Method of Voucher Numbering is set to Automatic, then an additional field to set the advancedconfiguration for the Voucher type appears. Setting this field to Yes, Voucher Type Creation (Secondary) screenappears.

Starting number

Give the number for the first voucher. Usually it is 1. You can set it to any number you want. Tally will auto-increment from this number for subsequent vouchers. However, the numbering of vouchers also depends on othervariables supplied by you, which follow hereafter.

Width of Numerical Part

You may leave it blank to let Tally automatically adjust the width according to the number. However, for moreaesthetically aligned look in reports, you may keep a fixed width, e.g., 3.



Prefill with ZERO?

When the width is specified, the digits before the number is blank if 'No' and zeroes if 'Yes'.

E.g. 001 1

010 10

PEU/001/06-07

PEU/1/06-07

PEU/ 1/06-07

Restart Numbering

Voucher Numbering may be restarted with the starting number (as specified) at intervals selected by you - Daily,Monthly, Never, Weekly or Yearly. You must give the date whence numbering should restart under the fieldApplicable from. The date must be the first day of the month. You may specify more than one Restart dates. Forexample, should you wish to renumber your vouchers from 01 June 06 on yearly basis, you must specify it in thenext field. This would retain the numbering system in the prior period. If, however, you want to change thenumbers from the beginning from monthly to yearly basis, simply alter the first field itself.

Prefix Details

If you want the voucher numbers to be prefixed with some fixed information, give the information here. Examplesof prefix details are:

month of the voucher as given above- 'April/'1.

company info like 'TSPL/'2.

even fixed number series like '1000'3.

N o t e : The numeric portion begins immediately after the prefix information. Therefore,

be sure to give a space or a slash '/' or some such character should you want a

separation, e.g. we have specified April/. The slash would cause the voucher number to

appear as April/001, otherwise it would be April001. This facilitates simple usage for

fixed number series appearing as 200100001 where 2001 is the prefix, and 00001 is the

starting number with a width of 5, and with leading zeros.

You can choose different prefix information for different periods or let one continue. The prefix continues from thedate you mention under 'Applicable from' till the next date that you may give under 'Applicable from'. Hence, wehave chosen to change the prefix from April to May when the month changes. Please note, however, that if weomit to change the prefix for the subsequent months (i.e. do not give 'Applicable from' date for the month), yourvoucher numbers for even June, July etc would contain the prefix 'May/'.

Suffix Details

You can also give fixed suffix information for the voucher number. The same rules and effects as for Prefix Detailsapply.

Voucher Classes

Voucher Classes are available for all major voucher types and the Cost Centres can be allocated if classes areused. Automation of cost centre allocation has met the need of 'percentage allocation' based on predefinedfigures.

Cost centre classes affect all voucher types. For further details refer to Cost Centre Classes.

Voucher Classes for Payment, Receipt and Contra Vouchers

The primary intention of using classes for payment, receipt and contra vouchers is to enable data input in 'singleentry' or list mode rather than in Tally's traditional double entry mode. You can also use it to have a separate formfor each cash and bank account.

Let us take an example of a Payment Voucher.

You can either alter the existing Payment Voucher Type or create a new voucher type based on it.

(From Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Types )

The item Name of Class is below Effective Dates for Vouchers and above the Numbering Table.

Give a name to the class by simply typing it, e.g. Barclays Bank Payment. You may create more than one class.Hence, you might want to have one more for Cash Payment.

The Class Table



Exclude these Groups

Groups other than Bank or Cash groups should not be selected. This is used to exclude Cash or Bank Groups thatare not to be used in this class to pay out the money. In our example, we want to exclude Cash and Credit Cards.

Include these Groups

Groups other than Bank or Cash groups should not be selected. You might exclude a top level group but includeits sub-group.

Ledger Name

Selecting the ledger account that will be used to pay out the money will eliminate the need to select it duringentry. In this case, it is BarcSlays Bank. In a receipt voucher, you will select the ledger account into which monieswill be received. You may even select 'Not Applicable'. The purpose of selecting 'Not Applicable' will be to permitSingle Entry mode and at the same time retaining the option of selecting the account during entry.

N o t e : Exclude or Include Groups are irrelevant when you specify a Ledger Name for

which the class is created. They are useful when you select 'Not Applicable' .

In case you do not require split payments, you could create only one class with nothing in include/exclude Groupsand without any ledger Name. A single class does not require class selection and is a rapid way of using SingleEntry mode with full functionality of all ledgers available.

Accept the class table and the voucher type alteration. You may use [CTRL]+[A] combination.

More:

Payment Voucher Entry with Classes

Purchase Entries in Invoice mode (without classes)

Purchase Voucher Classes

Additional Accounting Entries

Voucher Classes for Journals



Payment Voucher Entry with Classes

Select Voucher Entry at the Gateway of Tally. Press F5:Payment . You have to select a class or Not Applicable ifno class is desired for this entry. If Cost Centre Class has been set, it can be selected too.

The entries will be made as follows:

The Voucher Class is Barclays Bank Payment. We have selected a Cost Centre Class called Departments too. Thatwill be discussed later. Note that you do not have to select the bank account and the entries are not in the regularDr/Cr format. Data entry in Tally was already very rapid. It is now faster than before!



Purchase Entries in Invoice mode (without classes)

Purchase Vouchers can now be created in Invoice mode. You can enter the suppliers' invoices in the same way asthey physically appear.

Set-up Invoice Mode entry for Purchase transactions

Select F11:Company Features .1.

Select F1: Accounting Features2.

Set the option 'Allow Invoicing' to Yes3.

Enter Purchases in Invoice Format? Set it to Yes4.

Accept the screen using Ctrl+A.5.

Entry of Purchase vouchers in Invoice mode

Select F9:Purchases . Select As Invoice button or use CTRL+V . This button is a toggle for Invoice and Vouchermodes. You may want to use the voucher mode for more complex entries.

Entries are exactly like sales invoices and hence are not discussed.

The treatment of additional cost of purchases needs elaborating.

Additional Cost of Purchases

If it is desired to add the other purchase expenses like freight and import duty to the cost of the item, you wouldhave activated the option in F11:Company Features 'Track Additional Costs of Purchases'. In voucher mode, theadditional cost details have to be filled in after the allocation of each purchase item.

In Invoice mode, the treatment of additional costs on stock items is automated by altering the parent groupmaster details of the expenses.

In many situations, more than one item is purchased where the expense that is incurred for them is charged as alump-sum. However, to give an effective cost including the expense to each purchased item, you would earliergive additional costs of purchase for each item. That method though very flexible and practical could be tedious.That process is now automated and allocation of the expense to stock item can be done on a predefined basis.

The following set-up activity is required to be carried out:

Alter the Parent Group of the expense ledger accounts, e.g. Direct Expenses. You will find a new option -Method to Allocate when used in Purchase Invoice. If you want to appropriate the ledger accounts under

1.



this group to stock items by either Quantity or value, you must select the option. Select Appropriate by Qtyfor our example.

1.

Now if freight belongs to the group Direct Expenses, the amount will be apportioned by quantity, i.e., in the ratioof 1:5. If however, the parent group does not have an allocation method or is set to No Appropriation or NotApplicable, the amount of freight will not be apportioned to the items and will simply remain in the financial booksas expense.

N o t e : In Invoice mode, Purchases can be allocated to Cost Centres only when Cost

Centre classes are used, i.e., you have to auto-allocate purchases to cost centres if

you are using the Invoice mode of entry. Using the voucher mode of entry for purchases

allows manual allocation of purchases to cost centres.

Purchase Voucher Classes

Purchase Voucher Classes are templates where you can restrict accounts to be used in entries as well as automateaccounting entries for items and expenses.

You can either alter the existing Purchase Voucher Type or create a new voucher type based on it.

From Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Types

The item Name of Class is below Effective Dates for Vouchers and above the Numbering Table.

Give a name to the class by simply typing it, e.g. Imports. You may create more than one class. The class table isnow to be completed.

Exclude and Include Groups have been discussed before and do not require further elaboration.



Default Accounting Allocations

Each Stock Item in the invoice can be allocated to the financial (nominal) account mentioned here. Hence, all thestock items that will be entered in this class will automatically affect the Nominal ledger account Purchase –Imports. Of course, the stock item record remains as it is and can be viewed separately.

The allocation cannot be split up at present but in future releases you will be able to split this to cater to Taxinclusive prices.


Expenses and other charges like Import Duty, Freight, VAT, Sales Tax can be specified here which will becalculated automatically on the Type of Calculation and Value basis. For explanation on each Type of Calculation,refer the Appendix.

We have selected Freight which is an account under the group Direct Expenses.

Type of Calculation

We select User defined value as we would like to input the amount of freight charged on the invoice.

However, we would like Freight expenses to be apportioned to each stock item based quantity and we want theapportionment done automatically.

Auto-allocation of Additional Entries to Stock Items Purchased

(This method is not applicable for sales invoices)

The Group Direct Expenses had been altered earlier to allocate by quantity. Hence, the allocation will be doneautomatically based on quantity.

Your purchase voucher class has been set-up. You can have more than one additional accounting entries. You canalso have more than one Class.



Voucher Classes for Journals

Classes allow Journals to handle Forex Gain Loss Adjustments for companies having Multi-Currency Accounts. Youwould create a 'class' in the normal way (Accounts Info > Voucher Types > Alter > Journal). And havingselected the class during Voucher Entry, will find only those Ledger Accounts appearing which have a Gain/Loss tobe adjusted as of the date of voucher and auto-calculation of these amounts.

Voucher Classes for Debit Notes and Credit Notes

Voucher classes for Credit Notes are similar to sales invoices except for one important inclusion. You can set theclass for interest entries to enable adjustment of interest payable. If the Interest option is selected, the othersales invoice-like options will not be available. A separate class may to be created for entries like Sales Returns.Since Sales and Purchase Invoice classes have already been dealt with, we shall not elaborate on this behavioranymore.

Debit Note classes can be set for interest entries only. Classes for other entries are not available as the invoicemode of entry is not possible for Debit Notes.

Classes for interest entries are covered under Interest Calculations.

Voucher Classes for Stock Journal

Stock Journal classes allow you to handle transfers from one location (Godown) to another, for companies havingMulti-Location Inventory and at least two location/Godowns created. Once the class is selected, you will need tospecify the Destination and simply provide the list of items to be transferred. Through this class all items/batchesthus selected will be exactly mirrored to the destination, including Batch Number, Rate and Value.

Go to Accounts Info > Voucher Types > Create

Select the Stock Journal Voucher from the List of Voucher Types. Enter all the fields as per your requirement.Refer Creating a Voucher Type for more details.

To create a Stock Journal Voucher Class , enter a name in the Name of Class field. (Eg: Transfer)

The Class: Transfer screen is displayed. To create a class for inter-godown transfer set the option Use Class forInter-Godown Transfer to Yes.




Refer Voucher Classes for Stock Journals in Job Costing for more details.

Cost Centre Classes

The purpose of Cost Centre Classes is to facilitate predetermined allocation of ledger accounts (like expenses andincomes) to cost centres during voucher entry. Allocation to cost centres can be made while using voucher classesand the cost centres can be 'classed' too.

How does it work?

Automation of cost centre allocation involves 'percentage allocation' based on predefined figures. Cost CentreClasses are defined where percentages at which allocation is to be made are given.

Cost centre classes affect all voucher types. In voucher entry, depending upon the cost centre class, the allocationwill be carried out in the background without the allocation screen appearing at all.

More:

Set up required for Cost Centre Classes

Voucher Entry with Cost Classes

An explanation of 'Types of Calculation'



Set up Required for Cost Centre Classes

Before you select classes, it is advisable to create the cost centre structure. Hence, create your cost categoriesand cost centres before creating classes.

Draw out on paper the Classes required and indicate which cost centres will be affected for each class. Forexample, You might have the following structure:

Divisions

Export1.

Wholesale2.

Retail

Departments -

3.

Finance4.

Marketing

Where Divisions and Departments are Cost Categories the others are cost centres.

Now, you want to allocate sales to the following Cost Centre Classes:

5.

Export - to allocate 100% of Export sales to the cost centre Export6.

Wholesale - to allocate 100% of wholesale sales to the cost centre Wholesale7.

Retail - to allocate 100% of retail sales to the cost centre Retail

You also want to allocate all the sales to the Marketing Department

You want to allocate Marketing Expenses pro-rata in the following manner :

Export – 60%1.

Wholesale – 25%2.

Retail-15%3.

8.

100% to Marketing Department

With this structure, let us now set up the classes.

Set up Cost Centre Classes

At the Gateway of Tally, select F11: Features > Accounting Features

Set Use Pre-defined Cost Centre Allocations during Entry to Yes

(The other options can remain as previously set and are not discussed here.)

You now bring up the Cost Centre Classes creation screen. Type in the Class names and select the Categoriesand the respective cost centres. Specify the percentage of allocation. After entry, your auto-cost allocation screenwill appear as follows :

We have created the Cost Classes as Export, Wholesale, Retail and Marketing Expenses. Divisions andDepartments are cost categories. Export, Wholesale and Retail are cost centres under Divisions. Marketing Groupis a cost centre under Departments.

Although the names of the class and the cost centres are the same in the example, you need not have them withsame names.



Voucher Entry with Cost Classes

Each voucher now contains the Cost Class option at its head. Select Not Applicable in case you want to allocatemanually. Select a cost class to auto-allocate according to the predefined percentages set in that class.

We will take two examples, sales and payment.

In sales, we will select Export as the Cost Class.

Go to the Voucher Entry Screen

Select F8: Sales

You have the following options:

Your voucher type : Sales. You could select another voucher type if required.

Class

This is the Voucher Class which automates ledger allocation and additional accounting entries

Cost Centre Class

Select one of the classes created earlier, Export in this case.

Now enter the sales invoice as usual. The cost centre allocation sub-screen will not come up and the allocation willbe done automatically in the background.

After accepting the entry, check the cost centre displays to verify whether the allocation was done correctly.

Similarly, when you press F5:Payment , you are presented with similar options. Select Marketing Expenses inthat case. The cost centre allocation sub-screen will not come up and the allocation will be done automatically inthe background.

Check the cost centre reports for allocation.

You may even use PgUp or alter the voucher to display the allocation made. It would show the allocation in thevoucher.

Example

You could combine Voucher Class and Cost centre class to maximize automation!



An Explanation of Types of Calculation

As Additional Excise

In the Indian sub-continent, a manufacturing tax, or Excise is levied. For some products, a supplementary levy onthe 'Basic Excise Duty' is charged, or 'Additional Excise Duty'. This is a surcharge calculation. For example, anAdditional Excise Duty of 10% on the Basic Duty. While the calculation method is identical to 'As Surcharge' (seebelow), the result is to provide a 'Total Excise Payable' calculation accurately during Invoice printing.

As a Flat Rate

When you wish to specify a standard mark-up/down on an invoice. For example, 100.00 for every invoice,independent of the qty/value of the invoice.

As Surcharge

When you wish to calculate the value based on the immediately preceding figure. For example, a Sales Tax of10% is applicable on an invoice, which would be calculated on the value of goods sold. On this, a 'Surcharge' of5% - i.e. 5% of the Sales Tax value is applicable.

As Total Amount Rounding

Typically, the last line in an invoice. You would need to create an account which would carry the 'roundingdifference'. Now, as the other values of the invoice are calculated, this account would automatically get adjustedto keep the Total Invoice Value to the desired rounding limits. Normally, you would also mark this invoice as'Remove if Zero ? Yes', so that the account head is not retained in the invoice print-outs if no rounding wasapplicable.

As User Defined Value

This allows you to specify a value while creating the invoice itself. Normally, you would use this when the basis ofcalculation is neither Value nor Qty dependent, and therefore, needs to be entered every time you create aninvoice.

Based on Quantity

In case of calculations based on the 'Total Qty' supplied. For example, you may have Freight or Forwardingcharges as 2.00/Kg, and if the total qty supplied in the invoice is 200.000 Kg, then the amount should become400.00. The 'Value Basis' will also need to be provided as '2.00/Kg' or '0.50/Pc' as the case may be.

On Current Sub Total

In certain environments, taxes are applicable on the Total Goods Value as well as supplementary charges such as'Excise Duty', 'Packing Charges' etc. Normally, when the tax calculation method is specified as 'On Total Sales'(see below), the calculations are based on the Total Goods Value only. When you wish the supplementary chargesto be included, then you would set 'On Current Sub Total' as the type of calculation.

On Item Rate

Typically used for both VAT as well as Excise Duty style calculations. Here, you would have specified the Rate ofTax applicable for each Stock Item, and you would want only those items to be used for calculation purposeswhich equals this Rate of Tax. The advantage is to be able to mix multiple Tax Rate products in the same Invoice,and yet get the correct ones picked up for each Tax bracket.

On Total Sales

The most common basis of Tax Calculation is on the total value of goods/services. This method would calculateusing the sum of Stock Items used in the invoice.



Currencies (Multiple currencies and foreign exchange)

Many Organisations have transactions in more than one currency. Such transactions have to be recorded either inthe base (home) currency or in the foreign currency. If the transactions are recorded in home currency, the rateat which the foreign currency is exchanged should be recorded as well. At times you need to record thetransaction in the foreign currency itself when you maintain the balance of the concerned account in foreigncurrency. Tally uses the term base currency for the currency in which your account books are kept. ForeignExchange is used interchangeably with foreign currency. The base currency is specified while creating thecompany.

Tally makes it easy to manage multiple currencies, automatic calculations of exchange rates, automaticconversion of any currency used to record a transaction to the currency of the account, etc.

The Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Account of the company is maintained in the base currency. Conversion offoreign currency account balances is done as per rules set by you.

More:

Enabling Multiple Currency in Tally

Enabling multiple currency in Tally

Enable Multi-Currency feature to view and enter transactions in multiple currencies.


Select F11: Features > Accounting Features > to display the Company Operations Alteration screen2.

Set Allow Multi-Currency? to Yes 3.

Accept to Save.4.

Multi Currency feature is now enabled.

Currencies menu

View the Currencies menu from Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Currencies .

More:

Create a Currency

Alter Currency

Rates of Exchange



Creating a Currency

Use ASCII Special Characters with [Alt] key combination if your keyboard does not have the symbol. Utilitieslike Character Map (Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools) in Windows shows the keycombination for most symbols. This might be different on some notebook computers, refer to the computer's usermanual or the vendor.

You cannot assign a duplicate currency symbol for a company in Tally.

The Key combinations for a few currency symbols are given below:

Alt + 156 –Pound Sterling - £1.

Alt + 0165 – Japanese Yen - ¥2.

Alt + 0128 – Euro - €3.

Use the Dollar and the Rs. Symbol from the keyboard4.

To create a foreign currency

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Currencies > Create1.

Enter the currency symbol in Symbol. This symbol appears in your reports wherever applicable.2.

Enter the name of the currency in Formal Name.3.

A formal name is required to distinguish different currencies with the same symbols. For e.g. you havecreated two companies (ABC and PQR) in Tally. ABC and PQR have different set of currencies. ABC usessymbol $ for Australian Dollars and PQR uses the symbol $ for U.S. Dollars. The formal name distinguishes

two different currencies with the same symbol when you compare accounts of two companies.

The company that is loaded first retains the original symbol for display purposes. The other company'scurrency symbol will be prefixed with the first letter/first few letters (to make it unique) of the formal name.Here, if ABC is loaded first then the symbol $ is for Australian Dollars and in PQR (loaded next) the symbol $is prefixed with the letter U (first letter of its formal name).

e.g., US Dollars, Pound Sterling, Indian Rupees, Omani Rial, etc.

Note: You cannot assign a duplicate Formal Name for a company in Tally.

Enter the number of decimal places for the currency in Number of Decimal Places. E.g. Currencies with 2decimal places like paisa and currencies with three decimal places like dinar. There are currencies that do nothave decimal places, e.g., Vietnamese Dong.

4.

Tally has two formats for displaying an amount, viz., in millions and in lakhs. 1000000 (one followed by sixzeroes) in millions format would appear as 1,000,000 and lakhs would appear as 10,00,000.

5.

Selecting No means you want amounts to appear in lakhs.

N o t e: You can always specify the appearance of numbers in specific reports, e.g. In Profit &

Loss Account display, press [F12]: Configure to change scale factors for values.

Set Is Symbol SUFFIXED to Amounts? to Yes for the symbol to appear after the amount. Set to No for thesymbol to be prefixed to the amount.

6.

Set Put a SPACE between Amounts and symbol? to Yes to apply a space between amounts and symbol.7.

Enter the symbol for decimal portion of currency in Symbol for Decimal Portion of Amount. E.g. Ps. for Paisa.8.

Enter the number of decimal places for printing the amounts in words in Decimal Places for Printing Amounts inWords. This number should be equal to or lesser than the number specified in Number of Decimal Places field.

9.

N o t e : The C u r r e n c y cannot be translated or transliterated but will appear in the

Language created.



Alter Currency

You can modify or delete a currency master using the Alter option. Rates of Exchange can also be altered fromhere.

To alter a currency master:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Currencies > Alter1.

Select a C urrency from the Currencies list (displayed if there is more than 1 currency) 2.

In the Currency Alteration screen alter details as required. For details see Creating a Currency Master3.

Displaying a Currency

The Currency Display screen displays the details and rates of exchange for a selected currency.

To display the Currency screen:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Currencies > Display1.

Select a C urrency from Currencies list (displayed if there is more than 1 currency) 2.

Enter to view the details3.

Deleting a Currency

1.

To delete a Currency:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Currencies > Alter1.

Select a currency from the Currencies list (displayed if there is more than 1 currency) 2.

Press Alt + D in the Currency Alteration screen to delete3.

N o t e : You cannot delete a Currency that has been used in a voucher transaction.



Rates of Exchange

Rates of Exchange is a feature wherein you can enter the rate of foreign currency for a specific date. Foreignexchange variations occur every day with different selling and buying rates. Rates of Exchange helps you applythe rate for the given date in your transactions.

To open Rates of Exchange :

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Currencies > Rates of Exchange1.

The Multi-Currency Alteration screen is displayed2.

Enter the date for which the exchange rate is applicable3.

Enter the Standard Rate (optional) which is used to calculate variances from the actual transaction rates4.

Enter the Selling Rate (your selling rate)5.

Enter the Buying Rate (your buying rate)6.

Accept to Save7.

N ote : Last Voucher Rate is displayed if any voucher has been entered earlier.

S elling Rate – Specified Rate

Selling rate is your selling rate (as opposed to bank's selling rate) used for receipt voucher entry where youreceive foreign exchange.

This is the rate obtained from the daily newspaper or your banker. If you input this rate before any transactionentry, while entering a foreign exchange transaction, this rate will be brought up by default. (You can still changethe actual rate).

The actual rate at which the currency was last used is displayed and cannot be changed.

The specified rate is used for calculating foreign exchange variances only in case there is no standard rate.

Buying Rate – Specified Rate

Buying Rate is your buying rate (as opposed to bank's buying rate) used in payment vouchers.

The actual rate at which the currency was last used is displayed and cannot be changed.

The specified rate is used for calculating foreign exchange variances only in case there is no standard rate.

N ote: Tally calculates Gain or Loss in foreign exchange transactions automatically using

the standard rates, specified rates and actual transaction rates.



Inventory Information

The Inventory Info menu lists the masters, through which you can provide Tally the details of your company’sinventory.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info.

N o t e: The Inventory Info menu is displayed in Gateway of Tally, only if you select

Maintain Accounts with Inventory from the Type of Company list in the C o m p a n y

C r e a t i o n screen.

Configuring F12:Configure and Setting F11: Features

You can organise the type of information and the level of details that you require, using F12: Configure and F11:Features. You can enable the desired settings. Tally allows you to alter most of the settings at any point of time.

F12: Configure

To configure the settings for Inventory Masters

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Accts/Inv Info.

The settings pertaining to Inventory Masters are set to No, by default. If you reset them to Yes, the featureswould become available. Typically, they are additional fields that appear during Masters creation which enable youto obtain more information and detailed analyses. Refer Accts/Inv Info Configuration for more details.

F11: Features

There are various settings available under Inventory Features, which determine the information to be enteredduring transaction entries. Refer Activate Company Features for more details.



Stock Groups

Stock Groups in Inventory are similar to Groups in Accounting Masters. They are helpful in the classification ofStock Items. Classification is based on some common behaviour. Stock Groups enable easy identification andreporting of Stock Items in statements.

You can group Stock Items under different Stock Groups to reflect their classification based on some commonfunctionality. Grouping enables you to locate Stock Items easily and report their details in statements.

You can group the items of a particular brand to extract stock of all items of that brand.

Consider that the Stock Items in your inventory are Sony 3.5" disks, Maxell 3.5" disks, Sony tapes, Maxell tapes,and so on. Create Stock Groups, Sony and Maxell, and classify Sony products under the group Sony and Maxellproducts under Maxell. You now have ready details of all Sony and Maxell products, duly classified.

Create sub-groups under Stock Groups for deeper analysis.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Groups

More:

Creating a Stock Group

Creating Multiple Stock Groups

Displaying or Altering a Stock Groups

Creating a Stock Group

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Groups > Create (under Single Stock Group)

The Stock Group Creation screen displays.

A brief description on each of the fields in the Stock Group Creation screen follows.

Name

Enter the name of the Stock Group to be created. For example, Building Materials.

Under

Specify whether it is a primary group or a sub-group of another group, by selecting from the list. For example,Primary.

Press Alt + C to create a parent group, if you do not have it in the list.

Can quantities of items be ADDED?

This field pertains to information on measuring the units of the Stock Items that you would categorise under theStock Group.

The Stock Items categorised under the group should have similar units for them to be added up. You cannot addquantities in Kgs to quantities in Pcs.

N o t e : You can always go back and reset this option after assessing the units of the

items in the group.

Buttons in single mode stock group creation

From the Stock Group Creation screen, you can create any of the Masters listed below with a single click.

CategoryCategory

Items



UnitsUnits

GodownGodown

Vch TypesVch Types

The buttons. C u r r e n c y and B u d g e t, a r e available only if you opted for the same in F 1 1 :

F e a t u r e s.

Creating Multiple Stock Groups

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Groups > Create (under Multiple Stock Groups )

Select the parent group under which you want the new groups to be created from the List of Groups . The groupselected is displayed in the Under Group field.

A brief description on each of the fields in the Multi Stock Group Creation screen follows.

Name of Stock Group

Enter the name of the Stock Group.

Under

If you select any group other than All Items in the Under Group field, then this column is filled in automaticallywith the selected Group name and the cursor skips this column. This speeds up data entry.

If you select All Items in the Under Group field, the cursor does not skip this field and allows you to enter theparent group of each of them.

Items are Addable? (Y/N)

This pertains to information on the Stock Items that you would create under this Stock Group. The Stock Itemscreated under the group should have similar units to be 'addable'.

Buttons specific to Multi Stock Group Creation screen

F4:Parent

To change the parent entered in the field Under Group when you have sub-groups created under it. The changeaffects all the sub-groups created under the parent, meaning, they would now belong to the new parent.

F8:Skip Details

If Items are addable is to remain the default, that is, remain the same as specified for the parent Stock Group,use this button. The cursor skips that column which speeds up data entry.



From the Multi Stock Group Creation screen, you can create any of the Masters listed below with a single click.

C ategoryC ategory

I temsI tems

Go downGo down

More:

Displaying and Altering Stock Groups

Displaying and Altering Stock Groups

You can display and alter Stock Group in Single mode and Multiple mode.

Displaying Single Stock Group

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Groups > Display (under Single Stock Group)

Select the Stock Group whose particulars you want to display from the List of Groups. The Stock GroupDisplay screen is displayed. This gives information only on the Stock Group Master and not on any of thebalances.

Altering Single Stock Group

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Groups > Alter (under Single Stock Group)

Select the Stock Group from the List of Groups. The Stock Group Alteration screen displays. Make thenecessary changes and accept Yes to save.

You can delete a Stock Group only from the Stock Group Alteration screen. Select a stock group from the listand press ALT+D to delete it.

N o t e : You cannot delete a Stock Group if it has any sub groups or Stock Items created

under it. You need to first delete the sub groups and Stock Items to delete the Stock

G r o u p .

Displaying Multiple Stock Groups

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Groups > Display (under Multiple Stock Groups)

Select the Stock Group from the List of Groups. The Multi Stock Group Display screen displays. It displaysthe entire sub groups of the selected Group. If you select All Items from the List of Groups, all the groups andsub Groups created are displayed.

Altering Multiple Stock Groups

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Groups > Alter (under Multiple Stock Groups)

The Multi Stock Group Alteration screen displays. Make the necessary changes and accept Yes to save.

N o t e : You cannot delete a Stock Group from multiple mode.



Stock Categories

The concept of Stock Categories is similar to that of Cost Categories. Refer the section on Cost Categories tounderstand the similarity/differences.

N o t e : This option becomes available in the Inventory Info. menu only if you S e t

Maintain Stock Categories to Y e s in F11: Features.

Stock Categories offers a parallel classification of Stock Items. You can create Stock Categories like Floppy Disksand Floppy Drives.

Consider the example given in the Stock Groups. You would know how many 3.5" floppies of Sony and Maxell arein stock. To know the total stock of floppy disks or any alternative item that could be used, Stock Categorieswould be the best option to use. Create a Stock Category called Floppy Disks and classify both Sony 3.5" diskettesas well as Maxell 3.5" diskettes under the same. Since the items are substitutes of each other, if one is out ofstock, you can offer the other of the same category.

Stock Query option available under Statements of Inventory (Gateway of Tally > Display) reveals thestrength of Stock Categories.

N o t e : While configuring F12: Configure and setting F11: Features do not enable

features that you do not need.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock Categories

N o t e : This option is displayed in the Inventory Info. menu only if you set M a i n t a i n

Cost Categories to Y e s in F11: Features.

More:

Creating a Stock Category

Creating Multiple Stock Categories

Display or Alter a Stock Category

Creating a Stock Category

You can create Stock Categories and sub categories of Stock Categories to organise your information.

Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Categories > Create (under Single Stock Category)

The Stock Category Creation screen displays.

A brief description on each of the fields in the Stock Category Creation screen follows.

Name

Enter the name of the Stock Category. Eg: Tablets.

Under

Specify whether it is a primary category or a sub-category of another category. Select Primary from the list, ifyou do not have a parent group. Use ALT + C to create a parent if you do not have the required category in thelist.

Buttons in single mode stock category creation

GroupsGroups

ItemsItems

GodownGodown

BudgetBudget

Vch TypesVch Types

UnitsUnits



CurrencyCurrency

From the Stock Categories Creation screen, you can create any of the Masters listed above with a single click.

Note: The buttons for Currency and Budget, only if you have enabled the respective

features in F11: Features.

Displaying and Altering Stock Categories

Creating Multiple Stock Categories

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Categories > Create (under Single Stock Category )

A brief description on each of the fields in the Multi Stock Category Creation screen follows.

Under Category

Select the parent category under which you want the new categories to be created. If you select any categoryother than All Items , all the new categories being created will be created under the selected category. Thecolumn Under is filled in automatically with the selected category and the cursor skips this column, which in turnspeeds up data entry.

Selecting All Items gives you the flexibility of specifying the parent of each new category created.

S No.

The serial number of the stock category is auto generated.

Name of the category

Specify the name of the Stock Category.

Under

If you have selected All Items in Under Category , you must specify a parent category in this column.

Buttons specific to Multi Stock Category screen

F4:Parent

To change the parent entered in the field Under Category when you have sub-categories created under it. Thechange affects all the sub-categories created under the parent, meaning they would now belong to the newparent.

F8:Skip Details

If the field Under is to remain the same as specified for the parent Stock Category, use this button. The cursorwill skip that column, which speeds up data entry.



From the Multi Stock Category Creation screen, you can create any of the Masters listed below with a singleclick.

G roupsG roups

I temsI tems

Go downGo down

More:



You can display and alter Stock categories from Single and Multiple mode.

Displaying Single Stock Category

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Categories > Display (under Single Stock Group)

Select the Category for which you want to view the display details from the List of Categories.

The Stock Category Display screen displays for you to view the details entered in Stock Category Master.

Altering Single Stock Category

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Categories > Alter (under Single Stock Category)

Select the Category for which you want to alter from the List of Categories. The Stock Category Alterationscreen displays. Make the necessary changes and accept Yes to save.

Deleting a Stock Category

You can delete a Stock Category only if it does not have any sub categories or Stock Items under it.

Select a Stock Category from the list and press ALT + D to delete it.

Displaying Multiple Stock Categories

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock categories > Display (under Multiple StockCategories)

Select the Category for which you want to view the details or select All Items to view the details of all theCategories created, from the List of Categories.

The Multi Stock Category screen displays. You can view the entire details of the Category and that of subcategories if any, in this screen.

Altering Multiple Stock Categories

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Categories > Alter (under Multiple Stock Categories)

Select the Category for which you want to alter from the List of Categories. The Multi Stock CategoryAlteration screen displays. You can make changes in the Masters of the selected Category and also of the subcategories. Select All Item to make changes in any desired Category Masters as all the Categories created aredisplayed in this screen.

N o t e : You cannot delete a Stock Category from multiple mode.

Delete a Stock Category

You can delete a stock category only if it does not have any children under it. The children could be stock categoryor stock item or both.



Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock Categories > Single Alter

Press [ALT]+[D] to delete the stock category

N o t e : You cannot delete a stock category from multiple mode.

Stock Items

Stock Item refers to goods that you manufacture or trade. It is the primary inventory entity and the lowest levelof information on your inventory. You have to create a Stock Item in Tally for each inventory item that you wantto account for. In other words, you have to create a stock ledger account for each item and Tally calls it StockItem.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Items

More:

Creating a Stock Item

Creating Multiple Stock Items

Creating a Stock Item - Advanced Usage

Displaying and Altering Stock Items




If you are creating Stock Items for the first time, it is advisable to configure the F12: Configure screen beforecreating any items. You may configure your groups to enable/disable advanced mode. Click here for details onCreating Stock Items in Advanced Mode.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock Item > Single Create (under Single Stock Item)

A brief description on each of the fields in the Stock Category Creation screen follows

Name

Specify the name of the Stock Item.

Under

Select the group from the List of Groups. If you do not want to categorise it under any particular group that youcreated, choose Primary.

Press Alt + C to create a parent Group from this field.

Units

Give the unit of measurement of the item in this field. You would normally use this unit for trading this item.

Use Alt + C to create a new unit, if you do not have one in the list. Refer the section on Units for an explanation

on how to create and alter units of measurement.

Opening Balance

If you already have stock of this item at the time of creating its account in Tally, specify its balance particulars,i.e., quantity, rate and value.

Buttons in single mode stock item creation

F3:Companies

To switch to another loaded company to create Stock Item.

GroupsGroups

CategoryCategory

GodownGodown

BudgetBudget

Vch TypesVch Types

UnitsUnits

CurrencyCurrency

You may choose to create any of the masters listed above with a single click of the buttons.

Note: The buttons Category, Currency and Budget are available, only if you opted for

the same in F11: Features.

More:

Displaying and Altering Stock Item



Creating Multiple Stock Items

You can create multiple Stock Items at a time using this option.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock Items > Multi Create (under Multiple Stock Items )

Under Group

Select the parent group under which you want the new items to be created. If you select any category other thanAll Items, then all the new items being created, will be created under this Group. Selecting All Items gives you theflexibility of specifying the parent of each new item created.

S No.

The serial number is auto generated.

Name of Item

Specify the name of the stock item. For example, HP Laserjet

Under

If you select All Items in Under Group field, you must specify a parent group here. Use Alt + C to create a newparent from this field. If you select a Group in Under Group field, that group displays automatically in thiscolumn.

Opening Balance

If you already have stock of this item at the time of creating its account in Tally, specify the balance particulars,i.e., quantity, rate and value.

Buttons in Multi Stock Item Creation screen

F4:Parent

To change the parent entered in the field Under Group when you have items categorised under it. The changeaffects all the items created under the parent, meaning they would now belong to the new parent.

F8:Skip Details

To avoid the cursor entering the field Opening Qty , use this button. It toggles with Edit Details , which allowsyou to enter the opening details.

F9:Skip Category

Use this button to avoid the cursor entering the Category field. It toggles with Edit Category , which allowsentry of Category details.

From the Multi Stock Item Creation screen, choosing to create any of the masters listed below is just a single clickaway.

G roupsG roups

C ategory (if activated)C ategory (if activated)

G o downG o down

More:






This section assumes that you have configured all advanced features of the inventory in F12: Configure andenabled advanced F11: Features . It deals with the additional fields that you would require while creating a StockItem.

N o t e : Use F12: Configure and F11: Features to add/remove fields and configure the

entire setup according to your preferences.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock Items > Create (under Single Stock Item )

A brief description on each of the additional fields in Stock Item Creation screen follows.

Name

Specify the name of the Stock Item.

Alias

You can give aliases for the part number. There may be situations where, the manufacturer specifies his Part No.,but you understand it better by its Bin Card number allotted to it.

Part No.

This is optional. Enter the Part No. of the item being created, for easy identification. (In certain industries, (e.g.Automobiles), various parts are better identified by their part numbers). You can alternatively use this field for Bin CardNo., Code No., etc.

Description

Enter the description of the Stock Item that would appear in your invoices. This is optional.

Remarks

Remarks help to identify the product and its applications. You can give some particulars of the Stock Item created.When you post a query for the stock of this item, remarks help to decide if the item is suitable for a particularrequirement.

Set /Modify Default Ledgers for Invoicing

You can define the default ledger (usually the sales account), during alteration or creation of a Stock Item that willautomatically be credited when you invoice the item.

Under

Select the group from the List of Groups . If you do not want to categorize it under any particular group that youcreated, choose Primary .

Press Alt + C to create a parent Group from this field.

Units

Give the unit of measurement of the item here. The item would be traded using this unit of measurement.

Alternate Units

This is another unit, apart from the main unit, which you can use for the Stock Item. This is particularly usefulwhen you need to handle different units at different times. For example, you buy Data Cables in pieces but sell inpackets of 5 pieces each. For alternate units, you are asked to give a conversion factor (e.g. 5) so that a link ismaintained between the two. What you give here is simply a conversion factor that comes up as default duringvoucher entry. You may specify a different factor during voucher entry.

Maintain in Batches?

Set this option to Yes if you want to maintain the batch information of Stock Items. The batch does not destroyitself after it is disposed; it remains on records and is quite like a Ledger in behavior.

For example, Stock Item – Cloth, Batches – red, white, and blue. You can extract all sales of blue cloth at anygiven point of time.

Use Components BoM?

This has been dealt with in Bill of Materials section under Voucher Entry. It is however pertinent to mention herethat BoM should be used only for items that have sub-assemblies or are manufactured.

Set Standard Rates?

Set this to Yes , if you want to specify standard purchase and sales rates for the item. Standard rates enable thevaluation of inventory at standard purchase or standard sales price. Moreover, these prices come up by defaultduring voucher entry (you may choose to override them if required). The standards are effective from the



specified dates and they continue to be used at these rates until the next date, where the standard rate changes.

In the screen that appears above set the Standard Cost/Standard Selling Price against the Rate column and thedate in the Applicable From column respectively.

Suppose you value your inventory based on standard cost or the market valuation based on standard price. Forvaluation on any date between the specified date, only the rate specified against Applicable From column isconsidered. This rate will be brought up by default during voucher entry on any day during this period.

Use the Standard Selling Price as simple pricelist.

Tax Information

Rate of Duty

Rate of VAT/Duty (Sales Tax/ Duty) (e.g. 17.5 or 5)

Give the rate of tax applicable for the item. The rate specified here would be picked up when invoicing, if youselected the method of calculation as Tax Based on Item Rate for your relevant accounting ledger account.Typically, this accounting ledger account would be 'VAT Account' under the Group Duties & Taxes . In suchcases, the VAT or duty in invoice entry will be automatically calculated.

Specify the rate of duty.

Behaviour

Costing Method

Select the method of valuation for the inventory. Tally provides you with different valuation methods for differentitems, from which you can select the appropriate one. You may, of course, choose to use the market valuation

method to value the inventory. It would be interesting to know the value of your stock, both on cost as well assale basis.

The different costing methods are:

At Zero Cost

Tally considers at Zero Cost Valuation for this particular item for all sales.

Avg. Cost (Price)

Tally recalculates the value after each purchase or sale.

FIFO (First In First Out)

Tally assumes the sale of the oldest goods first.

Last Purchase Cost / Sale Price

The stock is valued at the latest price.

LIFO Annual (Last In First Out Annual)

Tally assumes the sale of the newest goods, first taking into account the current financial year.

LIFO Perpetual (Last In First Out Perpetual)

This works like LIFO Annual except that the last purchase starts from the previous financial year.

Monthly Avg. Cost

Tally calculates the average price based on the purchase of item in that particular month.

Std. Cost / Price



A pre-determined value which you entered.

Market Valuation Methods

There are four market valuation methods, At Zero Price, Avg. Price, Last Sale Price, Std. Price. Select whichever isapplicable from the Valuation Methods list.

Ignore Diff. due to Physical Counting?

In Tally, you can record the physical stock as counted, using a physical stock voucher. There is, usually, adifference between physically counted stock and the one appearing in the records. If you wish to ignore thedifference and continue with the stock as per books, set this option to Yes. It is, however, advisable not to ignorethe difference and let Tally consider stocks as per physical count for subsequent transactions.

Ignore Negative Balances (Y/N)?

If you set this to Yes , Tally ignores the item in the stock reports, in case it has a negative balance.

Treat all Sales as New Manufacture?

Set this to Yes , if you want to avoid the need of passing entries for manufacture of goods and have themautomatically done when goods are sold. This way, you also avoid negative balances in the stock records. It isparticularly useful for smaller manufacturing companies that make things but do not want the problem ofreceipting stocks.

Treat all Purchases as Consumed?

This is quite the reverse of the previous option. If you set this to Yes, issues are automatically raised for all goodspurchased. This is particularly useful in case of consumables. The book stock of this item would always be nil.

Treat all Rejections inward as Scrap?

Set this to Yes , if you do not want to take the rejected goods back into stock. Otherwise, rejected goods, thoughrecorded separately through a Rejection Note, would be taken back into stock.


You can display and alter Stock Items in Single mode and Multiple mode.

Displaying a Single Stock Item

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Items > Display (under Single Stock Item)

Select the name of the Stock Item from the List of Items. The Stock Item Display screen displays. You cannotmake any changes in this screen.

Displaying Multiple Stock Items

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock Items > Display (under Multiple Stock Items)

Select a Group from the List of Groups to display all the Stock Items under the selected Group, or select AllItems to display all the Stock Items, as the case may be. The Multi Stock Item Display screen displays, listingthe Stock Items and the corresponding details of the Stock Items.

Altering a Single Stock Item

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock Items > Alter (under Single Stock Item)

Select the Stock Item you want to alter from the List of Items. The Stock Item Alteration screen displays.Make the necessary changes and accept Yes to save.

You can delete a Stock Item only if you have not used it in any transaction entry.

Press ALT + D from the Stock Item Alteration screen to delete the Stock Item.

Altering Multiple Stock Items

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock Items > Alter (under Single Stock Item)

Select a Group to alter the Stock Item under the selected group. The Multi Stock Item Alteration screen displays.Make the necessary changes and accept Yes to save.

N ote: You cannot delete a Stock Item from multiple mode.



Reorder Levels

Reorder Level signifies the quantity of a Stock Item in hand, after reaching which you must place orders for yoursupplies. The importance of Reorder Level arises from the desire to have sufficient stocks to service customerorders and, at the same time, not to unnecessarily accumulate stock.

Therefore, the points to be considered while deciding the reorder levels are as follows.

The lead-time for suppliers to deliver the stock.

The delivery time specified by the customer.

The stock-in-hand to satisfy orders in the meantime.

In simple mode, Tally accepts the quantities that you specify. In advanced mode, it considers the pastconsumption patterns to suggest reorder levels. You can however, choose to define your own reorder levels. Youmay also specify the minimum quantity of the item to be ordered, either in simple or advanced mode.

The purpose of specifying reorder levels is to obtain a report that indicates the quantity of a Stock Item that youmust order.

More:

Specifying Reorder Levels

Alter Reorder Levels and minimum quantities

Obtain Reorder Status and Quantities to order

Specifying Reorder Levels

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Reorder Levels

Select a group of Stock Items from the List of Groups , to specify Reorder Levels for the Stock Items in theSpecify Reorder Levels screen.

For each item in stock, you can define a Reorder Level and the Minimum Order Quantity. If you click Simple Reorder button, the consumption alternatives will not be available and hence you have to input the quantities.

N o t e : The option Reorder Levels is displayed in the Inventory Info. menu only if A l l o w

Purchase Order Processing is enabled in F11: Features .

The Reorder level screen appears as follows:

The options that you have while defining Reorder Level and Minimum Order Quantity for individual stock items are



as follows.

Reorder Level/Quantity

Enter the level/quantity in this field.

Advance Parameter for Reorder Level (Consumption for the Last)

This field lets Tally calculate the reorder level/order quantity based on the total consumption in the past for achosen period.

Period

The choices for periods are: Days, Weeks, Months and Years. Note that it is not the average consumption for theperiod but the total consumption. Enter zero (0), if you do not want Tally to calculate the reorder level based onthe consumption of the item in the past.

Criteria

Choose whether you want the higher/lower of the two, i.e., input/calculated level/quantity.

Rounding Method

Specify whether the calculated level/quantity must be rounded and also the method of rounding.

Minimum order quantity

You can specify the minimum order quantity required.

Altering Reorder Levels and Minimum Quantities

There are two ways of altering the Reorder Levels and the Minimum Order Quantities defined earlier.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Reorder Levels1.

Select the Group of the Stock Items from the List of Groups to display the Specify Reorder Levelsscreen. Make the necessary changes and accept Yes to save.

OR

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Inventory > Reorder Status2.

Select the Group of the Stock Items for which you want to make changes to display the InventoryReorder Status screen. Drill down the fields Reorder Level/Minimum Order Quantity to display theSpecify Reorder Levels screen. Make the necessary changes and accept Yes to save.



Obtain Reorder Status and Quantities to Order

G o to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Inventory > Reorder Status

Select a Group of Stock Items from the List of Groups. The Inventory Reorder Status screen displays.

This report gives you the reorder status of Stock Items categorised under the selected Group.

Click the button A : Reorder On l y to remove those items for which there are no orders to be placed.

Apart from identifying the quantity to be ordered, you can move your cursor on the fields and drill down for moreinformation.

Name of Item

Press Enter on this field for information on suppliers of this Stock Item and the details of their previous supplies.

Closing Stock

Drill down for Item Monthly Summary (Inwards and Outwards) and other details.

Purc Orders Pending

Press Enter on this field for details on the pending purchase orders.

Sales Orders Due

Drill down to know the details on the sales orders, which are due, in other words, free stock available for sale.

Reorder Level

Drill down by pressing [Enter] to display the Reorder Level Specification screen for the Stock Item.

Short fall

Tally calculates this value.

Min Reorder Quantity

Drill down by pressing [Enter] to display the Reorder Level Specification screen for the Stock Item.



Locations/Godowns

Locations/Godowns are places where Stock Items are stored. You can specify names where Stock Items are storedsuch as warehouse, shelf, and so on. In a business, it always becomes necessary to distinguish between the stockheld onsite and in the warehouse. You can do this by creating two separate godowns. Tally had a default Godownnamed Main Location. You may even alter Tally's default godown and create a new one. Tally permits creatingany number of godowns, which you can group and subgroup to match the structure you need.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Locations/Godowns

N o t e 1 : The term Locations is displayed in the Inventory Info. menu if I n t e r n a t i o n a l is

selected in Use Accounting Terminology of in Gateway of Tally > F12:Configure

screen. If I n d i a / S A A R C is selected, the term G o d o w n s displays.

N o t e 2 : You can create L o c a t i o n s / G o d o w n s only if Maintain Multiple Godowns is

enabled in F11: Features.

More:

Creating Locations/Godowns

Displaying and Altering Stock Locations/Godowns

Creating Locations/Godowns

You can create Locations/Godowns in Single mode and Multiple mode

Creating a Single Location/Godown

G o to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Locations/Godowns > Create (under Single Godown )

The Location/Godown Creation screen displays:

A brief explanation on each of the fields in Location/Godown Creation screen follows.

Name

Specify the name of the Location/Godown.

Alias

Enter an alias name for the Location/Godown name, if required.

Under

Specify the Location/Godown under which the Location/Godown is to be categorised. Use Alt + C to create theparent Location/Godown if it is not in the list. Select Primary , if it is not a sub Location/Godown of anyLocation/Godown.

Allow Storage of Materials

Tally permits you to create a Location/Godown, where you may not store materials but treat it as a virtualLocation/Godown. Virtual Location/Godown is useful in cases like Head Office, which may have many differentstock points under it that store materials. Hence, Head Office acts like a primary Godown. For instance, designateLondon as a virtual Godown with Wimbledon Warehouse, Harrow Warehouse and Brixton Warehouse as sub-Godowns. These sub-Godowns will allow storage of materials.

Creating Multiple Locations/Godowns

G o to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Locations/Godowns > Create (under Multiple Godowns )



The Multi Godown Creation screen displays:

Under

Select the parent group under which you want the new Godowns to be created. If you select any Godown otherthan All Items , then all the new Godowns being created, will be created under this Godown. Selecting All Itemsgives you the flexibility of specifying the parent of each new Godown created.

S No.

The serial number is auto generated.

Name

Specify the name of the Godown.

Under

If you select All Items in Under field at the top, you must specify a parent Godown here. Use Alt + C to create anew parent from this field. If you select a Godown in Under field, that Godown displays automatically in thiscolumn.

Displaying and Altering Stock Locations

You can display/alter the Godowns in single and multiple modes. It is similar to Displaying/Altering Stock Groupsin single and multiple modes. Refer Displaying/Altering Stock Groups for more details.

To display a single stock Location/Godown

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Locations/Godowns > Display (under SingleLocation/Godown)

To display multiple stock Locations/Godowns at a time

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Locations/Godowns > Display (under MultipleLocations/Godowns)

To alter a single stock Location/Godown

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Locations/Godowns > Alter (under SingleLocation/Godown)

To alter multiple stock Locations/Godowns at a time

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Locations/Godowns > Alter (under MultipleLocations/Godowns)

You can delete a stock location via Single Location Alter by pressing [Alt]+[D]. However, you cannot delete astock location with sub-locations. The lower levels must be deleted first.



Voucher Types

Refer the section on Voucher Types in Accounting Information because the voucher types available in inventoryare similar to the ones in accounting. You may alter the existing inventory voucher types or create new onesbased on the existing ones.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Voucher Types > Create/Display/Alter

Note: You can use the Stock Journal voucher type to create a Manufacturing Journal.

Refer the chapter on Bill of Materials for more details.

Units of Measure

Stock Items are purchased or sold on the basis of quantity. The quantity is measured by Units. Hence, it isnecessary to create Units of Measure. You need to create Units of Measure for all the Stock Items. You can havesimple units such as numbers, meters, kilograms, and pieces or compound units like box, where, say, one boxequals ten pieces.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Units of Measure

More:

Creating a Unit of Measure

Compound Units



Creating a Unit of Measure

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Units of Measure > Create

The Unit Creation screen displays.

A brief explanation on each of the fields in Unit Creation screen follows.

Type

Symbols are of two types: Simple and Compound.

Simple units are considered as specified by you; Tally just checks for duplication. Tally defaults to Simple, and ifyou want to change to Compound, use [Backspace] to go back and select Compound from the Types of Unitslist.

Symbol

Define the symbol of the unit, e.g., Nos. This symbol is used in all displays and printouts.

Formal Name

Specify the formal name of the symbol, e.g. Numbers. This explains the symbol, which is also used during theconsolidation of data of different companies, where the symbols might be the same but are assigned to differentunits. The formal name will be used to match them.

Number of decimal places

If you want to use the unit in fractions, say for a kilogram you may have to use grams as well, specify the numberof decimal places. For kilograms, you would give three decimal places to accommodate up to 999 grams. You donot normally want a decimal place for units like numbers; you can specify 0 in such cases.

N o t e : You can specify 0 to 4 decimal places. The Unit of Measure cannot be translated

or transliterated but will appear in the Language created.

Compound Units

A Compound Unit is a relation between two Simple Units. Hence, before you create a Compound Unit, ensure thatyou have already created two Simple Units. For example, there are two Simple Units Nos (Numbers) and Doz(Dozen). Now define the relation between Nos and Doz, as one dozen equals twelve numbers.

N o t e : Use the U p arrow or Backspace key to highlight the T y p e field. Select

C o m p o u n d from the popup menu.

Select Compound from the Types of Units in the Type field. Select Doz in the First Unit from the Units list.Enter 12 in the Conversion field and select Nos in the Second Unit field. Accept Yes to save.

More:

Displaying and Altering Units of Measure



Displaying and Altering Units of Measure

To display Units of Measure,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Units of Measure > Display

Select the Unit of Measure you would like to view from the Units list. You can select a compound unit or a simpleunit from the list. The Unit Display screen displays. In display mode it is not possible to make any changes.

To alter Units of Measure

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Units of Measure > Alter

Select the Unit of Measure you want to alter from the Units list. The Unit Alteration screen displays. Make thenecessary changes and accept Yes to save.

You can delete a Unit of Measure from this screen by pressing Alt + D. However, you cannot delete a Unit ofMeasure that is part of a compound measure. You must delete the compound measure first.

Price List

Price Lists are useful for orders and invoices. An up-to-date price list helps in decision-making even at the lowerlevels of the organisation and quickens the sales process. Tally assists in creating quantity based pricing withcomplex discount structure. Price Lists are available only for inventory items and hence the feature is availableonly if inventory and invoicing are activated for the company.

You can have one or more price lists. You require more than one price list, when you have different pricestructures/levels for different purposes, usually, different groups of customers requiring different discounts ordealing in different products.



Price Levels

In Tally, you can assign specific price lists called Price Levels to customers, so that only the relevant prices areused during entry of orders and invoices.

Before you begin to create Price Lists, you should decide whether you want different price levels. You might wantdifferent price levels for various purposes, such as different types of customers like wholesale customers, retailcustomers, export customers and so on. Each customer type could have a different discount structure.

Creating Price Levels

Ensure that you have set the company for Accounts with Inventory.

Set the following fields to Yes in F11: Features > F2: Inventory screen.

Allow Invoicing (If you do not set this field to Yes, the options for Price Lists will not be available.)1.

Set Use Multiple Price Levels to Yes.2.

Type out the price levels, one by one, in the Company Price Levels screen.3.

Press CTRL+A to accept the screen and return to the Company Operations Alteration screen (F11:Features). Set the other options as required and accept Yes to save.

4.

Alter Price Level names

Follow the same procedure to alter the name of a price level. You can simply overwrite the names you specifiedpreviously and save the changes.



Assigning Ledger Accounts to Price Levels

Creating Price Lists in Tally provides an option in party (debtor and creditor) ledger accounts, with the help ofwhich you can assign/tag a specific Price Level to the account. You can assign only one Price Level to an account.

You can choose the Price Level that you want to assign to the Ledger by selecting the Price Level from the PriceLevels list in the Pricing Level Applicable field. Select Not Applicable if you do not want to assign any PriceLevels to the Ledger.

If you want to assign Price Levels to ledgers created earlier, alter the ledger account, tab down to Pricing LevelApplicable field and select the applicable price level from the list.

Tab down to Pricing Level Applicable and select Export. Set the other options required. Accept Yes to save.

The Pricing Level can be changed to reflect the current circumstances. For this, simply alter the ledger accountand select a different Pricing Level option.

Creating and Using Price Lists

The Price List option appears in the Inventory Info. menu only if you have already created Price Levels .

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Price List

Select a group from the List of Groups .

Under Group

This is the stock group of the Stock Items for which you want to define the Price Lists.

Price Level

Select a Price Level to assign to the Stock Group.

Applicable From

Specify the date from which the Price List is applicable.

The columns you see are as follows.

Sl. No

This column has auto-generated serial numbers to track the number of items in the Price List.

Name of Item

This column has the name of the Stock Item. You can define the Price List for each item.

Quantities - From & Less Than

These fields are repeated for an item and begin with a blank for 0 items and end with a blank for any number ofitems. This is useful for quantity based pricing and discounts. You can create a staggered quantity price structure,if required.

If you do not require quantity based pricing, leave From and Less Than fields blank.

Rate & Discount (if any)

For each quantity band, give a specific price or maintain the same price for all bands, but define differentdiscounts. You can use different methods for different items.

Historical Details (Rate and Disc%)

If you have a different Price List on a date before the Applicable From date, Tally displays it here.

Cost Price

In this column, the Cost Price (based on the Costing Method set for it) of the item is displayed to help decide theprices.



Price Levels in Voucher Entry - Invoicing

The price levels that you define automate the invoice pricing and help to avoid errors. You can configure the entryso as to prevent the usage of a different price list than the one that is set.

To configure for preventing changes made to the price level settings in a voucher

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Invoice/Orders Entry

Set Allow modification of ALL fields during entry to No to prevent changes made to prices. If you set it toYes , you can override the prices already defined.

Consider the following example

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F8: Sales1.

Select As Invoice2.

2.

During voucher creation, there is an additional field Price Level and it is already set for the selected party on thebasis of assignment made earlier (the cursor skips the field). If you had not assigned any Price Level for theledger earlier, the cursor moves to this field, allowing you to make a choice. On selecting the stock item and thequantity, the price is filled in automatically and the cursor skips the Rate and Amount fields also.



Voucher Entry

A Voucher is a document that contains details of a financial transaction. For every transaction, you can useappropriate Tally Voucher to enter the details into the ledgers and update the financial position of the company.

Mainly there are two types of Voucher Entry:

Accounting Vouchers

Inventory Vouchers

You can set the configuration for entry to allow only those features, which you require while entering vouchers.

In the Voucher entry configuration, Selectively set only those features to Yes. (This is further explained underadvanced usage).

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Voucher Entry

More:

The Voucher Creation screen

Special keys for voucher narration field



Voucher Creation Screen

This screen is divided into three parts

Main Voucher Entry Area

Button Bar Area

Calculator Area

Main Voucher Entry Area

The Main Voucher Entry Area is where you enter all your transactions. This area provides fields for Date, LedgerName and Amount as well as additional pop-up screens that are dependent on your voucher configuration and thenature of transactions you make.

Button Bar Area

The Button Bar area displays buttons that provide quick interaction with Tally. Buttons that are relevant to thecurrent task are enabled and the other buttons are disabled.

Calculator Area

The Calculator area provides the calculator functions where you can enter any number of mathematical formulaefor complex calculations.

Mouse conventions

Command Action

Click Press the left mouse button

Double-click Press and release the left mouse button twice, without movingthe mouse pointer off the item

Choose Position the mouse pointer on the item and click the left mousebutton.

Select Position the mouse pointer on the item and double-click the leftmouse button.

Switching between Screen Areas



Press Use the keys on the keyboard in the combination shown.

Switching between Screen Areas

The Main Voucher Entry Area is the active area by default on the Voucher Creation screen. Press Ctrl+N tonavigate to the Calculator Area and press Ctrl+M to toggle back to Main Voucher Entry Area . A green barhighlights the active area of the screen.

N o t e : Press A l t + C to use calculator when at amount field.

Special Keys for Voucher Narration Field

ALT+R: Recalls the Last narration saved for the first ledger in the voucher, irrespective of the voucher type.

CTRL+R: Recalls the Last narration saved for a specific voucher type, irrespective of the ledger.

Checking the accuracy of the vouchers

To check the accuracy of the vouchers that you have entered:

1. Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Day Book

2. Select F2: Period from Button Bar and enter the period for which you want to view Vouchers.

N o t e : It defaults to the current date only but you may display all the transactions for a

particular period.

3. Select F1: Detailed

You can check the vouchers for correctness. To correct a mistake, position the cursor on the item where you havefound the error and press Enter. Tally displays the voucher details for alteration. The alteration facility is subjectto security and access rights. All alterations are available for audit.



Types of Vouchers

Tally is pre-programmed with a variety of accounting vouchers, each designed to perform a different job.

The standard vouchers are:

Payment Voucher1.

Receipt Voucher2.

Contra Voucher3.

Sales voucher4.

Sales Orders

Sales Vouchers/Invoices

Delivery Notes

Rejection In

Purchase Voucher5.

Purchase Orders

Purchase Vouchers

Goods Receipt Notes

Rejection Out

Journal Voucher6.

Credit Notes

Debit Notes

Journal

Memo Voucher

Reversing Journal

Stock Journal

Physical Stock

You can alter these vouchers to suit your requirement and also create new vouchers.

For example, if you wish to distinguish between cash and bank payments you can create vouchers to do this.

The function of each voucher type is explained.

More:

Contra Entry (F4)

Payment Entry (F5)

Receipt Entry (F6)

Journal Entry (F7)

Sales Entry (F8)

Sales and Purchase Voucher Entry

Unconventional Vouchers

Creating Accounting Vouchers in Tally




Contra Entry (F4)

According to accounting rules, Contra Entry is a transaction indicating transfer of funds from:

Cash account to Bank account

Bank account to Cash account

Bank account to Bank account

To view the Contra Voucher Entry Screen:

1. Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers

2. Select F4: Contra from the button bar or press F4

More:

Contra Entry - Single Entry Mode

Contra Entry - Double Entry Mode

N o t e :

1. Use the buttons on the right-hand side of the screen to Explore the Potential of

T a l l y .

2. Press [Enter] wherever the cursor is placed to know the Depth of Tally!

Contra Entry - Single Entry Mode

Contra Voucher creation screen appears in Single Entry Mode by default. You are prompted to choose the account,which will receive the amount (the ledger that has to be debited).

To view Contra Voucher creation screen in Single Entry mode

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select F4: Contra

For example, to transfer funds from Cash Account to Bank Account:

Debit the Bank Account1.

Credit the Cash Account2.

The entry appears as shown.



The ledger selected in Account State Bank of India is the destination ledger and it is debited

Advantages of Single Entry Mode:

Faster data entry.1.

Selection of:2.

Multiple Ledgers (to be credited) with a Single Ledger (to be Debited) OR

Multiple Ledgers (to be debited) with a Single Ledger (to be Credited) - depending on the nature oftransaction.

Contra Entry - Double Entry Mode

To select multiple Debit and Credit ledgers in the Double entry mode, set Use Single Entry Mode forPayment/Receipt/Contra to No in F12: Configure .

Entering in Double Entry Mode

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers1.

Select F4: Contra from the Button Bar or press F4 .2.

The entry displayed in Single Mode appears as follows in Double entry mode:

Here cash is transferred from Cash account to Bank account.

Use F2: Date to change the date of the voucher.

If you require Dr/Cr instead of To/By –> as explained in the Configuration section, activate the required featurein F12: Configure .

In the above example, we have changed the date to 2nd April 2001 and we have Dr/Cr instead of To/By .1.

As the Contra voucher is active, the Buttons of the other voucher types of Payment, Receipt, Journal, Salesand Purchase are visible.

2.



Payment Entry (F5)

To view the Payment Voucher entry screen:


Select F5: Payment from the Button Bar or press F52.

By Default, the Payment Entry screen appears in Single Entry Mode (The option Use Single Entry mode forPymt/Rcpt/Contra is set to Yes in F12: Configure).

For example, the company settles expenses of conveyance, staff welfare, postage and stationery through cash allin one voucher. The entry appears as shown below.

You are prompted to choose the cash or bank ledger, which will pay the amount (the credit ledger).

More:

Payment Entry - Double Mode

Payment Entry – Single Narration

Payment / Receipt as Contra

Warn on Negative Cash Balance

Cheque Printing

How to print Cheques

Trouble-shooting Cheque printing

TDS Payment



Payment Entry - Double Mode

If you want the payment entries to be entered in double entry mode, then set Use Single Entry Mode forPayment/Receipt/Contra to No in F12: Configure

To enter the payment entry in Double Entry Mode,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F5: Payment

A Payment entry entered in double entry mode appears as shown,

Advantages of Double Entry Mode

You can select any number of ledgers to be debited and credited in the payment voucher.

You can view on the screen whether a ledger is debited or credited thus allowing you to cross-verify.

Payment Entry – Single Narration

If you want the narration details for every ledger you debit or credit (Single narration), you can configure Tally'sNarration details accordingly.

To do so,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Information > Voucher Types > Alter1.

Select the required Voucher Type .2.

Enable the option Narrations for each Entry and accept the details.3.

Return to Accounting Vouchers on Gateway of Tally and enter a payment voucher as required.4.

Given below is an example of a Payment transaction with narrations for each entry:

The entry consists of both common narration and narrations for each entry. In case of multiple debit/creditentries, you can give single line narration separately for every ledger account selected.



Payment / Receipt as Contra

The Contra Voucher is used to indicate transfer of funds from

Bank account to Cash account

Bank account to Bank account

Cash account to Bank account.

However, for users who wish to use the Payment and Receipt vouchers for this nature of transaction, Tally has theflexibility of defining Payment and Receipt behaviour as per Contra voucher.


Select F5: Payment from the Button Bar or press F5 .2.

Activate the option Use Payment/Receipt as Contra to Yes in F12: Configuration screen.3.

Accept the screen and save.4.

The Screen appears as shown.

If Use Payment/Receipt as Contra option is set to No in F12: Configure screen, the cash and bank accountswill not be displayed.

Warn on Negative Cash Balance

You can configure Tally to prompt you with a warning when the Cash ledger reaches a negative balance.

To activate Warning on Negative Cash Balance :


Activate the option Warn on Negative Cash Balance to Yes on the F12: Configure screen.2.

Accept the screen to save.3.

Example:

Let us assume a cash balance of Rs.54000 and you need to make a payment of Rs.55000 towards advertisingexpenses. This results in a negative balance.

The entry is displayed as:

Tally prompts you with a box that displays the warning and also the credit cash balance in RED colour. This willhelp you decide whether to proceed with the entry or not.



Cheque Printing

You can choose to print cheques directly from Tally. Cheques will be printed while printing a Payment Voucher.

Enabling Cheque Printing

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features > Accounting Features1.

Set Enable Cheque Printing and Set/Alter Cheque Printing Configuration to Yes.2.

Company Operations Alteration screen appears as shown.

Once the option Set/Alter Cheque Printing Configuration is activated to Yes, you will get the followingscreen.

Company Name on Cheque:

To print the company name on the cheque for signature purposes, mention the name of the Company (forexample, ABC Company). If you do not want Tally to print the name, you can leave it blank. Many banks givecheques with your company name printed.

Name of Banks

Select the Bank from the Bank accounts list.

You will have to fill in the dimensions of the cheque. Tally accepts user defined cheque dimensions. Take thebank’s cheque book and measure the dimensions of a cheque leaf carefully in millimeters and fill in the aboveform. You may need to correct it after trying out a couple of cheques so that the positioning is accurate. Theplacing of the cheque in the printer also determines the printing. To avoid mistakes trial could be made onphotocopies of a cheque before using an actual cheque leaf.

N o t e : Salutation fields are for signatures and naturally follow the Company name (for

example, Director)

Note: All dimensions must be more than 0 for cheques to be successfully printed.

For ABC & Company

Director

If your cheque has two signatories, both can be specified. Both could be the same salutation or different. Forexample, one could be Director, the other could be Secretary.

Give details of whatever you are using currently. Many banks will pre-print both the company name and thesalutation in their cheques, in which case you can leave them blank.

You are now ready to print the cheque. Remember that this option is available only for the banks for which youhave Ledger account.



Printing Cheques

A fter making the desired settings to print the cheque,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Voucher Entry > F5: Payment

N o t e : Cheque Printing option is available only from Payment Voucher.

Name on the Cheque

You debit the party and give the bill reference details if any. Credit the bank for which the cheque dimensionswere set up. In this example it is the State Bank of India. The name of the Debited party account appears next tothe field Name on the cheque by default. You can change the name on the cheque if necessary.

Cross Cheque using

This is filled in by the most common words used - Account payee. You may change it if required.

Enter the Cheque Number (Ch. No.) and save the Voucher. Then, you will get the Cheque Printing sub-screenappears as shown below:



Select Yes to print the cheque.

Trouble-shooting Cheque Printing


Select F11: Features and check the dimensions.2.

Ensure that you have not left any field blank other than the salutation fields.3.

Trial and error is the only way to get the printing in the right positions. Therefore do not panic if some words donot get printed in the correct positions. Change the set-up a couple of times to set it right. This is necessary to beable to print correctly on different cheque styles used by different banks.



Receipt Entry (F6)

Transactions accounting for money received are entered into Tally through the receipt voucher.

To view the Receipt Entry screen:


Select F6: Receipt from the button bar or press F62.

Similar to Payment and Contra vouchers, the Single Entry Mode appears for Receipt Entry as well.

For example, if your company receives money from a customer for an earlier transaction:

Credit the customer account and debit the Cash account, if you receive cash or

Debit the Bank account where you need to deposit the money, if you receive cheque.

The entry in double-entry mode is displayed as shown below:

More:

Printing Receipt Voucher and Formal Receipt



Printing Receipt Voucher and Formal Receipt

For example, the company receives a certain amount from the customer against a particular invoice and a FormalReceipt has to be issued acknowledging receipt for the same.

If you want the Receipt voucher to be printed:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Types > Alter1.

Select the Voucher Type Receipt2.

Set the option Print after saving voucher to Yes.3.

The voucher prints as:

N o t e : The information required can be configured in F12: Configure after giving the

Print Command.

When you enter a receipt voucher, Tally prompts you to print the Formal Receipt (to be issued). Tally's FormalReceipt printing fulfils this requirement.

To activate this facility:


Select the Voucher Type Receipt2.

Set the option Print Formal Receipt after saving to Yes3.

4.



3.

Accept the same4.

The Formal Receipt prints as

N o t e : An additional field Name on Receipt appears in the Receipt Voucher screen.

The receipt will be printed either with the Ledger Name or the name given in the N a m e

on Receipt field.

Journal Entry (F7)

Journal entries are used to adjust the debit and credit amounts without involving the cash or bank accounts.Hence, they are referred to as adjustment entries. To go to the Journal Entry Screen:


Click on F7: Journal on the Button Bar or press F7 key2.

For example, there may be entries made for interest accrued or interest to be paid. If a party is involved in such atransaction the entry will be:

Debit the Party1.

Credit the Interest Account2.

The entry appears as shown below:



N o t e : Journal entries are usually used for finalization of accounts.

More:

Cash Accounts in Journals

TDS Deduction in Journals

VAT in Journal

Cash Accounts in Journals

Journals are adjustment entries, which do not involve Cash account and Bank account. However in many casescompanies use journals to account for day-to-day transactions where Cash or Bank accounts are required.

Set Allow Cash Accounts in Journals to Yes in F12: Configuration .1.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select F7: Journal2.

Press the spacebar at the Debit or Credit fields.3.

N o t e : All Cash accounts and Bank accounts are displayed in the List of Ledger

Accounts. Accordingly the journal entry has to be made.



Sales Entry (F8)

Sales vouchers are used when the company sells some goods to customers.

To view the Sales Voucher Creation Screen:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select F8: Sales.

For example, the company sells some software on credit. In this case, the company has to account for Sales andSales Tax separately, if tax has been collected on the transaction.

The screen appears as shown below:

When a sales transaction is made, a document detailing the transaction (item name, tax, etc) has to be given tothe buyer or debtor as proof of purchase by him. This document is called "Invoice" or "Bill" or "Cash Memo". Tallyprovides the option of creating Invoices.

Enabling Invoicing

Set Allow Invoicing to Yes in F11: Features1.

The Sales Voucher Creation Screen appears as Invoice by default.2.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > select F8: Sales3.

Sales entries can be made in the Voucher as well as Invoice Formats.

Invoicing and sales invoicing are almost the same as sales voucher entry. The advantage of using the invoiceformat for sales entry is that it allows automatic calculations of taxes and duties (ledger accounts classified underthe group 'Duties & Taxes').

To enable automatic calculations of taxes and duties:

Set Calculate Tax on Current Sub-total to Yes in F12: Configure on the sales invoice screen1.

Accept the screen to save the voucher.2.

The default Sales Invoice screen appears as shown below.



When you start entering the voucher, Tally prompts for the Sales Ledger to be allocated.

Any number of stock items or account ledgers can be selected one after another to enable faster data entry. Toactivate this:

Set Use Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation to Yes in F12: Configure on the invoice entryscreen.

1.

Accept the screen to save the voucher.2.

Types of Invoice

There are two types of Invoices:

Sales Item Invoice - allows you to select Items for invoicing

Sales Account Invoice - allows you to select Ledgers for invoicing

Sales Item Invoice

Invoicing is generally used for sale of stock where the details of the items sold are listed. Selecting the ItemInvoice allows you to select the stock items that need to be invoiced. Trading and manufacturing organisationscommonly use this format.

On the Sales invoice screen, click on the button Item Invoice which is displayed on the Button Bar on the rightside of the screen and the Sales Item Invoice appears as shown below:

Tally's Item Invoice mode displays the list of stock items, which can be invoiced as required.

N o t e : The Item Invoice button toggles with Account Invoice .

Sales Account Invoice

Sales Account Invoice is generally used by professionals such as doctors and consultants who require to invoicefor certain services provided such as consultancy charges, professional fees.

Trading and manufacturing organisations also use the Account Invoice for invoicing service charges.

On the Sales entry screen, click on Acct Invoice button which is displayed on the Button Bar on the right-handside of the screen to display the Sales Account Invoice screen as shown.

T ally's Account Invoice mode displays the list of ledger accounts, which can be invoiced as required. This is unlikeItem Invoice where Tally displays the list of stock items.

N o t e : The Acct Invoice button toggles with Item Invoice.


In Accounts-with-Inventory Companies where Tracking Numbers is NOT activated

You do not get the voucher types Receipt Note and Delivery Note in the Sales and Purchase Voucher sub-menus.

In addition to the above particulars that are applicable for all types of vouchers, sales and purchase vouchers havespecial inventory considerations for accounts-with inventory companies.

Sales and Purchase ledger accounts must have the option Are Inventory Values Affected set to Yes for thissection. Unless this option is set to Yes in the Ledger creation screen, it is not possible to make a Sales entry or aPurchase entry.

Similarly, Sales and Purchase accounts affect inventory. Hence, when you enter a Sales or a Purchase Voucher, anInventory Allocations for sub-screen pops up as soon as you enter the ledger requiring you to give inventory itemdetails.

The inventory details that you mention in an accounting voucher (like Sales and Purchase Voucher), affects stocksby immediately updating them, only if Tracking Numbers are not activated in [F11]: Features.

The information that you need to give in the inventory allocation sub-screen depends upon the features enabledfor the company.

More:

Inventory allocations

VAT




Inventory items need to be considered in financial vouchers if you are using ledger heads that have the option AreInventory Values affected set to Yes.

The inventory details that you give in an accounting voucher (like Sales and Purchase Voucher), affects stocks byimmediately updating them, only if Tracking Numbers are not activated in F11: Features.

The information that you need to give in the inventory allocation sub-screen depends on the features enabled forthe company.

A typical inventory allocation sub-screen appears as shown.

Name of Item

Select item from the list of items or create a new item by pressing Alt+C

Location

If you have more than one location you must specify the location to which this item relates.

Set Maintain Multiple Godowns to Yes in the F11: Features. 1.

Specify the Godown, Quantity, Rate and Amount for the item.2.

You can have different Godown locations.

Quantity

Enable the option Actual and Billed Quantities to Yes. The actual quantity updates stock and the billedquantity affects the accounts. Give the quantity either in the main unit or the alternate unit. You may even specifyquantities in both units, for example 100 bars=150 Kgs.

Rate

Enter the rate for the Stock Item. If you have entered Standard Rate for the item (Standard Cost and StandardSelling Price – see Item Master), the voucher will select the relevant standard rate for that date by default. Youcan modify it while entering the voucher.

Per

Enter the unit of measure for the quantity of the item here. This can be the main unit or even the alternate unit.

Amount

The quantity multiplied by the rate per unit is the amount.

End of List

In all multiple allocations or selections, you have to select the option End of List or press Enter at the first blankfield. This would accept the multiple allocations and take you back to the parent screen. For example, MultipleLocations, Batches or Items.

Batch Wise Details

If you wish to maintain the Inventory in Batches, you need to set the option Maintain Batch-wise Details toYes in F11: Features.

If required, you can also set the option Set Expiry Dates for Batches to Yes.

Once you do this, you will see the option Maintain in Batches in the Stock Item Creation Screen.

If you set this to Yes, you will find the following in the Item Allocation screen:

Track Date of Mfg

Use expiry dates

Batch Number

Select a batch number from the list of existing batch numbers, or create a new number for a new batch.

Mfg. Date

Mfg Date appears only if it is activated. Enter the date of manufacture. This enables you to set expiry date for the



batch as a period from the date of manufacturing. For example, three months from the date of manufacture.

Expires on

This field appears only if it is activated. Enter the date of expiry or a period from the date of manufacture. If youhave set Allow Use of Expired Batches to Yes for an item, you cannot issue them after the expiry date.


Manufacturers and traders, who deal in perishable products, need to maintain batch-wise details of stockitems. The manufacturing date and expiry date options are entered in Tally to maintain batch-wise details.

To ensure that the expired items do not appear in your Stock Journals and Sales Invoices, set Honor ExpiryDates usage for Batches to Yes in F12: Configure of the Sales Invoice screen.

This keeps track of the batches. If you have two batches of the same product in stock, and one batch has crossedthe date of expiry, the sales invoice will not display the balance amount of the expired stock, thus honouring theexpiry dates which you have set for your stock items.

Refer Activating batch-wise details, Setting manufacturing date and Expiry dates for more details.

Unconventional Vouchers

Unconventional Vouchers are the special vouchers that are used to record provisional or non-accountingtransactions. Use unconventional vouchers to remove unnecessary entries from the main books of accounts andmake information available. These vouchers enable valuable reports in terms of provisional accounts andforecasting. Refer to Scenario Management for more information.

More:

Memo Voucher

Memorandum Voucher Register

Optional Voucher

Optional Vouchers Register

Reversing Journals

Reversing Journal Register

Post-dated Vouchers

Post-dated Vouchers Register



Memo Voucher

This is a non-accounting voucher and the entries made using memo voucher will not affect your accounts. Inother words, Tally does not post these entries to ledgers but stores them in a separate Memorandum Register .

Uses of Memo Vouchers

Making suspense payments

Consider a company gives its employee cash to buy office supplies, the exact nature and cost of which areunknown. For this transaction you can enter a voucher for the petty cash advance, a voucher to record the actualexpenditure details when they are known, and another voucher to record the return of surplus cash.

However, a simpler way of doing it is to enter a Memo voucher when the cash is advanced, and then turn it into aPayment voucher for the actual amount spent, when the details are known.

Consider the following Example.

The Company pays its employee Rs. 500 as petty cash advance for Office Expenses.

The following entry has to be passed.

Enter Date1.

Debit office supplies2.

2.

Vouchers not verified at the time of entry

If you do not understand the details of a voucher you are entering, you can enter it as a Memo voucher andamend it later when the details are available.

Items given on approval

Generally completed sales are entered into books. Incase items are given on approval , use a Memo voucher totrack and convert it into a proper Sales voucher. You can delete the memo voucher if the sale is not made.



Memorandum Voucher Register

To view all the memorandum vouchers:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Memorandum Vouchers.

N o t e : You can also view memorandum vouchers from the Day Book.

You can alter and convert a Memo voucher into a regular voucher when you decide to consider the entry into yourbooks. Use Scenarios to see the effect of Memo entries on reports and statements.

Optional Voucher

This is also a non-accounting voucher. Unlike a Memo voucher, this is not a separate voucher type. You can markan existing voucher (for example, a payment voucher or a receipt voucher) as Optional . Press CTRL + L or clickon Optional from the Button Bar. This button toggles with Regular . By marking a voucher Optional , thevoucher does not get posted anywhere but remains in the Optional Register.

You can make a voucher type default to Optional if you need to create a new voucher type or alter an existingvoucher type.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Types> select a Voucher Type > Set Make Optionalas default to Yes .

Enabling Optional Vouchers


Select F11:Features > Accounting Features to display Company Operations Alteration screen2.

Set Use Rev. Journals & Optional Vouchers? to Yes .3.


Use of Optional Vouchers

If you do not want a transaction that is incomplete to affect the accounts, you can mark this as an OptionalVoucher. Once the transaction is complete, modify the voucher and post it as Regular Voucher. Forexample, Performa sales invoice. In fact, an optional sales invoice prints as a Performa Invoice.

Optional Vouchers allow you to see the impact of transactions without actually posting them.

Optional Vouchers can be used to forecast future sales. For example, create a New Voucher Type - SalesForecast. Record future sales projections using this voucher type.

Let us consider the following example.

On 30th June you want to view the Balance Sheet as of today but June rent is not due for payment until the firstweek of July. This liability is not reflected in the Balance Sheet. To overcome this, enter an Optional Voucherdated 30th June. The above entry is made as shown below

Enter Date1.

Select Optional from the button bar2.

Debit Rent account3.



3.

When you view the Balance Sheet, generate a report with the Optional Voucher included. The Optional Vouchershould be already defined as a Scenario (Refer section on Scenario Management for more details). The voucheraffects the report temporarily. Once you quit the report, Tally does not retain the Scenario details. The next timeyou view the balance sheet, it will not include the effect of the Optional Voucher unless you include it.

N o t e : Use S c e n a r i o s to see the effect of Optional voucher entries on reports and

s t a t e m e n t s

Optional Vouchers Register

You can view all optional vouchers in the Optional Vouchers Register

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Optional Vouchers.

N o t e : You can view them from the Day Book as well.



Reversing Journals

Reversing Journals are special journals that are automatically reversed after a specified date. They exist only tillthat date and are effective only when they are included in reports like the Balance Sheet . These are used ininterim reporting in the course of the financial year where accruals are to be reported. These accruals are usuallyshort term and are cleared in the subsequent period. However, to get a proper perspective, decision makersrequire the reports with full impact of all aspects and transactions.

Activating Reversing Journals

To activate Reversing Journals


Select F11: Features > Accounting Features to display Company Operations Alteration screen2.

Set Yes in Use Rev. Journals & Optional Vouchers?3.


An example is - the provision for depreciation. Depreciation is usually provided for at the end of the year.However, including it for monthly reporting would give a more accurate status.

Let us take another example:

On 30th June you want to view the Balance Sheet as of today but June salaries are not paid until the first week ofJuly. There is, therefore, a large liability, which would not be reflected in the Balance Sheet. To overcome this, youenter a Reversing Journal Voucher dated 30th June, which would look like this:

When you view the Balance Sheet, Tally displays the report with the reversing journals included. The voucheraffects the report only for that day, 30th June.

Applicable up to

This is the date up to which the Reversing Journal is available for inclusion in a scenario report . The ReversingJournal can be created as of a particular date and made Applicable up to a different date. For example thedepreciation entry could be dated October 1, 2005 and applicable up to October 31, 2005. The journal will beavailable for inclusion in a scenario for any day from October 1, 2000 till October 31, 2000. It will not exist before1st Oct and will be reversed automatically after 31st Oct and consequently unavailable.



Reversing Journal Register

All vouchers are maintained in a Reversing Journal Register. These are not posted to any books of accounts andcannot be included in regular reports. They can only be seen through a scenario.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Exception Reports> Reversing Journals

Post-dated Vouchers

While entering vouchers, you can mark them as post dated. Tally will not update the vouchers in ledgers until thespecified date is approached. This is useful to enter transactions that take place on a regular basis. For example, ifyou pay for something by installments, you can set up the payments in advance, and Tally will only enter them inthe ledgers as they fall due.

Mark vouchers Post Dated by using CTRL + T or click on Post dated button from the Button Bar. This buttontoggles with Current.



Post-dated Vouchers Register

All Post-dated vouchers are maintained in a Post-dated voucher Register.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Exception Reports> Post-Dated Vouchers

Difference in the treatment of Post-dated Vouchers and other Unconventional Vouchers

The major difference between post dated vouchers and other Unconventional vouchers is that post datedVouchers affect regular books of accounts on the date of the voucher. Post-dated vouchers are not available forselection in Scenarios.

Creating Accounting Vouchers in Tally

To view the Accounting Vouchers screen:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers

N o t e : The Voucher Entry screen display depends on the Voucher Configuration,

Company Features and the Voucher Type settings.

The default voucher entry screen that is displayed is the Payment Voucher screen. To go to the next voucherscreen you can simply switch the vouchers using the buttons from the Button Bar or by using the Function keys.

Consider a simple payment voucher screen.

More:



Type of Voucher

Voucher Number

Reference

Date of Voucher

Particulars – To /By or Dr/Cr

Narrations

Particulars – Ledger name and amount

Buttons in a typical Voucher Entry screen

Type of Voucher

You need to check whether you are using the right voucher for the transaction. You change the voucher type byselecting the new type from the Button Bar.

In some cases, Sales, Purchase and Journal, as well as where you have created your own voucher types. Forexample, under Payment, Tally will display a List of Vouchers for the type you select, from which you make afurther choice.



Voucher Number

If you have set Method of Voucher Numbering to Automatic in Voucher Type screen, Tally will automatically enterthe voucher number and if you have set Method of Voucher Numbering to Manual, Tally allows you to enter thevoucher number manually.

Reference

You can enter a reference such as Purchase Order Number or Invoice Number in the Ref: Field.

N o t e : Reference is not available for receipt and payment vouchers.



Date of Voucher

The date of the voucher you enter is displayed at the top-right of the Voucher Creation screen. The date is takeninitially from the Current Date in the Gateway of Tally. However, you can change the date to ensure vouchers areentered with the appropriate date using the F2: Date button.

N o t e : You change the date using the F2: Date button from the button bar.

Narrations

You can type any comment that is appropriate for the transaction in Narrations. You can configure Tally'sNarration details as per the type of narration for the transaction. The types of Narrations are:

Common Narration – Common narration details for the entire Voucher at the end.

Single Narration – Narration details for every debit or credit transactions made.

Enabling Narrations

Common Narration is enabled by default in Tally.

To activate Narrations on the voucher screen

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Information > Voucher Types > Alter1.

Select the required Voucher2.

Set the option Narrations for each Entry to Yes3.

Accept the details.4.

Return to Accounting Vouchers on Gateway of Tally and make a payment voucher entry as required.5.

Following examples demonstrate a Payment transaction that has both common narration and narrations for eachentry. The advantage of this being that you can give single line narration separately for every ledger accountselected in case of multiple debit/credit entries.



Particulars To/By or Dr/Cr

To/By or Dr/Cr

By default Tally displays To/By which can be changed to Dr/Cr.

Set Use Cr/Dr instead of To/By during entry to Yes in F12:Configure1.

Accept to Save2.

Each voucher line displays a prompt of Dr/By for debit entries or Cr/To for credits.

N o t e : Depending on the voucher type, Tally selects either D r or Cr/ To or B y.

Thereafter, you can change the prompt (if required) by typing over it with a D or C / T

or B .



Particulars – Ledger name and amount

Ledger name and amount

After To/By or Dr/Cr, you enter the ledger names that are already created and the debit and credit amounts. Toselect a ledger, type the first letter of its name and Tally displays a List of Ledger Accounts. The ledgers startingwith the typed letter are highlighted. Only ledgers suitable for the voucher type are displayed. As you continuetyping, the highlights reduce until a match is found.

The first ledger name prompt depends upon the voucher type.

For example, in a Payment Voucher you have to first debit a personal account like a creditor or a nominal accountlike Rent. Hence you are not allowed to enter Cash or Bank as that would determine money received.

N o t e : In special case where in you have activated the option Allow Payment/Receipt

as C o n t r a in the Voucher Configuration you are permitted to do so.

Likewise, in a Sales Voucher, you must first debit a personal account name like a customer and not a nominalaccount name.

When you select the ledger, the current balance is displayed (only if F12: Configure is configured). When youenter the amount, the revised current balance is shown. After selecting the next ledger, Tally suggests thebalancing amount as the value to enter, which may be accepted or typed over. You cannot complete the voucherentry until the debit is equal to the credit.

More:

Buttons in a typical Voucher Entry screen

Buttons in a Typical Voucher Entry screen

F2: Date - You can use this button to change the date of the voucher.

F3: Company - This would allow you to switch to another loaded company and enter a voucher in it. Therefore,you can, almost simultaneously enter vouchers for more than one company.

Accounting Vouchers

F4: Contra

F5: Payment

F6: Receipt

F7: Journal

F8: Sales

F9: Purchase

F10: MemosF10: Memos

F7: Stock Journal

F10: Phys Stock - This allows recording of physical stock in hand as distinct from computed stock figures.

Other Buttons

As Voucher/As Invoice: This button is available only for Sales/Purchase Vouchers and invoices.

Post Dated -To mark the current voucher post dated. Toggles with Current

Optional - To mark the current voucher optional. Toggles with Regular

F11: Features - The different features of a company can be selected or modified by using the F11: Featuresbutton. This button is available in almost all screens of Tally. You can modify it as and when based on therequirements.

F12: Configure - The F12: Configure button allows you define and enable the report-specific options which arerequired.

For example, depending on the report that you are viewing, you can specify whether it should be in horizontal orvertical format, show percentages, show gross profit, show opening and/or closing balances, change theperiodicity, change the sorting method.

N o t e : To check the accuracy of the vouchers entered, select Day Book from the Display

Menu. Then Select F2: Period from the Button Bar and enter the period of display (it

defaults to the current date only, but you may display all the transactions for a

particular period). Select F1: Detailed. Check the vouchers against what you were

asked to do. If you find a mistake, position the highlight bar over the incorrect item and

press E n t e r for Tally to display the voucher details for alteration.

N o t e: The alteration facility is subject to security and access rights. All alterations are

available for audit.



Voucher Classes

Voucher Class is a method of automating accounting allocations during Invoice entry. It is a table for predefiningthe entries to make invoice entry a simple task. This is particularly useful in sales invoicing where the nominalledger account, to be credited for each item of sale is defined once. During voucher entry, the accounting creditsfor items sold are done automatically. Additional accounting entries like Tax, Freight and other charges can alsobe predefined to be brought up during actual invoicing.

This will have restriction on a data entry operator to alter or modify the vouchers. The total control rests withsenior management to set the class parameters. It also reduces chances of errors during voucher entry. You canstill continue to use Tally as before without classes if you do not require it.

Classes can also be used to automate the rounding off the values. The rounding-off method can be preset whendefining a class for a single line or for the entire voucher or invoice.

Voucher Class permits:

Automation of entries to predefined ledger accounts.1.

Automatic rounding off to preset value limits.2.

Another additional feature is the ability to define default sales ledger account to be affected for each Stock Item.This capability is available for companies maintaining accounts with inventory.

1. Go to Gateway of Tally

2. Select the Button F12: Configure

3. Select the option Accts/Inv Info.

4. Set Specify Default Ledgers for Invoicing to Yes

Now, when you alter or create a Stock Item, you can define the nominal ledger account (usually the salesaccount), which should automatically be credited when you invoice this item.

Example:

You might have Sales Ledgers broken up as Sale of Finished Goods and Sale of Intermediates. Let us assume thatyour finished goods are Computers and intermediate goods are CD ROM drives. Against the Stock ItemComputers, specify Sale of Finished Goods as the default Sales Ledger account to be affected. Against CD ROMdrive specify Sale of Intermediates as the default Sales Ledger account. These will be the default sales ledgeraccounts that will be affected only when invoicing. They can be overridden by the account that you set in theClass table.

The dual facility of ledger allocation with Stock Item and ledger allocation defined in a Class provides the flexibilityto permit allocation of different Stock Items to different sales accounts as set up in the Class table.

You can either alter the existing Sales Voucher Type or create a new Voucher Type based on Sales.


Select any Voucher Type from the list, say, Sales.2.

Go to the field Name of Class and enter a name3.



3.

This displays a sub screen where you can define the Default Accounting Allocations for Sales Invoice and theDefault Accounting Allocations for Purchase Invoice. You can specify the Ledger Name, the Percentage (%) ofthe amount to go into the ledger and the Rounding Method and the Rounding Limit if any.

The Type Class screen appears as shown below.

The Class Table is split horizontally for accounting allocations and additional accounting entries.

More:


Type of Calculation

An explanation of 'Types of Calculation'

VAT


Ledger Name

Select the ledger to be credited for each Stock Item sold in the invoice. More than one ledger may be affected foreach item. For example, for Tax-inclusive items, the ledgers to be credited will be Sales and Tax in a definiteproportion. This is where percentage helps.

Percentage %

This is useful in tax-inclusive price cases. You can allocate say 82.5% for the sales ledger account and the balancecan be allocated for Tax account. Normally, for tax-exclusive prices, you will give 100% for the Sales account. Thepercentage (%) symbol has to be mentioned.

While creating or altering classes for the Voucher Types Credit Note, Delivery Note, Sales and Sales order in theVoucher Type Class screen, for the Column Percentage % under Default Accounting Allocations for eachItem in Invoice, the number of decimal places allowed for the numbers input in this column has been increasedfrom two to three irrespective of the number of decimal places defined for the company.

Rounding Method

The Rounding Method may be used only where the sales account is NOT 100%. The amounts that are calculatedmay be required to be rounded off either under Upward Rounding or Downward Rounding or Normal Rounding.Normal Rounding is rounding to the number of decimal places specified for the currency based on the less than 5and greater than 5 rules. You can set your own rounding off rule. For example, round off to the next wholenumber. In such cases, you can round off Upwards.

Rounding Limit

When any of the rounding method is selected from the list, you can round off (Upwards/Downwards/Normal). Forexample: set it to 1 to obtain the amount to the next whole number. To round off upwards to the nearest 50P, setit to 0.50.

Override using Item Default?

Select Yes or No. Item default refers to the Default Ledger account that you had set for a Stock Item. Forexample, Computers – Sale of Finished Goods. If in the Class Table, you mention Sales –Local, and set No to thisquestion, then Sales –Local will be the account affected and not Sale of Finished Goods. Setting it to Yes will affectSale of Finished Goods. The advantage of this is that you can use different classes to affect different salesaccounts.


This part is relevant for Tax and other charges like freight and insurance.

Ledger Name - Select other Additional Ledgers if any, one by one.

Type of Calculation - Select the suitable method of calculation from the drop-down menu. The Value Basis thatyou will provide in the next column will calculate using the type of calculation specified. For more details referType of Calculation.

Value Basis - Enter the amount, which is to be used for the Type of Calculation. For percentage, you can usethe symbol %. In the example, 17.5% is specified for Tax on Sales on Item Rate, to use the rate given in theStock Item.

Remove if Zero? - Enter Yes for Tally to ignore the account and not to make any entry in it if its value is zero. If

Yes, ensure that Allow 0 valued entries in vouchers in F11: Features is set to No. On Setting No Tally willrecord the invoice in the ledger account with nil amounts. Under normal circumstances, you will probably wish toset this value to Yes. However, in cases such as 'Zero Rated VAT', you may wish to retain the Ledger Accountline, even though the calculation yields a nil amount.


Effect on Cost Centres - Cost Centres will remain un-allocated when Classes are used to allocate accountentries. Cost centres can also be predefined under Cost Centre Classes. Refer to Cost Centre Classes for furtherinformation.



Types of Calculation

As Additional Excise

In the Indian sub-continent, a manufacturing tax or Excise is levied. For some products, a supplementary levy onthe Basic Excise Duty is charged or Additional Excise Duty. This is a surcharge calculation.

For example, an Additional Excise Duty of 10% on the Basic Duty. While the calculation method is identical to AsSurcharge, the result is to provide a Total Excise Payable calculation accurately during Invoice printing.

As a Flat Rate

This is helpful when you wish to specify a standard mark-up/down on an invoice - say 100 for every invoice,independent of the quantity/value of the invoice.

As Surcharge

This helps you to calculate the value based on the immediately preceding figure. For example, a Sales Tax of 10%is applicable on an invoice, which would be calculated on the value of goods sold. On this, a 'Surcharge' of 5% -i.e. 5% of the Sales Tax value is applicable.

As Total Amount Rounding

This is the last line in an invoice. You will have to create an account, which would carry the rounding difference. Asthe other values of the invoice are calculated, this account would automatically get adjusted to keep the TotalInvoice Value to the desired rounding limits. You have to mark this invoice as Remove if Zero? Yes so that theaccount head is not retained in the invoice printouts if no rounding is applicable.

As User Defined Value

This allows you to specify a value while creating the invoice. You will use this when the basis of calculation isneither Value nor Quantity dependent and therefore needs to be entered every time you create an invoice.

Based on Quantity

Use this for calculations that are based on the 'Total Qty' supplied.

For example, you may have Freight or Forwarding charges as 2.00 per Kg, and if the total qty supplied in theinvoice is 200.000 Kg, then the amount should become 400.00. The Value Basis also needs to be provided as'2.00/Kg' or '0.50/Pc' as the case may be.

On Current Sub Total

In certain environments, taxes are applicable on the Total Goods Value as well as supplementary charges likeExcise Duty, Packing Charges. Normally, when the tax calculation method is specified as On Total Sales thecalculations are based on the Total Goods Value only. If you want to include supplementary charges, then set OnCurrent Sub Total as the type of calculation.

On Item Rate

This is used for both VAT as well as Excise Duty style calculations. You can specify the Rate of Tax applicable foreach Stock Item. The advantage is that it enables you to combine multiple Tax Rate products in the same Invoiceand yet get the correct ones picked up for each Tax bracket.

On Total Sales

The most common basis of Tax Calculation is on the total value of goods/services. This method uses the sum ofStock Items used in the invoice for calculations.



Inventory Vouchers

Inventory Vouchers perform the same function in the inventory system just as accounting vouchers do in theaccounting system. Inventory Vouchers are also means of entering transactions. Inventory vouchers recordthe receipt and issue of goods/stock, the transfer of stock between locations and physical stock adjustments.

If you have not integrated accounts with inventory, inventory vouchers will not have any impact on the BalanceSheet stock figures. They will maintain the stock balances separately.

To view Inventory Vouchers:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Vouchers

Configuration on Tally

Set the option Integrate Accounts and Inventory to Yes in F11: Features.

You can trace an entire transaction from the beginning i.e., goods transfer stage to the financial accountingirrespective of integration status.

For example, the purchase of stock can be tracked from the purchase voucher through the receipt note, throughinvoice from the supplier and also through eventual payment.

More:

Types of Inventory Vouchers

How to enter pure Inventory Vouchers

How to create a Stock Journal

Types of Inventory Vouchers

Tally is pre-programmed with Inventory Vouchers of various natures, each designed to perform a different task.The following table displays the standard Accounting Vouchers provided in Tally and their correspondingactivation key combination and buttons. You can either use the key combination given in the table below or thebuttons on the Button Bar.

Key Combination Buttons Voucher Type

ALT+F9 F9: Rcpt Note Receipt Note Voucher

ALT+F8 F8: Dely Note Delivery Note

ALT+F6 F6: Rej.Out Rejections Out

CTRL+F6 F6: Rej.In Rejections In

ALT+F7 F7: Stk Jrnl Stock Journal Voucher

Alt+F10 F10:Phys Stk Physical Stock

ALT+F5 F5: Sales Order Sales Order

ALT+F4 F4: Purc. Order Purchase Order

Set the option Use Tracking Numbers to Yes in F11: Company Features to activate Goods In Receipt Noteand Goods Out Delivery Note vouchers. Tally will assume that goods are received along with Purchase Vouchersand Goods are delivered along with Sales Vouchers/Invoices. Activating Tracking Numbers denote that youmay receive goods that are not accompanied by a Supplier's invoice, i.e. the invoice will arrive separately andthat you may not deliver the goods along with the invoice but will invoice it later.

N o t e : In a voucher you are allowed to select Not Applicable when the Tracking Number

sub-screen appears. This would update inventory immediately without passing a

separate inventory voucher and vice-versa. For more details refer Advanced voucher

e n t r y .

You can alter these vouchers to suit company requirements as well as create new Inventory Vouchers. Forexample, if you wish to distinguish between delivery notes for stock delivered from different locations you cancreate vouchers to do this.

More:

Receipt note Voucher

Rejections-in Voucher

Delivery note Voucher

Rejections-out Voucher



Stock Journal Voucher

Physical Stock Voucher

Receipt Note Voucher

This voucher type is used for recording goods received.

To view the Receipt Note Voucher:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Vouchers1.

Press the button Alt+F9 or Select the button F9: Rcpt Note from the button bar.2.

For example, consider the company receives new stock items from a supplier. If a Purchase Order exists for thatSupplier, select the Order Number from the List of Orders pop up menu to bring up the order particularsautomatically.

Receipt Note

Description Records receipt of new stock from suppliers

Details Recorded Reference, Ledger Account, Supplier’s Name, Address and DespatchDetails (If Accept Supplementary Details option is set to Yes in F12:Configure), Name of Stock Item, Tracking Details, Godown, Quantity,Rate (Optional), Amount (Optional), Narration



Rejections-In Voucher (Sales Returns)

A Rejections In Voucher is used to record goods that are rejected and returned back by the customer.

To view the Rejections In Voucher


Press the Ctrl+F62.

Rejections In Voucher

Description Records return of goods from customers.

Details Recorded Ledger Account, Customer’s Name, Address (If AcceptSupplementary Details option is set to Yes in F12: Configure),Name of Stock Item, Tracking Details, Order details, Godown,batch details, Quantity, Rate (Optional),Amount (Optional),Narration.

Delivery Note Voucher

The Delivery Note voucher is used for recording goods delivered to a customer.

To view the Delivery Note Voucher


Press Alt+F8 or select the button F8: Dely Note from the button bar.2.

For example, the company delivers goods from Stock to a customer. If a Sales Order exists for that customer,selecting the appropriate Order Number from the List of Orders pop-up menu will automatically bring up therelevant particulars.

Delivery Note

Description Records the delivery of goods to customers

Details Recorded Reference, Ledger Account, Customer’s Name, Address and DespatchDetails (If Accept Supplementary Details option is set to Yes in F12:Configure), Name of Stock Item, Tracking Details, Godown, Quantity,Rate (Optional), Amount (Optional), Narration



Rejections-Out Voucher (Purchase Returns)

The Rejections Out Voucher records goods that are rejected and returned to a supplier.

To view Rejections Out Voucher:


Press Alt+F6 or Select the button F6: Rej. Out from the Button Bar2.

For example, the company returns items that had previously been taken into stock from the supplier

Rejections Out Voucher

Description Records return of goods to suppliers

Details Recorded Ledger Account, Supplier’s Name, Address and Despatch (If AcceptSupplementary Details option is set to Yes in F12:Configure), Name ofStock Item, Tracking Details, Order details, Godown, Quantity, Rate(Optional), Amount (Optional), Narration


Stock Journal Voucher is used to record stock transfers from one location to another.

To view the Stock Journal Voucher:


Press the buttons Alt + F7 or Select the button F7: Stk Jrnl from the Button Bar2.

For example, the company transfers items of stock from the warehouse to the shop.


Description Records the transfer of stock from one Location to another

Details Recorded Reference, Name of Source and Destination Locations, Name of StockItem, Godown, Batch, Quantity, Rate, Amount, Narration

More:

How to Create a Stock Journal?




Physical Stock Voucher is used for recording actual stock physically verified or counted.

To view the Physical Stock Voucher


Select the button F10: Phys Stk from Button Bar or press Alt+F102.

For example, Physical Stock is the stock found on conducting a stock check. It is not unusual that the companyfinds a discrepancy between actual stock and computer stock figure. Physical vouchers will be useful for recordingpurposes only if you have configured inventory vouchers to ignore physical stock differences. If you haveconfigured the vouchers so that physical stock difference is not ignored, then all transactions subsequent to thephysical stock voucher will use the balance as mentioned in that voucher.


Description Records the physical stock count as the new stock balance

Details Recorded Stock Item, Location, Batch details and Quantity.

Entering Pure Inventory Vouchers in Tally

Selecting and Entering the Voucher

There are five kinds of inventory vouchers:

Receipt Notes and Delivery Notes

Rejections - in and Rejections - out

Sales Order and Purchase Order

Stock journal

Physical stock

N o t e : Vouchers involving pop-up screens depend upon configuration settings and it will

be assumed that these settings have been activated.

The basic procedure to enter each voucher is:

Go to Gateway of Tally >Inventory Vouchers1.

Change the date if necessary.2.

Select the V oucher type from the Button Bar3.

Enabling F11: Features

Set Use Tracking Numbers to Yes to activate Delivery Note and Receipt Note vouchers.

Set Use Rejection Notes to Yes to activate Rejections In and Rejections Out vouchers.

Set Allow Purchase Order Processing and Allow Sales Order Processing to Yes to activate PurchaseOrder and Sales Order vouchers.

A typical Receipt Note inventory voucher screen appears as shown below:



The screen is divided into three sections:

The Type, Reference and Date of the Voucher.1.

Party's Particulars and Ledger Account.2.

Inventory Item Details.3.

You can change the voucher type by selecting the required type from the Button Bar.

N o t e : In some cases such as Receipt Notes (where you have opted for Use rejection

notes in F11 ) you will see a pop-up screen from which you select the right voucher.

More:

Type of Voucher

Tracking Number

Default Voucher number

Order Details (in case Purchase Order Processing is active)



Type of Voucher

Select the Voucher required form the Button bar.

Prior to making a voucher entry, ensure that you are using the right voucher. You can change the voucher type byselecting the new type from the Button Bar. In some cases, like receipt notes (where you have opted for UseRejection notes in F11: Features) you will see a pop-up screen from which you can select the appropriatevoucher.

Voucher number

Voucher numbering by default is automatic. It can be entered manually by setting it in Voucher Types.

Reference number

This is optional. You can enter a reference such as Purchase Order Number or Supplier's Delivery Note Number.

Date of voucher

The date of the voucher you are entering is displayed at the top-right of the Voucher Creation screen. By default,this will be the Current Date. You can change the date to the transaction date.

N o t e : You can change the date using the F2: Date button on the Button Bar.

Ledger Account

There are no To/By or Dr/Cr in inventory vouchers.

To select a ledger, type the first letter of its name and Tally will display a List of Ledger Accounts. As youcontinue typing, the highlights reduce until a match is found. Here you usually need a supplier's ledger account.

Supplier's name and address

Enter details of the supplier's name and address. This can be different from the ledger name or can be the same.This information is useful when printing out the Goods Receipt Note.

Name of the Item

From the pop-up list of Stock Item, select the Stock Item that is being received. If it is not in the list, create itusing ALT+C.

Tracking Number

Set Use Tracking Numbers to Yes in F11: Features > Inventory Features

The Tracking number is used to link the Receipt Note with the Supplier's Invoice that will be received later.(Supplier's Invoice is recorded through the Purchase Voucher). Hence, select the number which helps maintain thelink. Tally gives the Receipt note number and the Reference number as default. However; you may opt to giveyour own number, in which case select New Number. If you do not wish to give a tracking number at all, selectNot Applicable.

Tracking numbers link the different accounting vouchers with the inventory vouchers as follows:

Receipt Note/Goods In vouchers are linked to Purchase Vouchers1.

Goods Out /Delivery Note are linked to Sales Voucher/Invoice.2.

Rejections-In is linked to Credit Note3.

Rejections-Out is linked to Debit Note4.

New number

Enter a new number that is not in the list. You can use this number to reconcile, while making a Purchase Voucherentry.

Not applicable

You can select Not applicable if you do not want tracking number. This may be resorted in cases where you wantto update stocks immediately with this entry and no goods inward entry is needed.

If you select Not Applicable in an inventory voucher, it will update stocks and you need not make a separateaccounting/invoice entry.

Uses of the option Not Applicable

If you need to raise a sales voucher/invoice that accompanies the goods and do not want to pass Goods Outentry, Not Applicable will update stocks without the Goods Out entry.

When you record a purchase voucher and wish to update inventory without a separate Goods In entry,select Not Applicable for the tracking number.



The same applies to Debit Notes-Rejection Out and Credit Note-Rejection In.

When you send out samples for approval, where you do not want to raise an invoice.

When you receive samples, but no invoice will be forthcoming.

Default Voucher number

Reference number

Tally lists the voucher number and the reference number of the current voucher for selection. Select the one thatis easy to track later.

Pending tracking number

If you have a pending tracking number from a previous voucher, it will be listed here together with details likelocation, quantity, rate and amount. Select a pending tracking number to adjust that with the current voucherentry. This could be a Purchase Voucher received and recorded, for which the goods are now being received.



Order Details (in case Purchase Order Processing is active)

If Purchase Order Processing is activated in F11: Features, an order field will be available. Select Not Applicable ifthere are no order particulars to adjust or record.

If the order exists, the fields are automatically filled up once you select the order number from the pop-up list.These are available for editing (can alternatively be set so that editing is not permitted through F12: Configure).Otherwise, select a new number to input order details at this point.

Location

If you have more than one location, you must specify the location to which this item relates. The List ofLocations will pop up to enable you to specify the location quantity, rate and amount for the item. You can givemultiple locations.

Batch Number

If batch number is enabled in F11: Features, the batch number can be given in the locations sub-screen. Selecta batch number from the List of Active batches batch numbers, or give a new number for a new batch.

Mfg. Date

The Manufacturing Date appears only if it has been activated. Specify the date of manufacture. This enables youto set expiry date for the batch as a period from the date of manufacture. For example, three months from thedate of manufacture.

Expires on

This field appears only if it is enabled. Enter the date of expiry or a period from the date of manufacture. If youhave disallowed the use of expired goods for the Item, you cannot issue them after the expiry date.

Quantity

You can set Company Features to allow Actual and Billed Quantities. You have to enter both quantities here. Theactual quantity updates stock and the billed quantity affects the accounts. Give the quantity either in the mainunit or the alternate unit. You may even specify quantities in both units. For example, 100 bars=150 Kgs.

Rate

Specify the rate for the stock item. If you have entered Standard Rate for the item, the voucher will pick therelevant standard rate for that date by default. You can modify it while entering the voucher.

Per

In this field, you can enter the unit of measure for the quantity of the item. This can be the main unit or even thealternate unit.



Amount

The quantity multiplied by the rate per unit will be the amount.

End of List

In all multiple allocations or selections, you should either select the option End of List or press Enter at the firstblank field. This will accept the multiple allocations and take you back to the parent screen. For example, Multiplelocations, batches or items.

Narration

Here, you can type appropriate information for the transaction.

Creating a Stock Journal

A Stock Journal is used to transfer materials or stock from one location to another location. Stocks can also beshown as consumed. It can only be produced without consumption and production. Hence, it is not like otherjournals where debits and credits match.

You can specify quantities that are moved, their rates and amounts. If standard rates are entered in the StockItem masters, they will appear. In the target location, you can specify additional costs incurred without actuallyaffecting accounting at all. Only the stock value goes up. Hence, it is technically correct where an expenseincurred on production or inward has been accounting for in the cost of that item.

To create a Stock Journal Voucher

1. Go to Gateway of Tally >Inventory Vouchers

2. Select the button F7 : Stk Jrnl from the button bar or press Alt+F7

1.



The Stock Journal Screen has three parts -

The part at the top accepts general information.1.

The left-hand side accepts the Source Godown or Consumption Part.2.

The right-hand side accepts the Destination Godown or the Production Part.3.

You must furnish the common information required in the field that appears at the top. You may elect to giveinformation for only the left or the right part or both.

More:

Common Information

Common Information

Reference, date and voucher number

Reference field will be displayed if this is option is activated for the voucher. Give a reference number, if required.Voucher number depends upon the settings in Voucher Type.

Source (Consumption)

Select the name of the Stock Item and the Godown from which it moves or where it is consumed as well as theQuantity, rate and amount. If the rate is specified in the Stock Item master, it will be displayed when you indicatethe Item name.

N o t e : The effect of entry in this part is to reduce stock of the Items specified.

Destination (Production)

Mention the name of the item and the Godown to which the item is moved. It is not necessary that the Itemnames should match the names in the source part. This is because a totally new Item could be produced out ofthe materials consumed. You can specify the rate of the Item, Quantity and amount. If the rate is specified in theStock Item master, it will be brought up when you indicate the Item name.

N o t e : The effect of entry in the Destination Part is of increasing the stock of the Items

specified in this part.

Additional cost details

This is another interesting facility is available for the Destination Godown (Production). You can specify whatadditional costs were incurred in moving goods to the Godown or for producing them. Though these costs arestrictly accounting heads, they do not get posted in the relevant nominal ledger accounts but add to the cost ofthe Item. In the target Godown, you can specify additional costs incurred without actually affecting accounting.Only the stock value goes up. Hence, it is technically correct where an expense incurred on production or inwardhas been accounted for in the cost of that item.

After entering the amount for an Item, the following Additional Cost Details entry box pops up.

You may specify additional costs for transferring or producing the item. The typically additional costs are wages,power, freight and so on. Ensure that you have ledger accounts opened for the additional costs. Moreover,additional costs entered for the ledgers, do not reflect in the relevant ledger with the amount but only add to thecost of the item.

Percentage (%-age)



You can specify the additional cost in percentage of the cost of the item, in which case enter the number, forexample, 2 for 2% of the cost of the item. You may, alternatively, skip the percentage field and input an amountdirectly.

Actuals

This displays the total additional cost for the item and the effective cost per unit of item/product produced.

Bill of Materials

A Bill of Materials is a list of constituent items along with quantity details that can be allotted towardsmanufacturing a certain product, by-product or likewise. This facilitates immediate reduction in stock of the itemautomatically. This process of listing the items that make up another item is made possible in Tally by enablingthe Bill of Materials Facility.

Enabling Bill of Materials

This is useful for manufacturing organisations and can be set up through F12: Configure. The Bill of Materialsoption now appears in the Stock Item Creation screen only after entering a unit of measure in the Units field.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure1.

Select Accts/Inv Info from the Configuration Menu2.

Set Allow Component List Details (Bill of Materials) to Yes3.

A Bill of Material should be available while manufacturing an item. This is done through a stock journal. It isadvisable to create a new voucher type, say, Mfg Journal which is based on Stock Journal.



More:

Stock Journal as Manufacturing Journal

Creating a new Manufacturing Journal

Creating a Bill of Material

Input fields

Advanced Usage

Stock Journal as Manufacturing Journal

Stock Journal vouchers have an option Use as a Manufacturing Journal, in the Voucher Type Creation screenwhich has to be set to Yes .


Select Accounts Info. > Voucher Types > Alter2.

Select the Stock Journal Voucher from the Voucher Types3.

Set the option Use as a Manufacturing Journal to Yes4.

When you use a Stock Journal as a Manufacturing Journal, the Stock Journal voucher entry screen will be modifiedto accept Name and Quantity of the product being manufactured, its list of components and additional costs of



manufacture associated with it. For an end-product item, if you have specified a bill of material that contains thelist of components, this list will be brought up automatically and filled in for the quantity of the end product.

Creating a New Manufacturing Journal

T o create a new Manufacturing Journal

1. Go to Gateway of Tally

2. Select Inventory. Info > Voucher Type > Create

Name

Give a new name to the voucher type, for example, Manufacturing Journal.

Type of Voucher

This must be Stock Journal. Select it from the pop-up list.



Abbr.

Enter a suitable abbreviation. For example, Mfg Jrnl. This is the abbreviation to the voucher type name.

Use as a Manufacturing Journal

Set this option to Yes .

For more details on voucher type refer Create a Voucher Type .

Creating a Bill of Material

Bill of Material (BoM) is created only for those items that are being assembled in-house. For trading items, you donot need a BoM. Therefore, you need to specify a BoM at the time of creating a Stock Item or when altering itsmaster.

Let us create a new Stock Item Television Flatron and specify its BoM.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info. > Stock Items > Create

The Stock Item Creation screen is displayed below.

Some information like Batches, Alt. Units etc. depend upon the company features, configuration and invoicing set-up. For details on fields other than Set Components (BoM) refer to the Stock Item Creation section underInventory Information.

The difference for India/SAARC would be in the field Rate of VAT and MRP/Marginal.



Set the option Allow Component list details (Bill of Materials) to Yes in F12: Configure .

A pop-up list for the components appears which has to be entered as shown below.

Unit of Manufacture

Specify the appropriate number of the finished product items that will be made. While manufacturing andrecording through a stock/manufacturing journal, record the item in multiples of this unit of manufacture. Thecomponents are multiplied by the same factor automatically. You are allowed to alter the components to reflectactual consumption, if there is a change from BoM.

N o t e : Under certain circumstances, it is better to give a larger unit of manufacture, for

example, per 1000 Pcs of nails, as raw material consumed for 1 piece of nail is

i n s i g n i f i c a n t .

Item, Godown (Location) and Quantity

Enter the component name and quantity. If there are multiple Godowns or Locations, specify the storage locationfor the item.

Enter the options for all appropriate fields for the stock item and accept the screen.

Manufacturing Journal Entry


Select the button F7 : Stk. Jrnl or press Alt + F72.



1.

2.

If you are creating a new voucher type Manufacturing Journal, a pop-up menu is displayed with the optionsdefault Stock Journal and Manufacturing Journal.

Select Manufacturing Journal and the following screen will be displayed.

Input Fields

Reference Number

Enter a reference number, if required.

Name of Product

Enter the name of the Stock Item to be manufactured.

Location

Enter the location where the Item is manufactured. This location will show the stock.

Qty

Enter the quantity of the item to be manufactured.

Component (Consumption)

The component list for manufacturing the product and the proportionate quantity of each component (based onthe quantity specified for the product in BOM) is produced. For each component, the default location is given asspecified in the BoM. The entire component list can be altered, components added or removed and locationsamended.

N o t e : Any change made during this entry will not affect the original Bill of Material for

this product. If you want to make permanent change to the Bill of Material, alter the

Stock Item master information of the product.

Cost of components

The base cost of the components are automatically added and displayed on the screen.

Additional cost components

Specify additional costs for producing an item. These are typically wages, power, and freight. Creating ledgeraccounts for the additional costs is a must. Moreover, additional costs entered for the ledgers are not reflected inthe relevant ledger with the amount, but these additional costs only add to the cost of the item.

% age

Additional costs can be entered in terms of percentage of cost of components, for example, 2 for 2% of the cost ofcomponents. You can also skip the percentage field and enter an amount directly.

Total additional cost

This field displays the total additional cost for an Item.

Effective cost

This is the sum of the total cost of components and additional costs.

Effective rate

Effective cost per unit of item/product produced.



Advanced Usage

Stock Journal or Manufacturing Journal can be created directly while creating a sales invoice. This is very helpful insituations where the manufacture has not been recorded but the invoice is prepared.

While creating an invoice, place cursor at the quantity field of the Stock Item (manufactured product), pressALT+V to bring up the Manufacturing Journal screen for the product/item. Once the details are entered, you arebrought back to the next field in the invoice screen. The manufactured product is invoiced and the correspondinglist of components reduced from stock in a single transaction entry. Thus, the item would be manufactured, itscomponents reduced from stock, and also invoiced in a single transaction entry.

ALT+V creates a new Stock Journal or Manufacturing Journal transaction voucher and is not to be used forallocation. If ALT+V is pressed again during alteration of the invoice, one more Manufacturing/Stock Journal willbe created and it will not alter the previous Manufacturing Journal.

Alteration of Manufacturing/Stock Journal

To alter the Manufacturing/Stock Journal

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display1.

Select Inventory Books from the Display Menu2.

Select Stock Item3.

Select the required Manufacturing Journal screen4.

Or

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display1.

Select Statement of Accounts from the Display Menu2.

Select Statistics > Mfg or Stock Journal3.

Select the required Manufacturing Journal screen. Make necessary changes and accept the screen.4.

Checking the Vouchers Entered

To check the accuracy of the vouchers entered:

Select Day Book from the Display Menu.1.

Select F2: Period from the button bar and enter the period of display2.

Select F1: Detailed from the button bar or press the keys Alt + F13.

4.

3.

Check the vouchers and if you find any error, position the highlight bar over the error and press Enter forTally to display the voucher details for alteration.

4.

N o t e :

* It defaults to the current date only but you may display all the transactions for a

particular period.

* The alteration facility is subject to security and access rights. All alterations are

available for audit.



Purchase and Sales Orders

Order Processing

Order processing is the placing of orders with suppliers for purchase to be made from them or receive orders fromcustomers for the purpose of selling. In Tally, Order Processing is linked to Inventories. This allows tracking of theorder position for a Stock Item. Using this you can track arrival of goods ordered and also whether the orderedStock Item are delivered on time etc.

You can create Purchase and Sales Orders in Tally. Purchase Orders (PO) can be created, printed and sent tosuppliers. Goods received are linked with the POs and Invoices. Outstanding Purchase Orders should bemonitored. Stock Summary displays order position of any item. The Purchase Order Book lists out all the PurchaseOrders placed.

Likewise, Sales Orders received are recorded in Sales Order Entry screen. These details will be available duringDelivery Note and Invoicing. The order position in the Stock Summary can be viewed. The Sales Order Book listsall Sales Order received.

Enabling Purchase and Sales Orders

To enable Sales Order and Purchase Order vouchers, activate the following in F11: Features

Set Allow Purchase Order Processing and Allow Sales Order Processing to Yes.1.

Enable Use Tracking Numbers2.

More:

Creating a Purchase Order

Altering a Purchase Order

Creating Sales Orders

Altering a Sales Order

View order position

Creating a Purchase Order

Purchase Order details depend on configuration settings.

To create a Purchase Order :

Go to Gateway of Tally> Inventory Vouchers> F4 : Purc. Order

Party's A/c Name

Select the Supplier’s name from the List of Ledger Accounts . Use Alt+C to create a new account.

Order No

Enter the purchase order number. Configure the voucher type through Accounts Info > Voucher Types to setprefixes and suffixes for Purchase Orders. This particular Order No. field is an additional field to record order



number if it is different from the voucher number. The voucher number is automatically displayed here; it is alsopossible to change this number if needed.

Name of the Item

Select the Stock Item that needs to be purchased from the List of Stock Items . The Item Allocations sub-screen is displayed. Enter the details as shown below.

Due on

Enter the due date for delivery of the item. This monitors outstanding deliveries. The order can be split fordelivery on different dates. If the order is split, give the due date of the first lot to be delivered. After selecting therespective Godown and entering the Quantity, Rate and Amount , specify the due date for the second lot. Ifthe whole lot is delivered at a time, press Enter in the Due on field to return to the Voucher Creation screen.

The cursor then returns to the Item field once again. Now enter another item. If no other item is required, pressEnter in the blank field to navigate to the next field. Press the space bar to display the List of Ledger Accounts.

You can also specify other expenses like freight, tax to be charged if any in the Purchase Order. The Tax andExpense has to exist as a ledger account or it may be created using Alt +C

Location

This field should be entered with required details if multiple-location feature is enabled, otherwise it does notappear.

Quantity, Rate and Amount

Enter the quantity of the item required and its rate. The amount is calculated, but it can be modified to enablerounding off.

Additional Cost Details

E nter any additional cost incurred on the item here. This can be either entered as a percentage of the item cost ora fixed amount. If not, select End of List. Additional costs increase the value of the item, but they do not appearindependently in the nominal ledger account or expense.

Next Item

The cursor comes to the Item field once again and you can enter another item to order. If no other item isrequired, press Enter on the blank field to take the cursor to the tax/expense field.

Expense/Tax

Once the item details have been entered, specify tax to be charged and other expenses like freight, if any. The tax

or expense has to exist as a ledger account if they do not exist, create it using Alt+C. Here, consider tax @17.5% that is charged on the item values.

The order entry screen appears as shown below.

Narration

This field is optional. Enter necessary particulars about the order.



Altering a Purchase Order

To alter a Purchase Order

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Day Book

Or

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Inventory Books > Purchase Orders Book

Make the necessary alterations and save.

Delete a Purchase Order

To delete a Purchase Order press Alt+D in the Purchase Order alteration screen.

Creating Sales Orders

Sales order entry is exactly like the Purchase Order Entry. Sales Order details will also depend on configurationsettings.

To create a Sales Order:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Vouchers > F5 : Sales Order

Party's A/c Name

Select the Customer’s name. Press Alt+C to create a new account.

Order No

The voucher number is automatically displayed. You can change this number if required. Enter the sales ordernumber.

Name of the Item

Select the Item for which the order is to be placed from the List of Stock Items . Here, the Item Allocationssub-screen is displayed.

Enter the details as shown below.



Due on

Enter the due date for delivery of the item. This enables monitoring of outstanding deliveries. The order can besplit for delivery on different dates. If the order is split, give the due date of the first lot to be delivered and afterselecting the respective Godown and entering the Quantity, Rate and Amount specify the due date of thesecond lot. If the whole lot is delivered at a time, press Enter in the next Due on field to return back to theVoucher Creation screen.

The cursor returns to the Item field once again and you can enter another item to be sold. Press Enter on theblank field to take the cursor to the next field if no more items are to be entered. Press the space bar to displaythe List of Ledger Accounts .

You can specify if there are any other expenses like freight or tax in the Sales Order. The Tax and Expense has toexist as a ledger account (if not, press Alt+C to create them). Select the respective ledgers to make the entriesand save the voucher.

Location

In case multiple location features are active this field has to be mentioned. Otherwise it does not appear.

Quantity, Rate and Amount

Enter the quantity of the item required, and also its rate. The amount is calculated and can be modified to round itoff.

Additional Cost Details

There are no additional cost details for sales orders. They exist only for Purchases as the values are added to thecost price. In case of sales, additional cost needs to be entered below the line along with tax.

Next Item

After completion of entering the first item, the cursor comes to Item field once again and you can enter anotheritem to order. If there is no other item, press Enter in the blank field to take the cursor to the tax/expense field.

Expense/Tax

Once the item details have been entered, specify the tax to be charged and other expenses like freight, if any. Thetax or expense has to exist as a ledger account or it may be created using Alt+C . Let us consider tax @ 17.5% tobe charged on the item values.

The Sales order entry screen appears as shown below.

Narration

T his field is optional. You can give some particulars about the order.



Altering a Sales Order

To alter a Sales Order

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Day Book

Or

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Inventory Books >Sales Orders Book

Make the necessary alterations and save.

Deleting a Sales Order

To delete a Sales order press Alt + D in the Sales Order alteration screen.

View Order Position

View the order position in Stock Summary.


Select Stock Summary2.

Select the button F1 : Detailed from the button bar3.

The screen shows the Particulars, Quantity, Rate, Value and Period . However, you do not know how muchstock is on order both inward and outward.

Press Alt+ N or Auto-Column from the Button bar.1.



1.

You get the following menu.

2. Select Orders & Stock Details .

N o t e : Set Remove Rate and Value to N o in F12: Configure

3 . This will enable all columns to fit in one screen.

4. You may further drill down each column to view further the details.

5. In the Stock Summary screen, you can even bring up a new column using Alt+C.



6. Sales Order Reports can be accessed through Alt+F7 or Alt+C of the stock Summary.

N o t e : Inventory Reports & Accounting Reports can also be accessed through ALL other

reports by pressing F9 or F10 (Accounting/Inventory Reports).

Invoice Entry

Invoicing or sales invoicing is almost similar to sales voucher entry. You will use the same voucher but select AsInvoice option to turn it into a sales invoice. Purchase invoices are recorded through normal Purchase Voucherentry and it does not have the provision of being converted into an invoice format for entry purposes. Similarly,you can print the Purchase voucher as a Purchase Invoice or even a Purchase Order.

The advantage of using the invoice format for sales and purchase voucher entry is that it enables automaticcalculations of taxes and duties. This is possible for only those groups for which Used for Calculation is enabledunder the group Duties and Taxes. This is also possible for other groups for which the field Used for Calculation isenabled in the Group Creation screen.

In recording both sales and purchase invoice details, you can adjust accounting and inventory balances andaccount for Taxes simultaneously.

The default invoice formats has various configuration options. Use them to print your invoices as perrequirements. It is not necessary to create new invoice formats. It is recommended that you configure the defaultinvoice as per requirements. You can also design a new invoice using Tally's Definition Language (TDL) ReportDesigner. TDL is quite an advanced language with which you can create new reports and screens. You can evenmodify existing reports and screens.

Settings for creating Sales and Purchase Invoice

Ensure that Allow Invoicing is set to Yes in F11: Features to create sales invoice. This brings up anotheroption. Set Separate Discount Column on Invoices to Yes if you want a separate column for discountsin invoices.

1.

To create purchase invoices, ensure that Allow Invoicing is set to Yes and also Enter Purchases inInvoice Format is set to Yes in F11: Features. If you want a separate column for discounts in invoices,follow the procedure described above.

2.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers. Select either sales or purchase voucher. If you setShow Inventory Details to Yes in F12: Configure, all inventory details will be displayed on voucherscreen.

3.

While creating Ledgers under the group Sales and Purchase Accounts, ensure that the option Inventoryvalues are affected is set to Yes.

4.

If you want tax accounts (under the group Duties & Taxes) to use automatic calculation, ensure that thePercentage of Calculation is entered (For example, 17.5) and the appropriate Method of Calculation isselected from the pop-up menu in the Ledger Creation screen. If it is to use Tax based on Item Rate, thenthe Stock Item must have the rate specified. For more details refer Ledgers.

5.

More:

Configuring the Invoice

Printing Invoices and Vouchers



Configuring the Invoice

Before creating the invoice, you need to configure the invoice.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers> F8: Sales/F9: Purchases (As Invoice) 1.

Select F12: Configure2.

Set the options as required.

Complete Accounting Allocations in Order/Delivery notes? Accounting allocations are not normallymade during order recording or delivery notes. Yet you can set it to Yes if necessary.

1.

Allow modification of ALL fields during entry: Default order/delivery note entries appearing in theinvoice can be changed during invoice entry. Set this to Yes to permit modification of all fields.

2.

Further, you can configure its printing as follows:

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Printing > Sales Transactions > Sales Invoice

Invoice Printing Configuration appears as shown.

Set the print options as desired. You can configure the invoice as per your requirement. The options depend onthe various F11: Features and F12: Configure options that have been set for your company and for the vouchereither by you or by the administrator.

In the above screen, the options are tuned to International settings. These will change if you opt for India/SAARCin the basic company settings. The details that you give during invoice entry depend very much on theconfiguration settings.

Likewise, the details that you give during invoice entry depend very much on the configuration settings. Considera typical invoice entry screen.



During invoice entry, some of the information will be selected from the separate pop-up screens. The invoiceformat is different from the normal sales voucher where the accounting information is the primary information andthe stock information is secondary. In the invoice format, stock information is primary information and accountinginformation is the secondary.

Sales Voucher number

This number is controlled by the settings in the voucher type masters.

Date

Change date using [F2], when you need to.

Reference

This is an optional field. Give any reference particulars that can be later picked up using the range or filtermechanism. This has, traditionally, been used for tracking missing tax forms.

Party's A/c name

Select the customer's ledger account. This account will be debited by the total invoice amount. You may select aparty ledger (under the groups Sundry Debtors or Sundry Creditors) or even Cash or Bank Account (for cashsales).

Party's other details

This information is to be filled up in the secondary screen that pops up.

You may have a different consignee name and address than the buyer (if configured for).

Delivery Note No(s)

Select the Delivery Note number if there was any for the shipment, from the Pop-up List of Tracking numbers.This way you reconcile goods despatched with the invoice and financial records. Select Not Applicable if noseparate delivery exists. The choice is required only if Tracking Numbers are active.

More:

Despatch, Order and Buyer Details

VAT



Despatch, Order and Buyer Details

Enter the despatch details. These are printed on the invoice.

Order Details

The order particulars are entered here. If a prior order is recorded for the customer, a pop-up list of pendingorders appears. Select the relevant order or orders. Raise an invoice against a single order or even multipleorders. Select New Number if no prior order exists for this invoice, but you want to record the order particulars.Select Not Applicable if not applicable. Select End of List to move to the next item.

Buyer's Details

The Buyer's Address as per the master records appears as default, but you may alter it. If you have configuredto have the Consignee address as well as Buyer address, these details are also displayed. Accept or modifythem as required.

N o t e : The location column appears only if Multiple Location is enabled in F 1 1 :

F e a t u r e s.


Enter the inventory items that need to be invoiced. Once you have selected the first item and the trackingnumber and you have multiple locations set up, a secondary screen appears for the item particulars.

Enter the quantity, rate and unit particulars. You can select more than one location from where the goods havebeen despatched. Press Enter at the first blank location field to accept the first item's allocation of location andother details. You now have to give the accounting ledger that will be affected for the sale of this item.

Accounting details

Enter this information in the secondary screen that pops up after allocation of each item. Select the relevant salesaccount to be debited for the first item.

Where you have more than one Stock Item

Each item will require item allocation and accounting allocation. You must repeat the procedure till you havecompleted all the items for that invoice. Press Enter on blank item or select End of list to complete the cycle.



VAT/Tax or other expenses

These accounts are entered after the total value of stock items. Select relevant ledgers for the list. These areledger accounts and will affect accounting ledgers. For accounts like VAT/Sales Tax that are under the groupDuties & Taxes (or are otherwise specified as Calculate in invoice entry in their masters), the amounts arecalculated automatically. Press Enter on blank item or select End of list when you have completed.

Bill Details

You must give bill-wise particulars, if the feature is activated for this particular party ledger. After you give thenarration, accept the invoice.

Printing Invoices and Vouchers

To print any voucher or invoice, press ALT+P or click on the button Print. You can configure the voucher type toprint automatically after saving the voucher.

N o t e : You can configure the printing options by selecting the appropriate buttons. You

can give additional information, change titles, print additional pages, change printer

s e t t i n g s .

The buttons Pre-Printed and Quick Format toggles for Plain Paper and Neat Format respectively. These areprint specifications that you set. Pre-printed is for pre-printed stationery. Quick Format does not give fonts orother niceties but is ideal for fast printing. Select copies and give the number of copies to be printed, by defaultthis is set to one copy. You can set the number of copies in Invoice Printing Configuration

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Printing

View invoice as voucher and vice-versa

Once you create the invoice, you can view it as a voucher by simply displaying it and clicking on the toggle button[As invoice] / [As Voucher] or pressing CTRL+V. The same can be done with a sales voucher to be brought up asan invoice

Display/Alter a Voucher/Invoice

You can display a voucher or alter it (subject to authority), by simply drilling down any display screen.

For example, from the Balance Sheet, press Enter on the group Sundry Debtors, then on the particular ledger,which brings up its monthly summary. Continue the selection process till you see the list of vouchers and then thevoucher itself. You may to alter a voucher by going through the ledger display screen or the Day Book.

N o t e : If you do not have the authority to alter a voucher, the voucher would be brought

up for display only.



Advanced Voucher Entry

Advanced Accounting Vouchers

Advanced usage in voucher entry involves using more features of Tally. This would mean entering of data invarious pop-up and sub-screens depending on the context and configuration (both F12 and F11) settings.

Bill-wise details

Bill-wise details are pertinent only for party accounts, viz., ledger accounts classified under Sundry Debtors,Sundry Creditors and Branch/Divisions. Activate Bill-wise details if you wish to track each invoice and adjust thebills and payments bill-by-bill.

When you make a sales or purchase voucher with Bill-wise turned on, Tally prompts you to identify the invoicewith an appropriate reference number. The reference can then be used to allocate payments to the correct invoiceto maintain an accurate account of outstanding. Hence, Bill-wise details sub-screen comes up for party accountsduring receipt/payment voucher entry or purchase/sale voucher entry or debit note/credit note entry.

To activate Bill-wise details:

Set Maintain Bill-wise details to Yes in F11: Features1.

Set Maintain Bill-wise details to Yes while creating the respective Ledger Masters. Setting this option toYes displays an additional option Default Credit Period. Credit Period is the number of days allowed tothe Sundry Debtor to pay back or assigned to the Sundry Creditor to remind us of our payables. Specifyingthe period here is automatically reflected in the transaction. However it can be altered during VoucherEntry.

2.

N o t e : Bill-wise details sub-screen does not appear for pure inventory vouchers. It is

relevant only for accounting purposes.

Let us take an example of a Purchase Voucher where we credit the supplier XYZ Supplier with Rs. 2000. After theamount field, the Bill-wise sub-screen pops up. The sub-screen appears as shown below.

Type of Ref

Bill reference can be of four types:

1.

2.



Advance1.

New Ref2.

Against Ref3.

On account4.

You must select one or more of these to adjust the amount. The amount can be broken up and given differentReference Numbers and different Due Dates.

For example, the Rs.2000 can be split into two parts say Rs.500 and Rs.1500. Give Reference Numbers 5 and 6respectively and specify Due Date as 31st May and 15th June 2005. Thus you have the option of adjusting theamounts with different reference numbers and different Due Dates.

Advance

This is relevant when the money is received or paid in advance. You can adjust this advance amount while makingthe sale or purchase entry.

New Reference

You select this for new transactions. For example, for a new bill raised on your customer or raised on you by yoursupplier. If you mark the bill as a new reference, it is added to the list of outstanding. In the field, you can givethe voucher number, the reference number, or any alphanumeric set of characters that would identify thereference and help set it off later using against reference. You are not allowed to give the same name for two newreferences. In other words, new references must be unique.

Against Reference

Select this when adjusting against a previous reference, i.e., adjusting against a bill marked new reference. Marka bill as new reference and adjust its payment by marking the payment against reference. When selecting againstreference, a list of pending references (bills) for the party comes up from which you select. You may adjust thewhole bill or part of it. The rest of the bill remains unadjusted. You can use Against Reference even to adjustadvance with an invoice. You can do this when entering a purchase or sales voucher. If there are no pending bills,the option will not be available.

On account

On Account is selected when you are unable to mark a payment or a receipt against specific pending references.You need to do this in cases of lump sum payments where a number of bills are pending but you are notinstructed against which bill the money should be adjusted. However, the user can alter the payment/receiptvoucher and select the relevant Agst references

Name

In this field you can give the voucher number, the reference number, or any alphanumeric set of characters thatwould identify the reference and help set it off later using against reference. You are not allowed to give the samename for two new references. In other words, new references must be unique.

Due date or credit days

This is applicable for new reference. Give the credit period for the bill or the date when it is due for payment. Giveeither one of them and Tally will calculate the other.

Amount

This is the amount for adjustment. The amount given in the voucher automatically appears here. You can breakup the amount and adjust it in several installments giving different references.

Dr/Cr

Specify whether the adjustment is debit or credit.

It is usually Dr for sales New References and Cr for Purchase New references. It is usually the same as thevoucher entry.

Maintaining Bill-wise details helps you to obtain information on Pending Bills, Bills Due, Overdue Bills etc andreports such as Outstanding Analysis and Ageing Analysis. To get these reports

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statement of Accounts > Outstandings

Cost centre allocations

Cost centre allocations will be relevant if you have opted for Cost Centres in F11: Features.

To display relevant ledgers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Ledgers.

By allocating ledgers to Cost Centres at the time of voucher entry, you do away with the need to reconcile them. They are reconciled from that very moment. Hence, you save time and effort when you need to use theinformation for analysis. Cost Centre analysis is a powerful tool that enables you to know the performance of theCost Centres.

To display Cost Centre information

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statement of Accounts > Cost Centres.

More:

Cost Categories


Tracking Number

Default voucher number and reference number

Foreign Exchange transactions

Zero Valued entries in vouchers



Cost Categories

Let us take an example:

Create three Cost Categories named Departments, Executives and Projects.1.

Create three Cost Centres named Marketing, Manufacturing and Finance under the Cost CategoryDepartments. Create three Cost Centres Salesman A, Salesman B and Salesman C under the Cost CategoryExecutives. Create three Cost Centres Airports, Roads and Buildings under the Cost Category Projects.

2.

The structure for creating Cost Categories and Cost Centres are shown below:

Cost Categories: Departments Executives Projects

Cost Centres: Marketing Salesman A Airports

Manufacturing Salesman B Roads

Finance Salesman C Buildings

You can specify a Cost Category to allow allocation of only revenue items or items of both revenue and capitalnature. In this example, allow allocation of items of both revenue and capital in nature for both Departments andProjects categories and items of only revenue in nature for Executives.

Now, Salesman A incurs conveyance expenses. If he has incurred it for marketing, allocate this amount to the costcentres Marketing and his own cost centre Salesman A. (You would do it while entering a payment voucherdebiting Conveyance and crediting Cash). If the salesman now incurs expense for the project Buildings, you wouldallocate to the Cost Centres Salesman A and Buildings. You may allocate an expense to one or more Cost Centresand it is not essential to always allocate to all Cost Centres. An expense can remain unallocated to other CostCentres.

In case Cost Categories are not enabled, you will be able to allocate the expense to either Buildings Cost Centreunder Projects or Salesman A under Executives and not to both. In such a case, you would not obtain the thirddimension.

You may not have Cost Categories activated if you do not need to. Without Cost Categories, you will allocate theledger amount to only one set of Cost Centres, and not to parallel sets. Hence, you would allocate the conveyanceexpense to Salesman A only and not to both Salesman A and Project Buildings. You can allocate the expensepartly to Salesman A and partly to Project Buildings that adds up to the total amount. This information will notenable you to know how much Salesman A spent for the Project Buildings.

N o t e : You do not allocate transactions to cost categories you allocate them to cost

centres only. The concept is like group/ledger account classification.

Cost Centre allocations have to be done in pop-up sub-screens in the main voucher entry screen. The sub-screenpops up after the amount field pertaining to the ledger for which cost centres have been activated. Hence, thefollowing is the sub-screen for the ledger Conveyance amount in a payment voucher:

Applying Cost Centres to Ledger Accounts

Activate Cost Centre for the Ledger Accounts that are used in voucher entry.

In this example, make a payment voucher for the amount Rs. 1, 00,500. Hence, enable Cost Centres for theledger Conveyance.


Select Accounts Info > Ledgers>Alter2.

Select the ledger Conveyance from the List of Ledgers . Set Cost Centres are Applicable to Yes. If theledger Conveyance is not available create a new one with Cost Centres enabled.

3.



3.

Cost Centre Allocation in Voucher Entry

The entire objective of creating Cost Centres is to allocate expenses and revenues to Cost Centres. Allocation isdynamic and done at one stage only, at the time of making voucher entries.

For example, make a payment voucher for conveyance


The voucher entry screen appears. Debit the amount to the Conveyance ledger. Cost Centre allocations have to bedone in pop-up sub-screens in the main voucher entry screen. A sub-screen pops up after the amount fieldpertaining to the ledger for which cost centres have been activated. The sub-screen for the ledger Conveyanceand in a payment voucher appears as shown below.


Inventory items need to be considered in financial vouchers where you use ledger heads that have the option AreInventory Values affected? set to Yes. Similarly you will have the accounts of the type Sales and Purchasesaffecting inventory. When you enter a voucher (usually a Sales or a Purchase Voucher) a sub-screen pops up afterthe concerned ledger head and amount asking you to enter inventory item details.

The inventory details that you give in an accounting voucher (like Sales and Purchase Voucher) affects stocks byimmediately updating them only if Tracking Numbers are not activated in F11: Features. Otherwise, theinventory allocation tracks against Goods In or Goods Out notes through tracking numbers.

The information that you need to give in the inventory allocation sub-screen depends upon the features enabledfor the company.

A typical inventory allocation sub-screen appears as shown below.

Name of Item

Select the item from the list of items or press ALT+C to create a new item.

Tracking Number

The tracking number pop-up list appears after you have entered the name of the item.

A default list will contain the following:

New number – Enter a number, which is not in the list. You will use this number to reconcile, when makinggoods inward entry.

1.

Not applicable – If you do not want a tracking number. This may be resorted to in cases where you wantto update stocks immediately with this entry and no goods inward entry will be needed. Not Applicableoption is important and the cases where you would use it are:

2.

When you raise a sales voucher/invoice that accompanies the goods and you do not want to pass Goods Outentry. Not Applicable will update stocks without the Goods Out entry.

When you send out samples for approval, where you do not want to raise an invoice. Likewise when you receivesamples but no invoice will be forthcoming.



Default Voucher Number and Reference Number

The voucher number and the reference number of the current voucher are also listed and available for selection.Select the one that is easy to track later. By default the reference no. and the Delivery note number arehighlighted in the receipt note and delivery note for tracking.

Pending Tracking Number

If you have a pending tracking number from a previous voucher, it will be listed here together with details likelocation, quantity, rate and amount. Select a pending tracking number to adjust that with the current voucherentry. This helps in the following situations.

When you pass a purchase voucher for an invoice that is towards a Goods Receipt Note that you hadpreviously passed. (You would have given a new tracking number then).

1.

Likewise for a sales voucher/invoice.2.

Location

If there is more than one location, you must specify the location to which the item relates. Hence, a sub-screenappears after the tracking number, to enable you to specify the location quantity, rate and amount for the item.You can give multiple locations.

Batch Number

In the locations sub-screen itself, the batch number can be given if batch numbers are activated in CompanyFeatures. Select a batch number from the list of existing batch numbers or give a new number for a new batch.

Mfg. Date

This appears only if it is activated. Give the date of manufacture. This enables you to set expiry date for the batchas a period from the date of manufacture such as “three months from the date of manufacture”.

Expires on

It appears only if it is activated. Give the date of expiry or a period from the date of manufacture. If, for the item,you had disallowed the use of expired goods; you cannot issue them after the expiry date.

More:

Quantity

Quantity

You have to enable the option Use different Actual & Billed Qty? to Yes in F11: Features to allow Actual andBilled Quantities. Then, you have to give both quantities here. The actual quantity updates stock and the billedquantity affects the accounts. Give the quantity either in the main unit or the alternate unit. You can even specifyquantities in both units. For example, 100 bars=150 Kgs.

Rate

Enter the rate for the stock item. If you have entered Standard Rate for the item (Standard Cost and StandardSelling Price – see item master), the voucher will pick the relevant standard rate for that date by default. This canbe modified while entering the voucher.

Per

Enter the unit of measure for the quantity of the item here. This can be the main unit or even the alternate unit.

Amount

The quantity multiplied by the rate per unit is the amount.

End of List

In all multiple allocations or selections, you must either be required to select the option End of List or pressEnter at the first blank field. This would accept the multiple allocations and take you back to the parent screen.For example, Multiple locations, batches or items.



Foreign Exchange transactions

Enabling Foreign Currency

To enable Foreign Currency

Set the option Allow Multi-Currency to Yes in F11: Features

N o t e : Only genuine bank accounts that are maintained in foreign currencies need to

have their currency set up in that foreign currency otherwise all other ledgers should

preferably be set to home/base currency only.

Based on the above settings, consider a Purchase Voucher entry of an import transaction in foreign exchange andthen a payment entry made from a Forex Bank Account.

More:

Example 1: Foreign exchange transaction of an import transaction.

Example 2: Voucher entry of a forex bank payment

Example 1: Foreign Exchange Transaction of an Import Transaction.

In the purchase voucher

Enter the date, voucher number and reference.1.

Ensure that you have created a supplier under Sundry Creditors with the foreign currency specified in theCurrency of the Ledger field.

2.

Credit the supplier.3.

In the Amount field, start with the foreign currency symbol to inform Tally that it is a forex transaction. In thiscase, type $ (base currency is £) and continue with the amount. $25000.

4.

A forex sub-screen displays. Enter the exchange rate as per the bank or as mentioned on the purchaseinvoice. (Tally gives the default exchange rate mentioned in the foreign currency master). You can change therate, if required. Alternatively, change the amount and the rate will be adjusted automatically. If you want togive only the base currency, clear the Forex field and Rate of Exchange field and mention the Value in basecurrency. The exchange rate will then be ineffective.

5.

In inventory item allocation, consider a purchase of 50 rolls of paper. You can give the rate of the item in basecurrency or foreign currency. To mention it in foreign currency, start the rate entry with the forex symbol. Tallyconverts it to the base currency at the exchange rate previously mentioned.

6.



N o t e : If you want to give only the base currency, clear the forex field and Rate of

Exchange field and simply enter the Value in base currency. The exchange rate would

then be ineffective. Of course, if you do not enter a foreign currency in the amount

field, the amount is assumed to be in home/base currency.

Example 2: Voucher Entry of a Forex Bank Payment

It is assumed that the bank account ledger is maintained in foreign currency.

In a payment voucher (bank payment):

Enter the date and voucher number.1.

Debit the supplier2.

In the amount field, begin with the forex symbol3.

You can debit the supplier with the same amount and exchange the rate as before or even change the rate tothe current rate. Here, the rate is changed to the current rate. Notice the display of pending bills in foreignexchange when you are asked to adjust the payment against previous reference (it would come up if you havebill-wise outstandings activated).

4.

The forex gain or loss in the transaction is automatically calculated and is shown as unadjusted Forex gain/lossin the Balance Sheet. You can pass a journal entry affecting the profit and loss account with the forex gain/lossfigure to bring it into the books.

5.



When you display ledger account of the supplier, you will notice that its account has balanced out but a forex gainhas accrued on the transaction due to a rise in the exchange rate for the dollar.

Advanced inventory vouchers

There is no separate section on this. Normal inventory voucher entry includes a discussion on the advancedissues.

Zero Valued Entries in Vouchers

T o use zero values in vouchers,

Set the option Allow 0 Valued entries in Vouchers to Yes in F11: Company Features > InventoryFeatures

There is no point in having a voucher that is totally without value.

Zero values are required in the following situations:

One of the entries may not have a value but yet needs to be shown in the records.1.

Example : Zero-rated VAT or Exempt from Tax Account. You are permitted to make such an entry. TheExempt Ledger account can be viewed for all Exempt Sales.

Zero valued vouchers are possible for sales and purchase vouchers as these permit invoicing for free samples.A whole Voucher could be of zero value in only sales and purchase vouchers but this is not possible in receipt,payment vouchers and journal vouchers.

2.



Example 2 - Invoice for Free Samples

Display – Tally's Forte

Tally's Display of information is designed to allow a user get the maximum benefit of the data that is entered. Auser gets a holistic picture of the data and is also able to present information using different options. The purposeof compiling data is to present it in comprehensible accounting reports. On entering the vouchers, Tally uses thesame data and provides you with the management control reports in addition to all books and statements.

The display screens of Tally are dynamic and interactive. They are not spooled print files but are speciallydesigned for the screen. Whatever you see on the screen can be printed as well depending upon your printer’scapabilities.

To view the Display Menu:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display

The following screen displays

Gateway of Tally displays only the Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Account directly as these statements areconsidered the most important. All the other Tally reports are classified into two broad categories, namely.Accounting reports and Inventory reports conforming to the two major areas of operations. Each area is furthergrouped into books and statements.

The Cash and Funds Flow display too has not been grouped under Statements of Accounts.

Trial Balance provides you a report on the account balances sorted by groups, for all the accounts of the selectedcompany. In other words, the Trial balance displays a collection of main groups and their closing balances.

The Stock Summary is a statement of stock-in-hand on a particular date and gets updated every transaction so asto provide the current stock position.

The Ratio Analysis Statement is a single sheet report indicating the company’s performance based on values andkey indicators, over a selected period. This report gives a manager an idea of the company's financial conditionand where it is going in the short-term.

The Day Book contains all vouchers for the day, including inventory vouchers. Its purpose is to show you a day'stransactions, though you can display a report for any period using Change period option.

The List of Accounts gives the tree structure of all your masters, namely, Groups, Ledgers, Stock items, CostCenters, Currencies, etc.

Exception Reports are those reports that track unusual transactions or balances.

More:

Basic features of displaying reports

Modifying reports



Basic Features of Displaying Reports

Tally creates the books of accounts and the financial statements based on the vouchers entered till date. You canthen customise the appearance of reports as required.

For example, you can compare different companies, periods of the financial year, groups and ledgers.

Press Enter after highlighting the item in a report, to navigate to the next level of detail till you reach an individualvoucher. Similarly, you can navigate back to higher levels by pressing Esc. The special features available for adisplayed report are indicated on the button bar, which can be operated by a singleclick of the mouse.

Accessing reports

The Gateway of Tally menu provides access to all the financial reports listed in the Display Menu.

For example, if you want to view the Sales Register,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Account Books > Sales Register .

Tally will display the report for the currently selected period.

Modifying Reports

On selecting a report, the screen displays. Modify the display to suit your requirements using the appropriatebuttons from the button bar.

If you select the buttons using the keyboard, the conventions are:

F (n) : - Press the F (n) key

F (n) : - Press Alt + F (n)

F (n) : - Press Ctrl + F (n)F (n) : - Press Ctrl + F (n)

N o t e : Here n is used as an example of a function key (Eg: F1,F2 and so on).

(Alt + F1) F1 : - Detailed/Condensed

Adds a further level of detail to the report, or condenses the report.

F2: Period

You can change the period of the report by specifying From/To dates.

F3: Company

If you have more than one company selected, this button enables you to switch among them to display the newcompany data in the current screen format.

F4: to F10:

The functions performed by these buttons vary from report to report.

F11: Company Features

This button is not related to displaying reports but to setting the options that affect the voucher entry.

F12: Configure

This button is very relevant to displaying reports and enables you to define the report-specific options.

For example, depending on the report displayed you can specify whether it should be in horizontal or vertical



format, show percentages, show gross profit, show opening and/or closing balances, change the periodicity,change the sorting method, and so on.

For instance, if you want to view graphs with monthly reports:

Select the F12: Configure Button while in the Gateway of Tally screen and you will be taken to theConfiguration menu.

1.

Select General and by default Show Monthly Reports with Graphs under Other Options is set to Yes .If this option is No set it to Yes .

2.

(Alt + F12) F12 : Range

This button enables you to filter the information displayed based on monetary values.

For example, you can specify that you want Tally to display only Vouchers having Batch Names greater than$5,000 in a Day Book.

(Ctrl + F12) F12 : Value(Ctrl + F12) F12 : Value

This button enables you to filter vouchers.

For example, you can specify that you want vouchers having Employee-Attendance Entries with their Designationcontaining all the details about the employee.

New C olumn (Alt + C)

This button enables you to add and display another column in the report to compare information.



A lter Column (Alt + a)

This button enables you to alter the details of a new column added previously, for example, the date range. Select the column to be altered by positioning the cursor on it.

D el Column (Alt + d)

Use this button to delete the columns, which you no longer wish to have in the report.

Auto Column (Alt + n)

Use this button to add multiple columns to a report.

For example, add columns for each month, or to accommodate other companies if more than one company hasbeen selected. You can also have a total column.

Report specific options

Report specific options, if any are displayed at the bottom-half of the screen and can be amended as perrequirements.

Display Account Books and Statements

B ooks of account

Books of account record the transaction details as entered. Although items are posted too many different ledgers,Tally brings all the transactions of a particular category together into a book of account for viewing and printing.

For example, Cash Book records all the transactions affecting cash and the Sales Book records all salestransactions.

Statements of Accounts

These pertain to cost centres and outstanding analysis . The Statements of Accounts are derived from individualtransactions but are not statutory requirements.

Financial Statements

Financial Statements though derived from individual transactions tend to show summary totals, ratios andstatistics, analyzing a company's financial data in a wide variety of ways. Financial statements include BalanceSheet , Profit & Loss A/c ,and Cash Flow Analysis and form part of the statutory requirements in most countries.

All books are displayed as a monthly summary with opening and closing balances.1.

Select a month and press Enter to display all transactions for the month. The opening and closing balancesas well as the total of all transactions are displayed.

2.

Select a transaction to bring up the voucher. The voucher displays either in alteration mode or simplydisplays depending on your access rights.

3.



3.

Let us see some typical examples of how to display the books of account and financial statements. You will thenbe able to experiment with other statements for yourself.

More:

Viewing Cash/Bank Books

Display Balance Sheet

Display Profit & Loss Account

Display Trial Balance

Day Book

Books and Registers

Group Summary

List of Vouchers

Ratio Analysis

Cost Centre Reports

Outstandings and Credit Control



Viewing Cash/Bank Books

T o view the Cash/Bank Summary

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Account Books > Cash/Bank Book(s)1.

If you have more than one bank account, select one bank account. Press Enter to display the LedgerMonthly Summary .

2.

Select F12: Configuration and activate the option Show with Graph to Yes .3.

3.

Highlight a month, press Enter and the Ledger Vouchers screen displays.4.

5.



4.

All the vouchers for the selected month are listed. Press Esc to return to the Ledger Monthly Summaryscreen.

5.

Select F12 : Value to bring up the Value to Calculate in Report screen.Select F12 : Value to bring up the Value to Calculate in Report screen.

Select Voucher Type from the Particulars menu.a.

In the Particulars menu, select Narration .b.

In the Range of Info. Menu select equal to .c.

Type Contra in the next field and press Enter .d.

In the Condition menu select End of List and press Enter twice.e.

6.

e.

In the display of the Ledger Monthly Summary the figures are now reduced as they show only Contravouchers. To check this, position the highlight bar over the July figures and press Enter to display thedetails.

7.

Press Esc until you return to the Gateway of Tally menu.8.



Display Balance Sheet

The Balance Sheet is a report on the status of the financial affairs of a company at a given date. To view BalanceSheet:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Balance Sheet1.

Press F12: Configuration and set the required parameters to display the Balance Sheet according to yourpreferences.

2.

N o t e : Balance Sheet gets updated instantly with every transaction voucher that is

entered and saved.

Horizontal Form of Balance Sheet

The Balance Sheet screen is displayed in the Horizontal form. See it in a Vertical form by activating ShowVertical Balance Sheet to Yes in F12: Configuration .

Extract information from the Balance sheet using options available in the Button Bar.

Select F1: - Detailed/Condensed to explode the summarized information.1.

Change the date of the Balance Sheet using F2: Period .2.

Add up new columns and

Display a Balance Sheet for a different date to compare with current one

Display the Balance Sheet in a different currency

Display Budget figures and analyse the variances or

See the effect of different Stock Valuations on the Balance Sheet.

3.



More:

Configuring the Balance Sheet

Integrate Accounts with Inventory

Configuring the Balance Sheet

Show Vertical Balance Sheet?

Setting this field to Yes displays the Balance Sheet in Vertical form. In the British/Europe configuration, theVertical Balance Sheet has Liabilities and Assets , whereas the Indian/Asian configuration , it displaysSources of Funds and Application of Funds .

Profit or Loss, both as Liability?

Set this to No , to move the Profit & Loss Account to the Asset side of the Balance Sheet.

N o t e : This is applicable only in the horizontal form.

Show Percentages?

Each line will be expressed as a percentage of the total in the Balance Sheet.

Show Working Capital figures?

Set to Yes , to display Current Assets, less -Current Liabilities as shown



Method of Showing the Balance Sheet

The options are

Liabilities/Assets

Assets/Liabilities.

Format of the Balance Sheet:

For Horizontal Balance Sheet: Left Hand Side/Right Hand Side

For Vertical Balance Sheet: Top/Bottom.

Vertical Form of Balance Sheet

Set Show Vertical Balance Sheet to Yes in F12: Configuration .1.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configuration > General

Set Use accounting terminology of to India/SAARC or International under the Country Detailsto Yes .

If you have activated India/SAARC the Balance Sheet will display Sources of Funds andApplication of Funds .

If you have activated International the Balance Sheet will display Assets and Liabilities

2.

Columnar Balance Sheets



Select a Balance Sheet for a different date to compare alongside the current one

Press N ew Column on the Button bar or ALT+C and change the period.

The following is a comparison of Balance Sheet dated 1st October and Balance Sheet dated 2nd October.

Press N ew Column on the button bars or ALT+C and change only the currency to display the BalanceSheet with figures in a different currency.

Show Quarterly Balance Sheet

To view a Quarterly Balance Sheet

Press Auto-column on the button bar or use the key ALT+N .

Select Quarterly from the list of periods.




Integrate Accounts with Inventory

Effect on Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Account

Integrate Accounts with Inventory in F11: Features has a significant effect on the Balance Sheet and Profit &Loss Account.

If Accounts with Inventory is set to Yes in F11: Features, it the stock/inventory balance figures areupdated from the inventory records, which in turn enables you to drill down to the Stock Registers from theBalance Sheet.

If the option Accounts with Inventory is set to No in F11: Features, the inventory books figures areignored and closing stock balances are entered manually.

N o t e : Stock records often contain compensating errors caused by wrong allocation to

items. This feature of Tally enables the finalisation of financial books without waiting

for reconciliation of stocks that might take time.



Display Profit & Loss Account

The Profit and Loss Account shows the operational results over a given period. It lists out the Incomes andExpenditures based on the Primary Groups of Tally and the Profit & Loss Account in Tally is updated instantly withevery transaction voucher that is entered and saved.

To view the Profit & Loss Account

Go to Gateway of Tally > Profit & Loss Account

N o t e : The Profit & Loss Account is displayed according to the configuration set up for

it in F12: Configure.

Horizontal Form of Profit & Loss Account

The sample screen shown is in horizontal form which is the default display. You can also set it up to display invertical form.

Using options in the Button Bar

Select F1: - Detailed/Condensed to display more information or condense.1.

Change the date of the Profit & Loss Account using F2: Period .2.

Add new columns to

Display a Profit & Loss Account for a different period to compare with the current one

Display the Profit & Loss Account in a different currency

Display a column with Budget figures and analyse variances

See the effect of different Stock Valuations on the Profit/Loss account.

Select and compare Profit & Loss of different companies.

3.

More:

Configuring the Profit & Loss Account

Income/Expense Stmt instead of P&L?



Configuring the Profit & Loss Account

Show Vertical Profit & Loss?

The Profit and Loss Account will be displayed in the Horizontal (default) form if you set the option ShowVertical Profit & Loss? to No .

Set to Yes to display in the Vertical form.

The Vertical Form shows the Trading Account and the Income Statements separately.

Show Percentages?

Each line is expressed as a percentage of Sales Accounts , i.e., if you consider Sales Accounts to be 100%, therest of the lines would be a percentage of Sales Accounts.

Show With Gross Profit?

If the option Show With Gross Profit? Is set to Yes the Profit & Loss Statement is split to show Trading Profit,which considers only the Cost of Sales and Direct Expenses., Indirect Expenses are deducted from the Gross Profitto show the Nett Profit.



N o t e : This field is applicable only to Horizontal Form of Profit and Loss Account.

Columnar Profit & Loss Account: Some Examples

Select a column to display the Profit & Loss Account in a different currency.

Press New C olumn on the button bar or the keys ALT+C and change only the Currency and give theclosing Exchange Rate.

The Profit & Loss Account figures are converted at this rate.

Select a column to display the Profit & Loss Account with a different stock valuation method.

Press New C olumn on the button bar or the keys ALT+C and change only the Stock Valuation Method toLast Purchase Cost.

The Profit and Loss screen will be displayed as shown



Show Quarterly Profit & Loss Account

Press Auto-column on the button bar or the keys ALT+N . Select Quarterly from the list of periods.

The Profit and Loss screen will be displayed as shown:

Income/Expense Stmt instead of P&L?

A ccount statements for Non-Trading Organisations

For Non-Trading accounts (e.g. Accounts of Charitable Organizations), the Trading and Profit & Loss Statement areinappropriate.

In such cases, you may use Income & Expenditure Account by setting Income/Expense Stmt instead of P&Lto Yes in F11:Features .

The Income & Expenditure Statement displays as shown.

Display Trial Balance

Trial Balance is a report of all account balances for the company sorted by groups, i.e., it is displayed in a groupedform, comprising main groups and their closing balances. You can see that the debit and credit balances match.

In Tally, the matching of the Trial Balance is a foregone conclusion since all voucher entries are in Debit - Creditformat and must balance at the entry point.

To view the Trial Balance

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display>Trial Balance

N o t e : As per accounting principles, the Trial Balance does not list Closing Stock.

Select F1 : Detailed to break down the grouped information or simply drill down a Group for further detail.

The screen appears as shown

Select F5: Led-wise to list all ledgers and their closing balances.




Select New C olumn to bring up the closing balances for another date.


More:

Account Reconciliation Statement



Account Reconciliation Statement

This report shows the flow of the accounts from Opening Balance to the effect of transactions on Closing Balance.

Select F12: Configure and set parameters as shown

The Trial Balance Reconciliation Statement is as shown

The Trial Balance can also be configured to show only Opening and Closing Balances.



Day Book

To view the Day Book

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display>Daybook

The Day Book lists all transactions made over a particular day and by default displays the last voucher entry dateof a regular voucher. It could also be set up to list all the transactions made over a period.

Press F2 : Period on the button bar or press the keys Alt+F2 .

All the transactions include all financial vouchers, reversing and memorandum journals as well as inventoryvouchers.

Consider an example:

Day Book for current date

Day Book for a period



You can also filter the list so as to display the transactions of a particular voucher type using F4: Chg Vch buttonfrom the button bar.


Books and Registers

The objective of having books and registers in Tally is to pile up similar entries into a single entity so that they aremeaningful, e.g., all cash entries in the Cash Book, all sales entries in the Sales Day Book (called SalesRegister).

The Tally transaction flow

Apart from the subsidiary books, entries are also filed under each Voucher Type. Therefore, there will be as manyregisters as there are voucher types.

More:

Journals, Day Books and Registers

Sales Register (Sales Day Book)

Invoice Profitability

Columnar Sales Register

Registers from Statistics

Monthly Summary

Journals, Day Books and Registers

Journal, Sales Register, Purchase Register, Debit Note Register, Credit Note Register, Payment Register, ReceiptsRegister, etc. are the different kinds of Registers.

There are three ways to view various types of registers:

From the Display menu1.

By changing the type of voucher from within a register2.

From the Statistics page3.

Consider the Sales Register which includes most of the options.



Sales Register (Sales Day Book)

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display >Account books > Sales Register

The following screen displays.

By default, all registers display Monthly Summary with transactions and closing balances. For Balance SheetAccounts, opening balance is displayed at the top of the screen.

Select a month and press Enter to see the Sales Voucher Register.

A list of all sales vouchers pertaining to the month you selected displays. You can use the options in the buttonbar to change the display according to your preferences. You can change the period of the report as well as thedepth of information.

Use F12: Configure to see the report with some or all of the following information, namely Narrations, Bill-wisedetails, Cost Centre details and Inventory details.

Click on F1 : Detailed to view the reports in detailed format.



Invoice Profitability

Display the Sales Voucher Register for a period by drilling down a month and change the period if required.

Select F7: Show Profit or activate the option Show Gross profit estimates to Yes in F12: Configure

The report now displays each invoice with

Transaction Value - Invoice value including taxes

Gross Revenue – Actual sale value minus taxes

Cost – Book cost of the product

Gross Profit – Amount of profit or loss on the sale

Extract of Sales Register

When you are in the Sales Voucher Register, select F6: Extract from the button bar.


The Extract gives a break-down of the sales vouchers and groups them to provide totals for each group and ledgerused in all sales vouchers for the period. The information is useful, when you want to know how much each groupof customers bought, what is the tax component or what is the total value of each sales ledger.

Inventory-wise Extract of Sales Register

In the Sales Voucher Register select F6: Extract from the button bar

Go to F12: Configure .

Set Show Inventory-wise Extract to Yes to view the report of the stock items sold along with the details



on quantity and value.


Columnar Sales Register

Select the option F5: Columnar from the button bar, in the Sales Voucher Register screen.


Set the options listed to Yes or No depending on how you want the Sales Register to display

Type of Column

Select the type of column from the screen.

If you select Ledger or Group as Type of Column, you are provided with one more list for choosing theledger/group. Your choice is displayed under Name of Account .

All Items (automatic columns)

If this option is set, every ledger account will use a column space



All Item (in one col.)

If this option is set, all the ledger accounts are displayed in one column.

Group

You can also select a group of ledger accounts to be displayed together in one column, e.g., Sales accounts. Forother columns, you can use the additional options, namely Related accounts (automatic columns) or RelatedItems (in one col.).

Ledger

Select a specific ledger account e.g., VAT/Sales Tax. All other accounts can be put in one or more columns.

Related Items (automatic columns or in one column)

Related items means all the ledger accounts used in a voucher. Hence, the report will be similar to All Items(automatic columns). This option is helpful when used in conjunction with a Group or a specific ledger account inthe first column.

Chg Vch

Use this button to view a different register from within an existing register. E.g. If you are in Sales Register andwant to view the Payment register, press F4: Chg Vch and select Payment .

Payment Register



Registers from Statistics

To access the Voucher registers from the Statistics page:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display >Statements of Account > Statistics


Drill down a specific type of voucher to view the details.



Monthly Summary

When drilling down from a statement into any Group, Ledger, Stock item or Cost centre the screen displayed firstis the Monthly summary. Monthly Summary can also be accessed from a voucher level screen with the help of thebutton Monthly . The monthly summary shows the opening balance for the year, and then lists each month'stotal transactions, inclusive of both debit (inwards for stocks) and credit (outwards for stocks) and finally eachmonth's closing balance. Below the monthly summary, is a bar chart showing the movement of account.

Use F12: Configure to display the monthly summary according to your requirements.

The options available on the button bar are very useful for configuring managerial reports.

E.g. Use the New Column button to bring up the Monthly Summary of another ledger or object or the sameobject in another company.

Press the button F5 : Quarterly , to view the summarized quarterly figures.

Use the options in F12: Configure to view the details on percentages, averages and so on.

Ledger Voucher Monthly Summary

The Ledger Voucher Monthly summary screen is displayed as shown.

Cost Category Monthly Summary

The cost category monthly summary is displayed as shown. You can place the cursor on any particular month, sayOctober and drill down for more details.



Stock Item Monthly Summary

The screen will be displays as follows. If you want to view the details for any particular month you have to placethe cursor on the month and drill down.

Group Summary

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Account Books > Group Summary> Group name for e.g. Duties andTaxes


The Group Summary Statement shows the closing balances of the accounts falling under the selected group overa period.

Using the buttons provided on the button bar, you can change the view to any of the following:

Detailed, Individual Ledger account listing for the selected group, monthly summary, columnar display forcomparison and analysis.

An example is given below:

Led-wise Display of Group Summary

To view the Led-wise Display of Group Summary select F5: Led-wise from the button. This toggles with thebutton Grouped .



List of Vouchers

Vouchers or transactions of a similar nature or type entered over a period are collated and listed together topresent meaningful information. There are different types of voucher lists, e.g., Group Vouchers, Ledger Vouchers,Stock Vouchers, Godown/Location Vouchers, etc...

More:

Group Vouchers

Ledger Vouchers

Group Vouchers

To view the Group Vouchers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display >Account Books > Group Vouchers> Group Name e.g. Current Assets


Group Vouchers is a list of all vouchers having at least one ledger account entry belonging to the group selected.This statement is useful when you want to list all transactions for a particular group.



Ledger Vouchers

To view the Ledger Vouchers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Account Books > Ledger > Ledger account e.g. Machinery account

The list of vouchers for the current month is displayed.

You may also access Ledger Vouchers by drilling down from different statements, such as Group Summary andMonthly Summary.

Ratio Analysis

The Ratio Analysis Statement is a single sheet performance report for a selected period. It provides you withimportant values and key performance indicators. It is one report that top management needs to look atperiodically to assess the company's financial health and where it is going in the short term.

To view the Ratio Analysis screen

Go to Gateway of Tally> Ratio Analysis


The Ratio Analysis screen is divided into two parts:

Principal Groups



Principal Ratios

The Principal Groups are the key figures that give perspective to the ratios.

Principal Ratios relate two pieces of financial data to obtain a comparison that is meaningful.

More:

Principal Groups and key figures

Principal Ratios

Payment Performance of Sundry Debtors

Principal Groups and Key Figures

Working Capital

The Net Working Capital is calculated by subtracting Current Liabilities from Current Assets. Financial Analystsoften consider the total Current Assets as the Working Capital. This serves as a measure of how far the firm isprotected from liquidity problems.

Cash in Hand and Bank Balances

This data presents another perspective on the liquidity position

Sundry Debtors

(due till today)

The total debtors and debtors that are due as on the date of the statement, are displayed

Sundry Creditors

(due till today)

The total creditors and creditors that are due as on the date of the statement are displayed.

Sales and Purchase Accounts

The Sales and Purchase Accounts, which collate the trading activity for the period, are displayed.

Stock in Hand

This field displays the stock in hand as on the date of the report and together with Cash and Bank Balances andDebtors, complete the Current Assets aspect of the Working Capital.

Nett Profit

This is derived from the Profit & Loss Account and is the profit after direct and indirect expenses.

Wkg. Capital Turnover

(Sales Accounts/Working Capital)

This is an activity or efficiency ratio that shows the number of times the working capital has been rolled overduring a particular period. It depicts how effectively the firm is using its working capital.

Inventory Turnover

(Sales Accounts/Closing Stock)

This is an activity or efficiency ratio that shows the number of times the stock has been rolled over during theperiod of the report. It depicts how effectively the firm is using its inventories.



Principal Ratios

You can compare Principal Ratios of your company over a period with industry averages as well as with ratiospertaining to other periods to assess current performance.

Current Ratio

(Current Assets: Current Liabilities)

Known as the liquidity or solvency ratio, this is the most frequently used for assessing the company’s capability ofmeeting its short-term obligations. More specifically, it elucidates a firm's ability to cover its current assets withcurrent liabilities.

Quick Ratio

(Current Assets-Stock in Hand: Current Liabilities)

Known as Acid-Test Ratio it concentrates on the liquid part of the current assets, leaving out the closing stock. Itused to measure a firm's ability to meet its current obligations. Stocks and inventories are the least liquid of allcurrent assets and if current assets comprise a high proportion of inventories, a firm may be considered lesssolvent.

Debt-Equity Ratio

(Loans (Liability): Capital Account + Nett Profit)

This is a gearing ratio that shows the extent to which long-term debt is helpful in financing the firm and shows theproportion of borrowed funds to owners' equity. The lower the ratio, the greater the amount of funds invested bythe owners. If the ratio is high it indicates that the borrowed funds are more than the own funds of the firm, whichmakes the firm less credit-worthy.

Gross Profit %

This represents the trading profit exclusive of indirect expenses and tax deductions, expressed as a percentage oftotal sales. It measures the efficiency of a firm's operations and indicates how products are priced.

Nett Profit %

This is the profit inclusive of all expenses (direct and indirect) except tax deductions, expressed as a percentage oftotal sales. It is a more specific measure of the efficiency of a firm's operations.

Both Gross Profit % and Nett Profit % put together provide an insight into a firm's operations and the role playedby direct and indirect expenses.

Operating Cost %

(as percentage of Sales Accounts)

This is the total cost inclusive of direct and indirect expenses except for tax deductions, expressed as a percentageof sales. A high ratio shows that even a slight rise in costs would be risky and might necessitate increase in price.



Receivable. Turnover in Days

(payment performance of Debtors)

It is an efficiency ratio that measures the quality of a firm's receivables and determines how successfully the firmcollects its debts. Receivable Turnover days is a figure that gives us the average number of days for which thereceivables are outstanding. It must be compared with the average credit policy of the firm.

Computation of Receivable. Turnover

Recv. Turnover in Days = (Closing Balance of debtors/Total Sales)*Number of Days

Return on Investment %

(Nett Profit/Capital Account+Nett Profit) %

Nett Profit is the profit after all expenses but before deduction of taxes. This is a profitability ratio that an investoris most interested in. The investor needs to know how much is earned on each dollar invested. If the investorfinds other avenues that give better returns, he will move his money out of the firm.

Return on Wkg. Capital %

(Nett Profit/Working Capital)%

This is another profitability ratio that ignores sunk costs in Fixed Assets and assesses how profitably a firm usesits net current assets.

Payment Performance of Sundry Debtors

Payment Performance of Debtors (Receivable Turnover in days) is the average time the customers take to actuallypay their bills irrespective of the outstanding balance on the statement date. It is quite possible that thereceivable turnover is low and the payment performance is high indicating that the customers cleared theiroutstandings, but took a long time doing it.

To get group level and customer level performance reports and a detailed position of debt collection, you have todrill down from the ratios. Use a customer statement that shows both the receivable turnover in days and thecustomer's actual payment performance.

The Ledger Payment Performance statement displays the receivable turnover in days as., 66.19. This is thebalance outstanding in relation to the total sales made multiplied by the total number of days in the period. Thisratio should be used in combination with the Average Performance of actual payments and the payment historyof the customer to assess how long he might take to pay the outstanding balance.

The Actual payment history is given in the table for each invoice that was paid by the customer. It shows when



the invoice was paid, how long it was due and what was the delay in payment. At the bottom, the customer'saverage performance is indicated.

Cost Centre Reports

For conceptual information on Cost Centres and Cost Categories, please look up the relevant chapters underAccounts Information.

Cost Centre Reports are primarily performance reports that throw a different perspective on transactions. Toaccess Cost Centre Reports

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display > Statement of Accounts> Cost Centres

N o t e : Set Maintain Cost Centres to Yes in F11: Features. Refer Cost Centres , Cost

Categories a n d Job Costing for more information.

More:

Cost Category Summary

Cost Centre Vouchers

Cost Centre Break-up

Ledger Break-up of a Cost Centre

Group Break-up of a Cost Centre

Job Work Analysis



Cost Category Summary

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Cost centers > Category Summary

Cost Category Summary displays the information on all cost categories to which you have allocated the vouchertransactions.

You can create any number of cost categories apart from the Primary one, which is the default. Each CostCategory has cost centres listed under it. The names in italics are cost centres that do not have any sub-costcentres. The names that are in normal fonts are cost centres that have sub-cost centres under them.

The debit and credit transaction totals and the closing balance for each cost category are displayed together withtheir breakdown consisting of cost centre summaries.

Cost Centre Vouchers

From the Cost Category Summary, drill down into a cost centre for monthly breakup of the figures.

Select a month to display the Cost Centre Vouchers pertaining to that month.

In the Cost Centre Vouchers use F2: Period to expand the date range if required and F1 : Detailed optionto drill down to access the original voucher.

To display more detailed cost centre vouchers, set the required options in F12: Configure .

The Cost Centre Vouchers screen is also accessible from all other Cost Centre Reports but the vouchers

displayed are only those that relate to the currently selected cost centre.



Cost Centre Break-up

Cost centre Break-up shows the ledger accounts that are used in vouchers, the cost centre they were allocated to,their total transaction values and the balance. If you consider only the revenue accounts, the Cost Centre break-up becomes the Profit or Loss statement of activities for the cost centre, and hence a powerful performancestatement.

To access the Cost Centre Break-up screen

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Cost Centers > Cost Center Break-up

1.

Select a cost centre, e.g. Octroi & Freight Expense (which belongs to the Primary Cost Category).2.

Click F1 : Detailed to see the ledgers.3.

The report will look as shown

Use the buttons on the button bar to view the report in the alphabetic order of ledger accounts.

A columnar Cost-centre breakup enables comparison of two or more cost centres and assessment of their relativeperformance.

Use New Column to bring up the data of another cost centre for comparison alongside. Drill down for furtherdetails.



Ledger Break-up of a Cost Centre

This provides you with another view of a cost centre report. It enables you to analyse the distribution of a ledgeraccount across different cost centres.

If you want to know the Conveyance Expenses incurred by different cost centres you need to view the Ledgerwise break up of cost centres.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statement of Accounts > Cost Centers > Ledger Break-up1.

Select a ledger account, say for e.g. conveyance2.


The total Conveyance Expenses allocated to different Cost Centres under Primary cost category are listed. If youhave more than one category it will also be listed.

Use the buttons on the button bar to view the report in alphabetic order. The columnar Cost-Break up of Ledgerallows you to compare how different cost centres makes use of two or more ledgers (e.g. expense accounts).

Use New C olumn to bring up another ledger account, say, Sales . The report will give you how much eachexecutive sold and how much he spent on running the motorcar. You will be able to judge their relativeperformance or even compare the data with that of another company.

Group Break-up of a Cost Centre

The Group break-up of cost centre gives you another view of a cost centre report by enabling you to analyse thedistribution of a group (of ledger accounts) across different cost centres.

If you want to know how Indirect Expenses were incurred by different cost centres, this is the report that youneed to look at.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Cost Centers > Group Break -up1.

Select a group account, say for e.g. Indirect Expenses2.


The total Indirect Expenses allocated to different Cost Centres under the Primary cost category is given. If youhave more than one category it will also be listed.

Use the buttons on the button bar to view the report in alphabetic order of group accounts.

The columnar Cost-Break up of group accounts allows you to compare how different cost centres make use of twoor more group accounts (e.g. expense accounts).

Use New Column to bring up another group of ledger account, say, Sales . The report will give you how mucheach executive sold and how much was spent on running the motorcar. You will be able to judge their relativeperformance or even compare the data with that of another company.



Outstandings and Credit Control

Receivables and Payables

Receivables and payables are the two key components of any company's working capital as well as its businessactivity. Receivables are part of current assets, whereas payables are of current liabilities. Both influence theshort-term liquidity and financing of the company considerably. Effective control of these outstandings isnecessary for the company to be financially sound. To view the Receivables and Payables screen

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display > Statement of Accounts > Outstandings


More:

Receivables (Bills Receivable)

F12: Configure Bill-wise Outstandings report

Payables (Bills Payable)

Outstandings Report of a Single Ledger Account

Age-wise Analysis of a Single Ledger Account

Outstanding Report for a Group

Age-wise Analysis for a Group

Reminder Letters

Reminder letters to a Group of ledgers

Receivables (Bills Receivable)

To view the Receivables screen

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Outstandings > Receivables


This report displays all outstanding receivables invoice by invoice till date. Remember that this report takes intoconsideration only those accounts that have Bill-by-Bill option activated.

Date

This is the Effective date of the invoice and not the actual date. Hence, if your invoice date is 15 November butthe effective date is 30 November, 30-Nov-05 will be displayed here. Credit period is calculated from effectivedate.

Reference Number

This is the Bill reference number that was entered in the Bill-wise Details.

Party's Name

The ledger name appears in this field.

Pending Amount

This is the outstanding balance on a particular invoice. To see the breakup, press SHIFT + ENTER .

If you want to see the breakup of all the bills, select the F1 : Detailed button. This toggles with the button F1 :Condensed .

Due On

This is the due date of the bill (with reference to the Effective date) specified during voucher entry.

Overdue by days

This is the period in days from the due date to the end date of the report. In the above example, the end date is2-Apr-2005.

Drill-down

You can drill down any invoice for further details.

Buttons

Print the report or e-mail it or use other buttons to configure, make a query or change the format of the report.



F12: Configure Bill-wise Outstandings report

The F12: Configuration screen for Bill-wise Outstanding Report appears as shown below.

Include Post-Dated Transactions?

Post-dated transactions are those, whose voucher dates are after the end date of the period of display.

If you set this option to Yes , you can have the post-dated transactions listed in the Outstandings report and learntheir effect.

In the above example, note that there is an additional column for Post-Dated Amount .

Show Bills in Foreign Exchange?

If this option is set Yes , the Bills Outstanding report will show only those bills raised in foreign currency. The billsraised in base currency will be excluded.

Show Over dues using Bill dates?

Set this option to Yes if you want to use the invoice dates instead of due dates for calculating overdue days.



The Age of Bill in days column shows the age of the invoices in number of days.

Age-wise Analysis

Select F6: Age wise from the button bar in the receivables screen.

Select either the option Ageing by Bill Date or Ageing by Due Date for Methods of Ageing.

Set the age periods required for the report. You can drill down to query the individual invoices.

Age-wise analysis for a ledger account or group of accounts is discussed separately.



Payables (Bills Payable)

To view the Bills Payable screen

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Outstandings > Payables

N o t e : Payables are treated exactly the same way as R e c e i v a b l e s.

F4: Payable in the Receivables screen helps you switch to Bills Payable report.

Outstandings Report of a Single Ledger Account

If you want to know the outstanding status of the bills of a particular party account, use the Ledger OutstandingsReport.

To view the Outstanding Ledger Account

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of accounts > Outstandings > Ledger1.

Select a ledger from the list. The Ledger Outstandings report displays2.

Detailed functionality available in this report, including F12: Configure and Age-wise Analysis is the same as thatavailable in Receivables .

You can produce Reminder Letters from the ledger Outstandings report.



Use the C ontact button on the button bar to view the address and other contact details.

Age-wise Analysis of a Single Ledger Account

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Outstandings > Ledger1.

Select the ledger account.2.

Select F6: Age-wise and one of the two methods of Ageing.

Ageing by Bill Date

Ageing by Due Date

3.

Set the age periods required for the report.4.

The aged bills report is produced accordingly. Drill down for more details on the individual invoices.



Outstanding Report for a Group

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Outstandings > Group1.

Select a group from the list, e.g. Sundry Debtors. The report displays the outstandings for the selectedgroup.

2.

You can tab down further into each account and configure the report using F12: Configure . You can view netamounts in this case to see the net balance outstanding for each ledger.

For a group that contains sub-groups the button F5: Led-wise is useful.

N o t e : The button F5: Led-wise toggles with Group-wise.



Age-wise Analysis for a Group

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Outstandings > Group1.

Select a group, e.g. Sundry Debtors.2.

Select F1 : Detailed from the button bar.3.

Click Age-wise and select one of the two Methods of Ageing: Ageing by Bill Date or Ageing by DueDate . Set the age periods required for the report.

4.

The aged bills report is produced accordingly. You can drill down for further details on the individualinvoices.

5.

Set the appropriate parameter in F12: Configure to view the Nett Balances.6.



6.

N o t e : You cannot print Reminder letters to a group from here. Use M u l t i - A c c o u n t

P r i n t i n g available in Gateway of Tally .

Reminder Letters


Select a ledger from the list.2.

Click the buttons Print from the button bar.3.


Print Reminder Letter

Set this option to Yes . In the Company Ageing Alteration screen that appears set, accept or modify the ageingperiod as the case may be.

Show Bills in Foreign Exchange

Here you can type Yes or No and accept.

When you are in the Print screen, press F12: Configure to change the contents of the reminder letter.



If you want to print Reminder Letters to a group of ledgers, you must use the Multi-account printing optionavailable in Gateway of Tally .

Reminder letters to a Group of ledgers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Multi-Account Printing > Outstanding Statements > Ledger > Group ofAccounts

Select the group for which reminder letters are required, e.g. Sundry Debtors.


This report is a Bill-wise details report that lists the outstanding bills for each ledger in the group.



Statutory Reports

To view the Statutory Reports:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports


N o t e : The Statutory Reports menu will appear depending on the Statutory features

enabled in F11:Features > Statutory and Taxation.

Cash and Funds Flow

Cash management is essential for any business. Many companies, as they go into liquidation, continue to makeprofits because of insolvency. Businesses shut down because of lack of cash despite being profitable. Cash andFund Flow Statements aid in cash management and are an important component of the management accounts.

More:

Cash Flow

Funds Flow



Cash Flow

Cash Flow Statement is a chronological account of the movement of cash in and out of the business and includesall cash transactions made with banks also. When used with the Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Account , theCash Flow Statement helps to assess the reasons for the differences between net income and net cash flow as wellas the effect of cash/non-cash investing and financing transactions.

To access the Cash Flow:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Cash/Funds Flow > Cash Flow1.

A Monthly Cash Flow Summary that shows the Cash Movement – inflow and outflow for each month and theNett Flow, displays.

2.

3.

Select a month and press Enter to drill down. Select the button F1 : Detailed from the button bar to seethe cash flow for that month.

3.

For Quarterly Cash Flow:

Change Period by pressing F2: Period and set the period, e.g., 1-4-05 to 1-12-05.

Select the option Auto Column from the button bar.

You can also select Quarterly (or Monthly or any other period) from the list

Columnar Cash Flow Statement



Funds Flow

While Cash Flow Statement is concerned only with cash, Funds Flow takes into account, the movement of theentire working capital. It includes rise and fall in inventories, creditors and debtors apart from cash and bank. Thestatement reveals the Sources of Funds and how they were applied.

To access the Funds Flow:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Cash/Funds Flow > Funds Flow1.

A Monthly Funds Flow Summary with the movement of working capital for each month displays. It showsthe Opening and Closing Balances of each month with a column for Funds Flow.

2.

Select a month and press Enter to drill down.3.

4.



3.

Select F1 : Detailed to see the funds flow for the selected month.4.

The bottom of the screen displays the movement in Working Capital.5.

You can drill down any line for further detail.

For Quarterly Funds Flow:

Change the period by pressing F2: Period1.

Set the period e.g., 1.1.04 to 1.5.04.2.

Select the button Auto Column from the button bar.3.

4.

3.

Else Select Quarterly (or Monthly or any other period) from the list4.



Reconciliation of Bank accounts

Reconciling the company's bank accounts with the banker's statement is a regular task of accounting. In Tally,Reconciliation of Bank Accounts facilitates the following:

Ability to ‘check back’ the correctness of reconciliation

Tally uses Bank Date to mark against the voucher.

For instance, if you issue a cheque on 8th April and your bank clears it on 19th April, you would set the BankDate for the voucher as 19th April. This means that when you need to 'check back' later, whether the entry madeby you is correct, you will only need to verify the bank statement of the 19th.

Recovering the reconciliation of any date

This is of crucial importance in Auditing . The Bank Reconciliation is one of the pre-requisites of auditing andverification of the correctness of accounts at the year end. However, it is not a 'real-time' task, meaning auditorsdo not do it on the first day of the next year.

For e.g., the reconciliation made on 31st March, should be 'viewable' even in August, by when almost all thecheques would have subsequently been marked Reconciled . Tally provides you with a facility of achieving thisalso.

Bank accounts may have a different Starting Date for reconciliation purposes. When you create a bank account,you are prompted to give an Effective Date for Reconciliation . Normally, this would be the Books Beginningfrom date itself. However, you could have imported data from a previous version of Tally or from any othersystem (where the reconciliation process was not available or was different). In that case, you may not want toreconcile the bank account with your bank statements from the very beginning. Give the date from which youwant the reconciliation facility to be active. Once you do this, previous entries would not appear for reconciliation,but would be taken as a reconciled Opening Balance.

A quick experiment with Reconciliation will show you what it all means. Here is how you go about it:

Bring up the monthly summary of any bankbook.1.

(You can choose a bank book from any of the following: Balance Sheet, Trial Balance, Display > Account Books >Cash/Bank Books).

Bring the cursor to the first month (typically April), and press Enter . This brings up the vouchers for themonth of April. Since this is a bank account, you can see an additional button F5: Reconcile on the buttonbar to the right. Press F5 .

2.

The display goes to the Reconciliation mode, which can be edited. The primary component of the currentscreen is the column for Bankers Date .

3.

The Reconciliation found at the bottom of the screen shows:

Balance as per Company Books

Amounts not reflected in Bank

Balance as per Bank

4.



The Balance as per Company Books reflects the balance as on the last date (in the example, it is 30th April).

The Amounts not reflected in Bank are the debit and credit sums of all those vouchers, whose Bank Date iseither BLANK , or LATER than 30-Apr (i.e. these vouchers have not yet been reflected in the bank statement).

The Balance as per Bank is the net effect of the Book Balance offset by the amounts not reflected in the Bank –which must equal the balance in the bank statement

N o t e : Some discrepancies may persist due to entries made in the bank statement,

which you have not yet entered in your books. You would reconcile these manually, and

print your reconciliation.

As you mark the individual vouchers by setting the Bank Date , you will notice that the Reconciliation at thebottom of the screen keeps updating the changes. Once this process is complete, press Ctrl + A or Enter asmany times as necessary to skip over the unmarked vouchers and accept the screen.

The next time you opt for reconciliation, the screen displays only those vouchers that remain unreconciled. Youcan also display vouchers that are already marked as reconciled, in case you need to edit the marking, by usingF12: Configure

Set Show Reconciled Vouchers also to Yes to see the reconciled vouchers.

N o t e : It is not possible to reconcile opening balance and can be done only with

available physical transactions.

Set Allow back dated Reconciliation to Yes to enter bank dates which are lesser than the Voucher date.

Press Alt+P or click on the Print button to print your reconciliation report.

Display Inventory Reports & Statements

Inventory in Tally operates in the same way as accounting with regard to displaying, modifying and printingreports. Tally generates inventory reports based on the vouchers entered to date. You can use the customisedreports to compare inventory data between different companies, periods of the financial year, and so on.

Highlight the item and press Enter to step down to the next level of detail in a report. Repeat this process till youreach an individual voucher. Similarly, step back to higher levels by pressing Esc. The special features availablefor the currently displayed report are indicated on the button bar and can be selected with a single click of themouse.

This section highlights some special inventory screens and illustrates a basic level of customisation.

More:

Viewing Stock Summary

Viewing stock items

Making a Stock Query

Analysis of Inventory Movements

Godown Summary (Location Summary)

Sales Bills Pending

Purchase Bills Pending



Viewing Stock Summary

Stock Summary is a statement of stock-in-hand as on a particular date. It is updated with every transaction inreal time and provides the current stock position.

The statement can be drilled-down, as with all Tally reports, and configured to enable you to view different details,for instance, the total flow of stock can be viewed with a single report.

Tally treats Stock Summary as one of the primary statements and makes it accessible directly from the Gatewayof Tally.

To view Stock Summary

Go to Gateway of Tally > Stock Summary1.

The default display is of Stock Group balances.2.

Select Detailed to show another level of detail.3.

The detailed report will include sub-groups or Stock Items (in cases where there are no sub-groups), displays asshown:

In the above illustration the stock groups Hardware and Software contain stock items and have closing balances.

The Stock Groups displays total quantities, as the unit of measure is the same for all the stock items added. Agrand total is also available as there is a single unit of measure for all 'addable' items. If there were different unitsof measure, then the grand total would not be calculated and displayed.

More:

Stock Flow (reconciliation)

Gross Profits – (Item and stock group profitability)

Stock Valuation Methods

Stock Group Summary

Stock Category Summary



Stock Flow (reconciliation)

You can configure the Stock Summary Statement to display the flow of goods.

Select F12: Configure while on the Stock Summary screen.1.

Set the configuration as shown.2.

The Stock Summary displays the flow of stock, i.e. Opening Stock, Goods Inwards, Goods Outward and ClosingStock, as shown.



The report is quantitatively reconciled, i.e., Opening quantity + Inward Quantity – Outward Quantity= Closing Stock Quantity . However, this is incorrect for the values as the Outward Value displays SaleValues, not Cost. The Closing Stock Value is, however, based on Cost and the Cost Method adopted foreach item. Value Reconciliation is possible if you are using Consumption figures instead of Sales Values..

Gross Profits – (Item and stock group profitability)

Stock Summary can also be expanded to show consumption and gross profits for each stock item.

Select F7: Show Profits or F12: Configure while on the Stock Summary screen.1.

Set Show Consumption and Gross Profits to Yes.2.

The Stock Summary report displays as shown.

The Outward Column shows Cost of Goods Outwards termed as Consumption and Gross Profit value andpercentage is displayed.

This statement is useful to analyse:



Profitability Analysis of Sales (Outwards)

Value Reconciliation of Stock

Stock Valuation Methods

The Stock Summary report with stock valuation methods can be used to view the effects of different methods onthe value of stock. Each stock item can be set up to have a different stock valuation method. In some instances, aparticular method of valuation may be required, for example, to assess the replacement value or saleable value ofstock. Tally displays stocks in any or all the valuation methods dynamically and simultaneously, without anycomplicated procedure.

Suppose you want to use Last Purchase Cost method to assess the replacement value and the Last Sale Pricemethod for realizable (saleable) value.

In the Stock Summary screen, select the New Column button on the button bar or press Alt+C. The screenappears as shown below.

Select Last Sale Price from the Stock Valuation Methods list.

The Stock Summary report with Last Sale Price column displays as shown:



More:

To view Ageing Analysis

Stock Group Summary

This report is available when Integrate Accounts and Inventory is set to Yes in the Company Featuresscreen.

It displays Opening and Closing Stock figures from the ledger account master, rather than the inventory records.Hence, it is possible that Stock Summary and the Stock Group Summary report display different figures.

Drill-down from Stock Group Summary to view the Stock Ledger account where you can manually key in theclosing balance for a given date. You can input closing stock figures for different dates.

To view Stock Group Summary:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Profit & Loss Account > Opening Stock (or Closing Stock)1.



2. Drill-down to the ledger Account to enter Closing Stock figures.

The date for the closing balance is the beginning from date and till date. If there is no date that follows the last,then that Closing Balance continues. A blank against a date signifies zero balance.

Stock Category Summary

To view Stock Category Summary:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Inventory > Categories1.

Select a Category, for example, Spreadsheets.2.

The Stock Category Summary lists the Closing Balances of all items belonging to the selected category. Drill-downfor Item Monthly Summary and Stock Voucher list. Use Show Profit for profitability analysis for the Items in theCategory.



Viewing Stock Items

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Inventory Books > Stock Item1.

You can also use the Stock Summary to view Stock Items. Place the cursor on the item and press Enter.

2. Select an item from the List of Items .

3. Select F12: Configure . Tab down the Configuration menu to Show with Graph? Type y and press Enter . Select Bar and No . The particulars display with a graph of Goods Inwards and Outwards (red for inwards, blue for outwards).

More:

Stock Vouchers



Stock Vouchers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Inventory Books > Stock Items1.

Select Item .2.

Select and drill-down for any month.3.

The list of stock vouchers for the current month displays as shown

This list of vouchers for a stock item is the lowest level of collated data. If you drill-down any further, you canview the actual voucher.

You can also access Stock Vouchers by drilling-down from statements such as Stock Summary.



Stock Query

Stock Query report provides you all the information about a particular item.

To create Stock Query :

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Inventory > Stock Query1.

Select an Item from the List of Items. Tally uses the Stock Category to display Items of the same Category.This feature helps you to ascertain the availability and location of alternative products to offer yourcustomer.

2.

3. Select F4:Item to switch to another item.



Additional Information:

Go to the Group Summary , select Software and press F12: Range to limit the display to Stock Groupshaving Closing Balance greater than 3000 .

1.

Explore the Locations report. Select On-site , click F1: Detailed , change the period: 1-5-05 to 31-7-05,and use Auto Column to bring up the month-by-month figures.

2.

Auto Column feature gives you the facility to check the stock status using different periods.3.

Bring up the initial display of each report and use Enter and Esc to drill-down through the levels of detailand back again.

4.

Analysis of Inventory Movements

The Analysis of Inventory Movements is generated for accounted transactions only, unlike Stock Summaries andother statements, where Goods Received but Bills not Received and Goods Dispatched but Bills notRaised are also considered. Thus Analysis statements, are used generally for a comparative study, and notconsidered authentic for Accounts or Inventory records.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Inventory Books > Movement Analysis

Analyse stock movements by stock groups, categories, financial group or ledger.

More:

Movement Analysis (Stock Group Analysis)

Item Movement Analysis

Item Voucher Analysis

Stock Category Analysis - Movement Analysis

Ledger Analysis

Transfer Analysis

Movement Analysis (Stock Group Analysis)

Movement Analysis of a selected stock group displays the Total Inward and Outward movement of all the itemsin a selected Stock Group . The quantities displayed are Actual Quantities of movement (which, in some cases,may be different from the Billed Qty in the transactions.) The 'Inward' detail displays the Effective Rate or FinalLanded Cost of the materials, after considering all overhead costs (see 'Valuation of Purchases'). If the EffectiveRate varies from the Basic Invoice Rate of the materials, it is highlighted. The Outward detail displays the BasicInvoice Rate and Value of goods sold/transferred out.



Item Movement Analysis

Gateway of Tally > Display-Inventory Books > Movement Analysis > Stock Item Analysis

Item Movement Analysis is the next level of information (press Enter on the Stock Item or Display InventoryBooks Stock Item Analysis ). This brings up the Party-wise/Transfer-wise detail of Movements. The Inwarddetail displays the Basic Invoice Rate and Effective Rate.

This report helps you compare Purchase Costs across different suppliers. For example, Supplier A may have alower Basic Invoice Rate as compared to Supplier B , though the Effective Rate may be higher (perhaps due todifferences in Taxes, Packing Costs, Freight Costs etc). Suppose a material is manufactured in-house as well aspurchased, the difference in Purchase Costs and In-house Costs can be checked. Select multiple columns fordifferent periods, to view the changes in the Effective Rate for purchases.

Press Enter on the Party Name or Stock Journal Name to display the transaction-level details on Date of goodsreceived/sold, Quantities, Basic Rates, Addl. Costs, and Effective Rate for each transaction..

The default screen displays the Addl.Costs (if any), in a single column. To view the spread of costs, press F12:Configure and select to view Show Addl. Costs . This brings up the bifurcation of all Additional Costs .



Item Voucher Analysis

This report gives the value details of all transactions for a selected stock item from a particular supplier or to aparticular customer. It is obtained from Movement Analysis Report of a stock item.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Inventory Books > Movement Analysis1.

Select Item from List.2.

Select a Supplier (or Customer) from the Item Movement Analysis .3.

The report displays every purchase from Tally Solutions, Bangalore during the period specified with break-down ofBasic Value and Additional Cost . To view full details of Additional Cost , press F12: Configure and set theoption.

The Item Voucher Analysis considers only billed transactions, not ones for which invoices have not been raised.

Use F12: Configure for more details.

Stock Category Analysis - Movement Analysis

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Inventory Books > Movement Analysis > Category Analysis1.

Select a category , for example, Spreadsheets.2.

Change period , if necessary.3.

The Stock Category Analysis statement displays the movement of Stock Items of a selected Stock Category.

The Inward and Outward movement of these two items are summarised in the Summary. Drill-down to bring upthe Item Movement Analysis for the selected item.



Ledger Analysis

Ledger Analysis is similar to Movement Analysis, except that you can view movements of the items for theselected Ledger (Party). Thus, you get an 'analysis' of all purchases made from a supplier, or all items sold to acustomer. The next level of information brings up the transaction-level details.

Transfer Analysis

When using different Stock Journals for each transaction, Transfer Analysis gives the movement details for eachtype of Stock Journal. This is a very useful costing and waste analysis tool. In non-manufacturing set ups, whichhave Multiple Godowns, this report becomes a quick check to verify that all transfer entries have been enteredcorrectly.



Godown / Location Summary

The Godown/Location Summary statement displays the Stock Summary for different Godowns/Locations .While the main Stock Summary shows the stock position for the entire company on a given date, theGodown/Location Summary is a statement of stock-in-hand at each location on a particular date.

The Godown/Location Summary is updated with every transaction and it provides the current stock position forany Godown/Location at any time.

This report can be drilled-down, as with all Tally reports, and configured to view different details. It is also possibleto view the total flow of stock for each location in a single report.

Experiment with the different buttons for this purpose.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Inventory > Godown/Location1.

Select Primary to view the summary for all Godowns/Locations . Alternatively, select a specificGodown/Location to limit information to that Location/Godown.

2.

The default display is that of Godown/Location Group balances. You can have sub-groups ofgodowns/locations, quite like sub-groups of stock items.

3.

Select Detailed for second level of detail.4.

4.

Place the cursor on Software and press Shift+Enter to expand the group



More:

Godown/Location Stock Flow/Reconciliation

Godown/Location Vouchers

Batch information in Summary Statements

Godown/Location Stock Flow/Reconciliation

The reconciled flow of goods at each location is available.

Select F12:Configure while in the Godown/Location Summary Screen

The Godown Summary statement displays the flow of stock: Opening Stock, Goods Inwards, Goods Outward andClosing Stock, at each location.



The statement is quantitatively reconciled, not monetarily, i.e., Opening quantity + Inward Quantity –Outward Quantity = Closing Stock Quantity.

However, this is not true of values because values do not add up in this manner. The Outwards value displays SaleValues, not Cost. The Closing Stock Value is, however, based on Cost and the Cost Method adopted for each item.

Value reconciliation is possible using Consumption figures, instead of Outward Values.

Press F:7 Show Profits to expand the Outwards Column for Consumption and Profit figures. Value Reconciliationis now possible using: Opening Value + Inward Value – Consumption Value = Closing Stock Value .

Columns

Use Columns to view stock balances of the Godowns/Locations on different dates/periods or other optionslisted in the Auto Columns options.

Even though you have selected a specific Godown/Location for display, you can still bring up information of theother godown(s)/location(s) in columns.

Select New Column or Auto-Column for such a display.

The above report is obtained by selecting:

New Column

Various reports are available from the Stock Item Monthly Summary , including different periodicity andAverage stocks. Drill-down an item in the Stock or Godown/Location Summary level to the Item MonthlySummary and use F12: Configure options.

Refer F12: Configure for Material Consumption Summary Report in Job Costing



Godown/Location Vouchers

1. Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Inventory > Godowns/ Locations

2. Select a Godown/Location .

3. Select Item.

Drill down through the entries for the Godown/Location Vouchers screen to appear. Godown/LocationVouchers is a list of all vouchers for a selected item that are related to the selected Godown/Location duringthe period of display. The relationship could be stock in/out of the particular location.

This statement helps you to list all transactions for a particular Godown/Location .

Batch Information in Summary Statements

To view the stock of batches of an item:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Stock Summary1.

This could even be the Godown/Location Summary.2.

Expand the Stock Group using Detailed or Shift+Enter till all the Items display.3.

Use Shift+Enter to reveal the Batches and their stock position.4.

Use F12: Configure to use Opening Balances, Goods Inwards and Goods Outwards.5.

Sales Bills Pending

Sales Bills Pending Report is generated when the option Tracking Numbers is set to Yes .

It lists out all instances of incomplete sales, where goods may have been delivered but not invoiced. It also listsinstances of invoices raised, but for which goods have not been delivered

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Inventory > Sales Bills Pending

The default report displays as shown.

Use Detailed to view the transactions.

Use F12: Configure to view the Initial Quantity.



N o t e : To drill down, bring the cursor on the voucher detail line and press Enter .

Purchase Bills Pending

Purchase Bills Pending Report is created when the option Tracking Numbers is set to Yes.

It lists all instances of incomplete purchases where goods may have been received, but not fully invoiced. It alsolists instances of invoices received, but for which goods have not been received

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Inventory > Purchase Bills Pending

The default report displays as shown.

For variations in the report, refer Sales Bills Pending .



Aged Stock Analysis (Ageing Analysis)

A very important function of Working Capital management is monitoring stocks. Money locked up in stocks canadversely affect the liquidity of a company and every company strives or should strive to reduce stock levels tothe optimum. Every business (except perhaps the liquor and antiques dealers) would prefer to dispose of olderstocks as they might deteriorate with time, go out of fashion, or simply get forgotten. Tally's aged stock analysisor Stock ageing enables you to know the age of stocks in hand according to when they were received and thepurchase value.

More:

How to view Ageing Analysis



How to View Ageing Analysis?

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Inventory Books > Ageing Analysis1.

Select the Group of Stock Items .2.

The Ageing Analysis report produces a default ageing period of <45 days, 45-90 days, 90-180 days and >180days. You can change the setting by using F6 . The default report displays stock values based on ActualPurchase invoice . Use Hide Amount to view the report without values as has been done above.

As Negative Stocks cannot be aged, they are shown in a separate column.

More:

Item Inward Details

Item Inward Details

Age Analysis is done for stock-in-hand based on when it was purchased. The Item Inwards details statementprovides further information of aged stock such as date of purchase and supplier, and allows drill-down to theactual transaction voucher.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Inventory Books > Ageing Analysis

Move the cursor to any of the age-wise columns (i.e., < 30 days, 30 to 60 Days, > 60 Days) for an item andpress Enter.

Scenario Management

Scenario management is a management tool that enables different displays of accounts and inventory relatedinformation, by selectively including certain types of vouchers without affecting the source data. It is useful ingenerating provisional reports, where entries are not actually made in the main books. It is also a usefulforecasting tool i.e. you can forecast the expenses using provisional Vouchers and include them in your reports.

The vouchers that are used in Scenario Management are:

Optional Vouchers

Memorandum Vouchers

Reversing Journals

This section shows you how to use the above-mentioned vouchers in Reports. You can create a number ofscenarios each including and/or excluding one or more types of voucher entry.

More:

Create a Scenario

Alter or Display Scenario Information

How to use Scenarios

List of Accounts (Chart of Accounts)

Exception Reports



Creating a Scenario

Set Use Reversing Journals & Optional Vouchers in F11:Company Features to Yes.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Scenario > Create

Give a suitable name to the scenario. In this case, it is Provisional.1.

Set Include Actuals to Yes2.

Set Exclude Forex Gains/Losses Calculations to Yes if you do not want the Unadjusted Forex Gain/Loss element to appear in the scenario

3.

Set Exclude Inventory Tracking Calculations to Yes if you do not want the Sales/Purchase Bills Pending4.

3.

element to appear in the scenario4.

Include5.

From the list of vouchers, include the type of vouchers required. Notice that it picks up the Voucher Typescreated for this company. Provisional Vouchers and Regular vouchers that are marked Optional are permittedfor selection.

6. Exclude

Exclude from the list of vouchers already included in the type of vouchers that you do not want to affect thisscenario. This option is used in Alter mode and hence is discussed under Alter/Display Scenario Information.

7. Accept to create this scenario.



Alter or Display Scenario Information

1. Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Scenario > Alter

2. Select the scenario to alter from the List of Scenarios

The information given while creating the scenario displays and you can alter it.

Exclude

Use the Alter mode when you do not want a selected included voucher to affect the scenario, anymore. It iseasier to put the selected voucher in the Exclude List, rather than to remove it from the Include List.

Using Scenarios

Create a Reversing Journal Entry for the scenario as follows.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F10: Rev Jrnl1.

Select Reversing Journals from the list.2.

Debit Depreciation and enter the amount3.

Credit Provision for Depreciation4.

Enter Narration if any.5.

6.



5.

Accept the Voucher.6.

More:

Display/Alter a Reversing Journal

Using Scenarios in Statements and Reports

Display/Alter a Reversing Journal

View or alter the reversing journal through the Reversing Journals Book under Exceptional Reports.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Reversing Journals1.

Select a month to list all the reversing journals for that month. Drill-down to view/alter the entry.2.



Using Scenarios in Statements and Reports

You can use scenarios in statements (not registers) that have the New Column button active.

Display the Balance Sheet .1.

Select New Column .2.

In the column details, tab down to Types of Values to Show .3.

Select the scenario named Provisional .4.

The Balance sheet displays as shown with two columns for the same date.

Note the Provision for Depreciation figures in both the columns. The actual column shows –18250 while theProvisional column shows –33250. This is on account of the reversing journal entry in the Scenario. To view, gothrough the Exceptional Reports Display Menu.

Use the same procedure to create another scenario for Sales Forecasts.

Create a new Scenario and call it Sales Forecasts .1.

Include Sales Vouchers Optional Only .2.

Create 12 Sales Vouchers, one in each month. Remember to mark them Optional .3.

View the Sales Accounts by drilling-down the Profit & Loss A/c .4.

Bring up New Columns and limit each column date range to the following month.5.

The Sales forecast figures must display.

N o t e : You could even use Memorandum Vouchers for this purpose, instead of the O p t i o n a l

v o u c h e r s . Memorandum Voucher s is discussed in the next section.



List of Accounts (Chart of Accounts)

A chart of accounts is created from an Accounts menu. To view an existing chart:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > List of Accounts

The List of Ledgers displays in alphabetical order of the main groups. Hence, Branch/Divisions is listed first, notthe account name Anil, which is under the group Capital. Note the indentation and change in font. The groups arein bold and begin on the extreme left; sub-groups are slightly indented towards the right and still in bold, while atthe lowest level it is the ledger account which is in italics.

Drill-down a ledger name to alter its details or use Shift+Enter to view the details.

Use the buttons to switch to their respective lists (these are all lists of different Masters):

List of Groups

List of Cost Categories

List of Cost Centres

List of Budgets

List of Locations

List of Stock Groups

List of Stock Items

List of Currencies

List of Units

List of Voucher Types



Exception Reports

Exception Reports track unusual transactions or balances.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports

The different kinds of Exception Reports are as shown.

More:

Negative Stock

Negative Ledgers

Overdue Receivables

Overdue Payables

List of Memorandum Vouchers

List of Reversing Journals

List of Optional Vouchers

Post-dated Vouchers

TDS Not Deducted

Negative Stock

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Negative Stock

This report displays a list of all stock items that have a negative closing balance at the end of a specified period.

If a negative balance occurs it is adjusted by a purchase so that the balance is not negative at the end of thedisplay period.

You can change the period using the Period button or use the auto column button to view the negative stockitems

You can use the drill-down feature or view Stock Item display for further details.

Negative Ledgers

This is a list of ledger accounts that have obverse balances, i.e., balances that are opposite to the nature of theaccount. For example, a creditor account with a debit balance and an asset account with a credit balance.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Negative Ledgers

Bank of Paris is a Bank account and is expected to have a debit balance. British Telecom is a Creditor/Supplieraccount and should normally have a credit balance.



Overdue Receivables

T his is a list of all invoices that are overdue as on current date.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Overdue Receivables

Ageing - use the Age-wise button.

Overdue Payables – use the Payable button.

Overdue Payables

T his is a list of all purchase bills that are overdue as on current date

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Overdue Payables



List of Memorandum Vouchers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Memorandum Vouchers

This is a list of Memorandum Vouchers entered during a period. Change the period as required.

List of Reversing Journals

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Reversing Journals

This is a list of Reversing Journals entered during a period. Change the period as required.



List of Optional Vouchers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Optional Vouchers

This is a list of all types of vouchers marked as 'Optional' during a period.

Post-dated Vouchers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Exception Reports > Post-dated Vouchers

This is a list of all types of vouchers that are marked 'Post-dated' within a given period.



Printing Reports

Reports and documents generated through Tally's extensive display capabilities can also be printed.

Printing is possible in two ways:

Using the Print (Alt + P ) button and1.

Multi-Account Printing2.

Using the Print (Alt + P) button

You can choose to print directly from the screen currently displayed by selecting the button PRINT (top-mostbutton on the right-hand side of the screen). This brings up the Print Configuration screen for the report and newbutton options on the right-hand side of the screen.

You can change and alter the settings in the print configuration screen

Printer – Click Alt + S (Select Printer) to change printer settings. This also displays the default paper size thatyou have set for the printer.

No. of Copies – Click Alt + C (Copies) to specify the number of copies to be printed.

Print Language – Set Enable Multilingual Support to Yes in F12: Configure and click Alt + L (PrintLanguage) to print in the language of your choice.

Method - Click Alt + F (Print Format) to select the print format. A pop-up list displaying the printing formatsavailable in Tally. The formats provided are, Dot-Matrix Format, Neat Format and Quick (Draft) Format. Hereyou can select either the pre-printed or plain paper to print out your reports

Pre-Printed / Plain Paper:

By default, the Printing Configuration screen is set to print on plain paper. The print-out displays as shown.

To print on a pre- printed invoice/ report, select Pre-printed (Alt+R ) and the Print Preview screen displays asshown.



Tally enables you to print the company details on the invoice/ report. You can toggle between the two options to

print using either method.

Page Range - Click Alt + G (Page Nos) to select the starting page number and the page number range.

Paper Type - The paper Type can be set after you select the printer.

Paper Size - By default, the paper size in Tally is set at 8.50 X 10.98 or 216mm X 279mm .

To alter the paper size to your requirements, select Alt+S (Select Printer) .

A list of printers displays.

More:

Print Format

Draft Mode Printing (Quick Format)

Printing TDS Form16A

Exporting eTDS Form

Printing TDSForm27A



Print Format

The Print Format button appears on the Print screen (after you press Alt+P or on clicking the Print button). Clickthe Print Format button and Tally displays a list of Print formats as shown.

Neat Mode and Quick/Draft print formats are compatible with most printer drivers installed on the WindowsOperating System. Dot Matrix Format in Tally is a special print format that allows you to print Tally reports in textformat using the speed of Dot Matrix printers.

Most GUI-based software’s do not provide Dot Matrix printing capabilities. However, Tally being a Windows-basedsoftware has a print format compatible with dot matrix printers. This makes printing reports from Tally as quickas its real-time report generation.

Select Dot Matrix Format. The screen displays as shown.

By default, Epson printer drivers are defined. Install Epson Printer drivers in Windows for any Dot Matrix printerand use this format to print reports quickly.

N o t e: Any Dot Matrix printer may be used, but ONLY Epson printer drivers (LQ and FX series)

should be used for Dot Matrix Format printing in Tally.

Multi-Account Printing

This option enables the printing of the primary Books of Accounts, like the Cash and Bank Books, AccountLedgers, Sales and Purchase Registers etc, without having to select the accounts one at a time and printing them .

Go to Gateway of Tally > Multi Account Printing.

Choose between the options – Account Books, Inventory Books, Day Book and Multi Voucher Printing .

You can select the date and other selections before printing.

Drill-down to Accounts Books, Outstanding Statements and Inventory Books and select the appropriatereports to print.

Change the common printing options by selecting the appropriate buttons on the right side of the screen.



For details , click Printing Reports .

Printing All Accounts

Go to Gateway of Tally > Multi-Account Printing > Outstanding Statements > Ledger > All Accounts

When Printing the Ledger Outstanding screen, if Show Contact Details is set to Yes , and Start Fresh Page foreach Account is set to No , the Contact Person and the Tel. No. fields are displayed below each LedgerAccount in the same page.



If Show Contact Details is set to Yes , and Start Fresh Page for each Account is also set to Yes , eachLedger Account displays on a fresh page, with the address appearing below the Ledger Name.

N o t e : The Contact Person, Tel. No. and the address should be entered in the Ledger Masters

for them to be displayed.

Draft Mode Printing (Quick Format)

Almost every report (except Cheques) can be printed in Draft Mode. The default behaviour of Tally is to print inNeat Mode. To alter this, press Alt+F and all subsequent reports will be printed in Quick Format until Alt+F ispressed again at the Printing screen. (The button equivalent for this is Quick Format).

Draft Mode imposes additional restrictions in printing, which you will quickly learn by experimentation. Afterselecting Draft Mode or Quick Format, click Alt+S to select the option Print to a File. Specify the name of theFile to output the data and select the Printer whose dimensions are to be used.

Collaborative Tally

Collaborative Technology in Tally extends the ability of a company to manage information across differentsoftware applications, offices, business partners and managers-on-the-move. The integration of other technologiesin Tally gives the user the benefit of exchanging data with other systems.

Collaboration enables the company to arrive at decisions quickly through faster exchange of data in a computernetwork and related environment. A higher profit is one of the advantages of using such technology in business.



Export of Data

Use Export option to export reports and statements from Tally. The exported reports can be viewed in aspreadsheet, published on the web or exported to another company using Tally.

Open a report or a statement and click the Export button or use ALT+E . The export screen displays Export?Yes or No .

Press Backspace or Esc or No to navigate through the fields and alter the parameters.

Language

This option enables you to export your reports in English or any Indian language.

On selecting Default (All Languages) you can export your reports in any of the Indian languages. However, thedisplay language has to be set to the respective Indian language.

On Selecting Restricted (ASCII Only) you can export your reports in English.

N o t e : If you have used the option Restricted (ASCII Only) to export reports of a

company created in any of the Indian languages, then the exported values will appear

with question marks.

Format

Tally has four formats for export of data:

ASCII (Comma delimited)

Excel (Spreadsheet)

HTML (web-publishing)

XML (data interchange)

By default, the exported file will be saved in the Tally folder on your computer. To export to a different folderenter the path of the drive and folder in Output File Name . Another program can be used to import the contentfrom the exported file or it can be used as is.



More:

Export Master Data

Export Formats

Tally has four formats for export of data.


Excel (Spreadsheet)




In Tally all reports can be exported to ASCII by selecting ASCII (Comma delimited) format from the exportFormat screen. This feature enables the user to export any report generated by Tally into plain text format withvalues separated by commas. This format is commonly used for email and several other programs.

Excel (Spreadsheet)

In Tally all reports can be exported to Microsoft Excel spreadsheet by selecting Excel (Spreadsheet) option fromthe export Format screen. This feature enables the user to export any report generated by Tally into Excel. Consequently, the user can generate graphical representations of the data for better visual presentation.

N o t e : Export to Excel is compatible with Microsoft Office 97 or higher.

Export with Formatting/ Colour (Only in Excel format)

Reports can be exported from Tally to Excel with or without all the formatting and background colour as it appearsin Tally. These options can be defined on the Report Generation screen.



N o t e : If Excel (Spreadsheet) Formatting is set to N o, the report cannot be exported

with background colour.

T i p s : Export to Excel works faster if formatting is not included for export.


In Tally all reports can be exported to HTML format by selecting HTML (web-publishing) from the export Formatscreen. Reports in Hyper Text Markup Language (HTML) format retain their formatting and fonts. They can beread using an HTML-enabled mail program, or using browsers such as Microsoft Internet Explorer.

Resolution (Only in HTML format)

Resolution is based on the pixels used to format the report. A higher resolution gives a better quality of output.The Resolution option is available only in HTML format in Tally.


In Tally all reports can be exported to XML format by selecting XML (data interchange) from the export Formatscreen. Extensible Markup Language (XML) is an extension of HTML, but the data can be imported by other XML-aware systems. Using XML, Tally allows the user to exchange information even with systems that do not run Tally.An XML file from Tally has an XML envelope and is formatted with XML tags, to enable import into other systems.The destination system requires re-formatting of XML Style Sheets (XSLT), based on the inherent style used inTally before importing the data. When two systems are running different versions of Tally, XML data can bedirectly imported using the import menu option, without any re-formatting.

Export Master Data

Master Data from Tally can be exported to standard formats like ASCII, Excel, HTML and XML using the exportfeature. The exported data can be used by other programs.

To export Masters from Tally, go to Gateway of Tally > Display > List of Accounts1.

Use Alt+E or click Export on the button bar. This displays the Report Generation screen. Press Backspace orEsc or No to change the default values.

2.

Language

Select the language in which you would like the data to be exported.

Format



Select from the four formats available.


Excel (Spreadsheet)



Output File Name

Enter the name of the file in which the exported master will be saved. By default the file will be saved in the Tallyfolder in your computer. To export to a different folder, enter the path in Output File Name (Example:C:\differentfolder\filename).

Type of Masters

Select the Masters from the list.

Import of Data

Data can be imported to Tally from other users of Tally. Tally can also be programmed to import data from othersystems to be used as an integrated system.

For example, a Customer Contact Management Program, with details such as status of an order and last contactestablished, can be imported to Tally. This imported data can be merged into a report containing outstandingbalances. When data is changed in the other system, the change is also reflected in Tally.

To import data, Go to Gateway of Tally > Import of Data

More:

Masters

Vouchers

Synchronization



Import Formats

Only the Tally XML format is supported for import of Data in Tally.

Tally (XML) Format

This option imports data in XML format. More on XML.

Import of Masters

Masters from another company can be imported to Tally and merged with the data of the current company.

N o t e :

* Load and activate Company before importing data.

* Export the data from another company before importing it.

To import masters,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Import Masters.1.

The Import of Data screen is displayed.

Enter the full path of the file in the Import File Name field. Example: C:\tallyrel1.11\DayBook.xml . 2.

Select the appropriate option in the Treatment of entries already existing field from the Behaviour menu.

Combine Opening Balances – Select this to combine the opening balance of the imported masters withthe opening balance of the current company.

Ignore Duplicates — Select this to ignore duplicate entries from the imported data. When importedentries are the exact replicas of entries in the current company, they are called duplicate entries.

Modify with new data — Select this to add new data from the imported master to the current companydata.

3.

Enter to Accept .4.

Open Tally.imp file located in the Tally folder in Notepad to view log of import activities. 5.



Import of Vouchers

This feature allows the import of vouchers from earlier versions of Tally and other users of Tally. Voucher data canbe imported from other programs using XML.

To import vouchers,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Import Transaction > Vouchers.1.

Only the Tally XML format is supported for import of Vouchers in Tally.

Import File Name – Enter the path of the drive and folder where the file to be imported exists.2.



Synchronization

Synchronization is the replication of data between two or more locations that use Tally. Data can be sent over theInternet, or in a private network system. Tally offers control over the frequency of replication. Data can bereplicated after each transaction or updated at specific intervals.

Synchronization takes place in a Client-Server environment and can be initiated only by the client. Data from theclient is transferred to the server and from the server to the client.

Replicating data is a single-click activity in Tally once Synchronization is set up between a server and its clients.

More:

Tally Link Server

Direct Synchronization

Synchronization Using Tally Link Server

Tally Link Server is a service under Tally Internet Services that allows you to synchronize data without worryingabout the Fixed IP.

In a network environment, The Tally Server instance connects to the Tally Link Server, available on a public IP ona predefined port. The Tally Client instance connects to the Tally Link Server and communicates with the targetTally Server instance as long as the Tally server remains connected to the Tally Link Server

The destination Tally Server instance is identified using its unique TallyLinkId.

Thus, even if you have a dynamic IP on the Tally Server, you don’t need to change anything on the Client. Just logon to the Tally Link Server and stay connected.

The figure below depicts the complete picture:



Set Up for Synchronization

On Client Computer

Open Tally.ini file in the client computer and insert this line: clientserver=client1.

Execute Tally2.

F12: Configure> Connectivity> Sync Configuration.3.

TallySync Configuration

Ignore Server’s modified Voucher Type Masters?

To modify the client’s Voucher Type Masters during synchronization set this field to Yes.

TallyLink Configuration

Use TallyLink?

The field, Use TallyLink? , is set to No by default. If using the Tally Link Server, set this field to Yes.

TallyLink ID

Enter TallyLink ID to register against your serial number. This Id is required for the identification on theTallyLink Server (TallyLink id can be a Tally Serial Number of the client machine or any name which will beregistered against the serial number).

On Server Computer

Open Tally.ini file on server computer and insert the following line: clientserver=server1.

Serverport = 20000 (any port between 1 to 64000, whichever is open. Note that the first 1000 to 1500 portsare standard ports, which must be avoided).

1.

Execute Tally .2.

From Gateway of Tally> F12: Configure> Connectivity> Sync Configuration3.

TallySync Configuration

Ignore Client's modified Voucher Type master?

To modify the server’s Voucher Type Masters by the client after synchronization set this field to Yes .

Enable Sync Logging (SockReq.log)

To log all requests and responses in a file called sockreq.log set this field to Yes . This will help when debuggingthe sync process.

Truncate previous log before Syncing

This field appears only on setting Enable Sync Logging (Sockreq.log) to Yes . Setting Truncate previous logbefore Syncing to Yes will delete the previous logs before logging in to the current session.

TallyLink Configuration

Use TallyLink?

Set to Yes to select Tally Link Server for syncing type

TallyLink ID

Enter TallyLink ID to register against your serial number.

Connect to TallyLink Server

Set to Yes to establish a connection between the TallyLink Server and the remote Tally clients. (The ConnectButton appears in the button bar. On opening the same screen next time use the Connect Button to connect toTallyLink Server)

Connect on Startup

Set to Yes to connect to the TallyLink server on startup



Accept the Tally Sync Configuration screen. Click on Connect button on the button bar or press ALT+N toconnect to TallyLink server. If TallySync and TallyLink information are found correct, the following messagedisplays in the calculator pane:

TallyLink ID

For both the server and client, who want to use the Sync feature through Tally Link Server, it is mandatory thatthey register a TallyLink ID (Alias name) for their copy of Tally. TallyLink ID is a unique identifier used by TallyLink Server to identify all the connected Tally instances.

To connect to the Tally Link Server for the first time, specify a TallyLink ID and send it to the server. The LinkServer checks for the TallyLink Id in its database. If available, assigns the TallyLinkId to that particular Tallyinstance. This TallyLink ID is stored against the Tally Serial No. If the TallyLink ID is not available (the specifiedTallyLink ID has already been assigned to someone else.), a TallyLink ID already exists message displays.

On all subsequent connections /requests, the TallyLink ID is verified against the Tally Serial No, authenticated andauthorized.



Creating a Rule

Select the company whose vouchers are to be synchronized. Ensure that the company is kept open on both theclient and the server computer. Create a new Client Rule on the client computer and specify the following:

Company name on the server,

Server details

Synchronization details.

Gateway of Tally > Import of Data > Synchronization > Client Rules > Create

The details of the screen are mentioned below :

Name of Rule



Specifies the name for the client rule. Any name can be entered as long as such rule does not exist in thecompany.

Use TallyLinkServer

Specifies if Tally Link Server is used for synchronizing. Type Yes to select Tally Link Server.

Server TallyLink Id

Enter the Server TallyLink Id specified on the server computer.

Type of Rule

This indicates the type of operation to be performed; the available options are Synchronize and UploadTransaction. If Tally Link Server is selected, this option defaults to Synchronize and cannot be changed.

Company Name on Server

Enter the name of company on the server computer with whom the sync is to be performed.

Synchronize Altered Transactions

To send altered transactions to remote clients set this option to Yes.

Sync over slow connection

If this option is set to Yes, Tally will send the vouchers in multiple small batches rather than in one big batch andwill not time out if the connectivity is poor. This option must be set to Yes in most cases.

If this option is set to No, the sync process takes a longer time as data are sent in multiple batches.

Company GUID on Server (Read-Only)

Displays Company's Globally Unique ID

Current TID (Read-Only)

Displays the creation ID of the last synchronized voucher of the remote company. This id is generated to identifynew transactions created at the remote end.

Altered TID (Read-Only)

Displays the altered ID of the last synchronized voucher of the remote company. This ID is generated to identifyaltered transactions at the remote end.

Is Active (Read-Only)

Displays Yes if the Client Rule has been activated by the server.

Remote Alter State (Read-Only)

Specifies whether Synchronize Altered Transactions is Yes or No on the server side for that particular client rule.

Creating a Server Rule

Go to Gateway of Tally > Import of Data > Synchronization > Synchronize.

A request is sent to the server from the client computer to create a Server Rule corresponding to the Client Rule.A Server Rule is created implicitly whenever a Client Rule synchronizes with the server.

N o t e : You cannot create a Server Rule manually.

You can see the status of synchronization in the Calculator pane in Tally on the client machine. If you do notreceive an error message in this pane, the Server Rule has been created successfully

N o t e : The Server Rule is in encrypted form.

Activating Server Rule

Once the Server Rule is created it has to be activated on the server computer.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Import of Data> Synchronization > Server Rules > Activate

You can now Sync from the client computer to transfer your vouchers.

Altering the Server Rule

Go to Gateway of Tally > Import of Data > Synchronization > Server Rules > Alter

A List of Rules is displayed. Select the relevant rule. This will display the Server Rule Alteration screen.

The fields displayed in this screen will be in a read only mode except for Is Active and Synchronize AlteredTransactions? .



Process of Synchronization

Ensure that the client computer and the server computer are connected to the Internet during the synchronizationprocess.

On the server computer : Start Tally > select the company (into which vouchers are to be synchronized fromthe client machine) > F12: Configuration > Sync configuration > Press the Connect Button.

On the client computer: Start Tally > Select the company from which vouchers are to be synchronized >Gateway of Tally > Import of Transactions > Synchronization > Synchronize.

While synchronizing from the client computer the following message displays in the Calculator panel: Sync. Startat (time) and Sync End at (time). This ensures that the Client Rule has been synchronized successfully.

Activate server rule on the server computer :

Ensure that the company is kept open in the server computer.



From Gateway of Tally > Import of Transactions > Synchronisation > Server Rules > Activate

This displays the name of the Client Company and link ID. Set Is Activate and Synchronize AlteredTransactions to Yes .

Is Active?

Displays the status of the client rule at the server end.

Synchronize Altered Transaction?

Specifies if synchronization of altered transactions is to be done.

On the client computer: Start Tally > Select the Company (from which vouchers are to be synchronized to theserver machine) > Import of Transactions from Gateway of Tally > Synchronisation > Synchronize.

On the client computer, a message displays on the Calculator panel: Sync. Start at (time) and Sync End at(time) .

This completes the synchronization process.



View Synchronized Vouchers

To view the synchronized vouchers, select Display > Day Book from Gateway of Tally in both server and clientcomputers.

Server Computer:

Client Computer:



All the vouchers from the client replicates to the server. Next time, on opting for Sync , the synchronizedvouchers will not be posted. However, the new and the altered vouchers from both the client and server will getupdated on the respective computers.

Ensure that the vouchers are not deleted after synchronisation. In case of deletion, ensure that it is done on boththe sides (i.e., server and client computers).

On canceling the voucher, the change is updated accordingly at both the ends.

Direct Synchronization

Direct Sync is synchronization between a server and a client. Direct Synchronization can be over a LAN, WAN, theInternet or between two instances of Tally running on the same machine. It is usually done using a separateserver The Tally Link Server is not used for Direct Synchronization.

To enable this feature contact any of the nearest Tally Offices or send an email to [email protected]

The server version of Tally must be installed on the server computer and client version on the client computer,before proceeding.

N o t e : Synchronization can be initiated only by the client.

Direct Synchronization between Client and Server

Direct Synchronization can be between two different entities/organizations or between the head-office andbranches of an organization.

Assume that ABC Company maintains your accounts. You can Transfer data from your company to ABC Companyusing Direct Sync, provided ABC Company has a server version of Tally installed and can connect over a network.Other clients of ABC Company can also connect and transfer their Tally data. Here, ABC Company is the serverand other entities that are synchronizing their data, are clients.

Direct Synchronization can also be implemented between the Head Office and Branches of an Organization. Thus,when synchronizing between the Head office and Branches, the Head office must have a server version of Tallyinstalled and connect over a network to the Branches. The Branches must have client versions of Tally installed.



Enable Direct Synchronization

To check whether Direct Sync is Enabled?

Go to Gateway of Tally> F12: Configure > Licensing > Add-ons

If you have installed a client copy of Tally and have enabled Direct Sync, then you will see Direct Clientdisplayed. If you have installed a server copy of Tally then both Direct Client and Direct Server are displayed.

Configuring Tally.ini file for Direct Sync

Open the Tally.ini file in notepad from the Tally installed folder.

For Client:

Enter Clientserver = client in the file and save. This specifies that Tally is to be run in client mode.

For Server:

Enter Clientserver = server in the file. This specifies that Tally is to be run in server mode.

Enter the TCP/IP Port number of the server and save.

Configuring Synchronization

On Client Computer

Open Tally and select a company.

Go to Gateway of Tally> F12: Configure > Connectivity> Sync Configuration to display the TallySync Configuration screen.

Set Yes in Ignore Server’s modified Voucher Type Masters? field if you do not want to replace theoriginal transaction after synchronization. Set No if you want the transaction to be replaced by the modifiedtransaction from the server.

By default, Use TallyLink? field is set to No .

On Server Computer



Open Tally on the server and select a company.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Connectivity> Sync Configuration to display the TallySync Configuration screen.

Set Yes in Ignore Client’s modified Voucher Type Masters? field if you do not want to replace theoriginal transaction after synchronization. Set No if you want the transaction to be replaced by the modifiedtransaction

By default, Use TallyLink? field is set to No .

Creating a Rule

Creating a Client Rule

Go to Gateway of Tally> Import of Data > Synchronization > Client Rules > Create

Name of Rule - In this field, enter a name for the rule you are creating. You cannot enter an existing ClientRulename.

N o t e : By default, the Use TallyLinkServer ? field is skipped when you use Direct Sync



.

Server URL - Enter the uniform resource locator (URL) of the server. This is the IP address/Name of the Tallyserver. Example: (192.168.1.206/ Localhost). Enter the TCP/IP port number of the server preceded by a colonafter the URL.

N o t e : By default, the synchronization port in Tally is 9000. Change the parameters in

Tally.ini file to change the port number

Secure Server? - Enter Yes in this field if you are synchronizing to a secure server. Entering Yes here gives youthe option to enter your user name and password.

User Name - Enter the user name you use to connect to the server.

Password - Enter the password for the specified user name.

Use Compression? - Enter Yes in this field to compress the data that you send to the server. Use this option toreduce the size of data files which synchronize and transfer data.

Type of Rule - Select Synchronize from the Rule Types menu.

Company Name on Server – Enter the name of the company on the server that you want to synchronize.

Synchronize Altered Transactions? – Set this option to Yes to synchronize back dated/altered transactionswith the server.

Sync over slow connection? – If you have a slow speed Internet connection like a dial-up connection, set thisoption to Yes . The time taken to transfer data could be more but data transfer will be efficient.

The following fields are Read Only:

Company GUID on Server – When you synchronize, Tally creates a Globally Unique Identifier (GUID) on theserver. This GUID is displayed here.

Current TID – This is the Current Transaction Identifier field and it displays the number of voucherstransferred.

Altered TID – This is the Altered Transaction Identifier field and it displays the number of vouchers alteredand transferred from the server to the client.

Is Active – This field shows if synchronization is activated on the server.

Remote Alter State – This field displays only if the Synchronize Altered Transactions field is set to Yes onthe server for a particular Client Rule.

Creating a Server Rule

Refer Creating a Server Rule for more details.



Synchronization Completed

Go to Gateway of Tally > Import Transactions > Synchronization > Synchronize from the Clientmachine to start the synchronization process.

The Calculator pane displays Sync. Start at and Sync. End at message.



View Synchronized Vouchers

You can view the synchronized vouchers from Gateway of Tally > Display > Daybook or Gateway ofTally >Display > Statements of Accounts > Statistics

Synchronization transfers vouchers along with the masters from the client computer to the server computer.Vouchers in the server computer will be replaced by modified vouchers from the client computer if theIgnore Client’s modified Voucher Type Masters? field is set to No on the server.

Vouchers for the company in the server computer will be transferred back to the client computer in anotherinstance of synchronization by the client.

Here, the vouchers in the client computer will be replaced by modified vouchers from the server if theIgnore Client’s modified Voucher Type Masters? field is set to No on the client machine.



Tally ODBC

Data can be accessed from any application using Open Database Connectivity (ODBC). Tally uses ODBC toconnect to other programs and exchange data dynamically.

Ensure that MS-Query is installed in the system in which you will be installing Tally. This enables ODBC as soonas Tally is installed.

The ODBC server automatically displays on the Calculator pane.

More:

Outward Connectivity

Inward Connectivity

Outward Connectivity

Outward Connectivity is to connect directly to send data from one program to another, without any programming.It allows the user to extract data from Tally and send it to other programs such as Microsoft Word or Excel.

Outward Connectivity features:

Print labels for greeting cards from ledger addresses stored in Tally.

Create templates for report and forms such as audit reports and Schedule VI forms and plug in data fromTally.

Use popular programs in Tally’s open database, thereby giving you the flexibility to create your reports withup-to-date data from Tally.

More:

Tally ODBC with Microsoft Word

Tally ODBC with Microsoft Excel



Tally ODBC with Microsoft Word

Consider the following scenario. A company wants to send greeting cards to its customers. It can use the namesand addresses of customers, stored in the Tally database to print labels. The steps to be followed are:

Start Tally and keep it open till the Mail Merge process is completed.

Ensure ODBC Server is displayed on Tally’s calculator pane.

Open MS Word.

Click on Tools > Mail Merge from the Menu bar.

From Main Document, click Create > Mailing Labels.

Click on Active Window.

In the Mail Merge Helper dialog box, click on Get Data > Create Data Source. Click on MS Query…from the Create Data Source dialog box.

Select TallyODBC from the Microsoft Query screen.

Query Wizard displays fields from Tally. Select Ledger and click the “>” button to select fields required inthe query.

The screen appears as:

Use the Filter Data dialog box to limit the data to suit your requirement.

Sort the data in ascending or descending order in the Sort Order dialog box.

Click on Finish to complete the Query process.

Click on Set Up Main Document.

In Create Label dialog box, click on Insert Merge Field to insert the fields and click OK.




Click on Merge from Mail Merge Helper dialog box to create mailing labels in a new document.


Tally ODBC with Microsoft Excel

Tally ODBC extracts data from Tally and designs the reports in MS Excel. The steps to be followed are:

Start Tally and keep it open till the Mail Merge process is completed.

Ensure ODBC Server is displayed on Tally’s calculator pane.

Open MS Excel.

Click on Data > Get External Data > New Database Query from the Menu.

Select TallyODBC from the Choose Data Source dialog box.


Query Wizard displays fields from Tally. Select and click the “>” button to select fields required in yourquery.




Use the Filter Data dialog box to limit the data to suit your requirement.

Sort your data in ascending or descending order in the Sort Order dialog box.

Click on Finish to complete the Query process.

Click on OK from the Returning External Data to Microsoft Excel dialog box to display the selectedcolumns on the Excel sheet.


Inward Connectivity

Inward connectivity integrates other systems with Tally to use data in them. Tally can be programmed for inwardconnectivity. This allows using data from other systems in Tally by creating an integrated system.

For example, a customer contact management program containing details like status of an order and last contactmade can be brought in Tally and merged in a report containing outstanding balances. Changes in the data in theprogram is immediately reflected in Tally.

To connect to other programs and use external data in Tally, you can contact any of the nearest Tally Offices orsend an email to [email protected]

E-capabilities

Exchange of data in a network is the order of the day in the world today. Import and export of data over a LAN orthe Internet is a common feature in most organizations. E-Capablities is the ability of a softwareapplication/program to exchange data over a network.

Tally has a broad range of E-Capabilites that allows you to E-mail data and publish reports and documents on theweb.

E-Capabilities requirements:

An Internet connection. It can be a dial-up, cable, ISDN, DSL or satellite connection.1.

An E-mail account to use the E-mail feature in Tally.2.

A Uniform Resource Locator (URL) address to publish on the web, as well as the rights to upload files.3.

More:

E-mail

Web Publishing



E-mail (Electronic mail)

The E-mail is the most widely used facility on the Internet. It saves time and cost of postage. Use the emailfeature in Tally to:

E-mail any Tally report or document like invoices or purchase orders

Post reminder letters and statement of accounts

The following example illustrates the use of this feature in Tally:

E-mail a Reminder Letter

To send a reminder letter to a customer by email:


Select the customer’s/company’s ledger from the List of Ledgers2.

Click on Email from the button bar or press Alt+M3.

3.

The fields on the Mailing Ledger Outstanding form are automatically completed if you have given therequired information during creation of the master records. Select No or press Backspace tochange/modify the entries. Select Yes to accept.

4.

The E-mail Server field is highlighted next. This is a mandatory field. The first time you use this feature inTally, enter the name of your SMTP server, example: mail.btinternet.com. Subsequently, Tally willautomatically display the SMTP server name. Refer to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or networkadministrator for further queries.

5.

The From field displays the name of your company entered in the Company Creation screen and stored inthe Company Information Master records. You can also modify the default information. Press Enter.

6.

The From E-mail Address field displays the e-mail address entered in the Company Information Masterdata. Enter your email address, if you have not done so while creating a company, or if you want to changethe id.

7.

Enter the user name and password in Authentication User Name (Only if required) and Password fieldrespectively if the mail server requires authentication.

8.

In the Format field a pop-up screen lists the three formats in which you can generate your email:9.






9.

Select the type that suits your recipient.

To E-mail Address field is a mandatory field.10.

It displays the recipient's email address as entered in the Mailing and Related details during ledgercreation. Enter the address if you have not done so while creating the ledger or if you want to modify theinformation.

Type the email address of another recipient to whom you want to send a carbon copy of the email in the CC(if any) field.

11.

The Subject field is filled by default and displays the subject of your mail. You can change it to a subject ofyour choice.

12.

Any text you enter in the Additional Text field precedes the report in the recipient’s mail program. You canuse this field to type a message to the recipient.

13.

Additional Options provided in the form are:

Include Post-Dated Transactions?- Set this option to Yes to include post-datedtransactions.

14.

Show overdue using Bill Date?- Set this option to Yes to show bill date in report.

Range of Bills to show:- Select all bills or overdue bills to display.

Format:- Select condensed or detailed format for your reminder letter.

Show Qty Info in Detailed Format?- This option is selected for the detailed format modeand displays quantity.

Show bills of the following type:- Select the types of bills from all, credit or debit bills.

N o t e : Additional Options may vary depending upon the type of report you want to email.

Print Preview: Use the Print Preview screen to view the document before emailing. This shows how thedocument appears in the recipient’s email.

15.



Web Publishing

All reports and documents generated in Tally can be published on your website. Tally can create reports in HTMLformat and upload the same directly to your website. For example, use this feature to inform your customersabout the new price-range and stocks available for sale on your website. Tally uses the highest standard of dataencryption methods to ensure security of data.

Uploading Reports on the Website

A website is a specific directory space allotted to you on that server. Protocols are set of rules and specificationson how data and files are transferred over a network. They cover all aspects of communication betweencomputers including content, formatting and error control.

To publish a report, statement or data generated in Tally, upload it to an Internet Server that has been configuredto accept files in the specific protocols.

Example: To publish your company’s balance sheet on your website:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Balance Sheet .1.

Click the Upload button from the button bar or press Alt+O.2.

The first time you upload, you will have to enter the required information on the screen displayed. The fieldUpload to has two options:

3.

3.

FTP Site

Web Page (HTTP/HTTPS)

FTP Site

This site accepts files transfers in File Transfer Protocol (FTP). FTP is a common choice for data or filetransfer to a website. Select this option unless your site accepts HTTP or HTTPS uploads.



Web Page – HTTP/HTTPS

Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the standard for transferring HTML files over the Internet. HTTPServers are pre-programmed to accept HTTP connections. HTTPS sites are servers configured to acceptsecure connections. They conform to standard security protocols (example: SSL and SET) to ensure thatyour data and files are not tampered during an upload.

Use this if your server is set up for HTTP/HTTPS or else select FTP.

URL: Universal Resource Locator (URL) is the server address where you want to publish your report. ForFTP, you will need to know the FTP server name and directory path. The FTP server name is the domainname of the Web server (example: ftp.server.com). The directory path is the folder on the server where thereport is stored (example: /public_html). For a web page, an URL is typically in the form www.myweb.com/.

4.

Secure Server: This option displays when you select Web Page in Upload to field. Use a secureconnection when the data is sensitive and your server is configured for it. A secure site is one that hasalphabet s following http (https) and the URL in the address bar of your browser displayshttps://www.______.com.

5.

User Name (if any): Enter the user-name you need to access the server for uploading. 6.

Password (if any): Enter the password7.

N o t e : Internet servers authenticate your identity before you can put data and files on

the site. If you are unsure about your user name, password, or FTP location, contact

your Internet Service Provider (ISP).

Format: You can generate your reports in four formats. To know more about these formats, click on thelinks given below:




8.

Select the type that suits your requirement.

Destination File: This option displays on selecting an FTP Site in Upload to field. The default names aredisplayed. Modify if necessary.

9.

N o t e : Additional options may vary depending on the type of report you want to upload.

Print Preview: Use the Print Preview screen through the Print option to view the document before youupload.

10.



Tax Deducted at Source (TDS)

Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) is one of the modes of collecting income tax. The buyer (Deductor) deducts thetax from the payment made to the seller (Deductee) and remits the tax to the Income Tax Department within thestipulated time.

The buyers (Corporate and Non-Corporate) make payments (such as Salary, Rent, Interest on securities,Dividends, Insurance Commission, Professional Fees, Commission on Brokerage, Commission on Lottery Tickets,etc) to the sellers (Services) and deduct the requisite amount from such payments towards tax.

The buyer files the TDS returns containing details of the seller and the bank, where the TDS amount is depositedto the Income Tax Department (ITD).

The Income Tax Department has prescribed the formats for filing these returns electronically, which the buyerdoes in a CD/floppy.

For additional details you can visit the Income Tax Website at http://www.incometaxindia.gov.in

Flowchart of TDS

A seller (Deductee) provides services to the buyer (Deductor). The buyer deducts the amount towards TDS priorto the services or the bills received. The buyer issues Form No.16A to the Deductee and deposits the deductedamount to the Authorised Bank (Treasury). The buyer files annual returns electronically to the Income Taxdepartment.



Electronic TDS (e-TDS)

The Income Tax Department has made it mandatory for all Corporate companies like private limited and publiclimited to file their TDS returns in electronic media (i.e. e-TDS returns). However, the Non - Corporate likeindividuals, proprietary firms and partnership firms can furnish their returns in physical form to their respectiveIncome Tax Offices. They can also furnish their returns in electronic form through TIN facilitation centersestablished by NSDL. Filing of e-TDS return to Non- Corporate deductors is optional.

Filing of e-TDS Returns

The Buyer (Deductor) has to furnish the TDS returns in electronic form and Form 27A in physical form along withthe e-TDS return CD/floppy.

Form 27A must be furnished separately for each return (Form 24, 26 or 27).

NSDL has developed a utility called File Validation Utility (FVU) to verify whether the e-TDS return file preparedby the Buyer (deductors) conforms to the prescribed format.



Transaction Flow in Tax Deducted at Source

Example 1: Indirect Expenses (Fees for Professional or Technical Services (Section 194J)

Manohar is a technical consultant for automobiles. He inspects used cars and prepares a report. Manohar (seller ofthe service) receives per car, Rs.500 for inspections. He inspects five cars in January 2005. So he has to receiveRs.2500 as service charges. Company 'A' pays him Rs.2250 towards service charges and pays Rs.250 to any Bankor IT counter towards TDS.

The following diagram explains the transaction flow in TDS:

TDS in Tally

TDS (Tax Deducted at Source) in Tally provides an easy-to-use and flexible interface. It helps you to handleintricate cases and calculate the tax payable to the Income Tax Department.

Tally calculates the tax of all parties/ suppliers where TDS deduction is mandatory. It calculates the TDSautomatically and prints Form16A certificates, Forms 26Q, 26, 27 and 27A (Cover Note) for Quarterly/ AnnualReturns as per statutory requirement.

It allows the user to view and print various TDS reports, Challans and TDS Outstanding statements.

Features of TDS in Tally

The TDS functionality in Tally supports the following features:

Simple and user-friendly1.

Quick and easy to set up and use2.

Accounting for tax on partial/full payment of bills3.

Flexibility for auto and manual calculation of TDS4.

Complete tracking of each transaction from deduction to payment5.

Challan management and printing for prompt and accurate filing of tax6.

The Auto allocation feature prevents error-prone data entry and helps track the transactions faster.7.

Form 16A management:8.

Can be printed for a transaction

Can be printed for a period

Can be printed yearly

Allows multi-party printing9.

Exporting of data in NSDL compliant TDS file format.10.

Electronic format (e-TDS return) with Form 26Q, Form 26 , Form 27 and Form 27A which will be validatedby the utility, provided by the government.

11.

Generates Form 16A, TDS Challan, TDS Computation and TDS Payable reports.12.



Company Creation

Company Creation means providing basic information about the company whose books of accounts you want tomaintain in Tally.

Gateway of Tally > Alt + F3 > Create Company

Statutory Compliance for

Select the Country from the list of countries.

State

Select the appropriate State from the list.



PIN Code

Enter the Postal Index Number , which is numerical and of six digits

Enabling TDS in Tally

To enable TDS in Tally,

Go to Gateway of Tally> F11: Features> Statutory & Taxation

In the Company Operations Alteration screen,

Set Enable Tax Deducted at Source and Set/Alter TDS Details to Yes1.

Enter the TDS Deductor details in Company TDS Deductor Details screen2.



2.

A brief description on the fields that appear in the Company TDS Deductor Details screen is given below.

Tax Assessment Number

Enter the Tax Assessment Number (TAN) in this field.

The Tax Assessment Number (TAN) is a ten-digit alphanumeric number, issued by the Income Tax Department(ITD) to the deductors.

One Tax Assessment Number is adequate for different types of deductions. TAN must be quoted properly on allChallans, Payment for TDS, Returns, All Certificates - Issue in Form No.16/16A, All Returns and in all documentsand other correspondences with Income-tax Department.

Income Tax Circle/Ward (TDS)

Enter the Income Tax Circle/Ward (TDS) issued by the Income Tax Department

Deductor Type

According to the nature of the organisation, select the Deductor Type (Government or Others) from the list.

Name of person responsible

Enter the name of the person authorised to file the TDS returns of your company.

Note: If Tally has a security feature enabled then this field is automatically filled with

the user name.

Designation

Enter the designation of the authorised person filing the TDS returns.

Statutory Info.

The Statutory Info. comprises Deductee Type and TDS Nature of Pymts reports.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Info.

The Statutory Info. displays the following options:

TDS Nature of Pymt1.

Deductee Type2.



TDS Nature of Pymt

To view TDS Nature of payment:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Info. > TDS Nature of Pymt

Select any desired type from the list of various nature of payments to go to TDS Nature of Pymt Display1.

The display window comprises of the fields, Name, Section and Payment Code. There is also a table,where you have details such as Deductee Type, Applicable from, Exemption Limit and Rate.

2.

Deductee Type

To view Deductee Types

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Info. > Deductee Types

Select the Deductee Type from the List of Deductee Types1.

The Deductee Type Display screen comprises Name of the Deductee Type, Residential Status andDeductee status. There is also a table for Deductee TDS Details with columns for Applicable from,Surcharge Exemption Limit, Surcharge, Additional Surcharge (Cess) and Additional Education(Cess).

2.



Creating TDS Masters

You can create TDS Ledgers under any of these main group heads:

Duties and Taxes1.

Sundry Creditors2.

Sundry Debtors3.

All Current Assets (except Bank, Cash-in-hand and Stock-in-hand), Misc. Expenses (Assets), Loans andAdvances (Assets) group or sub groups of these main groups

4.

Unsecured Loans5.

Loans (Liability) (except Bank OD A/c, Bank OCC A/c )6.

Secured Loans7.

Unsecured Loans8.

Branches/Division9.

Reserves & Surplus10.

Capital Account11.

Fixed Assets12.

N o t e:For ledgers created under Groups besides Duties & Taxes, Sundry Creditors and

Sundry Debtors, to obtain the field Is TDS Applicable, set Maintain Bill-wise Details

and For Non-Trading A/cs in F11: Features to Yes.



Creating a Tax Ledger

Create the Tax ledger under the group Duties and Taxes to calculate TDS at voucher entry levels. You canspecify the Type of Duty/Tax only for Ledgers created under Duties and Taxes.

To create a Tax Ledger for TDS on Rent,

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info.> Ledgers> Create

Enter the Name of the ledger1.

Select Duties & Taxes from the List of Groups in the Under field. On selecting Duties & Taxes, you willget a field Type of Duty/ Tax

2.

Select TDS from the Types of Duty/Tax list3.

4.

3.

Select the appropriate TDS Nature of Payment from the List of TDS Nature of Payment4.

If the total transaction limit exceeds the actual limit, set Ignore TDS Exemption Limit to Yes5.

Accept to save the Ledger6.

Similarly, you can create different Tax Ledgers.

N o t e: You will find different categories under Tax Deduction. Select the relevant TDS

Nature of Payment from the List of TDS Nature of Payment that applies to your

c o m p a n y .



Creating a Party Ledger

T o create a Party ledger grouped under Sundry Debtors or Sundry Creditors ,


Enter the Name of the Ledger1.

Select Sundry Debtors or Sundry Creditors from the List of Groups in the Under field2.

If required, set Maintain balances bill-by-bill to Yes3.

Set Is TDS Applicable to Yes4.

In the TDS Details screen:

Select the Deductee Type from the List of Deductee Types

Set Is Lower/No Deduction Applicable to No if not applicable

To ignore the exemption limit for surcharge and to calculate the surcharge on the amount specified,set Ignore Surcharge Exemption Limit to Yes

Enter the Mailing Details and Tax Information5.

5.

Accept to save the Ledger6.

Note: While creating ledgers under Sundry Creditors or Sundry Debtors, ensure

Maintain Bill-wise Details is set to Yes. If the party is a Non Resident Deductee type,

then PIN Code, State and the Sales Tax Number fields are not applicable.



Creating a Party where Lower/No Deduction is Applicable

To create a TDS Party where Lower/No Deduction is applicable,


Enter the Name of the Party1.

Select the Group from the List of Groups at the Under field2.

By default Maintain balances bill by bill is set to Yes3.

Set Is TDS Applicable to Yes4.

In the TDS Details Screen,

Select the Deductee Type from the List Of Deductee types

Set Is Lower/No Deduction Applicable to Yes

Select the Section number from the list.

If 197 is selected, the cursor skips to the TDS Lower Rate field and you can enter the TDS LowerRate in this field.

If the section number 197A is selected, the cursor skips to Ignore Surcharge Exemption Limit?in the Ledger Creation screen and the TDS rate is taken as zero .


Accept to save the ledger6.



Creating a Journal Voucher to book the TDS Expense

U sing the Journal, you can book expenses, deduct the TDS and pay the amount to the party for their s ervices.

To book TDS expenses,

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounting Vouchers> Journal Vouchers

Debit the ledger Rent grouped under Indirect Expenses from the List of Ledger Accounts and enter theamount

1.

Select Smart Enterprises from the list and the amount to be credited appears in the Credit column2.

3.

In the Bill-wise Details for screen:

Select New Ref as the Type of Ref3.

Select the TDS ledger from the List of TDS Ledgers and the Amount appears automatically4.

Enter a Narration if required and Accept to save the journal5.

N o t e : Booking the TDS Expense can be done using the Purchase voucher available in

T a l l y .

Deduction of TDS using Journal voucher with TDS Deduction Button



You can create a Journal using the TDS Deduction button, to record all the TDS deductions for parties who provideservices. The List of Ledger Accounts displays only those ledger accounts which are enabled for TDS andtransaction passed where deduction of due.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounting Vouchers> F7: Journal

Click the TDS Deduction Button or press ALT+S . You will get a list of TDS Ledgers for the party selected1.

Select the TDS Party Ledger from the list2.

In the TDS Details for screen, select the TDS Ledger from the list (TDS on Rent). The system calculatesthe Net TDS to Deduct amount

3.

Select the TDS Applicable Bills from the list4.

Accepting the TDS details sub form will post the Net TDS to Deduct amount in the Debit column of theJournal Voucher screen

5.

6.

5.

Press the Enter key to credit the Tax Ledger (TDS on Rent). You may enter the New Reference numberfor identification and accept the screen to save the Journal Voucher

6.



Creating a Journal Voucher to book the TDS Expense for a Lower/No Deduction party

To book TDS Expenses for a Lower/No Deduction Party ,

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounting Vouchers> Journal Vouchers

Debit the ledger Rent grouped under Indirect Expenses from the List of Ledger Accounts and enter theamount

1.

Select ABB Enterprises from the list and the amount to be credited appears in the Credit column2.

In the Bill-wise Details for screen,

3.

Select New Ref as the Type of Ref3.

Select the TDS ledger from the List of TDS Ledgers and details in Is Lower/No Deduction , SectionNumber and Amount will appear automatically.

4.

If you have created the Party and set Is Lower/No Deduction Applicable to Yes , you can still override thespecified TDS rates and make changes to the percentage of Income Tax at the voucher entry level by settingAllow Alteration of TDS Rates and Values in F12: Configure to Yes .

Enter a Narration if required and Accept to save the journal5.



5.

TDS deduction using the TDS Deduction button

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounting Vouchers> F7: Journal

Click the TDS Deduction Button or press ALT+S . You will get a list of TDS Ledgers for the party selected1.

Select the TDS Party Ledger from the list2.

In the TDS Details for screen, select the TDS Ledger from the list (TDS on Rent). The system calculatesthe Net TDS to Deduct amount

3.

Select the TDS Applicable Bills from the list4.

4.

Accepting the TDS details sub form will post the Net TDS to Deduct amount in the Debit column of theJournal Voucher screen

5.

Press Enter to credit the Tax Ledger (TDS on Rent). You may enter the New Reference number foridentification and accept the screen to save the Journal Voucher

6.



6.

Accept the screen to save the Journal voucher7.

Payment Voucher

You can pay the TDS pending bills for the selected TDS ledger via the Payment voucher, either by using the TDSHelper Button or by entering details manually.

TDS Challan Payment

Payment to the Party ( While Paying the Advance)



Creating a Payment Voucher using the TDS Helper button

The TDS transactions in a payment voucher can be entered for a particular deductee status, using the TDS Helperbutton.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Payment Voucher > TDS Helper

Press F5 at the Voucher Entry screen and click on TDS Helper button or press ALT+S to make a TDSChallan Payment Voucher

1.

This functionality of Tally gives you tremendous flexibility to generate the payment vouchers, for any periodand to any deductee.

2.

Note: The TDS Helper button is enabled if Use Single Entry Mode for Pymt/Rcpt/Contra

in F12: Configure is set to Yes.

Fields in TDS Filters sub form:

TDS Ledger

Select the TDS Ledger from the list.

Deductee Status

Select the Deductee Status from the list.

To Date

In this field user may enter, the To Date of the period for which the TDS values should be computed and auto-filled.

Select the Bank ledger in which the payment to the Tax Ledger is made after the TDS deduction. The Taxamount is automatically calculated.

3.

3.

Accept to save the voucher4.

To print this voucher as a TDS Challan, click on the Print button or press ALT+P from the paymentvoucher. It will display the Voucher Printing dialog window. You can configure the payment voucher asdepicted in the screen below. If you wish to view the challan in a preview mode, click on With Previewbutton or press ALT+I

5.



Set Print as TDS Challan to Yes . Accepting the Voucher Printing sub form will display the TDS Challan inPrint Preview mode. Click Zoom or press Alt+Z to view the TDS Challan

6.

Click on Print to print the TDS Challan7.

Creating a Payment Voucher

The TDS transactions in a payment voucher can be entered manually.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounting Voucher> F5: Payment Voucher

Select the Bank from the list in the Account field1.

Select the Party from the list2.

Enter the Amount3.

On entering the amount you will get the Bill wise details sub form. Select the Agst Ref from the list ofpending bills

4.

Accepting the Bill-wise Details For sub form will display the screen shown below5.



5.

Accept to save the Payment voucher6.

Advance to a Party

Assume ABC Company has decided to pay an advance of Rs.1 50 000 to a party (Apt Advertisement) for theirservice on advertising for this year. The Total taxable amount on Rs.1 50 000 will be 1% as Tax, 10% assurcharge and 2% as Additional surcharge. After deducting the TDS from your Total Amount Paid/Payable, the NetTDS to deduct would be Rs.1, 683.00.



Creating a Payment Voucher (To Party Account)

To make a Payment to the Party,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Payment

Select the Bank Account from the list1.

Select the Party from the list and enter the advance amount that you wish to pay to the party2.

You will get the Bill wise Details sub form, select the type of reference as Advance and enter a name.Select the appropriate TDS ledger (TDS on Advertisement) from the list. (If the TDS Ledger is selected asNot Applicable then such transactions are considered as Payments for which TDS will not be deducted)

3.

The amount entered in the debit amount is displayed in the Amount column4.

5.

4.

After entering the Bill-wise Details , the TDS Details for the selected TDS ledger (TDS on Advertisement)appears. This sub form displays the party , Type of Deductee , Amount, total taxable amount ,income tax , Surcharge and Additional Surcharge . The total taxable amount is calculated till date inthis sub form. Enter the name of the reference

5.



The TDS Details for the selected TDS ledger (TDS on Advertisement) appears. This sub form displays theparty , type of deductee , amount , total taxable amount , income tax , surcharge and additionalsurcharge . The total taxable amount is calculated till date in this sub form. Enter the name of thereference

6.

The Net TDS to Deduct on the Tax ledger is calculated according to percentages. Accept the TDS detailssub form. The Taxable amount for TDS on Advertisement appears as credit in the Payment voucher screen

7.

7.

Accept the Payment voucher screen to save the entry8.



Creating a TDS Challan

The TDS challan payment voucher can be entered using the TDS Helper button available in Tally.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F5: Payment Voucher

Click the TDS Deduction Button or press ALT+S1.

In the TDS Filters screen, select the TDS Ledger , Deductee Status and enter the To Date2.

Select the Account (Bank) from the list3.

Accept the Payment voucher screen to save the entry4.

4.



TDS Challan Reconciliation

R econciliation of Challan Payments made to Bank for TDS accounts is done in the Ledger Voucher report.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Accounts Book > Ledger > Select the TDS ledger from the list

The Ledger Vouchers Report provides a list of vouchers for the current month. You may view the LedgerVouchers by drilling down.

Click on the F5 : Challan Reconcile button or press ALT+F5 to view the Challan Reconciliation report1.

Enter the Bank Challan Number , Challan Date , Cheque/DD Number , Bank Name and the BankBranch Code OR use Set Challan Details (Alt +S) button from the Toolbar to reconcile challans from theTDS Challan Reconciliation screen for a selected period which has to be specified in the Ledgers Vouchersscreen

2.

Enter the Bank Challan Number , Challan Date , Bank Name and BSR Code . Accept to Save and thedetails are entered are applicable to the selected vouchers

3.

Enter the Cheque/DD number and accept the Challan Reconciliation report to save the entry4.



TDS Reports

TDS Reports in Tally display the tax amount of the concerned party/supplier. Tally generates Form 16A andForm 27A and also provides the printing option to print these forms. You can export the e-TDS forms (Form26/Form27/Form 26Q/Form 27Q) from Tally. The exported file will be saved in the defined path specified in theOutput file name.

You can get the e-TDS file validated through NSDL freely downloadable utility, File Validation Utility (FVU) to verifywhether the e-TDS return file prepared by the deductors conform to the prescribed format.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > TDS Reports

Click on the TDS Reports option to display the following

Print Form16A

Print Form 16A option provides the facility to preview and print Form 16A.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > TDS Reports > Print Form 16A

On selecting the TDS Party Ledger from the List Of TDS Party Ledgers , Tally generates Form 16A report inpreview mode

1.

Use the buttons from the button bar to set printing options such as selecting the printer, number of copies,method, page range, paper type, paper size and print area

2.



2.

Select TDS ledger from the list and enter the From , To and Challan Till date3.

Select the Type of Copy . Enter the Certificate No , Place and Date4.

Click on Yes to view Form 16A in print preview mode. Click on Zoom or press ALT+Z from the print previewscreen to display the report as below

5.

6.



Click the Print button or press ALT+P to print Form 16A6.

ETDS Forms

ETDS Forms enable you to export the eTDS Forms for the specific period.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > ETDS Forms

Format

Tally exports the data in SDF format. NSDL’s File Validation Utility (FVU) accepts only .txt files. Set the outputfilename with .txt extension .

Output File Name

Enter a name for the file with .txt extension to be exported. By default the file will be saved as Tally.txt in theTally folder in your computer. To export to a different folder enter the path in Output File Name. For example,



C:\differentfolder\eTDS.txt).

Person Responsible Details

The Person Responsible Details will capture the information provided at the time of Company Creation. But ifyou wish to modify, press the Backspace key to navigate to any field.

Form Name

Select the required Form (Form 26/Form 27/Form 26Q/Form 27Q) from the Form type pop up.

Other Details

From (blank for beginning)

Enter the From date

To (blank for beginning)

Enter the To date

Challan Till Date

This field is provided to enter the date of the next quarter/next Year depending on the Quarterly (Form 26Q/Form27Q) or Annual (Form 26/Form 27) returns.

For example, if the Expense booking & TDS (deduction) vouchers are done in the first quarter (5.4.2007) and itspayment is done on 7.07.2007, then the From date will be 1.4.2007 , To Date will be 30.6.2007 and ChallanTill Date will be 7.07.2007 .

Upload Type

Upload type has two options - Regular and Corrected Returns

Regular : Select Regular upload type if you are filing returns for the first time.1.

Corrected Returns : Select Corrected Returns type if you have made any corrections from the previousreturns.

2.

Is Change in Address of TAN since last Return?

If you have changed your company address in company alteration screen since last return, set this option to Yes .Else set it to No .

Click on Yes to Export the file (Form 26/Form27/Form 26Q/Form 27Q) from Tally. The exported file will be savedin the defined path specified in the Output file name.

You can get the file validated through NSDL freely downloadable utility File Validation Utility (FVU) to verifywhether the e-TDS return file prepared by the deductors conform to the prescribed format.

Note: Depending on From and To date, the return periodicity is set as quarterly or

annually. For example, 01-04-2005 to 30-6-2005 is the First quarter and 01-04-2005 to

31-3-2006, Yearly.

After preparation of the electronic return, entities have to verify the electronic return through the latest version ofFile Validation Utility (FVU) provided by NSDL which can be freely downloaded from the TIN-NSDL web-site.

To upload the file in File Validation Utility, you may refer to this link http://www.tinnsdl.com/onlineupproc.asp

To view the exported file, open the folder where Tally is installed. The file is created in this folder by default.



http://www.tinnsdl.com/onlineupproc.asp

Print Form 27A

Form 27A is a physical form with the summary of TDS return (Form 26/Form27/Form 26Q/Form 27Q), whichcontains control totals of Amount Paid and Income tax deducted at source in addition to other basic detailsalong with CD/Floppy containing the e-TDS return data file. The control totals mentioned on Form 27A shouldmatch with the corresponding control totals in e-TDS return file. It should be submitted along with e-TDS returns.

Clicking TDS Form 27A provides you with the facility to set the report titles and preview Form 27A .

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > TDS Reports > Print Form 27A

Use the buttons provided on the Button Bar to set the printing option such as to select the printer, set the numberof copies, method, page range, paper type, paper size and print area

Person Responsible Details

The Person Responsible Details will capture the information provided at the time of Company Creation. But ifyou wish to modify, press the Backspace key to navigate to any field.

Other Details

Enter the From date1.

Enter the To date2.

Enter the Challan Date3.

Select the Form type from the list at the field, Enclosed Form Type4.

Enter the Previous Receipt No if applicable5.

Enter the total number of annexure enclosed.6.

Enter Other Information , if any.7.

Enter the Place and Date8.

Click Yes to view Form 27A in print preview mode

Click Zoom or press ALT+Z from the print preview screen to display the report as below:



Reconciliation Reports

The Reconciliation reports for TDS are as given below

TDS Challan Reconciliation1.

Form 16A Reconciliation2.

Form16A Reconciliation

This Report helps you to record the issue date of Form 16A

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Account Books > Ledger

Select the TDS party ledger from the list1.

Click on F5: Form16A Reconcile button to reconcile Form 16A for the selected TDS party. Enter the Form16A issue date and accept the screen

2.



Display Reports

To view TDS Statutory Information reports and MIS Reports, click on the links provided below

Statutory Info1.

MIS Reports2.



MIS Reports

The MIS Reports provide you with the TDS Outstandings.

To view the TDS Outstandings,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display> Statement of Accounts > TDS Outstandings

TDS Computation

To view the TDS Computation report,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > TDS Outstandings >TDS Computations

The Particulars column provides you with the Name of the Party and its TDS ledger names1.

Amount Paid/Payable Till Date column displays the total amount of the Bills accounted or paymentmade to the party

2.

The Tax column provides the amount of TDS computed as per the rate specified in the tax column, which isdisplayed below the TDS amount

3.

Surcharge is the total surcharge value computed as per the rate specified in this column, which isdisplayed below the Surcharge amount

4.

Addl. Surcharge (Cess) column displays the amount of Education Cess applicable as per the rate specifiedin this column, which is displayed below the Education Cess amount

5.

Addl. Education Cess column displays the amount of Additional Education Cess @ 1% as computed6.

Total TDS column displays the total TDS amount including all additional taxes7.

Less: TDS Deducted Till Date column provides the TDS amount deducted till date8.

9.



8.

Net TDS to Deduct column displays the TDS amount yet to be deducted from the bills accounted orpayment made. If TDS is deducted using TDS journal and if the complete amount of TDS due is deducted.This column will not display any balance. Partial amount deducted will display the balance amount of TDS tobe deducted in this column

9.

Press F12 or click on the F12: Configure button.

In Show Party TDS PAN Number field enter Yes , to display the party’s PAN number in the report.

Click on the Print button or use ALT+P to print the TDS Computation report. This brings up the Printing TDSComputation configuration sub-form by which the user can customise the appearance of the Ledger report.

Accept the TDS Computation configuration sub-form to view the TDS Computations report in print previewmode.

If the TDS payment is made to the government then such payment will not be displayed in TDS Computationdrill down report.



TDS Payables

TDS Payables report gives you information on the status of TDS payable (pending) amounts for a particular TDSLedger account.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > TDS Outstanding > TDS Payables

The TDS Payables report provides the Outstandings for a Tax ledger accounts.

Note: If you wish to know more details on the voucher drill down further by pressing

E n t e r .

Date : Date of creation as entered in the Payment/Journal/Purchase voucher1.

Ref No : The payment Reference number2.

TDS Ledger Name displays the TDS Ledgers created under Duties and Taxes3.

Pending Amount : The pending amount that needs to paid by your company to the bank/party appears inthis column

4.

Due on : The last date for the payment (Due date).5.

Overdue by days : The number of days passed from the date of payment6.

Click on the Print button or use ALT+P to print the TDS Payable report. In the Printing TDS Outstandingscreen, you can customise the Condensed or Detailed appearance of the TDS Payable by using the Backspacekey to navigate to the fields.

Accept the sub form to view the report in print preview mode.

TDS Ledger Outstandings

To find out the outstanding status of a particular tax ledger account,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > TDS Outstandings > Ledger

Select the Tax ledger created under Duties and Taxes from the List of TDS Ledgers .

The selected Tax L edger name appears at the top left corner of the screen1.

The date of creation appears in the Date column as entered in the Payment/Journal/Purchase voucher2.

The payment Reference number appears in the Ref No. column3.

The Opening Amount appears in the Opening Amount column, if any4.

The Pending Amount that needs to be paid by your company to the bank/party appears in the PendingAmount column

5.

The last date for the payment appears in the Due on column6.

The number of days passed from the date of payment appears in the Overdue by days column7.

TDS Not Deducted

To view the TDS Not Deducted report,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Exception Reports >TDS Not Deducted

Press F12 or click on F12: Configure button

Set the field Show Party TDS PAN Number to Yes to display the PAN number in the report

This report will display only those transactions, for which TDS is not deducted or partially deducted. This is anexceptional report for non deduction or lesser deduction of TDS for the bills accounted or payment made.

Click the Print button or use ALT+P to print the TDS Not Deducted report.



Multi-Form16A Printing

Form 16A can be printed for a selected TDS ledger with details of all the parties/suppliers associated with theselected ledger.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Multi Accounting Printing > Multi-Form 16A Printing

Select TDS ledger from the list and enter the From and To date, Place and Date and accept the screen1.



1.

Click the Print button or press ALT+P to print Multi-Form 16A2.

TCS Introduction

TCS is the Tax Collected at Source by the seller (collector) from the buyer/ lessee (collectee/ payee). The goodsare as specified under section 206C of the Income Tax Act, 1961.

If the purchase value of goods is X, the amount payable by the buyer is X+Y, where Y is the value of tax atsource. The seller deposits Y (tax collected at source) at any designated branch of banks authorised to receive thepayment.

The seller, lessor or licensor, is responsible for the collection of tax from the buyer, lessee or licensee. The tax iscollected for sale of goods, on transactions, receipt of amount from the buyer in cash or issue of cheque, draft orany other mode, whichever is earlier.



Classification of Seller for TCS

Under TCS, a seller is defined as any of the following:

Central Government

State Government

Any Local Authority

Any Statutory Corporation or Authority

Any Company

Any Partnership Firm

Any Co-operative Society

Any individual/HUF whose total sales or gross receipts exceed the prescribed monetary limits asspecified under section 44AB during the previous year

Classification of Buyer for TCS

A buyer is classified as a person who obtains goods or the right to receive goods in any sale, auction, tender orany other mode. The following are not included:

Public Sector Companies

Central Government

State Government

Embassy of High Commission, Consulate and other Trade Representation of a Foreign State

Any Club, such as social clubs, sports clubs and the like



Goods and Transactions classified under TCS

Goods and transactions classified under TCS are listed below:

Alcoholic liquor for human consumption including Indian Made Foreign Liquor (IMFL)

Tendu leaves

Timber obtained under a forest lease

Timber obtained by any mode other than under a forest lease

Any other forest produce not being Timber or Tendu

Scrap (Scrap means waste and scrap from the manufacture or mechanical working of materials whichis usable as such because of breakage, cutting up, wear and tear and other reasons)

Licensing or leasing of Parking Lot, Toll Plaza

Mining and quarrying

N o t e : The rate of surcharge is the same as applicable to TDS

Certificate of TCS

The certificate of collection of tax at source has to be submitted in Form No-27D by persons collecting tax atsource within a week from the last day of the month in which the tax was collected.

If there is more than one certificate to be issued to a buyer for tax collected at source with respect to the periodending September 30 and March 31 in the financial year, then the person collecting the tax on request from thebuyer can issue a consolidated certificate within one month from the end of such period.

If an issued TCS certificate is lost, the person collecting tax at source may issue a duplicate certificate on plainpaper, with necessary details as contained in Form-27D.

The Assessing Officer (AO), before giving credit for the tax collected at source on the basis of the duplicatecertificate, has to get the payment certified and obtain an Indemnity Bond from the assessee.



TCS Exemptions

TCS can be totally exempted or fixed at a lower rate under some circumstances.

Total Exemption: No TCS Collection

A declaration by the buyer in Form Number 27C (in duplicate) has to be made for total exemption. The declarationis if the goods listed are to be used for the purpose of manufacturing or processing and not trading. A copy of thedeclaration has to be given to the person collecting tax.

The person collecting this declaration form has to submit the copy to the authorities concerned on or before theseventh day of the following month.

Lower Rate of TCS

The buyer (Collectee) can apply to the Assessing Officer (AO) for a lower rate, using Form No.13, subject to thecondition that the AO is convinced that the total income of the buyer (Collectee) justifies the lower rate. The AOmay issue a certificate, specifying the rate of collection.

Payment of TCS to the Government

The tax collected is to be paid to the Central Government within one week of the last day of the month in whichthe tax was collected. This payment is made in any branch of Reserve Bank of India (RBI), State Bank of India(SBI), or any other authorised bank. The payment is made accompanied by income tax challan 281. If the tax iscollected on behalf of the Government, then the amount can be paid without the income tax challan.



Electronic TCS (e-TCS)

e-TCS is the filing of TCS returns using electronic media. It is mandatory for corporate and government collectorsto furnish TCS returns in electronic form, from financial year 2004-2005. Collectors (other than government andcorporates) may file TCS returns in electronic or physical form.

NSDL collects the e-TCS returns from the Collectors on behalf of the Income Tax Department.

TCS returns on computer media for e-TCS

TCS returns filed using computers should be in TCS specific form formats and must contain all the information,details and particulars specified in such forms.

Computer media specifications are as follows (any of these):

CD ROM of capacity 650 MB or more

4mm 2GB/4GB (90M/120M) DAT Cartridge

3.5 Inches, 1.44 MB floppy diskette.

The returns must be accompanied by Form No.27B and verified.

Filing of TCS Returns

TCS returns are to be filed quarterly, in addition to annual returns.

The quarterly returns are to be filed in Form Number 27EQ on or before July 15, October 15 and January15, respectively for the first three quarters of the financial year. For the last quarter, the returns are to befiled on or before April 30.

Annual returns are to be filed in Form Number 27E on or before June 30 of the following financial year.



TCS in Tally

Tally supports TCS and is a simple and easy-to-use feature. The complexities of TCS are handled by Tally makingit easier for you to maintain records and file TCS returns.

Tally calculates TCS in transactions, where ever applicable. Tally also generates Print and File TCS forms andreports (Statutory and MIS).

Features of TCS in Tally

TCS in Tally has the following features:

Simple and easy-to-use.

Maintain TCS records.

Lower/No Collection of TCS and Exemption Limit on Surcharge.

TCS Helper facility to pay TCS.

Print TCS Challan from Tally.

Generate TCS returns automatically from Tally and file.

E-TCS (electronic format) filing facility provided in Tally.

Generate Statutory Reports from Tally: Form 27D, E-TCS filing and Form 27B.

TCS Reconciliation Reports: TCS Challan Reconciliation and Form 27D Reconciliation

TCS Display Reports:

Statutory Masters: Collectee Types and TCS Nature of Goods

MIS Reports: TCS Payables and TCS Ledger Outstandings

Enabling TCS in Tally

To enable TCS in Tally:


Press F11 or click F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation to display the Company OperationsAlteration screen.

2.

Enter Yes in Enable TCS and Set/Alter TCS Details3.

Enter the Company TCS Collector Details .4.



4.

Enter the Tax Assessment Number . The Tax Assessment Number (TAN) is a 10-digit alphanumericnumber, issued by the Income Tax Department (ITD) to the collectors.

5.

Enter the Income Tax Circle/Ward (TCS) . This is issued by the Income Tax Department6.

Select the Collector Type from the List of Company Type .7.

Enter the Name of person responsible for filing the TCS returns.8.

Enter the Designation of the person responsible for filing of the TCS returns.9.

Press Enter and Accept to save.10.

More:

Enabling TDS in Tally

Statutory Info.

TCS Statutory Info. display goods under TCS and Collectee types and related details.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Info.

TCS Nature of Goods

Collectee Types



TCS Nature of Goods

To view TCS Nature of Goods

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Info. > TCS Nature of Goods1.

Select from the List of TCS Types to display the TCS Nature of Goods Display2.

Collectee Types

To view Collectee Types

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Info. > Collectee Types1.

Select from the List of Collectee Types to display the Collectee Type Display2.

C reating Party Ledgers for Sundry Debtors/ Sundry Creditors

To create Party Ledgers for Sundry Debtors/ Sundry Creditors

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Ledgers > Create1.

In the Ledger Creation screen, enter the name of the buyer company in the Name field2.

In the Under field, select Sundry Debtors/Sundry Creditors option from the List of Groups3.

If required, set Maintain balances bill-by-bill? to Yes . Enter details in the Default Credit Period , ifapplicable. By default, the Inventory Values are affected? field is set to No

4.

Set Yes for Is TCS Applicable ?5.

Select from the List of Collectee Types for Buyer/Lessee6.

Set Yes in Is Lower/No Collection Applicable? if lower or no collection is applicable. Press Enter todisplay the Lower/No Collection Details screen. The existing Section Number is 206C by default. Enterthe TCS Lower Rate (%) and press Enter

7.

Set Yes in Ignore Surcharge Exemption Limit? to ignore the exemption limit for surcharge and calculate8.



surcharge on the amount specified. If Ignore Surcharge Exemption Limit? is set to No , then surchargeis calculated only if the amount is above the exemption limit.

8.

Note: Ignore Surcharge Exemption Limit? field is displayed in Party Master if

applicable to categories from the List of Collectee Types in B u y e r / L e s s e e field.

Accept Yes to save9.

C reating Sales Ledgers for TCS

To create ledgers under Sales Accounts group


Enter a name for the sales account ledger in the Name field2.

In the Under field, select Sales Accounts from the List of Groups3.

Set the Inventory Values are affected? to Yes if you are maintaining inventory4.

Accept to save5.



Creating TCS Ledger under Duties and Taxes

To create a TCS Ledger under Duties and Taxes for TCS on Sales


In the Ledger Creation screen, enter the name of the TCS ledger in the Name field2.

In the Under field, select the Duties & Taxes from List of Groups3.

Select TCS from Types of Duty/Tax in the Type of Duty/Tax field4.

Select from the List of TCS Types in the Nature of Goods/ Contract/ License/ Lease : field5.

Set Inventory Values are affected? to No6.

Accept to save7.



Creating a Sales Voucher

To create Sales Voucher with TCS details


Select As Invoice mode2.

Enter the date and reference3.

Select the Party to be credited from the List of Ledger Accounts and enter Party’s A/c Name4.

In the Party Details screen, check/ modify details5.

Select Sales Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts6.

Select the item from the List of Items in Name of Item7.

N o t e : To create an Item, refer to the topic, Stock Items

Enter the Quantity and the Rate to get the amount in the Amount field9.

Select the TCS ledger (Under Duties & Taxes ) for sales10.

By default, the gross amount is displayed in TCS Details in TCS Computations screen . The gross amountcan be changed if required.

11.

Enter new reference (New Ref ) and Due Date, or Credit Days (By default, 7th of the following month).12.



12.

Select any other expense ledger, if applicable,from the List of Ledger Accounts12.

Enter narration, if required, and Accept to save13.

13.

N o t e :

1. When you create a Credit Note against a sales bill select the respective tax bill

( Agst Ref. ) from the List of TCS Payable .

2. When you create a Credit Note against a sales bill, surcharge is considered as

applied in the selected bill.




You can create entries for payment of TCS in a normal payment voucher and manually pay TCS as shown here oryou can create a TCS Payment voucher using the TCS Helper button from the button bar. This is an automaticfeature which allows payment of TCS for all entries from a TCS ledger.

To create a TCS payment voucher manually


In the Accounting Voucher Creation screen select F5: Payment2.

Enter the date3.

Select and debit the TCS Ledger in Particulars from the List of Ledger Accounts and enter the amount4.

In the Tax Details screen, select from List of TCS Payable and enter the amount5.

Select and credit the Bank authorised to receive TCS in Particulars from the List of Ledger Accounts andenter the amount

6.

Enter Narration, if required,7.

Print the TCS Challan , if required, 8.

Accept to save9.

9.



Creating a Payment Voucher using the TCS Helper button

Create a Payment voucher using the TCS Helper button from the button bar. This is an automatic feature whichallows payment of TCS for all entries from a TCS ledger. You can use TCS Helper to pay TCS in one shot.

Note: TCS Helper feature is available only if Use Single Entry mode for

P y m t / R c p t / C o n t r a ? from F12: Configure (Voucher Configuration) is set to Y e s .

To create a TCS payment voucher using the TCS Helper button


In the Accounting Voucher Creation screen select F5: Payment2.

Press [Alt + R] or click the TCS Helper from the button bar to view the TCS Filters screen3.

Select from the List of TCS Ledgers and enter4.

Select Buyer/Lessee Status from Deductee/Collectee Status and enter. This lets you prepare separatechallans as it is mandatory for different types of Collectees

5.

Enter the To Date to select the period for generation of TCS challan6.

Enter the date7.

Select the Bank ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts in Account8.

Select the TCS Ledger in Particulars from the List of Ledger Accounts and enter the amount9.

In the Tax Details screen, select from List of TCS Payable and enter the amount10.

Enter Narration, if required,11.

Print the TCS Challan , if required, 12.

Accept to save13.

12.

13.



Printing TCS Challan

You can print TCS Challans for a TCS payment voucher created manually or created using the TCS Helperbutton.

To Print a TCS Challan

Press [Alt + P] or click on Print from the button bar in the Payment Voucher screen to view the VoucherPrinting screen

1.

Press Backspace to navigate from Print Yes or No? and move the cursor to Print a TCS Challan?2.

3.

2.

Set Yes for Print a TCS Challan?3.

Set Yes for TCS Regular Assessment (Raised by I.T. Deptt.): if challans are for submission to theIncome tax department

4.

Press Enter and Select Yes to Print5.

Note: Use the Print Preview [Alt + I] option to preview the challan to be printed.

Print Preview for TCS tax challan



TCS Reports

TCS reports in Tally are extensive. Statutory reports are integrated, making it convenient to print and file reportsin government prescribed formats. Additionally, a wide of range reports such as reconciliation reports and displayreports are available. These reports provide information at a glance and help in managing TCS issues with ease.

TCS Reports in Tally

There are three types of TCS reports in Tally.

Statutory Reports

Reconciliation Reports

Display Reports



Statutory Reports

Statutory Reports are reports required in government prescribed formats for the purpose of filing returns. TCSstatutory reports in Tally are dynamically generated. Print and file a report. E-Filing TCS returns is supportedusing the export feature.

There are three types of TCS Statutory Reports.

Print Form 27D

E-TCS Forms

Print Form 27B

To view Statutory Reports

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > TCS Reports1.

TCS Reports menu displays the following options.2.

2.



Print Form 27D

Form 27 D can be printed for a party by selecting a party ledger or multiple parties using Multi-form printing.

To print Form 27D

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > TCS Reports > Print Form 27D1.

Select ledger from the List of TCS Party Ledgers2.

In the Report Generation screen, press Backspace in the Print? Yes or No dialog box3.

Select TCS ledger from the List of TCS Ledgers4.

Enter the From and To date5.

Enter the period for which the challan is required in Challan Date Till6.

Enter the Type of Copy7.

Enter the Certificate No8.


Select Yes to print10.

10.

N o t e : Use the Print Preview option to view the form.

Form 27D is displayed as shown.



Multi-Form 27D Printing

Form 27D can be printed for a TCS ledger with TCS details for all the parties associated with the ledger.

1.

2.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Multi- Accounting Printing1.

Set period using Alt + F22.

Select on Multi-Form 27D Printing3.

Press Backspace in Print? Yes or No from the Report Generation screen4.

Select TCS Ledger5.

Enter the From and To date, Place and Date of report generation6.

Accept to Save7.

Using PgUp and PgDn links to navigate in Print Preview screen8.

Click Print or press ALT+P for printing multiple Form 27D9.



E-TCS Forms

To export TCS form for electronic filing

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > TCS Reports > ETCS Forms1.

Select Restricted (ASCII only) from the language list.2.

In the Report Generation screen, press Backspace in Export? Yes or No dialog box3.

The cursor goes to the Output File Name . Enter a file name.4.

Tally exports the data in SDF format. NSDL’s File Validation Utility (FVU) accepts only .txt files. Set theoutput filename with .txt extension.

5.

Enter Person Responsible Details6.

Enter Yes or No for change in address since last return7.

Enter the From and To date in Other Details8.


Select the Form Name from Form Types10.


Select Upload Type from Upload Types menu12.

Enter Yes or No for change in address of TAN13.

Select Yes to export14.

To view the file open the folder where Tally is installed. The file is created in this folder, by default15.

15.



Printing Form 27B

To print Form 27B

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > TCS Reports > Print Form 27B1.

In the Report Generation screen, press Backspace in the Print? Yes or No dialog box2.

Enter Person Responsible Details3.

Enter the From and To date in Other Details4.


Enter the Enclosed Form Type6.

Enter the Previous Receipt No7.

Enter the No. of Annexures enclosed8.

Enter Other Information , if applicable9.


Select Yes to print11.

11.

N o t e : Use the Print Preview option to view the form.

Form 27B is displayed as shown.



TCS Reconciliation Reports

Reconciliation reports are for TCS challan reconciliation and Form 27D reconciliation.

TCS Challan Reconciliation

Form 27D Reconciliation

TCS Challan Reconciliation

Reconciliation of Challan Payments to the assigned Bank for TCS is done in the Ledger Voucher report.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Accounts Book > Ledger1.

Select TCS ledger from the List of Ledgers2.

Ledger Vouchers report is displayed with a list of receipt/payment vouchers3.

Click F5: Challan Reconcile or press Alt+F5 to display TCS Challan Reconciliation report4.

Enter the Bank Challan Number , Challan Date , Cheque/DD Number , Bank Name and BSR Code5.

Accept to save6.



6.

N o t e : Use Set Challan Details (Alt +S) button from the Toolbar to reconcile challans

at once from the TCS Challan Reconciliation screen for a selected period (Set period in

the Ledgers Vouchers screen). Enter the Bank Challan Number, Challan Date, Bank

Name and BSR Code. Accept to Save and the details are applicable to the selected

v o u c h e r s .

Form 27D Reconciliation

Reconciliation of Form 27D TCS for a party is done in the Ledger Voucher report.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Accounts Book > Ledger1.

Select the Party ledger from the List of Ledgers2.

Ledger Vouchers report is displayed with a list of the Party’s receipt vouchers3.

Click on F5: Challan Reconcile or press Ctrl+F5 to display Form 27D Reconciliation report4.

Enter the date of issue of Form 27D in Form 27D Issue Date5.

Accept to save6.



6.

N o t e : Use Set all Dates (Alt + S) button from the Toolbar in Form 27 D Reconciliation

to set the dates at once for all vouchers displayed for a selected period.

Display Reports

Display reports are to view TCS statutory information reports and MIS Reports.

The types of display reports are as follows.

Statutory Masters

MIS Reports



MIS Reports

These reports provide information on TCS outstandings.

To view TCS Outstandings

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > TCS Outstandings1.

Select from

TCS Payables

Ledger

2.

TCS Payables

To view TCS Payables

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display >Statements of Accounts > TCS Outstandings > TCS Payables1.

TCS Outstanding screen is displayed.2.



TCS Ledger Outstandings

To view TCS Ledger Outstandings

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > TCS Outstandings > Ledger1.

Select from the List of TCS Ledgers to display the TCS Ledger Outstanding screen.2.

Introduction

VAT is a system of indirect taxation, which has been introduced in lieu of sales tax. It is the tax paid by theproducers, manufacturers, retailers or any other dealer who add value to the goods and that is ultimately passedon to the consumer. VAT has been introduced in India to ensure a fair and uniform system of taxation. It is anefficient, transparent, revenue-neutral, globally acceptable and easy to administer taxation system. It benefits thecommon man (consumer), businessman and the Government.

VAT enhances competitiveness by removing the cascading effect of taxes on goods and makes the levy of taxsimple and self-regulatory, ensuring flexibility to generate large revenues.

The cascading effect is brought about by the existing structure of taxation where inputs are taxed before acommodity is produced and the output is taxed after it is produced. This causes an unfair double-taxation.However, in VAT, a set-off is given for input tax (tax paid on purchases). This results in the overall tax burdenbeing rationalized and a fall in prices of goods.

VAT makes the tax structure simple, hassle-free and export-oriented. The integration of VAT with Tally will helpyou in the smooth functioning of your business and eliminate the complications that might otherwise arise in VAT.

Concept of VAT

The essence of VAT is in providing set-off for input tax and this is applied through the concept of inputcredit/rebate. This input credit in relation to any period means setting off the amount of input tax by a registereddealer against the amount of his output tax. Value Added Tax (VAT) is based on the value addition to the goods,and the related VAT liability of the dealer is calculated by deducting the input credit from the tax collected on salesduring the payment period.

This concept is explained with an example, in the Computation of VAT section.

VAT works in two different ways:

If VAT-registered business receives more output tax than the taxes paid as input, they will need to pay thedifference to the Commissioner of Taxes (State).

1.

If the input tax paid is more than the output tax collected,2.

You can carry forward the Input credit and adjust it against the output tax in the subsequent months.

You can have the Input Credit refunded to you by the Government at the end of the current orfollowing year.

You can receive refunds for Input Credit on exports within a period of three months.



General terminologies used in VAT

Term Description

Input tax

Outputtax

InputCredit

CompositeDealers

This is a tax paid on purchases

This is a tax charged on sales

The amount of Input tax that is permitted to be set off against Output tax.

Dealers with annual gross turnover not exceeding a certain threshold (threshold -decided by the respective State Governments) can opt for a composition schemewhereby they will pay tax as a small percentage of their gross turnover. However,retailers opting for this composition scheme will not be entitled to Input Credit.

The State Governments fix the periods and the procedures for the payment of thelump sum.

Justification of VAT

VAT was adopted because the Sales Tax system is complex and induces non-compliance. It has been foundto be a hindrance in the economic growth of Industry, State and the Country. This causes a huge loss of revenueto the government.

VAT also helps in eliminating the dreaded cascading effect of Tax.

For instance, in the existing structure, inputs are taxed before a commodity is produced and the output is taxedafter it is produced. This causes an unfair double taxation with cascading effects. However, in VAT, as a set-off isgiven for input tax as well as tax paid on previous purchases, overall tax burden will be rationalized and prices ingeneral will fall. VAT thus makes the tax system simple and transparent.



Advantages of VAT over Sales Tax

As VAT is a multi-point tax with set-off for tax paid on purchases, it prevents repeated taxation of the sameproduct.

Simple and Transparent: In the Sales tax system the amount of tax levied on the goods at all stages is notknown. However, in VAT, the amount of tax would be known at each and every stage of goods sale orpurchase.

VAT has the flexibility to generate large and buoyant revenues, as it levies tax on value additions.

Zero rating of tax on exports is possible in case of VAT.

Fair and Equitable: VAT introduces uniform tax rates across the state so that unfair advantage cannot betaken while levying the tax.

Procedure of simplification: Procedures related to filing of returns, payment of tax, furnishing declarationand assessment are simplified under the VAT system so as to minimize any interface between the tax payerand the tax collector.

Ability to provide same revenue to the Government with lower rates of tax.

Tax does not become a cost of doing business.

VAT Rates

According to the White Paper, there are 550 categories of goods under the VAT system. They are classified intothe following four groups, depending on the VAT rate:

VAT @ 4%

The largest number of goods (270) comprising of basic necessity items such as drugs and medicines, agriculturaland industrial inputs, capital goods and declared goods are under 4% VAT rate.

Exempted from VAT

There are about 46 commodities under the exempted category. This includes a maximum of 10 commodities thateach state would be allowed to select, from a broader approved list for VAT exemption. The exemptedcommodities include natural and unprocessed products in unorganized sector as well as items, which are legallybarred from taxation.

VAT @ 1%

This is for a specific category of goods like gold, silver, etc.

[email protected]%

The remaining commodities are under the general VAT rate of 12.5%.

N o t e : The few goods that are outside VAT as a matter of policy would include liquor,

lottery tickets, petroleum products, as the prices of these items are not fully market-

determined. These items will continue to be taxed under the sales tax act of the

respective states.



Computation of VAT and Profit

The above diagram depicts computation of (10 %) VAT at each stage of business. Hence, it is not themanufacturers and retailers but only the consumer who has paid 10% VAT to the government. The profits for



manufacturers and retailers thus remain unaffected.

VAT in Tally

Features of VAT in Tally

VAT is completely integrated with Tally. The VAT functionality in Tally supports the following features, making iteasier for computation:

Quick & easy setup

Fast & error-free voucher entry

Pre-defined list of sales & purchase classifications

Complete tracking of each transaction till annual returns

Printing of Tax invoice

VAT computation report

Better VAT-returns management

Monthly Return



Enabling VAT

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts info. > F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation . Set Enable ValueAdded Tax (VAT) and Set/Alter VAT Details to Yes

On enabling Set/Alter VAT Details to Yes, Tally will prompt with VAT Details Screen.

VAT Details

Select the State name.

Set Type of Dealer? to Regular

Enter the Regular VAT Applicable From date

Accept the screen to save.

Note: All Classifications and Statutory forms shown here are based on the Karnataka

State Model.



Configuring Ledger for VAT Reporting

VAT Classification

The VAT Classification is a list of VAT rates, which describes the nature of the Business Activity and the type oftransaction. These are in-built in the system and will be updated if and when any statutory changes take place.

Some of the VAT classifications are:

Input VAT @ 4%

Input VAT @ 1%

Input VAT @ 12.5%

Output VAT @ 1%

Output VAT @ 4%

Output VAT @ 12.5%

Purchases - Capital Goods

Purchases - Exempt

Purchases from unregistered dealers

Depending on the type of the business, type of transaction, and the statutory requirements of your State, you willneed to select the appropriate classifications from the list during Ledger creations, voucher entries, etc.

The Sales and Purchase transactions are segregated based upon the classification selected during voucher entryand shown in the VAT computation. In the VAT Computation you can view the classification-wise VAT and NettValues.

Ledger Masters

The VAT Classification will be displayed as a drop down list in the Ledger Masters. Tally gives the flexibility to theuser, to either have the classification selected in the Ledger Master tagged to all transactions, Or, select differentclassifications each time during voucher entries. This is explained in detail in the Vouchers and Transactionssection.

The Ledgers that are affected by VAT are:

Purchase Ledger

Sales Ledger

Duties and Taxes Ledger

Direct Expenses/Income



Creating a Purchase Ledger for VAT

The following additional fields pertaining to VAT can be seen in the Ledger entry screen.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Ledger > Create/Alter

Used in VAT Return

Set this to Yes if you wish to select VAT/Tax class for this Ledger.

Note: Tally gives the flexibility to the user to either have the classification selected in

the Ledger Master tagged to all transactions Or select different classifications each

time during voucher entries. For more details refer Vouchers and Transactions.

The rest of the Ledger creation process is the same as in default Tally.

In the above example we have selected a VAT classification of 4%.

VAT classification - Purchase-Exempt

Let us take an example of a VAT exempted transaction below.

Used in VAT Returns

Set this to Yes and select Purchases - Exempt from VAT/Tax class for this Ledger.



Accept the screen to save.

Creating a Supplier ledger

Create a ledger for the Supplier from whom you are buying the VAT exempted item:

N o t e : The TIN or Sales Tax number of the creditor whichever applicable needs to be

entered in the Ledger.

If VAT is not enabled for your company, the TIN/Sales Tax No. field will be replaced by Sales Tax No.

To learn about the actual transaction, refer to Creating Purchase Voucher (As Invoice) for VAT section.



Creating a Sales Ledger for VAT

Like in the Purchase Ledger screen, select the required VAT/Tax classification in the Sales Ledger as well.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Ledger > Create/Alter

Used in VAT Return

Set this to Yes if you wish to select VAT/Tax class for this Ledger.

Note: Tally gives the flexibility to the user to either have the classification selected in

the Ledger Master tagged to all transactions Or select different classifications each

time during voucher entries. For more details refer Vouchers and Transactions.

The rest of the Ledger creation process is the same as in default Tally.

In the above example we have selected a VAT class of 4%.

The rest of the settings are the same as in default Tally.



Creating a VAT Ledger under Duties and Taxes

The ledger for Input VAT is shown below:

Type of Duty/Tax

On the selection of group Duties and Taxes, the list of Tax Types CST, others and VAT, is displayed. Select VAT forVAT related transactions.

N o t e : If you have V A T and T D S enabled, the list will also include TDS.

VAT/Tax Class

Like in the Purchase and Sales Ledger, this is a drop down list containing the VAT classifications. Select theappropriate classification or select Not Applicable if you wish to select the classifications at the Voucher level.

Percentage of calculation

This field will display the VAT rate that you selected in the VAT/Tax class field.

Method of calculation

This will display On VAT Rate if you have selected VAT under Type of Duty/Tax.

Output VAT

On selection of CST



Type of Duty/Tax

On selection of CST for Type of Duty/Tax , you can select either Inter-State Purchases or Inter-State Sales forTax Class . Once you select this, you need to manually enter the Percentage of Calculation.

Method of Calculation

Once you enter the Percentage of calculation, select the Type of Duty from the drop down list.

Creating a VAT ledger under Direct Expenses/Income

Direct Expenses/Income

The VAT/Tax Classification is selected in the same manner as for the Sales and Purchase Ledger screen.

The VAT related fields in the Direct Expense ledger is the same as for Purchase and Sales Ledgers.



The VAT related fields are same for Direct Income Ledger as well.

Vouchers and Transactions

The entire Data entry and Reporting architecture is based upon VAT Classifications selected during voucher entry.

The Vouchers that are affected by VAT are as follows:

Purchase

Sales

Debit Note

Credit Note

Journals



Creating a Purchase Voucher (As Invoice) for VAT

Invoice can be classified into As Item Invoice and As Accounts Invoice . The VAT functionality though, is thesame for both.

Given below are examples of transactions in Item Invoice with implementation of VAT.

As Item Invoice

The selection and display of the VAT classifications in the vouchers differ according to the settings in the F12:Configuration screen.

F12: Configuration screen

Use Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation - NO

If you wish to use more than one ledger during a voucher transaction, you have to set this to No . This way, youneed to select a ledger for every item during voucher entry. When you set this to No , you can see the VAT/Tax

Class at the header region of the screen if the Allow Selection of VAT/Tax Class during entry field is set toYes .

Allow Selection of VAT/Tax Class during entry?-YES

Once you select Yes , you have the option to select the VAT classifications in the field VAT/Tax Class which is inheader region of the Voucher screen. If it is set to No, the VAT/Tax Class will not be displayed in the voucherscreen and the classifications will be taken from the Ledgers.

Consider the following examples

Example 1: Purchase@4%

The following is the entry for the purchase of item1 when VAT classification is Purchase @ 4%. This classificationis selected from a drop down list at the header region of the screen as shown below.

N o t e : In the VAT/Tax Class field, there is an option called Not Applicable . You can

select this option if you need different classifications for each item during voucher

e n t r y .



You will need to select the Duties and Taxes ledger after you are done with the entry of all items.

It will now calculate the VAT amount and add it to the Amount to give you the total.

F12: Configuration screen

U se Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation-YES

When you wish to use the same Ledger for all items in a transaction, you can set this to Yes . Thus, you need notselect a Ledger each time you enter an item during the voucher transaction.

The following example to demonstrate the functioning of Assessable Value is shown by setting this field to Yes .

Assessable Value : It is the value on which VAT is to be calculated. The value is arrived at after making properdeductions towards Trade discounts if any, and adjustments towards Excise/ED Cess payable. It is up to the userto calculate this and enter it under the Assessable Value column. This manual entry gives flexibility to the user tomake the calculations as per the local statutory requirements.

As this example does not include discount or Excise/ED Cess taxes, the Assessable Value will be Rs. 5000, whichis retrieved from the Amount column.

Let us assume we have:

A discount of Rs.200 on purchases

Excise tax of Rs.800 (16% of 5000)

ED Cess of Rs.16 (2% of 800)



1. Subtracting the discount amount: 5000 -200 = 4800

2. Adding the Excise tax amount : 4800+800= 5600

3. Adding the ED Cess amount : 5600+16= 5616

Therefore, our Assessable Value amount is Rs.5616.

VAT is now calculated on this amount automatically on the selection of the tax ledger (Rs.224), as shown below.

The entries are to be passed similarly for Sales Voucher and Credit/Debit notes.

Example 2: Purchase-Exempt

This example is to demonstrate the working of Tally in the VAT exempted transactions and also to show the typeand patterns of reports generated for such transactions.

We are passing the following entry for the purchase of the VAT exempted item.

As it is exempt from VAT, this particular transaction does not affect the VAT amount in any way. Similarly forInter-state Sales/Purchases .

N o t e : In the Voucher mode there is no option for selection of the VAT classification at

the header region. Therefore, the VAT classification selected in the Ledgers will apply

always.



Creating a Sales Vouchers (As Invoice) for VAT

Functionality of Sales Voucher is similar to that explained in the Purchase Voucher. However, in order tounderstand the calculation of VAT, let us take the following example:

Assessable Value: The calculation is similar to that explained in Purchase voucher.

Printing Configuration

The Printing Configuration screen after the addition of new features will appear as follows:

Tax Invoice

You will see the following new sections pertaining to VAT in the Invoice:

Title of Document

This field prints the title entered in the Voucher Type Master .

E-mail

The e-mail address of your Company (as specified in the Company Master) will also be printed in the SalesInvoice, just below the address.

VAT %

This column can be enabled by setting Print VAT % to Yes in the Printing Configuration screen. The rate ofVAT from the VAT classification selected during voucher entry is printed in this column.

VAT Analysis

This field prints the VAT amount on the total Net Value. That is, Rate of VAT, Assessable Value and VAT Amount isprinted at the bottom right of the screen.

V AT Amount (In words)



Prints the VAT amount in words.

Company's TIN/LST No.

Prints the Company's TIN or LST number.

Company's CST No.

Prints the CST number entered in the Company master.

Buyer's TIN/Sales Tax No.

Prints the buyer's TIN or Sales Tax number, as the case may be.

Date & Time

The field Print Date & Time in the Printing Configuration screen needs to be set to Yes in order to print the date.However, in case Excise details are enabled the Date & Time is printed regardless of the setting in the PrintingConfiguration screen.

Declaration

The declaration entered in the Sales Voucher type Master will be printed. If it is not entered in the Sales Vouchertype, Tally will print the following line by default:

"We declare that this invoice shows the actual price of the goods described and that all particulars are true andcorrect".

If you do not require this, you can set Print declaration to No in the Printing Configuration screen shown above.

Generated by

By default the Generated by field will display This is a Computer Generated Invoice . However, you canchange it if required. This is printed at the bottom of the Invoice.

Copies of the Invoice

For five or more copies of the Invoice, each copy will be marked as follows:

Original - Original Buyer's Copy

Duplicate - Duplicate Seller's Copy

Triplicate - Triplicate Transporter's Copy

Quadraplicate - Extra copy

Fifth and above - Extra Copy

Creating / Altering Sales Voucher Type Master for VAT

New Fields

The following are the new fields added in the Sales Voucher Type Master.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Types > Alter

Default Print Title

You can set the title for the Tax Invoice in the Default Print Title field. This is helpful since you need not changethe title in Print Configuration each time you use different voucher types. For example, you can set it as TaxInvoice for Local Sales and Bill of Sale for Retail Invoice.

Is Tax Invoice

If Is Tax Invoice is set to Yes and the number of copies to be printed is more than one then the copy type isprinted as follows:

1.Original – Buyer’s Copy

2. Duplicate – Seller’s Copy

3. Triplicate – Transporter’s Copy

4. Quadruplicate – Extra Copy

5. Extra Copy

If Is Tax Invoice is set to No , and the number of copies to be printed is more than one, then the copy type isprinted as follows:

1. Original

2. Duplicate

3. Triplicate

4. Quadruplicate – Extra Copy

5. Extra copy

Declaration

Provision is made to enter the Statutory declaration if applicable. The same will be printed in the Tax Invoice.



N o t e : If the declaration field is left blank, Tally's default declaration will getprinted in the Invoice.

Voucher Class

Given here is an example of how a Tax Invoice having items with multiple tax rates can be generated usingVoucher Class.

If you press Enter on Name of Class in the screen displayed above you will see the following screen:

You can make the entries as required.

Override using Item default

It is possible to enter a Tax Invoice having multiple items with different VAT Rates. Item default refers to theSales Ledger account that you may have set for a stock item.

If you set Override using Item default to Yes and specify a Sales Ledger in the Class Table the sales Ledgersset in the item masters will still be considered.

Setting Sales Ledger in the Item Master

Consider the Item Masters shown below:



Set Set/Modify Default Ledgers for Invoicing to Yes .


If you do not see the field Set/Modify Default Ledgers in the Item Master,

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configuration > Accts/Inv Info1.

Set Specify Default Ledger Allocation for Invoicing to Yes2.

1.

2.

Using the Sales Class in a Sales Invoice


Select F8: Sales Invoice2.

Select the Voucher Class Sales Class and make the entries3.

When entering Sales Invoices with the Voucher class, note that you will not be able to edit Assessable Value Field.If you have an additional ledger say, Discount Ledger there is a facility to edit the Assessable Value manually inthe sub screen that pops up when you press Enter on the Output VAT Ledgers.

In the above example, the discount has been deducted from the assessable value.



Payment of VAT in Tally

The Journal and Payment Voucher entries for the payment of VAT can be demonstrated with the example shownbelow.

As shown in the screen above, the Output Tax is Rs.700.00 and Input Tax is Rs.424.64. The VAT payable isRs.275.36.

Journal entry



N o t e : The VAT payable Ledger is under the group Duties and Taxes.

Payment Voucher Entry

The VAT payable Rs.275.36 is transferred to the Cash or Bank account.



Creating Debit Note / Credit Note for VAT

Purchase Returns - Debit Note

This is a Purchase Returns entry and you have to use the Debit Note Voucher.

Sales Returns - Credit Note

Let us take the example of a Sales Return. Here you have to use the Credit Note voucher.

Creating a Journal Voucher for VAT

If you need the Journal transactions for VAT Computation (for example, adjustment of Input credit, output tax,etc) you will need to make the following settings:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher type > Create/Alter

The following screen is displayed

Name of Class

You have to name the voucher class.

In the above example, we have named it as VAT Adjustment Class. Once you press Enter , the following screen isdisplayed.

Use Class for VAT Adjustments

Enable the option Use Class for VAT Adjustments to Yes , if you want the journal entries to be included in VATComputation.

Journal Entries

Let us consider a Purchase transaction and then a reverse entry for adjustment of Input credit.

The following screen displays a typical Purchase Transaction.

Typical Purchase transaction



Reversal of Input Credit

Go to Journal voucher screen by selecting the button F7: Journal from the button bar, which is on the rightside of the screen or by pressing the F7 key.

1.

You will see the following screen where you need to select the Voucher class created before.2.

Once you select this you can pass the typical reversal entry as displayed below.3.

3.

Once you have selected this, you can pass the typical reversal entry as shown below:

VAT Computation Report

The VAT Computation report will be displayed as shown below.



N o t e : Rs.50 of the Input credit is reversed and only the balance of Rs. 50 can be

c l a i m e d .

Input Credit Adjustment for Capital Goods

Input Credit for capital goods is available over a maximum period of 36 monthly installments (States have theoption to reduce the number of installments).

The entry for the Purchase of Capital Goods is the same as in default Tally.

Let us consider the following example for the adjustment of the Input credit.

Purchase of Capital Goods for Rs. 5,00,000.

The Input Credit is Rs. 20,000, which will be available over a period of 36 monthly installments.

That is, (20,000/36) = 555.56

Hence, Rs. 555.56 can be claimed in the first installment as Input credit.

The Journal entry for this is passed as shown below.



The Drill down report will be displayed as follows.

Further Drill down report will be displayed as follows:



Input Credit Adjustment for Opening Stock

Sales Tax paid on unsold stock at the end of financial year, i.e. prior to commencement of VAT, is eligible toreceive input credit on submission of the required documents by the dealer. For this, a claim is to be made to theVAT/ sub-VAT officer within 30 days of implementation of the Act. Once the assessing officer verifies it, the creditmay be adjusted or refunded in equal installments over six months.

Journal Entries

In order to write off the Sales Tax incurred on closing stock in the next financial year, it is necessary to eliminatethe tax charge from the stock value of the current year. Assuming the local purchases amount to Rs. 57 000where Purchases @ 4% and Purchases @ 12.5% are Rs. 20 000 and Rs. 37 500 respectively, the transaction canbe journalized as follows, selecting VAT Adjustment Class. (For more details on VAT adjustment class refer Journal )



Debit the Current Assets account Tax Recoverable A/c and credit the purchase accounts.

Following the grant of relief by the Assessing officer, you can pass a journal entry every month in the nextfinancial (VAT) year, to adjust the sales tax paid in the previous year.

To claim the installment credit at the end of each month, pass a journal entry upon selecting VAT AdjustmentClass .

The amount of Rs. 57 500 is broken into six equal installments of Rs.9 583.33 and claimed at the end of eachmonth.

Enabling MRP Feature

To enable the Maximum Retail Price (MRP) feature in Tally,

1. Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Accts/Inv Info

2. Set the option Calculate VAT on MRP/Marginal to Yes

MRP in Stock Item Master

Once MRP is enabled, two new fields, MRP and MRP Incl. of VAT will appear in the Stock Item MasterCreation/Alteration.

If MRP is inclusive of VAT, enter the MRP value in the MRP field and select Yes in the MRP Incl. of VATfield.

Single Stock Item Creation



Multiple Stock Item Creation

Creating Sales Invoice for VAT on MRP

Given below are few examples to show the calculation of VAT based on MRP (inclusive and non-inclusive of taxes).

VAT Rate 4%

MRP Inclusive of Tax

Consider the sale of Item 1 , which attracts 4% VAT:

ItemName

ItemVatable @%

MRPIncl. ofTax

VAT%

MRP QTY VATOn

VATAmount

Item 1 4.0 Yes 3.85 200 10 2000 76.92

Calculations:

1. As MRP is inclusive of Tax, the actual VAT% is calculated as (100*Rate of VAT)/ (100+Rate of VAT)

2. VAT amount = (VAT % * VAT On )/100.

3. VAT On = MRP * Qty

MRP not Inclusive of Tax

Consider the sale of Item 2 , which also attracts 4% VAT:

Item Name

ItemVatable @%

MRPIncl. ofTax

VAT%

MRP QTY VATOn

VATAmount

Item 2 4.0 No 4 115 10 1150 46

As MRP is not inclusive of tax, VAT is calculated on MRP as (MRP * QTY)/100.

VAT Rate 12.5%

MRP Inclusive of Tax

Consider sale of Item 3 , which attracts 12.5% VAT:

ItemName

ItemVatable @

%

MRPIncl. of

Tax

VAT%

MRP QTY VAT On VATAmount

Item 3 12.5.% Yes 11.11 55 10 550 61.11

Calculations:

1. As MRP is inclusive of Tax, the actual VAT% is calculated as (100*Rate of VAT)/ (100+Rate of VAT)

2. VAT amount = (VAT % * VAT On )/100.

3. VAT On = MRP * Qty .

MRP not Inclusive of Tax

Consider the sale of Item 4 , which also attracts 12.5% VAT.

ItemName

ItemVatable @

%

MRPIncl. of

Tax

VAT%

MRP QTY VAT On VATAmount

Item 4 12.5 No 12.5 215 10 1075 268.75

As MRP is not inclusive of tax, VAT is calculated on MRP as (MRP * QTY )/100.

Sales Invoice Entry

Calculate VAT on MRP/Marginal Price for Actual and Billed Quantity

If the option Calculate VAT on MRP/Marginal is activated in F12: Configure while creating Stock Item Masters,VAT is calculated automatically as follows:



Percentage of VAT (MRP x Actual Quantity)

If it is not enabled i.e. MRP=0, VAT is calculated automatically as follows:

Percentage of VAT (MRP x Billed Quantity)

This is in the case when Use Actual & Billed Qty is set to Yes in the F11: Features screen.

Creating Purchase Invoice for VAT on MRP

All calculations are the same as explained in the Sales Invoice .

Tax Invoice with MRP details

Printing Configuration

A new field is included in the Printing Configuration screen called Print MRP/Marginal Column . Set to Yes inorder to have the MRP printed on the Invoice.

The Tax Invoice for the transaction shown:



N o t e : The VAT Computation screen will show the original Assessable value and the

VAT amount as in the default case.



VAT Reports

As per VAT Act, every registered dealer is required to maintain proper Books of Accounts and records for all sale, purchase and production. And also VAT account-containing details of Input and Output tax.

VAT Reports in Tally

VAT reports in Tally

Statutory Reports

Sales Register

Sales Register reports provides complete information on sales turnover achieved for a specific period.

To view the Sales Register screen

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Account Books > Sales Register

Click on Columnar button or press the F5 key to re-define the columns and set the required parameters ofreports, ledgers or groups to be shown individually or in a common column.

Set Show Partys' Tax Regn. No . to Yes.

The Columnar Sales Register displays as below:



TIN/Sales Tax No.

The TIN Or the Sales Tax No. (Central or Local) of the Party is displayed here. As there is only a need to entereither the TIN or the Sales Tax No.(Central or Local) at any point of the transaction, and not both, one single fieldserves the purpose for all transactions (with or without VAT) . Thus, the TIN or Sales Tax number, whicheverapplicable, is entered in the TIN/Sales Tax No. (Central or Local) field in the Party Ledger Master. This is picked upin the Tax Invoice and displayed as shown above in the Sales Columnar Register .

If VAT is not enabled for your company, the TIN/Sales Tax No . column will be replaced by Sales Tax No .

Statutory Reports

Statutory Reports are reports required in government prescribed formats for the purpose of filing . VAT statutoryreports in Tally generates and prints state specific monthly, quarterly or annual VAT Returns.

There are two types of VAT Statutory Reports.

Vat Computation

VAT Forms

To view Statutory Reports

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > VAT Reports1.

VAT Reports menu displays the following options1.



1.

Important: A stat.900 file containing updated statutory VAT Return forms and amendments made as and when by the respective

states, is uploaded on the Tally website. The same can be downloaded for immediate access.

VAT Computation

VAT Computation report displays various types of Input VAT Tax and Output VAT tax ledgers employed andtransacted during voucher entry.

Tally provides a clear-cut presentation on how VAT is computed for a given period. It also provides a bird's eyeview of all transaction related to VAT.

To view the VAT Computation report

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > VAT Reports > VAT Computation .

VAT CalculationsLet us consider the following that we made, for VAT Computation: 1. Purchased from Creditor-1, 100 quantities of item1 at the rate of Rs.50 each. The Input VAT@4% for this amount is Rs.200. 2. Purchased from Creditor, 100 quantities of item2 at the rate of Rs.50 each. However we applied a discount ofRs.200 here. Also, Excise tax of Rs.800 and Educational Cess of Rs.16 were levied on this. Therefore we applied the InputVAT@4% on the Assessable value of Rs.5616, which is Rs.224.64. Therefore total Input VAT = Rs.200 + Rs.224.64 = Rs.424.64 3. Sale of 50 quantities of [email protected] to Debtor-1 . OutputVAT@4% = Rs.600. 4. Sale of 100 quantities of item @ Rs.100 each. Output VAT@1%= 100 Therefore total Output VAT = Rs.600 + Rs.100 = Rs. 700 Therefore VAT Payable-> Output VAT - Input VAT = Rs.275.36

This is calculated automatically by Tally and the VAT Computation screen will be displayed as shown below.



The Reports for the two Purchases and one Sales transaction is shown below respectively:

For VAT exempted or zero rated transactions

If you have transactions that are exempted from VAT but however want to have it displayed in the VATComputation screen, you have to click on the F12: Configure button and set the Show all VAT classificationsto Yes .

For example, in the case of Inter-State Sales, the Tax Amount column will show as NIL in the Computation screen.



Learn the effect of Purchase and Sales returns transactions in the VAT Computation and VAT Reports Screens

VAT Computation after Purchase/Sales returns

The following example is demonstrated assuming that you have gone through the VAT Computation section .

Purchase Returns - Debit Note

Let us consider the following Purchase Returns entry:

Once this is done, the VAT Computation is displayed as shown below.



In the Purchases section, Rs. 500 is reduced from the Assessable Value and Rs. 20 is reduced from the Taxamount (while comparing with the VAT Computation before Purchase Returns). Therefore the VAT Payable is nowRs. 295.36

The VAT Computation Report will now show as follows:

Sales Returns - Credit Note

Let us take the example of a Sales Return.



The VAT Computation screen will now show as follows:

The Assessable Value under Sales has reduced from Rs. 25,000 to Rs. 23,500 and the Tax Amount has reducedto Rs. 640.00. This will show in the Reports as follows:



Therefore the VAT Computation and Reports are updated automatically as you pass the entries.

Back to VAT Computation

VAT Forms

The VAT Forms Report is a statutory report. This report displays the VAT Return Form in the governmentprescribed format.

To view the VAT Forms

1. Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > VAT Reports >VAT Forms

2. Use the keys Alt + P key or click on Print option to print your report.

This will display the VAT Return Form screen.

Example: Under Karnataka VAT laws, Form No. 100 is the statutory form used for filing monthly returns by aregistered dealer. Form No.100 contains different columns and indicate the turnover at different rates and thetaxes applicable to them as per VAT definitions. Explanation on each column (i.e. Box)

Additional information:

For explanation on each column in the VAT Form (i.e. Box), Refer to Statutory Help which is available atwww.tallysolutions.com



Introduction

Value Added Tax (VAT) is an indirect tax on goods, introduced in lieu of sales tax, to ensure transparency and greatercompliance. The basic premise of VAT is to tax the “true value” added to the goods, at each stage of the transactionchain. This ultimately reduces:

Tax paid to the government.1.

Cost/tax passed onto the consumer.2.

VAT is a multi-point tax as against sales tax, which is a single-point tax. VAT removes the cascading effect of tax ontax, by allowing a set off for input tax, i.e. tax paid at earlier stage on purchases. It is an efficient, globally acceptableand easy to administer taxation system.

VAT Composition

In order to relieve some small businesses of the need to keep detailed records, the law has made provision for asimpler method of accounting for VAT. The method of calculating, VAT payable is also made easier. Such a method iscalled a VAT Composition Returns.

The VAT Composition Returns states that “Small dealers with an annual gross turnover not exceeding 5 to 50 lakhsand subject to respective state act and rules, who are otherwise liable to pay VAT, shall however have the option for acomposition scheme with payment of tax at a small percentage of gross turnover. The dealers opting for thiscomposition scheme will not be entitled to input tax credit.”

This scheme is a special method of determining the tax liability for specified dealers whose turnover in the year beforeApril 1, 2005 or in the current year exceeds Rs. 5 lakhs but does not exceed Rs.50 lakhs and subject to respectivestate act and rules.

Types of Dealers

There are two types of Dealers.

Registered Dealers

Unregistered Dealers

Registered Dealers

A dealer whose gross annual turnover is above the VAT threshold limit is required to register under VAT. This ismandatory. A new dealer will be allowed 30 days time from the date of liability to get registered.

A VAT registered dealer will be eligible for input tax credit. All Registered Dealers must follow the VAT law,irrespective of the size of the business. A Registered Dealer may sell to both Consumers and Non- Consumers.

A registered dealer can opt for compositions scheme.

Unregistered Dealers

A dealer whose annual turnover is less than Rs.5 lakhs is an Unregistered Dealer and has been granted the status ofa Consumer. So, the VAT paid by an Unregistered Dealer is treated as his cost and is charged no further VAT on hissale. It is assumed that such small dealers will not be supplying other industries or dealers. Therefore they are notincluded into the VAT chain.

But if the small dealer is in the business of actually supplying to others besides consumers, then he can optionallychoose to register and gain the benefits of a Registered Dealer.

The registered dealer pays VAT on goods purchased from unregistered dealer.



Criteria for Registration under VAT Composition Returns

Dealers eligible to be registered under VAT Composition Returns

The VAT Composition Returns is available to Dealers who:

Resell goods in retail

Run a Restaurant, Eating house, Club, Hotel (Other than Star Hotels), Refreshment rooms or BoardingEstablishments

Cater and serve food with non-alcoholic drinks

Run Bakeries

Dealers in second hand motor vehicles

Engage in executing works contracts

The rate of tax payable under VAT Composition Returns for small dealers and other category of dealers is different.

N o t e: Dealers who make Inter-state purchases are not eligible for the VAT Composition

R e t u r n s scheme. This provision applies to VAT implied in most of the states.

Dealers not eligible to be registered under VAT Composition Returns

The VAT Composition Returns is not available to:

Manufacturers

Importers

Dealers who purchase any goods from a registered dealer on high seas basis

Dealers who sell in retail Foreign Liquor and Country Liquor

Dealers who sell in retail Drugs covered by Entry C-29

Dealers who sell in retail notified Motor Spirits

Procedure for Opting VAT Composition

A Dealer, who is applying for a new VAT registration can opt to join the Vat Composition Returns byindicating the same in the appropriate box of the Application form.

1.

A Dealer, who is already registered under VAT, can opt to join the VAT Composition Returns scheme, bysubmitting the duly completed prescribed Form to the jurisdictional VAT officer.

2.

Restrictions:

If you have selected to pay Tax under the VAT Composition Returns scheme:

You will not be allowed to claim any credits for input tax paid on your purchases

You will not be entitled to issue any tax invoices

You will not be allowed to charge and collect tax from your customers

You have to retain tax invoices and retail invoices for all purchases



Filing VAT Composition Returns

The periodicity to file Composition Returns for small dealers and other category of dealers is different. Small traders insome states are required to file the returns on quarterly basis as prescribed under the Karnataka VAT Rules and insome other states like Maharashtra they are required to file the returns half yearly.

For other category of composition dealer’s, returns are required to be filed monthly. However, some states have againlinked this obligation of filing return based on their tax liability.

Advantages of VAT Composition Returns

The Dealers registered under VAT Composition Returns need not issue Tax Invoice under the VAT Act.

The Dealers under VAT Composition Returns are required to pay flat rate of tax on their turnover.

Any dealer can opt for this scheme after doing the Cost Benefit Analysis under the VAT Composition Returns aswell as the regular scheme of VAT if he is eligible for the scheme.

VAT Composition Returns is very simple.

Disadvantages of VAT Composition Returns

It is not possible to claim set off of any VAT paid on purchases

Tax invoices cannot be issued to customers.

Enabling VAT Returns

Company Creation

To create a company, provide basic information about the company whose books of accounts are to be maintainedin Tally

Go to Gateway of Tally > Alt + F3 > Create Company

State

Select West Bengal from the List of States.

Enabling VAT Composition Returns



Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts info. > F11: Features > Statutory and Taxation. Set Enable ValueAdded Tax (VAT) and Set/Alter VAT Details to Yes

On enabling Set/Alter VAT Details to Yes, Tally will prompt with VAT Details Screen.

VAT Details

Select the State name.

Set Type of Dealer? to Composition and enter the Composition Scheme Applicable From date

Enter the applicable Tax Information detail in the Statutory and Taxation Screen

Accept to Save the changes

N o t e : All Classifications and Statutory forms shown here are based on the West Bengal

State Model.



Creating a Customer ledger

To create a Party ledger ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Ledger > Create1.

Enter the Name of the party ledger you wish to create.2.

Select the group under which you are creating the party ledger.3.

Enable Maintain balance bill-by-bill? to Yes , enter details in the Default Credit Period if applicable. Bydefault the Inventory Values are affected ? field is set to No .

4.


Accept to save .6.

6.



Creating a Supplier Ledger

Creating a Supplier ledger is similar to creating the Party/Customer Ledger but it should be created underSundry Creditors.


To create a Tax Ledger Master,


Enter the Name of the Tax ledger you wish to create.2.

Select the group Duties and Taxes from the list in the field Under.3.

On the selection of group Duties and Taxes , you will get the option to select Type of Duty/Tax . SelectOthers from the list.

4.

Accept to save the changes.5.



Creating a Sales Ledger

To create a Sales Ledger,


Enter the Name of the sales ledger you wish to create.2.

Select the group under which you are creating the sales ledger .3.

Set the option Used in VAT Returns to Yes , if you want to select VAT classifications for this Ledger.4.

Once you set this to Yes , Tally prompts with VAT/Tax Class screen.5.

Select the required classification from the drop down list under the field VAT/Tax Class . The drop downlist consists of the Sales classifications pertaining to West Bengal state. If you do not wish to select aclassification at the Ledger level , select Not Applicable .

6.



Creating an Expense Ledger

To create an Expense ledger,


Enter the Name of the expense ledger you wish to create2.

Select the group under which you are creating the expense ledger3.

Accept to save the changes4.



Creating a TDS Ledger

To create an Expense ledger,


Enter the Name of the TDS ledger you wish to create2.

Select the Group under which you are creating the TDS ledger3.




Create/Alter a Voucher Type

To create/Alter a Voucher Type, e.g. Journal

Go to Accounts Info. > Voucher Types > Create/Alter > Journal1.

In the Voucher Type Alteration Screen, Type the Name of Class e.g. VAT Adjustment .2.

Set Use Class for VAT Adjustments to Yes and accept the screen.



Creating a Purchase Voucher

To create a Purchase Voucher,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F9: Purchases1.

Select As Invoice .2.

Enter the Reference in the Ref field , if required.3.

Select the Party’s A/c Name from the List of Ledger Accounts.4.

Select the required VAT/Tax Class from the drop down list.5.



Select the Name of Item from the List of Items6.

Enter the Quantity and Rate . The amount is automatically displayed in the Amount field.7.

Enter Narration , if required.8.

Accept to save the voucher.9.

Similarly you can create Purchases Vouchers for Purchases from URDs- Exempt goods (Composition) ,Purchases from URDs- MRP Bases (Composition) , Purchases from URDs- Taxable goods(Composition) , Purchases- Taxable Goods (Composition) and Purchases- MRP Based (Composition) .


To create a Sales Voucher,


Select As Invoice .2.

Enter the Reference in the Ref field, if required.3.

Select the Party’s A/c Name from the List of Ledger Accounts.4.








Similarly you can create Sales Vouchers for Sales-MRP Based (Composition) and Works Contract-Composition Tax @ 0.25%.

Creating a Sales Return Voucher

To create a Sales Voucher,


Select As Voucher .2.

Enter the Reference in the Ref field , if required.3.

Select the Party’s A/c Name from the List of Ledger Accounts .4.

Select Return of Taxable Goods in the Used for field5.


6.







Creating a Journal Voucher

To create a Journal entry using a Voucher Class ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F7: Journal1.

Select the class as VAT Adjustment from the list Class Table.2.

Select the required flag from the VAT Composition Adjustments list under the field Used For.3.

Advance Tax Paid

Select VAT Adjustment Class as the Voucher Class1.

Select Advance Tax Paid in Used for field2.

2.

Debit Composite Tax created under Duties and taxes (Type of duty – Others ) from the List of LedgerAccounts

3.

Select the Ledger Advance Tax Paid created under Current Liabilities to be Credited4.

The Amount is automatically entered5.

Enter Narration if required6.


Interest Payable

Select the Voucher Type as VAT Adjustment Class from the Voucher Class list.1.



1.

Select Interest Payable Under Section 33 in Used for field2.

Debit Interest created under Indirect Expenses3.

Select the Ledger Interest Payable created under Current Liabilities to be Credited.4.




TDS Adjustment


2.

3.

1.

Select TDS Adjustment in Used for field2.

Debit Total Tax Payable created under Duties and Taxes (Type of duty – Others ) from the List ofLedger Accounts

3.

Select the Ledger Tax Deducted at Source created under Current Liabilities to be Credited4.




Purchase Tax Adjustments


2.



1.

Select Purchase Tax Adjustment in Used for field2.

Debit Purchase Tax Expenses created under Direct Expenses3.

Select the Ledger Purchases Tax Payable created under Duties and Taxes to be Credited4.




VAT Returns Reports

To view the VAT Composition Reports,


VAT Returns Computation Reports

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports>VAT Composition Reports

VAT Composition Reports menu displays the following options.

VAT Composition Computation

The VAT Composition Computation screen displays as shown below.



Assessable Value

The Assessable Value is the total value of the transactions made with the respective VAT/Tax Classification.

Rate (%)

The percentage rate of tax is displayed here.

Tax Amount

The rate of percentage value of the Assessable Value is the Tax Amount.

VAT Composition Forms

The VAT Composition Form for Delhi is displayed in the government prescribed format.

Use Alt + P or click on Print option to print your report.

Show all VAT Classifications

Enable the option Show all VAT Classifications? to Yes in F12: Configure

The computation screen displays as shown below.



VAT Composition Form

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > VAT Composition Reports > VAT CompositionForms

VAT Composition Forms

The VAT Composition Forms option will display the Report Generation screen as shown below.



The form displays as shown below.

RETURN FORM-15

The West Bengal Value Added Tax Rules 2005

Section A

(General Information)

Return Period

The Return Period is the period specified while giving printing command.

Registration No

The VAT TIN (Composition) as entered in F11: Features > F3: Statutory and Taxation> Tax Information screen isdisplayed here.

Name and Style of Business

This Field appears as entered in the Company Creation screen is displayed here.

Address of the principal place of Business

The Address of the Dealer as entered in the Company Creation screen is displayed here.

Section B:

(Statement of Sales)

1. Aggregate of Sales Price [Section 2(41)]

The gross sales turnover (Total Sales less Works Contract) is displayed in this box.

2. Sales Price of goods tax on which has been paid on the maximum retail price at the time of purchase

This Total sales transaction made using the VAT/Tax Class Sales MRP Based (Composition) less Sales Returns isdisplayed in this column.

3. Sales Return within six months from the date of sale

The Sales Return Transaction made using the VAT Composition Adjustment Return of Taxable Goods is displayedin this column.

4. Turnover of Sales (01-02-03) [Section 2(55)]

The Total of (Box 01 –02- 03) is displayed in this column.

5. Tax Payable under sub section (3) of section 16 @ 0.25 per centum on 04.

The Sales Tax amount paid on Total Sales Turnover at 0.25% is printed in this Box.

Section C:



(Works Contract)

6. Contractual transfer price (Total amount received or receivable during the period for execution of workscontract.

The Sales Transaction made using the VAT/Tax Class Works Contract –Composition Tax at 0.25% is displayed inthis column

7. Number of Tax invoices raised

This field is blank and entered manually.

8. Tax Payable under sub section (4) of section 18 @ 0.25 per centum on 06

The Sales Tax amount paid on Works Contract Composition Tax at 0.25% is printed in this Box.

Section D:

(Statement of Purchase)

9. Aggregate of Purchase Price [Section 2(35)]

The Total Purchase turnover [Box 10 (a +b)] is displayed in this Box.

10. Break up of Purchase Price

(a) Purchases made from registered dealers in West Bengal.

(i) on goods on which tax has been paid on maximum retail price

The Purchase Transaction made using the VAT/Tax Class Purchases- MRP Based (Composition) is displayed in thiscolumn.

(ii) of taxable goods

The Purchase Transaction made using the VAT/Tax Class Purchases-Taxable Goods (Composition) is displayed inthis column.

(iii) of other goods

The Purchase Transaction made using the VAT/Tax Class Exempt Purchases is displayed in this column.

(b) Purchases made from registered dealers in West Bengal.

(i) on goods on which tax has been paid on maximum retail price

The Purchase Transaction made using the VAT/Tax Class Purchases From URDs- MRP Based (Composition) isdisplayed in this column

(ii) of taxable goods

The Purchase Transaction made using the VAT/Tax Class Purchases From URDs -Taxable Goods (Composition) isdisplayed in this column.

(iii) of other goods

The Purchase Transaction made using the VAT/Tax Class Purchases From URDs -Exempt Goods (Composition) isdisplayed in this column.

Total (i) + (ii)+ (iii)

Total of (i) + (ii)+ (iii) is printed in this Box.

Grand Total (a) + (b)

Total of 10 (a) and 10 (b) is displayed in this Box.

11. Purchases tax payable on 10 (b) (ii) [ Refer to section 17]

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Purchase TaxAdjustment is printed in this Box

Below is the sample entry given:

Flag: Purchase Tax Adjustment

Dr. Purchase tax expenses A/c

(under: Direct expenses)

Cr. Purchases Tax Payable

(under: Duties and Taxes A/c)

12. Output Tax [05+08+11] [Section 2(26)]

The total of (Box 05+08+11) is displayed in this box.

13. Less Tax Deducted at Source (enclose Form 18)

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as TDS Adjustment isprinted in this Box


Flag: TDS Adjustment

Dr. Total Tax Payable

(under: Duties and Taxes)

Cr. Tax Deducted at Source

(Under: Current Assets)

14. Less Tax Paid (Other than 13)

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Advance Tax Paid isprinted in this Box




Flag: Advance Tax Paid

Dr. Total Output Tax A/c

(under: Duties and Taxes)

Cr. Advance Tax Paid

(under: Current Liabilities)

15. Add: Interest Payable under section 33

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Interest Payable isprinted in this Box


Flag: Interest Payable

Dr. Interest

(under: Indirect Expenses)

Cr. Interest Payable

(Under: Current Liabilities)

16. Amount due (12+15-13-14)

The balancing figure is captured in this Box.

24. Payment Details

This field is entered manually

Declaration

This field is entered manually

Introduction

Service tax is an indirect tax levied on certain category of services provided by a person, firm, agency, etc. TheGovernment of India has marked a set of services as taxable under the service tax structure. The seller provides aservice and the responsibility of paying the service tax to the government rests with the seller.



Information on service tax

Currently, the rate of service tax on all the taxable services is 12%. Presently, service tax is applicable on 97categories of services. A few of the listed services have an abatement facility. Service tax returns are to be filed tothe Commissionerate of Service Tax for the fiscal half-year. Information on the registration, rules, list of services,rate of service tax, forms, etc can be found on the official website for service tax-http://www.servicetax.gov.in/

Service Tax Flow

When you buy and sell services?

A person/firm providing a service that comes under the service tax category has to pay service tax. Service tax isto be shown separately in the invoice and is payable based on the payment realized and not on the total amountshown in the invoice. Similarly, when you buy a service that falls under service tax category, you avail service taxcredit based on the payment made. So, you pay service tax on the services that you sell and get credit on theservice tax payable when you buy a service.

Adjusting credit?

While you pay service tax on sale of services that come under the service tax category, you can adjust service taxcredit availed on purchase of services (Buyer). This deduction is called adjusting credit against service tax . Thedifference between the service tax that you have to pay for selling services and the service tax credit onpurchases that can be adjusted is the payable service tax .

Service tax (sales) that is adjustable against service tax credit (purchases) is also called availing input credit . Letus look at an example.

Adjusting 100% credit & 20% credit



If your input service (Purchase) can be directly related to the output service (Sales) then you can use 100% creditadjustment on the service tax payable. For example: If you are providing a consultancy service over the phone,then you can use the input credit from the telephone charges to adjust against 100% of the service tax payableon your consultancy service. If the input service is not solely used for the output service, then 20% creditadjustment is applicable.

Input service tax credit can be adjusted to both output service tax and output cess (surcharge on tax). But inputcess credit can be adjusted only towards output cess.

Assessable value

Service tax is calculated on the assessable value. The assessable value is the service charge value minusabatement and expenses.

Abatement

The government has given a deduction on the value to be considered for service tax on a few categories ofservices. For example, some categories of services include material value. A caterer has to procure materials toprepare food products and sell services. Service tax is charged on the total amount for the service and does notinclude the rate of the materials procured. Hence a deduction is provided. This deduction from the service chargesto be considered for service tax is called abatement . Abatement is either a percentage of the service charges or alump sum value.

Example:

a. Charge on Service Rs.10, 000/-

b. If an abatement of 30% is applied, then abatement Rs.3, 000/-

c. Here, the assessable value is (a-b) Rs.7, 000/-

Therefore, service tax @ 12 % on Rs.7, 000/- Rs.840/-

Expenses

Expenses can be deducted from the total service charge to get the taxable amount.

E.g. A technical consultant might travel to different locations with respect to work.

The invoice is prepared as ‘consultancy’ and the travel expenses are included in the total service charges. Ifsupported by records, you can deduct the travel expenses from the total service charge to derive the assessablevalue on which service tax is applicable.

Payment of Service Tax

How much do I pay?

A seller provides a service to a buyer and bills the buyer for the service. The bill is inclusive of the service tax. Theseller does not have to pay service tax on the total bill amount but only on the payment received.

Example:

Charge on service Rs. 10, 000/-

Service tax @ 12% Rs. 1, 200/-

Cess on Service Tax @ 2% Rs. 24/-

Secondary Cess @ 1% Rs. 12/-

Total bill Rs. 11, 236/-

Here, the service-tax calculated turns out to be

Service Tax @ 12% Rs. 1, 200/-

Cess on Service Tax @ 2% Rs. 24/-

Secondary Cess @ 1% Rs. 12/-

Total Rs. 1, 236/-

Assuming, the buyer pays the seller Rs.5, 000/- as part payment, the service-tax payable for the paymentreceived is calculated as given below.

Charge paid on service (10,000 x 5,000)/11,236 Rs. 4449.98

Service tax on Rs.5000/- is (1,200 x 5,000)/11,236 Rs. 533.99

Cess on service tax is (24 x 5,000)/11,236 Rs. 10.67

Secondary Cess on Service Tax is (12 x 5,000)/11,236 Rs. 533



Hence, service tax is payable only on the value of payment received by the seller and not on the gross amountcharged or billed (invoice value).

Another case is when you receive an advance payment on services to be provided. Service tax is not applicable onadvances paid until it is adjusted against the invoice.

Where do I pay?

The service tax amount is to be paid in Form GAR – 7 Challan in a bank designated by the Commissionerate ofService Tax. For a particular area there is a Focal bank, with branch and code. This is the designated bank.Service tax payments will be accepted in all the branches of the bank, which are connected with the focal branch.The list of the banks and their branches accepting service tax payments is available with the Commissionerate ofService Tax.

If your company is a corporate company, service tax is payable on a monthly basis by the 5th of the followingmonth. For example, Service tax has to be paid by 5th January for the month of December.

Non-corporate like individuals, proprietary firms, partnership firms and so on, have to pay service tax for the fiscalquarter. The payment is to be made by the 5th day of the month following the quarter. For example, service taxfor the quarter ending 30th June is to be paid by 5th July.

For the corporate and non-corporate bodies, service tax for the month of March is payable by 31st of March.

Filing returns

Corporate and non–corporate organizations have to file service tax half-yearly with details in Form ST-3 andInput Credit Form (Form 5) to the Commissionerate of Service Tax. The filing of returns should be within 5days from the last day of the fiscal half-year. For the fiscal half-year ending-date of 30th September, the last dayfor filing service-tax returns is 5th October. Copies of all GAR – 7 issued during the period must be attached.

Service Tax in Tally

Features of Service Tax in Tally

Service tax integrated in Tally takes care of your service tax transactions. It eliminates error-prone information,incorrect remittance, penalties, interests, compliance issues, etc. Service Tax in Tally needs a one-timeconfiguration for service tax features to be activated.

Tally tracks bill-wise (bill-by-bill) detail and automatically calculates service tax payable and input creditwith the flexibility to make adjustments later.

Service tax is part of a regular transaction. Information on service tax is maintained and produced category-wise, which is mandatory in service tax returns.

Adjusts input credit towards service tax payable.

Accounts for abatement and expenses.

Provision for exemption notification details.

Built-in assessable value feature on which service tax is calculated.

Transfer earlier pending service tax payable and available service tax input credit in to Tally

Reports are generated as per government suggested format. Print and file reports: G.A.R.-7 Challans, InputCredit Form, ST3 Report and ST3-A Report.

Management Information Services (MIS) reports: Service Tax Payable Report and Input Credit Form

Enabling Service Tax in Tally

To enable Service Tax ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation

Set Enable Service Tax to Yes

Set Set/Alter Service Tax Details to Yes to enter the Company Service Tax Details .

Company Service Tax Details

The Company Service Tax Details screen is where you will enter the service tax details. The name of thecompany is displayed at the top followed by different fields.



Company Service Tax Details

Service Tax Registration No . – Enter the registration number allotted to you by the Service Tax Department.

Date of Registration – Enter the date of registration of Service Tax for your service.

Assessee Code - Enter the code given to your company by the Service Tax Department .

Type of Organization – In this field select the type of your organization from the List of Organisations menu.

Major Service Category Name - Here you will find options for different categories that come under the servicetax net. You might be providing two or more services in a company. In such a situation, select the servicecategory that is the mainstay or forms the major part of your business.

Select the relevant option from the List of Service Categories that applies to your company.

Credit Adjustment (%) – By default this field is set to 20. Enter the percentage of credit adjustment that youwould like to avail.

Division

Code - Enter the code of the division in which your company falls.

Name - Enter name of the division under which your company falls.

Range

Code - Enter the code of the range of your company.

Name - Enter the name of the range under which your company falls.

Commissionerate

Code - This is the code of the Commissionerate of Service Tax under which the address of your registered



premise is located.

Name - This is the name of the Commissionerate of Service Tax under whose range the address of yourregistered premise falls.

Focal Bank Details

Focal Bank Code -The Commissionerate of Service Tax allots a code to banks nominated for payment of servicetax in a particular area. This code is available with the Commissionerate of Service Tax.

Focal Bank Name - This is the name of the bank nominated by the Commissionerate of Service Tax toreceive service tax payments in a particular area. This information is available with the Commissionerate ofService Tax .

Focal Bank Address- Enter the address of the branch of the focal bank .

Display of Service Categories in Statutory Info.

Tally provides you with predefined set of Service Categories. You can view the values of each of the ServiceCategory.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Info > Service Categories

Select the service category which you want to view. The Service Category screen has a Name field showing thecategory. This is followed by the fields Applicable to Country, Code, Accounting Code and Category fields.

The Applicable From column displays the period for which the Abatement (%), Service Tax Rate (%), andCess Rate (%) and Secondary Cess Rate are applicable.

N o t e : Any changes to the values will be updated on the Tally website.



Creating Sales Ledgers for Services

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Ledgers > Create

Enter the Name of the Sales ledger1.

Select the Group Sales Accounts in the field Under2.

Set Inventory Values are affected to Yes3.

N o t e : Set the Inventory Values are affected field to Y e s , if you are maintaining

service as item. For example: You sell consultancy charged by the number of hours.

Set Is Service Tax Applicable to Yes4.



4.

Select the Category Name from the List of Service Categories .6.

6.

Accept the screen to Save .7.

N o t e : Create a Service Tax ledger for each service category. For example, if you

purchase services in two categories and sell services in three categories, create five

service tax ledgers



Creating Output Service Tax ledger

To create an Output Service Tax ledger:



Select Duties & Taxes in the field Under2.

Select the Type of Duty from the List of Types of Duty/Tax3.

Select the Category Name from the List of Service Categories4.

Set Inventory Values are affected to No5.

5.

Accept the screen to Save6.

Similarly, you can create ledgers for Input Service Tax



Creating a Customer Ledger

To create a Customer ledger:



Select the group from the List of Groups2.

Set Maintain Balances Bill by Bill to Yes. Enter the Default Credit Period , if any3.



5.

Select the Type of Classification in the Exemption Details screen6.



6.

N o t e : If Exempt classification is selected, then the Notification number has to be

entered. The number will appear in the ST3 Half Yearly return of exempt section

Enter the Mailing Details7.

7.

Accept the screen to save8.



Creating Party Ledgers for Service Tax

Creating Party Ledgers for Service Tax

To create a Party Ledger for Service Tax,


Enter the Name of ledger1.

Select the Group from the List of Groups in the field Under2.

Set Maintain Balances Bill by Bill to Yes. Enter the Default Credit Period , if any3.

Set Inventory values are affected to No4.


Select the Type of Classification from the List of Classification6.

6.




Creating Ledgers for Excise

To create a Ledger for Excise:



Select the Group Duties & Taxes from the List of Groups2.

Select the Type of Duty/Tax from Types of Duty/Tax to Excise3.

Select the appropriate Duty Head from the list4.

Set Inventory Values are affected to No.5.

Set the Percentage of Calculation to 16%6.

Select the appropriate Method of Calculation from the list of Type of Duty7.



7.


Similarly, you can create ledger for Education Cess – Excise and Secondary Education Cess, by selectingDuty Head as Cess on Duty and the Method of Calculation as Surcharge on Duty


To create a Sales voucher for Sale of Services ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F8: Sales

Select I : Acct. Invoice on the right hand side of the screen.1.

N o t e : A Sales Item Invoice can also be passed with Inventory allocations.

Enter the reference number in the Ref field if required.2.

N o t e : Set Use Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation to No in the F12: Configure

Select the Party’s A/c Name from the List of Ledger Accounts3.

Select the Service ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts4.

Enter the Amount5.

Select the Service Tax ledgers from the List of Ledger Accounts for the Service Tax Details sub formto appear.

6.

6.

You can allocate the Expenses amount if any, in above screen, else leave the field blank and tab down toaccept the above screen.

7.

In the above example, Rs. 5000 is allocated to Expenses .

Tab down through the Voucher entry screen for the Bill Wise Details sub form to appear.8.



8.

Select New Ref from Method of Adj. and accept the Bill-wise Details sub screen.9.

Enter Narration if any in the Voucher entry screen.10.

10.

Accept the screen to save .12.



Creating a Receipt Voucher

Creating Receipt Voucher

Tally calculates the Service Tax liability on the payment received .

If a part payment of Rs.50, 000 is received for the above Sales made, then Tally calculates the Service Taxliability for Rs. 50, 000 .

To create a Receipt voucher,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F6: Receipt

Select the customer ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts1.

The Bill Wise Details sub form appears as shown2.

2.

Select the Type of Ref from the list of Method of Adj .3.

Select the Sales Voucher from the List of Pending Bills4.

Enter the amount received and Accept the Bill-wise details sub screen5.

Debit the Bank account6.

Enter Narration, if any7.



7.


Creating a Sales Voucher for Services Exempt from Service Tax

To create sales vouchers for Services exempted from Service Tax ,

Create a Customer ledger and select the Type of Classification as Exempt in the Exemption NotificationDetail sub form.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F8: Sales ( as Account Invoice )


Select the Party’s A/c Name from the List of Ledger Accounts .2.

Select the Service Ledger from the List of Ledger Account s.3.

4.



3.

Enter the Amount4.

Select New Ref for Type of Ref in the Bill-wise Details sub form5.

Select Service Tax ledger as Not Applicable6.

Accept the Bill Wise Details sub screen to accept and save the voucher7.

7.

On receipt of the payment for the sale of the above service, the value is displayed in Section 4(A) row 4 of theST3 report.

Similarly, you can pass entries for an Export customer. The entry value will be displayed in Section 4(A) row 5of the ST3 report.



Service Tax Payable Report

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Service Tax Reports > Service Tax Payables

The screen display the details of the Service Tax Payable

Date - The date of the sales invoice is displayed.

Ref No. - The reference number given to the sales invoice.

Partys' Name – The name of the customer to whom the sale is made.

Category Name – Name of the category of service is displayed.

Bill Value:

This column displays the total invoice amount .

Assessable Value – The assessable value for the service.

Service Tax - The total service tax calculated on the assessable value .

Cess - The sum of Education Cess and Secondary Education Cess (Applicable from 1-4-2007 ) calculatedon Service Tax.

Realised Value:

This column displays the amount received on the invoice value.

Assessable Value – The assessable value based on the realised value .

Service Tax Payable - The amount of service tax payable based on the realised value.

Cess Payable – The Total Cess (Education Cess and Secondary Education Cess) on the Service TaxPayable based on the realised value.

Total Payable – The amount of Service Tax Payable inclusive of Educational Cess and SecondaryEducation Cess is displayed in this field. This value is calculated on receipt of payment.

Use the Alt+P key or click on Print option to print your report.




You can create a Purchase voucher to record the purchase of services.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F9: Purchase ( as Account Invoice )

Enter the reference number in the Ref field if any1.


Select the Service Ledger (created under purchase group) from the List of Ledgers3.

Enter the Amount4.

Select the Input Service Tax ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts5.

The Service Tax Details sub form appears as shown

Accept the above screen for the Bill wise details sub form to appear6.



6.

Select the Type of Ref from the list of Method of Adj.7.

Select the Input Service Tax ledger from the List of Service Tax Ledgers and accept the Bill- wiseDetails sub form

8.

Enter Narration , if any in the Voucher entry screen9.

9.


Payment Voucher

Let us now create a Payment voucher for the above purchase.



The Bill-wise Details sub form for the Party ledger appears as shown



Select the Type of Ref from the list of Method of Adj.2.

Select the Purchase bill from the List of Pending Bills and accept the above screen3.

Select the Bank account to be credited in the Voucher Entry screen4.

Enter Narration , if any5.

5.




Input Credit Form

The Input Credit Form report displays the details of Service Tax Input Credit available with the company as on aspecified date. The same can be set off against Output service tax liability depending on the method of adjustmentyou have opted. If the rate of adjustment selected is 100%, then the entire available Input Service Tax can be setoff, or if 20% is selected then to the extent of 20% of the Output Service Tax liability can be set off for the currentperiod. The balance can be carried over for the next period.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Service Tax Reports > Input Credit Form

The Input Credit Form appears as shown.

Date - Date of the purchase invoice

Ref No - The reference number of the purchase invoice.

Partys' Name/Service Tax No. - Name and Service Tax Registration number of the service provider.

Party Address – Address of the service provider

Category Name - Name of the category of service purchased.

Bill Value:

This column displays Assessable value , Service Tax and Cess amount (Education Cess and SecondaryEducation Cess) as per the invoice

Assessable Value – The net assessable value for the service purchased.

Service Tax - Service tax payable as per the purchase invoice.

Cess - Cess (Education Cess + Secondary Education Cess) on the service tax as per the purchase invoice

Realised Value:

This column displays the Assessable value, Service Tax and total Cess (Education Cess and SecondaryEducation Cess) calculated on the payment made against the invoice value.

Assessable Value – The realised assessable value based on the payment made.

Service Tax Credit - The realised amount of service tax credit based on the payment made.

Cess Credit – Realised cess (Education Cess and Secondary Education Cess) on the Service Tax creditbased on the payment made.

Total Credit – Available Service Tax Credit inclusive of Educational Cess and Secondary Educational Cess .

Use the Alt+P key or click on Print option to print your report.




To create a voucher for payment of Service Tax ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > F5: Payment

Select the Output Service Tax ledger to be debited from the List of Ledger Accounts1.

On selecting the above, the Service Tax Bill Details sub form appears as shown2.

Select the Type of Ref3.

Select the Sales Bill from the List of Service Tax Bills and accept the Service Tax Bill Details sub form4.

3.

4.

N o t e : The Service Tax Payable is calculated on the payment received, i.e. 50, 000 .

Credit the Bank account5.

Set Payment Period to Yes and enter the From and To dates.6.

N o t e : The period for which the payment is made is specified in the above screen.

Enter Narration, if any.7.

8.



7.


N o t e : You can make a payment for a single category in one payment voucher. You can

pass separate payment vouchers for multiple categories

Press Alt + P and set Print GAR-7 Challan to Yes9.

9.

Use the Print Preview Option (ALT+I) to view the challan on the screen. The challan will print ingovernment prescribed format and can be used to remit service tax.

10.

The print preview of GAR-7 Challan appears as shown



Full Name :

The name of the company is printed in this field.

Company Address:

The address of the company is printed in this field.

Telephone No.

The telephone number of the company is printed in this field.

Assessee Code No.

The Assessee Code No. entered as in F11: Features is printed in this field.

Commissionerate Name

The Commissionerate Name as entered in F11: Features is printed in this field.

Commissionerate Code, Division Code, Range Code

The details entered in F11: Features are printed in this field

Accounting Code of the Service and Amount Tendered in Rupees

The Accounting Code of the service and amount charged is displayed in this field.

The first row displays the code and the amount for Service Tax

The second row displays the code and the amount for Cess

The third row displays the code and the amount for Secondary Education Cess

The fourth row displays the code and the amount for Interest

The fifth row displays the code and the amount for Penalty

The sixth row displays the code and the amount for Other Expenses

Total

The total of all the services provided is printed in this field.

(In Words) Rupees

The total amount is printed in words.

Cash/ Cheque/Draft/Pay Order No.

The Cash/ Cheque/Draft/Pay Order No. is entered manually in this field

Dated

The payment date is entered in this field.

Drawn On

The name of the bank is entered manually in this field.

Signature of the Tenderer with date

The Tax Payer signs in the above field.



Tax Payer’s Counterfoil

This section prints the same details as mentioned above and would be issued to the Tax Payer.

Credit Adjustment using Excise Duty

You can adjust your Service Tax payment using Excise Credit .

To create a Service Tax payment entry adjusting the Excise credit ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Payment (F5 )

Select the Output Service Tax ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts for the Service Tax Bill details toappear.

1.

Select Agst Ref in the Type of Ref column2.

Select the bill from the List of Service Tax Bills3.

4.



2.

3.

Enter the amount being paid4.

Enter the rate of Credit Adjustment5.

Credit the Excise Ledgers and specify the amount6.

Credit difference amount to the Bank A/c7.

Set the field Payment Period to Yes8.

Specify the Service Tax Period9.

Enter Narration if any10.

Accept the Voucher to Save.11.

12.

11.

Press Alt + P and set Print GAR-7 Challan to Yes12.

Press Alt + I to view the preview as shown13.



The Excise Duty value of the above entry is displayed in Section 5(A) row 7 in ST3 report .

The Education Cess and Secondary Education Cess for the above entry is displayed in Section 5(B)row 4 in the ST3 report .

Creating a Purchase Voucher using Excise Duty

The Excise Duty Input Credit can be availed on accrual and not on realization. You can create purchase entriesusing the Excise Duty ledgers.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F9: Purchase in the Item Invoice Mode

Enter the Supplier Invoice No. and Date1.


Select the Item from the List of Stock Items3.

Enter the Quantity .4.

Enter the Rate .5.

The Accounting Details sub form for the Stock Item appears as shown.



Select the Purchase ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts6.

Select the VAT/Tax Class , if not assigned during ledger creation.7.

Note: Tally provides you with Excise Classification even if the E x c i s e feature is not

e n a b l e d .

Accept the Accounting Details screen.8.

Select the Excise ledgers from the List of Ledger Accounts9.

Select the Input Vat ledger , created under Duties & Taxes from the List of Ledger Accounts10.

Select the VAT/Tax Class, if it is not assigned during ledger creation11.

Tab down for the Bill Wise Details screen to appear12.

13.

11.

12.

Select New Ref as Type of Ref .13.

Select Service Tax ledger as Not Applicable14.

Accept the above screen for the Voucher Entry screen to re appear.15.




16.

Accept the screen to Save.17.

Creating Vouchers for Arrears

To create vouchers for Arrears ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Payment (F5)

Select Arrears created under Indirect Expenses from the List of Ledgers .1.

Select the payment type Arrears , from the List of Payment .2.

N o t e : You can create vouchers for I n t e r e s t , O t h e r s and P e n a l t y by selecting the

appropriate options

Enter the Debit amount3.

3.



3.

Enter the rate of credit adjustment .3.

N o t e : The option to enter the rate of Credit Adjustment is available in an Arrears

Payment Type only.

Credit the Bank account.4.

Accept the voucher to save.5.

5.

N o t e :- The Arrears of Service Tax and Education Cess can be set off against I n p u t

Service Tax or Input Credit on E x c i s e , if available. The entry can be passed using

Journal Voucher. However, adjustment of Input Service Tax is not allowed in case of

I n t e r e s t , P e n a l t y and M i s c e l l a n e o u s payments.

The value of the above entry is displayed in Section 2(B) row 1 of the ST3 report.

Similarly, Payment entry for Penalty and Interest can be passed.

A Payment entry for Penalty, for Rs. 1500 will be displayed in Section 2(B) row 4 of the ST3 report.

A Payment entry for Interest, for Rs. 2000 will be displayed in Section 2(B) row 3 of the ST3 report



Transferring Earlier Service Tax Entries into Tally

You can transfer your pending Service Tax payable and available Service Tax Input Credit into Tally.

Let us consider that the Input Service Tax has a debit opening balance of 618.00 and the Output Service Taxhas a credit opening balance of 1236.00 for the previous year.

To transfer the above Service Tax Payables and Input service tax to the current year, a new ledger should becreated with Service Tax enabled , as mentioned below.


Enter the Name of the service Tax Ledger1.

Select the Group Duties & Taxes from the List of Groups in the field Under2.

Select the Type of Duty as Service Tax from the Types of Duty/Tax3.

Select the Category Name from the List of Service Categories .4.

Set Inventory values are affected to No5.

5.

Similarly, you can create ledger for Output Service Tax .



Now, create the customer and party ledgers by setting Maintain Balances bill-by-bill to Yes and enterthe opening balance.

Assume that balance carried forward from previous year, for a supplier is Rs. 5,618 and for a customer isRs. 11, 236 . The ledger creation screen appears as shown.

Let us now create a Journal Voucher to transfer Input service Tax .

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Journal (F7)

Debit the Input Service Tax ledger created for the current year selecting from the List of LedgerAccounts .

1.

The Service Tax Bill Details for the Input Service Tax ledger appears as follows.

Select the Type of Ref from Method of Adj .2.

Enter the Amount .3.

Service Tax Opening Bill Details appears as follows



Select the Party Ledger from the list of Service Party Ledgers. (The balance carried forward from theprevious year can be entered in the field Opening Balance)

4.

Select the corresponding bill from the List of Pending Bills5.

Enter the rate of Abatement if any6.

Enter the Expense if any7.

Enter the Assessable Value8.

Enter the rate of Service Tax9.

Enter the rate of Education Cess and Secondary Education Cess . Accept the Service Tax OpeningBill Details screen.

10.

Credit the Service Tax Input ledger created under Duties & Taxes for previous year.11.

11.

This journal will nullify the Input Service Tax Ledger of the previous year and transfer the pending service tax billand the relevant tax information to the current Service Tax ledger.

N o t e : The Input and Output Service Tax ledger for the previous year is created without

the Service Tax feature enabled and setting the opening balances. The Service Tax

liability and the Input Service Tax should be entered separately for each bill.


Accept the screen to Save the Voucher.13.

The Journal Entry for the Output Service Tax is created as follows:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Journal (F7)

Debit the Output Service Tax ledger created for the previous year.1.

2.



1.

Enter the Amount in the field Debit.2.

Credit the Output Service Tax ledger created for the current year3.

The Service Tax Bill Details for the Service Tax ledger appears as shown.


Accept the above screen for the Service Tax Opening Bill Details to appear.5.

5.

Select the Customer ledger from the list of Service Party Ledgers.6.

Select the appropriate bill from the List of Pending Bills7.

Enter the rate of Abatement if any.8.

Enter the Expense if any.9.

Enter the Assessable Value10.

Enter the rate of Service Tax11.

Enter the rate of Education Cess and Secondary Education Cess .12.

Accept the above screen.13.

Credit the Output Service Tax ledger created for the current year14.

15.



13.

14.


Accept to Save the Voucher.16.

Accounting of Advance Receipt from Customer

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Receipt (F6)

Select the Bank Account to be debited1.

Select the ledger to be credited from the List of Ledger Accounts2.

Select the customer ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts.3.

4.

3.

Enter the amount .4.

The Bill Wise Details screen appears:

Select Advance as Type of Ref.5.

Enter the Name , if required.6.

Select the Service Tax ledger from the List of Service Tax Ledgers7.

Accept the Bill Wise Details screen.8.




9.

Accept to Save the Voucher.6.

Creating a Memorandum Voucher

A Memorandum Voucher has to be created to capture the opening balance on the Service ledger.

To create a Memo Voucher,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Memorandum Voucher (Ctrl + F10)

Select the Service ledger, e.g. Advertising Consultancy from the List of Ledger Accounts1.


Select the Service Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts .3.




4.

N o t e : The above entry will reflect in the ST 3 report and does not affect any

f u n c t i o n a l i t y .

Service Tax Reports

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Service Tax Reports

More:

Service Tax Payables

Input Credit Form

ST3 Report

ST 3A Report



ST3 Report

The ST3 Report is a statutory report. This report displays the ST3 Form in the government prescribed formatthat is used to file Half – Yearly Service Tax returns to the Commissionerate of Service Tax .

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Service Tax Reports > ST3 Report

Use the Alt+P key or click on Print option to print your report.1.

This will display the Form ST-3 screen.

This is how the printed document will look:

For the period

April – September

October – March

The above boxes will be checked according to the ST-3 Period specified.

Name and Address of the Assessee1.

The Name and Address of the company is displayed in this field.

Registration Numbers of Premises for which return is being filed2.

The Service Tax Registration number is displayed in this field.

Category of Taxable Services for which return is being filed3.

This field displays the list of Taxable Services provided by the company.

Payment of Service Tax Category of Service4.

A. Payment details

This section displays the Service Tax payment details for all the months in the specified period. It also providesyou with a total of Service Tax for all the months.

This section displays a monthly breakup of Service Tax payment details for the specified period. It also prints the



total of payment details for all the months.

Amount received towards taxable service(s) provided - The total payment received from the customer,towards the taxable service provided is displayed in this field.

Amount received in advance towards taxable service(s) to be provided - The advance receivedtowards the Taxable Service is displayed in this field.

Amount billed – Gross - The Total sales amount for the Service Category for the month is displayed in thisfield.

Amount billed for exempted services other than export - The Total sales amount on an ExemptedService Category other than Export is displayed in this field.

Amount billed for exported services, without payment of tax - The total sales amount on an Exportedservice category is displayed in this field.

Amount billed for Services on which tax is to be paid - The total sales amount of the Taxable service isdisplayed in this field.

Abatement Claimed – Value - The total amount claimed as abatement on the service provided is displayedin this field.

Notification Number of Abatement - The notification number of abatement is displayed in this field. Thisnumber is provided by the Service Tax department.

Notification number of Exemption - The notification number of the type of exemption selected in theledger master is displayed in this field. (The type of exemption can be Export/Exempt)

Provisional Assessment order no. - This field is to be entered manually.

Service Tax payable - The total Service Tax payable for the service category is displayed in this field.

Education Cess payable - The total amount of Education Cess and Secondary Education Cess payablefor the service category is displayed in this field.

Service Tax paid in cash - The service tax paid in cash is displayed in this field.

Challan Number - The Challan number is entered manually in this field.

Challan date - The Challan date is entered manually in this field.

Service tax paid through Cenvat Credit - The Service Tax paid using the Service Tax Input Credit orExcise Input Credit is displayed in this field.

Education Cess paid in cash - The total amount of Education Cess and Secondary Education Cess paidin cash is displayed in this field.

Education Cess paid through Education Cess credit - The total amount of Education Cess andSecondary Education Cess paid through the Service Tax Input credit or Education Cess Input Creditis displayed in this field.

B. Details of Other payments

This section displays other payments made towards Service Tax.

Column (1)

Arrears of Service Tax - The arrears of Service Tax paid is displayed in this field.

Education Cess - The sum of Education Cess and Secondary Education Cess paid is displayed in this field

Interest - The Interest paid is displayed in this field.

Penalty - The Penalty paid is displayed in this field.

Miscellaneous - Any miscellaneous paid are displayed in this field.

Excess amount paid and adjusted subsequently - This field is manually entered. Any extra amountpaid that is adjusted with the payment is displayed in this field.

Column (2)

Amount Cash - The payables specified in Column (1) are displayed in this field.1.

Column (3)

Challan Number - The Challan number is manually entered in this field.1.

Column (4)

Date - The date of the Challan is manually entered in this field.1.

Column (5)

Amount – Credit - The Payment of arrear using the Input ST credit or Excise credit amount is displayed inthis field.

1.

Column (6)

Source Document No. - Payment of arrears using the Input cess is entered manually in this field.1.

Credit Details for Service Tax provider recipient5.

This section displays the monthly details of the Cenvat Credit passed on Service Tax .

A. Cenvat Credit Details

(1) Details of Credit

Opening Balance - The debit opening Balance of the duty ledger is displayed in this field. The value isupdated with the entries passed.



Credit Availed on Inputs - The Input credit availed on passing a default purchase entry with Excise duty(Excise ledger created under Duties & Taxes).

Credit Availed on Capital Goods - The Input credit availed on selecting the VAT Classification in a defaultPurchase entry is displayed in this field and selecting the Excise classification as Purchase on Capital Goods.

Credit availed on Input Service - The credit availed on Service Tax Purchases is displayed in this field.

Credit received from Inputs service distributor - This table remains blank.

Total credit availed - The total credit availed on the service is displayed in this field.

Credit utilized towards payment of service tax - The amount used to adjust Service Tax credit isdisplayed in this field. Excise duty Input or Service Tax Input utilized for payment of Service Tax

Closing Balance - The difference of the Total Credit Availed and the Credit utilized towards payment ofService Tax is displayed in this field.

B. Education Cess credit details

This section displays the monthly break up of the credit availed on Education Cess.

Opening Balance - The ledger debit opening balance of Education Cess is displayed in this field.

Credit of Education Cess availed on goods - The total credit availed on Education Cess and secondaryEducation Cess on goods with capital goods and without capital goods is displayed in this field..

Credit of Education Cess availed on services - The total credit availed using Education Cess andsecondary Education Cess on a realised Service Tax purchase is displayed in this field.

Credit of Education Cess utilized for payment of Service Tax - The total credit used to adjust theService Tax payment is displayed in this field. The total Service Tax Cess or Education Cess and SecondaryEducation Cess is displayed in this field.

Closing Balance - The difference of the Total Credit Availed and the Credit utilised towards payment ofService Tax is displayed in this field.

Credit Details for Input service distributor6.

(A) Details of Cenvat credit received and distributed

(B) Details of Education Cess received and distributed

(C) The taxable services on which input service credit has been distributed during the half yearperiod

This field remains blank as is not currently supported.

Details of amount payable but not paid as on the last day of the period for which the return is filed.- The details of the Service Tax due are manually entered in this field.

7.

Self Assessment Memorandum - The name and place of the company and the signature of the concerned8.

7.

authority has to be filled manually.8.

Acknowledgement

The details are to be filled by the Service Tax department .



ST 3A Report

The ST 3A report is similar to ST 3 report and is a provisional Assessment report only.

Introduction

Central Sales Tax (CST) is a tax on sales of goods levied by the Central Government of India. CST is applicableonly in the case of inter-state sales and not on sales made within the state or import/export of sales.

Inter-state sale is when a sale or purchase constitutes movement of goods from one state to another. Accordingly,consignments to agents or transfers of goods to branch or other offices is not a sale as per the CST Act

CST is payable in the state where the goods are sold and movement commences. The tax collected is retained bythe state in which the tax is collected. CST is administered by Sales Tax authorities of each state. Thus, the StateGovernment Sales Tax officer who assesses and collects local (state) sales tax also assesses and collects CST.



Inter-state Sale

An inter-state sale takes place when a sale or purchase:

Leads to movement of goods from one State to another State.

Is achieved by the transfer of documents of title while the goods are being moved from one State toanother State.

Example 1: “A” in Andhra Pradesh sells and delivers goods to “B” in Karnataka.

Example 2: “A” in Maharashtra delivers goods to “B” in Gujarat. “B” sells it to “C” in Gujrat by transferring thedocument of title during the goods movement from Maharashtra to Gujrat.

N o t e : Goods that are sold within a state, but while transporting travel through another

state is not considered inter-state sales.

Subsequent Sales

Subsequent sale is a Sale of goods after the first time it has been sold through transfer of documents of title.Under the CST Act, sales tax is levied at a single point only (first sale) and no sales tax is payable on subsequentsales.



CST Transaction Forms

Dealers have to issue certain declarations in prescribed forms to buyers/sellers. The type of forms are C, D, E1,E2, F, H and I. Forms C, E1, E2, F and H are printed and supplied by Sales Tax authorities. Dealers have to issuedeclarations in these forms printed and supplied by the Sales Tax authorities. Form D is to be issued bygovernment organization departments making purchases. These forms are to be prepared in triplicate.

Form C

The sales tax on inter-state sale is 4% or the applicable sales tax rate for sale within the State whichever is lowerif the sale is to a dealer registered under CST and the goods are covered in the registration certificate of thepurchasing dealer. The purchasing dealer is eligible to get these goods at concessional rate if a declaration in Cform is submitted to the selling dealer.

Form D

Sale to government is taxable @ 4% or applicable sales tax rate for sale within the State whichever is lower. Thisconcession on CST is applicable if Form D is issued by the government department which purchases the goods.

Form E1

This form is issued by the dealer who makes the first inter-state sale during movement of goods from one State toanother. This enables the purchaser to claim exemption from CST on the second inter-state sale during themovement of goods by transfer of documents of title.

Form E2

This form is issued by the second or the subsequent seller when the goods move from one state to another in aseries of inter-state sales by transfer of documents of title. This form enables the purchaser to claim exemptionform CST on subsequent sale of goods.

Form F

This form is issued when goods are despatched to another state as a consignment or to the branch of a dealer inanother State. The CST is not payable if there is only inter-state stock transfer and there is no sale. To claim inter-state movement of goods as “not a sale”, the dealer has to produce a declaration in Form ‘F’ received fromConsignment Agent or Branch Office in another State. One Form F covering receipts during one calendar monthhas to be issued.

Form H

This form is issued by an exporter for purchase of goods. The purchase of goods is for an export order or inpursuance of an export order. These goods are then sold in export and the form enables seller of the goods to theexporter to claim deduction on the goods sold for export.

Form I

This form is issued by a dealer located in a Special Economic Zone (SEZ). No CST is levied when sales is made toa dealer located in SEZ.

Rate of CST

In an inter-state sale to a registered dealer against form C the rate of CST is 4% or local sales tax ratewhichever is lower.

If under the local sales tax law, sale or purchase is exempt from CST the CST is Nil.

In an inter-state sale to government against form D the rate of CST is 4% or local sales tax rate whicheveris lower.

Rate of CST in case of inter-state sale of declared goods without form C or D is twice the rate of taxapplicable to the local sale or purchase of such goods in that state.

Rate of CST in case of other goods ( i.e. non-declared goods) is 10% or the applicable local sales tax of thatstate, which ever is higher.



Filing of CST Returns

CST amount shall be paid and returns to be filed on a monthly/Quarterly basis and as the case may be. Duedate for submitting the return is on or before 15th of the succeeding month or due date for submitting the localsales tax or VAT return of a particular state whichever is later. CST Returns shall be submitted to local CommercialTax Officer.

CST Features in Tally

State specific CST Returns

Tracking of forms:

C forms - (Issuable/Issued/Receivable/Received)

E1, E2 Forms – Issued against sale of goods in transit by the buyer

F forms - For Consignment sales and Branch Transfer

H Forms – for sale in course of exports

D Forms - For sale to Govt. Organisations

I Forms - For sale to SEZ customers

Reminder Letters/Covering letters to customers

Auto-Fill option.



Enabling CST in Tally

To enable CST feature in Tally :

Go to Gateway of Tally> F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation

In the Company Operations Alteration screen set Enable Value Added Tax and Set/Alter VATdetails to Yes and save.

N o t e : CST feature is enabled only if Enable Value Added Tax is set to Y e s .

Configuring Invoice for CST

To activate the E1 and E2 form in transactions:

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12: Configuration > Invoice/Orders Entry .

In the Invoice Configuration screen set Activate ‘E1’ or ‘E2’ Transaction? to Yes.

Accept to save.

Creating CST Party Ledgers

Creating Party Ledgers for Sundry Creditors

To create party ledgers for Sundry Creditors:


In the Ledger Creation screen enter the name of the company supplying goods to you in the Name field.

In the Under field, select Sundry Creditors option from the List of Groups .

If required set Maintain balances bill-by-bill? to Yes . Enter details in the Default Credit Period ifapplicable. By default the Inventory Values are affected? field is set to No .

Enter in the Tin/Sales Tax No. field.

Accept Yes to save.



Creating Party Ledgers for Sundry Debtors

To create party ledgers for Sundry Debtors:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Ledgers > Create .

In the Ledger Creation screen enter the name of the company receiving goods from you in the Namefield.

In the Under field, select Sundry Debtors option from the List of Groups .

If required set Maintain balances bill-by-bill? to Yes . Enter details in the Default Credit Period ifapplicable. By default the Inventory Values are affected? field is set to No .

Enter in the Tin/Sales Tax No. field.

Accept Yes to save.



Creating Sales and Purchases Ledger

Creating Sales Ledgers

To create ledgers under Sales Accounts group:


Enter a name for the sales account ledger in the Name field.

In the Under field select Sales Accounts from the List of Groups .

Set Yes in Used in VAT Returns? .

Select Not Applicable from VAT/Tax Class list .

Set the Inventory Values are affected? to Yes if you are maintaining inventory.

Accept Yes to Save.

Creating Purchase Ledgers

To create purchase ledgers under Purchase Accounts group:


Enter a name for the purchase account ledger in the Name field

In the Under field select Purchase Accounts from the List of Groups

Set Yes in Used in VAT Returns?

Select Not Applicable from VAT/Tax Class list

Set the Inventory Values are affected? to Yes if you are maintaining inventory

Accept Yes to Save



Creating CST Ledger for Sales

To create a CST Ledger under Duties and Taxes for CST on Sales:


In the Ledger Creation screen enter the name of the CST ledger in the Name field.

In the Under field select the Duties & Taxes from List of Groups .

Select CST from Types of Duty/Tax menu in the Type of Duty/Tax field.

Select Not Applicable from VAT/Tax Class menu in the VAT/Tax Class field.

Enter the CST percentage applicable in Percentage of Calculation?

Select the Method of Calculation from Type of Duty menu.

Accept Yes to Save.



Creating CST Paid on Purchases Ledger

To create CST paid on purchases ledger under Purchase Accounts group. This ledger is created under PurchaseAccounts to include/appropriate CST value to purchase.


Enter a name for the Purchase account ledger in the Name field

Select Purchase Accounts from the List of Groups menu in the Under field

Press Ctrl + Enter to go to the Group Alteration screen

Set Yes in Used for Calculation (eg. Taxes, Discounts)?

Accept Yes to Save



In the Ledger Creation screen, Enter the name of the ledger and select the expense group from the list.

Set the Inventory Values are affected? to Yes if you are maintaining inventory.

In Percentage of Calculation? enter the CST percentage applicable.

Select the Method of Calculation from Type of Duty menu.

Set Used in VAT Returns? to Yes.

Select Not Applicable from VAT/Tax Class list.

Accept Yes to Save.


Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F9: Purchase

Select As Invoice .

N o t e : Purchase Voucher can also be entered in As Voucher mode.

Enter the date and reference.

Select the Party to be credited from the List of Ledger Accounts in Party’s A/c name.

In the Party Details screen, check/modify details.

Select the Purchase Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts .

Select Inter-State Purchases from VAT/Tax Class .

Select an item from the List of Items .

N o t e : To create an Item, refer to topic Stock Items .

Enter the Quantity and the Rate to get the amount in the Amount field.

Select the CST paid on purchases ledger under purchase accounts.

Select the form to issue from Form Types .

Enter the form number and date in Form No and Date respectively. Leave it blank if not yet issued.

Select the form to receive from E Form Types .

Enter the form number and date in Form No and Date respectively. Leave it blank if not yet received.

N o t e : E Form Types are displayed only if:

1. Activate ‘E1’ or ‘E2’ Transaction? is set to Y e s from F12: Configure .

2. C F o r m is selected from Form Types.

Enter narration if required and accept Yes to save.


Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F8: Sales .

Select As Invoice .


Select the Party to be credited from the List of Ledger Accounts and enter Party’s A/c name.

In the Party Details screen, check/ modify details.

Select the Sales Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts .

Select Inter-State Sales from VAT/Tax Class .


N o t e : To create an Item, refer to the topic, Stock Items .


Select the CST Tax ledger (under Duties & Taxes) for sales.

Select the form to receive from Form Types .

Enter the form number and date in Form No. and Date , respectively. Leave it blank if not yet received.

Select the form to issue from E Form Types .

Enter the form number and date in Form No. and Date , respectively. Leave it blank if not yet issued.




Enter narration if required and Accept to save.

N o t e : C Form is for registered customers.

D Form is for Government Organisations.

F Form is for Branch transfers.

H Form is for deemed exports.

I Form is for SEZ Customers.



Creating Debit and Credit Notes

You can create Debit and Credit Notes for changes in Quantity, Rate, Return of Goods, and so on. Debit/Creditnote is enabled in F11:Features in the Gateway of Tally.

To Create a Debit/Credit Note:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers .

In the Accounting Voucher Creation screen, select F9:Debit Note/ F8: Credit Note to create a debit/credit note.

Select As Invoice .

N o t e : Debit/ Credit Note can also be entered in As Voucher mode.


Select the Party to be credited from the List of Ledger Accounts and enter Party’s A/c name .

In the Party Details screen, check/ modify details.

Select the Sales/ Purchase Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts .

Select Inter-State Sales/Inter-State Purchases from VAT/Tax Class .


N o t e : To create an Item, refer to the topic, Stock Items .


Select the CST tax ledger under Duties & Taxes for credit note, and CST paid on purchases ledger underPurchase Accounts for debit note.

Select the form to receive from Form Types .

Enter the form number and date in Form No. and Date , respectively. Leave it blank if not yet received.

Select the form to issue from E Form Types .

Enter the form number and date in Form No. and Date , respectively. Leave it blank if not yet issued.




Enter narration if required and Accept to save.



CST Reports

CST Reports display forms to be received and issued. It allows you track pending forms and reconcile forms.

To view CST Reports:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > CST Reports

Forms Receivable

Forms Issuable



Forms Receivable

This displays the CST forms receivable for the statutory reports from the CST Party Ledgers.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > CST Reports > Form Receivable

Select from CST Party Ledgers/Groups

Forms to be received for the selected ledger are displayed in the Forms Receivable screen

Enter in the Form Number and Date for forms received

Accept to save

Forms Issuable

This displays the CST forms issuable for the statutory reports from the CST Party Ledgers.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > CST Reports > Form Issuable.

Select from CST Party Ledgers/Groups.

Forms to be issued for the selected ledger are displayed in the Forms Issuable screen.

Enter in the Form Number and Date for forms received.

Accept to save.

Auto Fill option for CST

The Auto Fill option for CST is available in the Form Issuable/ Form Receivable screen. Use this option to filter thetype of forms and to fill up the form number for a group of vouchers.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > CST Reports > Form Receivable/ FormIssuable .

Press F5: Auto Fill – CST .

In the Set Form Numbers screen.

Select the form from Form Types .

Enter the Form Number and Form Date for the group of vouchers.

Accept to save.

In the Forms Receivable/ Forms Issuable screen, Accept to save.



Appropriation in Vouchers

Form numbers and date entered in Forms Receivable/ Forms Issuable are recorded and displayed in the Vouchers.To view this:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Daybook .

Press Alt + F2 to change the period.

Select the voucher and enter to go to the Accounting Voucher Alteration screen.

The entries are displayed in Form No: and Date: fields.



Viewing All Vouchers

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > CST Reports > Form Receivable/ FormIssuable .

Select the party’s ledger from List of Ledgers .

Press Alt + F2 to change the period.

In the Forms Receivable/ Forms Issuable , screen press F12: Configure .

In the CST Configure screen, set Show All Vouchers? to Yes .

Show Vouchers of: displays Form Types . Select the type. To view all types, select Not Applicable .

Reminder and Covering Letters

You can send reminder letters to parties who have to issue forms. You can also send covering letters to parties,confirming receipt of forms.

Configuring Reminder and Covering letters

To configure reminder and covering letters:

Go to Gateway of Tally > F12:Configure > Printing .

Reminder Letter – CST Form.

Covering Letter – CST Form.

Enter default details in the CST Reminder Print Config screen, for reminder letters, and in the CSTCovering Print Config screen, for covering letters.

Reminder Letters

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > CST Reports > Form Receivable .


In the Forms Receivable screen, press Print (Alt + P) .

In the Report Generation screen, set Print Reminder Letter? to Yes .

Print Preview



Covering Letters

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > CST Reports > Form Issuable .


In the Forms Issuable screen, press Print (Alt + P) .

In the Report Generation screen, set Print Covering Letter? to Yes .

Print Preview



Introduction

Fringe Benefit Tax was introduced as part of Finance Act, 2005 as an additional income-tax and came into forcefrom April 1, 2005.

The term Fringe Benefits means ‘any consideration for employment provided by way of any privilege, service,facility or amenity provided by the employer to the employees’.

Fringe Benefit Tax is to be levied on the employer in respect of fringe benefits provided/deemed to be providedby the employer to his employees during any financial year commencing on or after 1.4.2005

Fringe Benefit Tax is payable at the rate of 30% of the value of fringe benefits computed in the mannerprescribed under the Section 115WC.

Salient Features of FBT

Some of the features of FBT are listed as follows:

Fringe Benefit Tax payable by an employer is in respect of perquisites or fringe benefits provided or deemedto have been provided by the employer to his employees in addition to the cash salary or wages paid duringthe year.

1.

Fringe Benefit Tax is levied in addition to the Income-Tax charged.2.

Fringe Benefit Tax is payable at the specified rate on the value of fringe benefits provided to the employees. The value of fringe benefits is calculated in accordance with the provisions of Section 115WC of theIncome-Tax Act, 1961.

3.

An employer has to pay Fringe Benefit Tax even if no Income-Tax is payable on the total income.4.

Like any other direct tax, Fringe Benefit Tax is not an allowable expenditure for the purpose of computationof taxable income.

5.



Important points relating to Fringe Benefit Tax

Some of the important points to be observed in FBT:

Rate is calculated on Net Expenses.1.

Expenses are not to be segregated between ‘Paid to Employees’ and ‘Paid to Outsiders’.2.

Depreciation is calculated on the basis of Income Tax.3.

FBT is applicable on Service Tax paid on any of the expenditure chargeable to FBT.4.

Payment of FBT in case employers have employees based both in and outside India.5.

Medical reimbursement upto Rs. 15,000 per employee is charged to FBT.6.

Applicability of FBT in case an employer is engaged in two or more business activities.7.

Different rates of tax on the Fringe Benefits provided by different industries.8.

FBT is not payable on Advance paid.9.

Tax Rate is 30% + Surcharge @10% + Education Cess @ 2% .10.

One Ledger may have expenditure relating to different groups under FBT.11.

Characteristics of FBT

Some of the characteristics of FBT are:

It is a tax on expenditure, not income.

It is a tax on employer, not employees.

It is a surrogate tax on employers.

It cannot be recovered from the employees.

It is to tax benefits that are usually enjoyed collectively by the employees and cannot be attributed toindividual employees.

A combination of presumptive and non-presumptive approaches has been adopted.



Classification of Employer for FBT

Under FBT, an Employer is defined as any of the following:

Company

Firm

Association of Persons or a Body of Individuals (except Fund or Trust or institution eligible for exemptionunder section 10(23C) or registered under section 12AA)

Local Authority

Every Artificial judicial person, not falling within any of the above

N o t e : Under FBT, they are considered as Employer even if the Taxable Income is NIL.

Classification of Not Employer for FBT

The following are not included as Employer under FBT:

An Individual (i.e., Proprietorship concern)

Hindu Undivided Family

Association of Persons or a Body of Individuals exempt under section 10(23C) or registered under section12AA

Central Government

State Government



Direct Fringe Benefit

Direct Fringe Benefit as classified under section 115(WB) (1) means:

Any privilege, service, facility or amenity, which is directly or indirectly provided by an employer to hisemployees (including former employee or employees).

Any free or concessional tickets provided by the employer for private journeys to employees or their familymembers.

Any contribution by the employer towards an approved superannuation fund for employees.

Any reimbursement, which is directly or indirectly made by the employer to employees for any purpose.

Deemed Fringe Benefit

The Fringe Benefits are deemed to have been provided if the employer incurs any expenditure or makes anypayment in the course of business or profession. This includes any activity whether or not such activity is carriedon with the object of deriving income, profits or gains. Any expenditure incurred or payment made for thefollowing constitutes deemed fringe benefit.

Entertainment

Hospitality

Conference

Sales promotion including publicity

Employee welfare

Conveyance, tours and travel

Hotel, boarding, lodging

Repair, running and maintenance of cars

Repair, running and maintenance of aircraft

Use of telephone

Maintenance of any accommodation in the nature of guest house

Festival celebrations

Health Club

Any other club

Gifts

Scholarship to employees’ children

Consumption of fuel other than industrial fuel



Payment of FBT to the government

In accordance with the provisions, the FBT should be paid in advance during any financial year and the regularassessment of fringe benefits is to be made in a later assessment year.

Advance Fringe Benefit Tax

Every assessee who is liable to pay advance tax has to pay tax on the current fringe benefits calculated in themanner laid down.

The amount of advance tax payable in the financial year is 30% of the value of the fringe benefits paid or payablein each quarter. This is payable on or before the 15th day of the month following each quarter except for thequarter ending 31st of March.

For the quarter ending on the 31st of March of the financial year, the amount of advance tax (on an estimatedvalue) is to be paid on or before the 15th of March for the financial year.

If tax is not paid or the tax paid is less than the prescribed rate, the assessee is liable to pay simple interest at therate of 1% on the amount by which the advance tax paid falls short.

Filing of FBT return

An employer who has paid or made provision for payment of fringe benefits to his employees during the previousyear is required to furnish a return of fringe benefits in the prescribed form and manner to the Assessing Officerbefore the due date.

For a company as an employer the due date is the 31st of October of the assessment year.

For a person who is an employer but not a company and whose accounts are required to be audited, the due dateis the 31st of October of the assessment year.

For any other employer, the due date for filing the return of fringe benefits is the 31st of July of the assessmentyear.

After the due date, the Assessing Officer may issue a notice to the assessee requiring him to furnish a return inthe prescribed form and manner within a period of thirty days.

Failure to furnish a return of fringe benefits or delayed filing of such return will result in the levy of interest at therate of 1% for each month of delay or till the assessment is made on the amount of tax on the value of fringebenefits.



FBT in Tally

FBT in Tally provides an easy-to-use and flexible interface. It allows the user to view and print FBT Reports andChallans.

N o t e: FBT can be processed for both Accounts Only and Accounts With Inventory

c o m p a n i e s .

Features of FBT in Tally

The FBT functionality in Tally supports the following features:

Simple and user-friendly.

Quick and easy to set up and use.

Challan management and printing for prompt and accurate filing of tax.

One-time easy configuration to enable FBT.

You have to enter transactions; FBT is automatically calculated and generated in Reports.

The FBT Report has FBT Computation Report which displays detailed FBT calculations for each categoryunder FBT.

The report also displays FBT (User-defined Ledger), Education Cess and Surcharge tax payable.

Allows you to generate, print and file ITNS 283 Challan from Tally. All categories and assessee types of FBTare incorporated in Tally. Any changes made are updated automatically and manual changes are notrequired.

FBT Assessee Type and FBT Category are displayed in the Statutory Masters with the details. Values intransactions are taken from here. Changes in details are updated automatically.

Enabling FBT in Tally

Configuration of FBT

Set the option Use Accounting terminology of as India/SAARC in the F12: Configuration screen.

Enable FBT in F11: Features

You can enable Fringe Benefit Tax (FBT) by using the F11: Features screen.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation1.

Set the option Enable Fringe Benefit Tax (FBT) to Yes2.



2.

Set Set/Alter FBT Details to Yes . The Company FBT Assesse Details sub form appears as shown.3.

3.

Income-Tax/PAN Number

If the Income Tax/PAN Number is not entered in the Company Master , the same can be entered in F11:Features under Company FBT Assessee Details .

If the Income Tax/PAN Number is entered in the Company Master, it cannot be edited in F11: Features underCompany FBT Assessee details .

Assessee Type

Set the Assessee Type to which your company belongs to. This information is used to calculate the Income Tax,Surcharge and Education Cess while computing FBT.

N o t e :

* The option Is Surcharge Applicable ? is applicable only if your Assessee Type is

Association of Persons/Body of Individuals. On setting this field to Yes in the

Company FBT Assessee Details, the surcharge is calculated in FBT Computation

R e p o r t .

* For the Assessee Type Local Authority, the option Is Surcharge Applicable? is not



a p p l i c a b l e .

* For all the other Assessee Types, this option is set to Y e s by default and you are not

allowed to edit the same.

Assessee Category

Select the appropriate Assessee Category from the list.

Display of FBT Assessee Types and Categories in Statutory Info.

Tally provides you with predefined set of FBT Categories and Assessee Details.

FBT Assessee Type

To view the FBT Assessee Type details,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Info > FBT Assessee Type

Select the Assessee Type from the List of Assess Types.

The screen has a Name field displaying the Assessee Type.

The FBT Assessee Details displays the Rate of FBT, Surcharge, Additional Surcharge (Cess), AdditionalEducation (Cess) and the dates they are applicable from.

FBT Categories

To view the FBT Category details,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Info > FBT Category



Select the FBT category from the List of FBT Categories. The screen displays the FBT Category and thecorresponding Section code.

The FBT Category section displays the Eligible Percentage for all the Assessee Categories and the datesthey are applicable from.

N o t e : Any changes to the values will be updated on the Tally website.

FBT masters

You have to specify the FBT Ledger Names under any of these main group heads – Duties and Taxes, SundryCreditors, Sundry Debtors, Indirect Expenses or sub groups of these main group heads.

Create the following ledgers under specified groups:

Tax Ledger under Duties and Taxes

Party Ledger under Sundry Creditors

Expense Ledger under Indirect Expenses



Creating Tax Ledger

The tax ledgers created under the group Duties and Taxes are used for calculation of tax.

Tax Ledger is used in FBT payment.

To create a Tax Ledger,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Ledgers > Create

Enter the Name of the tax ledger

Select the group Duties & Taxes from the List of Groups

Select FBT from the list of Types of Duty/Tax


Create ledgers for Party/Suppliers under the group Sundry Debtors/Sundry Creditors.

To create an FBT Party Ledger ,


In the Ledger Creation screen, enter the name of the party in the Name field

In the Under field, select Sundry Creditors/Sundry Debtors

If required, set Maintain balances bill-by-bill? to Yes . Enter details in the Default Credit Period , ifapplicable. By default, the Inventory Values are affected? field is set to No.

Accept and Save.


All the expense ledgers are to be created under the group Indirect Expenses . The group Indirect Expenses isused for booking expenses.

To create an FBT Expense ledger,


Enter the Name of the expense ledger

Select the group Indirect Expenses from the List of Groups

When Is FBT Applicable ? is set to Yes , the field Default FBT Category? will be displayed. You have toselect the appropriate FBT Category from the List of FBT Categories .

Accept Yes to save the ledger



Creating/Altering FBT Voucher Type

To create or alter a FBT Voucher type such as Journal

Go to Accounts Info. > Voucher Types > Create/Alter > Journal1.

In the Voucher Type Alteration screen, Type the Name of Class . For example, Fringe BenefitRecovery.

2.


Set Use Class for FBT Recovery to Yes and Accept the screen.



Creating FBT Vouchers

Creating FBT Journal Voucher:

FBT Journal Voucher can be created in two ways:

FBT Journal Voucher without a Class1.

FBT Journal Voucher using a Class2.



Creating FBT Journal without a class


Select Entertainment from the list and enter the amount in the debit column2.

Select the Party (Supplier) from the list. Amount appears automatically in the Credit column3.

N o t e : FBT supports selection of a ledger with multiple categories. To do this, set Allow

selection of FBT Category during entry to Y e s in F12: Configure screen.

Creating FBT Journal with a class

To create a Journal Voucher using a Voucher Class ,


Select F7: Journal button from the button bar or press the F7 key. Select the class as Fringe BenefitRecovery from the list Class Table.

2.

The FBT Journal voucher screen displays as shown. This provides the recovery details from an employeeand the same appears in the FBT Computation report.

3.

Debit the Supplier

Credit the Expenses incurred

Enter the narration , if required4.

Accept the voucher to save5.



Creating a Payment voucher to book expenses for FBT

To create a FBT Payment voucher,


Select F5: Payment from the Accounting Voucher Creation screen2.

Enter the Date3.

Select FBT Ledger in Particulars from the List of Ledger Accounts . The FBT Category sub screendisplays. Select the appropriate category from the list of FBT Categories and enter the amount.

4.

N o t e : The FBT Category is displayed if Allow selection of FBT Category during

e n t r y is enabled in F12: Configuration .

5. Credit Bank or Cash through which the payment is to be made against the FBT Ledger.

6. Enter Narration , if required

7. Accept to save



Creating a Payment voucher without FBT helper button


Select F5: Payment in the Accounting Voucher Creation screen2.

Select the Bank/Cash from the list3.

Select the FBT Ledger from the list and enter the amount4.

On selecting the FBT Ledger , the field FBT Details displays above the Narration field. Set FBT Details toYes

5.

6. On setting FBT Details to Yes , the following screen displays

7. Enter the FBT Filter details and Accept to save the payment voucher screen



Creating a Payment voucher with the FBT helper button

Payment of FBT can be made using FBT Helper button. Payment will be calculated only on the vouchers which arebetween the From Date and To Date.

N o t e : FBT Helper feature is available only if Use Single Entry mode for

P y m t / R c p t / C o n t r a ? in F12: Configure (Voucher Configuration) is set to Y e s .


Select F5: Payment in the Accounting Voucher Creation screen2.

Press Alt + F or click FBT Helper from the button bar to view the FBT Filters sub screen3.

Select the Type of Payment from the list. The selection will be reflected in the Challan4.

For example, if Advance Tax (100) is selected in the payment filter, Advance Tax is automatically marked(x) in the FBT Challan.

5. Select the ledger from the List of FBT Ledgers

Enter the From Date and To Date to select the period for computing payment and for the generationof FBT Challan

6.

Select the Bank ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts, which is to be credited in the PaymentVoucher

7.

Enter Narration , if required8.

Click Print button or press Alt+ P to print FBT Challan , if required 9.

Accept to save10.

9.

10.



Printing FBT Challan

You can Print the FBT Challan for a FBT Payment voucher created manually or using the FBT helper button.

To print a FBT Challan ,

Press Alt + P or click Print from the button bar in the Payment Voucher screen to view the VoucherPrinting screen

1.

Press Backspace to navigate from Print Yes or No ? and move the cursor to Print as FBT Challan ?2.

Set Print as FBT Challan to Yes3.

Accept the sub screen to save4.

3.

4.

N o t e :

* If the option Print as FBT Challan is set to Y e s then Default Payment Challan and

C h e q u e will not be printed.

* Ensure you click With Preview button or press Alt+ I to view the FBT Challan in

Print Preview mode

Print Preview of FBT ChallanUNREGISTERED VERSION OF CHM TO PDF CONVERTER PRO BY THETA-SOFTWARE


Creating a Purchase voucher



Select F9: Purchase from the button bar or press F9

Select As Voucher/As Invoice

Enter the Date and Reference

Credit the party ledge r from the List of Ledger Accounts

Select the expenses from the List of Ledger Accounts and debit the same. The FBT Category subscreen displays. Select the appropriate category from the list of FBT Categories and enter the amount

Enter Narration, if required

Accept to save



N o t e : Set the option Allow Expenses/Fixed Assets in Purch. Vouchers to Y e s In F 1 2 :

C o n f i g u r e .

Creating a Debit Note

A Debit Note for FBT can be entered in Voucher or Invoice mode.

N o t e : Set the option Use Debit/Credit Notes to Y e s in F11: Features .

To create a Debit Note,


Select F9: Debit Note from the button bar or press Ctrl + F9

Select As Voucher/As Invoice

Enter the Date and Reference

Debit Cash from the List of Ledger Accounts

Select the Party from the List of Ledger Accounts and credit the same

Enter Narration , if required

Accept to save



FBT Computation

FBT Computation lists only those categories for which ledgers are created and transacted.

To view the FBT Computation screen,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > FBT Reports > FBT Computation

FBT Payment Details

Set the option Show FBT payment Details to Yes in F12: Configure for the payment details to be displayed inthe FBT Computation screen.



The screen displays as shown

Less: Advance Tax Paid

The value in this field is taken from all the Payment vouchers with the FBT Ledger and Type of paymentmarked as Advance Tax (100) with the appropriate period.

Less: Self Assessment Tax Paid

The value in this field is taken from all the Payment vouchers with the FBT Ledger, Type of payment marked asSelf Assessment Tax (300) with the appropriate period.

Less: Tax paid on Regular Assessment

The value in this field is taken from all the Payment vouchers with the FBT Ledger and Type of paymentmarked as Tax On Regular Assessment (400) with the appropriate period.

Section Code

Set the option Show Section Code to Yes in F12: Configure if the Section code i s to be displayed in the FBT



Computation screen.

The screen displays as shown.

Expenditure Amount

This field displays the amount that is spent on the FBT marked Indirect Expenses like Entertainment, Conveyance,and so on.

Amount Recovered

The amounts that are recovered from the employees towards the expenses incurred are displayed here.

Nett Amount

The difference between the amount incurred on the Indirect Expenses and the amount recovered from theEmployee is the Nett Amount.

Percentage as per Sec 115WC

The percentage of Rate of Tax of FBT Category (Enabled in F11: Features ) for the respective FBT category isdisplayed in this field.

For more details, refer FBT Ledger Category

Value of Fringe Benefit

The Percentage obtained as per sec 115WC on Nett Amount for the respective category is the value ofFringe Benefit.



FBT Ledger Category

From the FBT Computation screen press Enter on any particular FBT Category to drill down to a report thatdisplays all the ledgers marked with respective FBT Category.

Consider the FBT Category Entertainment – under the Section 115WB (2) (A)

Name of the Ledger

Name of the ledger marked with above mentioned FBT Category is displayed here.

Expenditure Amount

The amount spent towards Entertainment - 115WB (2) (A) and accounted for a particular ledger is displayedhere.

Amount Recovered

The amount that has been recovered from the employees towards the expenses incurred is displayed here.

Nett Expenditure

The difference between the amount spent on Entertainment and the amount recovered from the Employeeis the Nett Amount.

Percentage as per Sec 115WC

The percentage of the Rate of Tax of Company Assessee Category (enabled in F11: Features) for the respectiveFBT category is displayed in this field.

Value of Fringe Benefit

The percentage obtained as per sec 115WC on Nett Amount for the respective category is the value of FringeBenefit.

FBT

Tax is calculated on the value of fringe benefits. Rate of tax is extracted from FBT Assessee Type master for theselected Assessee Type in F11: Features.

For example, if Assessee Type is Association of Persons/Body of Individuals then, Income Tax Rate is 30%,Surcharge is 10 % and Education Cess is 2%.

N o t e : The percentage will vary for different Assessee Types.

Surcharge

Surcharge is calculated on Fringe Benefit Tax Amount and is extracted in the same way as Rate of Tax .

Education Cess

Education Cess is calculated on the sum of value of Income Tax and Surcharge. Additional Surcharge Rate/CessRate is also extracted in the same way as Rate of Tax.

Total Tax

This is the total of the Income Tax, Surcharge and Education Cess percentage values.

N o t e :

* From FBT Ledgers of Category, you can drill down to FBT Ledger Vouchers.

* From FBT Ledger Vouchers, you can further drill down to Accounting Voucher

Alteration screen.



Introduction

A manufacturer of excisable goods can avail MODVAT (now CENVAT) credit of duty paid on the goods purchasedfrom any dealer w.e.f. 04.07.94. The dealer intending to issue modvatable (now Cenvatable) invoices should getthemselves registered with the jurisdictional Range Superintendent by following the procedure prescribed in Rule9 of Central Excise (No.2) Rules, 2001. All the godowns /Store-rooms should be registered separately.

A Central Excise Registered dealer should ensure that the prescribed register is maintained for the godown/ Store-room. All the consignments received/ issued from the godown have to be entered in the register (further details inCentral Excise Rules and Manual).

The Dealer shall issue the invoices in quadruplicate. The copies of the invoices issued by a first stage dealer and asecond stage dealer shall be marked at the top as "FIRST STAGE DEALER" and "SECOND STAGE DEALER"respectively. The invoice issued by a first stage or second stage dealer in the case of imported goods and by asecond stage dealer in the case of other goods, shall be duly authenticated by the officer.

The Dealer shall issue one invoice for every consignment dispatched in one batch and at a given time. If aconsignment is split into two or more batches, then each consignment is dispatched separately with separateinvoices.

Who is a Trader/Dealer?

A Trader/Dealer is someone who purchases and sells goods and maintains an inventory of goods.

A registered Excise dealer is a dealer of Excisable goods who is registered under Central Excise rules, 1944 and onthe strength of whose invoice Cenvat credit can be taken.

Who will be covered under Dealer Excise?

The following dealers are covered under Excise for Dealer.

First Stage Dealer

A First Stage Dealer is one who purchases goods directly from any of the following:

The manufacturer under the cover of any invoice issued in terms of the provision of Central Excise Rules,2002 or from the depot of the said manufacturer.

Goods purchased from the premises of the consignment agent of the said manufacturer.

Goods purchased from any other premises from where the goods are sold by or on behalf of the saidmanufacturer.

Goods purchased from an importer or from the depot of an importer.

Goods Purchased from the premises of the consignment agent of the importer.

Second Stage Dealer

A registered dealer who purchases goods from the First Stage Dealer is called a Second Stage Dealer.



Flowchart on Excise Dealer

The categorization of a dealer as first stage or second stage is not predefined. It is decided during the purchase.Therefore, a dealer may be a first stage dealer or a second stage dealer depending on the type of purchase.

Assume you are a First Stage Dealer and you buy the goods from the importer or Manufacturer.

The Invoice issued on sale of goods to the Manufacturer or Second Stage Dealer has to indicate the amount ofExcise Duty passed on or proportionate value to the excise of the goods being sold.

Example 2

Let us assume that you are a Second Stage Dealer and you purchase goods from a First Stage Dealer.

Type of Duties and Method of Calculation

The Duties for Excise can be calculated on Assessable value and on Duty Value. According to the Excise laws, findbelow the list of Excise duties with the method of calculation.

Type of Duty Method ofCalculation

Formula for Calculation

Basic Excise Duty On Assessable Value Assessable Value

Special Excise Duty On Assessable Value Assessable Value

Additional Duty ofExcise (Goods ofSpecial

Importance) AED(GSI)

On Assessable Value Assessable Value

Additional Duty ofExcise (Textile andTextile Articles)

AED (TTA)

On Duty Value BED + SED

Additional Duty ofExcise (Tea and TeaWaste)

AED (TTW)


National CalamityContingent Duty(NCCD)

On Duty Value BED + SED + AED(GSI)

Countervailing Duty(CVD) On Import)

On Assessable Value Assessable Value OR AssessableValue + BED

Education Cess On Duty Value BED + SED + AED(GSI)+AED(TTA) +AED(TTW) + NCCD +ADE + SAD

Secondary EducationCess (SED)

On Duty Value BED + SED + AED(GSI) +AED(TTA) + AED(TTW) + NCCD+ ADE + SAD

Education Cess onCVD

On Duty Value CVD Value

Special AdditionalExcise Duty (SAD)

On Duty Value BED + SED + AED(GSI) +AED(TTA) + AED(TTW) + NCCD+ ADE

Additional Duty ofExcise (ADE)




Filing Excise Returns

Every registered dealer is required to maintain a Daily Stock Register of records of receipts of duty-paid goods andissue thereof, and submit quarterly return in the Form - 2.

Excise for Dealers in Tally

The Excise for dealers feature in Tally supports the following, making it easy for computation:

Easy to use

Fast and error free voucher entry

Complete tracking of Excise duty on each transaction

Printing of Excise invoice with the Supplier & Manufacturer details as User configurable option

Reports are generated as per Central Excise Statutory requirements

Generation of Quarterly Return in Form-2

Generation of Sales and Purchase Extract



Enabling Excise in Tally

You can enable Dealer - Excise in Tally, in the F11: Features screen.

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation

The Company Operations Alteration screen appears as mentioned below

Set Enable Dealer – Excise to Yes .1.

Set Set/Alter Dealer – Excise Details to Yes .2.

The Company Excise Details sub-form appears as shown below.3.

3.

ECC/PAN Based Regn/Code No.: The 15-Digit PAN based registration number is an alphanumericnumber mentioned in the Registration Certificate. The first part would be the 10-character (alphanumeric)Permanent Account Number [PAN] issued by the Income Tax Authorities to whom the registration numberis allotted (includes a legal person).

The second part comprises a fixed 2-character alpha-code indicating the category of the Registrant. Thethird part is a 3-character numeric code.

Commissionerate: The Commissionerate of central Excise is the division under which your registeredpremise is located.

Range

Code: Enter the code of the range under which your company is registered.

Name: Enter the name of the range under which your company is registered.

Address: Enter the address of the Range under which your company is registered.



Division

Code: Enter the code of the division under which your company is registered.

Name: Enter the name of the division under which your company is registered.

Address: Enter the address of the division under which your company is registered.



The ledger creation screen appears as shown below.

Enter the name of the Supplier in the Name field.1.

Select the group Sundry Creditors in the Under field.2.

Set Maintain Balances Bill by Bill to Yes and enter the Default Credit Period3.

Inventory Values are affected is set to No4.

In the Mailing Details section enter the supplier contact details, Income Tax and the Sales Taxnumbers .

5.



5.

Set Excise Details to Yes to display the Excise Details sub form.6.

6.

Enter the Excise Registration Number of the supplier.7.

Enter the Range under which the supplier’s company is registered.8.

Enter the Division under which the supplier’s company is registered.9.

Enter the division under which the premise of the Supplier’s company is registered.10.

Select the Default Nature of Purchase from the Nature of Purchase list. The table lists the Type ofPurchase , which can be changed during transactions.

11.

N o t e : The Excise Details sub-screen appears for ledgers created under Sundry Creditors

and Sundry Debtors only.

Creating Customer Ledger



Creating Customer ledger is similar to that of creating the Supplier Ledger but it should be created underSundry Debtors.


Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock item > Create

The Stock Item Creation screen appears as shown below.

Enter the name of the Stock Item in the Name field.1.

In the Under field, select the group under which the Stock Item is created from the List of Groups list.2.

Select the unit for the Stock Item from the Units list.3.

Set Excise Details to Yes to display the Duty Details sub form as shown below.4.



4.

Enter the Tariff Classification number.5.

N o t e : The Tariff Classification field is mandatory. The Excise Purchase/Sales/Credit

Note and Debit Note will list the Stock Items with Tariff Classification only.

Select the Type of Duty from the List of Duties6.

Specify the Rate of Duty7.

Select the Method of Calculation8.

After entering the details accept Yes to save9.

Refer to Types of Duties and Method of Calculation for details on all the duties.

Creating Ledgers for Excise Duty

The Ledgers for Excise Duty are used to Account the Excise Duty .


Select Duties & Taxes from the List of Groups1.

Select Excise for Type of Duty/Tax2.

Select the appropriate Duty Head from the list3.

Set Inventory values are affected to Yes4.

5.

3.

4.

Enter the Percentage of Calculation5.

Select the Method of Calculation from the Type of Duty list6.

Similarly, you can create Ledger Masters for different Rates of Excise Duties .

Methods of Excise Accounting

The user can use any of the following two methods to account Excise Duty in Tally

On the Total Cost Basic Rate1.

Assessable Value + Taxes = Cost of the Item

The sum of the Total Assessable Value and the Excise Duty will form a part of the Cost of the Item



Eg. Stock Item A costs Rs. 50/ unit

100 nos of Stock Item A Total Cost Rs. 5000(@ Rs. 50/unit)

Excise Duty@16% Rs. 800/-

Education Cess@2% Rs. 16/-

Secondary Education Cess @ 1% Rs. 8/-

The Total Amount Rs. 5824/-

The Total Purchase Cost/unit Rs. 5824/100= 58.24

N o t e : The Excise Duty paid by the d e a l e r becomes the cost for the d e a l e r .

Appropriation by Quantity or Value2.

Eg. Stock Item A cost Rs. 50/unit

100 nos of Stock Item A Total Cost Rs. 5000

Excise Duty@16% Rs. 800/-

Education Cess@2% Rs. 16/-

Secondary Education Cess @ 1% Rs. 8/-

The basic Rate of the Stock Item is retained and the details of the Excise Duty are shown using the dutyledgers created under the purchase account. The appropriation is done by Tally and the duty against is addedto the cost of the material.

Creating Ledgers for VAT

VAT ledgers are created to allocate Input and Output VAT on purchase and sales transactions.


Select Duties & Taxes from the List of Groups1.

Select VAT for Type of Duty/Tax2.

Select the Default VAT/ Tax Class from the List of VAT/Tax Class3.

4.

5.



3.

By default Inventory values are affected field is set to Yes4.

Set Percentage of Calculation, if required5.

Method of Calculation is set to On VAT Rate by default.6.

N o t e: If the V A T / T a x Class is not selected at the ledger level, the same can be

selected during v o u c h e r entry.

Creating Voucher Type

The Excise Voucher Type for Purchase , Sales , Credit Note and Debit Note has to be created before creatingthe invoices.

Creating Purchase Voucher Type

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Type > Create

Name: Enter the name of the Voucher type.

Type of Voucher: Select the type of voucher as purchase from the list of Voucher types .

Abbreviation: You may abbreviate the Vouchers type as per your requirement.

Method of Voucher Numbering: Select Automatic for the method of Voucher numbering.



Use Advanced Configuration: Set it to Yes to specify the numbering method, if required.

Refer Creation of Voucher Types for details on other fields.

Use for Dealer Excise: Set this field to Yes to enter Excise Purchase to capture Assessable Value and ExciseDuty breakup.

Accept the screen to save after entering all the details.

N o t e : The Use for Dealer Excise option will appear in Purchase/Debit Note and

Sales/Credit Note only and if the Dealer - Excise is enabled in the F11 Feature F3 –

Statutory & Taxation .

Creating Sales Voucher Type

Creating Sales Voucher Type is similar to that of Creating a Purchase Voucher Type but it should be createdunder the Sales Type of Voucher.

Creating a Debit Note Voucher Type

A Debit note Voucher type has to be created if a Debit Note has to be passed. The Voucher Type should becreated under Debit Note type of Voucher.

Creating a Credit Note Voucher Type

A Credit note Voucher type has to be created if a Credit Note has to be passed. The Voucher Type should becreated under Credit Note type of Voucher.

Creating an Excise Opening Stock

Tally allows you to maintain a record of Excise Opening Stock Balance of the Excise Stock Items

N o t e : Excise Opening Stock option under the Inventory Info menu will appear only if you

create an Excise Purchase voucher type with Use for Dealer Excise o p t i o n set to Y e s .

To create an Excise Opening Stock :

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Excise Opening Stock

Creating an Excise Opening Stock

You can track the Excise Opening Stock by entering the Stock Item Purchase details in the Excise OpeningStock .

Let’s consider an Example: A user buys 100 nos of Stock Item A from King & Sons and 50 nos of Stock ItemA from MICO Manufacturing Limited .

The Opening Stock carried forward for the current year will be 35 nos of Stock A ( 25 nos . from king & Sonsand 10 nos from MICO Manufacturing Limited ). To record this Excise Opening Stock balance, you need tofollow the below procedure:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Excise Opening Stock

Enter the purchase Invoice Number of the Stock Item in the field Supplier Invoice No.1.

2.

3.



1.


Enter the Party details in the Party Details sub form3.

Accept the above screen and select the Nature of Purchase from the list4.

4.

Select the Purchase Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts5.

Select the Stock Item from the List of Excise Stock Items for the Item Allocations screen to appear6.

Enter the Purchase Quantity in the field Quantity , i.e. quantity purchased from the supplier7.

Enter the purchase Rate8.



8.

Accept the above screen and the Excise Details screen to appear9.

9.

Enter the Supplier Invoice Number and Supplier Invoice Date10.

Enter the PLA RG 23 Sl. No. if any11.

Enter the Quantity on hand in the field Excise Opening Stock and accept the Excise Dealer sub form12.

N o t e : For accurate Duty calculations , all the fields in the above screen have to be

a c c e p t e d .



Accept the above screen13.

Similarly, the Excise Details sub form for the Stock Item purchased from MICO ManufacturingLimited appears as shown

The Excise Opening Stock appears as shown



N o t e : The Excise Opening Stock voucher is an o p t i o n a l voucher, which will not

affect your Book of Accounts. They can be viewed under Exception Reports and D a y

B o o k .

Creating an Excise Purchase Invoice

The Voucher Types created should be used for all the purchase and sales entries of Excise transactions.

The Excise feature supports Multi Currency and Voucher Class.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select F9: Purchase

Select the Excise Purchase as the Voucher Type from the list of Voucher types in the Invoice mode.1.

Select Item Invoice on the right side of the screen2.

Enter the Supplier Invoice No. and Date3.

Select the appropriate Party’s A/c Name from the list displayed4.

The Party Details sub-form will appear as shown



Supplier’s Details5.

This section will include the Consignee and supplier details like the contact details, Sales Tax number and theExcise registration details. The details will appear automatically if they are provided during the Supplier LedgerCreation.

N o t e : The Consignee and the Supplier details appear if Allow separate Buyer and

Consignee Names in F12: Configuration is enabled

Manufacturer/Importer Details6.

If your supplier is not a Manufacturer , enter the name , address , Excise registration details Invoicenumber and date of Invoice , of the Supplier Manufacturer /Importer.

If you are not a Self Importer, you can enter the respective company details.

After entering the above details, the Accounting Voucher Creation screen re appears.

7.

Select the Nature of Purchase from the list of Nature of Purchase . This field defines the Supplier’s role inselling the product to us.

7.

Agent of Manufacturer is selected when the supplier is an agent of the manufacturer and the goods is directlysold from the manufacturer to the buyer. The buyer is a First Stage Dealer. In this case the excise invoice may beissued by the manufacturer or the agent.

First Stage Dealer is selected when the goods are directly purchased from the First Stage Dealer. In this casethe excise invoice is issued by the First Stage Dealer.

Importer is selected when the goods are directly self imported. In this case the invoice is issued by the exporter.

Manufacturer is selected when the goods are directly purchased from the manufacturer. In this case the exciseinvoice is issued by the manufacturer.

Purchase from Importer is selected when the goods are purchased from the importer. In this case the invoice isissued by the importer.

Second Stage Dealer is selected when the goods are purchased from the Second Stage Dealer. In this case theinvoice is issued by the Second Stage Dealer.



N o t e : By default the Nature of Purchase selected in the Party Ledger appears in the

above field which can be changed.

Select the Purchase Ledger.8.

Select the VAT/Tax Class from the list.9.

Select the Stock Item from the List of Stock Items table to display the Excise Details (Excise Allocations)Screen.

10.

N o t e : The List of Stock Items displayed will list the Stock Items with Excise feature

e n a b l e d

Select the Name of the Item and the Item Excise Allocations Screen appears.11.

Enter the Order Number , if any12.

13.

14.

12.

Enter the Quantity and Rate13.

Accept the Item Allocation Screen for the Excise Details sub-screen for the stock item will appear.14.

The Supplier Invoice No. is automatically captured from the Ref field in the Voucher entry screen. However,it is an editable field.

16.

N o t e : The Supplier Invoice No. is mandatory and can be alphanumeric. If the Ref No.

is not entered in the Voucher creation screen, then the Supplier Invoice No. field by

Default will appear as Not Applicable and the cursor remains in the field until a valid

number is entered. The Supplier Invoice Date is mandatory. The date has to be same or

lesser than the Voucher date.

The Supplier Invoice Date and the Assessable Value is automatically captured. However, the above fieldscan be edited. Ensure that the Supplier Invoice Date is same as the Excise Purchase Invoice date.

17.

Any additional cost apart from basic value falling under the purview of Excise can also be included in theAssessable Value field.

18.



Enter the PLA RG Number , if any18.

The Type of Duty and the Rate of Duty defaults, as specified in the Item Masters Creation screen19.

N o t e : The entries for the Excise Duty have to be passed in Invoice mode only.

Accept the Excise Details sub screen for the Voucher Entry screen to reappear.20.

Select the required Excise Duty Ledgers21.

Accept the Invoice to Save22.

Creating a Non Excise Purchase Invoice for Excise Stock Item

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select F9: Purchase

Select the Purchase Voucher from the List of Voucher Types .1.

Enter a Reference Number in the Ref field if required.2.

Select the appropriate Party’s Account Name from the list displayed.3.

Enter the details in the Party Details sub form.4.

Select the Purchase Ledger for the Ledger Allocation.5.

Select the Excisable Stock Item from the List of Items table.6.

N o t e : The list of items will consist of E x c i s a b l e and Non Excisable stock items

The Item Allocation screen appears as shown below.8.

8.

Specify the Quantity and the Rate of the Stock Item and accept the Item Allocation screen for thePurchase Creation screen to reappear.

9.

Enter Narration if required.10.



10.

Accept the voucher to Save .12.

In the above scenario, credit cannot be passed on the stock item.

Creating an Excise Sales Invoice

To create a Sales Invoice,


Select Excise Sales Voucher type from the list of Voucher Types .1.

Enter the Sales Invoice Number in the No. Field if the Voucher type is set to Manual.2.

Select the Party’s Ac Name from the list displayed.3.

The Party Details sub-form appears as below.4.



Note: The Buyer's Details will appear automatically if specified during the ledger

c r e a t i o n .

Enter the details in corresponding fields and accept the screen to save.5.

Select the Sales ledger for allocation on returning to the Voucher Entry Screen.6.

Select the Stock Item from the list of Items.7.

On selecting the item, the Supplier Details sub-screen for the item appears as shown below.8.

Select the appropriate purchase from the List of Purchases table. This table lists all the purchases madefor the Stock Item .

9.

Upon selecting a Purchase, the cursor skips to Quantity Utilized field. The value in this filed can bealtered.

10.

10.

If the Purchased quantity is 100 and the Utilised quantity is 25, it can be specified in the above field.

N o t e : If the utilized quantity is more than the purchased quantity, Tally warns you with

a message

On selecting the second entry, Tally filters the List of Purchases to display the purchases made from theSupplier and the nature of purchase specified in the first entry.

11.

N o t e : The Supplier Details sub-form can hold the details belonging to a Single Supplier

and one type of purchase only.

After selecting the Supplier Details, the Item Allocation screen for the Stock Item appears. The detailsare automatically captured from the supplier details sub form. However, the fields can be altered.

12.



12.

Accept the Invoice to save the entry.13.

Use Alt+P from the Sales Invoice Screen to display the print preview of the Sales Excise Invoice (ISSUEOF INVOICE UNDER RULE 11 OF CENTRAL EXCISE RULES 2002). Set the print configuration for the SalesExcise Invoice by selecting the appropriate buttons

14.

Press Alt+I and accept Yes to print preview the Sales Excise Invoice screen. The preview of ExciseSales Invoice appears as shown below:

15.



The Excise Sales Invoice includes the Sales details of the Stock item sold, like the Quantity , Rate andAmount .

The Excise Duty passed on credit information will contain Assessable Value, Rate of Basic Excise Duty, Rateof Cess and Cess amount is printed in this section.

To print the Purchase details and Excise duty breakup in the Excise Sales Invoice , click on F12: Configure .

Set Print Trader Supplier info to Yes . Setting this option to Yes , the Excise details of the Stock item areprinted in the Invoice with supplier and Manufacturer’s Excise details and Invoice No . and Date ofPurchase .

The preview of the Excise Sales Invoice appears as shown below. The Invoice can be printed in Neat Formatonly.



The Excise Sales Invoice will include the Supplier and the Manufacturer’s details and the Customer details.

This invoice provides you with the Purchase and Sales details of the Excise Stock Items , along with theExcise Duty paid on the Products.

In the above screen, it is assumed that the Excise Stock Items are purchased from a First Stage Dealer .Hence, the Sales Excise Invoice is titled as Second Stage Dealer , which indicates the stage of thisTransaction.

The title of Excise Invoice printing will be as follows:

If the Stock Items are purchased from a Manufacturer/Importer , then the sales invoice for that item willprint as First Stage Dealer .

If the Stock Items are purchased from a First Stage Dealer , then the sales invoice for that item will print asSecond Stage Dealer .

If the Stock Items are purchased from a Second Stage Dealer , then the Sales Invoice for that item will printas Second Stage and Subsequent Dealer .

The Sales Excise Invoice prints the VAT/CST/ST registration details, captured from Company Creation Screen.

Range/Code, Division / Code, Commissionerate

The details specified in the Excise Details sub form of the Statutory & Taxation of F11: Features is printed inthe corresponding fields.

Buyer/Consignee details

The Buyer/Consignee details specified in the Party Details sub form is printed in this field. The details will alsoinclude the corresponding Excise and Tax registration details.

Sales Section

This section will print the Excise Stock Items sold. It displays the Quantity , Rate and the total Amount of theStock Items sold.

Excise Duty passed on credit information will contain Description of goods , Assessable Value , Rate of BasicExcise Duty , Rate of Cess and Cess amount is printed in this section.

If the quantity of Stock Items sold is less than the purchased quantity, then the proportionate Assessable Valueof item is captured along with the Rate of Duty of Item and Education Cess from the Purchase Invoice.

The Amount of Excise Duty and Amount of Cess is printed in words.

N o t e : Similarly, if there is more than one type of duty, then the breakup of the duties

are printed.

VAT Declaration



The VAT Declaration is printed if the VAT ledgers are allocated in the sales entry.

Purchase Section

This section prints the purchase details of the Stock Items .

The Supplier details like the Name and Address along with the Excise Registration details, of theManufacturer/Importer , First Stage or the Second Stage Dealer is printed in this field.

It also prints the Purchase Invoice number and the Date of the Purchase invoice issued by the Supplier andthe Manufacturer.

The Invoice will also print the PLA RG Serial numbers.

The Excise Duty Section will list the Description of Goods , Tariff Classification number of the Stock Itemand the Quantity of the Stock Item purchased.

The Rate of Basic Excise Duty , Assessable Value , Duty per Unit , Total Duty Amount and Ed Cessamount is captured from the corresponding Purchase Entry.

N o t e : Excise Sales Invoice as per Rule 11 should be a single page document.

Therefore, it is recommended to use a maximum of Six Stock items and one ledger on

an A4 size paper and seven stock items and one ledger on Legal size paper.

The preview of a Sales Invoice for an Import transaction appears as shown.

N o t e : The Excise Sales Invoice prints an I m p o r t D e c l a r a t i o n for an I m p o r t

T r a n s a c t i o n .



Creating a Sales Invoice without passing Excise Duty

Tally allows you to sell an Excise Stock Item using an Excise Sales Invoice or Standard Commercial invoicewhere duty is not passed on to the buyer.

For Example : Assume that you have 20 nos of Excisable Stock Item

You can sell both 10 nos of Excisable Stock Item and 5 nos of Non Excisable Stock Item in a single salesinvoice.

The above example can be entered in a single Sales Invoice screen as displayed below:


Select Sales Invoice from the Voucher Types2.

Enter the reference number in the Ref field3.

Select the Party’s A/c name from the List of Ledger Accounts4.

4.

Select the Sales ledger for ledger allocation.5.

Select the Stock Item from the List of Stock Items table to display the Supplier Details sub form .6.



6.

The Purchase entries passed for the Stock Items using an Excise Purchase Voucher Type is displayed inthe List of Purchases table.

7.

Select the Purchase entry from the list.8.

N o t e : If you do not wish to select the purchase transaction with Excise duty value for

the item, you may select Not Applicable , and then specify the Item quantity in the

item allocation screen .

On selecting the entry, specify the quantity to be sold in the Quantity Utilized field.9.

You can select the purchase entries belonging to different Party’s in the same sub form.10.

10.

Accept the above screen for the Item Allocations screen to appear.11.

If the above Stock Item is not Excisable , then specify the same in Quantity field of the Item Allocationscreen.

12.



12.

N o t e : In the above screen, 10 items are E x c i s a b l e and 5 items are Non Excisable .


13.



Creating an Excise Debit Note

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Debit Note (Ctrl + F9)

Select the Debit note created for Excise from list of Voucher Types.1.

Enter the Ref number in the Ref field.2.

Select Party’s A/c Name from the list of ledger accounts3.

Specify the required details in Party details sub form.4.

Select the Purchase ledger for allocation5.

Select the Item from the list of Excise Stock Items6.

The Excise Details sub form for the Stock Item appears.7.

7.

Select the Purchase Invoice from the List of purchases .8.

The cursor then skips to Quantity Return field. Specify the quantity to be returned to the supplier.9.

Accept the above screen for the Item Allocation screen to appear.10.

Accept the Debit Note to save the entry.11.



Creating an Excise Credit Note

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Credit Note (Ctrl + F8 )

Select the Credit Note created for Excise from the List of Voucher Types1.

Enter the Ref number in the Ref. field.2.

Select the Party’s A/c Name3.

Enter the corresponding details in the Party Details .4.

Select the Sales ledger to be allocated.5.

Select the Name of the stock item from the list of Excise Stock Items6.

The Supplier Details sub form for the Stock Item is displayed7.



7.

Enter the Sales Invoice Number issued to the customer.8.

The Sales Invoice Date is automatically captured.9.

The corresponding Purchase Invoices are listed and select the purchase invoice from the list of Purchases.10.

Enter the Quantity returned.11.

The Credit Note screen reappears, the rate and the amount is automatically captured.12.


13.



Creating a Non Excise Credit Note

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Credit Note or Ctrl + F8

Select default Credit Note from the List of Voucher Types .1.

If an Excise Credit Note is selected, then Tally prompts you with the following message.2.

Therefore, only a default Credit Note has to be passed against a default Sales Invoice .


Select Party’s A/c Name4.

5.

3.

4.

Enter the corresponding details in the Party Details sub form5.

Select the Sales ledger to be allocated.6.

Select the Stock Item from the List of Stock Items to display the Supplier Details sub form.7.

The Supplier Details sub form will list the purchases for Excise Stock Items only, and hence will not listthe Purchases. The Non Excisable Stock Item can be allocated in the Item Allocation screen

8.

If the Excisable Stock Items are returned, then the quantity has to be entered in the above screen byselecting the appropriate Purchase from the table.

9.

If the Non Excisable Stock Items are returned, then select Not Applicable in the above screen.10.

The Item Allocation screen appears as shown below.11.



11.

Enter the returned Quantity .13.

On accepting the Item Allocation screen, the Credit Note screen reappears.14.

14.



Excise Reports

To view Excise Reports

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Dealer Excise Reports

The Dealer Excise Reports menu consists of

Excise Stock Register

Excise Purchase Bill Register

Form RG 23D

Form 2

Sales And Purchase Extract



Excise Stock Register

Every Registered Dealer has to maintain Stock Register recording the daily receipt and issue of Excisable goodsready for inspection by the officers of the department.

The Excise Stock Register in Tally gives the purchase and sales information. It has two sections, which are, theReceipt section for Purchases and Issues section for the Sales/Debit Note/Credit Note details.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Report > Dealer Excise Reports> Excise Stock Register

Select the Stock Item from the list of items to view the report.

The above screen lists the Purchase details.

Receipt

Invoice No. /Date: The number given to the Invoice .

Name and Address of the Supplier: The field displays the Name and the Address of the Supplier .

Nature of Purchase: Lists the Nature of Purchase as specified during the Invoice Entry.

Quantity: Quantity purchased.

Rate: The Rate at which the item is purchased.

Assessable value: The Total Assessable Value of the product.

Duty per Unit: The Total Duty amount divided by quantity is printed in this field.

Total Duty: The Total Duty for the Stock Item is displayed in this field. This field captures the total Duties paid.

Cess per Unit: Excise Cess per item is displayed.

Total Cess: Total Cess on the total Quantity of the Stock Item.

Issue

The Issue/Debit Note/Credit Note details in the Excise Stock Register are specified in the screen below.



The F6: Date button lists all the Purchase and Sales transactions for a specified period.

Toggle to F6: Purchase Date button to list the Excise Sales/ Excise Credit Note/ Excise Debit Notetransactions, for the purchase bills as specified in the Purchase date range.

Duty Details

Duty Passed On/Duty not Passed on : This row displays the details of the Stock Items on which the duty ispassed or not passed.

Balance Duty : The Balance available Duty Amount to be passed on is displayed in this field.

Issued Quantity : The Total Quantity of Items Sold/Returned is displayed in this field.

Total Duty : This Field displays the Total Duty utilized in whole or proportionate to the QuantityIssued/Returned . The return inward quantity is displayed in negative.

Total Cess : The Total Cess Amount utilized is displayed in this field.

Use Alt +F1: Detailed to get a detailed Report. The detailed Excise Stock Register appears as shown below.

Vch Type/Invoice No./Date/: The Document type, Invoice number and date as specified in theSales/Credit Note/Debit Note Invoice is displayed in this field.

An additional column appears.

Vch Type/Invoice No./Date: The Document type , Invoice Number and Date as specified in theSales/Credit Note/Debit Note Invoice are displayed in this field and the Duty Details column displays theName and Address of the Party . This Column also details the Duty Passed On, Duty not Passed On and theBalance Duty.

Use the Alt + P key or click on the Print option to print your Report. The printed document will appear as shownbelow.



The preview of the Excise Stock Register on pressing Alt + F1 is as shown below.



N o t e : The Excise Stock Register can be printed in Neat Mode format only.



Excise Purchase Bill Register

The Excise Purchase Bill Register provides the bill wise details of all the purchase and corresponding sales invoicesfor each of the purchase invoices.

The Register consists of two sections Receipt and issue.

Receipt

This section details the Purchase details.

Invoice No. / Date: This column displays Purchase Invoice number and Date .

Particulars : This column displays the Stock Item purchased and its Tariff Number .

Name and Address of the Supplier : This column displays the Name and the Address of the Supplier .

Nature of Purchase : This column lists the Nature of Purchase as specified during the Invoice Entry.

Quantity : This column displays the Quantity purchased.

Rate : The Rate at which the item is purchased appears in this column.

Assessable Value : The Total Assessable Value of the item appears in this column.

Total Duty : The Total Duty for the Stock item is displayed in this column.

Total Cess : The Total Cess Amount calculated on the purchased quantity is displayed in this column.

Issue

This section displays the Sales/Credit Note/Debit Note details.

Duty Details

Duty Passed On / Duty Not Passed On: This column displays the Duty details on the quantity sold.



Balance Duty : The Balance Unutilized Duty Amount is displayed in this column.

Issued Quantity : The Total Quantity of Items Sold/Returned is displayed in this column.

Total Duty : This column displays the Total Duty Utilized in whole or proportionate to the quantityIssued/Returned .

Total Cess : The Total Cess Amount utilized on the Stock items Issued/Returned

On using Alt + F1: Detailed , an additional column displays the Voucher details column.

Vch Type/ Invoice No. / Date : This column displays the details of the Voucher entries passed.

Name and Address of the Party : On selecting Alt +F1 the Duty Details column displays the Name and addressof the Party account.

F2: Period displays all the Purchase entries corresponding to the date specified.

The preview of the Excise Purchase Bill Register appears as follows

The preview of the Excise Purchase Bill Register on pressing Alt + F1 is as shown below.

Form RG 23D

Form RG 23D details the Excise purchases and the corresponding Sales transactions .

The preview of Form RG 23D prints as shown.UNREGISTERED VERSION OF CHM TO PDF CONVERTER PRO BY THETA-SOFTWARE


Invoice No. /Date : The Purchase Invoice number and the date are displayed in this field.

PLA RG23 Sl. No. : The PLA RG23 serial number for the Purchase Invoice is printed in this field

Name and Address of Manufacturer/ Importer including Central Excise Regn No/ Range/ Division/Commissionerate

The Manufacturer/ Importer details entered in the Party details sub form of the Purchase voucher is printedin this field.

Quantity : The quantity of items purchased is printed in this field.

Rate : The rate of the Stock Item purchased is printed in this field.

Assessable Value : The Assessable Value of the Stock Items is printed in this field.

Duty per Unit : The Excise Duty paid per unit is printed in this field.

Excise Duty : The Excise Duty calculated on the Assessable Value is printed in this field.

Edn Cess per Unit : The Education Cess paid per unit is printed in this field.

Education Cess : The total Education Cess paid is printed in this field.

Sec Edn Cess per Unit : The total amount of Secondary Education Cess paid per unit is printed in this field.

Secondary Education Cess : The total amount of Secondary Education Cess paid is printed in this field.

Total Duty : The Total Duty paid is printed in this field.

Duty Passed on

This row lists the Excise duty passed on to the corresponding Excise Sales

Form - 2

Every Registered dealer is required to submit a return as per Excise Rules 2002 every quarter in Form - 2

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Dealer Excise Reports > Form – 2

In the Form - 2 printing screen,

Press Backspace and specify the From date and To date

Form - 2 displays the details of the Stock item with the maximum duty value.

To configure Form – 2 to show details of all stock items, from the above printing configuration screen press F12:configure and set Show All Items to Yes



Form - 2 is divided into two sections.

The Issue/ Sales section and the Receipt / Purchase section.

The preview of Form - 2 , Issue/ Sales section appears as shown.

Press Pg Down to view the Receipts/ Purchase section,



N o t e : For invoices with more than one Stock item entries, Form - 2 captures the details

of the Stock item with the maximum duty component value.

Name of the First Stage/Second Stage Dealer: The name of your company is printed in this field.1.

2.

3.

1.

Excise Registration Number: The Excise Registration Number of your company, specified in the F11:Features screen is printed.

2.

Address: The address of your company specified in the Company Creation screen is printed in this field.3.

Particulars of Invoice issued by First Stage / Second Stage Dealer4.

This section will list the Sales Invoices.

Invoice Number with Date : The Date and the Invoice Number is printed in this field.

Description of the Goods : This column list the Stock Items sold

Central Excise Tariff Heading : The Tariff Number of the Stock Items are printed in this column.

Quantity : The total number of Stock items sold is printed in this column.

Amount of Duty : The total amount of Excise Duty passed on for the Stock Item is printed in this column.

Amount of Ed Cess : The total amount of Education Cess passed on for the Stock Items is printed in thiscolumn.

Amount of Sec Ed Cess : The total amount of Sec Education Cess passed on for the Stock Items is printed inthis column.

Particulars of the Documents based on which the credit is passed on5.

Invoice / Bill of Entry Number with Date : The Purchase Invoice number and date is printed in this field.

Name and Address of the First Stage /Second Stage Dealer : This column displays the First Stage /SecondStage Dealer details specified in the Purchase Entries.

Name and Address of the Manufacturer / Importer : This column displays the Manufacturer / Importerdetails specified in the Purchase Entries.

Description of the Goods : The description of the goods is printed in this column.

Central Excise Tariff Heading : The Tariff the number of the Stock Items are printed in this column

Quantity : The quantity of goods purchased is printed in this column.

Amount of Duty : The total duty paid on the Stock Items is calculated in this column.

Amount of Ed Cess : The total amount of Education Cess paid on for the Stock Items is printed in this column.




Sales and Purchase Extract

Excise Sales and Purchase Extract report displays the details of purchase and sales transactions of all excisablegoods (Excise Invoice as well as Commercial Invoice).

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Dealer Excise Reports > Sales and PurchaseExtract

In the Sales and Purchase Extract printing screen,

Press Backspace and specify the From date and To date

The preview of Sales and Purchase Extract appears as shown.

Press Pg Down

Name of the First Stage/Second Stage Dealer:1.

The name of your company specified in the Company Creation screen is printed in this field.

Excise Registration Number:2.

The Excise Registration Number of your company, specified in the F11: Features screen is printed.

Address:3.

The address of your company specified in the Company Creation screen is printed in this field.

Particulars of Invoice issued by First Stage / Second Stage Dealer4.

This section will list the Sales Invoices.

Invoice Number with Date : The Date and the Invoice Number is printed in this field.

Description of the Goods : This column list the Stock Items sold

Central Excise Tariff Heading : The Tariff Number of the Stock Items is printed in this column.

Quantity : The total number of Stock items sold is printed in this column.

Amount of Duty : The total amount of Excise Duty passed on for the Stock Item is printed in this column.

Amount of Ed Cess : The total amount of Education Cess passed on for the Stock Items is printed in thiscolumn.


Particulars of the Documents based on which the credit is passed on5.

Invoice / Bill of Entry Number with Date : The Purchase Invoice number and date is printed in this field.

Name and Address of the First Stage /Second Stage Dealer : This column displays the First Stage /SecondStage Dealer details specified in the Purchase Entries.



Name and Address of the Manufacturer / Importer : This column displays the Manufacturer / Importerdetails specified in the Purchase Entries.

Description of the Goods : The description of the goods is printed in this column.

Central Excise Tariff Heading : The Tariff the number of the Stock Items are printed in this column

Quantity : The quantity of goods purchased is printed in this column.

Amount of Duty : The total duty paid on the Stock Items is calculated in this column.

Amount of Ed Cess : The total amount of Education Cess paid on for the Stock Items is printed in this column.


Introduction

GST stands for Goods and Service Tax.

A person is required to register for GST when his annual taxable supplies exceed or are expected to exceed S$1million. However, a person may apply for voluntary registration even if his taxable supplies do not exceed S$1million. Once he has registered voluntarily, he is required to remain registered for at least 2 years.

Inland Revenue Authority of Singapore: The IRAS holds the responsibility of collecting GST. A Comptroller isappointed for the administration of the GST Act.



GST Classes

Supply

The GST Act defines supply as including "all forms of supply done for a consideration". A supply includes a sale ofgoods or rendering of service. It can be either taxable (standard-rated or zero-rated), exempt or outside the scopeof GST.

Taxable supply

A taxable supply is a standard-rated or zero-rated supply. GST incurred by a GST registered person on hisbusiness purchases is recoverable from the Comptroller as input tax credit if the purchase is for the making oftaxable supplies.

Types of GST Classes

Standard-Rated supply

Standard-rated supply is the supply of goods or services made in Singapore. GST is chargeable at the rate of 5%on the value of the supply.

Zero-Rated supply

Zero-rated supply is the export of goods or the rendering of international services. GST is chargeable at the rateof 0% on the value of supply.

Exempt supply

Exempt supply can be the sale/ lease of a residential property or certain financial activities as stated under theFourth Schedule of the GST Act. GST is not chargeable on Exempt supply. Generally, any GST incurred in makingExempt supplies cannot be claimed as input tax.

Combined

This is a special feature offered by Tally to support different Types of GST Classes in one single entry. Forinstance, you can first pass a Purchase/ Sales entry by selecting the GST Type as Combined and then assign morethan one GST Type in the voucher. Refer to the topic 'Entries Using Combined GST Type'.

Out-Of-Scope supply

When you have make a supply of goods which are delivered from a place outside Singapore to another placeoutside Singapore without passing through Singapore, such supplies are treated as out of scope supplies for GSTpurposes. Accordingly, you are not required to charge GST on the supplies.

Imports

Imports are goods removed from a place outside Singapore and brought into Singapore. GST is chargeable on theimportation of goods into Singapore. It is collected by the Singapore Customs at the point of importation,regardless of whether the person is GST registered or not. However, GST will not be payable when a person isgranted relief under the GST (Imports Relief) Order or is an approved traders under the Major Exporter Scheme,or the Third Party Logistics (3PL) Company Scheme.

GST Flow

GST is charged on the value of the supply of goods and services whenever the time of supply is triggered. Thevalue of the supply can be for a consideration in either money or open market value of the supply.

If the value is for a consideration in money, the value of supply is determined as follows:

Value of supply + GST = Consideration

If the supply is not for a consideration in money or is for a consideration not wholly consisting of money, then thevalue of the supply will be its Open Market Value (OMV).

Open Market Value

OMV is the price (exclusive of GST) that the goods or services would fetch at the time when they are suppliedbetween two unrelated persons.

GST Glossary

Taxable Person: A Taxable Person is a person who is registered or required to register for GST. A The termincludes an individual, a partnership, a company, a club, an association, a society, a management corporation or anon profit organisation.

Input Tax: Input Tax is the GST paid on your business purchases. You can claim Input Tax Credit from IRAS.

Output Tax: Output Tax is the GST collected or absorbed by a GST registered person on the sale of goods orprovision of services. It is the GST payable to IRAS.

Filing GST Returns

Form GST F5 is the return that a GST registered person has to submit at regular intervals. A GST registeredperson accounts for the output tax collected and claims the input tax incurred in this return.

Form GST F5 is issued to a GST registered person on a quarterly basis i.e. once in 3 months . A GST registeredperson receives the Form GST F5 in the last month of each quarter. If he opts for a monthly accounting period,then Form GST F5 is sent to him on a monthly basis.

Form GST F5 must be completed and submitted to the Comptroller not later than 1 month after the end of theprescribed accounting period.

For example, if Form GST F5 is issued to you for the prescribed accounting period from 1 January 2006 to 31March 2006 , you need to furnish the duly completed and signed return to the Comptroller by 30 April 2006 .

Prescribed Accounting Periods

Cycle A Cycle B Cycle C

01 January to 31 March 01 February to 30 April 01 March to 31 May

01 April to 30 June 01 May to 31 July 01 June to 31 August

01 July to 30 September 01 August to 31 October 01 September to 30 November

01 October to 31 December 01 November to 31 January 01 December to 28/29 February

Other GST Transaction Forms

Form GST F7

Form GST F7 is a return that a GST registered person can use to rectify any error made in Form GST F5 .

Form GST F8

This is the final GST return that you need to file before you are de-registered from GST.

Payment of GST

Payment refers to the amount of tax payable by a GST registered person. It must be made within 1 month afterthe end of the accounting period.

However, if you are under the GIRO scheme, an electronic direct debit mechanism, your tax payable will bededucted from your bank account on the 15th day of the month after the due date for submission of Form GSTF5 .

For example, if you have filed Form GST F5 for the prescribed accounting period from 1 January 2006 to 31March 2006 before 1 May 2006 , your tax payable will be deducted from your bank account on 15 May 2006 .



Enabling GST in Tally

Creating a Company

Go to Gateway of Tally > Alt+F3 > Create Company

Enter the contact details of the Company

Select the country from the List of Countries , in the field Statutory Compliance for

Enabling GST in F11: Features



Go to Gateway of Tally > Select F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation

Set Prepare & Follow Singapore Style GST Returns to Yes

Enter the GST Registration Number and the Company Registration Number



In the Ledger Creation screen enter the name of the GST ledger in the Name field2.

In the Under field, select Sundry Creditors from the List of Group s3.

Set Maintain Balances Bill by Bill to Yes4.

The option, Inventory Values are affected is set to No by default. Set this to Yes if applicable5.

6.



5.

Accept the screen to s ave6.

Customer ledgers can be created in a similar manner.



In the Ledger Creation screen enter the name of the GST ledger in the Name field2.

In the Under field, select Duties & Taxes from List of Groups3.


Set the Percentage of Calculation to 5%5.

6.

7.



5.

Select the Method of Calculation from the Type of Duty menu6.

Select GST Deductible – Input Tax from the GST Type menu in the GST Account Type field.7.

Accept the screen to s ave .8.

You can similarly create a ledger for GST Output , by selecting GST Account Type as GST Payable – OutputTax .

Creating a Purchase Ledger

To create ledgers under the Purchase Accounts group


Enter a name for the Purchase account ledger in the Name field2.

In the Under field select Purchase Accounts from the List of Groups3.

Set Inventory Values are affected? to Yes if you maintain inventory4.

Set the field GST Applicable? to Yes under Statutory Information5.

6.



Accept the screen to Save6.

Sales ledgers can be similarly created.


To create ledgers under the Expenses Accounts group


Enter a name for the Expenses account ledger in the Name field2.

In the Under field select Indirect Expenses from the List of Groups3.

Set Inventory Values are affected? to Yes if applicable4.

Set GST Applicable? to Yes under Statutory Information5.

6.




You can, similarly create ledgers for Sales accounts, Expenses accounts, Fixed Assets, Liabilities and IncomeAccounts under the respective groups.



Enter a name for the Stock Item in the Name field2.

In the Under field select Primary from the List of Groups3.

Select the Units4.

Enter the Rate of GST5.





Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select Payment (F5)1.

Select Cash for the account to be debited2.

Select the required GST Type , for example, Standard Rated3.

Select the ledger Stationery Expenses from the List of Ledger Accounts4.

Select the ledger GST Input from the List of Ledger Accounts5.

6.

7.

Enter the Narration6.

Accept the voucher to s ave .7.

You can similarly create payment entries for different GST Types. However, GST is chargeable on StandardRated only. Refer GST Classes .

N o t e :The above entry can be created using Classes. If a Voucher Type Class is

created, then the ledger allocated for a Voucher Type Class should be a G S T

A p p l i c a b l e ledger only.




Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Purchase (F9)1.

Enter the reference for the voucher in the Ref field2.


Select the Purchase Ledger4.

Select the GST Type (Standard Rated ) from the List of GST Type5.

Select the Name of the Stock Item from the List of Items6.

Enter the appropriate Quantity and Rate and the amount is displayed in the Amount field7.

Select the GST Input ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts8.

8.

When the payment is made, the GST Type should be set to Not Applicable , as the Purchase Voucher isbooked to include the GST Input.

The Payment entry should be passed as follows.




Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select Sales Voucher (F8)1.

Enter the reference in the Ref field2.

Select the Party’s A/c Name from the List of Ledgers3.

Select the Sales A/c Ledger4.

Select the GST Type from the List of GST Types5.

6.

7.



5.

Select the Stock Item from the List of Stock Items6.

Select the ledger GST Output from the List of Ledgers7.

Enter the N arration if required8.

Accept the Voucher to s ave9.

On receipt of payment, a payment entry has to be passed without allocating the Tax ledger and GST Type.

Creating an Exempt Purchase Voucher

A GST Exempt Purchase Voucher can be created by selecting the GST type as Exempt .

To create an Exempt Purchase Voucher ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select Purchase Voucher (F9)1.

Enter the Reference for the voucher in the Ref field2.


Select the Purchase ledger4.

Select the GST Type (Exempt ) from the List of GST Type5.

Select the Name of the Stock Item from the List of Items6.

Enter the appropriate Quantity and Rate and the amount displayed in the Amount field.7.

Enter Narration, if any8.

Accept the voucher to s ave9.



9.

N o t e : If you select a GST Ledger in the above entry, Tally displays the error message

GST Account Not Allowed .

Creating a Sales Voucher Using Combined GST Type

Tally provides you with a new GST Type called Combined , which allows you to allocate Stock Items to differentGST Types in one single entry.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select (F8) Sales > Select Voucher mode1.

Enter the reference number in the Ref field.2.

Select Combined as the GST Type from the list3.

N o t e : In an Invoice mode, the option C o m b i n e d appears only if Use Common Ledger

A/c for Item Allocation in F12: Configure is set to N o .

Debit the Party ledger from the List of Ledgers4.

Enter the amount in the Amount field5.

Credit the Sales ledger6.

Select the Name of the Item from the List of Stock Items in the Inventory Allocation screen7.

Enter the Quantity to be sold8.

Enter the Rate for the Voucher Entry screen to reappear9.



9.

Select the GST Type (Example: Exempt ) from the List of GST Types .10.

Credit the Sales ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts to allocate the remaining value11.

Specify the Stock Item , Quantity and R ate in the Item Allocation screen12.

Select the GST Type (e.g. Standard Rated) from the list13.

Credit the GST Output ledger to allocate the tax amount14.

The Bill Wise Details sub screen displays as shown below.15.

15.

Select Agst Ref as Type of Ref16.

Select Pending Bill from the List of Pending Bills17.

Accept the above screen for the Voucher Entry screen to reappear18.

Enter the Narration if any19.



19.


Purchase vouchers using different GST Types can be created in a similar manner.

Reports

To view the GST Reports,


GST Reports consist of

GST Analysis

GST Return – F5



GST Analysis

The GST Analysis report gives details on the Total of all Purchase and Sales transactions, passed usingdifferent GST Types .

Supplies/Incomes (Output Tax)

This section displays the total sales amount on each GST Type .

Combined

The total sales amount calculated on different GST Types using a Combined class displays in this column.

Standard Rated

The total sales amount on all the transactions passed using the Standard Rated GST Type, is calculated anddisplayed is this column.

Zero Rated

The total sales amount on all the transactions, passed using the Zero Rated GST Type, is calculated anddisplayed is this column.

Exempt

The total sales amount on all the transactions, passed using the Exempt GST Type, is calculated and displayed isthis column.

Out-of-Scope

The total sales amount on all the transactions passed using the Out-of-Scope GST Type is calculated anddisplayed is this column.

Purchases/Expenses (Input Tax)

This section displays the total purchase amount on each of the GST Types mentioned above.

Import Under MES

The total purchase amount on all the transactions, passed using Imports under MES GST Type is calculated anddisplayed is this column.

Gross Amount

This column displays the total sales/purchase amount in each of the GST Types .

GST Amount

This column displays the total GST amount on each of the GST Types .

GST%

This column displays the Percentage of GST .

The GST Analysis report also calculates and displays the Net GST to be claimed from IRAS .

Use Alt + F1 to view a detailed GST Analysis .



GST Return F5

GST Return F5 is a statutory report which has to be filed every quarter.



Box 1 displays the total value of Standard Rated sales.

Box 2 displays the total value of Zero Rated sales.

Box 3 displays the total value of Exempt sales.

Box 4 displays the sum of Box 1, 2 and 3 .

Box 5 displays the total value of Taxable Purchases .

Box 6 displays the Output Tax due on the sales.

Box 7 displays the Input Tax and the Refund Claimed

Box 8 displays the Net GST to be paid to IRAS (if Output Tax is greater than Input Tax ) or to be claimed fromIRAS (if Input Tax is greater than Output Tax ).

Box 9 displays the total value of the goods imported under the scheme.

Introduction

Sales Tax in Malaysia is a single stage tax imposed in proportion to the value of certain imported and locallymanufactured goods.

Under the Sales Tax Act 1972, Sales Tax is administered by the Royal Customs and Excise Department ofMalaysia. The Financial Year is 1st January to 31st December.

Manufacturers need to be licensed under the Sales Tax Act 1972, a Federal Act, and are obligated to levy chargeand collect the tax from their customers. Sales tax, for imported goods, is collected from the importer, at the timeof release of goods from customs.

The Sales Tax levy is applicable to the entire Federation of Malaysia, except Labuan, Langkawi, Tioman, FreeZones and Licensed Manufacturing Warehouses.



Information on Sales Tax

Taxable Goods

Under the Sales Tax Act , 1972, except those goods which are specifically exempted by order of the Minister ofFinance, all goods manufactured domestically or imported into Malaysia are taxable.

The term ‘manufacture of goods other than petroleum’ means the conversion of organic or inorganic materials, bymanual or mechanical means, into new products by changing their size, shape or nature. It includes the assemblyof parts into machinery or other products, but does not include the installation of machinery or equipment for thepurpose of construction.

In relation to petroleum, the term ‘manufacture’ means refining or compounding, and includes the addition offoreign substances.

Goods Exempted from Sales Tax

Live animals, fish, seafood and certain essential food items including Meat, milk, eggs, vegetables, fruits,bread and so on.

Medical and educational equipment including sports equipment, Books, and so on.

Photographic equipment and films

Motorcycles below 201 c.c. capacity, bicycles for adult use including Parts and Accessories

Machinery for textile industry, food industry, paper and printing industry, construction industry, metalindustry, and so on

Primary commodities including cocoa, rubber and their related Products

Naturally occurring minerals, chemicals, etc.

Helicopters, aircraft, ships and other vessels

Mobile libraries and clinics; computers

Books, newspapers and other reading material

Building equipment

Exemption from licensing

If the total sales value of taxable goods manufactured did not exceed RM100,000 in the preceding year and is notexpected to exceed RM100,000 during the next 12 months, the manufacturer may apply for a certificate ofexemption from licensing.

This certificate is renewable on a yearly basis. However, the manufacturer may choose to apply for licensing inorder to enjoy tax-free inputs.

Tax-free Inputs (Raw materials)

Raw materials and components (inputs) can be imported or acquired, free of sales tax, by a licensedmanufacturer, for use in the manufacturing process in order to maintain the single-stage tax concept.



Flow of Sales Tax

Ring System

The Sales Tax Act entitles only the licensed manufacturer and tax exemption license holders to manufacture andsell produce. However, it does not single out the non licensed manufacturers for discrimination.

The ring system explained below demonstrates how this is avoided:

A Licensed manufacturer can acquire taxable goods, from another manufacturer, free of sales tax

A Licensed manufacturer can import taxable goods free of sales tax

A Licensed manufacturer can transfer taxable goods to another licensee for completion of manufacture andthen acquire them back, free of sales tax. This is basically to solve problems of sub-contracting and farmingout

A Licensed manufacturer can acquire taxable goods which are deposited or kept in a customs warehouse ora warehouse licensed under Section 65 of the Customs Act free of sales tax

A non-licensed manufacturer can import taxable goods on behalf of a licensed manufacturer free of salestax

A non-licensed manufacturer can acquire taxable goods from a licensed manufacturer on behalf of alicensed manufacturer free of Sales Tax

Rate of Tax

Goods Rate of Tax

Fruits, certain foodstuff,timber and buildingmaterials

5%

For all unspecified goods 10%

Cigarettes and tobacco 15%

Liquor and alcoholicdrinks

25%

Petroleum Products Rates specifiedfrom time to time.

Filing Sales Tax

Except Petroleum Products, the tax period for all goods is 2 calendar months. The tax must be paid to thecustoms authorities within 28 days of the expiry of the taxable period.

The Taxable periods and their due dates are as follows

Tax Period Due Date

January – February 28th March

March – April 28th May

May – June 28th July

July - August 28th September

September – October

28th November

November – December

28th January of next Financial Year

The taxable period for petroleum products manufactured in Malaysia is one calendar month and tax charged mustbe paid to the sales tax office within 10 days of the expiry of the taxable period.

For petroleum products stored in licensed warehouses, the sales tax is due only when they are released from thelicensed warehouse. The sales tax is payable within 10 days of the end of the month in which the sales tax arises.

Penalties

The failure to pay the sales tax within the stipulated time attracts penalties as follows.

Period delayed Penalty

Unpaid after 28days / 10 days

10%

Unpaid for eachsubsequent periodof 30 days

10% to amaximum of 50%

Drawback

Under Section 29 of the Sales Tax Act 1972, all duty-paid goods used as materials for the manufacture of othergoods which are subsequently exported, are eligible for drawback of the sales tax in full.

Refund of sales tax on Bad Debts

With effect from 1 January 2003, a licensed manufacturer or importer is eligible for a refund of sales tax inrelation to debts deemed as bad debts.

Bad Debts include debts which cannot be collected after 12 months from the date of payment of tax.

Credit notes

In the returns furnished in accordance with Section 19, a licensed manufacturer may deduct the amount of salestax paid in respect of taxable goods returned by a purchaser, or discounts subsequently given to the purchaser,from the amount of sales tax accounted for in the return.

The credit note issued by a licensed manufacturer to a purchaser must contain the requisite particulars.



Sales Tax in Tally

Tally offers complete and accurate tracking of sales tax entries. It calculates the sales tax paid on eachtransaction. It also offers you the flexibility to track part payments received and adjust them with the expensesincurred.

The information collated using Tally can be printed in the Government prescribed format.

Enabling Sales Tax in Tally

Company Creation

To create a company,


Select Malaysia from the List of Countries in Statutory compliance for field

Enabling Sales Tax in F11: Features

To enable Sales Tax in Tally , go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features >Statutory and Taxation .



Set Enable Sales Tax to Yes .

Enter the Sales Tax Registration number.

Enter Sales Tax File Numbe r given by the Malaysian Customs and Excise Department


To create a Party ledger, go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Ledgers > Create .

In the Ledger Creation screen enter the name of the company supplying goods to you in the Name field1.

Select Sundry Creditors in the Under field from the List of Groups2.

Set Maintain balances bill-by-bill? to Yes . Enter details in the Default Credit Period if set to Yes3.

Enter the Contact Details of the customer4.

Enter the Tax Information5.

6.



4.

5.

Accept Yes to save6.


To create a Sales ledger,


In the Ledger Creation screen enter the name in the Name Field1.

In the Under field, select Sales Accounts from the List of Groups2.

Set Inventory Values are affected? field is set to Yes, if applicable3.

Set Used in Sales Tax to Yes4.



4.

Select the Sales Tax Class from the list5.

N o t e : The Sales Tax Class can also be selected during voucher entry, by selecting

Not Applicable in the ledger creation screen.


Similarly, you can create for Purchase ledgers


To create a Stock Item,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Info > Stock Items > Create

Enter the name in the Name Field1.

In the Under field, select the group from the List of Groups2.

Select the Units3.

Enter the Tariff Code No.4.

Enter the Rate of Sales Tax5.

Note: It is mandatory to specify the Rate of Sales Tax in the above screen




Creating a Voucher Type to Adjust Sales Tax

A Voucher Class has to be created to claim Sales Tax . The use of class is discussed further.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Types > Alter > Journal

Set the options to Yes/No as per requirement1.

Enter the Name of the Class2.

Set Use Class for Sales Tax Adjustments to Yes3.





To create a Purchase Voucher ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F9: Purchase in the Item Invoice Mode

Enter the reference number in the Ref field if any1.



Enter the Quantity .4.

Enter the Rate .5.

The Accounting Details sub screen displays as shown.

Select the Purchase A/c from the List of Ledger Accounts6.

Select the Sales Tax Class from the list for the Purchase Voucher.7.

Accept the above screen to save8.

Select the Sales Tax ledger created under Duties & Taxes for the VAT Class Details sub screen todisplay

9.



9.

Select the Sales Tax Class from the list.10.

Accept the Voucher Entry screen to save .11.

11.




Create a Sales Voucher for a taxable stock item according to the following procedure. (The Sales Tax ledgerselected in the Sales voucher should be in accordance to the rate specified in the Stock Item master.)


Enter the reference number in the Ref field if required1.

N o t e : Set Use Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation t o No i n the F 1 2 : C o n f i g u r e ,

to allocate sales A/c for each Stock Item.



Enter the Quantity4.

Enter the Rate5.


Select the Sales A/c from the List of Ledger Accounts6.

Select the Sales Tax Class from the List for the Sales Voucher7.


Select the Sales Tax ledger created under Duties & Taxes for the VAT Class Details sub screen todisplay

9.



9.


Accept the Voucher Entry screen to save11.

11.



Creating a Credit Note

When a customer returns stock items, pass the entry using a Credit Note .

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Credit Note (Ctrl + F8)1.

Enter the Reference Number if required2.

Debit the Customer ledger3.

Enter the amount4.

The Bill Wise details screen displays as shown.

5.

Select the Type of Reference from the List of Method of Adj5.

Select the bill from the List of Purchase Bills6.

Enter the Amount7.

Debit the Sales A/c8.

Select the Sales Tax Class from the List of Sales Tax Class9.

The Inventory Allocation screen displays as shown.



Select the Stock Item returned from the List of Stock Items10.

Enter the Quantity returned11.

Enter the Rate12.

Accept to display the Voucher Entry screen to appear13.



15.



Creating a Sales Voucher Exempted from Sales Tax

The sale of goods to an export customer or licensed manufacturer is tax free .

To create a sales voucher for an Export Customer or a Licensed Manufacturer ,


Enter the reference number in the Ref field if required1.

N o t e : Set Use Common Ledger A/c for Item Allocation to N o in the F12: Configure




Enter the Rate5.


Select the Sales A/c from the List of Ledger Accounts6.

Select the Sales Tax Class as Export Sales from the List for the Sales Voucher7.





If a Taxable Stock Item is used, for own use or disposed, or not sold, then the same can be shown by passing thefollowing entry.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select Journal Voucher: F7

Select the Voucher Type from the Voucher Class List1.

In the Journal Voucher screen, debit the Expenses ledger created under Indirect Expenses2.

Enter the Amount3.

Credit the Purchases account4.

Select the Stock Item from the List of Items in the Inventory Allocations screen5.




6.

Accept the screen for the VAT Class Details to display7.

7.

N o t e : If the purchase cannot be categorised under any of the above Sales Tax classes,

then select Not Applicable


N o t e : The Rate of Sales Tax class should be the same as specified in the Stock Item.

Enter Narration if any9.




Creating a Journal Entry to Adjust Rebate in Sales Tax Using ST 10

A Licensed Manufacturer is entitled to purchase goods, tax free. If a Licensed Manufacturer has paid tax onpurchase of raw materials, then he can claim rebate against the sales tax paid on purchases. This type of rebatecan be adjusted against the sales tax liability of the licensed manufacturer.

A Licensed Manufacturer can claim a rebate of 4% on Sales Tax paid @ 5% and a rebate of 8% on Sales Taxpaid @ 10%.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select Journal Voucher: F71.

Select the Voucher Type from the Voucher Class List2.

In the Journal Voucher screen, debit the Sales Tax ledger3.

Enter the Amount4.

Select the Sales Tax Class from the List of Sales Tax class5.



5.

Enter the Assessable Value of the Purchase6.

Credit the Purchases account in the Journal Entry screen7.

7.

Select the Stock Item from the List of Items in the Inventory Allocations screen.8.


Enter the Amount10.

Select the Sales Tax Class for the Purchase ledger11.



11.



13.



Reports

Tally provides you with the Sales Tax forms in the Government prescribed format.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Sales Tax Reports

The Sales Tax Reports menu consists of two forms

Form ST 3

Form ST 10

Form – ST 3

The Form ST 3 comprises the details of all the sales transactions. The form has to be filed at the MalaysianExcise and Customs Department every two months.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Service Tax Reports > Form – ST 3

Press Alt + P to print the form.

The preview displays as shown

Scroll through the form using the Page Down key in your keyboard.



N o t e : The information given in the above forms has to be used to fill the pre printed

format issued by the Government.

Box 1

The Name and Address of the Company is printed in this field

Box 2

This field remains blank.

Box 3

The Sales Tax License number, as entered in F11: Features, is printed in this field.

Box 4

The Sales Tax File Nr, as entered in F11: Features, is printed in this field.

Box 5,6,7 and 8

The above boxes are filled by the Malaysian Customs and Excise Department .

Box 9

The Taxable period for the Return is printed in this field.

Box 10

The Total value of goods Exported is printed in this field.

Box 11

The total value of the goods exempted from Sales Tax is printed in this field.

Box 12

The total value of goods sold to a Licensed Manufacturer is printed in this field.

Box 13

The Serial Numbers of the Stock Items are printed in this field

Box 14

The List of Sales Tax enabled Stock Items is printed in this field

Box 15

The Tariff Code entered in the Stock Item Master is printed in this field.

Box 16

The total value of Sales Tax enabled goods sold is printed in this field.

Box 17

The total value of goods that are not sold, but used for Own Use, or Disposed Off other than sale is printed in thisfield.

Box 18

The sum of Box 16 and Box 17 is printed in this field.

Box 19

The Rate at which the Sales Tax is charged is printed in this field.

Box 20

The total amount of Sales Tax charged on the goods is printed in this field.

Box 21

The total amount of Tax deducted via ST 10 is printed in this field.

Box 22

The total amount of Tax deducted using Credit Notes is printed in this field.

Box 23

This box remains blank because Penalty cannot be estimated during the generation of the returns.



Box 24

This box remains blank because Penalty cannot be estimated during the generation of the returns.

Box 25

This box displays the total Tax Payable.

Box 26

The Name of the Declarant entered in the print configuration screen, is printed in this field.

Box 27

The Identity Card No. or the Passport No. entered in the print configuration screen, is printed in this field.

Box 28

The Designation of the person filing the return, entered in the print configuration screen, is printed in this field.

Box 29

The Declarant is required to sign in this column.

Box 30, 31, 32, 33, 34


Form ST – 10

The Form – ST10 lists the purchase details. It has to be filed at the Malaysian Excise and CustomsDepartment every two months.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Day Book > Statutory Reports > Sales Tax Reports > Form ST – 10UNREGISTERED VERSION OF CHM TO PDF CONVERTER PRO BY THETA-SOFTWARE


Box 1

The Name and Address of the company is printed this field.

Box 2


Box 3

The Sales Tax License number as entered in F11: Features is printed in this field.

Box 4

The Sales Tax File Nr as entered in F11: Features is printed in this field.

Box 5,6,7 and 8


Box 9

The period for which the ST3 is generated is printed in this field.

Box 10

The Serial number is printed in this field.

Box 11

The Supplier’s Name is printed in this field.

Box 12

The Stock Items purchased are printed in this field.

Box 13

The Tariff Code of the Stock Items entered in the Stock Item Master is printed in this field.

Box 14

The Rate of Sales Tax paid on each of the Stock Items is printed in this field.

Box 15

The Invoice numbers of the purchase entries passed is printed in this field.

Box 16

The Invoice Dates are displayed in this field.

Box 17

The purchase prices of the Stock Items are printed in this field.

Box 18

The rate of rebate on Sales Tax is printed in this field.

Box 19

The total value of Sales Tax deduction for each sale is printed in this field.

Box 20

The total value of the deduction in Sales Tax is printed in this field.

Box 21

The Name of the Declarant, as entered in the print configuration screen, is displayed in this field.

Box 22

The Identity Card No. or the Passport No., as entered in the print configuration screen, is printed in this field.

Box 23

The Designation of the person filing the return, entered in the print configuration screen, is printed in this field.

Box 24

The Declarant is required to sign in this column.

Box 25

The above box is filled by the Malaysian Customs and Excise Department.



Introduction

Service Tax is a form of indirect tax imposed on taxable services as prescribed under the second schedule of theservice tax regulations of 1975. Service Tax is imposed on a Taxable service provided by a Taxable person. TheGovernment of Malaysia has defined a set of services which are Taxable. The collection of the tax is administeredby the Royal Customs and Excise Department of Malaysia .

Information on Service Tax

Rate of Tax

The Rate of Service Tax on all the services under the Service Tax acts is 5%.

Taxable Person/Licensing

Any Taxable person, who carries on business of providing taxable service and on crossing the threshold limit ifany, must apply for a license. The term “person” includes an individual, a firm, a society, an association, acompany and every other juridical person. No fee is payable for the issuance of a license.

A complete list of Taxable Services is as follows:

Department Code

601 Supplying MMT inside Hotel

602 Supplying MMT outside Hotel

603 Supplying room to stay / sleep

604 Corkage, towel charge & cover chargeservices

605 Supplying room for Meeting / Culturalperformances / Fashion Shows

606 Health Service

607 Massage Service

608 Supplying Escort to Social and CoupleDance

609 Sport and Recreation/Picnic Service

610 Preparation of Insurance Policy

611 Telecommunication Service

612 Credit Card Service



613 Customs clearance ofGoods/Commodity Services

614 Supplying automobile parking space

615 Speed Courier/Shipment Service

616 Transport Service

617 Security / Guard Service

618 Professional Services

619 Accounting Services

620 Juridical / Legislative Services

621 Engineering Professional Services

622 Architectural Services

623 Surveyor / Assessor / Valuator / RealEstate Agent Service

624 Consulting Services

625 Veterinary Services

626 Automobile lease/rental Services

627 Administrative services

628 Advertising Services

629 Golf game services

630 Corporate Protection and Security

631 - 644 Reserved

645 Tax on service apart from those statedabove

646 Outdoor gathering / event services

Assessable value

Service Tax is calculated on Assessable Value. The Assessable Value is the difference of the Total Servicecharge and Expenses.

Expenses

Expenses include those which incur while providing services i.e. postage, conveyance etc.




Service Tax is due when payment is received for taxable services rendered. If payment is not received within 12calendar months from the date of issuance of invoice, the tax is due on the day immediately after the expiry ofthe 12-month period.

Example: The service provider has issued an invoice on 1-1-2005 for Rm. 1050.00 and this includes Rm.50/- asservice tax. If he doesn’t receive the payment by 2-1-2006 then he has to pay tax of Rm.50.00 to thedepartment.

In Malaysia the Financial Year covers from 1st January to 31st December.

How Much do I pay?

Service Tax is paid on the Assessable Value at 5%. Consider the following example.

ABC Company is a Consultancy firm and charges 1200 as consultation fees.

The breakup of the Total Service Charge is as follows.

Consultation Charges 1000.00

Tax @ 5% 50.00

Disbursement - 150.00

If the client pays RM. 600 as partial payment, then the amount can be allocated using any of the followingmethods.

Adjusting the Disbursement Amount First:

Total Billed Amount 1200

Total Amount Received 600

Adjusting the Disbursement Amount

Amount received 600

Total disbursement 150

Balance 450

The Balance amount can be adjusted as follows.

Towards Consultation charges (450*1000)/1050 428.57

Towards Tax (450*50)/1050 21.43

Total 450.00

The Service Tax Report appears as follows.

Date Total AmountBilled

TaxableFeesCollected

TaxCollected

TaxableFeesOutstanding> 1 year

TaxOutstanding> 1 year

Total TaxPayable

01-Jan-06

1200 428.57 21.43 21.43

If payment is not received within 12 calendar months of the date of issuance of invoice, the tax is due on the dayimmediately after the expiry of the 12-month period. This amount appears in the column Tax Outstanding > 1year.

Adjusting the Disbursement Amount Last:




Amount received 600

Total disbursement

Balance 600



Towards Tax (600*50)/1050 28.57

Total 600.00

The Service Tax Report appears as follows.

Date TotalAmountBilled

TaxableFeesCollected

TaxCollected

Taxable FeesOutstanding> 1 year


TotalTaxPayable

01,Jan-06

1200 571.43 28.57 71.73

Allocating the charges proportionately




Amount Received 600

The amount can be adjusted as follows.



Towards Consultation Charges (600*1000)/1200 500.00

Towards Tax (600*50)/1200 25.00

Towards Disbursement Amount (600*150/1200 75.00

Total 600.00

The Service Tax Report appears as follows

Date TotalAmountBilled

TaxablefeesCollected

TaxCollected

TaxablefeesOutstanding> 1 year


TotalTaxPayable

01-Jan-06

1200 500.00 25.00 25.00

Invoice

Invoice for Taxable Service must fulfil the following criteria:

All invoices and receipts shall be printed and serially numbered.1.

The total of all sales made and all service tax collected in each day shall be transferred at the end of suchday to a record of sales, which shall be submitted together with the monthly returns.

2.

No alteration shall be made on the invoices or receipts and copies thereof. If a mistake has been made, theinvoice or receipt and copy thereof shall be treated as cancelled and clearly marked "CANCELLED". Thecancelled invoice or receipt together with all copies thereof shall be submitted to the Director General forinspection.

3.

If any invoice or receipt which has been issued is missing, the Director General shall estimate the servicetax to be paid.

4.

Maintenance of Records

All invoices, receipts, books of account and other records as required by the Act shall be kept within the principalplace of business, or in any other place approved by the Director General.

The person claiming the refund must keep all records and documents pertaining to the claim for a period of sixyears from the date of claim for inspection by the proper officer at any time.

When do I pay Service Tax?

When a payment is received from a customer, Service Tax must be paid to the Customs Department within 28days of the end of a Taxable Period (a Taxable Period covers two months). If the licensee does not receive thepayment even after the invoice has been issued, the Service Tax has to be paid within 28 days of the 12 month-period from the date of issuance of the invoice.

Method of Payment

The Service Tax due and payable, in respect of any return required to be filed under the Act, can be paid by anyof the following methods.

Cash1.

Postal Order or Money Order2.

Cheque or Bank Draft3.

The cheque or bank draft has to be addressed to the ‘State Customs Director’ account where the Tax is paid.



Service Tax

Tally provides you with a complete tracking of sales transactions for Malaysia Compliant Service Tax. Its fastand error-free voucher entry enables the easy calculation of Service Tax to be paid on each transaction. Tallyoffers you the flexibility to track part payments received and adjust them with the expenses incurred.

Tally also tracks Service Tax which is unpaid for more than a year and generates reports in the Governmentprescribed format.

Enabling Service Tax

Company Creation


Enter Company details such as Mailing details.

Select the Country from the List of Countries under the field, Statutory Compliance for .

Enabling Service Tax in F11 Features

Go to Gateway of Tally > Select F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation



Set Enable Service Tax to Yes1.

Set Set/Alter Service Tax Details to Yes to display the Company Service Tax Details screen.2.

2.

Enter the Service Tax Registration Number allotted by the Service Tax department3.

Enter the Date of Registration4.

Enter the File No. (The File No. is the Ledger Folio number)5.

Select the Method of adjustment of Expenses from the List of Adjustment Methods6.

First Receipt : The expenses are first adjusted from the amount received and then the rest of the amountis adjusted against Service fee and Tax account.

Last Receipt : The expenses are adjusted from the last receipt of the bill amount

Proportionate : The payment received from the customer is proportionately adjusted against fee, tax anddisbursement





To create a Customer ledger,


In the Ledger Creation screen enter the name of the company that has supplied goods to you in the Namefield

2.

Select Sundry Debtors in the Under field from the List of Groups3.

Set Maintain balances bill-by-bill? to Yes . Enter details in the Default Credit Period if applicable4.

5.



4.

Set Is Service Tax Applicable to Yes for the Exemption Details screen to display5.

Set Type of Classification as Exempt if tax is not payable. Set the above field to Not Applicable if tax ispayable

6.

Enter the Mailing details and Tax information7.

7.

6. Accept the screen to save6.

Similarly, you can create Supplier ledgers.




To create Service Tax ledger,


Enter the Name of the Ledger2.

Select the Group Duties & Taxes in the Under field3.

Select the Type of Duty from the list of Types of Duty/Tax4.

On selecting Service Tax as Type of Duty , an additional table to select the Category Name appears5.

6.

Select the Category Name from the List of Service Categories6.

Set Maintain Balances bill by Bill to Yes if applicable7.

Set Inventory Values are affected to No, which can be set to Yes if applicable8.




Creating Sales Ledgers for Services

To create Sales ledgers for Services,


Enter the Name of the ledger. . For example, Accountancy2.

Select the Group Sales/Direct Income from the List of Groups3.

Set Inventory Values are affected to Yes, if applicable4.

Set Is Service Tax Applicable to Yes for the ledger. A list of all types of services category displays asshown:

5.

6.

5.

Select Accounting Services (619) from the List of Service Categories6.


Similarly, you can create ledgers for various services.



Creating Ledgers for Indirect Expenses

An Expenses ledger has to be created to claim the expenses.



Select the Group Indirect Expenses from the List of Groups3.

Set Maintain Balances Bill By Bill to Yes/No if applicable4.

Set Is Service Tax Applicable to Yes for the ledger5.

Select Accounting Services (619) from the List of Service Categories6.

6.





Create the entry to show the sale of the service using the following steps.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Sales (F8) 1.


Select Party’s A/c Name from the List of Ledger Accounts3.

Enter the party details in the Party Details sub form4.

Select the Service Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts5.


Select the Service Tax ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts7.

On selecting the Tax ledger, the Service Tax Details sub form displays.

Accept the above screen for the Bill wise Details sub form to display8.

Select New Ref as the Method of Adjustment9.



9.

Accept the above screen for the Voucher Creation screen to reappear10.

10.

Accept the screen to save the voucher11.

The above entry displays as shown.



Creating a Sales Voucher to Allocate Expenses

Tally provides you with two methods to allocate expenses incurred on the sale of services.

Method 1

The expenses can be included in the Service Charges .

Example: The service charge is RM. 1000 and the expense incurred is RM. 150 , therefore the service chargewould be RM. 1150 .

The voucher for the above entry is created, using the following steps.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Sales (F8)1.







On selecting the Tax ledger, the Service Details sub form displays.


Select the Expenses ledger created under Indirect Expenses to allocate the expenses9.

Enter the amount10.

Tab down for the Bill Wise Details sub form to display11.



11.

Select New Ref as the Method of Adj12.

Tab through the fields for the Voucher Entry screen to display13.


14.

Accept the Voucher to save15.

The above entry displays as shown.



Method 2

Expenses can be allocated using an Expense ledger, created under Indirect Expenses . The voucher can becreated using the following steps.







Select the Expenses ledger created under Indirect Expenses7.

Specify the Expenses amount in the Expenses field8.


On selecting the Tax ledger, the Service Details sub form displays



Enter the amount in the Expense field10.


Tab down for the Bill Wise Details sub form to display12.

12.

Select New Ref as the Method of Adj13.

Tab through the fields for the Voucher Entry screen to display14.




15.


The entry displays as shown.

Creating Sales Vouchers Exempted from Service Tax

For services exempted from tax, the classification should be selected in the ledger master.

Create the Customer ledger to set the Exemption Detail to Exempt1.





6.



4.

5.

Select the Service edger from the List of Ledger Accounts6.


Tab down for the Bill Wise Details sub form to display

Select New Ref for the Type of Ref8.

Accept the above screen for Voucher Entry screen to display9.



11.

N o t e : The above entry is applicable for ST 3 report only.



Creating a Receipt Voucher

On receipt of payment from a customer, a Receipt voucher has to be entered.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Voucher > Select Receipt (F6)1.

Select the Customer ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts for the Bill Wise Details sub form todisplay

2.

Select Agst Ref as the Type of Ref3.

Select the Bill against which the payment is received from the List of Pending Bills4.

5.

6.

Accept the above screen for the Voucher entry screen to display5.

Debit the Cash/Bank account with the amount received6.

Enter the Narration, if any7.




Creating a Receipt Voucher to Adjust the Expenses

Expenses can be adjusted in the receipt entry by selecting the appropriate Method of Adjustment in F11:Features > Statutory & Taxation

For example, a customer makes a partial payment of RM. 600 for the Sales entry of RM. 1200 .

On First Receipt

A receipt entry can be created selecting Method of Adjustment of Expenses as On First Receipt . The value inthe Service Tax Register displays as shown.

The Total Tax adjusted is calculated is as follows.


Total amount received 600


Amount received 600

Total disbursement 150

Balance 450


Towards the Consultation charges (450*1000)/1050 = 428.57 rounded off to 428.60

Towards the Tax (450*50)/1050 21.43

Total 450.03



On Last Receipt

On creating a receipt entry selecting Method of Adjustment of Expenses as On Last Receipt , the value in theService Tax Register displays as shown.

The Total Tax adjusted is calculated is as follows.




Amount received 600

Total disbursement

Balance 600


Towards Consultation charges (600*1000)/1050 = 571.43 rounded off to 571.40

Towards Tax (600*50)/1050 28.57

Total 599.97

Proportionate

On creating a receipt entry selecting Method of Adjustment of Expenses as Proportionate , the value inService Tax Register displays as shown.

The Total Tax Payable is calculated is as follows.

Total Billed Amount 1200.00

Total Amount Received 600.00


Amount Received 600.00

The amount can be adjusted as follows.




Towards Tax (600*50)/1200 25.00

Towards Disbursement amount (600*150/1200 75.00

Total 600.00


To pay the Service Tax ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Payment (F5)1.

Debit the Tax ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts2.

Select Agst Ref from the Method of Adj in the Service Tax Bill Details3.

Select the Service Tax Bill against which the payment is made from the List of Service Tax Bills4.

The amount can be altered5.

6.



5.

Credit the Bank Account6.

Enter the Narration, if any7.


Reports

To view the Service Tax Reports,


The Service Tax Reports consist of the following.

Service Tax Register

Service Tax Return



Service Tax Register

The Service Tax Register details the total sales of taxable goods and the tax received. It also provides details onunpaid tax.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > Service Tax Reports > Service Tax Register

Date : This column lists the dates in the period specified in the F2: Period .

Total Daily Sales Based on Invoices : This column displays the total sales made on the specific dates.

Paid Qty/Invoice

Value of Goods/Services Taxable : This column displays the total payment received for the sale of service.

Total of Tax received : This column displays the value of the Service Tax received on the sales made for a



specific date.

Invoice Unpaid Bill/Invoice

Value of Goods/Services Taxable : This column displays the value of the goods or services on which tax hasnot been paid for more than a year.

Total of Tax to be paid : This column displays the total tax due on the sales of taxable service for which thepayment has not been received for more than one year.

Total tax to be paid : This column displays the total amount of tax to be paid (i.e. column 4 + column 6)

On viewing the Service Tax Register after changing the year to 2007 , the screen displays as shown

Press Alt + P to view the preview of the Service Tax Register

The preview of Service Tax Register displays as shown.



Name & Address Licensee : The name and mailing details of the company display in this field.

License No : The Service Tax Registration number is displays in this field.

Tax Period

Month : The month for which the Service Tax Register is viewed is displays in this field.

Year : The year for which the Service Tax Register is viewed is displays in this field.



Service Tax Return

The Service Tax Return is a statutory report which has to be filed bimonthly. This report displays Tax detailssuch as the Rate of Tax, Total Tax Payable and so on.


The preview of the Service Tax Return displays as shown. The details are displayed in Bahasa Melayu ` andEnglish

Name and Address of Principal Place of Business : This box displays the name and address of thecompany .

Address of Branches if different from above : This box remains blank.

Service Tax License No. : The Service Tax Registration Number , as specified in F11: Features , displays inthis field.

File No. : The File Number, as specified in F11: Features , displays in this field.

Box 5, 6, 7 and 8 : These boxes have to be filled by the Service Tax Department .

Return for Taxable Period : The period for which the Service Tax Return is filed is specified in this field.

Type of Service Provided : This box displays the Type Of Service provided to the customer .

Department’s Revenue Code : This box displays the revenue code to the corresponding service.

Quantity : If the service provided is in the form of an item, then this box displays the quantity of the item sold.This column currently remains blank.

Value : This box displays the total value of taxable service provided.

Less Value of Service Exempted : This box displays the total value of the exempted sales entries.

Total Taxable Value : This box displays the total taxable value on all the sales ( i.e. 16 = 14-15)

Service Tax

Rate : The rate of the Service Tax is displays in this box.

Amount : The total amount of Service Tax displays in this box.

Penalty

Rate : This column currently remains blank.

Amount : This column currently remains blank.

Less Deduction Allowed : This column currently remains blank.

Total Amount Payable : This column displays the sum of total tax and the penalty.

Name of the Declarant : The name of the person filing the returns displays in this box.

Identity Card/Passport No. : The Identity Card Number or the Passport Number is entered in this field.

Designation : The designation of the person filing the returns displays in this box.

Box 27, 28, 29, 30 and 31 : These boxes have to be filled in by the Service Tax Department .

Introduction

Value Added Tax is a tax levied on the sale of tangible goods, which according to their nature and legal status,may be movable, immovable, or intangible assets.

The Government appoints VAT collectors, who collect the VAT due from goods purchased or services received andforward the payments to the State Treasury. VAT collectors include Production Sharing Contractors (PSCs),Government Treasurer Companies, or Government institutions appointed by the Minister of Finance.

Information on VAT

Tax Payer

A Taxable Person or a Tax Payer for Value Added Tax purposes is an individual or an entity, supplying taxablegoods and/ or rendering taxable services.

Entity

Entity is a group of people and/or capital which forms a unity that either conducts business or does not. Itincludes:

Corporation

Limited partnership

State – local owned enterprise in whatever name and form

Co operative, pension fund, partnership, association foundation, public organisation, social and politicalorganisation, or any similar organisation, institution, permanent establishment and any other form of entity.

Taxable Goods

Value Added Tax shall be imposed on:

Supply of Taxable Goods carried out in the customs area by a Firm1.

Import of Taxable Goods2.

Taxable Services rendered in a customs area by a Firm3.

Utilisation of intangible Taxable Goods obtained from outside the customs area within a Customs Area4.

Utilisation of Taxable Services obtained from outside the customs area within a customs area5.

Export of Taxable Goods by a taxable person for VAT purposes.6.

Rate of VAT

VAT is imposed on most goods and services at a rate of 10%. Government regulations can adjust the rate to aslow as 5% and as high as 15%.



Terminology Used in VAT

Taxpayer Identification Number

Every tax payer should register at the office of Directorate of General of Taxes to obtain a TaxpayerIdentification Number, which will be unique to him/ her.

Taxable Period

Taxable period is equal to one calendar month or any other period that does not exceed three calendar monthsas stipulated in a decree by the Minister of Finance.

Taxable Year

Taxable Year is a calendar year unless the taxpayer adopts an accounting year, which is different from thecalendar year.



Filing VAT Returns

Every Tax Payer is obliged to complete his Tax Return, using the Indonesian Language in the Latin alphabetwith Arabic numerals and Rupiah currency, and register and confirm it by signing and filing it at the district taxoffice.

A Tax Payer who has obtained permission from the Minister of Finance to use a foreign language and non-Rupiahcurrency in the Tax Return, shall file his Tax Return in the Indonesian Language or Foreign Language, usingcurrency other than the Rupiah, as regulated in a decree by the Minister of Finance.

A Tax Payer shall obtain a Tax Return form at the locations specified by the Director General of Taxes.

On request, the Director General of Taxes may extend the period for filing an Annual Tax Return for no longerthan six months. The request shall be in writing, accompanied by a statement estimating the amount of taxpayable for a taxable year and proof of settlement of the tax payable.

If the Tax Return is not filed within the due date, or is filed after the due date, a Letter of Reprimand shall beissued.

The form and content of the Tax Return and the required information, along with the documents, shall bestipulated in a decree by the Minister of Finance.

A Tax Return shall be considered ‘Not Filed’ if it is not signed, or does not contain the required information anddocuments.

Tax Return

A Tax Return is a document used by a tax payer to report the calculation and/or payment of taxes.

Annual Tax Return

Annual Tax Return is a tax return for a particular taxable year or a fraction of the taxable year.

Due Dates for Filing Tax Returns

Periodic Tax Return

Periodic Tax Return is filed twenty days after the end of a taxable period. If the tax is not paid within the duedate, then an Administrative Penalty of Rp. 50,000.00 is charged for an individual tax payer.

Annual Tax Return

Annual Tax Return is filed three months after the end of taxable year. If it is not paid within the due date, thena penalty of Rp. 100,000.00 is charged.

N o t e: The administrative penalty applies to certain tax payers who are stipulated by a

decree of the Minister of Finance.

Where and When do I pay?

Tax shall be payable at the time of:

1.

2.

Supply of Taxable Goods1.

Import of Taxable Goods2.

Rendering of Taxable Services3.

Utilisation of intangible Taxable Goods obtained from outside the Customs Area4.

Export of Taxable Goods5.

If payment is received:

Before supply of Taxable Goods or rendering of Taxable Services1.

Before the utilisation of intangible Taxable Goods2.

The tax shall be paid at the time of payment.

N o t e: If there is any change of rules or if there is any difficulty in deciding the time of

payment then the Director General of Taxes may determine a certain time as ‘time of

tax payable

Issue of Invoice

A Taxable Person for VAT purposes shall be obliged to issue a Tax Invoice for each supply of Taxable Goods orServices.

A Taxable Person for VAT purposes may issue a single Tax Invoice, consisting of all supplies, to the same buyer ofTaxable Goods or recipient of Taxable Services during one calendar month.

If the payment is received before the supply of Taxable Goods or the rendering of Taxable Services, then the TaxInvoice shall be issued at the time of payment.

The time of issuance, format, size, availability and procedures for submission and correction of a Tax Invoice shallbe determined by the Director General of Taxes.

A Tax Invoice shall include information concerning the supply of Taxable Goods or the rendering of TaxableServices along with.

The name, address and Taxpayer Identification Number of the Taxable Person supplying the taxable Goodsor rendering the Taxable Services

1.

The name, address, and Taxpayer Identification Number of the buyer of the taxable of the Taxable Services2.

The type of Goods or Services, total Sales Price or Consideration, and amount of3.

Value Added Tax withheld

Sales Tax on Luxury Goods withheld

code, serial number and date of issuance of the Tax Invoice and



name, position, and signature of person authorised to sign the Tax Invoice.

Interest

If the payment or remittance of tax payable is made after the due date, a penalty of 2% is charged.

The interest is calculated monthly, from the due date of payment up to the date of payment, where a fraction ofthe month is treated as one full month.

Refund of Tax Overpayment

The Director General of Taxes must issue a notice of tax assessment within twelve months of the acceptance ofa request for refund of tax overpayment.

VAT in Tally

VAT for Indonesia in Tally is simple and easy to use with in-built classifications for easy voucher entry. It tracksall VAT enabled transactions and computes them automatically. Transactions can be recorded in foreign currency.

Tally allows the generation of simple and standard invoices as well VAT Return forms in Government prescribedformats.



Enabling VAT in Tally

Creating a Company

Go to Gateway of Tally > Alt+F3 > Create Company1.

Enter the contact details of the Company.2.

Select the country from the List of Countries, in the field Statutory Compliance for .3.

Enabling VAT in F11: Features

1.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts info. > F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation.1.

Set Enable VAT to Yes .2.

Under Tax Information, enter the following fields:

VAT Regn. No. : Enter the 15 digit VAT Registration Number issued by the tax office

VAT Regn. Date : Enter the VAT Registration Date

Tax Invoice Code : Enter the alpha-numeric tax invoice code

Accept the screen to save .




To create a Sales ledger for VAT

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Ledger > Create/Alter1.


Select the group Sales Accounts from the List of Groups3.

Set Inventory values are affected? to Yes4.

Set Used In VAT Returns? to Yes and Select the VAT/Tax Class as shown in the screen below.5.

6.


N o t e : You can select the VAT/TAX Class during voucher entry, by selecting Not

Applicable in the above field.

Similarly, you can create a sales ledger with VAT/TAX Class – Sales @ 10% to Unregistered Dealers .




To create a ledger for the Supplier ,


Enter the name of the ledger in the Name field2.

In the Under field, select Sundry Creditors from List of Groups3.

Set Maintain Balances Bill by Bill to Yes/No4.

By default Inventory Values are affected is set to No , which can be set to Yes , if applicable5.

Enter the Mailing Details for the ledger6.

Enter the 15 digit VAT Regn. No .7.

7.

Accept the screen to s ave .8.




To create a Purchase ledger for VAT,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Ledger > Create/Alter1.


In the Under field, select the Purchase Accounts from the List of Groups3.


Set Used In VAT Returns? to Yes and Select the VAT/Tax Class as shown in the screen below5.

6.

Accept the above screen to save6.



Creating a VAT Ledger

Ledgers for VAT has to be created following the procedure mentioned below.



In the Under field, select Duties & Taxes from List of Groups3.

Select VAT in the field Type of Duty/Tax4.

In the VAT/TAX Class field, select the appropriate classification5.

Note: You can select the VAT/TAX Class during the Voucher entry by selecting N o t

Applicable in the above field


Set Percentage of Calculation to the VAT rate that you selected in the VAT/Tax class field or set it to0%

7.

Select the Method of Calculation – On VAT Rate from Type of Duty menu8.

8.

Accept to save .9.



Creating a Sales Voucher Type

A Sales Voucher Type has to be created/Altered to issue a Standard VAT Invoice

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Types > Alter/Create1.

Enter the Name of the Voucher Type2.

Select the Type of Voucher as Sales from the List of Voucher Type3.

Abbreviate the Voucher Type as per your requirement in the Abbr. field4.

Select Automatic for the method of Voucher numbering5.

Set Use Advance Configuration to Yes, to specify the numbering method, if required6.

Set the remaining fields according to your requirements. For more information, refer to Voucher Types7.

Set Is Tax Invoice? to Yes to issue a Standard Invoice8.

N o t e : If Set is Tax Invoice is set to N o , then the Invoice is printed in Simple Invoice

f o r m a t .

Enter all the details and accept the screen to save9.





Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select Purchase Voucher (F9)1.

Enter the Reference in the Ref field if required2.

Enter the Date of Purchase in the Date field3.


Select the Purchase A/c Ledger5.

Select the VAT/Tax Class from the List of VAT/TAX Class , if it is not specified in the ledger creation6.

N o t e : Set Allow selection of VAT/Tax Class during entry to Yes in F12: Configure , to

select VAT/Tax Class during Voucher Entry

Select the Stock Item from the List of Items7.

Select the VAT ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts8.


9.




Creating a Debit Note

You can use the Debit Note Voucher to record a Purchase Return entry.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Ctrl + F91.

Enter the Reference in the Ref field2.


Enter the required details in Party Details sub form4.

Select the Purchase ledger for allocation5.

Select the VAT/Tax Class from the List6.


Enter the Quantity and Rate8.

Select the VAT ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts9.

Enter N arration if required10.

10.




Creating a Simple Sales Invoice

To create a Simple Sales Invoice that includes VAT,



Enter the Tax Invoice No.3.



Select the VAT/Tax Class from the List of VAT/TAX Class , if the class is not selected during the ledgercreation.

6.

N o t e : Set Allow selection of VAT/Tax Class during entry to Y e s in F12: Configure ,

to select VAT/Tax Class during Voucher Entry


Select the ledger VAT from the List of Ledger Accounts8.


9.


N o t e : In the VAT/Tax Class field, there is an option called Not Applicable . Select

this option if you need different classifications for each item during voucher entry.

Similarly, you can create entries for Sale to Unregistered Dealers .



Creating Standard Sales Invoice

To issue a sales invoice using a currency other than the Rupiah , follow the procedure given below.

To create a sales entry, a foreign currency has to be created, e.g. RM. Refer to Currencies for more information.


Select the Voucher type – Sales Standard2.


Enter the Tax Invoice No .4.



Select the VAT/Tax Class from the List of VAT/TAX Class7.


Enter the quantity9.

As it is a Forex transaction, enter the foreign currency. In this case, enter RM and then rate10.

The Forex Rate of Exchange screen is displayed as shown.11.

11.

Enter the Rate of Exchange12.

If the item is sold at a discount price then, select the ledger Discount created under Indirect Expenses13.

If the Discount ledger is selected, then prefix the rate of discount with a Negative (-) symbol.14.

Select the ledger VAT from the List of Ledger Accounts and enter the rate .15.




16.


To Print a Standard Sales Invoice Press Alt + P (Print) to display the Voucher Printing screen,

Enter the details like the Name , Status/Designation/Place and Date .

Press F12: Configure to display the Invoice Printing Configuration Screen, Set Print in Statutory Format toYes



The preview of the invoice displays as shown:

The following details are displayed in the Standard Tax Invoice

The Invoice No. : It displays the number assigned in the sales voucher

Code and No. of Tax Invoice : The Tax Invoice Code as entered in F11: Features and the seven digitnumber entered in the Invoice is printed in this field.

Seller Details

Name : The company name as entered in the company creation screen is printed here

Address : The company address as entered in the company creation screen is printed here

VAT Regn. No. : The VAT Regn. No. as entered in F11: Features is printed in this field

The Date of Issue of Taxable Invoice : The VAT Regn. Date as entered in F11: Features is printed in thisfield

Buyer Details

Name : The name of the buyer is printed in this field

Buyers Address : The buyer's address is printed in this field

VAT Regn. No. : The buyers VAT Regn. No. as entered in the ledger is printed here

Type of Goods/ Services : The nature of goods or service being sold is entered here

Selling Price in Foreign Currency and In Indonesian Rupiah : The value of the goods being sold is printed inboth the sellers as well as the buyers currency (Since the above is a foreign currency transaction)

Total Sale/Compensation/Advances : The value of the sale is printed in this field

Total Discount : Any discount offered is printed in this field

Amount of Down Payments : This field remains blank

Total Subject to VAT : The total value of goods sold that are VAT liable is printed in this field

VAT Amount : 10% X Total Subject to VAT

Place & Date : The date and place of the Invoice is printed in this field

Authorised Signatory : The Designation of the person filing the return entered in the Print Configuration screenis printed in this field.

Exchange Rate : The Rate at which the currency was exchanged

Creating a Credit Note

A Credit Note voucher can be used to record a Sales Return entry.

To create a Sales Return entry,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Ctrl + F81.

Enter the Reference number in the Ref field if required2.


Enter the required details in Party Details sub form4.

Select the Sales ledger for allocation5.

Select the VAT/Tax Class from the List of Ledger Accounts6.

Select the Item from the List of Items7.

Select the ledger VAT from the List of Ledger Accounts8.




9.


VAT Reports

To view VAT Reports,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > VAT Reports

The VAT Reports menu displays the following options

VAT Computation

VAT Forms



VAT Computation

VAT Computation report displays the summary of Input and Output VAT Classifications, Assessable Value andsubsequent Tax calculated on the Assessable Value.

It also calculates the opening Input VAT carried forward if any, and the balance paid/payable.

To view the VAT Computation report

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > VAT Reports > VAT Computation .



The VAT Computation Report displays the Total Output and Input Tax payable and the Total Input Credit available.

Drill down to each tax classification to view the Sales/ Purchase reports as shown.

VAT Forms

The VAT return forms can be viewed using the VAT Forms menu.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > VAT Reports > VAT Forms > VAT Return Forms

FORM – 1195 A1

FORM – 1195 B1

FORM 1195 A1

Form – 1195 A1 displays the Sales entries as shown.



Tax Year Period : The month of submission is displayed in this field

The Name of the Company : The Name of the Company is displayed in this field.

VAT Regn. No. : The VAT Regn. No. as entered in F11: Features > F3: Statutory and Taxation is displayedhere.

N.P.P.K.P No. : The VAT Registration number is displayed in this field

VAT Regn. Date : The VAT Regn. Date as entered in F11: Features is displayed in this field

Column 1 : The Serial Number is displayed in this column.

Column 2: The Supplier's Name is displayed in this column.

Column 3 : The Supplier's Tax ID is displayed in this column

Column 4 : The Supplier's Tax Invoice No. is displayed in this column

Column 5 : Date of Invoice is displayed in this column

Column 6 : The Tax Value in Rupiah is displayed in this column

Column 7 : This field remains blank

Row I : The Total Tax Value for a non tax registered customer is printed in this field

Row II : This field remains blank

Row III : This field remains blank

Recapitulation

Simple Tax Invoice : The total tax on Simple Tax Invoices is displayed in this field.1.

2.

1.

Tax Invoice to Value Added Tax Payee : This field remains blank2.

Standard Tax Invoice to Third Party who is not a Value Added Tax Collector : The total tax valuepaid to the registered dealer is printed in this field

3.

Total Value Added Tax : The sum of box 1 and box 3 is displayed in this field.4.

Reduced by VAT/Sales Tax on Luxury Goods : The tax value calculated on the return of the sold goods(credit notes) is printed in this field.

5.

Total : The difference between Box 4 and Box 6 is displayed in this field6.



FORM 1195 B1

Form 1195 B1 displays the purchase transactions:

Date of Statement month and year : The Period specified in the print configuration is displayed in this field

Date of revised statement : This field has to be filled manually

The Name of the Company : The Name of the Company is printed in this field

VAT Regn. No. : The VAT Registration number as entered in F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation isdisplayed in this field

N.P.P.K.P No . –The VAT Registration is displayed in this field

VAT Regn. Date – The VAT Registration Date as entered in F11: Features > Statutory & Taxation isdisplayed in this field

Column 1 : The Serial Number for the details in the form is printed in this field

Column 2 : The Supplier's Name is displayed in this column.

Column 3 : The Supplier's Tax ID is displayed in this column

Column 4 : The Supplier's Tax Invoice No. is displayed in this column

Column 5 : The Date of the supplier Invoice is displayed in this column

Column 6 : The Tax Value in Rupiah is displayed in this column

Column 7 : This field remains blank

Row I : This field remains blank

Row II : This field remains blank

Total Tax Value : The Total Tax Value is printed in this field

Row III : This field remains blank



Recapitulation

Import Tax duty which is in the same tax period : This field remains blank

VAT-In for the same Tax period : Total Tax paid for the specified period is printed in this field.

Import Tax Duty which is not in the same Tax period : This field remains blank

VAT-In for not the same Tax Period : The Input VAT paid on the purchases which do not belong to the sameperiod is printed in this field.

Total Input Tax : The total of the fields 2 and 4 is printed in this field.

Reduced with VAT for Procurement Return Goods : The amount on Input Vat reversed due to return of goodsis printed in this field.

Others : This field remains blank

Total Input Tax which has been credited : The difference of rows 5 and 6 (5-6) is printed in this field

N o t e : An M T S code appears in Column 7 of the form, when the bill date is greater than

the date entered in the Purchase Voucher

UK VAT Analysis

Tally produces the VAT Analysis Report in the British VAT Return Form 100 format with Boxes 1 to 9. It isautomatically produced for a quarter ending the last date of voucher entry and is picked from the sales andpurchase voucher entries..

Set-up required to produce the return

The set-up is more in detail if you deal with the European Union.

Where Boxes 2, 8 and 9 are not applicable

Businesses not trading in Goods or related services with the EC – Domestic trade only or Exports to othercountries or supply of services, like consultancy, to EC. In short, where Boxes 2, 8 and 9 are not applicable.

In the Company Creation screen,

Select the UK from the List of Countries in the field Statutory Compliance for.1.

Activate the option Prepare and Follow British Style VAT Returns to Yes in F11: Features >Statutory & Taxation.

Select Not Applicable for the option Group Name Under which EC Debtors are classified .

Select Not Applicable for the option Group Name Under which EEC Creditors are classified.

2.

N o t e : Use Voucher Classes for sales to automate sales invoice entry if required.

Ensure that all VAT entries are made through Purchases, Sales, Debit Note and Credit Note vouchers only.VAT entries made in other voucher types like Payment, will not be included in the VAT Return.

2.

N o t e : The set up determines the figures that go into the VAT Analysis Report. Hence,

check the figures and the entries carefully before copying them into your VAT Return.

Adjustment items like Fuel scale charges are typically entered through a journal and

would not be reflected in the Report. For this, you might have to adjust the Report

f i g u r e s .

More:

VAT Analysis Report

Businesses trading in goods with the EEC and not services

Print VAT Analysis Return and Reports



Business Trading in Goods with the EEC and Not Services

Where Boxes 2, 8 and 9 are applicable

If you deal with the EEC, it is advisable to group your EC Customers separately under a sub group of SundryCreditors. You have to be careful while grouping only VAT registered companies in these groups as they wouldaffect Box 8 and 9 as well as the EC Sales List.

N o t e : Unregistered companies or individuals should be grouped separately and treated

like UK companies

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features > F2: Inventory Features > Set Prepare & Follow BritishStyle VAT Returns to Yes. The following screen displays.

1.

2.

Select any Group Name for the option Group Name Under which ‘EEC Debtors’ are classified . E.g. ECCustomers.

2.

Select any Group Name for the option Group Name Under which ‘EEC Creditors’ are classified. E.g. ECSuppliers..

3.

Alter the group Sales Accounts to enable Used for Calculation . Set it to Yes .4.

Now create or alter the ledger account used for recording sales of Goods (not services) to EC Countries.Activate Percentage of calculation and set it to the standard rate of VAT , E.g. 17.5. Set the methodof calculation to any one method, say On Total Sales .

6.

If you have sales for items with different VAT rates, create separate sales accounts for them and givepercentages accordingly.

7.

Follow the same steps for EC Purchases accounts as well.8.

Use Voucher Classes for sales to automate sales invoice entry if required.9.

Ensure that all VAT entries are made through Purchases, Sales, Debit Note and Credit Note vouchers only.10.

N o t e : VAT entries made in other voucher types like Payment, will not be included in the



10.

VAT Return

Business providing services to the EC in addition to Goods as well as exporting to other countries

If you deal with the EC, it is advisable to group your EC Customers separately under a sub-group under SundryDebtors. Likewise, group EC Suppliers under a separate sub-group of Sundry Creditors

Activate British Style VAT Returns in F11:Company Features.1.

Select any Group Name for the option Group Name Under which EEC Debtors are classified . E.g. ECCustomers..

2.

Select any Group Name for the option Group Name Under which EEC Creditors are classified . E.g. ECSuppliers.

3.

Alter the group Sales Accounts to enable Used for Calculation and set it to Yes .

For Goods follow the instructions in 2 above.

4.

For sale of services to EC Countries, do not give any percentage. Leave the field blank.

For export sales, do not give any percentage.

Follow the same steps for EC Purchases accounts.5.

Use Voucher Classes for sales to automate sales invoice entry if required.6.

Ensure that all VAT entries are made through Purchase, Sales, and Debit Note and Credit Note vouchersonly. VAT entries made in other voucher types like Payment, will not be included in the VAT Return.

7.

N o t e : The set up determines the figures that go into the VAT Analysis Report. Hence,

check the figures and the entries carefully before copying them into your VAT Return.

VAT Analysis Report

To view the VAT Analysis Report

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > VAT Analysis


Box 1

Gives VAT due calculated from the sales vouchers.

Double click on the row or press Enter and the following screen displays.



The sales entries are displayed in columns showing break-up of net value of sales on which VAT is applicable ornot. The VAT charged on each invoice is shown in a column. VAT calculated but not applied is shown for EC Salesinformation for items on which VAT is charged only in the UK. This is directly relevant for Box 2 purposes. Theamount shaded green is brought to the VAT box.

Box 2

The Box is not relevant if there are no inputs from EEC.

The EC VAT calculated but not applied is brought in. It is also included in Box 4, which is the total VAT Chargedand EC VAT Calculated (not applied).

Double click on the row or press Enter and the following screen displays.

Box 3

This prints the total of the sum of Box 1 and Box 2 .

Box 4

It is the VAT dues calculated from Purchase Voucher entries. It includes the Box 2 figure.

Double click on the row or press Enter to view input details.




The purchase entries are displayed in columns showing break-up of net value of purchases on which VAT isapplicable or not. The VAT charged on each invoice is shown in a column. VAT calculated but not applied is shownfor EC purchases information for items on which VAT is charged in the UK. The amount shaded green is brought tothe VAT box.

Box 5

Net VAT due to be paid or refunded which will be the difference between the Box 3 & Box 4 .

Box 6

Total Net Value of sales and other outputs as obtained from the sales voucher entries.

Double click on the row or press Enter to view Output Details.


Box 7

Total Net Value of purchases and other inputs as obtained from the purchase voucher entries.

Double click on the row or press Enter to view Output Details.




Box 8

This shows the sale of goods to EEC customers. The figure depends upon correct classification of EEC customersand activation of percentage of calculation in sales ledger accounts. It is the total of the amounts in the Nett Value(VAT Applicable) column in the Output Details for EC Member Countries.

Note: Those items that although have a VAT Rate specified, but whose sale account

allocation do not have a percentage of calculation will not be included. Hence, it is

important to allocate EC Sales to a separate Sales Account for which percentage of

Calculation has not been set to 0.

On the other hand, services supplied to EC Customers are not to be considered and hence should be allocated to asales account for which the percentage of calculation is 0.

The following screen displays Output Details for EC Member Countries.

Box 9

This reflects the purchase of goods from EC Suppliers.

N o t e : The same note of caution as for Box 8 applies to Box 9 as well.



Print VAT Analysis Return and Reports

Display the VAT Return Screen and click on the Print Button or use the keys Alt+P. The Print option cyclesthrough all reports including EC reports.

Let us consider an Example:

Create the following groups:

EC Customers under Sundry Debtors1.

EC Suppliers under Sundry Creditors2.

EC Customers for goods and services3.

Export Customers4.

N o t e : Alter the Groups Sales Accounts and Purchase Accounts to change the setting

for the Field Used for Calculation to Yes..

Create the following Ledger accounts (alter if they already exist).

Under the Group Sales Accounts

EC Sales – Goods

Set the option Inventory Values are affected? to Yes

Enter the required percentage in the Percentage of Calculation field. Here it is 17.5%.

Select On Total Sales from the Type of Duty list under the Method of Calculation field.

EC Sales – Services


Enter the required percentage in the Percentage of Calculation field. Here it is 0%.

UK Sales


Enter the required percentage in the Percentage of Calculation field. Here it is 17.5%




Export Sales


Enter the required percentage in the Percentage of Calculation field. Here it is 0%.

Under the Group Purchase accounts

EC Purchases


Enter the required percentage in the Percentage of Calculation field. Here it is 17.5%.


VAT Accounts under the group Duties and Taxes

Output VAT1.

Enter the required percentage in the percentage of calculation. Here it is 17.5%

Select Based on Item Rate from the Type of Duty list under the Method of calculation field.

Output VAT – 0%2.

Enter the required percentage in the percentage of calculation. Here it is 0%


VAT Exempt3.

Select VAT from the Types of Duty/Tax list under the field Type of Duty/Tax.

Select the required VAT/Tax Class under the field VAT/Tax Class.

Input VAT.4.

Enter the required percentage in the percentage of calculation.


Classes (to automate invoice entry)

Alter the Sales Voucher Type and create the following classes. Refer Voucher Classes for more details.

VAT Sales

In the Voucher Type Alteration screen, give a suitable name under the field Name of Class. Then theVoucher Type Class screen is displayed.

Select UK Sales as the Ledger Name from the List of Ledger Accounts under the Default AccountingAllocations for each Item in Invoice .

Type 100% under the Percentage field.

Select Output VAT @ 17.5% as the Ledger Name and Value Basis as 17.5% under the AdditionalAccounting Entries

EC Sales (Goods)

Select EC Sales (Goods) as the Ledger Name from the List of Ledger Accounts under the DefaultAccounting Allocations for each Item in Invoice

Select Output VAT @ 0% as the Ledger Name under the Additional Accounting Entries

EC Sales (Services)

Select EC Sales (Services) as the Ledger Name from the List of Ledger Accounts under the DefaultAccounting Allocations for each Item in Invoice

Select VAT Exempt as the Ledger Name under the Additional Accounting Entries

Export

Select Export Sales as the Ledger Name from the List of Ledger Accounts under the DefaultAccounting Allocations for each Item in Invoice .

Select VAT Exempt as the Ledger Name under the Additional Accounting Entries.



Introduction

Value Added Tax is a form of sales tax. It is a tax on consumption, levied on the sale of goods and services and onthe import of goods into the Philippines. It is an indirect tax, which can be passed on to the buyer.

Every person or entity that sells/ leases goods, properties and services subject to VAT is required to file VATReturns, if the aggregate amount of actual gross sales/ receipts exceeds Seven Hundred Fifty Thousand Pesos(PHP 750,000.00), for any twelve-month period.

In short, the following persons are liable to file VAT returns:

A person required to register as VAT taxpayer, but who failed to register

A person who imports goods

Professional practitioners such as

Certified Public Accountants

Insurance Agents (Life & Non-Life)

Professional Practitioners who are required to pass the government examination

Others

Type of Rates

The standard VAT rate is 12 percent. Certain goods and services are exempted from VAT (i.e., exempt withoutcredit for input VAT), including medical, dental, and hospital services; educational services provided by privateand government educational institutions; and educational services rendered by duly accredited private educationalinstitutions.

Tax Rates

For output tax - 0% or 12%1.

For input tax2.

Normal - 0% or 12%

Transitional input tax rate - 8% or 10%

Presumptive input tax rate - 1-1/2%

Creditable VAT withheld by the Government and the licensee or lessee (3%, 6%, 8.5% and 10%).

Types of Purchases

Purchase of Capital Goods (Not exceeding P1 Million )

Purchase of Capital Goods (Exceeding P1 Million)

Domestic Purchases of Goods Other than Capital Goods

Importation of Goods Other than Capital Goods

Domestic Purchase of Services

Services Rendered by Non-Residents

Purchases Not Qualified for Input Tax

Others

Types of Sales



The term "sale or exchange of services" implies the performance of all kinds of services in the Philippines forothers for a fee, remuneration or consideration.

Zero-Rated Sale

It is a sale, barter or exchange of goods, properties or services that are subject to 0% VAT.

VAT Exempt Sales

It is a sale or lease of goods, properties and services that are not subject to output tax. The buyer cannot avail taxcredit or input tax on such exempt sale.

Sales Subject to VAT

Normal sales by a VAT registered dealer to another VAT registered dealer or retailer.

Sales to Government

Sales made to the government.

Types of Returns

Monthly VAT Declaration

Tax Form

BIR Form 2550 M

Documents Required for filing returns

Duly issued Certificate of Creditable VAT Withheld at Source (BIR Form 2307), if applicable1.

Duly approved Tax Debit Memo, if applicable2.

Duly approved Tax Compliance Certificate, if applicable3.

Previously filed return and proof of payment, for amended return4.

Summary List of Sales (if quarterly total Sales/Receipts (net of VAT) exceeds PHP 2,500,000) with the followinginformation:

5.

BIR-registered name of the buyer who is engaged in business/exercise of profession

Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) of the buyer (Only for sales that are subject to VAT)

Exempt Sales

Zero-Rated Sales

Sales subject to VAT (exclusive of VAT)

Output Tax (VAT on Sales)

Summary List of Purchases (if quarterly total purchases (net of VAT) exceeds PHP 1,000,000) with the followinginformation:

6.

BIR-registered name of the seller/ supplier/ service provider

Address of seller/ supplier/ service provider

Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) of seller/ supplier/ service provider

Exempt purchases

Zero-Rated purchases

Purchases subject to VAT (exclusive of VAT) - on services

Purchases subject to VAT (exclusive of VAT) - on capital goods

Purchases subject to VAT (exclusive of VAT) - on goods other than capital goods

Creditable Input Tax

Non-creditable Input Tax

N o t e : Creditable and non-creditable input taxes are to be computed not on per supplier

basis, but on per month basis.

The Quarterly Summary List of Importation with the following information:7.

Import Entry Declaration

Assessment/ Release Date

Date of Importation

Name of the Seller

Country of Origin

Dutiable Value

All Charges Before Release from Customs Custody

Landed Cost

Exempt



Taxable (Subject to VAT)

VAT Paid

Official Receipt (OR) Number of the Official Receipt evidencing payment of tax

Date of VAT payment

Quarterly VAT Declaration

Tax Form

BIR Form 2550 Q

Documents Required for Filing Returns

Duly issued Certificate of Creditable VAT Withheld at Source (BIR Form 2307), if applicable1.

Duly approved Tax Debit Memo, if applicable2.

Duly approved Tax Compliance Certificate, if applicable3.

Previously filed return and proof of payment, for amended return4.

Summary List of Sales (if quarterly total Sales/Receipts (net of VAT) exceeds PHP 2,500,000) with the followinginformation:

5.

BIR-registered name of the buyer who is engaged in business/exercise of profession

Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) of the buyer (Only for sales that are subject to VAT)

Exempt Sales

Zero-Rated Sales

Sales subject to VAT (exclusive of VAT)

Output Tax (VAT on Sales)

6. Summary List of Purchases (if quarterly total purchases (net of VAT) exceeds PHP 1,000,000) with the followinginformation:

BIR-registered name of the seller/ supplier/ service provider

Address of seller/ supplier/ service provider

Taxpayer Identification Number (TIN) of seller/ supplier/ service provider

Exempt purchases

Zero-Rated purchases

Purchases subject to VAT (exclusive of VAT) - on services

Purchases subject to VAT (exclusive of VAT) - on capital goods

Purchases subject to VAT (exclusive of VAT) - on goods other than capital goods

Creditable Input Tax

Non-creditable Input Tax

Note: Creditable and non-creditable input taxes are to be computed not on per supplier

basis, but on per month basis.

7. The Quarterly Summary List of Importation with the following information:

Import Entry Declaration

Assessment/ Release Date

Date of Importation

Name of the Seller

Country of Origin

Dutiable Value

All Charges Before Release from Customs Custody

Landed Cost

Exempt

Taxable (Subject to VAT)

VAT Paid

Official Receipt (OR) Number of the Official Receipt evidencing payment of tax



Date of VAT payment

Filing of Returns

For Monthly VAT Declarations

Manual Filing

Returns must be filed not later than the twentieth (20th) day, of the following month.

For Quarterly VAT Declarations

Returns must be filed within twenty-five (25) days, following the close of the taxable quarter of the taxpayer, formanual filing.

How Do I File My Returns?

When a payment has to be made:

You are required to register and present the duly accomplished BIR Form 2550 M/Q with the requiredattachments and your payment at the nearest Authorised Agents Bank (AAB) of the Revenue District Office.

Where there are no AABs, you are required to register and present the duly accomplished BIR Form 2550M/Q, together with the required attachments and your payment to the Revenue Collection Officer or dulyAuthorised City or Municipal Treasurer, located within the Revenue District Office.

You will receive a copy of the duly stamped and validated form from the teller of the AABs/ RevenueCollection Officer/ duly Authorised City or Municipal Treasurer.

When there is no payment:

You are required to register and present the duly accomplished BIR Form 2550 M/Q with the requiredattachments at the Revenue District Office.

You will receive your copy of the duly stamped and validated form from the RDO representative.

N o t e : 1.

For taxpayers with offices in multiple locations, only one consolidated return shall be

filed for the principal place of business/ head office and all the branches.

2. The Quarterly

List of Sales and Purchases shall be submitted in magnetic form, using a 3.5-inch

floppy diskette, following the format provided under Section4. 110-4 (sub-section G) of

RR 8-2002

Penalties



There shall be imposed and collected as part of the tax:

A surcharge of twenty-five percent (25%), fifty percent (50%), interest at the rate of twenty percent (20%) perannum, compromise penalty or such higher rate as may be prescribed by rules and regulations, on any unpaidamount of tax, from the date prescribed for the payment until the amount is fully paid.

Creating a Company

To create a company, provide basic information about the company whose books of accounts are to be maintainedin Tally


Statutory Compliance for:

Select Philippines from the List of Countries

Enabling VAT Returns

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounts Info. > F11: Features > Statutory and Taxation



Set Enable Value Added Tax (VAT) to Yes

Select Type of Dealer as Regular

Enter the VAT Registration number

Enter VAT Applicable from date

Enter the Line of Business

Enter RDO Code given by the Philippines Customs and Excise Department

Accept to save the changes


To create a Customer ledger,


Enter the Name of the customer ledger you wish to create2.

Select the group Under which you are creating the customer ledger3.

Enable Maintain balance bill-by-bill? to Yes and enter details in the Default Credit Period if applicable4.

By default the Inventory Values are affected? field is set to No5.

Accept to save6.


Create a Supplier Ledger under Sundry Creditors as shown.

Creating an Input VAT Ledger

To create a Input VAT Ledger


Enter the Name of the Tax ledger you wish to create2.

Select the group Duties and Taxes from the field Under3.

On the selection of group Duties and Taxes , you will get the option to select Type of Duty/Tax . SelectVAT from the list

4.

5.



If you do not wish to select VAT classification at the Ledger level, select Not Applicable as theVAT/Tax Class can be selected while creating a voucher.

5.

By default the Inventory values are affected field is set to No6.

Set the Percentage of Calculation as 12% and Method of Calculation as On VAT Rate .7.

Note: If the VAT/Tax Class is not selected at the ledger level, the same can be

selected during voucher entry.

Creating an Output VAT Ledger

Creating Output VAT is similar to that of creating Input VAT.




To create a Sales Ledger,


Enter the Name of the sales ledger you wish to create2.

Select the group under which you are creating the sales ledger3.

Set the option Used in VAT Returns to Yes , if you want to select VAT classifications for this Ledger4.

Once you set this to Yes , Tally prompts with VAT/Tax Class screen5.

6.

5.

Select the required classification from the drop down list under the field VAT/Tax Class . The drop down listconsists of the Sales classifications pertaining to Philippines . If you do not wish to select a classification atthe Ledger level, select Not Applicable

6.

Select the Type of Industry from the list Type of Industries7.

N o t e : Types of Industry is applicable only in the case of taxable sales. Therefore, if

the user is selecting the taxable sales as VAT/Tax Class then this Type of Industry list

will appear.




Creating a Purchase ledger is similar to creating the Sales Ledger, but it should be created under PurchaseAccounts.

Creating a Journal Voucher Type

To create/Alter a Voucher Type, e.g. Journal

Go to Accounts Info. > Voucher Types > Create/Alter > Journal

Enter VAT Adjustment Class in the Name of Class field.

Set Use Class for VAT Adjustments to Yes and accept the screen



Creating Sales Voucher

To create a Sales Voucher ,


Select As Invoice2.

Enter the Reference in the Ref field , if required3.


Select the Sales Ledger applicable to the type of sales from the List of Ledger Accounts . Select theVAT/Tax Class from the drop down list

5.

6.

7.




Enter the Quantity and Rate . The amount is automatically displayed in the Amount field7.

Select the Output VAT from the List of Ledger Accounts . The percentage of the Output VAT rate isautomatically calculated on the Assessable Value

8.



Similarly, you can create Sales Vouchers for the remaining sales classes.

Creating a Sales Exempt Voucher


Select As Invoice1.

Enter the Reference in the Ref field, if required2.


Select the required VAT/Tax Class from the drop down list4.


6.

7.



5.




Similarly, you can create Sales Vouchers for the remaining sales classes

Creating a Sale of Service Voucher


Select As Invoice2.



Select the Sales Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts5.

Select the required VAT/Tax Class from the drop down list. If the Vat class is not selected in the ledgercreation

6.

7.

8.




Enter the Quantity and Rate. The amount is automatically displayed in the Amount field.8.

Select the Output VAT from the List of Ledger Accounts. The percentage of the Output VAT rate is automaticallycalculated on the Assessable Value

9.

Enter Narration, if required10.


Similarly, you can create Sales Vouchers for the remaining sales classes.


To create a Purchases Voucher,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F9: Purchase1.

Select As Invoice2.



Select the Purchase Ledger Account5.

Select the required VAT/Tax Class from the drop down list6.

7.





Select the Input VAT . The Input VAT percentage is automatically calculated on the Assessable Value9.



Creating Purchase service voucher


Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > F9: Purchase1.


Select Vendor-Services from the List of Ledger Account to be credited3.

Enter the amount to be credited4.

Select Purchase-Services account and Input VAT@12%-Services from the List of Ledger Account to beDebited

5.

6.

7.



4.

5.

Enter the amount6.




To create a Journal using a Voucher Class,


Select the class as VAT Adjustment Class from the Voucher Class List2.

Select the flag from the VAT Adjustments list under the field Used For3.

Select Advance Tax Paid in Used for field4.



4.

Select the Ledger Net VAT Payable Account created under Duties and Taxes from the List of LedgerAccounts to be debited

5.

Select the Ledger, Advance Tax Paid Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited6.




Creating a Journal for Compromise for Philippines

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounting Voucher > F7: Journal1.


3.

1.

2.

Select Compromise in Used for field3.

Select the Ledger Compromise Account created under Indirect Expenses from the List of LedgerAccounts to be debited

3.

Enter the amount to be debited4.

Select the Ledger Compromise Payable Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited5.






8.

Creating a Journal for Attributable Input Tax Towards Exempted Sales

Go to Gateway of Tally> Accounting Voucher > F7: Journal


Select Attributable Input Tax Towards Exempted Sales in Used for field2.

Select the Ledger Expenses Account created under Indirect Expenses from the List of Ledger Accountsto be debited

3.

Enter the amount to be debited from the List of Ledger Account to be credited4.

Select the Ledger Input VAT-Normal Purchase @ 12% from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited5.

The Amount is automatically6.

7.

5.

6.



Creating a Journal for Deferred Input Tax on Capital goods Greater than P1M



Select Deferred Input Tax on Capital goods Greater than P1M in the Used for field2.

Select the Ledger Deferred Input VAT on Capital goods A/c created under Current Assets from theList of Ledger Accounts to be debited

3.

4.

5.



3.


Select the Ledger Input VAT on Capital Goods 12%-More than 1 M from the List of Ledger Accountsto be credited

5.




Creating a Journal for Input Tax Reversal - Others



Select Input Tax Reversal Others in Used for field2.

2.

Select the Ledger Expenses Account created under Indirect Expenses from the List of LedgerAccounts to be debited

3.


Select the Ledger Input VAT @ 12%-Normal Purchase from the List of Ledger Accounts to becredited

5.




Creating a Advance Tax Payments Made

1.





Select Advance Tax payment Made in Used for field2.

Select the Ledger Net Vat payable Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be debited3.


Select the Ledger Advance Tax paid Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited5.



8.

7.


Creating a Journal for Not Attributable Input Tax Towards Exempted Sales



Select Not Attributable Input Tax Towards Exempted Sales in Used for field2.

Select the Ledger Expense Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be debited3.


Select the Ledger Input Vat @12% on Normal Purchase from the List of Ledger Accounts to becredited

5.

6.



5.




Creating a Interest Payable



Select Interest Payable in Used for field2.

Select the Ledger Interest Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be debited.3.

4.

3.

Enter the amount to be debited.4.

Select the Ledger Interest Payable Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited5.




Creating a Journal for Not attributable Input Tax Towards Sales to Government



Select Not Attributable Input Tax Towards Sale to Govt in Used for field2.



2.

Select the Ledger Expenses Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be debited3.


Select the Ledger Input Vat @12% on Normal Purchase from the List of Ledger Accounts to becredited

5.




Creating a Journal for Transitional Input Tax


1.


Select Transitional Input Tax in Used for field2.

Select the Ledger Input VAT Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be debited.3.

Enter the amount to be debited.4.

Select the Ledger Tax Paid on Opening Stock from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited5.






8.

Creating a Journal for Withheld Tax Credit Availed- Government



Select Withheld Tax Credit Availed-Govt in Used for field2.

Select the Ledger Output VAT@12% from the List of Ledger Accounts to be debited.3.


Select the Ledger Tax Withheld Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited5.


7.

5.

6.



Creating a Journal for Standard Input Tax to sale to Government



Select Standard Input Tax to Sale to Govt in Used for field2.

Select the Ledger Input VAT from the List of Ledger Accounts to be debited3.


5.



3.

4.

Select the Ledger Expenses Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited5.




Creating a Journal for Surcharge Payable



Select Surcharge Payable in Used for field2.

3.

2.

Select the Ledger, Surcharge Account , from the List of Ledger Accounts to be debited3.


Select the Ledger Surcharge Payable Account from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited.5.

The Amount is automatically entered.6.



Creating a Journal for VAT Refund/TCC Claimed


1.

2.




Select VAT Refund/TCC Claimed in Used for field2.

Select the Ledger, Refund Claim , from the List of Ledger Accounts to be debited3.


Select the Ledger, Input VAT , from the List of Ledger Accounts to be credited5.




8.



VAT Reports

To view VAT Reports,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > VAT Reports

The VAT Reports menu displays the following options

VAT Computation

VAT Forms

VAT Computation

The VAT Computation screen displays as shown.

Assessable Value

The Assessable Value is the total value of the transactions made with the respective VAT/Tax Classification.

Tax Amount

The rate of percentage calculated on the Assessable Value is the Tax Amount.

Show all VAT Classifications

Enable the option Show all VAT Classifications? to Yes in F12: Configure

The VAT Computation screen displays as shown.



VAT Return

Go to Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statutory Reports > VAT Reports > VAT Forms > VAT ReturnForms

The VAT Return for Philippines is displayed in the government prescribed format.

Use Alt + P or click on Print option to print the report.



The VAT Return form displays as shown

Monthly Value added Tax – Declaration

Fill in all applicable space. Mark all appropriate boxes with an ‘X’

1. For the Month of DD/MM/YY

The date entered in the Report Generation screen is captured in this column.

2. Amended Return

This field is to be filled manually.

3. Number of sheet attached

This field is to be filled manually.

Part I

4. TIN

The VAT TIN (Regular) as entered in F11: Features > F3: Statutory and Taxation is displayed here.

5. RDO Code

The RDO Code as entered in F11: Features > F3: Statutory and Taxation is displayed here.

6. Line of Business

The Line of Business as entered in F11: Features > F3: Statutory and Taxation is displayed here.

7. Taxpayer’s Name (for Individual) Last Name, Middle Name/ (for Non-Individual) Registered Name

Taxpayer’s Name as entered in the Company Creation screen is printed in this column.

8. Telephone no

The Telephone number as entered in the Company Creation screen is captured in this column.

9. Registered address

The Registered Address as entered in the Company Creation screen is captured in this column.

10. Zip code

The Zip Code as entered in the Company Creation screen is captured in this column.

11. Are you availing of tax relief under Special Law or International Tax Treaty?

To be filled manually after printing.

Part II

12. Vatable Sales/Receipt- Private (Sch.1)

The Total of all the Sales transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classifications, Sales of Service@12% and Sales ofGoods @12% Assessable Value is captured in the Sales/Receipts for the month (exclusive of VAT) column and thecorresponding Tax amount is captured in the Output Tax due for the month column.

13. Sales to Government

The Total of all the Sales transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classifications Sales of Service to Govt@12% andSales of Goods to Govt @12% Assessable Value is captured in the Sales/Receipts for the month (exclusive of VAT)column and the corresponding Tax amount is captured in the Out put Tax due for the month column.

14. Zero Rated Sales/Receipts

The Total of all the Sales transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification Sales-Zero Rated Assessable Value iscaptured in the Sales/Receipts for the month (exclusive of VAT) column.

15. Exempt Sales/Receipts

The Total of all the Sales transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification Sales Exempt Assessable Value iscaptured in Sales/Receipts for the month (exclusive of VAT) column.

16. Total Sales/Receipts and Output Tax Due

The Total of Boxes (12A+13A+14+15) is captured in column 16A and the Total of (12B+13B) is captured in 16B.

17 A. Input Tax Carried Over from Previous Period / Excess over 70% of Output VAT

Input Tax Carried Over from Previous Period / Excess over 70% of Output VAT is captured in this column.

17 B. Input Tax Deferred on Capital Goods Exceeding P1Million from Previous Period

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Input Tax Deferred onCapital Goods is printed this column.

The sample entry is given below.

Dr. Input Tax Deferred on Capital Goods

Cr. Input Vat on capital goods@12%

17 C. Transitional Input Tax

The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Transactional Input Taxis printed this column.

The sample entry is given below. Dr. Input VAT

Cr. Tax paid on opening stock

17 D. Presumptive Input Tax

The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Presumptive Input Taxis printed this column.


Dr. Input VAT

Cr. Other Income

17 E. Others


17 F Total (Sum of Item 17A, 17B, 17C, 17D & 17 E)

The Sum of Item 17A, 17B, 17C, 17D & 17E is captured in this column.

18 A/B. Purchase of Capital Goods not exceeding P1Million (see sch.2)

The Total of all the Purchase transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification, Purchase of capital goods, not



exceeding P1M Assessable Value is captured in Purchases column and the corresponding Tax amount is capturedin 18 B column.

18 C/D. Purchase of Capital Goods exceeding P1Million (see sch.2)

The Total of all the Purchase transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification, Purchase of capital goodsexceedingP1MAssessable Value is captured in Purchases and the corresponding Tax amount is captured in 18Dcolumn.

18 E/F. Domestic Purchase of Goods other than capital goods

The Total of all the Purchase transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification, Purchase of goods@12%Assessable Value, is captured in Purchases column and the corresponding Tax amount is captured in 18 F column.

18 G/H. Importation of Goods other than capital goods

The Total of all the Purchase Transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification, Purchase-Import@12%Assessable Value, is captured in Purchases and the corresponding Tax amount is captured in 18 H column.

18 I/J. Domestic Purchase of Service Goods other than capital goods

The Total of all the Purchase Transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification, Purchase-Service@12%Assessable Value, is captured in Purchases and the corresponding Tax amount is captured in 18 J column.

18 K/L. Service rendered by Non-residents

The Total of all the Purchase transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification, Purchase of Service rendered byNon- Residents@12% Assessable Value, is captured in Purchases column and the corresponding Tax amount iscaptured in 18 L column.

18 M. Purchases Not Qualified for Input Tax

The Total of all the Purchase transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification, Purchase not Qualified for InputTax Assessable Value, is captured in the Purchases column.

18 N/O. Others


19. Total Available Input tax (Sum of item 17F, 18B, 18D, 18F, 18H, 18J, 18L & 18O)

The Total Available Input tax (Sum of item 17F, 18B, 18D, 18F, 18H, 18J, 18L & 18O) is captured in this column.

20 A. Input Tax on Purchases of Capital Goods exceeding P1Million deferred for the succeeding period(Sch.3)

The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the VAT Adjustment Class and Used for as Deferred Input Tax onCapital Goods greater than P1M is printed this column.


Dr. Deferred input on capital goods

Cr. Input Vat on capital goods@ 12%

20 B. Input Tax on Sale to Govt. closed to expense (Sch.4)

The Schedule 4 Value is captured in this column.

20 C. Input Tax allocated to exempt sale (Sch.5)


20 D. Vat Refund/TCC Claimed

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Vat Refund/TCC Claimed isprinted this column.


Dr. Refund Claim

Cr. Input Vat

20 E. Input Tax in excess of 70% cap to be carried to next period (Sch.6)


20 F. Others

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Input Tax reversal- others isprinted this column.


Dr. Expense A/c

Cr. Input Vat @12%

21. Total Allowable Input Tax (Item19 less Item 20G)

The Difference of Box 19 and 20 G is captured in this column.

22. Net VAT Payable (Item 16B less Item 21)

The Difference of Box 16Band 21 is captured in this column.

23 A. Creditable Value-Added Tax Withheld (Sch. 7)


23 B. Advance Payments (Sch.8)


23 C. VAT withheld on Sales to Government (Sch.9)


23 D. VAT paid in return previously filed, if this is an amended return


23 E. Others


23 F. Total Tax Credit/Payment

The Total of 23A+23B+23C+23D+23E is captured in this column.

24. Tax Still Payable/(Overpayment) (Item 22 less Item 23F)

The Difference of Box 22 and 23F is captured in this column.

25A. Surcharge

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the VAT Adjustment Class and Used for as Surcharge Payable is



printed this column.


Dr. Surcharge A/c

Cr. Surcharge Payable A/c

25B. Interest

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the VAT Adjustment Class and Used for as Interest Payable is printedthis column.


Dr. Interest A/c

Cr. Interest Payable A/c

25C. Compromise

The entry made using Journal Voucher with the VAT Adjustment Class and Used for as Surcharge Payable isprinted this column.


Dr. Compromise A/c

Cr. Compromise Payable A/c

26 Total Amount

The Difference of Box 24 and 25D is captured in this column.

The Fields 27, 28, 29, 30, 31 and 32 are entered manually.

Schedule

Schedule 1:

Schedule of Sales/Receipts and Output Tax (Attach additional sheet, if necessary)

The Total of all the Sales transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification as normal sales and selecting theType of Industry is captured in the ATC column, Assessable Value is captured in Sales/Receipts for the periodcolumn and corresponding Tax amount is captured in Out put Tax due for the period column

Schedule 2:

Purchases/Importation of Capital Goods (Aggregate Amount Not Exceeding P1 Million) (Attachadditional sheet, if necessary)

The Total of all the Purchase transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification, Purchase capital goods notexceeding 1 Million Assessable Value is captured in Amount column and the corresponding Tax amount is capturedin Input Tax due for the month column.

Schedule 3:

Purchases/Importation of Capital Goods (Aggregate Amount Exceeds P1 Million) (Attach additionalsheet, if necessary)

The Total of all the Purchase Transactions made using the VAT/Tax Classification, Purchase capital goodsexceeding 1 Million- Assessable Value is captured in the Amount column and the corresponding Tax amount iscaptured in the Input Tax due for the month column.

Schedule 4:

Input Tax Attributable to Sale to Government

The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Attributable Input tax



towards to Govt is printed in this column.

The sample entry is given below. Dr. Expense A/c

Cr. Input Vat normal purchase

The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Not Attributable Inputtax towards to Govt is printed in this column.


Dr. Expense A/c


The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Standard Input Tax tosale to govt is printed in this column.


Dr. Input A/c

Cr. Expense a/c

Schedule 5:

Input Tax Attributable to Exempt Sales

i. The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for asAttributable Input tax towards Exempted Sale is printed in this column.

The sample entry is given below. Dr. Expense A/c


ii. The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as NotAttributable Input tax towards Exempted sale is printed this column.


Dr. Expense A/c


Schedule 6: Input Tax in Excess of 70% Cap

The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Input Tax adjustment isprinted in this column.

The sample entry is given below. This field remains blank.

Dr. Input Tax adjustment A/c

Cr. Input Vat

Schedule 7: Tax Withheld Claimed as Tax Credit (Attach additional sheets, if necessary)

The entry made using the Journal Voucher with Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Withholding Tax-OtherAgency is printed in this column.

The sample entry is given below:

Dr. Withholding Tax other agency A/c

Cr. Sundry Drs

Schedule 8: Schedule of Advance Payment (Attach additional sheets, if necessary)

The entry made using the Journal Voucher with Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Advance Tax Payment Madeis printed this column.


Dr. Net Vat payable A/c

Cr. Advance Tax Paid



Schedule 9: VAT Withheld on Sales to Government (Attach additional sheets, if necessary)

The entry made using the Journal Voucher with the Vat Adjustment Class and Used for as Withheld Tax Creditavailed -Govt is printed in this column.


Dr. Output Vat A/c

Cr. Tax withheld A/c

Introduction

Point of Sales is considered a one-step billing process. This means that entering the order and generating theinvoice and receipt of amount are considered to be part of the same step. This is normally used in an environmentwhere the customer is making the purchase in person and the invoicing process is part of the checkout process.



POS Invoicing in Tally

The POS (Point-of-Sales) Invoice feature allows you to create invoices at a point of sales and to collect paymentfrom your customers. POS Invoice allows you to create invoices in seconds and also print and mail the invoices.

Features of POS Invoicing in Tally

The POS Invoicing functionality in Tally is :

Simple and very user friendly.

Quick and easy to set up and use.

Facilitates faster data entry and calculations.

High speed printing of Invoices.

POS Voucher Type without a Class

To create a POS Invoice Voucher Type without Voucher Class

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Voucher Type > Create

Name: Enter the name of the new Voucher type (for e.g.: POS Invoice).

Type of Voucher: The type of voucher Sales from the predefined voucher types. Select the type of Voucher asSales from the list of Voucher Types.

Abbreviation: By default Sales text will appear in the abbreviation field. However, you can enter theabbreviation as per your requirement

Used for POS Invoicing?: On selecting the Sales voucher type from the list, “Used for POS Invoicing?” fieldappears. Set this field to YES if you wish to pass a POS Invoice.



Print Message 1 and Print Message 2: These fields can be filled with appropriate messages and they areprovided just for the User Convenience. The same will be printed at the bottom of the POS invoice in the TaxInvoice.

N o t e :

1 . Once Use POS for Invoicing field is set to Y e s in voucher type, you will not be

entitled to set this field to N O if you have passed a POS Invoice.

2 . For Information on Default Print Title, Method of Voucher Numbering, Starting

Number, Width on Numeric Part, Use Common Narration, Print after saving Voucher,

Name of Class, Restart Numbering and Prefix Details click here.

POS Voucher Type with a Class

To create a POS Invoice Voucher Type with Voucher Class:

Create a new Voucher type POS Invoice with a Voucher Class. Complete the form for creating a new VoucherType as given.

Press Enter at the Name of Class field in the Voucher type creation screen to see the following screen with theentries made.

If the different modes of payment for invoices are Gift vouchers, Credit/Debit Card Payment, payment throughCheque/DD and Cash, then the following four new default ledger accounts have to be created:

Gift Vouchers under group Sundry Debtors1.

Ledger Bank account or Bank OD/OCC (for card payments)2.

3.



1.

2.

Payment through C heque/DD , under the group Ledger Bank Accounts or Bank OD/OCC3.

Cash under group ledger Cash4.

The other entries for each item in Invoice are similar to default Sales Voucher class creation.

Creating a POS Invoice

To enter a simple transaction using a POS Invoice .

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Vouchers > Select F8

Select the POS Invoice as the Voucher type from the list of Voucher types.1.

Select the Godown , Sales Ledger and VAT/Tax Class if applicable.2.

Select the Item using the Bar code reader to scan the bar code or select the Item from the list.3.

Enter the Batch-wise details and Actual and Billed Quantity (If these features are activated in F11:Features).

4.

The Rates of the Item is picked up from Set Standard Rates screen (Stock Item Creation screen) or fromthe Price List screen.

5.

Select VAT/Tax from the list.6.

By default for the first time, the POS Invoice screen will appear in Single Mode Payment. The screen willappear as below with the Cash and Cash tendered field:

7.



7.

The Multi Mode Pymt button helps you to make the payment through other mode like Gift voucher, creditcard or by cheque. Click on the Multi Mode Pymt button, the POS Invoice will appear as:

8.

8.

Select Gift voucher from the list and enter the amount OR Select Credit/Debit Card Payment and enterthe amount and the card number OR Select the Cheque and enter the amount , Bank Name and ChequeNumber OR Select Cash ledger from the list and enter the amount to be paid. Enter the Cash Tenderedand Balance will be calculated automatically.

9.

Accept the POS Sales Invoice screen.10.

Consider the above example shown in the above screen, where Multi-mode Payment options like GiftVouchers, Credit/Debit card payment, Cheque and Cash were allowed. Here, the Customer has made apayment of Rs.1000 using a Gift Voucher and Rs.1000 is paid by Credit Card and Rs.500 by Cheque andthe remaining balance amount Rs.587.50 is paid in Cash. The Debit/Credit Card Number, Cheque paymentand the actual money tendered in cash are recorded.

Since the Customer tenders Rs.1000 in cash, the system calculates the balance amount as Rs.412.50,which is returned to the customer.

The calculation is as below:



Total amount to be paid : Rs.3087.50

Amount paid by Gift Vouchers : 1000

Amount paid by Credit/Debit Card : 1000

Amount paid by Cheque : 500

Amount paid by Cash : 587.50

Cash to be owed by the customer is Rs.3087.50, the system calculates the Amount Received – ActualBilled Amount less amount received through other mode apart from cash = Balance Amount (viz.3087.50-[1000-1000-500-587.50]=1000 = Rs.412.50 )

N o t e : If Maintain Multiple Godown feature is set to Y e s in F11: Features , you can

select only one Godown while passing a POS Invoice.

Illustrating POS invoicing for billing Pharmaceutical products

To create a POS Invoice follow the procedure given:

Set Use Security Control to Yes in Company Creation/Alteration screen and create the user login nameusing the security feature in Tally. The user who logs in to Tally with the name of the user and passwordcan print the POS Invoice with the user name.

1.

Set Maintain Batch-wise Details and Set Expiry Dates for Batches to Yes in the F11: Featuresscreen.

2.

Set Use different Actual & Billed Quantities to Yes in F11: Features screen to specify the free items.3.

Set Separate Discount column on Invoices to Yes to specify the discount on any items while making aPOS sales invoice.

4.

Create Stock Items. Place the cursor in the alias field and use the Bar Code Reader to scan and read thebar code of the Item. This code will automatically get displayed in the alias field. Select the Unit ofmeasure and Set Maintain in Batches to Yes. On setting this option you will get Track Date of Mfg andUse expiry dates set these two fields to Yes.

5.

Set Standard Rates to Yes and enter the standard selling price of the Item (Press F12: Configure buttonin the Stock Item creation screen and Set Allow Std. Rates for Stock Items to Yes). If you have specifiedthe rates in the price level then you can skip this field.

6.

Create a Voucher Typ e (e.g. POS Invoice) under Sales voucher type.7.

Press F8: Sales in the Voucher Entry screen and select the POS Invoice from the list of Voucher Types.8.

Select the Godown, Sales Ledger and VAT/Tax Class (if applicable) from the list.9.

Select the Item from the list or use the scanner to read the bar code of the item. On selecting the Itemfrom the list or by scanning, you will be prompted to enter the Batch Name in the New Number screen.Enter the Batch Name of the Item.

10.

10.

Tally prompts you to enter the Manufacturing Date and the Expiry Date as below:11.



11.

The rate of the Item entered in the Set Standard Rates (in Stock Item creation screen) or in Price Listscreen will get reflected in the rate and amount column.

12.

12.

Note: To enter details of items offered free with purchases, set Use different

Actual and Billed Qty and Allow 0 valued entries in vouchers to Y e s in F 1 1 :

F e a t u r e s .

For Example: If you buy 2 shirts and get 1 shirt free with it, while entering POS

Invoice, enter 3 shirts in the A c t u a l Column and 2 shirts in the B i l l e d Column. While

printing the Invoice, the difference in the actual and billed quantity will be shown as

F r e e in the R a t e Column.

Select VAT/Tax from the list.13.

Select Gift voucher from the list OR Select Credit/Debit Card Payment and the card number and enterthe amount OR Select the Cheque and enter the amount, Bank Name and Cheque Number .

14.

Select the Cash account and enter the cash paid by the customer at the counter. The balance amount ,which has to be paid to the customer, will be calculated automatically.

15.

Accept the POS Sales Invoice screen to save the transaction.16.



16.

Extra Features available from a POS Invoice screen are :

Single Mode/ Multi Mode Pymt: You can toggle between single and multi mode payments by clicking on theSingle Mode Pymt button. In Multi Mode the customer can choose to make his payment by Credit/Debit cards,Gift Vouchers, Cheque or Cash and have all details available on his invoice. In Single Mode only the Cashtransaction fields will be printed on the invoice.

N o t e :

* If Use Multiple Price level for Invoicing is enabled for the Item then the rates of the

Item is picked up from the price levels. Else, you can set the price of the Item in the

Stock Item creation screen using the Set Standard Rates to Yes. Enter the standard

selling price of the Item (Press F12: C o n f i g u r e button in the Stock Item creation

screen and set Allow Std. Rates for Stock Items to Y e s ).

* If you have set the rate for an Item both in Price Levels and in Set Standard Rates

(in Stock Item Creation screen), the rate is picked up from the Price List and not from

the Set Standard Rates in Stock Item creation screen.

Printing a POS Invoice

On accepting the POS Sales Invoice screen, press ALT+P or click on Print button, Tally prompts you to print.Press ALT+S or click on the Select Printer button and select the printer from the list. Currently, Tally supportSTAR TSP 600 Compatible, Epson TM T88iii Compatible and Epson TM U220 Compatible printers.

Press ALT+F or click on the Print Format to select the print mode. You can either select the Neat Mode orQuick /Draft . In Neat Mode format you will be able to preview the POS Invoice where as in Quick/Draftmode you cannot preview the POS Invoice.

Press F12 or click on F12: Configure button and set the required options:

Set Print Item Name in One Line to Yes to print the Item details in a single line. If print format isset to Neat Mode then Tally will compress the name of the Item and prints in one single line.However, if the print format is set to Quick Draft Mode then Tally truncates the text and prints inmultiple lines.

Set Print Serial No. to Yes to print the serial number.

Set Print Rate Column to Yes to print the rate column.

Print Batch Details is set to No by default, set this option to Yes , if you wish to print theManufacturing Date and Expiry Date

Set Print Card/Cheque No. to Yes to print the Card/Cheque number.

Print whole Card Number is set to No by default, which will print only last 4 digit of card number.Set this option to Yes to print the 16 digit card number on the POS Invoice.



Set Print VAT Analysis of Item to Yes to print the VAT Analysis on POS Invoice.

Set Print Narration to Yes to print the Narration on POS Invoice.

Accept the Print screen to view the POS Invoice in preview mode (Only for Neat Mode format).

The Invoice displays the company name and address, TIN, CST, Bill number, time, date, user name, serialnumber, description, quantity, rate, amount, Batch number, Expiry date, Manufacturing date, Free Item (if any),discount (if any) Vat analysis, payment mode details, balance to be paid to the customer and the print message.

POS Register

POS Register provides the list of Invoices. These Vouchers are collated and listed together for a period to givemeaningful information. Each POS Invoice is further drilled down to obtain the lowest level of information.

To view the list of POS Invoice Statement:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Accounts Books > POS Register

N o t e : POS Register option will appear, only if the option Use for POS Invoicing is

activated in Voucher Type and at least one entry is made

Press ALT+F1 or click on F1: Detailed button to view the POS Invoice in detailed format with all the tax details.



Press F12 key or click on F12: Configure button.

Set Show Inventory Details also to Yes and view List of All POS Vouchers with Inventory details.

F4: Chg Vch: This button allows you to view different voucher type within the POS Register screen. Example:

Change to Payment Register from POS Register by clicking on the F4: Chg Vch button or by pressing the F4 key.

F5: Columnar: This button allows you to select different columns for the report. For additional information referto Columnar Sales Register .

F6: Extract: Provides you with a break down of the POS Invoice vouchers and groups them to provide totals foreach group and ledger used in all POS Invoice for that period.

Click on the Print button or press ALT+P to view the POS Register in print preview mode. Press ALT+Z to zoomthe print preview screen.



N o t e : Click on P g D n to view the next page. The total balance of the first page is

carried over and brought forward to the next page.

Introduction

The Job Costing feature allows you to track cost and revenue information down to the smallest detail. Costsassociated with the planning, implementation and completion of a project or job are known as Job costs. Itincludes expenses related to labour, material purchases, subcontractor costs, as well as other costs and inventoryconsumed on projects. You track the costs/ expenses by assigning them to specific incomes received on accountof jobs/ projects.



Use of Job Costing

Job Costing is used:

To determine the true cost for each job broken down by locations

To determine the revenue and expenditure and therefore the profit associated with each job

To track overhead costs by allocating them for each job

To identify loss on projects at an early stage

Enabling Job Costing in Tally

Use the Job Costing feature in Tally to track all income and expenses for a project. Each project or job is createdas a Cost Centre. The Cost Centres and Inventory Options (Maintain Multiple Godowns) are integrated in Tally toenable Job Costing if the company maintains Accounts with Inventory. For companies that maintain AccountsOnly, the Job Costing feature cannot be enabled.

To enable Job Costing

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features > Accounting Features

In the Company Operations Alteration screen set Maintain Cost Centres and Use Cost Centre forJob Costing to Yes .

If you have more than one active Project/Job (Cost Centre) set Maintain Multiple Godowns to Yes inF11: Features > Inventory Features

Accept to save.



Tip: For Companies that maintain Accounts Only, the option Use Cost Centre for Job

Costing is disabled in F11: Features screen.

N o t e : To support Job Costing principles/Cost Centres , Tally needs to ensure that

each transaction recorded is accounted for internally with respect to all the Cost

Centres. This additional real-time processing task can potentially reduce the operating

efficiency of Tally thereby resulting in reduction of speed. This could be significant,

especially on computers unable to handle the additional computing load adequately.

Users are therefore advised to create Cost Centers and Job Costing accounts within

reasonable limits to get the optimum business benefit from the module and yet retain

the unmatched speed of the software. For more information on this topic, please

contact your nearest Tally office.

Creating Ledgers for Job Costing

Creating Ledgers for Job Costing is similar to that of other Ledgers. Refer Ledgers for additional information.

Creating Job Costing Party Ledgers

Create party accounts for our Customers under Sundry Debtors. For e.g. you can create a Ledger for a Bangalorecustomer and one for a Chennai customer. Similarly create your Suppliers under Sundry Creditors.

Creating Sales and Purchases Ledgers

Create Sales Ledgers under Sales Accounts and Purchase Ledgers under Purchase Accounts. Ensure that the fieldCost Centres are applicable? is Yes for the Ledgers you want to include in Job Costing.

Creating Income and Expenses Ledgers

Create Income Ledgers such as Project Inspection Charges etc. under Direct Income. Expense ledgers such asTransportation Charges, Project Site Rent, and so on can be created under Direct Expenses. Staff Welfare,Telephone Charges etc. can be created under Indirect Expenses as required by your project. Ensure that the fieldCost Centres are applicable? is Yes for all the Ledger Accounts you want to include in Job Costing.



Creating Cost Centres for Job Costing

You can create different Cost Centres for different projects, with each Cost Centre being treated as a Job. For e.g.you can create a Cost Centre Project-Bangalore for the on-going projects in Bangalore and Project-Chennai for theon-going projects in Chennai. Refer to Cost Centre for additional information.

To activate Job Costing

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info > Cost Centres > Create

Enter the name of the Cost Centre in the Name field

In the Under field select Primary from the List of Options

Set the option Use for Job Costing to Yes. This cost centre will then be available in the dropdown for theJob Work Analysis report

Accept to save

Note: Use for Job Costing field is set to Y e s by default for the Cost Centres created

under a Cost Centre for which Job Costing is activated.

Creating Godowns/Locations for Job Costing

Creating Godowns is very important in Job Costing. Each project is associated with a Godown. This link is providedwhile creating the Godown. Any material consumption from this Godown is taken into account as the materialconsumed for that project and will reflect in the reports.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Inventory Info > Godowns > Create

In the Godown Creation screen, Allow Storage of Materials is automatically set to Yes .

An additional field Set Job/Project Name for Job Costing is displayed. Press the spacebar in the fieldand the list of Cost Centres for which Use for Job Costing was set to yes is displayed in the List of CostCentres sub-screen.

Select the Cost Centre to which the Godown is associated.

Accept Yes to Save. Refer Create a Location for more details on Creating Godown.



Tip: The additional field Default Job Name is displayed only if Maintain Cost Centres

and Use Cost Centre for Job Costing are set to Y e s in F11: Features. Job Costing

s u p p o r t s multiple levels of Godown.

Creating Voucher Classes for Stock Journals

Stock Journal classes allow you to handle transfers from one location (Godown) to another, for companies havingMulti-Location Inventory and at least two locations/Godowns created. It also allows you to track transfer ofmaterials for consumption. Refer to Voucher Classes for Stock Journals for additional information.

Creating Stock Journal Class

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Voucher Type > Create / Alter

Select the Stock Journal Voucher from the List of Voucher Types. Enter all the fields as per yourrequirement. Refer Create a Voucher Type for more details.

To create a Stock Journal Voucher Class, enter a name in the Name of Class field.

The Class Consumption: screen is displayed. To create a class for inter-godown transfer set the optionUse Class for Inter-Godown Transfer to Yes. To create a class for consumption set the option UseClass for Inter-Godown Transfer to No. An additional option Use Class for Job Costing Consumptionis displayed. Set this option to Yes.

N o t e : If you maintain only one P r o j e c t / J o b with a single Godown, while altering the

Stock Journal Voucher Type and creating a class, the option Use Class for Inter-

Godown Transfers is not displayed. Only the option Use Class for Job Costing

C o n s u m p t i o n is displayed.



Creating Purchase Vouchers

You can enter a purchase voucher in As Voucher mode as the Cost Allocation sub-screen does not appear inthe As Invoice mode. Create a Cost Centre class before passing the entries. In the purchase entry it is notnecessary to allocate to Job Costing for Job Cost reporting.


In the Voucher Creation screen select F9: Purchase

Select As Invoice

Enter the date and reference

Select the Party to be credited from the List of Ledger Accounts in Party’s A/c name

Select the required Purchase Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts

Select an item from the Stock Items List of Items .

On selecting the Item, an Item Allocations sub screen for the selected Item appears:

Select the Godown under the Godown field and specify the quantity to be allocated under the Quantityfield.

Enter the Quantity and Rate , and the amount is automatically displayed in the Amount field.

Select the next Godown and follow the similar procedure for Item allocation .

Select the Items to be purchased.

Enter Narration if required and accept to save



Creating Sales Vouchers

Sales Vouchers can be created in Voucher or Invoice Mode

To create Sales Invoice:


In the Voucher Creation screen select F8: Sales

Select As Invoice

Select Acct Invoice


Select the appropriate Customer in the Party’s A/c Name

Enter the Despatch , Order and Buyer’s details in the sub-form that appears

Select the Sales ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts

Select the corresponding Ledger account below the Particulars field

Enter the amount in the Amount field

In the Cost Allocations sub screen, select the Cost Centre from the List of Cost Centres under the fieldName of Cost Centre and enter the amount to be allocated to that Cost Centre.

Enter narration if required and accept to save



Similarly, you can create Sales Vouchers for Project Inspection Charges, Miscellaneous Receipts etc.

Creating Payment Vouchers

To create Payment Vouchers:


In the Voucher Creation screen select F5: Payment


Select the Bank Account from where payment has to be made

Select the Ledger Account e.g. General Maintenance created under Indirect Expenses and enter theamount to be debited

The Cost Allocations sub-screen appears. If the payment has to be allocated to more than one CostCentre, select the Cost Centres and allocate the corresponding amount

In the Voucher Creation screen, enter narration if required and accept to save



Similarly you can create Payment Vouchers for Labour Charges Paid, Printing and Stationary, Staff Welfare,Telephone Charges, Transportation Charges or any other expenses that form a part of project cost.

Creating Journal Vouchers

Creating Journal Vouchers is similar to that of other vouchers. While creating Journal Vouchers, you can allocatethe amount to more than one Cost Centre in the Cost Allocations sub-screen that appears.

An example of a Journal Voucher entry is shown below:

Similarly, you can create Journal Vouchers for Labour Charges Paid, Salaries, Project Site, Rent, etc.



Creating Stock Journal Voucher (Consumption Transfer)

Create a Stock Journal voucher by selecting the Voucher Class Consumption to create a Stock Journal voucher forConsumption Transfer.

Creating Stock Journal Voucher (Inter - Godown Transfer)

To create a Stock Journal for Inter - Godown Transfer:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Inventory Vouchers

In the Inventory Voucher Creation screen, select F7: Stk Jrnl and select the Voucher Class Transfer tocreate a Stock Journal voucher for Inter-Godown Transfer.

Enter the date of the Voucher

Select the name of the Destination Godown in the Destination Godown field.

Select the Item to be transferred under the Name of the Item field. To create an Item, refer to the topicStock Items

Select the Godown where the Stock Item is currently located under the Godown field

Enter the amount to be transferred under the Quantity field. The Rate and Amount field gets displayedautomatically if the rate is specified while creating the Stock Item; else enter the rate to get the amount inthe Amount field

Similarly enter all the items to be transferred.

Enter narration if required and accept Yes to save



Two Levels of Reports

Two levels of reports are displayed in Job Costing.

Job Work Analysis1.

Material Consumption Summary2.

The Job Work Analysis report supports details of Multiple Companies, Multiple Jobs, Multiple Currencies in asingle report.

The Materials Consumption Summary report gives details of the materials consumed for that project from theparticular Project Location.

Job Work Analysis Report

To view Job Work Analysis report:

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Statements of Accounts > Job Work Analysis

The jobs for which Use for Job Costing was set to Yes in the Cost Centre Creation/Alteration screen isdisplayed in the List of Job/Project sub-screen that appears. Select the Cost Centre for which you need a JobCosting report from the list.

The Job Work Analysis screen appears as shown below:

The Job Work Analysis report supports details of Multiple Jobs in a single report. All these details are viewed asdifferent columns with the help of New Column button. The button Auto Column is also available in the report toview the period for a particular period that can be selected from the list. Refer Modify Reports for adding, deletingand altering columns.



Thus the Job Work Analysis report gives a breakup of Revenue , Cost (Expenses) with respect to materialconsumption, Direct Expenses , Indirect Expenses and Nett Profit .

N o t e : C o n s u m p t i o n is the Outwards Inventory entries of Items made in the Stock

Journal Voucher with Consumption Class enabled and the Outwards Inventory entries of

Items made with the Manufacturing Journal for a particular Project Location. All other

Outwards Inventory entries are considered as Other Transfers .

C omparing Job Work Analysis of Multiple Jobs

You can compare the job costs of two or more jobs by adding another job as a New Column . To add another jobas a new column select the button New Column on the right hand side of Job Work Analysis screen. Thefollowing screen appears.

To compare two jobs of the same company, select the same company in the Name of Company field

To compare two jobs of different companies, load the companies and select a different company in theName of Company field

Enter the period for which you like the report to be displayed in the From and To fields

Select the Job from the List of Job/Project in the Name of Cost Centre field

A new column is added to the report for the selected new job

Similarly you can compare the Job Costing of multiple companies

To view the total costs of multiple jobs as a new column, from the Job Work Analysis screen for multiple jobs,select F12: Configure and set Show Total Column to Yes . A new column Total is added to the existing reportformat and the total cost of all the jobs selected gets displayed.

There are other F12: Configure options available, which you can activate as per your requirements.



The following screen shot shows the report with Show Percentages activated

Drill down the groups under Revenue (Income) to view a break up of Job/Project. Further drilling down displaysthe Job/Project Monthly summary and Job/Work vouchers. Refer to Cost Centre Breakup report section for moreinformation.

Material Consumption Summary Report

To view the Material Consumption Summary report, scroll down to the line Consumption in Job Work AnalysisReport and press Enter . The Report Material Consumption Summary is displayed.

When multiple levels of Godowns are used, the values are displayed accordingly for each Godown Group and whenyou drill down further the values are displayed for individual Godown.



Drill down from the above report, to get a Godown summary report. This report displays Stock Items and alsoStock Groups if any.

The Stock Groups when drilled down further displays the Godown summary of that Stock Group



Additional details are displayed based on the options selected in F12: Configure .

Configure as per your requirements to get the additional fields in the report as shown below.



Introduction

Tally Payroll is integrated with Accounting to give the user the benefits of simplified Payroll processing andaccounting.

Tally Payroll enables users to set up and implement salary structures, ranging from simple to complex, as per theorganization’s requirements. You can also align and automate payroll processes and directly integrate them withmain stream accounting applications. Payroll data can be viewed as part of the existing and configurable costcentre reports for business analysis.

Tally Payroll also supports configurable formats for payslip printing; flexible salary/wage, attendance, leave andovertime registers; gratuity and expat reports.

Features of Tally Payroll

In keeping with Tally’s tradition of simplicity, strength and flexibility, Tally Payroll offers the following features tomeet the diversified requirements of small to large business enterprises.

It allows seamless integration with Tally Accounts. There are no disconnects between Payroll and Accounts.

It offers Employee Groups - unlimited classification and sub-classification of employees.

It offers Pay Structures – ease of conformity, faster entry and flexibility of non-dependence.

It offers Pay Components - user-definable earnings, deductions and others.

It offers a unique Auto-Manual payroll processing facility.

It is independent of processing period restrictions.

It offers Employee Groups, Pay structures and Pay components.

It offers a unique Auto-Manual payroll processing facility.

It allows Arrears Calculation.

It computes salary based on Attendance, Time, Unit of Production or any other criteria.

Tally Payroll helps in tracking of Loans and Advances.

It provides calculation of Gratuity.

It allows you to drill down from any summary report to detailed levels, and till the originating transaction,for a particular Pay component value.

It provides configurable report formats.

You can also process Payroll using the Multilingual feature in Tally.



Enabling Payroll in Tally

To enable Payroll in Tally

Go to Gateway of Tally > F11: Features> Accounting Features

Set Maintain Payroll to Yes

You can set More than ONE Payroll / Cost Category to Yes if you wish to process payroll for multi groupof Employees.

Four Easy Steps To Generate a Payslip



Four Easy Steps To Generate a Payslip

The new enhanced Payroll in Tally requires minimal effort for accurate processing. Setting up Pay Heads,Employee Group, Employees, Salary Details and Attendance/Production Type is now a simple process with Tally’sFour easy steps to generate a payslip.

Step 1

Create Pay Heads

The components of structured salary are created under Pay Head

Create the salary structure components in pay head. The Pay head creation in tally is very user friendly. Tallyallows creating any complex type of pay head.

Step 2

Create Employee Masters

Create an Employee master. Enter the requisite Employee Details & Employee group by grouping employeesunder the function they perform; their department or designation.

Step 3

Create Salary Details

Create the applicable Salary Details for both Employee Groups as well as Individual Employees with earnings,deductions and basis of computation.

Step 4

Process Payroll and Generate the Payslip

Pass a Payroll voucher to enter all Earnings and Deductions in payroll transactions that are paid along with theSalary Payslip for all employees

Generate the Payslip that provides employee as well as attendance details, itemises each component of theemployee’s earnings and deductions, and displays the net amount paid to him for a given pay period. It alsoprovides information to the employee as to how the net amount was arrived at.

Payroll Configuration

The Payroll Configuration can be enabled as shown below:

Gateway of Tally > F12: Configure > Payroll Configuration

In the above screen:

The option Show NI Number (for International companies only) and Show Statutory Details (forIndia/SAARC companies only) can be set to Yes to enter the NI details/ PF, ESI and PF PAN details in theEmployee details form and print the same information in the Employee Payslip.

The options, Show Passport & Visa Details and Show Contract Details, should be set to Yes as shown, todisplay the Passport, Visa and Contract Details in the Expat Reports. If these options are set to No, thenthe Expat Reports menu will not be displayed under Payroll Reports. Some of the Information related toEmployee passport such as Passport Number, Passport Expiry date, Visa Number, Visa Expiry date, ContractStart and Expiry dates will not be displayed at the creation of the Employee.



Payroll Info.

The Payroll Info. allows you to set up the employee defaults and standard payroll information with commonpayroll fields used for calculating earning and deductions.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Info.

Payroll Info:

Pay Heads

Employee Groups

Employee

Salary Details

Units (Work)

Attendance/Production Types

Voucher Types

Pay Heads

The salary components constituting Pay Structures are called Pay Heads. A Pay Head may be an earning, which ispaid to an employee, or a deduction, which is recovered from his/her salary. The value of these Pay Heads couldbe either fixed or variable, for each Payroll period.

Pay Head Type

A Pay Head is categorized as Allowances, Deductions or Reimbursements

In Tally Payroll, Pay Head types are provided in a natural language for ease of use, as follows:

Earning for Employees1.

Deduction from Employees2.

Employees Statutory deductions3.

Employer’s Statutory Contribution4.

Gratuity5.

Loans and Advances6.

Reimbursement to Employees7.

While creating the salary payable ledger you can use Not Applicable type which will be used to post appropriateaccounting entries.

Calculation Types

The Calculation of the Pay Head is based on its Calculation Type.

Tally payroll allows following calculation methods

Note: The formula defined in Calculation Type will be used for computation only while

using Payroll Auto Fill functionality in the Payroll Voucher, and not in Manual entry

mode of Payroll voucher.

The following computational models are supported in Calculation Types.

As Flat Rate

As Flat Rate is a Calculation where the value of the Pay head is a fixed amount for a period. Pro-rata will nothappen in this type of the component. (Pay Head) Examples of Flat Rate Calculation Type:

Conveyance Allowance of Rs. 800.00 per month is exempt from tax and followed by many organisation.

Fixed Loan Installment deduction amount.



On Attendance

On Attendance type of calculation is based on the attendance data where the component will get pro-rated. InTally the attendance can be of Payable days (Present) or loss of pay (Absent) type.

On Production

On Production calculation type is used to calculate the Production incentive type of Pay head. The productiondata can be entered in Attendance voucher against a Production type.

As Computed Value

As Computed Value is used if the Pay Head value is based on a dependent component. You will be able to definethe dependent component by specifying the formula or using the current sub-total or current earning or deductiontotal. You can also define the slab either by percentage to value or the combination in a slab.

Example:

HRA as 40% of Basic Salary

As User defined Value

As User defined Value allows you to manually enter the value at the time of processing the salary. This calculationtype is useful for Pay Heads that have variable values and are not related to any attendance/production data

Creating an Earning Pay Head

To create an Earning Pay Head, Basic Salary , under Indirect Expenses :

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info. > Pay Heads> Create

Enter the Name of the Earning Pay Head.1.

Select Earnings for Employees as the Pay Head Type from the List of Pay Head Types .2.

Select the respective Pay Head Group Earnings from the list for the field Unde r.3.

Select Yes from the list if you want the Pay head to affect the net salary.4.

5.



4.

The Pay Head name entered in the Name field will appear in this field. You can change the same, ifrequired. The name entered in this field will appear on the payslip.

5.

Select Flat Rate from the List of Calculation Types .6.

Select the Calculation Period Type from the list.7.

Based on the Calculation Period Type , you can select and enter the details for Per Day CalculationBasis .

8.

Select the Rounding Method from the list if applicable.9.

Accept to save the Pay Head.10.

Similarly, you can create Earning Pay Heads for HRA, Conveyance and so on..

Creating a Deduction Pay Head

To create a Deduction Pay Head, Professional Tax under Employees’ Statutory Deductions:

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Pay Heads> Create

Enter the Name of the Deduction Pay Head.1.

Select the Pay Head Type from the List of Pay Head Types .2.

Select the Group from the List of Groups .3.

Select Yes from the list if you want the Pay Head to affect the net salary.4.

5.



4.

The Pay Head name entered in the Name field will appear in this field. You can change the same, ifrequired. The name entered in this field will appear on the payslip.

5.

Select the Calculation Type from the List of Calculation.6.

On selecting the calculation type to ' As Computed Value , a new field Calculation Period appears whichwill be set to Months automatically

7.

Select On Current Earnings Total from the list to be Computed On.8.

Specify the Slab Rate .9.

Select the Rounding Method from the list if applicable.10.


Similarly, you can create a Deduction Pay Head for Provident Fund and so on.

N o t e : If you are using any Pay Head component having Calculation Type As Computed

V a l u e and Compute : On Current Earnings Total, while defining Salary Detail, the

sequence of the component has to be selected accordingly.

Creating Salary Payable Ledger

A Salary Payable account under the group Current Liabilities is used to credit the total of Net Payable salaryof all employees. When salary is disbursed, this account is debited and Cash or Bank account is credited.

To create Salary Payable Pay Head under the group Indirect Expenses :


Enter the Name of the Pay Head1.

Select Not Applicable from the List of Pay Head Types2.

Select Current Liabilities from the list3.

4.



3.

Accept to save the Pay Head4.

Creating Gratuity Pay Head

To create a Pay Head Gratuity under Current Liabilities :

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Pay Head> Create


Select Gratuity from the List of Pay Head Types2.

Enter the Slab Rate Details for Gratuity Calculation in the sub-screen3.



3.

Select Current Liabilities from the list4.


N o t e : To use the Earning Pay Head for G r a t u i t y calculation, set Use for Gratuity ?

field to Y e s in the ledger creation screen (for Pay Heads such as Basic Salary, HRA,

and so on, created under Indirect Expenses).

Employee Group

Tally allows you to set up default (common) information for employees. An Employee Group allows you to groupemployees in a logical manner.

The Salary structure can be defined at the Employee Group level. Referring to this Group as a template andchanging accordingly will ease building all your employee records on it.

For example, by department or function such as Production, Sales, Administration and so on, or by designationsuch as Managers, Supervisors, Workers and so on.



Creating an Employee Group

To create Sales as an Employee Group ,

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Employee Groups> Create (Single Group)

Enter the Name of the Employee group.

Select the group from the List of Employee Groups .

Accept to save the Employee Group.

Creating Multiple Employee Groups

You can create multiple Employee Groups in this mode.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Employees> Create (under Multiple Groups)

The Multi Employee Group Creation screen displays.

Employee

The Employee Creation screen allows you to enter basic setup information that applies to the employees. EnterGeneral Information, Payment Details and Passport & Visa Details.

Creating an Employee

Creating Single Employee

To create an Employee under the Employee group, Sales:

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info. > Employees> Create (Single Employees)

Enter the Name of the Employee , Select the Employee Group in the field Under , Enter the Date ofJoining , the Employee General Information , Payment Details , Passport & Visa Details and Acceptto save.

Creating Multiple Employees

You can create multiple Employees in this mode.

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Employees> Create (under Multiple Employee)



The Multi Employee Creation screen displays.

Salary Details

Salary Details is used to define a Pay Structure to an Employee or to an Employee Group to speed up the entry ofIndividual Employee’s Pay Structure.

Select the basic Pay Heads that applies most for your employees and create as an Employee Group. However, itis not compulsory for all employees to have the same compensation structures as of the Employee Group. Ifrequired, a Pay Head element or its value may be added, deleted or altered at Individual Employee level.

N o t e: If the slab rate is not defined in the PayHead then you will get the full value



Creating Salary Details for an Employee Group

To create Salary Details for an Employee Group , for example, Sales:

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Salary Details> Create> Select Sales from the List ofEmployees/Group

Enter the Effective From date.1.

Select the Pay Heads from the List of Pay Heads.2.

The Pay Head Type , Calculation Type and Calculated On fields display the details provided at the PayHead creation level.

3.

4.

5.

3.

Enter the User Defined values , if applicable.4.

Accept to save5.

N o t e : If you are using any Pay Head component having Calculation Type : As

Computed Value and Compute : On Current Earnings Total then while defining Salary

Detail, the sequence of the component has to be selected accordingly.

Salary Details Configuration

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Salary Details> Alter > Select Employee/ Employee Group fromthe List of Employees/Group > F12: Configure

Allow to Override Slab Percentage

Set Allow to Override Slab Percentage to No to prevent changes made to Slab Percentages. If you set it toYes , you can override the percentages already defined.

E.g. If you have defined Slab Rate for HRA as 40% in the Pay Head level, and if you wish to change the Slab Ratepercentage in the Salary details screen. Set Allow to Override Slab Percentage to Yes in Salary detailsconfiguration screen and Tally will allow you to Overridde the percentage e.g. to 50% and so on... (Metro Cities &Non Metro Cities).

Show Payhead Type

Set Show Payhead Type to Yes to display if the Pay Head is an Earning or Deduction in the Salary Detailsscreen.

Show Calculation Type

Set Show Calculation Type to Yes to display the method of calculation adopted (As Computed Value, AsUser Defined Value, Flat Rate, On Attendance or On Production) .

Show Computed On

Set Show Computed On to Yes to display the Computation Information (On Current Deductions Total, OnCurrent Earnings Total, On Current Sub Total, On Specified Formula)



Creating Salary Details for an Employee

To create Salary Details for an Employee:

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Salary Details> Create> Select the Employee from the List ofEmployees/Group

Enter the Effective From date.1.

In the Pay Head field, the Start Type list displays two options namely, Copy From Parent Value and StartAfresh .

2.

2.

If you select Copy From Parent Value , the Salary Details defined for the Employee Group to which theEmployee belongs will appear in the screen.

3.

N o t e : If the PayHead details are available in the parent group then you will get Copy

from parent value, else you will get only Start Afresh.

If you select Start Afresh , you have to select the Pay Heads from the List of Pay Heads and enter the UserDefined rates if required.

4.



Units (Work)

A Unit in Tally Payroll is similar to the Unit of Measure in Tally’s Inventory module. In Payroll, Units are used tofacilitate calculation of a Pay Head value based on Production, which in turn would be linked to Units such asTime, Work or Quantity.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Info. > Unit (Work)

Creating Units (Work)

In the Units Creation screen, select the Type of unit from the list. Select the Symbol from the list.

A Simple Unit in Tally is a single independent unit and has no relationship with other units, while a Compound Unitrefers to two Simple Units having an arithmetical relationship and is not a distinct unit.

In the case of Overtime, whose value is computed based on Overtime Hours put in by an employee, you wouldneed to define Hr – Hours and Min – Minutes as Simple Units and Hr of 60 Min as a Compound Unit and set thisunit in Overtime Pay Head.

Refer to Units of Measure for details description of Unit of Measure.



Attendance/Production Type

The Attendance / Production type is used to record the attendance and production data. Based on the component(Pay head) structure, you can define multiple attendance / production types.

Examples for attendance / production types are No. of days present or conversely, No. of days Absent andproduction based such as Hours worked, Number of Pieces produced.

Attendance/Production Type is associated with the Pay Head in employee’s Pay structure. The variable data isentered in the Attendance voucher for the payroll period.

Attendance/Production Types may also be defined in hierarchical groups whereby Types having a commonUnit are combined under logical groups.

The Attendance/Production Type may be Attendance/leave with pay, Leave without Pay (if salary is to be paidbased on number of days attended) Paid Leave, Unpaid Leave, Absent and Production type which can bebased on Piece Production, Overtime Hours, and so on.

Creating an Attendance/Production Type

Creating an Attendance/Production Type for Attendance/Leave With Pay

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Info. > Attendance/Production Types > Create

Enter the Name of the Attendance Type1.

Select Primary from the list for the field Under.2.

Select Attendance/Leave with Pay as the Attendance Type.3.

The Period Type appears automatically.4.

Accept to save the Attendance Type.5.

Similarly, you can create an unpaid Leave grouped under Leave without Pay.

Creating an Attendance/Production Type for Production

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Info. > Attendance/Production Types > Create



Enter the Name of the Attendance Type1.

Select Primary from the list for the field Under.2.

Select Production as the Attendance Type.3.

The Unit field will appear, select the appropriate type of unit from the list.4.

Accept to save the Attendance Type.5.

Similarly, you can create Box Production Attendance Type

Voucher Types in Tally Payroll

Tally Payroll provides you with Payroll, Attendance and Payment Voucher Types. You may define a template calledVoucher Class in order to automate and control usage of ledger accounts and computed values to be posted. It isa powerful and configurable option that enables you to define the rules of voucher entry for a particular vouchertype. It also helps in speeding up the process and minimises data entry for posting a voucher. However, creating aVoucher Class is not mandatory.

For more information, refer to Creating a Voucher Class for Payroll



Payroll Vouchers

In addition to the existing voucher types in Accounting and Inventory module, two new Voucher Types Attendanceand Payroll are enabled when Payroll Feature is activated in F11: Features.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Vouchers

Attendance voucher is used to record employees’ Attendance / production data for the Attendance/ProductionTypes created in Payroll Masters. Such data may be entered as a single Attendance voucher per payroll period ormultiple vouchers as and when required within a payroll period.

While generating the Payroll voucher, Tally automatically picks up required data, based on the period selected andcomputes the corresponding value of Pay Heads, which are linked to such attendance/production types.

Payroll voucher is a document to manually enter one-time/ad-hoc payroll transactions for individual employees; aswell as Payroll processing activity for all or selected employees, using Auto Fill functionality.

Payroll Buttons

If Maintain Payroll option is set to Yes in F11: Features, the Payroll Buttons will appear along with Accountsand Inventory buttons in Voucher Creation screen on the button bar.

Attendance Vouchers

Attendance voucher allows you to enter Attendance , Overtime , Leave or Production details. You can enterseparate vouchers for each day or a single voucher for a given pay period, say a month, with aggregated values.You can also enter data for one or more or all employees. Similarly, one or more attendance types together in asingle voucher.

Attendance Voucher Entry – Manual Entry

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Vouchers > F5: Attendance

Click F2: Date to change the date1.

Select the Employee from the List of Employees2.

3.



1.

2.

Select the Attendance/Production Type from the List3.

Enter the Value4.

Select End of List from the List of Employees.5.


Attendance Voucher Entry - Auto Fill

In the attendance voucher, you can use the A : Payroll Auto Fill button to speed up data entry process.

Auto Fill enables the user to fill all employees of a selected Cost Category (if more than ONE Cost Category isenabled) and/or a selected employee group and enter value data for selected type of Attendance/ProductionType for these employees.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Vouchers > F5: Attendance

Click F2: Date to enter the date.1.

Click A : Attd Auto Fill .2.

In the Attendance Auto Fill screen, select the Cost Category if applicable.3.

Select the Employee/Group from the List of Group/Employees .4.

Select the Attendance/Production Type from the list.5.

Enter the Value against the Employee name .6.

5.

6.

Accept to save the Attendance voucher .7.

N o t e : Days with Loss of Pay (LOP) are treated as a D e d u c t i b l e with respect to an

Earning Pay Head type and as a P a y a b l e with respect to a deduction component. F o r

E x a m p l e : An L O P is deducted from B a s i c salary which is an Earning Pay Head.

However, with respect to a Deduction Component such as canteen expenses, it is

treated as a payable.



Usage of Voucher Class in Tally Payroll

In some of the Tally vouchers, you may define a template called Voucher Class in order to automate and controlusage of ledger accounts and computed values to be posted. It is a powerful and configurable option that enablesyou to define the rules of voucher entry for a particular voucher type. It also helps in speeding up the processand minimises data entry for posting a voucher.

In a voucher class , you may exclude selection of inapplicable groups and/or specify applicable groups.

For example: In a Payroll voucher, you may exclude posting to ledger pertaining to groups such as Fixed Assets,Sundry Debtors/Creditors, Sale/Purchase etc., or Include groups like Indirect Expenses, Loans &Advances (Liabilities) and so on. Voucher Class in Tally Payroll helps the user to rapidly process their Payrolldata.

Voucher Class – Manual Salary

Create a voucher class to use for manual payroll entry.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Info. > Voucher Type > Alter > Payroll

Enter Manual Salary in the Name of the Class and press Enter Key.

Tally will display a sub-form for Class definition. Enter Yes, in Use Employee-wise Pay Head Allocation ?Typically, in a manual salary no particular groups are included or excluded and net payable amount of manualpayroll entries will be posted to the Salary payable ledger. Therefore, Select End of List in Exclude and Select theGroup in Include and select Salary Payable (Ledger created under Current Liabilities) account

Values for Voucher Class: Manual Entry.

Accept Class definition screen and also the Voucher Alteration screen.



Payroll Voucher

Payroll voucher is used to record Employees’ Payroll related transactions. This voucher may be used in twoways – Manual Entry and Automated Entry .

Payroll Voucher entry - Manual Salary

To create a Payroll voucher manually,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Vouchers > Payroll Voucher

Change the Voucher date .1.

Select Salary Payable from the List of Ledger Accounts .2.

3.

1.

2.

Select the Employee from the List of Employees in the field Particular3.

Select the Pay Heads and enter the appropriate values4.

Select End of List and Accept the voucher.5.

Payroll Voucher – Auto Fill

To create a Payroll Voucher using the button A : Payroll Auto Fill ,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Vouchers > Payroll voucher

Select the Ledger Account (Cash/Bank/Salary Payable) from the list1.

Click A: Payroll Auto Fill2.

Note: You can calculate the Payroll Voucher for a week or fortnight.

Enter the From and To date in the Employee Filter screen3.

Select the Employee/Group from the List of Group/Employees4.

Enter the User defined values if required5.



5.


N o t e : A single payroll voucher can be used to pass entries for upto 100 employees

efficiently. For a company with more than 100 employees, create a multiple payroll

voucher for every 100 employees.

Payroll Reports

To view Payroll Reports

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports

The Payroll Reports menu displays:

Statements of Payroll

Attendance Sheet

Attendance Register

Gratuity Report

Expat Reports



Statements of Payroll

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statements of Payroll

The Payroll Reports menu displays:

Payslip

Pay Sheet

Payroll Statement

Payment Advice

Payroll Register

Employee Ledger Breakup

Ledger Employee Breakup

Payslip

A Payslip is a document issued to an employee that itemises each component of earnings and deductions, and thenet amount paid to an employee for a given pay period. It provides visibility to an employee of how the netamount has been arrived at.

In Tally Payroll, the Payslip option of Display, Payroll reports menu provides users the facility to View the Payslip,Configure content and appearance based on the requirement and then Print the Payslip.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statement of Reports > Payslip

Configuration options in Payslip

Click on F12: Configure button in the Payslip to display a configuration sub-form, using which the user cancustomise the display/printing content and appearance of the Payslip.

The default settings for the configuration options are shown above. These options are self-explanatory. Theoptions, which are set to Yes, will become visible in the Payslip. Select No to exclude the information, which is notrequired to be on the Payslip.

Configuration options in : Pay Slip

Show Vertical Payslip - Set this option to Yes to align Deduction Part below the Earning. Set it to No to alignthem side-by-side.



Show Employee Details - Set this option to Yes to display Employee Details as entered in the employee master.

Show Passport Details - Set this option to Yes to display the Passport Details.

Show Visa Expiry Date - Set this option to Yes to display the Visa Expiry Date.

Show Attendance/Production Details - Set this option to Yes to display Attendance/Production data.

Show Attendance/Production Groups - Set this option to Yes to display grouping of theAttendance/production data as defined while Types creation.

Display Attendance/Production Type in Tail Units? - For compound units used in Attendance/ProductionType, set this flag to Yes to display value of the Attendance/Production Data in Tail unit and set the same to Noto display data in Main unit.

Show Year To Date values - Set this option to Yes to display cumulative value of attendance/production data orEarning and Deduction data for the current Financial Year.

Remove Zero Entries - Set this option to Yes to remove Earning/Deduction data with Zero value from the PaySlip

For Attendance/Production Also - Set this option to Yes to remove Attendance data with 0 values from the

Pay Slip.

Appearance of Name - You can select the appropriate appearance of name from the Name Style list.

Detailed/Condensed Button

Click on Detailed button or press ALT+F1 to view source details of individual Attendance and Pay Head values.This view displays the Attendance or Payroll vouchers from which the data is picked in the current Payslip.Voucher Number, Date and the Value of the attendance or earning or deduction value is displayed. This is usefulwhen multiple attendance/payroll vouchers are entered during the same payroll period. The user can drill down tothe corresponding voucher directly from the Payslip screen.

Click the Condensed button or press ALT+F1 again to return to the normal mode.

Period Button

By default, when you bring up the Payslip view, the Period of Payslip - Attendance and Payroll Vouchers datais set to current month, and in most cases you don’t have to change it. However, if required, you can change theperiod of data and include multiple-period payroll information to view/print a consolidated Payslip. As in all otherTally reports, there is a great flexibility in terms of Period of Payroll processing as well as in the printing of Payslip.

Employee Button

Using Employee Button (F4 Key) , you can view another employee’s Payslip from the existing Payslip displayscreen.

Printing Single Payslip

Click on Print button or Press ALT+P from the Payslip display screen to print currently displayed Payslip. Tallywill print the Payslip in the format that is configured for display.



Pay Sheet

Pay Sheet is a matrix report with category, group and employees cascading in rows, and Pay Heads appears ascolumns. The default report contains all earnings and deduction details for a given month or period with a numberof options to configure appearance of rows and columns. Format of the pay sheet report may be configured toserve as a Salary/Wage register as required by the organisation. The selection of data may be filtered for givencategory or group of employees.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statement of Reports > Pay Sheet

Configuration options in Pay Sheet report

F12: Configure button in the Pay Sheet brings up a configuration sub-form by which the user can customise the

display/printing content and appearance of the Pay Sheet report.

Show ‘Net Pay’ Column - Set this option to Yes to display the Net Payable Column.

Show Column Subtotals - Set this option to Yes to display the sub-totals of Earnings/Deduction columns.

Remove Zero Entries - Set this option to Yes to remove Earning/ Deduction data with Zero value

Show Payslip Names for Ledgers - Set this option to Yes to display the Name to Appear in Payslip,defined in Ledger, as the column headings. Setting this to No will display Ledger name.

Include Employee Groups & Categories - Set this option to Yes to display rows showing Category andGroups. Set this to No to list only employee information.

Show Category/Group Total - Set this option to Yes to display Category and Group wise Totals.

Show Grand Total - Set this option to Yes to display Grand total at the bottom of the report.

Format - You can choose either Detailed or Condensed .

Show Employee Number - Set this option to Yes to display employee number along with the Name.

Expand all levels in Detailed format? - Set this option to Yes to expand all levels and display Employeedetails. Set the same to No , to display summary report for Category/Group.

Appearance of Name - You can Select the appropriate appearance of name from the Name Style list.

Sorting Method - You can select the appropriate sorting method from the list.

Button functionalities in Pay Sheet report

Detailed/Condensed Button



Use this toggle button (F1) to quickly change the report view from detailed to summary and vice versa.

Period button

Using Period (F2) button, you can change the period for which the report is viewed. Using this functionality, youcan display the report for any period such as Day, Week, Fortnight, Month, Quarter, Half-Year or entire Year.

Employee Filter Button

Similar to Payroll and Payment vouchers, using Employee Filter button or clicking on F7 : Employee Filtersbutton, the user can quickly select employees/groups to be displayed in the pay sheet report.

F4: Change Currency:

Click on F4: Change Currency button or press F4 key to change the currency.

New Column

Use this button (ALT+C) , to add a column for any other Pay Head not part of the default Pay Slip format. Suchnew column is added on the right-hand side of the existing columns.

Alter Column

Use this button (ALT+A) , to replace an existing column in the report with a new Pay Head column. The cursorshould be positioned in the column to be replaced.

Delete Column

Use this button (ALT+D) , to delete an existing column in the report. The cursor should be positioned on thecolumn to be deleted.

Use above column buttons to customise the appearance of various Pay Heads as columns as per requirement.

Printing Pay Sheet Report

Printing of Pay sheet is done in a similar way as any other report in Tally, by Pressing ALT+P from the reportdisplay screen.

While printing the Pay Sheet report, choose an option to Increase the Line Height (for each employee line) for thepurpose of obtaining signature of employee or fixing a stamp, and use the printed report for manual salarydisbursement or any other similar purpose.

Payroll Statement

While Pay Sheet report gives you a readily available set of earning/deduction columns and format, PayrollStatement Report allows you to generate the report for a specific Pay Head/Ledger.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statement of Reports > Payroll Statement

N o t e : The button functionalities in Payroll Statement report is similar to Pay Sheet

report. Refer Pay Sheet report for more information on button functionalities.

Configuration options in Payroll Statement report



F12 : Configure button in the Payroll Statement brings up a configuration sub-form using which the user cancustomise the display/printing content and appearance of the Payroll statement report.

Remove Zero Entries : Set this option to Yes to remove Earning/Deduction data with Zero value.

Show Payslip Names for Ledgers - Set this option to Yes to pick the name entered in the Name to Appear inPayslip field in Ledger master screen. Set this option to No to pick the name entered in the Name field of theLedger master screen.

Include Employee Groups & Categories - Set this option to Yes will display rows showing Category andGroups. Setting this to No will list only employee information.

Show Category/Group Total - Set this option to Yes to display Category and Group wise Totals.

Show Grand Total - Set this option to Yes will display Grand total at the bottom of the report.

Format - Detailed or Condensed

Show Employee PF Account Number: Set this option to Yes to display employee PF Account number.

Show Employee IT PAN: Set this option to Yes to display employee IT PAN number.

Show Employee Bank Details: Set this option to Yes to display employee bank details.

Show Employee Number: Set this option to Yes to display employee number along side the Name.

Show Employee ESI Number: Set this option to Yes to display employee ESI number.

Show Employee Passport Details : Set this option to Yes to display employee passport details.

Show Employee Visa Expiry Date: Set this option to Yes to display employee Visa Expiry date.

Expand all levels in Detailed Format: Set this option to Yes to expand all levels and display Employee details.Set this option to No to display summary report for Category/Group.

Appearance of Name - Select the appropriate appearance of name from the Name Style list.

Sorting Method - Select the appropriate sorting method from the list.



Payment Advice

The payment Advice report is used to generate Payment Advice / Bank Transfer letters for a specific bank accountbased on the Salary Payment vouchers posted to the account. For more details refer to Payment Advice for BankTransfer , in the advanced usage section.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statement of Reports > Payment Advice

Click Yes to display the screen as shown

This is a default payment advice format. If you require changes specific to your bank’s requirement, contact TallyBusiness Solutions Development Services.

Payroll Register

Payroll register is a month-wise transaction summary report displaying vouchers month-wise, akin to DisplayStatistics in the accounting module. Though the register primarily displays Payroll vouchers, you can customise toadd any other voucher type by adding a new column.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statement of Reports > Payroll Register

Press F12: Configure button and set the Appearance of Names and the Periodicity to use as shown



You can drill down to a List of Payroll Voucher reports for a month and then to a specific voucher, if required.

Employee Pay Head Breakup

This report is similar to a Payroll Statement for a selected Pay Head / Ledger, with a difference that, in this report,opening balance, credit/debit transaction and closing balance for the selected period would be displayed ascolumns.

Refer to Track Loans and Advance balances for an example of usage of this report.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statement of Payroll > Employee Pay HeadBreakup

N o t e : Refer to Account Reconciliation Statement section for additional information on

F 1 2 : C o n f i g u r a t i o n screen.

You can drill down to Employee Summary report, from the Employee Ledger Breakup report.



From Employee Ledger Breakup report you can drill down to a Monthly Employee Summary report.

From Employee You can further drill down to Employee Voucher s screen.



Ledger Employee Breakup

This report displays a group wise summary of the transactions and Closing balance for selected employee. Drilldown to specific ledger of the group, the month wise summary and up to voucher, is available in this report.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statement of Reports > Ledger EmployeeBreakup

Select the Employee from the list to view the ledger breakup of a particular employee.



N o t e : Refer to Account Reconciliation Statement section for additional information on

F 1 2 : C o n f i g u r a t i o n screen.

You can drill down to Breakup of Employee report, from this report.

Drill down further to view the Ledger Monthly Summary report and the Employee Voucher report.



Attendance Sheet

The Attendance Sheet report is similar to Pay Sheet report, and displays a pre-formatted report with columns,related to your attendance/production data.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Attendance Sheet

Configuration options in Attendance Sheet report

Configuration button, F12 in the Attendance Sheet, brings up a configuration sub-form by which the user cancustomise the display/printing content and appearance of the Attendance Sheet report.

Include Group Attendance/Production Types - Set this option to Yes to Include GroupAttendance/Production Types in Attendance Sheet report.

Display Attendance/Production Types in Tail Units?- Set this option to Yes to display theAttendance/Production Types in Tail Units.

Refer Pay Sheet Section for more information on other fields.



Attendance Register

This report is similar to Payroll register and displays the summary report of the Attendance vouchers. Theconfiguration and button functionality are the same as in other Payroll Register reports.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Attendance Register

Press F12: Configure button and set the Appearance of Names and the Periodicity to use as shown:

Gratuity Report

Gratuity is a statutory benefit to the employees who have rendered continuous service for at least five years. Thegratuity benefit is payable on cessation of employment either by resignation, death, retirement or termination.The last drawn basic salary is taken as the basis for the calculation.

For Example : In India, As per statute, he/ she is eligible for 15 days pay for each completed year of servicethough the employer can also structure a gratuity benefit that is higher

Gratuity payment is a statutory liability for an organization and tends to increase as the salaries and tenure ofemployment increase annually.

The Gratuity Summary report provides comprehensive information about the Employee’s Gratuity Eligible Salaryand the Total Gratuity amount that is liable to be given to the employees.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Gratuity Report

It displays a summary of all the Employee names along with their Date of Birth, Date of Joining the Organisation,as well as the Gratuity Eligible Salary and the Total Gratuity liability as on date.

You can drill down in the screen shown to view the Gratuity details.

Button Functions in Gratuity Report:

F4: Change Currency:

Click F4: Change Currency button or press F4 key to change the currency.



F5: Employee Wise

Click F5: Employee Wise or press F5 to view the Employee wise Gratuity Report

F7 : Employee Filters

Click F7: Employee Filters or press Ctrl+F7 to filter the cost category wise and Employee/Group wise details inGratuity Report

After you enter the Employee filter details the screen appears as below



Click F12: Configure button from Gratuity Report screen to display four options namely Show EmployeeNumber, Show Date of Birth, Show new joinees only and Show Deactivated Employees.

The option Show Employee Number? is set to No by default. You can set this option to Yes so that the Reportdisplays the Employee number. The option Show Date of Birth? is set to Yes by default.

The Last two options Show new joinees only and Show Deactivated Employees are set to No by default. Ifthe option Show new joinees only is set to Yes , then Gratuity Summary of all the new employees will bedisplayed i.e. the details of the employees whose date of joining lies between the From Date and To Date of theReport is displayed.

Similarly, if the Option Show Deactivated Employees is set to Yes , the details of the Employees who have

been deactivated are displayed.

N o t e :

* When the option Show new joinees only? is set to Y e s , the user will not be able to

move to the next option and the report will be displayed immediately with the

corresponding details. If the option Show new joinees only? is set to N o, the option

Show Discontinued Employees? can be set. When the details of D i s c o n t i n u e d

E m p l o y e e s are displayed, you will get additional information in the form with Date of

L e a v i n g along with the existing details.

* When both the options are set to N o, the details of all the employees are displayed.



Expat Reports

The Expat reports provide comprehensive information about foreign nationals who are employed (as both regularas well as contract employees) on short/long work assignments in your company. It displays all the relevantinformation such as Passport/Visa/Contract Expiry dates along with the date of joining with respectivePassport/Visa numbers and so on... both at an individual employee level as well as at the group level.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Expat Reports

The Expat Repor ts are further divided into three sub reports. They are:

1. Passport Expiry

2. Visa Expiry

3. Contract Expiry

Each of the above mentioned reports have been discussed in detail further.

Passport Expiry:

This report provides all the relevant information about the Passport of an Employee such as Passport number,Country of Issue, Passport Expiry date and other details such as the Employee’s date of joining the organisationand the contact information of the employee in the form of Email address.

To view the Passport Expiry report

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Expat Reports > Passport Expiry

Individual Employee/Group Employee passport expiry details can be obtained by clicking/selecting Ctrl + F7 orF7 : Employee Filters on the button bar. On selecting this, a list displays prompting you to select either anemployee or their groups. You can drill down for further details.

F12: Configure

Click F12: Configure button or press F12 key to set the configuration as shown



N o t e : F12: Configure screen in Expat Reports i.e. for Passport Expiry, Visa Expiry

and Contract Expiry is the same as shown above.

Show All Employees: Set this field to Yes to view all the employee passport details.

Show Expiry in days: Set this field to Yes to enter the expiry days.

Expiry in next n days: To get the passport expiry details for the next n days, enter the number of days in thisfield. ‘0’ will denote the current date (last voucher entry date).

Show Employee Number: Set this field to Yes to display the Employee Number in the report.

Appearance of Name: Select the name style from the list.

Sorting Method: Select the Sorting Method from the list. You can sort the employee details based on theEmployee Number, Passport Expiry date in ascending or descending order.

Show Employee Email Id: Set this to Yes to view the email id.

Show Deactivated Employees: Set this to Yes to view all the employees along with the deactivated employees.

N o t e :

* On setting Show All Employees to Y e s, Tally displays all the employee details,

which includes both the expired and not expired passport details.

* On setting Show All Employees and Show Expiry in days to N o, Tally filters only

those employee passports, which are to be expired.

* On setting Show All Employees to N o and if Show Expiry in days is set to Y e s ,

then you will get the Expiry in next n days field, on entering the number of n days,

Tally will filter the passport which will be expired within the stipulated period (number

of n days).

On entering all the above details in F12: Configure screen, the Passport Expiry report will appear as shown

Visa Expiry:

This Report is similar to Passport Expiry Report and provides all the relevant information related to Employee suchas Visa Number, Visa Expiry Date and other details such as Employee’s date of joining the Organisation andhis/her contact details.

To view the Visa Expiry report

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Expat Reports > Visa Expiry



Select F2: Period to view the Visa expiry details of all the employees. Individual Employee/Group Employee Visaexpiry details can be obtained by clicking/selecting Ctrl + F7 or F7 : Employee Filters on the button bar. Onselecting this, a list displays prompting you to select either an employee or their groups. You can drill down forfurther details.

Contract Expiry:

This report primarily provides useful information about the Contracted Employees. All the relevant informationabout the Contract Employee such as the Work Permit Number, Contract Start and Expiry Date along with someadditional details such as Employee’s date of joining the Organisation and Email address are captured anddisplayed.

Select F2: period button to view all details of the report. Click/Select Ctrl + F7 or F7 : Employee Filters toview the details of an individual employee or group.

You can also alternatively view the Employee Contract Expiry details individually, by clicking F5: Employee wiseon the button bar.



Payroll with Provident Fund

Payroll in Tally supports the computation of Provident Fund, its deductions and accounting. You can process the PFin any one of the following ways:

PF process using a single payroll voucher1.

PF process using separate payroll vouchers2.

PF process using voucher class3.

Creating a Ledger for PF Payable


Enter the name (Eg: Employer PF Payable ) in the Name field1.

Select Current Liabilities in the Under field2.

Creating a Pay Head for Employee's Contribution to PF

To create a Pay Head, Employee’s PF @ 12%

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Info > PayHeads > Create


Select Employee’s Statutory Deductions as the Pay Head Type from the List of Pay Head Types2.

Select Current Liabilities for the field Under3.

Select Yes if you want the Pay head to affect the net salary.4.

Specify the Pay Head Name to appear on the Payslip5.

On selecting the calculation type to 'As Computed Value' , a new field Calculation Period appears whichwill be set to Months automatically

6.

Select Normal Rounding for Rounding Methods7.

Set the Rounding Limit to 18.

9.

10.



8.

Select On Specified Formula for Computation9.

Select the appropriate Pay Head for Specified Formula10.

Enter the Slab Details in the table, as applicable11.


Creating Pay Heads for Employer’s Contribution to PF

The employer’s contribution to PF is divided into Employers PF @ 8.33% and Employers PF @ 3.67% forwhich separate Pay Heads are created.

Employer’s PF @ 8.33%

To create a Pay Head , Employer’s PF @ 8.33%



Select Employer’s Statutory Contributions as the Pay Head Type from the List of Pay Head Types2.

Select Employer’s PF Contributions for the field Under3.

Select No, if you do not wish the payhead to affect in the net salary.4.

Select As Computed Value from the List of Calculation Types5.




Select Basic for the Specified Formula9.

Select the appropriate Pay Head for Specified Formula10.



12.

Employer’s PF @ 3.67%

To create a Pay Head, Employer’s PF @ 3.67%




Select Employer’s PF Contributions for the field Under3.

Select No, if you do not wish the payhead to affect in the net salary.4.



7.

8.



6.



In the Compute: On Specified Formula sub screen, Select Employee’s PF @ 12% . In the next line,under the Function field, select Subtract Pay Head from the list Additional Computations for andselect Employer’s PF Contr. @ 8.33%

9.



N o t e : Employer’s Contribution to PF @ 3.67% is calculated on the amount arrived at

after subtracting Employer’s PF Contr. @ 8.33% from Employee’s PF @ 12%


Creating Ledgers for Administrative Charges – PF, Deposit Linked Insurance (DLI) and Employee’sDeposit Linked Insurance(EDLI)

Administrative Charges for PF @ 1.1% , DLI @ 0.5% and EDLI @ 0.01% are paid by the employer from timeto time for every employee employed by him. Since the above charges are paid by the employer, they do notappear as part of the CTC. They are created as ledgers and a liability entry should be passed for all of them.



PF Process using a single payroll voucher

In this case, you can book the PF employer contribution payable (Expense) and PF employer contributionpayable (Deduction) in a single payroll voucher.

Creating an Employer Contribution Voucher


Press ALT+A (Payroll Auto Fill) and select 1-4-2006 for From and 30-4-2006 for To , the Primary CostCategory in Cost Category and Sales in Employee Group respectively.

1.

1.

Payroll Voucher is processed with Employees and Employer Contribution with employer contributiondeduction (current liability) details.

Payments of PF

In order to account the Employees and Employer Contribution details of an employee, enter the Paymentvoucher as shown below.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounting Voucher > F5: Payment

Change voucher date to 30-April -2006 using F2: Date button.1.

2.

3.



1.

Click on Payroll Auto-Fill or Press CTRL+F7 to bring up Employee Filters pop-up.2.

Select appropriate employee group or employee (E.g. All Items ) and Salary Payable in the PayrollLedger.

3.

Tally will fill the Payment voucher with employee wise salary unpaid/outstanding in the Salary Payableaccount . The actual amount paid/payable to each employee may be modified if required.

4.

Accept and save the voucher.5.

Payment of PF Employer’s Payable


Change voucher date to 30-April-2006 using F2: Date button.1.

Select the Bank account from the list2.

Select the appropriate PF Employer’s Payable payhead from the list, Tally displays the EmployeeAllocation for: sub-form to allocate the PF Employer’s payables.

3.

Select the Employee from the list and enter the PF Employer’s Payable amount.4.


To View the Monthly PF Employer’s Payable Statement



After the Employer contribution voucher has been posted,

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statement of Payroll > Payroll Statement

Select Ledger account for PF Employer’s Payable @ 3.67%1.

Press F2 and Select the period for the Payroll Statement2.

N o t e : You can click on New Column button or Press A L T + C and select all appropriate

Employer Contribution ledgers in the required order.

To view the Employee Breakup of PayHead

Go to Display > Payroll Reports > Statements of Payroll > Employee Pay Head Breakup

Select PF Employer’s Payable @ 8.33%1.

2.

1.

Select Sales in the Primary Cost Category2.


Similarly, you can view the Employee breakup of Payhead for PF Employer’s Payable @ 3.67%



PF process using separate payroll vouchers

You can book the PF employer contribution payable ( Expenses) along with the salary process andsubsequently book the current liability for PF contribution separately.

Creating a Payroll Voucher


Press CTRL+F4 and select voucher class Salary Process .1.

Press ALT+A (Payroll Auto Fill) and select 1-5-2006 for From and 31-5-2006 for To , the PrimaryCost Category in Cost Category and Sales in Employee Group/Employee respectively.

2.

3.



Creating a PF Process Voucher


Press CTRL+F4 and select voucher class PF Process1.

Press ALT+A (Payroll Auto Fill) and select 1-5-2006 for From , 31-5-2006 for To , select the Employeefrom the list.

2.


4.



3.


Payments to Employee

In order to account the salary payment to employee, enter the Payment voucher as shown below.


Change voucher date to 31-May -2006 using F2 : Date button.1.

Click on Payroll Auto-Fill or Press CTRL+F7 to bring up Employee Filters pop-up2.

Select the Bank account from the list.3.

Select Salary Payable from the list.4.

Select appropriate employee group or employee (E.g. All Items)5.

Tally will fill the Payment voucher with employee wise salary unpaid/outstanding in the Salary Payableaccount. The actual amount paid/payable to each employee may be modified if required.

6.

6.


Payment of PF Employer’s payable account.


Change voucher date to 31-May-2006 using F2: Date button1.

Select the Bank account from the list2.

Select the appropriate PF Employer’s [email protected]% payhead from the list, Tally displays the EmployeeAllocation for: sub-form to allocate the PF Employer’s payables

3.

Select the Employee from the list and enter the PF Employer’s Payable amount.4.

Select the appropriate PF Employer’s [email protected]% payhead from the list, Tally displays the Employee5.

6.



4.

Allocation for: sub-form to allocate the PF Employer’s payables5.

Select the Employee from the list and enter the PF Employer’s Payable amount6.


To View the Monthly PF Contribution Statement



Select Ledger account for PF Employer’s Payable @ 3.67%1.

Press F2 and select the period for the Payroll Statement2.

1.

2.





Select PF Employer’s Payable @ 8.33%1.



Similarly, you can view the Employee breakup of Payhead for PF Employer’s Payable @ 3.67%



PF process using voucher class

Tally Payroll provides you with Payroll, Attendance and Payment Voucher Types you may define a template calledVoucher Class in order to automate and control usage of ledger accounts and computed values to be posted. It isa powerful and configurable option that enables you to define the rules of voucher entry for a particular vouchertype. It also helps in speeding up the process and minimises data entry for posting a voucher.

You can book the PF contribution using the Voucher Class

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Info. > Voucher Types > Alter

In a Voucher Class , you may exclude selection of inapplicable groups and/or specify applicable groups.

For example: In a Payroll voucher, you may exclude posting to ledger pertaining to groups such as Fixed Assets,Sundry Debtors/Creditors, Sale/Purchase etc., or Include groups like Indirect Expenses, Loans &Advances (Liabilities) and so on. Voucher Class in Tally Payroll helps the user to rapidly process their Payrolldata.

Values for Payroll Class: Employer’s Process

Select End of List for Exclude these Groups1.

Select Employer’s PF Contributions for Include these Groups2.

Select the Ledger Employer’s Payable for Ledger to use3.

Accept and Save changes4.

4.



Press CTRL+F4 and select voucher class Employer’s Process .1.

Press ALT+A (Payroll Auto Fill) and select 1-4-2006 for From and 30-4-2006 for To , the Primary CostCategory in Cost Category and Sales in Employee Group respectively.

2.



2.

Payroll Voucher is processed with Employer Contribution details .

To View the Monthly PF Contribution Statement



Select Ledger account for Employer’s PF Contr. @ 3.67% .1.

Press F2 and Select the period for the Payroll Statement2.

2.





Select Employer’s contri. @ 8.33%1.





Similarly, you can view the Employee breakup of Payhead for Employer’s Contri. @ 3.67%

Payroll with ESI

Tally Payroll supports the computation, deduction and accounting of ESI for filing monthly and annual returns.

Creating Accounting Group, Ledgers and Pay Heads

Creating a Pay Head for Employer’s ESI @ 4.75%




Select Employer’s ESI @ 4.75% for the field Under3.

Select Yes if you want the Pay head to affect the net salary4.

Specify the Pay Head Name to appear on the Payslip5.



Set the Rounding Limit to 0.058.

Select On Current Earnings Total for Computation9.





11.

Creating a Pay Head for Employee ESI @ 1.75%



Select Employee’s Statutory Deductions as the Pay Head Type from the List of Pay Head Types2.

Select Employee ESI @ 1.75% for the field Under3.

Select Yes, if you want the Pay head to affect the net salary4.



Set the Rounding Limit to 0.057.

8.

6.

7.

Select On Current Earnings Total for Computation8.



Creating a Voucher Class- ESI Process.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Info. > Voucher Types > Alter

Values for Payroll Class: ESI Process

Select End of List for Exclude these Groups1.

Select Employer’s ESI Contributions for Include these Groups2.

3.

4.



2.

Select the Ledger Employer’s Payable for Ledger to Use3.

Accept and Save changes4.



Press CTRL+F4 and select voucher class ESI Process .1.

Press ALT+A (Payroll Auto Fill) and select 1-4-2006 for From , 30-4-2006 for To , the Primary CostCategory in Cost Category and Sales in Employee Group respectively.

2.

2.

Payroll Voucher is processed with Employer Contribution details .

To View the Monthly ESI Contribution Statement


Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports > Statements of Payroll > Pay Sheet

Press F2 and Select the period for the Pay Sheet1.



Increments and Arrears Processing

Salary of employees that get revised periodically to a higher salary is known as Increment. When such incrementis given retrospectively, it amounts to calculation and payment of arrears. Tally Payroll supports such revisionboth as prospective change and also as retrospective change.

Consider a scenario where ABC Company revises the salary on 1-7-2006 for the employees with effect from 1-5-2006 .

To specify the revised salary details for Employee A whose Basic Salary has increased by Rs. 2000 :

Go to Gateway of Tally> Payroll Info.> Salary Details> Create> Select Employee A from the List ofGroups/Employees

1.

2.



Enter 1-5-2006 as the Effective From date1.

Select Copy From Previous Value from the Start Type2.

Enter 12000 as the Rate against the Pay Head Basic Salary3.

A ccept to save the changes made.4.

Create a Payroll Voucher for Employee A for the period 1-5-2006 to 31-7-2006 .

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Voucher

Select the Account from the List of Ledger Accounts1.

Click A: Payroll Auto Fill .2.

2.

Enter the From and To date in the Employee Filters screen3.

In the Employee/Group field, select the Employee from the List of Group / Employees4.

Select the Payroll Ledger from the List of Ledger Accounts .5.

A ccept to save the Payroll Voucher6.



6.

To view the Payslip generated for Employee A for the period 1-5-2006 to 31-7-2006

Go to Gateway of Tally> Display> Payroll Reports> Statements of Payroll> Payslip> Select Employee Afrom the List of Employees

Notice that the payment of arrears has been made for the employee with effect from 1-5-2006 .

N o t e : If a company decides to revise salaries with effect from 1-4-2006, the Pay Heads

can be altered from the Salary Details screen for the existing effective date 1-4-2006

thus overriding the previous effect.

Loan Management in Tally Payroll

Tally Payroll supports recovery and tracking of outstanding Loans or Advances given to the employees from theirsalary. After you implement Tally Payroll in your organization, you can set up and follow the process describedbelow for new loans/ advances to be given.

Generally, an Advance is recovered fully from the subsequent salary payment and Loan is recovered in a numberof Installments of Fixed deduction amount.

Creating Loan to Employee Pay Heads

To create a Deduction Pay Head, Loan to Employee under Loans & Advances (Asset)


1.

2.



Enter the Name of the Deduction Pay Head.1.

Select Loan & Advances as the Pay Head Type from the List of Pay Head Types.2.

Select the respective List of Groups for the field Under.3.

Select Yes from the list if you want the Pay head to affect the net salary.4.

Specify the Pay Head name to appear on the Payslip.5.

Select Flat Rate from the List of Calculation Types .6.

Select Calculation period form the list of Calculation Period7.

Select Per Day from the list Calculation Basis .8.

Set the Rounding Methods to Not Applicable9.


Payment of Loans / Advances

In order to account the Loan payment to an employee, enter the Payment voucher as shown below.

Payment of Loan


Select Not applicabl e in the Class.1.

Change voucher date to 31-May-2006 using F2: Date button.2.

Debit Festival Loan with an amount of 10000.00, Tally displays a sub-form to allocate this debit to a costcentre.

3.

5.

Select Employee A and accept the sub-form.5.

Credit Cash account and accept the voucher.6.

If you are using the Single entry mode of Payment voucher, then select Cash account

in the voucher header and select Festival Loan from the List of Ledgers .

Loan Instalment in Pay Structure

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Info > Salary Details > Alter

Select Employee A from the list.1.

Navigate through the existing pay structure till the end.2.

3.

4.



2.

Add new Pay head Festival Loan with Calculation type Flat Rate .3.

Select End of List to exit from the current Pay Structure.4.

Pay Heads of previous pay structure are copied.5.

At end of the new structure, add new Pay Head, Festival Loan with Calculation type Flat Rate, and enterLoan Installment amount, 1000.00 in the Rate field.

6.

Accept and save the Changes7.

When a Loan is to be recovered in Multiple Fixed Installments, it is added to an

Employee’s Pay Structure with Calculation Type Flat Rate.

When all Installments for an Employee loan has been recovered/deducted, you need to

alter the Pay Structure from next effective payroll date and either remove the Pay Head

or set the Value basis to Zero.

Payroll Voucher for Loan

Go to Gateway of Tally > Payroll Vouchers

Change the voucher date to 31-7-2006 .1.

Select voucher class Salary Process , and Auto-fill for period 1-5-2006 to 31-5-2006 and select thegroup as Employee A .

2.

Observe that Festival Loan appears as new Pay Head for Employee A.

Track Loans and Advance balances

Go to Gateway of Tally > Display > Payroll Reports >Statement of Payroll> Employee LedgerBreakup

1.



Select Festival Loan1.

As per your requirements you can configure the appearance of this report and also combine multipleloans/advances ledgers into same report.

Stopping Loan Instalment deductions

When the entire loan is recovered through deduction of Installment, you can modify the employee master, eitherby setting the value basis of the loan Pay Head to Zero or by creating a new pay structure effective fromsubsequent payroll period and removing the loan Pay Head.

Printing Multiple Payslips

U sing Multi-Payslip Printing option you can configure the print format of the Payslip, and print for selectedperiods and employee groups.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Multi-Account Printing > Multi-Payslip Printing

It will display the following Print configuration screen; with all Payslip configuration parameters as set in the viewPayslip report configurations. However, as per your requirement you can modify these settings by selecting No inthe Print option.

The Format of a Printed Payslip will appear as below if the country details is set to India/SAARC in F12: Generalscreen:



Salary Disbursement

Once the payroll is processed, disbursement of the salary may be carried out using one of the following processes.

Payment Voucher

Payment voucher is a Tally accounting document, Crediting to cash or bank account and Debiting to any Expense,Party or Asset/Liability account. In the context of Payroll the employees are paid, against their Salary credited inthe Salary Payable account during the Payroll Voucher entry.

Similar to Payroll Voucher, entry of Payment voucher can also be automated using the Voucher Class – oneseparate class for - crediting to Cash or a Specific bank ledger account.

In other words to support both, Cash and Cheque or bank transfer mode of salary disbursement one needs tocreate separate voucher class for each of them, and also one separate class for each bank account, if multiplebank accounts are to be used.

In order to make salary payment by Cheque, separate payment voucher for each employee should be entered.

For cash disbursement both options, either to create separate vouchers or a consolidated voucher, are supported.For disbursement through a bank transfer a single consolidated payment voucher for a bank account, is possible.

Salary Disbursement through Bank Transfer

Create Salary Ledger under Bank Account Group.1.

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Ledger > Create

Accept and Save the new Ledger Account

2. Create Salary Bank Transfer Voucher Class

Go to Gateway of Tally > Accounts Info. > Voucher Type > Alter > Payment

Add new voucher class Salary Bank Transfer

Do not specify any group in Exclude or Include parts

Select Bank Account – Salary



3. Salary Payment Voucher Entry

Go to payment voucher entry, Press F5 and select voucher class “Salary Bank Transfer ”

Click on Payroll Auto-Fill or Press CTRL+F7 to bring up Employee Filters pop-up.

Select appropriate employee group or employee (E.g. All Items ) and Salary Payable in the PayrollLedger.

Tally will fill the Payment voucher with employee wise salary unpaid/outstanding in the Salary Payableaccount. The actual amount paid/payable to each employee may be modified if required.

4. Accept and save the voucher.

Note:

In the event, when cash disbursement is done prior to payment voucher entry, after the auto-fill, unpaidsalaries may be removed by making the payable amount Zero, in this voucher.

Such unpaid salary will remain as outstanding in Salary Payable account and may be auto-filled in Paymentvoucher as and when the actual payment is made.

In the event, where you want to make disbursement by Cheque, select individual employee in the Auto-filland create separate payment voucher for each, later printing the Cheque from each payment voucher.



License Agreement

Read this section before using the product

Software License Agreement

TALLY 9

This is a legal agreement between yourself, the lawful purchaser of the software described hereunder, hereinafterreferred to as the LICENSEE on the one part and Tally Solutions FZ-LLC, hereinafter referred to as the COMPANYon the other part. By installing the software described below, the Licensee agrees to be bound by the terms of thisagreement. If you, the Licensee, do not agree to the terms of this agreement, promptly return the complete andundamaged software packet along with the accompanying items (including written materials, binders, brochuresetc) to the place from where the software was purchased for a full refund of price paid.

GRANT OF LICENSE: The COMPANY grants to the LICENSEE a non exclusive right to use the accompanyingsoftware program, TALLY 9 hereinafter called the SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is in ‘use’ on a computer when it isloaded into temporary memory (that is RAM) or it is ‘installed’ into permanent memory (example, Hard Disk, CD-ROM Disk, or any other storage device on the computer). The SOFTWARE may be used on a single computer (forthe Single User edition of the SOFTWARE) or on a Local Area Network (LAN) Server (for the Unlimited Multi UserEdition of the SOFTWARE) for use on any one or more nodes connected directly to the LAN server forsimultaneous use by more than one user. This is the only situation under which more than one user can use theSOFTWARE simultaneously. The SOFTWARE may be freely moved from one computer to another belonging to theLICENSEE. The LICENSE is granted only for the use of the LICENSEE. The LICENSEE shall not rent, lease, orotherwise transfer this SOFTWARE and the rights to use the SOFTWARE.

INTELLECLTUAL PROPERTY & COPYRIGHT: The SOFTWARE is owned by Tally Solutions FZ-LLC and isprotected by Copyright Laws of UAE and International Treaty Provisions relating to protection of all IntellectualProperties. Therefore, the Licensee must treat this SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted and intellectualproperty material (e.g. a book or musical recording). The Licensee shall not copy the SOFTWARE and/orwritten materials accompanying the SOFTWARE.

LIMITED WARRANTY AND REMEDY

WARRANTY: There is a limited warranty from the Company that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially inaccordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of 90 (ninety) days from the date of purchaseand that the medium on which the SOFTWARE is supplied, will be free from defects in materials and workmanshipunder normal use and service for a period of 90 (ninety) days from the date of purchase. WARRANTY is voidunless the purchase of the SOFTWARE is from authorized vendors in the geographical territory of the LICENSEE,or from the COMPANY. WARRANTY is applicable if, and only if, the licensee has completed the activation processby logging in the serial number and the key for the software, and the registration information of the licensee hasbeen received and acknowledged by the COMPANY. Otherwise the WARRANTY shall not apply.

NO OTHER WARRANTY: The COMPANY and all its suppliers disclaim all other warranties, whether expressed orimplied, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose,with regard to the SOFTWARE and the accompanying written materials.

LICENSEE’S REMEDIES: The COMPANY and its suppliers’ entire liability and Licensee’s exclusive remedy shall beat the option of the COMPANY, either (a) refund of the price paid on the return of the SOFTWARE to the supplierand giving the proof of having uninstalled the activation license, or (b) repair or replacement of the SOFTWAREthat does not meet LIMITED WARRANTY of the COMPANY, and which is returned to the supplier with a copy of theproof of purchase (such proof of purchase being either the original invoice or receipt of the supplier). The LIMITED

WARRANTY is void if the failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from virus, any other software or process on thecomputer of the LICENSEE, improper use, accident, theft, abuse or misapplication of the SOFTWARE. Any replacedSOFTWARE will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or 30 (thirty) days whichever islonger.

NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES: The COMPANY and its suppliers under no circumstancesshall be liable for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, damages for loss of business profit,business interruption, loss of business information, or any other monetary or non-monetary loss) arising out ofthe use or the inability to use this SOFTWARE, even if the COMPANY has been advised of the possibility of suchdamages.

DISPUTE RESOLUTION AND JURISDICTION

All disputes between the parties connected with the terms of this agreement, or the use or inability to use theSOFTWARE or any other services of the COMPANY, related to the SOFTWARE, shall be subject to arbitration of aperson to be appointed by the COMPANY, and the decision of the arbitrator will be binding on all parties as perapplicable statutes. The arbitration proceedings shall be conducted in English and place of arbitration shall beSingapore. All proceedings shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws prevailing in Singaporeand only competent courts within Singapore shall have jurisdiction to adjudicate the same.

If you have any questions or clarifications concerning this LICENSE, please contact in writing:

CUSTOMER SERVICE CELL

C/o Tally (India) Pvt. Ltd.,

331-336, Raheja Arcade, Koramangala,

Bangalore – 560 095

INDIA.

(Please quote your Tally 9 serial number in all correspondence or contact with the COMPANY concerning theSOFTWARE)

